Month: September 2013

  • The Politics of Ontology

    John Garrison

    JohnSF@gmail.com

     

    Review of: Judith Butler, Undoing Gender. New York: Routledge, 2004.

     

    Judith Butler’s Undoing Gender offers her latest thinking on a variety of issues related both to gender and also to the larger idea of becoming “undone.” In this volume, Butler goes beyond her earlier examinations of gender performativity to explore what defines humanness. Butler’s consideration of that defining process offers new insights into issues pertinent to both feminist and queer theorists. More importantly, however, the essays in this volume have practical implications for social movements; make new connections between discourse and knowledge; and offer an important re-consideration of the current state of the study of philosophy.

     

    The book collects eleven essays, many of which are revised versions of papers that have appeared in journals and anthologies during the past few years. The diverse contexts from which these papers are drawn make for lively and evocative reading. Indeed, this volume opens a variety of new lines of inquiry into the broader applications of Butler’s thinking for both scholars and activists. Undoing Gender comes at a time when Butler’s work is widely read outside of Gender Studies disciplines and is beginning to pursue a wider breadth of philosophical investigation. During the past ten years, Butler, the Maxine Eliot Professor of Rhetoric, Comparative Literature, and Women’s Studies at the University of California, Berkeley, has come to be a prolific writer and speaker, with a much more visible position within academia than at the time she wrote what is perhaps her most well-known book, Gender Trouble.

     

    What is exciting about Undoing Gender‘s central analysis of gender is that it directly addresses civil rights issues actively at stake within the larger culture. Several essays focus on the relationship between an array of social movements–intersex, transgender, transsexual, feminism, queer studies–and explore their differing positions around notions of sexuality and personal identity. In these sections, Butler’s analysis yields new insights into how sexual difference is politicized and policed. Early in the volume, Butler notes that these issues are not simply relevant to “the New Gender Politics” (11), but will speak to even larger issues, as

     

    the question of who and what is considered real and true is apparently a question of knowledge. But it is also, as Michel Foucault makes plain, a question of power. (27)

     

    Importantly, Butler’s analysis disaggregates the variety of movements too often grouped under the broad rubric “queer rights,” focusing on the often-overlooked transgender and intersex communities. In doing so, Butler demonstrates the degree to which these different movements and communities are driven by competing priorities and ontological claims. For example, she cites the intersex community’s opposition to coercive surgery on infants or children with hermaphroditic anatomy as a point at which a social movement is calling into question generally held ontological concepts. That is, this community’s opposition to surgery can be interpreted as a resistance to sexual dimorphism and offers a “critical perspective on the version of ‘human’ that requires ideal morphologies and the constraining of bodily norms” (4). By contrast, the transsexual movement seeks to legitimize elective surgery to change from one gender to another. Both movements, operating from different epistemological frameworks, seek to “undo” normative concepts of fixed, binary gender identities within our culture.

     

    To some readers, this may sound like familiar territory for Butler: seeking to better delineate the terms by which gender is defined against the backdrop of cultural production. However, the book represents a deeper engagement for Butler with the practical politics and current issues in feminist and queer movements today. In part, this may be in answer to critics who have expressed concern that academic feminists have begun to split into two camps: those who are actively involved in practical social struggles and those who have retreated into isolated academic positions. This latter group has been characterized perhaps most famously by Martha Nussbaum in her essay “The Professor of Parody” which appeared in The New Republic. Nussbaum suggests that these feminist theorists are interested only in the “verbal and symbolic politics” of feminism and engage in little discussion around the status of women outside of the United States. In that same essay, Nussbaum characterizes Butler as the “American feminist [who] has shaped these developments more than any other.”

     

    Undoing Gender, however, strikes new–and more pragmatic–critical ground for Butler by its emphasis on the rules by which the policing of gender operates. The book’s analysis focuses on the specific working functions of various regulatory efforts–from the narrowing definition of gender norms found in DSM-IV’s Gender Identity Disorder diagnosis to the allowable definition of “woman” in the United Nations Non-Governmental Organizations (NGO) platform on the status of women. One essay, “Bodily Confessions,” focuses on the nature of psychotherapeutic discourse and was originally presented as a paper at the 1999 American Psychological Division Meetings in San Francisco. The presence of this paper on that convening’s agenda suggests new opportunities for high theory to intersect with practice in the very arenas where legal and institutional change can take place.

     

    In her discussion of DSM-IV, Butler illuminates the interplay between the rhetoric of the medical institution and personal declarations of gender normalcy. For example, it is necessary for one to declare oneself as suffering from a diagnosable disorder in order to receive insurance reimbursement for a sex-change operation and hormonal treatment as a “medically necessary” procedure. Thus, a transgendered person must subscribe to the idea that their identity is a psychological disease in order to be “treated.” In this and other cogent examples, Butler makes clear the larger operations inherent in the self-reinforcing mechanisms by which regulatory systems operate and the profound realness those mechanisms provide to the Law. This reality effect is perhaps best described by Foucault, for whom

     

    all [transgression] ends up doing is reinforcing the law in its weakness . . . The law is that shadow toward which every gesture necessarily advances; it is itself the shadow of the advancing gesture. (35)

     

    Butler goes on to discuss the Vatican’s objection to including “gender” in the United Nations Non-Governmental Organizations (NGO) platform on the status of women due to a concern that it was a coded word for “homosexuality.” In her analysis, Butler agrees to some extent with the Vatican’s reference to “the possible inclusion of lesbian rights as ‘anti-human’,” as Butler argues that to admit “the lesbian into the realm of the universal might undo the human” and expand conventional notions of what it means to live a normative life (190).

     

    Much of Butler’s broader analysis focuses on how one is deemed to be an acceptable identity category–human, citizen, normal–and the relationship between this phenomena and social justice. She begins with the assertion that when a class of citizens’ normalcy is called into question, the result is often denial of civil rights and an increased frequency of violence. In thinking about the kind of resulting loss that members of disenfranchised communities often face, she looks at how problematizing these people’s normativity calls into question the degree to which they are living a “grievable life” (18). Here, she cites the fact that many people and institutions desensitize themselves to the catastrophic AIDS deaths in Africa or violence against sexual minorities by categorizing the victims of such tragedies as the Other. This desensitization operates by undoing a given population’s right to full personhood. This very “experience of becoming undone” (1) is the thread that connects the essays in this volume and offers a new entry point to consider international human rights issues.

     

    Butler’s discussions often turn to language as the point at which the issues of identity and social power converge. The essay “Bodily Confessions” looks specifically at the nature of discourse in both confession and psychoanalysis. Butler interrogates Foucault’s claim in The History of Sexuality: Volume I that psychoanalysis is a natural inheritor of the “pastoral power” inherent in confession, and thereby creates an environment designed to manifest power and control. Though Foucault later recanted this assertion, Butler uses this claim as a means to examine the nature of analytic speech and to explore the relationship between the words spoken in the therapy environment and the need to confess. These discussions touch upon the links between language and the body, thereby tying Undoing Gender to another of Butler’s earlier works, Bodies That Matter. In that volume, she offered an in-depth exploration the relationship between speech acts and the body.

     

    Throughout the book, Butler raises Derridean questions of authorship and the extent to which we lose control of the meaning of what we say once it is uttered. Butler shows that declarations of identity (whether gendered, racial, or otherwise) inevitably belong in part to the public sphere that hears our spoken claims and gives them meanings beyond our control. In order to examine more closely issues related to discourse, she looks at a range of examples from contemporary politics. Both the DSM-IV and Vatican examples support Butler’s argument that civil rights are directly related to whether or not someone is recognized as normal or human. And this recognition in the political sphere often occurs at the level of discourse. Invoking again the idea of becoming undone, Butler argues that

     

    if the schemes of recognition that are available to us are those that “undo” the person by conferring recognition, or “undo” the person by withholding recognition, then recognition becomes a site of power by which the human is differentially produced. (2)

     

    Undoing an individual’s right to full personhood can be achieved either by identifying them to be excluded or ignoring them to render them invisible.

     

    Undoing Gender‘s interrogation of the complex relationship between exclusion, discrimination, and identity places it squarely among the work of other contemporary queer theorists. Didier Eribon’s recent Insult and the Making of the Gay Self, for example, looks at the ways in which queer identities are in part formed by the societal discourse that gays adopt in order to define themselves. Eribon explores “the power of name-giving, the role of shame” as a shaper of personal identity, to which end he focuses his analysis on early depictions of gays in literature. He situates representations of gay people in Marcel Proust, André Gide, and Oscar Wilde in relation to theoretical frameworks presented by both Michel Foucault and Hannah Arendt in order to shed new light on the intermingled evolution of gay identity and social power. Butler’s book lacks the strong sense of historicity found in Eribon’s and therefore at times feels less grounded. However, Undoing Gender‘s consideration of social movements does make the book feel more relevant. Gayatri Gopinath’s Impossible Desires offers another useful counterpoint to Undoing Gender. Gopinath identifies and analyzes queer female subjectivities within a broad array of South Asian diasporic literature, film, and music to demonstrate the destabilizing power of these perspectives often rendered invisible by the logic of blood, authenticity, and patrilineal descent. Impossible Desires goes on to discuss events within the larger culture that signify a lack of tolerance for sexual difference within both the national and diasporic states of India. Gopinath’s book reflects the growing number of scholars in contemporary queer studies discussing the intersection between homophobia, racism, transnationalism, and globalization. Butler’s book touches only briefly on the intersection of these issues, and some readers may find themselves wanting more.

     

    Still, Undoing Gender is a natural companion to both Insult and the Making of the Gay Self and Impossible Desires. All three texts look at ways in which negative discourse–or the absence of discourse–around sexual minorities marginalizes them and contributes not only to societal misperceptions, but also to how minorities understand themselves.

     

    While Undoing Gender does move beyond Butler’s earlier thinking on gender and sexuality, it also includes a reconsideration of her ideas regarding gender performativity outlined in Gender Trouble. In this earlier volume, Butler sought to expose the heterosexism present in feminist theory and to explore the extent to which gender identities are largely socially constructed from a series of gestures, speech acts, and other theatrically produced reality effects. In Undoing Gender, she directly answers critics and others who have commented on Gender Trouble, responding to their concerns and better articulating some of the book’s finer points. Here, she addresses arguments raised by formalist Lacanians such as Joan Copjec, Charles Shepherdson, and Slavoj Zizek, as well as critic Carol Anne Tyler and theorist Rosi Braidotti. Tyler, for instance, asserts that it will always be different for a woman to transgress gender norms than for a man, due to predefined, differing positions of social power. In response, Butler states her “worry that the frameworks we commit ourselves to because they describe patriarchal domination well and may well recommit us to seeing that very domination as inevitable or as primary” (213). Here, Butler reaffirms the radicalism that makes her philosophical work so important and also underscores the necessity for the writing of Undoing Gender: the need to destabilize the very regulatory functions and frameworks that police culturally produced gender identities described in her earlier work.

     

    The final essay in this volume, “Can the ‘Other’ Philosophy Speak?” helps us learn more about Butler’s personal history and understand how she came to study philosophy, feminism, and gender issues. We see her early encounters with Spinoza when in the family basement, “hiding out from painful family dynamics” (235). We hover alongside her in Paul de Man’s classes at Yale as she finds herself “compelled and repelled” by the scholar’s discussions of Nietzsche’s Beyond Good and Evil (238). Like Derrida’s The Work of Mourning, these sections of the book examine Butler’s own lineage of thinkers and texts that have shaped who she is. This effort at personal criticism (which also appears, in a more limited way, in Eribon’s book) follows the recent trend among scholars to offer a window into their own experiences and to suggest their own relationship to the material they study. Butler’s choice to include personal criticism here underscores a way that academics involved in high theory can more deeply engage with readers and connect to the cultural contexts which their exegeses examine. For Butler, her personal disclosure naturally segues into a discussion of how one seeks out philosophy, and whether philosophy can have practical implications for our lives.

     

    Interestingly, Butler invokes this very question of the relationship of one’s life and influential texts in her recent essay eulogizing Derrida’s life in the London Review of Books. In that essay, Butler recalls sharing a stage with Derrida in 1993 and asking him “whether he had many debts to pay.” Derrida has difficulty understanding her, and believes she is asking him about his “death,” rather than “debts.” Butler recalls,

     

    at this point I could see that there was a link between the two . . . but it was not until I read his later work that I came to understand how important that link really was.

     

    The final section of Undoing Gender invokes this same sentiment. That is, it feels as if Butler is offering an homage to those works, thinkers, and experiences that have profoundly influenced her. Readers familiar with her earlier work may feel, as Butler describes feeling in the quote above, that such linkages and influences become clearer as one reads Undoing Gender in the context of Butler’s other books and essays.

     

    This same essay contemplates how philosophy, or at least the modes of philosophical critique, has begun to appear in English, comparative literature, and other academic departments. Butler explores how philosophy has unintentionally produced a “spectral double of itself” (241) and engendered a broader understanding of who can be said to practice philosophy, including interdisciplinary thinkers from Walter Benjamin to Cornel West. Here Butler also discusses the trend among graduate students and young scholars outside traditional philosophy departments to seek out thinkers–such as Derrida, Irigaray, and Cixous–to pursue new methods of critique falling under the broad name of “theory.” This essay may both galvanize philosophy departments to consider how to re-position themselves as relevant to graduate students today and may also encourage more universities to explore adopting interdisciplinary programs such as U.C. Berkeley’s Rhetoric Department on whose faculty Butler sits or Stanford University’s Modern Thought and Literature program. “Can the ‘Other’ Philosophy Speak?” is the liveliest of the book’s essays, the kind that helps the reader better define their own position in relation to a lineage of thinkers and within the larger scholarly community.

     

    Some critics may argue that, with this book, Butler does not break the same radical ground that she did with Gender Trouble. However, what is refreshing about Undoing Gender is its frank openness, its willingness to introduce new lines of inquiry and leave many questions unanswered. Butler herself suggests that “we make no decision on what sexual difference is but leave that question open, troubling, unresolved, propitious” (192). At this and other points, Undoing Gender takes important steps–both for Butler as a critic and for queer theory as a discipline–toward new opportunities to expand frontiers, make boundaries more porous, and build new coalitions between both social movements and schools of thought.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Butler, Judith. Bodies That Matter: On the Discursive Limits of “Sex”. New York: Routledge, 1993.
    • —. Gender Trouble: Feminism and the Subversion of Identity. London: Routledge 1990.
    • —. “Jacques Derrida.” London Review of Books 26.21 (4 Nov. 2004): 32.
    • Derrida, Jacques. The Work of Mourning. Trans. Pascale-Anne Brault. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2001.
    • Eribon, Didier. Insult and the Making of the Gay Self. Trans. Michael Lucey. Durham: Duke UP, 2004.
    • Foucault, Michel. “Maurice Blanchot: The Thought from the Outside.” Foucault/Blanchot. Michel Foucault and Maurice Blanchot. Trans. Jeffrey Mehlman and Brian Massumi. New York: Zone, 1990. 7-58.
    • Gopinath, Gayatri. Impossible Desires: Queer Diasporas and South Asian Public Cultures. Durham: Duke UP, 2005.
    • Nussbaum, Martha C. “The Professor of Parody: The Hip Defeatism of Judith Butler.” Review. The New Republic 220 (22 Feb. 1999): 37.

     

  • The Hamartia of Light and Shadow: Susan Sontag in the Digital Age

    Manisha Basu

    English Department
    University of Pittsburgh
    mab79@pitt.edu

     

    Review of: Susan Sontag. Regarding the Pain of Others. New York: Picador, 2003.

     

    In the first of the six essays in On Photography (1977), Susan Sontag had claimed that after repeated exposure, photographs of atrocity became less real for their audience, and therefore less able to evoke sympathy. In her final book Regarding the Pain of Others, Susan Sontag moves, self-admittedly, in a different direction from her earlier argument: she stops to ask whether indeed our contemporary culture of digitization and image-glut actually shrivels the ethical force of photographs of atrocity, or whether in an age in which spectacle has usurped the place of reality, photographic images still have the power to evoke shock and sentiment. Responding in a different way to our contemporary politico-cultural occasion, Judith Butler in an essay entitled “Photography, War, Outrage,” elaborates the nature of the photographic frame and its relation with interpretive practices, and in doing so, positions hers own argument in opposition to Sontag’s. According to Butler, Sontag understands interpretation itself to be quintessentially narrative in nature, and since without accompanying captions and analyses, photographs cannot tell a story, or even generate a complete understanding of the situation they are expressing, they are neither narratives, nor therefore, interpretations. In fact, left to themselves, photographs are the fragmentary emanations of reality, the punctual and discrete renderings of truth, rather than the uniform grammar of a consistently unfolding tale. In short, they are not ‘writing’ and thus relay and transmit diffuse assemblages of affect, without necessarily appealing to the coherent, narrative understanding of an interpretive, rational consciousness.

     

    In commenting on the phenomenon of embedded reporting vis-à-vis images of atrocity from Abu Ghraib, Butler arrives at a different notion of the photographic frame and its relation with interpretive practices. Butler’s view is that the phenomenon of embedded reporting is a way of interpreting in advance what will and will not be included in a field of perception, and thus even before the viewer is confronted with the image, interpretation is always already in play. Defined as a situation in which journalists agree to report only from the points of view already established by military and governmental authorities, embedded reporting was first employed in the coverage of the British campaign in the Falkland Islands in 1982. After that time, the phenomenon reappeared during the two Iraq wars, particularly in the limitations that the U.S. Department of Defense imposed on journalists reporting on the second Iraq War. Butler’s argument thus notes that restricting how any of us may see–regardless of whether the reception of photographic images urges interpretive practices or not–is in contemporary politics becoming an increasingly significant way of effecting mass interpretation. Butler argues–and she suggests that this argument is different from Sontag’s–that, even outside of the specific practices involved in embedded reporting, the photographic frame “is not just a visual image awaiting its interpretation; it is itself interpreting, actively, even forcibly” (823). However, there is at least one glaring problem here with Butler’s reading of Sontag. Indeed, Sontag by no means suggests that photographs are images that merely await interpretations, even though there can be no doubt that she does make a sharp distinction between the interpretive practices associated with photography and those associated with prose or painting for instance. In fact Sontag most famously writes that where “narratives make us understand: photographs do something else. They haunt us” (89).

     

    While in Butler’s mind, this declaration expresses something of a decisive fracture for Sontag between the momentary effects of photography and the enduring ethical pathos generated by prose, my view of Regarding the Pain of Others is different. Especially in her last book, Sontag neither attempts to distinguish photography from prose, and come to the repetitive and therefore fatigued conclusion that without the narrative coherence of prose, photographs do not qualify as interpretations at all; nor does she, as Butler puts it, fault photography for not being writing. Instead Sontag finds herself to be endlessly intrigued by precisely that haunting quality of the visual image that marks its distinction from the written word. In an age in which she herself says “to remember is more and more not to recall a story but to be able to call up a picture,” (89) Sontag is not really concerned with forcing photographs into the narrative mold of prose. Indeed, given the sheer sweep of the visual image in contemporary culture and politics, she struggles to come to terms with the nature of national memorialization effected by photographs, the kind of affect relayed by photographic images as the discrete and punctual fragments of reality, and the semiological universe that may be called into being by such dissociated transmissions of affectivity. For Butler, however, such concerns do not come to the forefront because she is responding to the very specific issue of embedded reporting and how embedded reporting constitutes us as unthinking consumers of visual culture. She must therefore, indeed almost irresistibly, emphasize that “to learn to see the frame that blinds us to what we see is no easy matter” (826). Again, she must overlook the fact that in Regarding the Pain of Others, Sontag, while acknowledging that framing is in itself interpreting, is more interested in engaging a world where it is claimed that “reality has abdicated” in favor of representations (109).

     

    Regarding the Pain of Others begins quite appropriately with an invocation of Virginia Woolf’s Three Guineas, for if the latter was Woolf’s “brave unwelcomed reflections on the roots of war” in face of the rising fascist insurrection in Spain, then the former is occasioned by Sontag’s fearless interventions in the media coverage of the second war in Iraq (3). The basic impetus of Three Guineas is expertly laid out in the first few pages of Sontag’s work, emphasizing that Woolf suffers from a naïve illusion that war is universally abhorrent to all, and that photographic representations of war will no doubt generate universal consensus against it. Woolf had couched her book as a response to a letter she had received from a London lawyer asking, “how in your opinion are we to prevent war?” Woolf immediately challenges the very grounds of this spectral lawyer’s question and proposes that although the lawyer and she may belong to the same privileged and educated class, men and women cannot, and do not, have the same responses to war. Inviting the lawyer to look together with her at a particularly gruesome set of war photographs depicting bodies maimed and mutilated beyond any viewer’s recognition of them as human, Woolf discovers with a great deal of rhetorical èlan that both she and the lawyer–despite their differences–think the photographs disgusting, horrific, barbarous, and abominable. From this point, Woolf hurtles off to a conclusion that according to Sontag unthinkingly collapses the very distinction she had begun with. In other words, despite being “separated by the age-old affinities of feeling and practice of their respective sexes,” Woolf’s claim is that that both the lawyer and she respond in the same way to photographic representations of war, and that, given this happy coincidence of emotions, they will in unison be able to call for a stop to the abomination of mindless death and destruction (6). Thus despite having attacked her interlocutor for his presumption of a consensual “we” in asking the initial question, Woolf herself, Sontag notes, slips into the same danger of proposing that there is any kind of consensus at all in the repudiation of war.

     

    In light of our own political occasion, as images of the butchering of noncombatants begin to seep out of Iraq, it is difficult by any stretch of the imagination to argue that such representations immediately evoke a repudiation of war–in fact, as Sontag asks, do they not in fact, often enough, inspire greater militancy? Can there indeed be a universal “we” when the issue in question involves looking at other people’s pain? Of course, Sontag’s posing of such rhetorical questions becomes in itself a form of challenge to Woolf’s assertion of a liberal consensus that draws its sustenance from the magnanimity and goodwill of educated democratic agreements. Yet, what the former does not take care to note when attacking Woolf on this ground is precisely the affect generated by the earlier writer’s own text. Is Virginia Woolf indeed naïve enough so easily to let go of her intellectual position distinguishing between, on the one hand, bellicose men who are seduced to battle by the torrid allure of sacrifice and its promise of glorious patriotism, and, on the other, Lysistrata-inspired women who at every juncture must be distinguished from their war-like male counterparts? Would it not be more critically challenging for us to investigate the effects that an author of Woolf’s intellectual affiliations might have generated in drawing all her critical distinctions together, violently crushing them bit by bit into one vast crucible of mass feeling, and then proposing that they manifest a well-united front, free of opposition and difference? Indeed, in misreading Woolf’s own reliance on transitive affectivity is Sontag not betraying her own failure to engage the very term she has set out to investigate?

     

    Sontag writes that Woolf’s sweeping generalization about humanity’s universal repudiation of war rests on two uncritical assumptions: one that assumes that violence is by and large condemned by all Kantian citizens of goodwill, and another that dogmatically believes in the transparency of the photographic image and its ability to convey an undiluted truth. It is of course fairly easy for the author of Regarding the Pain of Others to convince her readers that the question of violence is a much contested one, and indeed she does not waste much time on this self-evident issue, except to say that the history of war has shown that violence is often entitled “just” or at least “necessary” in the face of a threatening enemy. What is of greater interest in this context is Sontag’s attack on Woolf’s faith that photographs have the ability to reflect an undistorted real. And indeed it is here that Butler’s claim about Sontag arguing that the photograph cannot by itself provide an interpretation totters on the brink of a misreading. Weaving in and out of the history of photographic images, Sontag argues that the photograph, like all other texts, is indeed interpretative; it has an author whose point of view we see, a frame that excludes and includes objects of cognition, a career of meaning that moves away from the sovereignty of the author’s clutches, a life of circulation and dissemination that may or may not make it the plaything of different interest groups struggling for legitimation and authority, and what Edward Said would call a worldliness that institutes it as a part of numerous heterogeneous realities that come together to form the great discontinuous network of human existence. In short, the photograph, like all representations and texts, is flawed in being intimately tied up with power, position, and interests, whether it was a victim in their struggle or not. Strangely enough however, having argued in this manner about the representational quality of the photographic image, Sontag is unable to decode Woolf’s text within her own paradigm of thought. In other words, if as Sontag proposes, photographic images, despite their “truth” or “untruth” do have rhetorical and polemic effects, then why is it that Woolf’s text or her “image of thought,” as it were, is allowed to slither out of such a complex domain and stand on its own, as the supreme expression of authorial sovereignty? Why is Woolf’s writing released and liberated not only from a consideration of the author’s own rhetorical invention but also from the historicality of the effects it might have produced in conjunction with the different knottings and strands, that, dependent on a myriad of circumstances, came together to question, trouble, upset, and reformulate notions of liberal democracy in the wake of Europe’s second great war?

     

    The 1930s were a critical juncture in the life of liberal democracy in both Europe and North America, and intellectuals in these continents were already looking toward the margins of intellectual history for ideas that would transform and revitalize the landscape of politics. Indeed, many critics believe that the quest had made itself known even earlier, and that if the last decades of the nineteenth century could be seen as grand zenith of liberalism in the West, then the Great War marked its grotesque nadir.1 Despite the fact that Virginia Woolf’s work is a part of this intellectual milieu, Sontag is unable, or perhaps unwilling, to investigate what might have been the intriguing effects of Three Guineas within such a trajectory of thought. More surprising perhaps is the fact that while shying away from thinking the historicality of Woolf’s text, Regarding the Pain of Others is almost seductively alluring in its historicization of the photographic image. The writing not only displays a breathtaking array of scholarship in a lucidly elegant style that rarely appears pedantic, but also entices readers with the promise of a heuristic about how war is waged, understood, and represented in our own time. Particularly exciting is the chapter of the book that undertakes an excursion into the long and illustrious pedigree of the iconography of suffering. Beginning with the writhing statue of Laocoön and his sons, moving niftily through the cadaverous sweetness of depictions of hell in the Christian tradition, and finally briefly touching on the inexhaustible catalogue of cruelties in pagan myths, Sontag’s range of examples culminates in the claim that the practice of representing suffering came to be considered deplorable only with changing historical-political conditions:

     

    The practice of representing atrocious suffering as something to be deplored, and if possible stopped enters the history of images with a specific subject: the sufferings endured by civilian populations at the hands of a victorious army on the rampage. It is a quintessentially secular subject, which emerges in the seventeenth century, when contemporary realignments of power become material for artists. (42-43)

     

    Sontag’s argument reaches its critical acme with the above quote, in which the universal condemnation of the slaughter of civilians is neatly plucked out of the comfort of its naturalized setting and violently defamiliarized. This claim is of course also the point of entry for Sontag’s attack on Woolf’s notion that photographs of war are universally lamentable. It is thus from this intellectual platform that we expect Sontag to launch her foray into the contemporary landscape of politics. However, our author’s quite skillful reading of the deplorable nature of suffering as a historically specific moment rather than an eternally true human reaction to atrocity does not seem to translate into a corresponding intellectual dexterity with representations of human suffering in an occasion very different from that of the seventeenth century.

     

    Confronted, in the late twentieth and early twenty-first centuries, with a sheer discordance of pixilated images and their inexhaustible generation of other images, and therefore the culture of ‘image-glut’, Regarding the Pain of Others finds itself inundated. In the final section of the essay, Sontag’s prose loses its patient elegance to become instead a harried and in fact beleaguered document that is little more than a frustrated rant against the inhuman multiplication not just of images, but of the sacrilegious settings in which we see them. In fact, in my view, Sontag’s apparent frustration with the fact that “photographs cannot produce ethical pathos in us” (which Butler reads as her distrust of the interpretive force of the punctual and momentary nature of the photographic image) is a result of this besieged intellection (“Photography, War, Outrage” 824). Harrowing photographs of blood-spattered men, women, and children, ruined monuments of flesh and stone, twisted and maimed beyond recognition, faceless bodies, and amputated limbs are flanked today, Sontag writes, by advertisements for SUVs, pain relievers, and emollients, in much the same manner that the unbridgeable difference between the editorial and advertising sections of leading news dailies is blurred to the point of indistinction, and photographs of the Spanish Civil War unabashedly adorn walls of an Agnes B. boutique. In other words, if the nature of understanding conjured by photographic images was in the first place distinct from the “coherent reason” called into being by prose, then the contemporary landscape that Sontag lays out seems to question the very validity of categories which used to describe a humane response to images of atrocity. Can “reason,” “conscience,” and “sympathy” or even “desire,” “delight,” and “curiosity” meet the challenge of an irreverent blasphemy of contiguities between distinct images? What nature of curiosity, for instance, might be sparked by the pressures of witnessing an advertisement for Benetton in conjunction with its deployment of the blood-stained shirt of a dead Croatian solider, and what quality of sympathy by the violent yoking together of the concentration camp photographs from 1945 and the Hôtel de Sully in Paris?

     

    Tragically, Regarding the Pain of Others turns back decidedly from answering any such questions in much the same way as it had foreclosed its own engagement with the rhetorical affect generated by the style of Three Guineas. Indeed, it is here that we can locate the hamartia of the work–the tragic shortcoming, not of the hero, but of the text–whereby it cannot bring to fruition its own implicit struggle in coming to terms with the nature of the affect transmitted by photographs, the increasingly aphoristic quality of the image, the place of the image in an era of information-overload, and the capacity of the image in such a landscape to infinitely, and perhaps “irrationally,” multiply its significations in relation to continuously mobile variations. Instead, Sontag looks for reprieve to the hundreds of millions of television watchers whose viewing habits are radically different from those of a small educated population living in the rich part of the world, and to those areas of the globe where news has not yet been converted into entertainment. She seems to suggest that for such people and others who do not have the luxury of patronizing reality, photographs of atrocity at least provide an initial spark for humane thought, for engaging with the sheer range of depravity and human wickedness, and for practicing what may be called the ethical act of remembrance. Indeed, benumbed and inured to tormented and twisted masses of flesh, we in the metropolitan center may be able to do absolutely nothing with the residual feelings of compassion that such images evoke, we may argue endlessly, and in Sontag’s opinion, unproductively about the indistinguishable boundaries between representation and reality, and draped in the armour of the postmodern critic, we may grandiloquently propose that the effects of images exceed the photographer’s intentions, yet, there is, a “real,” Sontag tells us, that is untouched by, and uninterested in, the trace it leaves on film. “The dead,” Sontag writes are “supremely uninterested in the living,” in fact they thwart our gaze and thus tell us that they do not care that we see. This snub to our habits of visual consumption is for Sontag the ethical force of “the real,” it is the haunting quality of the photographic image, which according to her has a close relationship with mortality. Yet how exactly, from amidst a massification of pixilated images, we should engage this “real” and whether indeed the “haunting effect” lies buried, irretrievably, in a sheer volume of images, remains largely unclear in Sontag’s final book.

     

    Regarding the Pain of Others is not, as Judith Butler argues, caught up in a fruitless endeavour to argue the value of the written word over photographic images, or even the value of narrative coherence and understanding over all other forms of understanding. It does not by any means deny that the frame is in itself an interpretive device–indeed Sontag states in no uncertain terms that photographs have an “author . . . [they] represent the view of someone” (31), just as she points out that “to photograph is to frame and to frame is to exclude” (46). Regarding the Pain of Others labors to understand why and how the transmission of affectivity conjured by photographs is distinct from the narrative understanding engendered by prose, and it strives to uncover a contemporary political occasion in which such diffuse relays of pixilated affect have not only massified to an inhuman scope, but also have increasingly become the norm for constructions of national and patriotic memory. In that sense, Butler’s and Sontag’s projects are not very different. Butler believes that it is the frame of embedded reportage that is increasingly being called upon to constitute a national and patriotic population, which is inured to the suffering of others, for, as in the case of the Abu Ghraib photographs, there is a “clear belief that those who deliver this torture, along with those who commemorate the deed are doing justice the American way.” “Photography, War, Outrage” thus emphasizes that it is the frame that is constitutive, even at the expense of, and perhaps tragically missing the mark of Sontag’s distinct concerns with how to preserve the ethical force of the image given the inhuman accelerations of a changing economy of visibilities.

     

    Sontag too, like Butler, is concerned with mobilizations of nationalism and patriotism. Unlike Butler however, she understands the contemporary face of nationalism not through the particular phenomena of embedded reporting, but broadly, through the defeat of humanism–through the new order of representations that has little room for modern humans and their reliance on the rational ordering of syllogistic propositions. Sontag’s is an endeavour to come to terms with digitization as a chaotic deluge, in which a sheer volume of information bombards the citizen every day, and image variables with varying degrees of frequency come into close proximity in brutally contradictory settings and with no necessary rational thread. Left to narrativize such a messy surfeit with little resort to what used to be the cultural-pedagogical institutions of the welfare state, the citizen uses images available in a pragmatic way, inserting and situating them in a patchwork of connections that indeed draws attention to an emergent style of thinking not necessarily bound by the sovereign reason of modern anthropos. Despite being such a powerfully historical text–one that reveals that the very abhorrence of representations of atrocity is a relatively modern phenomenon–Sontag’s Regarding the Pain of Others tragically misses the mark in so far as it fails to encounter the historicality of anthropos and indeed of humanism as a mode of thinking (and the inability to encounter the historicity of Woolf’s Three Guineas is an aspect of this failure). Yet, is this flaw not in itself a testament to the fact that the changing contours of the human are still emergent, and that we are even now living the passing of an older political form and its attendant categories of organization? After all, are not intellectuals the world over laboring to grasp fundamental transformations in the way humans and citizens affiliate themselves with modes of political aggregation? Is not much of their work belated in relation to the emergent changes it seeks to track?

     

    Notes

     

    1. See Waters.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Butler, Judith. “Photography, War, Outrage.” PMLA 120.3 (May 2005): 822-27.
    • De Man, Paul. Critical Writings, 1953-1978. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1989.
    • Sontag, Susan. Regarding the Pain of Others. New York: Picador, 2003.
    • Waters, Lindsay. Paul de Man: Critical Writings, 1953-1978. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1989.

     

  • Mystics of a Materialist Age

    Justus Nieland

    Department of English
    Michigan State University
    nieland@msu.edu

     

    Review of: Marcus Boon, The Road of Excess: A History of Writers on Drugs.Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2002.

     

    Marcus Boon’s ambitious, lucid, and far-ranging cultural history of the connection between literature and drugs eschews a “single chronological history of drugs” and seeks instead “to reveal more subtle, micropolitical histories of everyday interactions between human beings and particular psychoactive substances to find out whether these histories had left their traces in literature” (9). The answer, as any reader of De Quincey, Coleridge, or Burroughs knows, is that they have. And how. More pointedly, Boon’s impressive study asks–and takes a valiant stab at answering–“how it came to be that aesthetics and transgression, and the literary genres associated with them, came to be associated with drug use” (5).

     

    This is a bigger question, and a tricky one to tackle in one book, even one as sprawling and learned as Boon’s. Any convincing answer would have to address not only the dynamic interrelationship between writing and the history of pharmacological science–something Boon does well, and with often breathtaking range–but also the co-evolution of drug writing with both theories of the aesthetic and the variety of genres, anti-genres, and subversive literary gestures that could be called transgressive. Boon’s catholic style of historicism would seem well-suited to this task, since it is cultural studies written “the way an ethnographer would,” and sees literature in sublunary fashion, as just “one out of many forms of human activity” (5). Yet for all of Boon’s anecdotal connoisseurship and dazzling intellectual roaming–especially across the domains of the literary-historical and the scientific–his study has surprisingly little to say about the literary, or about new (or old) ways of talking about literary transgression. Theories of the avant-garde, or conventional critical stories about modernism’s formal subversions and its forays into the interior and the transcendent, or indeed any sustained discussion of how drug use spawned challenges to mainstream aesthetics or bourgeois expressive forms like the novel–all of this is conspicuously absent in Boon’s study. So, while Boon claims that literature and drugs are two “dynamically developing domains of human activity,” the literary is often the unsexy, occasionally inert partner in Boon’s narrative, waiting passively to receive the traces of its psychoactive counterpart (5). Boon’s writers are on drugs, but his approach to literary history and theory is often way too square.

     

    Perhaps this is a consequence of Boon’s decision to forego a “particular conceptual framework beyond that of a set names of substances around which stories, texts, practices have clustered, and that of chronology,” used for convenience (9). Boon allows himself a single, but effective, dose of theory in his introduction, drawing on Bruno Latour’s provocative argument about the transcendental in We Have Never Been Modern (1993). Recall that in Latour’s anatomy of the modern constitution, modernity works by erecting a divide between nature and culture, one designed to liberate man from the superstitious mana and murk of the premodern but one that effectively produces a modern society “permeated by the very hybrids of nature-culture that it officially claims it has eradicated” (11). Drugs, Boon argues, are hybrid in the Latourian sense–“material and at the same time constructed,” Trojan horses of the modern transcendental impulse (11). In a world without God, drugs fuse soma and spirit, allowing the moderns to have their otherwordly hashcake and eat it too. Latour thus helps Boon “to affirm an inclusive polyvalent movement around the boundaries that modernity has built for itself that would integrate transcendental experience within the realm of the possible” (12).

     

    While Boon confesses that he has “no particular version of the transcendental to push,” he is sympathetic to “our legitimate desire to be high” (12, 13). What’s more, though he works to disabuse us of the myth that drug use is a modern phenomenon, he believes the desire for transcendence–and for drugs, its material agents–was forced into a crisis of acuity in the shadow of Enlightenment modernity, and shortly thereafter achieved its first full flowering in early German Romanticism. In this fashion, Boon hopes, on the one hand, to call into question the “Romantic vision of drugs as an aesthetic experience” independent of history, scientific practices, and market forces and, on the other, to challenge the classical notion of literature as “drug free” (5).

     

    However laudable Boon’s desire to embed the Romantic attitude towards drugs in “a more complicated matrix of historical, cultural, and scientific developments” (6), who, truth be told, believes otherwise anymore? Literary scholars peddling non-ironic, ahistorical, or non-materialist versions of Romanticism, or its modernist and postmodernist strains, are in short supply. Even rarer are those making claims for writing “as a kind of pure activity of consciousness or tradition” (5). The strength of Boon’s study is not to be found in its revisionist notes, which sometimes ring hollow, but instead in the discursive breadth and synthetic power of his synoptic approach. As Boon himself notes, “the whole weight of my argument consists in separating drugs from each other, showing how each has quite specific historically emergent discourses attached to it, and avoiding theoretical generalizations on the subject” (14). Here, Boon proves especially instructive. He is able to trace a series of specific discursive tropes entangled in each drug category with sufficient consistency so as to reveal in each chapter what we might call, following Matei Calinescu, the five stoned faces of modernity: narcotics, anesthetics, cannabis, stimulants, and psychedelics.

     

    The narcotic modernity of his first chapter is one set in darkness and marked by the force of a relentless negativity, of revolt against the profane world of science, industry, and reason. Boon observes that “the evolution of opium in nineteenth-century European culture follows a series of displacements,” shifts he traces nimbly in the chapter from the fields of “medicine to philosophy, philosophy to literature, literature to social mythology, and mythology to politics,” where the drug “rejoins a radically transformed medicine at the end of the century in the Decadent movement and the theory of degeneration” (32). Boon explains how the “specifically literary use of opium” begins with the influence of eighteenth-century physicians Erasmus Darwin and John Brown first on neoclassical poetic discourse, then on the Jena Romantics, Novalis, and Coleridge, whom Darwin introduced to opium through Thomas Wedgwood (23). Brown understood illness to be caused by a lack of stimulation, one that could be cured by wine or opium. Brunonian science thus allowed the Romantics to “broker a compromise between the Newtonian mechanism they detested and a vitalism that was otherwise dismissed as superstitious or unscientific” (27). For Novalis, opium became a “technology of the self,” a mode of producing sickness as, paradoxically, an “unnatural state of health–of revolt against the limits of the animal body” (30).

     

    It is also Novalis, for Boon, who helps originate a modern Gnostic approach to drugs, which sees the material world as fallen and corrupt, to be abandoned for a space of transcendental authenticity. And it is this Gnostic dimension of narcotics that Boon explores in Coleridge’s enthusiasm for Spinoza and laudanum; in the evident proximity, in De Quincey and elsewhere, between the narcotic abyss and the Romantic sublime; in Baudelaire’s critique of modernity’s paradis artificiels; in the nihilism of Cocteau and Artaud; in certain surrealists’ quest for the chemical trigger of the marvelous; and in the post-WWII figure of Beat junkie as both Gnostic and saint. This brief list testifies to the often-stunning erudition of Boon’s study, whose scope, even in this chapter, is capacious enough consider the role of poppy in Chaucer’s “A Knight’s Tale,” the discursive links between opium and orientalism, the cult of morphine in fin-de-siècle Europe and America, the legalization of narcotics use and the rise of the detoxification diary and addiction memoir following the Great War, and the post-WWII literary connection between rebellious youth the new psychopathology of the addict.

     

    If narcotics are discursively enmeshed in the poetic night of Romantic negation and gnosis, anesthetics, “with their ability to shut down the body and mind in a single swift movement,” are particularly apt doubles of the transcendent (91). Yet anesthetic literature, as Boon’s second chapter demonstrates, is decidedly less poetic than opium-infused reveries, encouraging a clinical, philosophical attitude that is, surprisingly, Idealist. In fact, anesthetics, for Boon “remain an anomaly in the history of drug use: the only drugs for which the major cultural reference points are Hegel and transcendental philosophy” (119). And Boon earns this provocative claim by observing, for example, the specter of Kant presiding over the experiments with nitrous oxide performed in 1799 by British chemist Humphry Davy (a friend of Coleridge), and later, the influence of American chemist James Paul Blood, the “chief proponent of the philosophical use of ether,” on William James, for whom anesthetics and Hegel alike “offered a false version of the infinite that remained entirely in the realm of thought, without ever actually engaging the phenomenal world” (111).

     

    Surprisingly enough, it is his chapter on the cannabis user that allows Boon to engage most directly with the question of modern sociality–its disjointed contours and possible reimaginings. Potheads are poets of the social, since the cannabis user “is not content to rest in the transcendental state” of anesthesia, or to fall into the asocial swoon of the opiate user, but rather experiences more modest shifts of consciousness that allow him to exist on the boundary of transcendental and social subjectivity, on the profane cusp of modernity’s dreamworld, poised for illumination (127). Intoxicated by hashish, one “wants to and is capable of introducing esoteric secrets into the domain of the social” (127). For this reason, hashish literature is particularly given to the “utopian musings on the transformation of the world” that one finds in Rabelais, Rimbaud, and the hashish writings of Walter Benjamin, and to the “fractal social spaces” joining the medieval Islamic Assassins to their modern, bohemian variants in the Parisian Club des Hachichins, the cultic world of the jazzman, and the North African Beat scene presided over by Paul and Jane Bowles (166, 167).

     

    Boon’s writing and conceptualization are at their tightest and most productive in his chapter on stimulants. Where the privileged hybrid tropes of first three chapters slowly coalesce to unveil modernities of poppied decadence and imaginative retreat, Idealist transcendence, and utopian transformations, respectively, the fourth chapter speaks breathlessly to the coked-up modernity of intensification, speed, and cyberpunks; of man-machinism, Sartre’s speed habit, and the existential force of will. This is the prosthetic modernity that would find a home for Italian Futurist F.T. Marinetti, famously dubbed “the caffeine of Europe” even though, as Boon notes, Marinetti disapproved of drugs and got sufficiently high on dreams of war and violence. This is, finally, modernity as technique: “the stimulants,” Boon notes, “which appear to offer us an almost mechanical increase in productivity . . . pose the problem of technology at a more fundamental level” since they are McLuhanesque “‘extensions of man,’ extensions of our capabilities” (174).

     

    Following this tour de force, the final chapter, “Imaginal Realms: Psychedelics and Literature,” comes as something of a downer, and contains some of book’s more underwhelming thinking about the literary and its relationship to psychoactive substances. As in the other chapters, Boon’s wide swath verges on the disorienting–from the premodern drugs of Milton’s Comus to the non-literary happenings of sixties psychedelia, from European encounters with Native American and Siberian shamanism to postmodern returns to shamanistic ethnography in work of Michael Taussig and Terence McKenna, with stops in Wonderland, the mescaline experiments of Sartre, Heidegger, Jünger, and Artaud, and the broader post-WWII interest in the virtual, microscopic, or extraplanetary spaces accessed by drugs. The chapter aims “to show how the history of what we now call the psychedelics is intimately linked to the evolution of literature in the West, insofar as literature provided a set of maps or blueprints for the imaginary, and a place to situate and explore the imaginal realms, when this was impossible elsewhere” (222). Let’s set aside the chapter’s impossible ambition, and consider the substance of this claim about substances: Drugs are like literature because they provide space for the faculty of the imagination, harboring humans’ transcendental aspirations in a disenchanted modernity. Boon makes similar analogical claims throughout the book. What, then, do psychedelics teach us about literature or the mind? Answer: “Psychedelics point out in a very direct and dramatic way that radical, rapid shifts in consciousness are possible” (273). No argument there. Or: “Psychedelics offer a perspective on the process of symbol formation, revealing the way that the creative flux of the imagination is frozen into particular forms, concepts, words. Literature . . . is necessarily a method of capturing the flux of the mind” (274). That is, to be sure, one way of thinking about literature, but is it Boon’s? Apparently so: “The important thing to understand here is creativity, its source and its power. Literature and psychedelic experience are both fundamentally acts of poiesis–poiesis not as representation but as creation itself” (275). These are rather airy claims about the literary that, for this reader, become increasingly less compelling until they run aground on romantic or belletristic clichés about the imagination. When the lesson learned from Huxley on acid is the same as Bloom on the Bard, the reputations of drug writing and old-school literary humanism suffer equally. In moments like these, Boon is furthest from his stated goal to explain the association between aesthetics, transgression, and drug use.

     

    Boon is abstemious when it comes to theory, but his book might have benefited from more of it, since his book is in silent dialogue with a recent explosion of relevant scholarly work in modernity studies–work on the concept of experience (Krzysztof Ziarek’s The Historicity of Experience, Martin Jay’s recent Songs of Experience); on theories of affect, boredom, and expressivity (Charles Altieri’s The Particulars of Rapture, Sianne Ngai’s Ugly Feelings, Patricia Meyer Spacks’s Boredom, or Elizabeth Goodstein’s Experience without Qualities); on attempts to materialize aesthetic modernity and uncover the everydayness of the modern (Miriam Hansen’s influential work on “vernacular modernisms”); and especially work on modernity’s host of related transcendent outsides: spiritualism, anthropological magic, secular (and technological) enchantments, etc. I’m thinking here of Helen Sword’s Ghostwriting Modernism, Michael Taussig’s Mimesis and Alterity (Taussig does make brief appearance in the final chapter), Birgit Meyer and Peter Pels’s Magic and Modernity, or Simon During’s Modern Enchantments. Finally, given Boon’s sympathy for the quintessentially modern desire for transcendence, and his explicit “call for a proliferation of alternative methods of obtaining gnosis,” more attention might have been paid to the specific political horizons that have historically given rise to and constrained the moderns various attempts to imagine its transcendent outsides (86). How might the position of drugs and other transcendent “hybrids” on the map of Latour’s modern constitution be shifting in our post-9/11 climate; put another way, who needs opium when you’ve got Jesus or Allah? If never quite intoxicating, Boon’s important, lively, and well-researched study is consistently stimulating. In fact, the book proves that the best cultural histories–and The Road of Excess is surely that–are rather like stimulants, charging their users with renewed energy and clarity, and later leaving them with the sense that, after the rush and the inevitable letdown, there is still more work to be done.

     

  • Counter-Networks in a Network Society: Leslie Marmon Silko’s Almanac of the Dead

    Laura Shackelford

    Department of English
    Indiana University, Bloomington
    lshackel@indiana.edu

     

    The proliferation of critical work on the networking logics that underwrite capitalism’s global restructuring suggests, quite mistakenly, that capitalism’s rearticulation of the spaces of the world to suit it is something new. Working immediately prior to these shifts, Henri Lefebvre, in The Production of Space, had already developed his account of capitalism’s “social space” as a dynamic “matrix of social action” that, in addition to providing an infrastructure or backdrop for social relations, is itself the medium of material practices within which social relationships are realized (Brenner 141). While not completely novel, these dramatic spatial transformations have led to a “general revivial of interest in geographical knowledges” in social theory because, as David Harvey suggests, “from such a perspective, in which history and dynamics cannot be evaded, geographical knowledges turn out not to be so banal as they seem” (299, 300). This critical turn to render the “dead spatiality” of geographical knowledges dynamic, as “active aspects or ‘moments’ in social processes,” though, is just the beginning of serious inquiry into “geographical praxis” as “a vital aspect of power and an object of political and social struggle” (Harvey, “Cosmopolitanism” 299, 300, 296). Thinking through the social production of space, and the power of social space in turn, to shape social relations, theorists grappling with these shifts typically differentiate global capitalist social spaces and their dynamic, flexible, deterritorializing logics from the preexisting, territorial, place-based social spaces that paved the way for industrial capitalism and its modern socio-spatial configurations. The network serves as the privileged sign of this difference. Yet the very visibility of capitalism’s restructuring, the ubiquity and apparent novelty of the spatial logic of its information networks, hides remarkable continuities between emergent, networking logics and these divergent, though co-implicated social spaces. In reading the spatial logic of networks as a sign of postmodernity’s difference from modernity, as the distinguishing feature of a post-Fordist as opposed to a Fordist economy, theorists such as sociologist Manuel Castells, Lefebvre’s one-time student, establish a set of rigid oppositions between the spatial logic of networks and the spatial logics structuring modernity, leading them to overlook and underestimate continuities, even collaboration, in their functioning.1

     

    This essay redirects Castells’s exacting account of the networking logics informing the global information economy, opening up a line of inquiry into the present co-articulation and co-implication of the emergent spatial logic of networks and existing modern spatial formations such as the nation-state. This reading reveals, in particular, their shared implication in colonialist, neo-colonialist, and imperialist spatial practices, and it also identifies significant differences between these social spaces and discrepancies in their spatial logics that enable a thoroughgoing, strategic rethinking of these socio-spatial practices and the Euro-American epistemologies they further. Most remarkably, global capitalist networks’ emphasis on simultaneous global spatial connections has led to the breakdown of the three worlds system and its temporal differentiation of the spaces of the world. Although this shift signals an increasingly fine segmentation and differentiation of the “markets” of the world, in undermining this crucial support for the colonial difference and acknowledging the presence of a variety of subalterns in the progressive present of modernity, global capitalist social spaces unwittingly provide new opportunities for resistance. These emergent social spaces facilitate critical rearticulations of hegemonic discourses and socio-spatial formations from the perspective of people in subaltern positions, what Walter D. Mignolo describes as “border thinking.”

     

    Leslie Marmon Silko’s Almanac of the Dead (1991) rethinks the reciprocity of social and spatial formations to develop a transformative politics of counter-networks. Almanac of the Dead exploits the discontinuities between the deterritorializing logic of global capitalist networks and modernity’s territorially bounded political and economic forms to interrogate the historically specific spatiality of social relations. Reasserting both the spatial and temporal dimensions to social space in its spatio-temporal mapping of the Americas, Almanac of the Dead critiques global capitalism’s “networking logic,” a logic that privileges the spatial dimension of social relations with its synchronous, “timeless time.”2 It situates and implicates these networks within a five hundred year system of colonial and imperial expansion. Subjecting global capitalist networks to its own networking logic, the novel attempts to reverse the former’s suppression of historical time. It does so symbolically, on the level of its representational space, while also developing an analogous model of transnational, subaltern political resistance that links this rethinking of the spatial and temporal dimensions of social practices to more material modes of resistance. The novel’s rethinking of networks, at both levels, exploits the reciprocity between social and spatial formations, their “intercontingency,” underscoring the fact that the spatiality of social relations is “simultaneously contingent and conditioning,” both “an outcome and a medium for the making of history,” as Edward Soja writes (58). Highlighting the inextricability of the material and symbolic dimensions of both social relations and spatial formations, Almanac of the Dead also insists that as material practices these social relations are limited and refigured by the spatial formations they help to realize. The latter claim is the basis of the strategy of resistance offered by the novel. This transnational, subaltern model of resistance adeptly circumnavigates both a nationalist, essentialized conception of identity as grounded in place and a liberal multicultural identity politics whose wholly commodified, aestheticized identities are generated by global capitalist markets that want precisely the local “style” they eradicate.3

     

    Despite the novel’s concerted rethinking of social space and politics in the age of global capital, it is frequently (mis)read as a reactionary assertion of an ethnonationalist, place-bound, identitarian politics unaware of the workings of global capital (and the latter’s part in generating precisely such strains of localism). Such readings, a byproduct of strict adherence to the theoretical opposition between the space of modern political forms and global capitalism’s networking logics, forestall much-needed inquiry into divergent, competing geographical practices that might redescribe and redeploy these social spaces, as Almanac of the Dead attempts to do, to craft a genuinely transformative politics of networks.

     

    Refiguring the Network

     

    In The Rise of the Network Society, the first of a three volume work on The Information Age: Economy, Society, and Culture, sociologist Manuel Castells connects the global restructuring of capitalism in the late 1970s and early 1980s to new informational technologies that provide the “material, technological basis of economic activity and social organization” (Network 14). Castells proposes that the interdependence of economies throughout the world has introduced “a new form of relationship between economy, state, and society, in a system of variable geometry” (1). He attributes these reconfigurations to the “informational” mode of development enabled by new technologies, which is transforming the material basis of our experience and reforming it according to the spatial logic of its information networks. Castells characterizes the present moment in terms of a series of interdependencies and confrontations between this emergent spatial logic–the “space of flows”–and the existing spatial logic of territorially bounded political and cultural forms–the “space of places.” Importantly, the “space of flows” is defined as a social space, as “the material organization of time-sharing social practices that work through flows,” not simply as an abstract logic or a solely physical space (442). The “space of places,” likewise, describes material organization of social practices though it designates social practices whose “form, function, and meaning are self-contained within the boundaries of physical contiguity,” historically rooted to a particular, meaningful locale (453).

     

    Castells explains that the dominant spatial logic, the “space of flows,” supercedes the “space of places” by disembedding and reintegrating historically specific territories and social actors into a functional network. As the figure of the network suggests, the “space of flows” establishes dynamic relations between these places, places that are abstracted from their former, historical and geographical meaning and redefined in terms of their position and function within this instrumental network. By deterritorializing places and reterritorializing them according to its own functional logic, the “space of flows” ensures its flexibility and adaptability. It exploits the specific resources of any one node or site and simultaneously renders that node, in its very specificity, secondary to the network’s organization; any specific site can be replaced by another equally capable of fulfilling this function. For this reason, the “space of flows is not placeless, although its structural logic is” (443). Due to the flexibility of its networks, which depend on the heightened mobility of new communications technologies, the “space of flows” surpasses previous limits imposed by geographic distance. It surpasses territorial limits in another, more important respect in that its networks supercede “territorially-based institutions of society,” the mechanisms of social control that might impede its circulation of capital, information, and technologies (“Informational City” 349).

     

    Castells argues that these flows of capital, information, technology, images, sounds, and symbols are “the expression of processes dominating our economic, political, and symbolic life” (Network 442). Yet he must acknowledge that while the “space of flows” expresses the dominant spatial logic of a global economy, this economy “does not embrace all economic processes in the planet, it does not include all territories, and it does not include all people in its workings, although it does affect directly or indirectly the livelihood of all humankind” (132). All economic and social processes are influenced by, and relate to, the “structurally dominant logic of such an economy,” but the globalization realized through the “space of flows” has been highly selective not only in its strategic inclusion and exclusion of places, but also in the very nature of its engagement of these places (135). Those places lucky enough to be worth exploiting, as Castells describes their double-edged status, suffer the consequences of a loss of their “cultural, historical, geographic meaning” as they are reintegrated into global, functional networks (406). The economic system’s “highly dynamic, highly selective, highly exclusionary” incorporation of certain localities reinforces a “fundamental asymmetry” between developed and developing countries, allowing its key sites and an elite managerial class to reap the benefits and share the mobility of its information, capital, and other resources at the expense of those excluded from its networks (134-35). According to Castells, it is the “structural schizophrenia” between these opposing spatial logics that must be addressed (“Informational City” 352). He advocates reconstructing “an alternative space of flows on the basis of the space of places,” which might “avoid the deconstruction of . . . locales by the placeless logic of flows-based organizations” and, thereby, reverse the social, cultural, and political polarization resulting from these opposing spatial logics (“Informational City” 352-53).

     

    It is possible to read Castells’s work against the grain of its explicit aim, one of establishing and reckoning with the difference between the “space of flows” and the “space of places.” Taking into account the efficacy of the “space of flows” in extending and elaborating on existing patterns of domination and forms of dependency, the discontinuities between these spatial logics and the novelty of the networks that sustain the “space of flows” are quickly diminished. Their “variable geometry” enables a heightened sensitivity in the processes they use to differentiate the world’s economies, resources, and labor, which means that the apparent flexibility, fluidity, and open-ended mutability of these networks functions in the service of increasing segmentation and differentiation. As Castells notes:

     

    on the one hand, valuable segments of territories and people are linked in the global networks of value making and wealth appropriation. On the other hand, everything, and everyone, which does not have value, according to what is valued in the networks, or ceases to have value, is switched off the networks, and ultimately discarded. (134)

     

    If, as he suggests, their “variable geometry” exacerbates and extends existing logics and practices of economic segmentation, endowing them with unprecedented flexibility, then under closer scrutiny the continuities between the social spaces of the “space of places” and the “space of flows” may very well outweigh the discontinuities.

     

    Castells’s acknowledgement of, and engagement with, the interrelations between these spatial logics is valuable, though frequently overshadowed by his emphasis on their differences. It counters accounts of globalization that focus on global capitalism’s deterritorializing, abstracting, and homogenizing tendencies and that credit the latter’s networks with the wholesale destruction of territorial forms such as the nation-state. Arguing that the deterritorialized relations realized within the “space of flows” may supercede the “space of places,” but that their proliferation does not mark the end of territorially based relations within the “space of places,” Castells’s work is motivated and informed by the partiality of, and by numerous inconsistencies surrounding, the purported break between these spatio-temporal logics. Castells notes, for instance, that “most production, employment, and firms are, and will remain, local and regional,” and there is much evidence to suggest that global capitalism profits from precisely such a discrepancy between increasingly global flows of capital and unskilled labor forces that are “restricted by national barriers” (Network 101, 131). Such interdependencies point to the possibility that the discontinuities between the spatial logic of the “space of places” and the “space of flows” may be integral to the functioning of global capitalist networks.

     

    An End to the Modern World System?

     

    The “complex interaction” between increasingly global economic circuits and territorially based, historically rooted political institutions is evident in the shifting relation between global capitalism and the nation-state. Nation-states have proven their resilience and reconfigurability in adapting to global capitalism’s flow-based spatial logic without relinquishing their territorial frame. The problematic refiguration of social and political forms familiar to the “space of places” in relation to global capitalism’s “space of flows,” such as the G.W. Bush administration’s reimagining and repurposing of a nationalist model of territorially-based political claims in the United States since the September 11th attacks, complicate and compromise easy opposition between these social spaces. The “increasing disjunction between a triumphant, global capitalism and all systems of governance including those that had supported globalization,” which Mohammed A. Bamyeh attributes to a decoupling of the economic and the political in his essay on “The New Imperialism: Six Theses,” has not interrupted the functioning of nation-states (11).4 Bamyeh stresses that rather than signaling the “end of politics,” the result has been “a political field increasingly typified by symbolic posturing, since the state is no longer expected to offer its constituents any tangible benefits” (16).

     

    This shift has had consequences for the meaning of nation-states, however. As Bamyeh stresses,

     

    in an age of complex global networks through which “interests” of all kinds are exchanged, the idea of solidarity has no natural reference point in territoriality. And it is fundamentally territoriality that has provided the existential basis for the modern expression of nationality and, subsequently, for its embodiment in statehood. More importantly, however, the internal decline of the ability of the state to shield all of its constituents from the impact of global forces becomes a ground for the rediscovery that in any complex society, the state can only be either a battleground of various special interests, if it were to be truly pluralist, or little more than a representative of one of those interests against the others, if not. (11-12)

     

    These discrepancies between nation-states’ political rhetoric and their economic practices have not gone unnoticed even if the United States and other nation-states continue to invoke various forms of symbolic and territorial sovereignty.

     

    One of the key differences between the current global economy and a world economy that has been in place since the sixteenth century is that the former’s “core components have the institutional, organizational, and technological capacity to work as a unit in real time, or in chosen time, on a planetary scale” (Network 102). “Globally integrated financial markets working in real time for the first time in history” are, Castells stresses, “the backbone of the new global economy” (102, 106). Although this is just one manifestation of the social space global capitalist networks realize, it foregrounds the challenge this spatial logic poses to a modern world system that has organized languages, peoples, and cultures in a “chronological hierarchy,” as Mignolo argues (“Globalization” 35). The modern world system projected time onto space, arranging “cultural differences in a time frame having the European idea of civilization and Western Europe as a point of arrival” (36). By temporalizing difference, these geopolitical mappings of the world established the colonial difference that served to legitimate modernity and, in particular, the economic expansion carried out under the thin cover of its “civilizing” mission.

     

    One of the most conspicuous effects of global capitalism has been the dismantling of the latest geopolitical attempt to project time onto space–the Bretton Woods treaties’ division of the world into first, second, and third worlds at the end of World War II, a temporal differentiation of the spaces of the world that located much of the planet in a social space anterior to modernity. Whereas the end of the Cold War and the “triumph” of capitalism unmoored the ideological underpinnings of this tripartite division, capitalism’s restructuring has “imploded the Three Worlds into one another,” collapsing them into “an increasingly smooth and planar world-space of accumulation” (Dyer-Witheford 134). The collapse of the three-worlds system has dire consequences, as chronicled by Nick Dyer-Witheford in Cyber-Marx: Cycles and Circuits of Struggle in High-Technology Capitalism. Frequently described as the “Third-Worlding of the First World” and the “First-Worlding of the Third World,” this shift signals global capitalism’s dismantling of the economic and geopolitical distinctions between the three worlds in favor of more precise and more variable networks of economic exploitation. It introduces “into the metropolis levels of insecurity and destitution previously relegated to the peripheries of capitalist world economy” and simultaneously exploits the “immiserated labor of the periphery” in order to create “various growth sites [among] the newly industrializing countries and other development zones” (134).5 “Affluence or abysmal misery . . . can be visited on any point in the planet according to the movement of corporate investment” (134).

     

    The collapse of the three-worlds system, thus, reveals a supercession of temporal distinctions between national spaces in favor of a more precise and exacting segmentation of the world’s economies and populations. It also, though, brings those societies formerly situated outside the progressive time of modernity into the present. Reading this shift as a critical opportunity, Mignolo suggests that by “creating the conditions to think spatially rather than chronologically,” globalization “brings to the foreground the fact that there are no people in the present living in the past,” and unintentionally facilitates “the intellectual task of denying the ‘denial of coevalness’ . . . in the conceptualization of the civilizing process as one to which the entire humanity contributed and is contributing” (“Globalization” 37). In his view, the dismantling of the modern world system and the collapse of its temporal distinctions between spaces facilitates confrontations between different epistemologies. This “border thinking” involves a “recognition and transformation of the hegemonic imaginary from the perspectives of people in subaltern positions” (Mignolo, “Many Faces of Cosmo-polis” 736-37).

     

    Reconceptualizing Geopolitical Space

     

    Leslie Marmon Silko’s Almanac of the Dead practices a strain of “border thinking” in its strategic rereading of global capitalist networks. Foregrounding the continuities between colonialist and imperialist practices of spatial and cultural de- and rearticulation furthered by the “space of places” and “the space of flows,” Almanac of the Dead exploits global capitalism’s recent transformation of social spaces. It develops new modes of critique and resistance that circumvent the former’s highly variable and flexible means of reconsolidating familiar structural inequities. Taking advantage of the challenges global capitalism poses to the social, political, and territorial form of the nation-state, the novel rethinks the relations between social and spatial formations. Its scrutiny of social space refuses both the ideological link between people and places consolidated in relation to the nation-state (which functions to naturalize systems of economic and political hegemony in the modern world system) and global capitalism’s abstraction of social relations. The novel’s counter-logic of networks, instead, practices what Ranajit Guha of the Subaltern Studies Group describes as a “writing in reverse” that is “inscribed in elite discourse” (Elementary Aspects 333). By inverting hegemonic knowledges, or “writing in reverse,” John Beverley stresses, “the subaltern represents the dominant subject to itself, and thus unsettles that subject in the form of a negation or displacement” (26). This is a practice that is interested, as is subaltern studies, in both “retrieving the presence of a subaltern subject and deconstructing the discourses that constitute the subaltern as such” (Beverley 135). Understood as a “writing in reverse,” the novel’s rereading of hegemonic discourses and rearticulation of hegemonic socio-spatial formations gains visibility as both a demand for economic, political, and social recognition and an ingenious critique of the very social, political, and economic terms within which that recognition and the rights that accompany it are imagined and, historically, withheld. The latter critique allows Almanac of the Dead to anatomize and navigate the global capitalist dynamics that, otherwise, fuel wholly reactionary assertion of local, place-based identities, what Samir Amin decries as “culturalist” social movements based on essentialized, transhistorical cultural and/or ethnic identities (165).

     

    Almanac of the Dead seizes the increasingly visible discrepancies between geopolitical spaces and social formations in the Americas as an opportunity to discover the historical erasures the modern world system requires when it understands the social as isomorphic with, and grounded in, the territorial space of the nation-state. Global capitalist networks unwittingly acknowledge these erasures due to their dismantling of the formerly naturalized relation between the social and territorial space of the nation-state. In the novel, “El Grupo Gun Club,” a conglomerate of politicians, judges, governors, military and ex-military, a former ambassador, friends of the CIA, and police chiefs on both sides of the U.S./Mexico border give evidence of the flow-based logic of global capitalist networks. In their limitless search for profit, they disregard the territorial and political distinctions between nation-states. Considering themselves to be “chief executives of the future,” these representatives of the state circulate money and cocaine North into Tucson where they invest in real estate and exchange the drugs for arms and military aircraft (292). The latter are used to stifle “political unrest” that might interfere with their business interests throughout the Americas (292). Menardo, whose company, Universal Insurance, amasses a private security force that is placed at the disposal of the group’s business interests acknowledges that “politics had no place in their common cause, which was survival, whatever their minor political differences” (329).

     

    The corruption of these figures of the state flags the inextricability of national political interests and economic interests, locating both within a longstanding tradition of U.S. imperialism. Global capitalist flows may striate the geopolitical space of the nation-state, the novel suggests, but such processes of segmentation actually perpetuate, rather than pose a challenge to, the privilege accorded to these figures of the state. El Grupo Gun Club’s members are, in several important respects, no different from the “speculators, confidence men, embezzlers, lawyers, judges, police and other criminals as well as addicts and pushers” that have made Tucson their home since the “1880’s and the Apache Wars” (Almanac 15). The activities of “El Grupo Gun Club” also, though, mark the discrepancies between the socio-economic relations furthered by global capitalist networks and the geopolitical space of the nation-state. Like global capitalism’s transnational networks, the activities of “El Grupo Gun Club” highlight the formative power of social relations to de- and rearticulate the spaces of the world in terms that facilitate these exchanges. These social networks are, therefore, the basis of the novel’s interrogation of the production of social spaces and of the role these socio-spatial formations, and the understandings of space they rely on, play in consolidating hegemonic social and economic relations.

     

    Almanac of the Dead‘s table of contents provides the first evidence of its strategic rethinking of the geopolitical space of the Americas as a means of challenging the social relations that these hegemonic spatial formations secure. The titles of the first four of six sections refer to geopolitical spaces–The United States of America, Mexico, Africa, and the Americas–that, rather than serving as the setting or backdrop for the narrative’s temporal development, as section titles, assume the status of the narrative’s content, instead. Deploying place names as section and book titles, taking these places as its subject, rather than taking them for granted as its setting, the novel foregrounds its engagement with geopolitical spaces as one designed to grapple with the production of these spaces, questioning the transparency they assume when considered to be stable and, therefore, innocuous territorial designations.6 The abstraction of space from time has functioned to secure the geopolitical distinctions of the modern world system, to mask the ongoing production of this geopolitical system in and over time. The view of space as stasis, as “fixed and unproblematic in its identity,” which Doreen Massey thoroughly critiques in her groundbreaking work, Space, Place, and Gender, enabled the modern world system to project its own temporal distinctions, with Europe as the point of arrival or present, on the world and, subsequently, to disavow the productive work this mapping entailed (5). The seeming transparency of geopolitical spaces such as the United States, their apparent innocence in designating a geographic territory that preexists that denotation, is revealed to be a product of this and other nation-states’ ability to impose and enforce, to materially and symbolically instantiate, this decidedly social space.

     

    Almanac of the Dead counters this view of space as stasis by providing a spatio-temporal mapping of the Americas. The “Almanac of the Dead Five Hundred Year Map,” which precedes the narrative, foregrounds the novel’s intervention into the opposition between space and time on which this view of space as stasis relies (see Figure 1). Placing Tucson, Arizona at its center, the map superimposes its own mapping of the movements of the characters in the novel and the movements of commodities such as cocaine and military arms on top of the political border between the U.S. and Mexico.7 On the map and within the novel, the movements of characters comprise a mapping of these spaces, materializing a network of social relations that cross-cuts and, in other respects, undermines the primacy of the latter. Far from existing outside the social or existing as a mere backdrop to the social, outside time, these geopolitical spaces are, the map suggests, inextricably tied to the social relations that inform and transform these spaces. The section titles do not correspond to the geographical location of the events figured in them nor do the place names serve to denote a preexisting, geographic space. Instead, these place names introduce sections that chart the movements of characters–their sometimes overlapping trajectories and mutual participation in several key events. These movements call into question the homogeneity, integrity, and coherence of national space and enact an alternative cartography based on competing understandings and complex renegotiations of what the novel reinterprets as social spaces.

     

    Figure 1
    Figure 1: Endpaper Map from Almanac of the Dead by Leslie Marmon Silko
    © 1991 by Leslie Marmon Silko
    Reprinted with the permission of Simon and Schuster Adult Publishing Group
    Click image for larger version.

     

    The “Five Hundred Year Map” recognizes the contributions of social actors in the past as well as the present–of the communities and cultural identities that agents of colonization attempted to erase, but never wholly succeeded in “razing,” to use Mary Pat Brady’s term (13). It attempts to acknowledge and to intervene in the processes of spatial de- and rearticulation, processes of disarticulating communities and cultural identities that Brady identifies in Extinct Lands, Temporal Geographies as the source and target of interrogations into space within much Chicana literature. Arizona, for instance, “began as a mistake. The United States government used a mistake on a map to take what is now southern Arizona from Sonora, Mexico, to abscond with it,” as Brady describes the “willful (mis)recognition” that was strategically deployed to extend the amount of territory ceded to the United States in the Gadsden Purchase of 1856 (13).

     

    Almanac of the Dead‘s “Five Hundred Year Map” turns such a gesture of “willful (mis)recognition” back on itself in order to highlight the productive power of mapping, which it then exploits to reveal the erasures required to produce the United States. The “Five Hundred Year Map” includes references to the Maya, Azteca, and Inca cultures that had “already built great cities and vast networks of roads” before the arrival of the Europeans and the “sixty million Native Americans [who] died between 1500 and 1600” whose “defiance and resistance to all things European continue[s] unabated” (Almanac 14-15). Far from disappearing or surviving as ineffectual legacies, the map suggests that these historical conflicts and contestations continue to inform the present topography of the United States and the social relations that reciprocally (re)construct that topography. The “Five Hundred Year Map” tracks the production of the hegemonic social space of the United States, revealing its apparent closure, integrity, and homogeneity to be the effect of an active disarticulation. Almanac of the Dead, by acknowledging the integral role the histories, places, and people already inhabiting the “new world” have played and still play in the production of the social space of the United States, reviews and reverses the erasures that allow the colonial difference to consolidate the space of the nation-state.

     

    Cutting Off the Power to the Five Hundred Year System and its “Supraterritorial” Flows

     

    Almanac of the Dead, then, foregrounds the productive power of hegemonic social practices by underscoring the erasures necessary to produce the United States. This disrupts the naturalization of these socio-spatial formations by reference to a geographic territory outside time. Its documentation of these erasures also marks the limits to the productive power of global capitalist networks, which are frequently understood to function supraterritorially, to wholly rearticulate the spaces of the world in accordance with their placeless, “variable geometry” (Castells, Network 1).[8] Global capitalism replaces the modern world system’s temporal perspective, which projected a single, progressive temporal continuum on the spaces of the world, with a spatial perspective that privileges space and the instantaneous connections between things at one moment within a single plane of accumulation.[9] It thereby attempts to ground its networks in a social space wholly abstracted from the historical time of the “space of places.” Global capitalism’s spatial view of social relations nevertheless continues to rely, like the modern world system, on an opposition between time and space even if it privileges the latter rather than the former term in this dualism. Almanac of the Dead‘s “Five Hundred Year Map,” which insists, to the contrary, on the inextricability of spatial and temporal dimensions, troubles this spatial view of social relations by insisting that these simultaneous social relations are, in fact, a slice in time within a five hundred year system. Intervening in the dualism between space and time, the novel reveals that, to use Doreen Massey’s apt formulation, “the simultaneity that makes a particular view [emphasis added] of social relations spatial is absolutely not stasis . . . when spatial interconnections are constituted temporally, as well, they can be seen as “a moment in the intersection of configured social relations” (265).

     

    Located within a five hundred year system, global capitalism’s “space of flows” is read as the latest manifestation of a Eurocentric, rational management of the world-system. Tracing the emergence of this five hundred year system to the “discovery, conquest, colonization and integration (subsumption) of Amerindia,” which gave “to Europe, center of the world-system, the definitive comparative advantage with respect to the Muslim, Indian, and Chinese worlds,” as Enrique Dussel does, Almanac of the Dead contests the Eurocentric view that “Europe had exceptional internal characteristics that allowed it to supercede, through its rationality, all other cultures” (5, 3). The novel develops a “planetary” description of modernity that conceptualizes modernity as “the culture of the center of the ‘world system’” rather than as the product of an independent Europe (as in the standard Eurocentric description of modernity) (Dussel 9). This global description foregrounds the economic advantages resulting from (neo)colonial, imperial, and other systematic economic and environmental exploitation, which (continue to) enable global capitalist networks to impose their simplifying abstractions on the world.

     

    This rereading of modernity as informed by, if not wholly reliant on, colonialist and imperialist networks that are global, not simply European, in scope, counters the five hundred year system’s claims to transcend material complexity through a simplifying rationalization of the world.[10] The processes of abstraction that exemplify this five hundred year system, in the novel’s view, simplify and repress, not transcend, their reliance on material complexity. In doing so, they actively disregard and disavow the destructive effects of the five hundred year system’s instrumental logic on the world. Within Almanac of the Dead, this five hundred year system is known as “Reign of the Death-Eye Dog” and “Reign of the Fire-Eye Macaw” because “the sun had begun to burn with a deadly light, and the heat of this burning eye looking down on all the wretched humans and plants and animals had caused the earth to speed up too” (Almanac 258). The “burning eye” references the scientific objectivism at the heart of the Eurocentric management of the world system. Attributing the speeding up of the earth to this rationalizing logic, this passage suggests that the increasing speed of the earth, an effect of the circulation of commodities and people commodified as labor, is a product of the five hundred year system’s objectifying abstractions. These abstractions speed up circulation by reducing the world to a set of general equivalents. The apparent triumph of such processes of abstraction over material complexity, their ability to facilitate exchange and circulation through standardization, is only a triumph if one overlooks the simplification and reduction that the system’s wholly shortsighted, instrumental engagement with the world requires. Calabazas, a Yaqui Indian who operates a smuggling network through Tucson, insists that, in actual fact, the simplifying reductions that define this White, Euro-American epistemology represent “a sort of blindness to the world,” noting that to Europeans, “a ‘rock’ was just a ‘rock’ wherever they found it, despite obvious differences in shape, density, color, or the position of the rock relative to all things around it” (Almanac 225). The problem, in his view, is that “once whites had a name for a thing, they seemed unable ever again to recognize the thing itself” (224).[11]

     

    Calabazas’s critique draws attention to the material complexity that is suppressed and negated when the world is approached only in terms of its uses, uses that are specified in advance by an instrumental logic that, in the name of efficiency, substitutes an abstract value for the “thing itself.” He refuses the unidirectional, wholesale substitutions required by this logic in favor of acknowledging an ongoing, though necessarily selective, spatially and temporally contingent engagement with the “thing itself.” In his view, “there is no such thing” as “identical . . . Nowhere. At no time. All you have to do is stop and think. Stop and take a look” (201). His references to “nowhere” and “at no time” underscore the suppression of the contingencies of space and time required by a capitalist logic of standardization. Abstraction may facilitate a certain kind of circulation, such as that realized by the “space of flows,” but this is a circulation premised on stasis; within the novel, flows that function according to a logic of abstraction are equated with destruction and death, with a “worldwide network of Destroyers who fed off energy released by destruction” (336). Global capitalism’s “space of flows” is, from this vantage, far from new; it is the apogee and end point of the five hundred year system’s logic of abstraction.

     

    In the corner of the “Almanac of the Dead Five Hundred Year Map” there is a “prophecy” that the arrival of Europeans in the Americas was the beginning of a plague that would end in 500 years with “the disappearance of all things European.” The plot of the novel realizes this prophecy, concluding in 1991 (nearly five hundred years after Columbus “discovered” America), at which time the end to the system is imminent, but the outcome unclear. It tracks the movements of its large cast of characters to and from Tucson, movements that ultimately converge into an uprising led by a subaltern coalition of Native Americans and other indigenous peoples, African Americans, Mexicans, Mexican Americans, homeless men, Vietnam veterans, and a Korean American hacker, to “retake the land that has been stolen from them” (632). The subalterns that comprise this coalition, in spite of the specificity of their respective experiences, share the experience of colonization, what Eva Cherniavsky describes in an article that locates “Subaltern Studies in a U.S. Frame” as America’s “systematic displacement of indigenous peoples and non-white labor” (86). The colonial difference situates these subalterns outside the symbolic space of the United States while exploiting them as a source of cheap labor, disavowing their constitutive role in constructing, materially and symbolically, the spaces of the United States. To the extent that global capitalism resituates these subalterns, Almanac of the Dead suggests that this is equally to misrecognize them in that significant historical and epistemological differences survive these spatial transformations.

     

    It is by exploiting their misrecognition–a fortuitous product of White Euro-Americans’ “blindness to the world”–that the novel’s subalterns eventually confront the five hundred year system with the consequences of its repression of material complexity: “the ecological destruction of the planet,” “the destruction of humanity itself by poverty,” and “the impossibility of the subsumption of populations, economies, nations, and cultures that it has been attacking since its origin and has excluded from its horizon and cornered into poverty” (Dussel 19-21). Fully aware that “any attempt to stabilize a positional identity–of nationality, class, gender, race, or ethnicity–feeds into the logic of globalization itself, and that therefore resistance must take the form of a constant deconstruction of power relations,” the novel’s emphasis on the subalterns’ misrecognition cites and circumnavigates a liberal multicultural model of identity politics (Beverley 142). A thoroughly commodified “International Holistic Healers Convention” at which several characters conform to stereotypical roles as indigenous “healers” and “spiritualists” serves the subalterns as a source of revenue and a cover. The novel’s key protagonists all attend the convention, which provides commodified “tribal” wares to White, New Age yuppies. Lecha and Zeta, Yaqui Indian mixed blood twin sisters born in Sonora, Mexico and now living outside Phoenix redirect their revenues from these economic networks to support their own covert political project. On the sly, they develop a distinctly subaltern mode of resistance that, rather than asserting a single, stable, positive cultural or racial identity (which clearly falls prey to the convention’s politically defunct commodification of historical experience and aestheticization of identity) centers on the shared subordinate status of subjects from a variety of disenfranchised social groups. Linking multiple, divergent forms of disenfranchisement, the novel engages subalternity as a structural category to encompass “the general attribute of subordination . . . whether this is expressed in terms of class, age, gender, or office, or in any other way,” rather than as the basis for an identity politics (Guha, “Preface” 35). Its conception of “tribal subalternity” urges a reconsideration of “identificatory practices on the left and on the right,” as Cherniavsky stresses in her adept reading of the qualifications Almanac of the Dead makes to the current project(s) of whiteness studies (“Tribalism” 113).

     

    As the novel nears its conclusion, these tribal subalterns join forces with an “Army of the poor and homeless” and ecoterrorists to bomb a dam and, thereby, to cut off the supply of electrical power that sustains the economic and political infrastructure of the Southwestern United States (Almanac 424). In the words of Awa Gee, the Korean-American hacker who infiltrates the information networks to accomplish the shutdown, the government “had become deluded about their power. Because the giants were endlessly vulnerable, from their air traffic control systems to their interstate power-transmission lines. Turn off the lights and see what they’d do” (683). This act highlights the wholesale disavowal that allows the information economy’s networks to be described as supraterritorial.[12] It also marks Almanac of the Dead‘s rethinking of social and material networks as modes of channeling energy. This rethinking of networks intervenes in the logics made operational by global capitalist networks and their “space of flows” by juxtaposing and subjecting the former flows to a networking logic that, to the contrary, acknowledges and exploits the reciprocity between spatial and social formations instead of attempting to abstract social relations from particular places altogether. It also, more importantly, enlists the logic of networks in the service of developing new modes of political resistance that acknowledge and exploit the reciprocity between the social and the spatial, drawing on the social construction of the spatial and the spatial construction of the social in time as a resource for a transformative politics.

     

    Dead Spaces Revisited

     

    Insisting on the reciprocity between the social and the spatial, Almanac of the Dead enlists the spatial and, importantly, that which has been disarticulated through its alignment with the spatial in the service of transforming existing social relations. Reading global capitalist networks and the European epistemologies on which they rely as embodying a networking logic predicated on stasis or death, the novel rejects the logic of stasis to which the spatial has been assigned in order to contest the spatializations that have served to confine “premodern” Native American and other indigenous cultures and people, as well as the natural world, within the realm of the dead. These spatializations, in projecting indigenous subalterns into a space outside historical time, consign them to a similar status as material resource for, an object of, or static backdrop to, the progressive time of modernity. The sections titled “Tundra Spirits” and “Eskimo Television” focus on a group of Yupik townspeople in Bethel, Alaska who gather in “the village meeting hall where government experiments with satellites had brought the people old movies and broadcasts from the University of Alaska” (151). While marking the Yupik Eskimos’ positioning as an audience to, or object of, transmissions enabled by government experiments–weather broadcasts and programs such as “Love, American Style”–these sections introduce an old Yupik woman and her younger accomplice, Rose, who have “realized the possibilities in the white man’s gadgets” (155). As the television screen flashes “satellite weather maps one after another,” the old woman slides her finger across the glass, gathering

     

    great surges of energy out of the atmosphere, by summoning spirit beings through recitations of the stories that were also indictments of the greedy destroyers of the land. With the stories the old woman was able to assemble powerful forces flowing from the spirits of the ancestors. (156)

     

    Using “natural electricity. Fields of forces,” her “plane-crashing spell” scrambles the magnetic compasses on petroleum exploration companies’ planes and causes them to crash (155-6). Whereas “white people could fly circling objects in the sky that sent messages and images of nightmares and dreams . . . the old woman knew how to turn the destruction back on its senders” (156).

     

    Figuring a genuinely interactive television, “Eskimo Television” refuses the positioning of the Yupik Eskimos as a passive audience or object of these transmissions and the analogous objectification of the Alaskan tundra, which is described by an insurance adjuster working for the petroleum companies as “frozen wastes” with “no life,” “nothing of value except what might be under the crust of snow and earth”–“oil, gas, uranium, and gold” (159). The narrator’s reference to “circling objects in the sky” invokes the speculators’ planes, the communications satellites, the satellite weather maps, and, more poignantly, the deterritorializing logic of abstraction that works to instrumentalize the spaces of the world. The old Yupik woman’s “plane crashing spell” challenges this logic of abstraction by highlighting the “circling objects’” reliance on electromagnetic energy. This episode intimates playfully that satellite transmissions, as material flows, cannot be controlled, cancelled, or reduced to mere objects or means to an end. More seriously, it suggests that these material transmissions, always exceeding their instrumentalization, retain the power to transform the former instrumental networks, to reciprocally “turn the destruction back on its senders” with consequences unforeseen and unintended by the “subjects” wielding these technologies. Realizing that White Euro-Americans’ technologies of abstraction are not immaterial, and realizing possibilities in their materiality unrealized by these instrumental capitalist flows, the old Yupik woman can be understood to redirect the electromagnetic waves on which these abstracting technologies continue to rely. She remediates them according to an understanding of materiality that draws from the “tundra spirits,” from Yupik knowledges and historical experience, as well as from the socio-spatial relations they perpetuate. Although the precise medium in which the Yupik woman stages this epistemological, electromagnetic resistance remains ambiguous, at the core of this episode is a method, developed more fully elsewhere in the novel, that aligns the Yupik woman with the “emergent powers” of the spatial, which she exploits to cross-purposes (Massey 268).

     

    Reimagining global capitalist techno-economic networks as means of channeling energy, Almanac of the Dead focuses critical attention onto the reciprocity between social relations and spatial formations. Spatial formations are not mere “outcomes” or “the endpoint” of social relations with “no material effect” because the social is spatially constructed too, which means that spatial formations, as Massey argues, can have “unexpected consequences,” and “effects on subsequent events that alter the future course of the very histories which have produced” them (266, 268).

     

    Socio-Spatial Networks

     

    The political consequence of this insistence on the co-implication of the social and the spatial (and the related refusal to sever their shared, simultaneously symbolic and material, dimensions) is rendered more tangible by the “almanac of the dead” that the novel both doubles and figures. The “almanac of the dead” encapsulates and elaborates the logics informing the novel’s subaltern politics of networks. The “almanac of the dead” is a notebook of writings and glyphs containing the stories of all “the days and years” of the tribes of the Americas. Journeying North with four young Indian slaves fleeing European slavery, this “bundle of pages and scraps of paper with notes in Latin and Spanish” eventually makes its way to Lecha and Zeta’s grandmother, old Yoeme, who left it in their care (134). The circulation of the ancient almanac, its spatio-temporal movement, underscores its role in enacting a network of social relations. Importantly, the almanac’s journeying evidences a logic of flows or exchange that is premised on the mutual transformation of the almanac and the social relations it embeds rather than a circulation premised on the stability of the almanac. The almanac bears witness to its material and figurative transformation as a result of these spatio-temporal movements. It is torn, illegible in places, there are “notes scribbled on the sides,” and “whole sections had been stolen from other books and from the proliferation of ‘farmer’s almanacs’ published by patent drug companies” (570). Also, “there was evidence that substantial portions of the original manuscript had been lost or condensed into odd narratives which operated like codes” (569). The narratives act as codes that must be transcribed by Lecha and Zeta who are typing the pages of the almanac into a computer. This transcription is a process of transformation. Adding the first entry in English and a number of highly idiosyncratic personal notes, Lecha reinterprets the almanac from her own perspective and, thereby, transforms the almanac or, more precisely, resituates it in the present just as she rematerializes the almanac by typing it into the computer.

     

    This process of transcription is imagined as a means of channeling energy and explicitly likened to Lecha’s abilities as a psychic. Originally believing that the power she had to locate the bodies of the dead, abilities she exploits with great success on the television talk show circuit, is as an “intermediary,” Lecha soon realizes that “the concept of intermediary and messenger was too simple” (142). She cannot “cut off the channel” of the flows of energy that link her to the dead, yet she is not a mere medium, either (138). When a cable-television producer’s girlfriend enlists Lecha to exact revenge against her former lover, she begins

     

    to see patterns in the lives of the cinematographer and his immediate family. Their lives were ‘stories-in-progress,’ as Lecha saw them, and . . . she would realize possible deadly turns the lives of the cinematographer and his close relatives might naturally take. (143-34)

     

    Identifying patterns in their lives, like transcribing the “codes” in the almanac, connects Lecha to flows that precede her in a relation that allows, if not requires, that she reinterpret these symbolic and material energies, that she, like the old Yupik woman, realize the possibilities in them. Lecha notes that her grandmother, old Yoeme, and others believed that the almanac had a “living power within it, a power that would bring all the tribal people of the Americas together to retake the land” (569). The almanac is alive in that it relies on, draws from, and extends the networks of socio-spatial relations that it materially instantiates and also, therefore, refigures. “Those old almanacs,” Lecha insists, “don’t just tell you when to plant or harvest, they tell you about the days to come–drought or flood, plague, civil war or invasion . . . Once the notebooks are transcribed, I will figure out how to use the old almanac. Then we will foresee the months and years to come–everything” (137). The almanac serves as the basis of Lecha and Zeta’s interpretation of the past, which enables their construction of a future that is, as the Five Hundred Year Map suggests, “encoded in arcane symbols and old narratives” (14). Described as “an analogue for the actual experience, which no longer exists; a mosaic of memory and imagination,” narrative within Almanac of the Dead is conceptualized as a temporal network, as a means to actively instantiate a relationship between the past and the present. Once narrativized, the past is a combination of “imagination” and “memory” and is, therefore, alive (574).

     

    Imagined as an ongoing process of transcription in Almanac of the Dead, narrative is understood as a process of reinterpreting and re-embedding these stories, a spatial as well as temporal resituating that draws from an existing representational space, but also transforms that space and thus changes the stories. It is a process that is enabled as well as constrained by the materiality of the almanac. Reimagining narrative as a means of channeling energy spatio-temporally, as a socio-spatial network that produces an understanding of spaces and materially instantiates the epistemologies and spatial relations it figures on the level of its representational space, “the almanac of the dead” marks the “shaping force of narrative in the production of space” and the “spatiality of discourse,” the fact that representational spaces are key to the production of an understanding of space in that they evidence, embody, and enact materially the epistemologies and spatial relations they figure (Brady 8). The pages of the almanac are believed to hold “many forces within them, countless physical and spiritual properties to guide the people and make them strong” (252, emphasis added).[13] Modeled on three surviving Mayan codices, the almanac’s spatial form operationalizes its spatial and temporal dimensions equally. Described as “loose squares of the old manuscript” bundled together with pages of notes, the unbound pages of the almanac function as a multiplicity of spaces that are not subjugated to a single chronology or temporal progression. Acknowledging a multiplicity of spaces, the almanac’s spatial form does not subjugate the spatiality of the text to a universalized, abstract, figurative meaning. Yet its spatial form does not solidify these spaces as absolute locations and, thus, disavow their temporality, either. Conceptualized as fragments situated within a larger network of relations, rather than as self-contained spaces, each page’s meaning is a product of spatial relations that change as the almanac is transcribed and reinterpreted. The almanac’s “variable geometry” operates, in other words, according to a logic of recombination or transcription that is constrained and enabled by the existing spaces, by the material existence of the pages. Yoeme tells Lecha and Zeta that “nothing must be added [to the almanac] that was not already there. Only repairs are allowed” (129), which seems a blatant contradiction when we find out Yoeme included an account of her survival of the Influenza epidemic of 1918 within the almanac’s pages. Yet her insistence on “repairs only” foregrounds the almanac’s logic of transcription, which requires that one draw from, rather than simply add on to, the existing pages.

     

    As a process of transcription, the almanac’s transformation is predicated on a material and a figurative recombination, which extends and transforms the almanac’s networks spatially as well as temporally. Intervening in an instrumental logic of representation and linking this logic to a spatial politics that has been central to European hegemony, the almanac’s networking logic reimagines representational spaces in a dynamic, transformative relation to the social relations they reconceive and reconsolidate.[14] The transformative relation between the almanac’s figurative meaning and its spatial form recapitulates Lecha’s transformative relation to the almanac as a representational space and, most importantly, both of these relations parallel the novel’s transformative understanding of the relation between social spaces and the social relations these spaces inform and help to instantiate.

     

    A Transformative Politics of Networks

     

    Almanac of the Dead envisions social networks, like the ones resolidified by the circulation of the almanac of the dead, to be spatio-temporally situated and materially embedded, but not determined. Acknowledging a “simultaneous multiplicity of spaces: cross-cutting, intersecting, aligning with one another or existing in relations of paradox or antagonism,” Almanac of the Dead offers a view of social relations as participating within broader networks of socio-spatial formations rather than as being, either spatially or temporally, self-contained (Massey 4). Situated within a broader socio-spatial network, these social relations, like the pages of the almanac, are privy and subject to an ongoing process of recombination and rearticulation. The transformation of social relations is, therefore, envisioned as a process that draws from and reworks existing socio-spatial formations, as a process that is materially enabled and constrained, though not in any sense determined, by its history. This model for a transformative politics of socio-spatial networks refigures the essentialized understanding of the relation between social and spatial formations, people and place, proffered by the nationalist forms of the “space of places.” It also redescribes global capitalism’s attempts to reconstruct that spatiality wholesale in its “space of flows,” its devastating deconstruction of any necessary relation between people and place, which overlooks the constraints that the historicity of the spatial poses to the social. Engaging the “emergent powers” of the spatial, the subalterns in the novel develop a strategy of resistance that, instead, exploits the socio-spatial formations supporting global capitalist networks and their “space of flows” to divergent ends.

     

    The strategies and methods the novel outlines share key similarities with contemporary transnational networks of resistance, the “unexpected currents of opposition” emerging “from the transformed conditions created by transnationalization” (Dyer-Witheford 145). Dyer-Witheford notes that “capital’s very success in creating for itself a worldwide latitude of action is dissolving some of the barriers that separated oppositional movements geographically,” introducing “forms of work, dispossession, and struggle that were previously segregated (145). In addition to these far from desirable commonalities, “capital’s own diffusion of the means of communication has,” “in creating the pathways for its own transnational circuit . . . unintentionally opened the routes for a global contraflow of news, dialogue, controversy, and support between movements in different parts of the planet” (146). The most famous of these strategic redeployments is the Zapatista Army of National Liberation’s 1994 uprising against the Mexican government, which deployed communication s networks such as Peacenet and Usenet to denounce “capitalist globalization as the culmination of a centuries-long dispossession of the people of Chiapas” (158). Silko herself speaks to the connections between her 1991 novel and the Zapatista uprising in 1994, in the essay “An Expression of Profound Gratitude to the Maya Zapatistas, January 1, 1994,” in which she thanks the Zapatistas for realizing, within clear limits, the prophecies in her novel.

     

    In spite of its direct relevance to contemporary political movements, the novel’s transformative politics of networks is frequently misread as envisioning and asserting a reactionary, place-based ethnic identity that relies on a nationalist understanding of identity grounded in place rather than offering a politics of networks that, as I’ve argued, both responds to and renegotiates global capitalist spatial logics. This misreading completely elides the novel’s rethinking of the ongoing, reciprocal relations between social and spatial formations and, in particular, its wholesale refusal to ground social relations, as nationalisms do, by reference to a space outside time. In his most recent book, The Shape of the Signifier, Walter Benn Michaels, for example, reads Silko’s novel as offering a “more or less straightforward ethnonationalism” (24). Michaels’s characterization of Almanac of the Dead as “ethnonationalist” evidences a wholesale refusal to engage with the novel’s reconceptualization of the relation between the social and the spatial, which Almanac of the Dead stages, quite explicitly, in terms of epistemological, not ethnic difference. This move to read the novel and the subaltern political movements it figures back into the terms established by European national forms within the “space of places” enables its wholesale dismissal as an outmoded or reactionary response to the flow-based logics of global capitalism. This reading refuses to register, let alone engage with, the novel’s intervention in the “space of flows,” its rethinking of global capitalism’s networking logic, and the transnational, rather than national, social networks the novel envisions. These social networks are not only transnational, including members living within a variety of nations, they are multi-ethnic, multi-racial, and include members of several social classes as well. Joining forces with an army of the homeless, with Vietnam veterans, and with ecoterrorists, the Native American and other indigenous characters in the novel comprise key nodes in what is explicitly envisioned as a broader subaltern network of resistance to the structural inequities of global capitalism. Its engagement with and rethinking of global capitalism’s networking logic identifies possibilities for constructing “counternetworks [that], while drawing on the technologies and expertise diffused by the world market, reconstruct them into radically new configurations” (Dyer-Witheford 146). In this respect, Almanac of the Dead provides a prescient mapping of emergent modes of resistance within the “space of flows.”

     

    The failure to register the novel’s interrogations into the relation between social and spatial formations is, in large part, a product of a broader failure to question the opposition between the “space of places” and the “space of flows.” This very opposition forecloses a line of inquiry into socio-spatial relations by insisting that the “space of flows” prompts a simple choice between an essentialist, nationalist relation to space or a wholly deterritorialized abstraction of the social from any necessary relation to a particular, meaningful place. Closer inquiry into the complex interrelations between social and spatial formations, such as that offered by Almanac of the Dead, provides a means of recasting this choice so as to refuse global capitalism’s self-description, which, otherwise, functions in the service of its instrumental networks and the ongoing disavowal of their limits. This is absolutely necessary to conceiving, evaluating, and pursuing alternatives to existing nationalisms, to liberal multicultural identity politics, and to the transnationalisms so actively encouraged by global capitalism’s “space of flows.”

     

    Notes

     

    1. In designating global capitalist economic networks as post-Fordist, I am following David Harvey’s reading of contemporary global capitalist strategies of “flexible accumulation”–characterized by a decentralized, mobile spatial organization that endows labor processes, products, markets, and consumption with unprecedented flexibility–as a reaction against the rigidities of Fordism’s hierarchical fragmentation of the spaces of production.

     

    2. The phrase “timeless time” is borrowed from Manuel Castells, who uses it to describe the network society’s fracturing of linear, irreversible, measurable, predictable time through the use of technologies to manage time as a resource, which results in an emphasis on simultaneity and timelessness, an “ever-present” now.

     

    3. In this essay, I use “place” to designate a specific relation to space as a physical locale that is historically and culturally meaningful for its inhabitants due to its distinct physical and symbolic qualities. Within nationalism, an understanding of social space as “place” is often naturalized and the relation is understood to literally inhere in the geographic territory rather than in a socially, culturally, and historically specific relation to that locale. In the latter case, I would argue place and the identity it grounds are essentialized.

     

    4. Arguing in The New Imperialism that the logics of territory and the “open spatial dynamics of endless capital accumulation” can be coupled in a number of ways, resulting in historically unique forms of imperialism, David Harvey updates and extends the questions that Bamyeh raises with regard to the shifting relation between the political and the economic, drawing his own conclusions about the precise character and the consequences of this “new imperialism” (33).

     

    5. The latter tendency is rendered explicit by the World Bank’s redesignation of third world markets as “emerging markets” in 1985.

     

    6. The novel’s attention to the temporality and, thus, historicity of spatial formations foregrounds conflicting conceptions of space. Its rethinking of space in time draws on a tradition of Native Literature that locates itself within the conceptual space of a “fourth world,” as chronicled in Gordon Brotherston’s Book of the Fourth World: Reading the Native Americas through their Literature. The “fourth world” is commonly used to designate and acknowledge the indigenous peoples and cultures that are dearticulated and displaced by a nationalist model, yet the novel complicates this conception of a “fourth world” of Native Literature by articulating it in relation to global capitalism’s “space of flows,” which it designates as “The Fifth World.” In this regard, Almanac of the Dead not only challenges the “particular concept of space as bounded territory” that is naturalized by the “nationalist model dominant in the three-worlds theory,” but also co-implicates the “fourth world” and the “fifth world” in their status as “conceptual spaces,” which, as Tom Foster suggests in his reading of Guillermo Gómez-Peña’s “Five-Worlds Theory,” tend to rethink the boundaries of territorially defined, geopolitical space “in terms of motion, flux, and relationality” (46).

     

    7. The title page notes that Leslie Marmon Silko was residing in Tucson, Arizona at the time of publication. In choosing to locate Tucson at the center of the novel’s spatio-temporal mapping of the Americas, the novel imagines itself as a situated mapping or “local history” in Mignolo’s terms.

     

    8. This reference to global capitalism’s “supraterritorial” flows is intended to flag and to call into question, as this section of the essay does, an ongoing practice of reading global capitalism primarily in terms of an increasing “emancipation from land,” as Richard Rosencrance does, or solely in terms of processes of deterritorialization, as an increasing detachment of social relations from geographical territories.

     

    9. In describing this shift from a temporal to a spatial perspective, I am citing the “spatial turn” associated with global capitalism and postmodernism, which has been described in some detail by theorists such as Fredric Jameson, Edward Soja, David Harvey, and Manuel Castells, as a cultural dominant. I do not mean to suggest that it is either uncontested or unproblematic.

     

    10. References to “material complexity” refer to an inaccessible “outside” or environment to social systems that nevertheless serves as the basis for social systems’ operations, as the concept is theorized by Niklas Luhmann and in related, systems theoretical models. Material complexity is both the essential support for social systems and unapproachable, in its actual complexity, when unmediated by a particular social system’s self-description. Dussel draws on Luhmann’s systems theory in characterizing modernity as involving a “simplification of complexity” (“Beyond Eurocentrism” 13).

     

    11. Calabazas, and the novel more broadly, stage the difference between Euro-American and tribal knowledges as a confrontation between epistemologies rather than presenting tribal knowledges in an “unmediated relation to the world of natural objects” as this reference to the “thing itself” might appear to suggest. Calabazas’s comments point to the difference between material complexity and any social system’s description of or engagement with that material complexity.

     

    12. The electrical blackouts across the Eastern United States and Canada in August 2003, which left 60 million Americans without electricity after a tree fell on a power transmission line in Ohio provide a recent example of the vulnerability of the electrical power networks. The Internet, in spite of its decentralized structure of nodes, explicitly designed to protect the military’s communication infrastructure during a nuclear attack, is also susceptible to major shutdowns according to recent research.

     

    13. The materiality of the almanac is integral, not incidental, to its meaning and to the sustenance it provides, yet it delimits possibilities for an ongoing process of meaning-production rather than determining that meaning. This point is quite clear when the young slave fugitives journeying North with the almanac survive by eating pages of the almanac that are made out of pressed horse stomachs. They draw sustenance from the material form of the almanac, yet the possibility of eating the pages is most likely one not foreseen by the former keepers of the almanac.

     

    14. Involving and crediting the spatial dimensions of the text, equally, with the production of meaning, the almanac refuses to privilege the narrative’s temporal development at the expense of its material, spatial form. Almanac of the Dead thereby marks the imbrication of hegemonic understandings of narrative in an instrumental logic that abstracts the narrative’s temporal progression, read as its “meaning,” from its medium, its spatial instantiation. The subordination of the spatial aspects of texts to the narrative’s figurative meaning was the basis of a wholesale discrediting of the glyphs, colors, and pictographs that were central to the Mayan almanacs. This discrediting of Mayan representational forms was, furthermore, part and parcel of a broader subjugation of non-European cultures to the narratives as well as the narrative forms of Europe.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Amin, Samir. Obsolescent Capitalism: Contemporary Politics and Global Disorder. London: Zed, 2003.
    • Bamyeh, Mohammed A. “The New Imperialism: Six Theses.” Social Text 18.1 (Spring 2000): 1-29.
    • Beverley, John. Subalternity and Representation: Arguments in Cultural Theory. Durham: Duke UP, 1999.
    • Brady, Mary Pat. Extinct Lands, Temporal Geographies: Chicana Literature and the Urgency of Space. Durham: Duke UP, 2002.
    • Brenner, Neil. “Global, Fragmented, Hierarchical: Henri Lefebvre’s Geographies of Globalization.” Public Culture 10.1 (1997): 135-67.
    • Brotherston, Gordon. Book of the Fourth World: Reading the Native Americas through Their Literature. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1992.
    • Castells, Manuel. The Informational City: Information Technology, Economic Restructuring, and the Urban-Regional Process. Cambridge: Blackwell, 1989.
    • —. The Rise of the Network Society. 2nd Ed. Oxford: Blackwell, 2000.
    • Cherniavsky, Eva. “Subaltern Studies in a U.S. Frame.” Boundary 2 23:2 (1996): 85-110.
    • —. “Tribalism, Globalism, and Eskimo Television in Leslie Marmon Silko’s Almanac of the Dead.” Angelaki: Journal of the Theoretical Humanities 6.1 (April 2001): 111-26.
    • Dussel, Enrique. “Beyond Eurocentrism: The World System and the Limits of Modernity.” The Cultures of Globalization. Eds. Fredric Jameson and Masao Miyoshi. Durham: Duke UP, 1998. 3-31.
    • Dyer-Witheford, Nick. Cyber-Marx: Cycles and Circuits of Struggle in High-Technology Capitalism. Urbana: U of Illinois P, 1999.
    • Foster, Tom. “Cyber-Aztecs and Cholo-Punks: Guillermo Gómez-Peña’s Five Worlds Theory.” PMLA 117.1 (2002): 43-67.
    • Guha, Ranajit. “Preface.” Elementary Aspects of Peasant Insurgency in Colonial India. Delhi: Oxford UP, 1983.
    • —. Selected Subaltern Studies. Ed. R. Guha and Gayatri Spivak. New York: Oxford UP, 1988.
    • Harvey, David. “Cosmopolitanism and the Banality of Geographical Evils.” Millenial Capitalism and the Culture of Neoliberalism. Eds. Jean Comaroff and John L. Comaroff. Durham: Duke UP, 2001. 271-309.
    • —. The New Imperialism. Oxford: Oxford UP, 2003.
    • Massey, Doreen. Space, Place, and Gender. Cambridge: Polity, 1994.
    • Michaels, Walter Benn. The Shape of the Signifier: American Writing from 1967 to the End of History. Princeton: Princeton UP, 2004.
    • Mignolo, Walter D. “Globalization, Civilization Processes, and the Relocation of Languages and Cultures.” The Cultures of Globalization. Ed. Fredric Jameson and Masao Miyoshi. Durham: Duke UP, 1998. 32-53.
    • —. “The Many Faces of Cosmo-polis: Border Thinking and Critical Cosmopolitanism.” Public Culture 12.3 (2000): 721-748. 28 Apr. 2003. <http://muse.jhu.edu/journals/public_culture/v012/12.3mignolo.html>
    • Rosencrance, Richard. The Rise of the Virtual State: Wealth and Power in the Coming Century. New York: Basic, 1999.
    • Silko, Leslie Marmon. Almanac of the Dead. New York: Penguin, 1991.
    • —. “An Expression of Profound Gratitude to the Maya Zapatistas, January 1, 1994.” Yellow Woman and A Beauty of the Spirit: Essays on Native American Life Today. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1996. 152-54.
    • Soja, Edward W. Postmodern Geographies: The Reassertion of Space in Critical Social Theory. London: Verso, 1989.

     

  • A Critique of Neo-Left Ontology

    Carsten Strathausen

    Department of German and Russian Studies
    University of Missouri-Columbia
    StrathausenC@missouri.edu

     

    The term “ontology” occupies an increasingly prominent place in current politico-philosophical discourse. “Political philosophy forces us to enter the terrain of ontology,” declare Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri (Empire (354). Ernesto Laclau recently said that he has “concentrated on the ontological dimension of social theory.” According to Laclau, his work should be judged at “the theoretical and philosophical level” (“A Reply” 321) because it “requires a new ontology” (304). Such investment in ontology is important in much recent self-avowedly leftist political theory. Giorgio Agamben’s critique of the state of exception and of today’s concentration camps is intimately tied to his ontological reflections regarding our potential existence beyond sovereign power: “Until a new and coherent ontology of potentiality” has been found, he argues, “a political theory freed from the aporias of sovereignty remains unthinkable” (Homo Sacer44). Likewise, Alain Badiou’s political writings are intertwined with his mathematical ontology of set-theory, and Slavoj Zizek’s exhortation to return to the legacy of Lenin in order to combat global capitalism remains inseparable from his ontological determination of capital as the real.

     

    An early call to re-invent a “first philosophy” was Jean-Luc Nancy’s seminal essay “Being Singular Plural,” first published in 1996. Here, Nancy says that we must think “an ontology of being-with-one-another” (53) as the basis for a new communal politics beyond sovereignty and domination: “there is no difference between the ethical and the ontological” (99), he declares, because “only ontology, in fact, may be ethical in a consistent manner” (21). In his view, only a radical recommencement of philosophical thought can move political theory beyond its current impasse caused by the liberal defense of the status quo. In particular, Nancy distinguishes his new ontology of “being-in-common” both from Heideggerianism and from Marxism. Heidegger, so Nancy, did not take his own analysis of “Mitsein” far enough, but instead remains committed to a thinking in hierarchies: “The analytic of Mitsein that appears within the existential analytic remains nothing more than a sketch; that is, even though Mitsein is coessential with Dasein, it remains in a subordinate position” (93). Against Marxism, Nancy’s ontology insists on dissolving the the various oppositions (between essence and appearance, base and superstructure) that sustain a dialectical (i.e. Hegelian) mode of critique: “Both the theory and the practice of critique demonstrate that, from now on, critique absolutely needs to rest on some principle other than that of the ontology of the Other and the Same: it needs an ontology of being-with-one-another” (53).

     

    In this essay, I use Nancy’s reflections as a starting point for examining the reasons for and the significance of the renewed interest in a “new ontology,” particularly among certain leftist political thinkers. I argue that ontology had become a shunned concept in traditional leftist discourse because it was tainted by Heidegger and his involvement in German fascism. Moreover, I demonstrate that Jameson’s recent attempt to revive ontology as a crucial concept for Marxist theory inevitably leads him back to embrace the same old (Hegelian) dialectics of self and other, form and content–that is, precisely the kind of dualist thinking that Nancy and other neo-left ontologists seek to leave behind. Contrary to the Marxist belief in the recuperative power of negativity, they conceive of political ontology as a paradoxical terrain that “‘contradiction,’ in its dialectical sense, is entirely unable to capture,” as Laclau argues (Populist Reason 84). “So forget Hegel” (148).1

     

    However, in spite of this rejection of traditional Marxism, these theorists acknowledge the necessity to base their political theory on explicit assumptions about the “nature” of social life and the world at large. It is this tension between being and becoming that gives rise to the paradoxical definitions of ontology as a “groundless presupposition” (Nancy) or “limiting horizon” (Laclau)–formulations that seek to describe or conceive of a de-essentialized ontology, an ontology that recognizes a given (social or natural) foundation as both structurally given and as historically changing. This, then, is the problem: how to move beyond Marxist dialectics without falling prey to an essentially conservative ontology (such as Leo Strauss’s firm belief in the natural superiority of philosophers and gentlemen or Carl Schmitt’s seminal distinction between friends and enemies as constitutive of the political). Can one choose something other than (Marxist) dialectics and (Heideggerian) Dasein?

     

    I believe one can, and this essay introduces some of the major theoretical positions that have developed in response to this question. I use the generic term “neo-left” to address them in unison. I choose “neo-left” primarily because it goes along with the other two terms that have become widely accepted today–“neo-conservative” and “neo-liberal.” Moreover, the prefix “neo” connotes some of the drastic changes in global capitalism and technology, that play an important part in contemporary politics, while the suffix “left” emphasizes the continuing commitment of these thinkers to issues of economic justice and social equality. Thus, the purpose of my essay is to compare the current use of and reference to “ontology” as a crucial concept in contemporary political philosophy. Needless to say, such a comparison can neither be comprehensive nor can it do justice to the full complexity of the particular works discussed. It must be satisfied instead with an outline of the major trends and their underlying assumptions.

     

    My overall thesis is that the current interest in ontology signifies a profound change within the leftist politico-philosophical tradition, namely the belief that thought has the intrinsic power to affect and alter (but not to control or govern) the “nature” of what it thinks: “A thought is an event,” claims Nancy; “what it thinks happens to it there, where it is not” (175). Only if Being and thinking are the same can the creative “reflection” on the “nature” of things be concomitant with their “change.” Put differently, thought neither represents objective materiality (as some orthodox Marxists would claim) nor does it reflect the autonomous “dis-appearing” of things (in the sense of Heidegger’s aletheia). Rather, thought partakes of reality; the two are consubstantial. This leads me to embrace what Stephen K. White has called a “weak ontology” as the basis for thinking leftist politics. Such an ontology registers the affective power of theory to influence politics above and beyond its rational content.

     

    Marxism, Heidegger, and Ontology

     

    As exemplified in Nancy’s text, Heidegger’s work often serves as a springboard for those envisioning a “new ontology,” because Heidegger was among the first to de-essentialize ontology in his effort to move beyond classical metaphysics.2 For example, this is how Agamben states the situation:

     

    The fact that must constitute the point of departure for any discourse on ethics is that there is no essence, no historical or spiritual vocation, no biological destiny that humans must enact or realize . . . . This does not mean, however, that humans are not, and do not have to be, something, that they are simply consigned to nothingness and therefore can freely decide whether to be or not to be, to adopt or not to adopt this or that destiny (nihilism and decisionism coincide at this point). There is in effect something that humans are and have to be, but this something is not an essence nor properly a thing: It is the simple fact of one's own existence as possibility or potentiality. (Coming Community 43)

     

     

    Here, the debt to Heidegger is as unmistakable as in the work of Derrida or Levinas. But there is also the deliberate attempt to move beyond Heidegger and to dissociate his de-essentialized ontology from the horrors of fascism. Agamben first emphasizes “that Nazism . . . has its condition of possibility in Western philosophy itself, and in Heideggerian ontology in particular.” But he soon finds “the point at which Nazism and Heidegger’s thought radically diverge,” because the latter allegedly resists the “biological and eugenic” drive that characterizes the former (Homo Sacer 152-53). Whether this distinction is ultimately convincing seems less relevant than Agamben’s overall effort to think with and beyond Heidegger as he searches for a new, non-foundational and non-relational ontology.3

     

    The recent interest in political ontology thus departs from the traditional leftist position to equate ontological thinking (via Heidegger) with German fascism. Since Heidegger and up until the mid-1980’s when a deconstructive version of Marxism emerged in the works of Laclau, Mouffe, Zizek, Badiou, a.o., ontology was synonymous with Heideggerianism: “Contemporary philosophical ‘ontology’ is entirely dominated by the name of Heidegger,” Alain Badiou correctly stated in 1988 (Being and Event 9). Badiou himself, of course, will break with this tradition; yet this general identification of ontology and Heidegger allowed most leftist intellectuals at the time to dismiss the entire ontological tradition as a dangerous aberration in Western thought. As a philosophical tradition, ontology is not only suspect among leftist intellectuals. It is part of an oppressive super-structure that affirms rather than challenges the existing status quo. “In all its mutually excluding and defaming versions, ontology is apologetic,” Adorno unequivocally states in 1966 (69).4 For Adorno, the basic fault of ontology in general, and of Heidegger’s “foundational ontology” in particular, is its essentialism, which seeks the eternal, self-identical truth underneath the flow of history. “Heidegger,” we read, “refuses to reflect [the difference between expression and thing]; he stops after only the first step of the language-philosophical dialectics” (117).

     

    Ontological argument is static, undialectical, and unhistorical. It apodictically posits a truth that, following Adorno, can only be thought in and through a continuous process of self-critical reflection. The truth about ontology, therefore, is its untruth and philosophical sterility. Ontology begets ideology, because it refuses to think through and beyond contradiction the way dialectics does. Instead, Heidegger allegedly praises the mere existence of paradox as if it were truth itself. In doing so, ontology succumbs to the apologetic “affirmation of power” (136), and Adorno spends numerous pages on Heidegger’s use of the predicate “is” to substantiate this claim.5 The brute fact that the world exists and that Being “is,” so Adorno, seduces Heidegger to abandon dialectical reflection in favor of mere tautologies that refuse to mediate between the constitutive poles of subject and object, Being and beings. Instead, ontology ultimately collapses the two into one. “The whole construction of [Heidegger’s] ontological difference is a Potemkin Village” (122), Adorno concludes, because this alleged difference only serves to advocate the self-identity and self-righteousness of the way things always already are in the beginning and will have been in the end. In Heidegger, “mediation [succumbs] to the unmediated identity of what mediates and what is being mediated” (Adorno 493).

     

    In contrast, the overall goal of critical reflection must be to “once again liquefy the reified movement of thought” that characterizes (Heidegger’s) ontology (104). The way to do this is to unveil its “objective,” that is, its “truthful” dimension, which consists of its socio-ideological function. Hence, Adorno reads Heideggerian “Fundamentalontologie” as a symptom for the fate human subjectivity suffers at the hands of capitalist society. Although, philosophically speaking, Heidegger’s fetishization of Being along with his renunciation of the subject’s power of critical reflection is “untrue” and “ideological,” it is, at the same time, “true” nonetheless in so far as it “registers” the “total functionality-complex” constitutive of modern society (74). (Heidegger’s) ontology is a false thought enabled and sustained by a false human practice. Only a fundamental change in the latter could prompt the necessary dissolution of the former.

     

    Like Adorno, many traditional Marxists are reluctant to use the term “ontology” at all because, in their view, this term is part of the speculative philosophical tradition that the pragmatic approach of some Marxist theory seeks to upturn from its head onto its feet. For what distinguishes nineteenth-century Marxism from eighteenth-century philosophical materialism is precisely this emphasis on the social-active potential of mankind as opposed to the mere description of its physical components. If there is something like a Marxist ontology, it is based on human practice, which renders a priori attempts to theorize it irrelevant at best and reactionary at worst. Once again, Heidegger proves an excellent case in point, as Pierre Bourdieu argues in his 1977 book The Political Ontology of Martin Heidegger. Although Bourdieu criticizes Adorno’s alleged one-dimensional denunciation of Heidegger, he pursues the same overall goal as does Adorno, namely to situate Heidegger’s ontology within the socio-political context of his time. Bourdieu’s own methodology consists of what he calls a “political and philosophical double-lecture of Heidegger” that recognizes the “relative autonomy” of both realms–the political and the philosophical–without, however, relinquishing the critical effort to mediate between them (German edition p. 11). Bourdieu, then, defines “Heidegger’s political ontology” as “a political stance that expresses itself exclusively in philosophical terms.” In other words, the objective of Bourdieu’s investigation is to reconstruct “the comprehensive structure of the field that governs philosophical productivity” (14-16).

     

    Given the prominence of Althusserian Marxism in France at the time of Bourdieu’s essay, his structuralist terminology (“relative autonomy”; “overdetermination”; “structure of the field of productivity”) and its proclaimed difference from the critical apparatus of the Frankfurt School should not be overrated. True, Bourdieu speaks of “habitus” while Adorno speaks of “ideology”; Bourdieu regards Heidegger as a “practical operator” (64) who mediates between politics and philosophy, whereas Adorno refers to him as a “reflection” [“Widerhall“] or “sign” (“Abdrücke” (73)] of the social in the realm of philosophy. But the crucial point remains that both Adorno and Bourdieu read Heidegger’s ontology as the unconscious expression of a dynamic social process whose dynamics it fails to reflect. This failure is constitutive of ontological discourse, whose preference for stasis over movement, ground over horizon, Being over becoming is but an expression of a human “desire” (69) caused by a world that, in reality, never stands still.

     

    In short: while most critics today read Heidegger’s philosophy as a deconstruction of Western metaphysics and essentialist ontology avant la lettre, this is precisely not how Bourdieu, Adorno, or several leading Marxists understood his work. For them, ontology is an inherently conservative, if not reactionary concept. Marxist theory, it follows, should dispense with ontology and turn toward this changing world instead.6 “Always historicize” is its motto, and the “persistence of the dialectic” (Fredric Jameson) testifies to the reflective nature of Marxist thought. It is an attempt literally to think after [“nach-denken“] the real, material events that define human experience and collective practice. Hence, Étienne Balibar and Fredric Jameson continue to argue that “there is no Marxist philosophy and there never will be” (1). Rather, Marxism should “be thought of as a problematic” (Jameson, “Actually” 175) that continues to develop and change along with the object of its inquiry, namely capitalism. Only the dialectical method is able to keep pace with history as it mediates between the constitutive poles of subject and object, Being and becoming.7 Thus, Marxists do “philosophy in a materialist way,” as Pierre Macherey puts it (8). The goal, after all, is not to interpret the world, but to change it.

     

    In order to further elucidate this crucial philosophical difference between traditional Marxist and contemporary ontological discourse, let me briefly discuss their contrary understanding of paradox and contradiction. Boris Groys argues that the “central law of dialectical materialism” consists in thinking simultaneously “the unity and conflict of oppositions,” which is to say to “think in paradoxes” (35; my translation). Marxists think in contradictions because the world itself is contradictory. To quote Lenin: “In essence, dialectics examines the contradictions at the heart of things themselves” (qtd. in Groys 47)–a maxim that recalls Hegel’s formulation that “all things are in themselves contradictory in precisely the sense that this sentence, contrary to all others, expresses the truth and the essence of things ” (286; my translation). Marxist philosophy destroys rather than sustains paradox: dialectics consists precisely in the temporalization or dissolution of paradox into process. The overall aim is to unleash the dynamic tension that sustains contradiction to achieve a clearly defined goal (Communism). In so doing, dialectics thinks through contradictions rather than paradoxes; it transforms the latter into the former.8 Paradox is a decayed form of dialectics, as Adorno puts it. Unlike a contradiction, paradox remains fixed, a well-defined constellation in thought, whereas contradiction operates temporally and seeks to liquefy thought in and through the dialectical method. To ponder a paradox is to be caught in a circular reflection that seems to lead nowhere–hence Adorno’s repeated charge against Heidegger of producing mere tautologies.

     

    On this point the ontological neo-left differs from traditional Marxism: it takes paradox seriously by refusing to temporalize it. Aporias abound in contemporary politico-philosophical discourse–epitomized in Laclau’s claim “that the condition of possibility of something is also its condition of impossibility” (Mouffe 48). Walter Benjamin’s notion of “dialectics at a standstill” (578) is an early attempt in this direction. For the mythically inclined Benjamin, dialectics did not describe a teleological process toward the end of history, but a sudden awareness that this end was always already included in the beginning. Most importantly, this awareness is not “rational” and cannot be predicted in advance. Benjamin posits the ontological paradox of a folded space whose “outside” belongs to and emerges within the “inside” only after the “lightning bolt of revelation” has struck. Unlike in traditional Marxism, there are no guarantees for Benjamin that anything will happen at all. Instead, it is our sudden insight that engenders what we falsely presume to have been there all along. For it is the mere inspiration to conceive of things differently that makes them so, however slight a change this may turn out to be. This emphasis on the power of inspiration, revelation, and shock puts Benjamin at odds with traditional Marxism. His Arcades Project promotes a spatial understanding of paradox that deemphasizes the developmental nature of dialectical thought, if not of history as such.9

     

    Benjamin’s paradoxical space of dialectical stand-still is also similar to what Derrida has called “the third type of aporia,” defined as “the impossible, the antinomy, or the contradiction.” This aporia “is a nonpassage because its elementary milieu does not allow for something that could be called passage, step, walk, gait, displacement, or replacement, a kinesis in general. There is no more path . . . . The impasse itself would be impossible” (Aporias 21). It is within this impassable and impossible space that the political must be thought, according to Derrida. What thus remains of ontology is the specter of a haunted place bewitched by its own non-existence–a “hauntology,” as Derrida calls it: “(H)auntology has theoretical priority” for Derrida, Simon Critchley contends, “for the claim is that it is from this spectral drive that something like thought is born” (Ethics 147). Yet, this also means that ontology will continue to disturb the thought of deconstruction. The latter can never completely shake this specter, because hauntology itself is haunted by ontology. I want to suggest, therefore, that in spite of Derrida’s critique of ontology, the question of (deconstructive or textual) space remains inseparable from ontological questions. Let me briefly recall that “Il n’y a pas d’hors de texte” means

     

    both that there are only contexts, that nothing exists outside context, as I have often said, but also that the limit of the frame or the border of the context always entails a clause of nonclosure. The outside penetrates and thus determines the inside. (Derrida, Aporias 152-53)

     

    This spatial paradox (“nothing exists outside context,” yet “the outside [of the context] penetrates . . . the inside”) between inside and outside lies at the center of deconstruction and connects it with the various post-Marxist ontologies discussed later on in this essay. In spite of–or, rather, precisely because of–Derrida’s explicit refusal to “re-ontologize” thought (“Marx & Sons” 257), he remains a major contributor to the current debate about the relationship between ontology and politics.

     

    The Topography of Paradox

     

    The philosophical consequences–and, I shall argue, the political consequences as well–of this shift from dialectics to paradox are far-reaching. First of all, it differentiates traditional Marxist from current neo-left discourse. For the paradoxical effort to think the outside as a constitutive part of the inside from which it emerges has been crucial to post-Marxist theory ever since the publication of Ernesto Laclau’s and Chantal Mouffe’s Hegemony and Socialist Strategy in 1985.10 Insisting on the possibility of historical change and hegemonic interventions, they refer to the social field as an ontological “horizon” rather than an ontological “ground.” Whereas ground is a foundationialist term that reintroduces the surface-depth (or inside-outside) distinction, horizon implies an ever receding, historically shifting borderline that remains internal to the social and defies the internal/external distinction:

     

    This irresoluble interiority/exteriority tension is the condition of any social practice: necessity only exists as a partial limitation of the field of contingency. It is in this terrain, where neither a total interiority nor a total exteriority is possible, that the social is constituted. (111)

     

    The terrain of the social thus constitutes a self-subversive totality that, although it can never become total, nonetheless confronts no limit outside itself. Still an advocate of post-Marxism in 1996, Zizek described this “undecidable alternative Inside/Outside” (“Introduction: The Spectre” 17) as a “paradoxical topology” in which surfaces absorb depth, the outside of discourse emerges on its inside, and ideology becomes “more real that reality itself” (30).

     

    Questions of topography and historical horizons emerge as core issues in “Contemporary Dialogues on the Left,” a series of discussions among Butler, Laclau, and Zizek published in 2000. In a bizarre dance of ever-shifting alliances, each of the participants accuses the others of advocating an “ahistorical” or “quasi-transcendental” theory that remains unable to account for historical change.11 The central question is this: if we acknowledge the existence of a structural (or quasi-transcendental) limit operating within the existing socio-political field, does this acknowledgment lead to political impotence (because we cannot change this limit and hence are condemned to operate within its structural borders), as Butler implies? Or is it exactly the opposite: does this limit not actually enable political action and radical change precisely because it is a purely structural void (an “empty signifier”) whose contours and location are determined by historical shifts within the entire field, as Laclau and Zizek argue?12

     

    Many ontological neo-left thinkers espouse this latter view. Nonetheless, Laclau’s unorthodox understanding of topological borders continues to irritate not only traditional Marxists, but also thinkers much more sympathetic to contemporary theory in general. Critics like Simon Critchley, Judith Butler, and Rodolphe Gasché continue to understand the relationship between the universal and the particular in terms of a form/content divide, according to which the universal functions as a transcendental, albeit empty, “form” that is filled by some historically contingent, particular “content.” Scrutinizing Laclau’s definition of the universal as an “empty signifier,” Gasché, for example, argues that the universal must, at the very least, possess a “form of sorts” that guarantees its self-identity and thus somewhat pre-determines which historical particular can actually occupy its place:

     

    Once the empty place is thought of as the place of the universal, does it not, as this very place, betoken a content of sorts distinct from whatever contents subsequently come to fill that place? . . . Is it not thanks to this form or structure that the empty signifier or place can become the surface of inscription for a diversity of universals? (Gasché 32-33)

     

    In response, Laclau explicitly distinguishes between emptiness and abstraction, arguing that the former does not imply the latter. In his view, the charge of abstraction that Hegel raised against Kant’s dualist philosophy does not apply to his own theory of hegemony. Universals are empty, Laclau contends, both because they have no predetermined content of their own and because they do not pre-exist the chains of particulars from which they emerge: “particularity and universality are not two ontological orders opposed to each other but possibilities internal to a discursive structure” (“A Reply” 282). Put differently, Laclau resists the separation between the epistemological and the ontological implicit in Gasché’s questions. Whereas Gasché conceives of universals as some kind of (ontologically present) entities that subsist as abstract forms devoid of any (epistemologically determinable) content, Laclau denies the universal any existence at all apart from the particulars that sustain its meaning: “What is the result of a historical construction is not the filling of a transcendentally established place, but the constant production and displacement of the place itself” (283). The effort to think this process “requires a new ontology,” Laclau concludes, because it considers the “kinds of relations between entities which cannot be grasped with the conceptual arsenal of classical ontology” (304).

     

    Likewise, Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri have argued that “political theory must deal with ontology” because “politics cannot be constructed from the outside” anymore (Empire 354): “In Empire . . . all places have been subsumed in a general ‘non-place’” of pure immanence (353). Like Laclau, Hardt and Negri insist that their notion of “ontology is not a theory of foundation” (Labour 287), for which reason they speak of the “ontological horizon of Empire” instead of its ground (Empire 355; emphasis added). Yet Hardt’s and Negri’s account of political ontology differs from Laclau’s in one crucial aspect: it is not based upon the (Lacanian) notion of structural lack, but on (Foucault’s and Deleuze’s) bio-political and life-philosophical belief in the fullness of life.13

     

    Rather than trying to expose the constitutive void at the center of global capitalism, Hardt and Negri emphasize the plentitude and enormous productivity of the current imperial Order. The latter is able to integrate everything that seeks to establish itself outside of that Order, because “transcendence is always a product of immanence,” as Deleuze put it (Pure Immanence 31). For Deleuze and Guattari (as well as for Hardt and Negri), “immanence is immanent only to itself and consequently captures everything, absorbs All-One, and leaves nothing remaining to which it could be immanent” (What is Philosophy? 45). Immanence has no limits, neither outside nor within itself. Since immanence is all there is, Negri concludes that “ontology has absorbed the political” so that “all that which is political is biopolitical” (234). Political philosophy today is no longer about contemplating “the good life,” as Leo Strauss and other conservatives would argue. Instead, it is about life as such, about “bare” or “naked life” itself and its relation to Being. It is about ontology, because “the ‘body’ is always already a biopolitical body” (Homo Sacer 187).

     

    The latter claims are central to Agamben’s work. Agamben, too, recognizes the increasing interdependence of political philosophy and ontology that determines the fate of what he calls “homo sacer.” A crucial notion in Agamben’s overall politico-philosophical project, homo sacer defines a life that may be killed but not sacrificed, a life that is neither secular nor divine and thus “exceeds the sphere both of law and of sacrifice” (86). Agamben’s most frequently used historical example is life in the German concentration camps (his examples include the German concentration camps, the Gulag, and Guantanamo Bay): the inhabitants of the camps are stripped of all civil protection and thus are the literal referent for–indeed the embodiment of–“human rights.” For what exactly are the “rights” of human life outside of any concrete juridical order? Situated at “the zone of indistinction” between the sacred and the profane, between the (unprotected) biological order of “bare life” (zoe) and the (protected) juridical order of “socio-political life” (bios), homo sacer defines the very “threshold” that both connects and separates the two spheres.

     

    Agamben contends that these human “objects” that have been reduced to bare life posit a basic ontological challenge to political philosophy. If the twentieth century has indeed witnessed the gradual ascension of the state of exception to the overall paradigm of Western government, as Agamben claims,14 then the very distinction between inside and outside can no longer be maintained. Instead of trying to reestablish these classical distinctions, one needs to think beyond categories and distinctions in general:

     

    Every attempt to rethink the political space of the West must begin with a clear awareness that we no longer know anything of the classical distinction between zoe and bios, between private life and political existence, between man as a simple living being at home in the house and man’s political existence in the city. This is why the restoration of classical political categories proposed by Leo Strauss . . . can have only a critical sense. There is no return from the camps to classical politics. In the camps, city and house became indistinguishable, and the possibility of differentiating between our biological body and our political body . . .was taken from us forever. (187-88)

     

    On the basis of this premise, Agamben calls for a new or “coming politics” that moves beyond the state of exception as the contemporary paradigm of governance. Such a new politics, however, can only emerge in the context of a new metaphysics and a new way of thinking that “return(s) thought to its practical calling” (5). Why? Because, in Agamben’s view, the current dilemma of a global state of exception is not a perversion of the classical Greek distinction between zoe and bios, but its logical conclusion. Only because political philosophy was, from its very beginning, based upon this life/politics distinction was it possible for the gradual erosion of the latter to lead to a crisis of the former.15 For once Greek philosophy had stipulated the separation between life and politics, it was merely a question of time before this entire scheme would come undone and self-de(con)struct. Today, the damage is done and there is no turning back. Instead, Agamben suggests that we seize upon the contemporary fusion of life and politics as an opportunity to think about community differently so as to move beyond its classical metaphysical framework. This task, however, “implies nothing less than thinking ontology and politics beyond every figure of relation” (47). Again and again, Agamben returns to this notion of a “non-relationship” and his effort “to think the politico-social factumno longer in the form of a relation” at all (60).

     

    New Ontological Horizons

     

    Our discussion so far has shown that the shift from dialectics to paradox inaugurates a new meaning of “ontology” in contemporary political discourse. Ontology no longer describes the ancient philosophical attempt to define the “essence” or “nature of being” in positive, non-paradoxical terms. Nor does it claim to provide an absolute perspective guided by pure thought that operates beyond the pale of history. Since this Archimedian viewpoint does not exist–or, more precisely, since such a perspective is always already located inside rather than outside the (social or “natural”) space it seeks to analyze–, ontology, instead, begins to function as a heuristic device for the historically contingent construction of a different “nature” from the one we presently inhabit. Ontology, in other words, is more than a mere historical construction; it is also constructive in the sense that it informs a particular political vision for change.

     

    Thus, we may speak of ontology as a ground only in so far as we understand this “ground” to be constantly shifting and evolving. One must not confuse this recognition of historical contingency with the Marxist emphasis on history. The major difference is not simply the teleological, eschatological nature of classical-orthodox Marxism, according to which history is a more or less pre-determined rather than contingent process. Rather, the difference lies in the fact that non-deconstructive versions of Marxism assume a structural correlation between philosophical statements and the sociopolitical field that allegedly generates them. Both Bourdieu and Adorno regard the emergence and success of Heidegger’s ontology as deeply significant in the sense that it carries an objective meaning pointing back to the realm of the social, to history and the real itself–such as it existed in the middle of the twentieth century, of course. Indeed, Marxists readily acknowledge that the real changes historically along with thoughts that reflect the real. But what does not change, according to traditional Marxism, is the necessary existence of a dependency between these changes, i.e., between the primary, economic changes and the secondary changes in thought as it reflects (upon) the first.

     

    Hence, from a Marxist perspective, the current renaissance of ontological thought must be significant: it must unveil an objective truth about the current state of global capitalism. To be sure, there may be some discussion as to what exactly this truth is. But it is precisely the assumption of an “objective” significance of a given (theoretical) event that current ontological discourse leaves behind. If the proclamation of a new ontology is both constructed and constructive, this can only mean that whatever sociopolitical significance this proclamation may attain over time is constructed as well. It is a mere potentiality. Hence, the seemingly “objective” claims of ontological neo-left discourse can only emerge as a retrospective projection from within the new reality potentially inaugurated by this discourse itself. Otherwise, this discourse becomes meaningless in the sense that it only serves as a blank screen for the projection of a pre-established interpretative scheme. It is reduced to a mere symptom whose meaning is pre-determined by the old context in which it is made to signify.

     

    Put differently, from this perspective, if a theory fails to affect the reality it ponders, it has no active meaning at all, objective or otherwise. A thought that fails to alter the non-discursive, material environment from which it emerges does not exist as thought. It is nothing but a description or a symptom. As such, it may be judged accurate or inaccurate. But a description is not a thought, because the latter emerges only retrospectively from within the reality it has managed to transform. I want to emphasize that this idea does not bespeak Heideggerianism and its effort to identify the nature of Being. It merely phrases a materialist insight in ontological idioms. Whereas Heidegger understood thinking as “Nach-denken,” the ontological neo-left focuses on “mit-denken” as a part of Being. Like all thought, this idea remains a construct. Whether or not this construction is “true” is as yet a meaningless question. Its future answer would depend on the ability of the construction to alter its own conditions of emergence such that it will have stepped into being and will have acquired meaning.

     

    I now turn to yet another important thinker in the Marxist tradition to elucidate this point. In his essay on “Ontology and Utopia,” first published in 1994 and reprinted in Archaeologies of the Future (2005), Fredric Jameson indeed refers to a “Marxian ontology” (240). One of its major concerns, he claims, is to account for the possibility that a different collectivity would emerge from within a given structure. How can something new emerge from the old? Jameson’s answer is to build “eventfulness into the structure itself” (246) and thus to fold the new (outside) back into the old (inside)–dialectically, of course: “For, once again, Marx is ontological in the way in which he grasps the collective forms as already latent in the capitalist present: they are not merely desirable (or ethical), nor even possible, but also and above all inevitable, provided we understand the bringing to emergence of that inevitability as a collective human task and project” (250; emphasis added).

     

    It is precisely this notion of “inevitability” that remains problematic for the ontological neo-left. If Marxist ontology consisted of nothing but this belief in immanence–according to which “what already is, or what is virtual, latent, at the level of fantasy or half-formed wish or inclination, is also the rockbed of the social structure itself” (Jameson, Archaeologies 252)–few would object. One might even grant Jameson’s persistent attempt to align “the great thought of immanence” with Hegel and Marx (251) or to transform Deleuze into a dialectical thinker.16 But Jameson ultimately wants to square this new version of dialectical immanence with the scientific aspirations of traditional Marxism, according to which the emergence of something new (such as the arrival of socialism) is objectively “inevitable.” Such a claim, however, is forced to disregard the temporal aporia that governs the relationship between event and structure. An event can only be judged inevitable once it has actually occurred and thereby altered the original situation from which it emerged. Put differently, we might say that an event will have been inevitable once we look back on it from a later point in time and space inaugurated by the event. But not before.

     

    Jameson comes close to this insight in his latest book when he, once again, ponders the relationship between base and superstructure: “Can culture be political, which is to say critical and even subversive, or is it necessarily reappropriated and coopted by the social system of which it is a part?” (xv). In a lengthy footnote that forms part of his response, Jameson elaborates that “from another standpoint, this discussion of the ambiguous reality of culture . . . is an ontological one” and has to do with the “amphibiousness of being and its temporality” (xv-xvii.). For culture (along with the “desire called utopia” that sustains Marxism as an ongoing problematic in global capitalism) is based on a “mixture of being and non-being”: on the one hand, cultural desire testifies to what lacks in the present such as it currently exists, while, on the other, it imagines a future that does not yet exist. Although Jameson characterizes this temporal paradox as “mildly scandalous for analytical reason,” he nonetheless calls for its integration into his “Marxian ontology” (xv-xvii).

     

    Here, it seems, we have moved away from the traditional leftist disdain for both ontological thinking and paradox, since Jameson explicitly acknowledges the aporetic structure of utopian desire (i.e., the desire for improvement) as a constitutive part of Marxist theory. The question remains what consequences he draws from this insight for the formulation of a leftist (Marxist) politics. As mentioned above, the ontological neo-left takes the constitutive paradox of Being as a starting point for reexamining the history and goals of political philosophy. But since Jameson still remains committed to traditional Marxist principles such as “the primacy of the economic” over “the political (and other) superstructures” (219), he considers Marxism’s “neglect of political theory . . . a happy consequence” that he refuses to dismantle. So instead of political theory, he discusses the nature of what he calls a “Utopian formalism” (xiii) that seeks to “illuminate its historical conditions of possibility: for it is certainly of the greatest interest for us today to understand why Utopias have flourished in one period and dried up in another” (xiv).

     

    Here we return to the kind of Marxist analysis of culture we encountered in Adorno and Bourdieu. For Jameson, looking into the future always leads one to gaze at the past–but not in order to recognize simply what happened (namely a contingent process that could have unfolded otherwise although it now appears to have been necessary), but in order to “objectively” determine the “inevitable” outcome of what allegedly had to happen. This skewed perspective allows him to connect the new to the old in a seamless, that is, dialectical fashion. Indeed, although Jameson explicitly welcomes disruption as a “new discursive strategy” to resist the current status quo, his strategy is ultimately little more than a formal exercise in dialectical thinking. For since “Utopia is the form such disruption necessarily takes,” Jameson insists that “the Utopian form proper . . . has its political role to play, and in fact becomes a new kind of content in its own right” (231). In the end, Utopian “form becomes content” (212). Thus we return to Hegel and the dialectical dissolve of paradox into contradiction.

     

    In contrast, the ontological neo-left stops dialectics, embraces paradox, and ruptures thought. Or, better, it inaugurates a different kind of thought because it thinks thought’s relation to Being differently. Its goal is to promote new ideas, and although these ideas need not add up to a particular political program, they confer upon thought greater independence and material relevance than even Jameson seems willing to grant it. More specifically, the ontological neo-left dispenses with the traditional Marxist idea of the “relative autonomy” of cultural politics (i.e., of thought) vis-à-vis the economy. Instead, it considers the potential productivity of thought to disrupt the given status quo, including its economic structure. This disruption can only occur if thought identifies substance rather than form. Thought must act as (a part of) substance rather than try to reflect it.

     

    Naming

     

    So far, I have argued that Marxist theory and contemporary political philosophy differ substantially with regard to their understanding of ontology. While traditional Marxists denounce ontology as an essentialist and ahistorical discourse, the neo-left conceives of ontology as a de-essentialized discursive formation that both reflects and informs political acts and historical events. They can do so only because they accept rather than dissolve the paradoxical nature of things. Put differently: for Marxists, there is only way to move beyond paradox, namely dialectics, with Hegel and Marx lighting the way. But if we accept that dialectics is only one among many ways to deal with our ontological paradox, it follows, first, that the way in which we conceive of this paradox deeply affects the kinds of actions we are likely to support, and second, that the future result of these actions remains contingent and unpredictable from our present position. Marxists cannot endorse either of these propositions.

     

    However, on the other side of this divide separating Marxist and contemporary discourse, there obviously remain vast and crucial differences among those who (explicitly or implicitly) call for a “new ontology.” Hence, it is hardly surprising to find a variety of names attached to different groups of thinkers engaged in political ontology today. Since the term “New Left” is already taken (it refers to the group of writers and activists around Herbert Marcuse in the late sixties and early seventies), most critics associate the current ontological turn with “post-Marxism” or with the movement toward “radical democracy.”17 These terms, however, are also problematic, because they are strongly linked to the works of Laclau and Mouffe, who originally promulgated them (and were supported in this, at least initially, by Zizek). Hence, “post-Marxism” and “radical democracy” are less apt to describe some of the other theorists who, albeit confronting the same questions, pursue a somewhat different route than do Laclau and Mouffe. Alain Badiou, and Bruno Bosteels, for example, reject what they call “speculative leftism,” that is, a form of “post-Marxist” theory that is severed from the original communist project.18 Bosteels in particular has criticized “radical democracy” for its actual “lack of politics.” What remains of the project in the end, he argues, is “an imitation, within philosophy, of the revolutionary act” rather than the real thing itself (“For Lack” 73).

     

    This problem of “naming” remains crucial to contemporary political philosophy. It is not just an academic but a political issue. Because if thought and discourse matter in the sense that they are politically effective, then the question of how to name the current strand of political ontology will itself have some influence on our current situation. This is why Badiou (as well as Jacques Rancière) has advanced the term “metapolitics,” which he opposes to traditional political philosophy. The former is concerned with “real instances of politics as thought,” whereas the latter believes that “since no such politics exists, it falls to philosophers to think ‘the’ political” (Metapolitics xxxix). Metapolitics describes “what a philosophy declares, with its own effects in mind, to be worthy of the name ‘politics.’ Or alternatively, what a thought declares to be a thought, and under whose condition it thinks what a thought is” (152). Following Badiou, Hallward has argued for what he calls a “politics of prescription.” The latter, he claims, can break more radically with the existing liberal-democratic system than those inspired by “radical democracy” or by “post-Marxism.”

     

    Obviously, there will not and there cannot be one name that fits all, and my own suggestion–the “neo-left”–is hardly an exception. But I want to insist on the political importance of what might otherwise appear to be an abstract theoretical debate about labels. The point is that non-essential ontologies undermine this very distinction between theory and practice, thought and action. The same is true for the monist philosophical tradition (leading from Spinoza to Bergson and Deleuze) that influences many neo-leftist thinkers. This tradition is based not on the separation, but on the connection of thought and movement. In a purely immanent universe, thinking is (a form of) action, and the creation of new philosophical concepts itself amounts to an intervention within the sociopolitical field.19

     

    Here we have arrived at a crucial junction in current ontological discourse. For we might distinguish between what Agamben calls a “line of immanence and a line of transcendence” (Potentialities 239) in order to delineate the two major camps. Under the latter, Agamben lists Kant, Husserl, Levinas and Derrida, whereas the former comprises Spinoza, Nietzsche, Deleuze and Foucault. Heidegger is situated in between the two lines–an appropriate position given Heidegger’s ambiguous status as one of the first philosophers to de-essentialize ontology. Since Agamben himself does not elaborate on this configuration in the context of political ontology, we might want to add that Deleuze, Hardt, Negri, and Agamben take their place along the line of immanence, while Laclau, Mouffe, Badiou, Zizek and Rancière belong to the line of transcendence.

     

    Moreover, Agamben’s distinction between immanence and transcendence remains intimately linked to the distinction between biological plentitude and structural lack. As Tønder and Thomassen argue in their excellent analysis of this distinction, an ontology of lack “emphasizes the hegemonic nature of politics,” whereas an ontology of abundance “cultivates a strategy of pluralization” in order to realize political demands (7). Put differently, the latter ontology focuses on emergent networks of life below–and thus independent from–representation, whereas the former focuses on the construction of identities through representation. According to this scheme, Deleuze, Hardt, Negri, and Agamben certainly belong to an ontology of abundance, while Laclau, Mouffe, Badiou, Zizek, and Rancière form part of an ontology of lack.

     

    It thus appears that the two lines of distinction–the one juxtaposing abundance and lack, the other contrasting immanence and transcendence–overlap and supplement each other perfectly. However, critics have rightly pointed out that this neat matrix does not withstand closer examination.20 Derrida refers to the “quasi-transcendence” (“Justice” 282) that sustains the practice of deconstructive reading, and his work cannot simply be assimilated to the history of transcendent philosophy. Likewise, Laclau’s and Mouffe’s as well as Badiou’s and Zizek’s models rely on what might be called a “negative” or “inverted” form of transcendence–Laclau names it a “failed transcendence” (Populist Reason 244)–since all of them locate the “realm beyond” as a void or empty place within rather than outside the social structure. If this were otherwise, these theorists would violate or abandon their central premise concerning the non-essentialist and unstable ground of political ontology. It also seems noteworthy that Laclau’s ontology is based on rhetoric (i.e., catachresis) while Badiou’s ontology is based on mathematics (i.e., set theory). The former insists on a linguistic model that the latter explicitly declares insufficient for ontological thinking. Finally, one might point out that Zizek, according to Laclau, pursues “two incompatible ontologies” at the same time (Populist Reason 235), while Rancière, according to Badiou, does not develop any ontology at all.21

     

    In spite of its great heuristic value, then, the distinction between abundance and lack also occludes a number of important differences within these groups. Let me briefly consider the question of historical change and how to bring it about. I have already discussed Badiou’s critique of Laclau’s notion of “radical democracy,” according to which it remains both too “speculative” and abstract on the one hand and too liberal or anti-revolutionary on the other. Those sympathetic to Badiou’s philosophical framework, like Peter Hallward and Bruno Bosteels, explicitly condone this critique. And although Zizek shares Laclau’s theoretical framework and both are influenced by Lacan,22 he too has charged Laclau with political quietude and a complete disregard for “a particular leftist political practice” (Ticklish 174). A proponent of radical, militant action, Zizek instead reiterates the Marxist-Leninist rhetoric of class struggle and socialist revolution. The overall goal for the “ethical, militant act,” Zizek claims, is to disrupt the seemingly homogeneous terrain of liberal democracy and global capitalism. Calling for an “ethics of the real” and a “crossing of the social fantasy,” he wants to force people to acknowledge their unconscious desire for ideological models of culpability (the Jew, the Other, etc.). In other words, the “ethical act” is meant to expose the hidden existence of those who are exploited by or excluded from the current social order. In concrete political terms, it is a question of exposing the structural void that underlies the neo-liberal fantasy of the universal order of global capitalism.

     

    Laclau, in contrast, has shown little patience with the revolutionary rhetoric of Zizek or of Badiou. For him, the only way to achieve particular political goals is to build “chains of equivalences” that operate within rather than outside the existing democratic system. From Laclau’s perspective, Zizek’s and Badiou’s exhortations to withdraw from rather than engage with the democratic system run the risk of relinquishing political power to the right. Given Zizek’s belief in the absolute priority of class struggle and anti-capitalism, Laclau concludes that “Zizek cannot provide any theory for the emancipatory subject” (Populist Reason 238). He even locates Zizek on the other side of the central divide between immanence and transcendence. Like Hardt and Negri, Zizek allegedly remains committed to a (Hegelian rather than Deleuzian) “form of immanence” (242) that is politically sterile. For Laclau, all forms of immanence necessarily lead to a “theoretical framework [in which] politics becomes unthinkable” (“Can Immanence” 4).

     

    Hardt and Negri have tried to respond to this and similar criticism by distinguishing between two different yet interrelated dimensions of their emancipatory subject, the “multitude.” They discern an ontological dimension that regards “the multitude from the standpoint of eternity” as that which “acts always in the present, a perpetual presence,” and a political or historical dimension that “will require a political project to bring it into being,” because it does not yet exist (Multitude 221). This “strange, double temporality” of the multitude as that which “always-already and not-yet” exists allows Hardt and Negri to deflect the charges of philosophical utopianism and of political vanguardism: “If the multitude were not already latent and implicit in our social being, we could not even imagine it as a political project; and, similarly, we can only hope to realize it today because it already exists as a real potential” (221-22). The multitude, in other words, is both present and future, real and imagined. It gradually steps into being as that which it always already was–an almost Hegelian conclusion that results directly from Hardt’s and Negri’s immanent ontology of abundance. In contrast, Laclau, Badiou, Rancière and Zizek argue that the subject emerges only in response to or in conjunction with the inevitable void that constitutes the social structure as a whole–a void that simply does not exist for Hardt and Negri. It follows that theorists of lack regard identities as inherently unstable and contingent. All identities need to be articulated (i.e., represented) politically; they do not simply unfold their always already inherent potential of being, as does Hardt’s and Negri’s multitude.

     

    Yet again, there exist important differences among theorists of lack in this regard as well, most notably in their respective reading of Lacan. Like Laclau, Badiou has acknowledged his indebtedness to Lacan, particularly in regard to their propensity for mathematical formulae.23 Yet Badiou has also insisted on a crucial difference between his and the Lacanian notion of the void. The latter relates to the subject, whereas Badiou’s relates to being: “Let us say that philosophy localizes the void as condition of truth on the side of being qua being, while psychoanalysis localizes the void in the Subject” (Infinite Thought 87). For Lacan, the subject figures a structural void within the symbolic order, Badiou argues. Thus, the Lacanian subject remains passive and severed from the emergence of an event that defies structural causality. Lacan’s structuralism, in Badiou’s view, does not allow for the possibility of a radically new beginning (i.e., a truth-event) taking place within a given Order or historical situation. To avoid this impasse, Badiou’s “evental” philosophy conceives of the subject not as void, but as the infinitely extended response to an event that exposes the void. This response, the decision of a “subject-to-be” that an event has taken place, initiates a truth-procedure that breaks through the reified state of the situation. According to Badiou, this account of subjectivity can overcome the legacy both of Lacan’s and of Althusser’s ahistorical structuralism. In Zizek’s words, both Badiou and Laclau try to resist what they perceive as the “Lacanian ontologization of the subject,” namely to identify the subject with “the constitutive void of the structure” (Ticklish 159). In contrast, Laclau and Badiou render the subject “consubstantial with a contingent act of decision” (159).

     

    But Zizek has also charged both Laclau and Badiou with misunderstanding and simplifying the temporal dynamism at work in Lacan’s structuralist version of subjectivity. According to Zizek, Lacan’s subject is not simply a structural void (as Badiou and Laclau claim), but emerges at this place only as the retrospective effect of its failed representation in language. Indeed, once this temporal paradox of Lacan’s “future anterior” is taken into consideration, Zizek argues, the very “opposition between the subject qua ontological foundation of the order of Being and the subject qua contingent particular emergence is [exposed as] . . . false: the subject is the contingent emergence/act that sustains the very universal order of Being” (160).

     

    Why should all this matter politically? It matters because if the subject indeed “sustains . . . the order of Being,” as Zizek maintains, then it can hardly go wrong with its actions, which is why Zizek affords a more militant rhetoric than others. For him, every authentic, militant act simultaneously alters the ethical categories by which it could it judged.24 Badiou is more careful at this point. Although he, too, argues for the interdependency of event and subject(ivity), the latter emerges in response to an event and not as its cause. The subject names the event and remains faithful to it, but it does not create the event as such. This opens up the possibility that a subject might misjudge and support an “event” that turns out to be catastrophic (for example totalitarianism).25 Most importantly, Badiou’s subject does not “sustain . . . the order of Being.” It sustains a particular state of the situation or supports its rupture, but it remains completely severed from Being qua Being, that is, from the ontological level of pure multiplicity that Badiou equates with mathematics. Laclau, finally, rarely refers to the “subject” at all–he prefers the term identity instead–nor does he speak of events or revolutionary change. For him, change always occurs within a given social structure through a different alignment of already existing political forces–hence his “reformist” theory as opposed to Badiou’s and Zizek’s “radicalism.” These differences about how to conceive of political subjectivity are most evident on the terminological level: while Zizek holds fast to the traditional Marxist notion of “class-struggle,” Rancière refers to the “proletariat . . . as the dissolution of all classes” (Disagreement 18)–and thus, in Laclau’s words, talks about class-struggle only “to add that it is the struggle of classes that are not classes” (Populist Reason 248)–whereas Laclau rejects any references to traditional class-struggle tout court.

     

    Concluding Remarks

     

    I have argued that the two major philosophical distinctions (immanence vs. transcendence, plentitude vs. lack) called upon to categorize the various proponents of a new political ontology are both important and insufficient. They are important because they help identify the overall goal of the ontological neo-left, which is political participation and collective inclusion in society. Their shared objective remains to overcome the inside/outside dialectic by means of a non-foundational ontology. But they are insufficient for two reasons: first, because they occlude other important similarities and distinctions that both sever and connect these theorists, as shown above. And second, because they are philosophical distinctions that claim to discern the political potential allegedly inherent in different ontologies. But we already know that there is no pre-determined path leading from philosophy to politics, from thought to action–unless we return to traditional metaphysics or orthodox Marxism. In Laclau’s and Mouffe’s terminology, we can say that there is no transparent or rational connection between the ontological and the ontic level. It is precisely this logical gap between philosophy and politics that enables or sustains the various efforts to build a bridge between the two. This gap also accounts for the recurrent charge against the ontological neo-left (and within the neo-left) of lacking a clear political program.

     

    But the existence of this logical gap does not mean that there is no connection at all between philosophy and politics, or that an innovative thought will not affect a given situation. It simply means that there is no rational or scientific proof for this eventuality, which, in the end, remains a matter of faith alone. As long as neo-left theorists embrace a non-essentialist ontology, questions about how best to achieve economic equality and social justice remain unanswerable–for if they could be answered, the ontology in question would no longer be “groundless” or unstable, but provide a dependable basis for how to change the world. For this reason alone, a non-essentialist ontology must always be “weak” in the sense that it remains “both fundamental and contestable,” as Stephen White has argued (2). Ontologies inspire and motivate political actors in fundamental ways, but they remain a matter of belief, not science. From this, White concludes that ontologies “are not simply cognitive in their constitution and effects, but also aesthetic-affective” (31)–this is precisely what makes them contestable in the first place. Ontologies literally live (i.e., they become embodied and practiced) by the credo of those who adhere to them, and this credo is not simply a matter of rational power or philosophical logic. There are other forces at work here, such as passion, unconscious beliefs and drives, aesthetics, and, above all, the way in which all of them are expressed, marketed, and “consumed.”

     

    I believe that the current discussion of political ontology would benefit from a stronger emphasis on this aesthetic-affective dimension of politics. There are some who are moving in this direction. Jacques Rancière, for one, fully acknowledges that “politics is a paradoxical form of action” and regards it as “first and foremost an intervention upon the visible and the sayable” (“Ten Theses” 34, 135). For Rancière, aesthetics is an irreducible part of both the political and of politics. Likewise, William Connolly argues that the best way to deal with the dispute between transcendence and immanence is to pursue an ethos of agonistic respect for each other:

     

    The pursuit of such an ethos is grounded in the assumption that residing between a fundamental image of the world as either created or uncreated and a specific ethico-political stance resides a sensibility that colors how that creed is expressed and portrayed to others . . . . An existing faith thus consists of a creed or philosophy plus the sensibility infused into it. (47-48)

     

    What mediates between philosophy and politics is an aesthetic sensibility or affect that cannot be rationalized without being lost. One of the reasons why the current philosophical discourse about ontology has become increasingly entrenched may be the disregard of its affective qualities. Hallward, for example, considers his politics of prescription “indifferent to the manipulations of passionate attachment.” Even though he acknowledges that “politics is always affective,” he nonetheless insists that “even the most affective prescription can be sustained only at a critical distance from the ‘passionate’ or ’emotional’” (“Politics” 785). And Laclau, too, considers affect “not something which exists on its own, independently of language; it constitutes itself only through the differential cathexes of a signifying chain” (Populist Reason 111). In other words, affect is the result of an equivalential logic; it is born of articulation instead of preceding it. In contrast, I believe it is crucial to maintain Brian Massumi’s distinction between affect and emotion: the latter refers to the linguistic representation of the raw, impersonal energy engendered by the former. After leaving behind traditional metaphysics and essentialist thinking, contemporary political ontology must now turn toward the affective realm of human existence as the new challenge for active thought.

     

    Notes

     

    1. For a different position arguing the renewed importance of Hegel in the context of neo-left ontology, see Nathan Widder, “Two Routes from Hegel,” in Tønder and Thomassen 32-49.

     

    2. This is also Oliver Marchart’s central point in “The Absence at the Heart of Presence: Radical Democracy and the ‘Ontology of Lack’,” in Tønder and Thomassen 17-31.

     

    3. Eva Geulen notes the strong ambivalence and hesitation that characterizes Agamben’s effort to dissociate Heidegger from Nazism. See Geulen 118-23.

     

    4. See also Adorno 73, as well as the subtitle of Adorno’s earlier essay on the “Jargon of Authenticity,” which explicitly categorizes Heidegger’s philosophy as a “German Ideology.”

     

    5. Cf. Adorno 104-25.

     

    6. In a brief review of Herbert Marcuse’s study of Hegel’s Ontology in 1932, Adorno praises Marcuse’s book precisely because it advocates this Marxist move away from “foundational ontology [Fundamentalontologie] toward the philosophy of history, from historicity to history” (Adorno 204). But he also criticizes Marcuse for holding fast to the ontological question at all: “one might wonder: why should the ontological question precede the interpretation of the real historical facts at all” (204)? Indeed, it should not, according to Marxist thought. For what trumps ontology are “real historical facts” and their critical reflection in the mind of the thinking subject.

     

    7. The emphasis here remains on the Marxist tradition as opposed to the actual writings of Marx, who uses the term “dialectics” only rarely and does not subscribe to the scientific Weltanschauung later proclaimed by orthodox Marxism. In fact, the term “dialectical materialism” is absent from the writings of Marx and Engels. Marx does not refer to the “laws” of history, but to mere “tendencies” inherent in historical developments. Nonetheless, dialectics is a crucial term for Engels, particularly for his attempted refutation of Kant’s transcendentalism in his Anti-Dühring (1878) and the later Dialectics of Nature (1883). And clearly dialectics does play a crucial role in twentieth-century Marxism, from Lenin and Stalin to Adorno, Althusser, and Jameson. My comments thus focus precisely on this “Persistence of the Dialectic,” as Jameson phrased it in 1990. See Jameson, Late Marxism.

     

    8. I realize that this distinction between contradiction and paradox is not customary in analytical philosophy, which focuses instead on that between “semantic” and “logical” paradoxes. According to Bunnin and Yu, “logical paradoxes . . . indicate that there must be something wrong with our logic and mathematics,” whereas semantic paradoxes “arise as a result of some peculiarity of semantic concepts such as truth, falsity, and definability” (632). From our own deconstructive perspective, of course, this analytical juxtaposition of “logic” and “semantics” is dubious at best, and Bunnin and Yu rightly note that this “distinction is not without controversy” (503). In contrast, my own distinction between contradiction and paradox seems more pertinent in our context. Indeed, Simon Blackburn defines contradiction with explicit reference to Hegel and Marx: “A contradiction may be a pair of features that together produce an unstable tension in a political or social system” (81; emphasis added). It is precisely this dualist understanding of contradiction that I want to distinguish from a single paradoxical proposition such as “This statement is false.”

     

    9. See also Adorno’s famous critique of Benjamin’s Arcades Project, according to which Benjamin’s study “is located at the crossroads of magic and positivism” because it lacks “mediation” and historical awareness (Schriften I/3 1096).

     

    10. For a detailed discussion of the term “constitutive outside” and its importance for radical democracy, see Thomassen.

     

    11. Butler opens the discussion with this question: “Can the ahistorical recourse to the Lacanian real be reconciled with the strategic question that hegemony poses, or does it stand as a quasi-transcendental limitation on all possible subject-formations and, hence, as indifferent to politics?” (Butler et al. 5). In response, both Zizek and Laclau never tire of dismissing this opposition as “a false one,” because, in Zizek’s words, “it is the very ‘ahistorical’ bar as the internal limit of the process of symbolization that sustains the space of historicity” (Butler et al. 214). Yet, Zizek also seeks to expose Laclau as a “closet-Kantian” (93), claiming that both Laclau and Butler “silently accept a set of premises” such as the capitalist market economy and the liberal-democratic political regime. It follows, for Zizek, that “all the changes they propose are changes within this economico-political regime” rather than moving beyond it (223). Laclau, in turn, recognizes “Zizek’s argument [as] a variation on Butler’s about transcendental limits and historicism . . . . while Butler’s charge was addressed to Zizek’s and my own work, Zizek is formulating the same objection against Butler and myself.” And although Laclau asserts that he “will refrain from joining the club and making the same criticism–this time against Butler and Zizek,” he proceeds to do precisely that in his final response (Butler et al., 200). See also Butler et al. 5, 34, 106, 183-85, 214, 289.

     

    12. I want to emphasize that in spite of Butler’s exasperated claim that Zizek’s and Laclau’s metaphorical vocabulary “unsettle(s) topography itself” (Butler et al. 141), she nonetheless shares their overall political goal, which is to facilitate political change. Butler disagrees with them about how best to conceptualize the political field such that this change becomes conceivable in the first place. Hence, as Laclau rightly notes, at issue in the debate is “the ontological constitution of the historical as such” (Laclau 2000, 183; emphasis added). Or, in Zizek’s words, “it is the problem . . . [of] how to historicize historicism itself” (Butler et al. 106).

     

    13. This is also the main distinction in Tønder’s and Thomassen’s excellent collection of essays on Radical Democracy.

     

    14. Most forcefully in Agamben, State of Exception,1-31 in particular.

     

    15. Although Agamben at times emphasizes the decisive role of modernity for the politicization of bare life, he also makes clear “that this transformation is made possible by the metaphysics of those very ancient categories [zoe and bios],” as Andrew Norris rightly observes (“Introduction” 2).

     

    16. Cf. Jameson’s “Marxism and Dualism in Deleuze,” 13-36.

     

    17. See Tønder and Thomassen, eds.

     

    18. As Bosteels puts it: “For Badiou, there emerges a speculative type of leftism whenever communism is disjoined, and nowadays supposedly set free, from the historicity intrinsic to the various stages of Marxism. The critique of speculative leftism in this sense is actually a constant throughout Badiou’s work” (“Speculative” 754).

     

    19. Paul Patton, for example, emphasizes the illocutionary power that Deleuze and Guattari attribute to language. In their view, Patton argues, “language use is not primarily the communication of information but a matter of acting in or upon the world” (4). Similarly Jean-Luc Nancy claims that, for Deleuze, “to create a concept is not to draw the empirical under a category: but to construct a universe of its own, an autonomous universe” (“Deleuzian Fold” 110). The connections to Derrida’s understanding of the political dimension of deconstruction are also relevant in this context.

     

    20. See Tønder and Thomassen, “Introduction” 8. In their own words: “life is what infuses and dominates all production. In fact, the value of labor and production is determined deep within the viscera of life” (Empire 365). Smith, for example, points to a lack of “extensive comments on specific debates about rights” (119) and mentions that Laclau in particular “embrace[s] an increasingly formal conception of hegemony in his recent work” (177) that all too often “does not offer any historically specific reference to a particular movement’s discourse” (190). Similarly, Torfing says that post-Marxist theory “has no ambition of furnishing a detailed and fully operationalized framework for the study of all kinds of social, cultural and political relations” (291).

     

    21. Cf. Badiou, Metapolitics 116. In contrast, Jean-Philippe Deranty refers to Rancière’s “paradoxical ontology” as an “anti-ontology.”

     

    22. Zizek was among the first to forge a connection between Laclau and Mouffe’s claim about the “impossibility” of the social and Lacanian terminology (“Beyond” 254). Since then, Laclau has explicitly acknowledged that his understanding of (an empty) universality is closely tied to Lacan’s notion of the Real and of the “petit object a” (cf. Laclau, New Reflections 235; Laclau, Emancipations 66-83; Butler et al. 64-73).

     

    23. See, for example, Badiou in Hallward, “Appendix” 121.

     

    24. I have discussed Zizek’s position at length in “Facing Zizek.”

     

    25. Badiou’s Ethics deals precisely with this problem.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Adorno, Theodor W. Negative Dialektik. Jargon der Eigentlichkeit. Gesammelte Schriften. Ed. Rolf Tiedemann. Vol. 6. Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1973.
    • Agamben, Giorgio. The Coming Community. Trans. Michael Hardt. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1999.
    • —. Homo Sacer: Sovereign Power and Bare Life. Trans. Daniel Heller-Roazen. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1998.
    • —. Potentialities: Collected Essays in Philosophy. Ed. and trans. Daniel Heller-Roazen. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1999.
    • —. State of Exception. Trans. Kevin Attell. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2005.
    • Badiou, Alain. Being and Event. Trans. Oliver Feltham. London: Continuum, 2005.
    • —. Ethics: An Essay on the Understanding of Evil. Trans. Peter Hallward. New York: Verso, 2001.
    • —. Infinite Thought: Truth and the Return to Philosophy. Trans. and ed. Oliver Feltham and Justin Clemens. London: Continuum, 2003.
    • Balibar, Étienne. The Philosophy of Marx. London: Verso, 1995.
    • Benjamin, Walter. Das Passagen-Werk. Gesammelte Schriften. Ed. Rolf Tiedemann. Vol. 5. Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1982.
    • Blackburn, Simon. The Oxford Dictionary of Philosophy. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1994.
    • Bosteels, Bruno. “The Speculative Left.” The South Atlantic Quarterly 104:4 (Fall 2005): 751-67.
    • Bourdieu, Pierre. Die Politische Ontologie Martin Heideggers. Trans. Bernd Schwibs. Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1988.
    • Bunnin, Nicholas, and Jiyuan Yu. The Blackwell Dictionary of Western Philosophy. Oxford: Blackwell, 2004.
    • Butler, Judith, Ernesto Laclau, and Slavoj Zizek. Contingency, Hegemony, Universality: Contemporary Dialogues on the Left. New York: Verso, 2000.
    • Connolly, William E. Pluralism. Durham: Duke UP, 2005.
    • Critchley, Simon. Ethics, Politics, Subjectivity. Essays on Derrida, Levinas, and Contemporary French Thought. New York: Verso, 1999.
    • Deleuze , Gilles. Pure Immanence: Essays on a Life. Trans. Anne Boyman. New York: Zone, 2001
    • Deleuze, Gilles, and Félix Guattari. What is Philosophy? Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Graham Burchell. New York: Columbia UP, 1991.
    • Deranty, Jean-Philippe. “Rancière and Contemporary Political Ontology.” Theory and Event 6:4 (2003).
    • Derrida, Jacques. Aporias. Trans. Thomas Dutoit. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1993.
    • —. “Justice, Law and Philosophy–An Interview with Jacques Derrida.” South African Journal of Philosophy 18.3 (Aug. 1999): 279-87.
    • —. Limited Inc. Evanston: Northwestern UP, 1988.
    • —. “Marx & Sons.” Ghostly Demarcations: A Symposium on Jacques Derrida’s Specters of Marx. Ed. Michael Sprinker. London: Verso, 1999. 213-69.
    • Gasché, Rodolphe. “How Empty Can Empty Be? On the Place of the Universal.” Laclau: A Critical Reader. Ed. Simon Critchley and Oliver Marchart. New York: Routledge, 2004. 17-34.
    • Geulen, Eva. Giorgio Agamben: Zur Einführung. Hamburg: Junius, 2005.
    • Groys, Boris. Das Kommunistische Postskriptum. Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 2006.
    • Hallward, Peter. “Appendix: Politics and Philosophy: An Interview with Alain Badiou.” Ethics: An Essay on the Understanding of Evil. Trans. Peter Hallward. New York: Verso, 2001. 95-144.
    • —. “The Politics of Prescription.” The South Atlantic Quarterly 104:4 (Fall 2005). 769-89.
    • Hardt, Michael, and Antonio Negri. Empire. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2000.
    • —. Labor of Dionysus: A Critique of the State-Form. Minnesota: U of Minnesota P, 1994.
    • —. Multitude: War and Democracy in the Age of Empire. New York: Penguin, 2004.
    • Hegel, G.F.W. Wissenschaft der Logik. Hauptwerke in 6 Bänden. Vol 3. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft, 1999.
    • Jameson, Fredric. “Actually Existing Marxism.” Polygraph 6/7 (1993): 170-95.
    • —. Archaeologies of the Future: The Desire Called Utopia and Other Science Fictions. London: Verso, 2005.
    • —. Late Marxism: Adorno, or, The Persistence of the Dialectic. New York: Verso, 1990.
    • —. “Marxism and Dualism in Deleuze.” A Deleuzian Century? Ed. Ian Buchanan. Durham: Duke UP, 1999. 13-36.
    • Laclau, Ernesto. “Can Immanence Explain Social Struggles?” Diacritics 31:4 (Winter 2001): 3-10.
    • —. Emancipation(s). New York: Verso, 1996.
    • —. New Reflections on the Revolution of Our Time. London: Verso, 1991.
    • —. “A Reply: Glimpsing the Future.” Laclau: A Critical Reader. Ed. Simon Critchley and Oliver Marchart. New York: Routledge, 2004. 277-328.
    • Laclau, Ernesto, and Chantal Mouffe. Hegemony and Socialist Strategy: Towards a Radical Democratic Politics. New York: Verso, 1985.
    • Macherey, Pierre. A Theory of Literary Production. Trans. Geoffrey Wall. London: Routledge, 1978.
    • Massumi, Brian. Parables for the Virtual: Movement, Affect, Sensation. Durham: Duke UP, 2002.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. Being Singular Plural. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2000.
    • Negri, Antonio. Time for Revolution. Trans. Matteo Mandarini. New York: Continuum, 2003.
    • Norris, Andrew, ed. “Introduction: Giorgio Agamben and the Politics of the Living Dead.” Norris 1-30.
    • —. Politics, Metaphysics, and Death: Essays on Giorgio Agamben’s Homo Sacer. Durham: Duke UP, 2005.
    • Patton, Paul. “Deleuze and Democratic Politics.” Tønder and Thomassen 50-67.
    • Rancière, Jacques. Disagreement: Politics and Philosophy. Trans. Julie Rose. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1999.
    • —. “Ten Theses on Politics.” Theory and Event 5:3 (2001).
    • Strathausen, Carsten. “Facing Zizek.” The Minnesota Review 61-62 (2004): 239-46.
    • Thomassen, Lasse. “In/Exclusions: Towards a Radical Democratic Approach to Exclusion.” Tønder and Thomassen 103-119.
    • Tønder, Lars and Lasse Thomassen, eds. Radical Democracy:. Politics Between Abundance and Lack. Manchester: Manchester UP, 2005.
    • Tønder, Lars and Lasse Thomassen. “Introduction.” Tønder and Thomassen 1-13.
    • White, Stephen K. “Affirmation and Weak Ontology in Political Theory: Some Rules and Doubts.” Theory and Event 4:2 (2000).
    • Zizek, Slavoj. “Beyond Discourse Analysis.” New Reflections on the Revolution of Our Time. Ernesto Laclau. London: Verso. 249-60.
    • —. “Introduction.” Deleuze: A Critical Reader. Ed. Paul Patton. Oxford: Blackwell, 1996. 1-17.
    • —. “Introduction: The Spectre of Ideology.” Mapping Ideology. Ed. Slavoj Zizek. London: Verso, 1994. 1-33.
    • Zizek, Slavoj. The Ticklish Subject: The Absent Center of Political Ontology. New York: Verso, 1999.
    • Zizek, Slavoj, and Glyn Daly. Conversations with Zizek. Cambridge: Polity, 2004.

     

  • The Speed of Beauty: Hans Ulrich Gumbrecht, Interviewed by Ulrik Ekman

    Ulrik Ekman

    Department for Cultural Studies and the Arts
    University of Copenhagen
    ekman@hum.ku.dk

     

    Professor Gumbrecht was interviewed after his visit in November 2005 at the Department for Cultural Studies and the Arts, Copenhagen University, Denmark, arranged by the Research Forum for Intermedial Digital Aesthetics directed by Ulrik Ekman. On that occasion, Gumbrecht gave a seminar titled “Benjamin in the Digital Age,” which focused on his editorial work with Professor Michael Marrinan (Stanford) on the essay anthology, Mapping Benjamin: The Work of Art in the Digital Age.

     

    This interview originated in conversations during Gumbrecht’s visit and continued to develop further ideas raised in the seminar. The interview took place mainly by email during the first three months following Gumbrecht’s Denmark seminar.

     

    This interview stretches the conventional limits of the genre in more ways than one. The initial agreement was that questions and answers would be exchanged several times, undergoing cuts or further articulation as each party found necessary, until a format and body of work acceptable to both was reached. The length of the interview as well as the scope and complexity of the questions and answers thus often exceed what one would normally expect. It has from the outset been a conscious decision to articulate and even to emphasize the participants’ differences of position or of approach.

     

    UE: The Dubrovnick seminar on the materialities of communication not only resulted in the publication of a very rich body of work,1 it also seems to have been of lasting importance for you. You refer frequently to this event as the high point of the seminar series,2 and one can see how it prefigures, among other things, your later work on post-hermeneutics, the production of presence, and meaning-effects. What was the motivation, at that time, for bringing specific attention to “materialities of communication,” and how do you work with that notion today?

     

    HUG: “Materialities of Communication” (back in the spring of 1987, if I remember correctly), in a still almost “Socialist” Yugoslavia, was indeed only one (the fourth) of four meetings that my friends and I organized on the Eastern Adriatic coast between 1981 and 1989. Our main motivation was, typically enough, as I might say today, to “keep alive” the theoretical and philosophical impulses in the humanities that came from the “earthshaking years” around 1970, but that we felt had been slowly ebbing since the early 1980s. I am saying “typically enough” because today, in a first and not yet totalizing retrospective, it is my impression that it has always been my task (at least my main ambition) to keep alive, and even to accelerate, intellectual movement. In those Dubrovnik years, I once said that I wanted to be a “catalyst of intellectual complexity”–and this certainly still holds true. Now, such a self-description implies that I care much less about “where” such intellectual movement will lead us. I care less about the “vectors” of our thinking than about its actual happening–and this works well with a general conception that I have of the humanities as being a (small) social system, which, rather than reducing complexity (which of course is necessary in general), adds to the intrinsic complexity of our societies. We should be less about solutions and more about producing new questions, i.e., more complexity. But back to your question, and my Dubrovnik decade–the 1980s. As I am implying, it was not very clear at the beginning of our colloquium series in which direction we could be successful with our intention to keep intellectual movement alive. What we first tried was a “revitalization” of the then-present moment through a study of the history of our disciplines. But this turned out to be too “antiquarian.” Then we tried two universally totalizing concepts, i.e., that of “historical periods” (in German: Epochen) and “style.” But in general, our experience pointed out the misery of any type of constructivism; that is, that there are certain concepts that one can endlessly expand so that, in the end, they don’t distinguish anything any longer. This was, in the mid-1980s, the moment–a moment quite loaded with frustration–when we were looking for a topic and a self-assignment that would offer us more conceptual and intellectual resistance. “Materialities of communication” seemed to be the solution–and I assure you that, while the actual invention of the topic caused great euphoria (I can still remember it: it happened on a Sunday morning on the beautiful marble-stoned main street of Dubrovnik), we didn’t quite know where it would lead us. It was in the most complete sense of the phrase: a “search concept.” Let me add, anecdotally, that the strongest reason for choosing this concept back in the mid-1980s, was the hope that it might contribute to a revitalization of a small materialist Marxism. This clearly remained an ambition–almost unbelievably, from my present-day perspective. Indeed, we organized those colloquia in Yugoslavia because Yugoslavia was the only country in that world that would let Westerners run academic colloquia and that offered, at the same time, the possibility of inviting colleagues from “behind the Iron Curtain” to participate.

     

    UE: It seemed obvious that both the concern with the materialities of communication and the ensuing inquiry into the limits of the hermeneutic tradition of either assuming or attributing meaning opened a host of difficult epistemological questions, not just as regards any stability for (socially) constructed meaning-effects but also respecting the centered, or at least consensual unity versus a fragmentary multiplicity of epistemological positions. You reflect upon this several times in your work, and I wonder how you see this problematic today. In addition, would there be a way to sketch out how the form and style of your writing were influenced by this? I am thinking here of the inventive and complex kinds of intermediary constellations or configurations that you elaborate in both In 1926 and Mapping Benjamin–in the first case via notions of arrays, codes, collapsed codes, and frames–and in the second case via the notion of mapping, the use of 16 critical terms, eight stations, and various nodes or knots between these…

     

    HUG: You know, you may have discovered something here that I have neither seen nor intended myself–which of course does not imply that what you are seeing is “wrong.” The subjective truth is, however, that, firstly, I have never cared all that much about those “epistemological” motifs that came with the threatening authority of prescriptions. While I do think it matters to care about the “cutting-edge,” in the sense of knowing “where it is,” and in the sense of having the ambition to really “be” “cutting-edge,” it is not in my temperament to follow certain fashions (I am too ambitious for that–it is rather my way to try and “found” my own fashion by departing from existing ones). Anyway, I have never thought that “epistemological fragmentation” was the order of the day, or the order of the year. What you are observing (correctly, no doubt) are “local” solutions to “local” problems. My main personal desire for the project that led to the 1926 book was to find a way (and, later on, a discursive form) that would allow me to produce this illusion of “full immersion into the past.” In the end, a “fragmentation” of my material into fifty-three “entries” seemed to be an appropriate discursive solution because it gave me the impression that I could “surround” myself (full immersion!) with those “fragmented” entries. In the Benjamin reader that I edited with Michael Marrinan, the question between the two editors (two editors, by the way, who never happened to agree easily–which is why I have such good memories of my collaboration with Marrinan)–anyway, the question was how we could “work through” and present “editorial discourse” on the work presented by the multiple (and very short) contributions to our volume. After long discussion, we constructed / “extracted” a certain (perhaps I would tend to say: all too complicated) conceptual grid along which Marrinan and I wrote our editorial commentaries. We felt that this was a way, if you will allow for this metaphor, to x-ray Benjamin’s essay sixty years after its first publication, with intellectual tools (to continue with the metaphor)–with a “technology”–that was very different from the prevailing intellectual tools of his time. I fear that this answer may be disappointing, because it is so unprogrammatic–but at least I am trying to tell you the truth.

     

    UE: One of the intriguing aspects of your work on the materialities of communication is the careful and repeated traversal of the relation between epistemological and ontological concerns. Your work displays, especially in its reiterated encounters with “presence,” an extremely intricate oscillation between a move, perhaps unavoidable, towards epistemological sense-making and conceptualization on the one hand, and, on the other, an at least formally opening move in the direction of ontological concerns, “ontology” here perhaps remaining altogether other, overwhelmingly complex, or socially and historically variable. Moreover, this oscillation seems informed by a problematization of ideality and the empirical both, just as it draws not only on modes of deconstructive differentiation from Heidegger through early Derrida but also, and perhaps especially, on the affirmative making of distinctions we find in the later Luhmann. How do you see this oscillation today, and how do you undertake the navigation between incessantly complicating deconstructive gestures towards “presence”–such as the early Derrida’s concern with the “exteriority of writing” or Jean-Luc Nancy’s notion of the “birth to presence”–and the frequent reduction of complexity in Luhmann’s social systems theory, from its centering on semantics in the mid-80s through the later elaboration of autopoeisis and observation?

     

    HUG: Let me start by admitting that, in a not-so-remote past, I cherished the word “ontology” because it was such a “dirty word,” the word with the worst possible philosophical reputation–a word, therefore, that had an enormous potential for provocation. This “explosive” situation, unfortunately, has faded away–and at times, I accuse or pride myself on having made a certain contribution to this development. But, more seriously, my best way of saying what I am referring to by “ontology,” is, surprisingly, I hope, to say that the word refers to an epistemological situation, an epistemological feeling that is no longer completely obedient to the premises and prejudices imposed by the so-called “linguistic turn.” Yes, I refuse to accept what Foucault, Luhmann, and ultimately even Derrida almost joyfully accepted, i.e., that it is neither possible nor desirable to “speak,” or even to think, about anything that is outside of language. Of language, or, in Luhmann’s terms, outside of “communication,” i.e., outside of those systems, all social systems and the psychic system, whose functioning is based on “meaning.” It turns out that, quite simply, I am fascinated by things, i.e., by that which is “not language”–I have, for example, long felt that it is stupid and counterproductive to describe sex as a form of communication (I never forget to tell my undergraduate students that, if they want to communicate, they should rather use language than sex). A more academic way of perhaps expressing the same would be to say that there is nothing wrong with “post-linguistic turn” philosophy–the basic argument is of course quite convincing: that nothing outside of language can ever be grasped by our minds. But this leaves us with a relatively narrow range of possibilities for thinking. Now, if thinking in the humanities is genuinely “riskful thinking” (just another way of saying that the humanities should produce complexity), then we have a right and an obligation to rebel against such reductions in the range of thought-possibilities (as has been advocated for almost a century now by what we call “analytic philosophy”). This is a way of saying what, despite his quite repulsive biography, I cannot help but be fascinated by Heidegger’s philosophy: it is a philosophy that does not care about the premises and prescriptions coming from the “linguistic turn.” Derrida, unfortunately, as far as I am concerned, soon abandoned a motif that was strong in his earlier work, the motif of the “exteriority of the signifier” (as my Chicago colleague David Wellbery called it), a motif that could have made his philosophy a “non-linguistic turn” philosophy. But he ended up embracing linguistic absolutism and Hermeneutics, its Teutonic equivalent. Luhmann, in this sense, was a linguistic-turn philosopher right from the beginning, i.e., from his very first programmatic essay–which had the title “Meaning as Basic Concept of Sociology.” But, after all, why should my heroes from the previous intellectual generation necessarily be those who have already thought everything that I myself might desire to think?

     

    UE: The editor of the first anthology to present in English a fuller range of your early texts was Wlad Godzich, who was also one of the contributors to The Materialities of Communication. You refer more than once to his essay in the latter, which delineates a very interesting history of the crisis of legitimation for language and literacy vis-à-vis the hegemony of images, especially in a contemporary culture of digital technology and media.3 As regards image-culture today Godzich remarks towards the end of his essay that we are “living in the midst of a prelogical affirmation of the world, in the sense that it takes place before the fact of logos, and it threatens us with an alienation that modern thinkers could barely conceive” (368). According to him, this means that we are now “inhabited by images that we have not drawn from ourselves, images of external impressions that we do not master and that retain all their agential capability without being mediated by us” (369). It is not just that world, subject, and language thereby lose stability and fixation as was the case with the modern putting into motion of these concepts, something which still permitted constructive solutions in the sense that modes of control over velocities could be achieved, along with effects of stability and management of instabilities. Rather, what Godzich has in mind here, echoing Virilio’s concern with such acceleration, is that today “the technology of images operates at the speed of light, as does the world” (370), something which at best allows one to ask whether language can indeed bring the speed of the image under control, turning images into some new kind of language. Godzich, of course, is not alone in pointing out the problematic vicissitudes of the digital image; in fact, there is still no consensus on an aesthetics of the digital image, in spite of the laudable efforts of Sean Cubitt, Edmond Couchot, W.J.T. Mitchell, Jonathan Crary, Bernard Stiegler, Mark B. Hansen, and quite a few others.4 We still seem to be left with discussions about the very possibility or impossibility of framing the digital image, prior to any more elaborate or differentiated engagement that retains notions of aesthesis, whether more traditional or as regards relations to, or breaks from, the avant-garde. When you concur in your texts that we do, as Godzich has it, live in a world of floating images, how do you see the relation of images and language, and in what ways do digital images enter your work?

     

    HUG: I was just saying earlier that I am inclined (not to say eager) to find that my very impressive predecessors (although I have never seen them in a “Harold Bloomian” way, as all too threatening)–that my very impressive predecessors have left something for me to think. But now you have jumped–and you seem to confront me with a question that, from my perspective, seems to be a question/an assignment for the next generation (although you are referring to my friend Wlad Godzich, who is three years older than I). Anyway, to really think about what it means to be increasingly surrounded by and immersed in an environment of “floating images” is, from my point of view, a question for the next generation, because I, frankly, try to be as little surrounded by “floating images” as I possibly can. I have nothing on earth against TV, for example (on the contrary, my family may well hold the record for the most TV hours per week for an academic family). But I personally (and atypically, within my family) don’t like TV. The truth is that I regularly fall asleep in front of the TV screen–even if I am not tired at all, even if I am watching the most exciting thing for me, i.e., sports and athletic events. So I am just not in a good position to analyze “floating images”–although I of course acknowledge that the question is important.

     

    But let me try to say something more general (from the wisdom of my age?) about the character of such tasks. It is my impression and my criticism that your generation, i.e., the “media theory-generation,” is always trying to come up with the “genius formula,” the “genius intuition,” when it comes to describing and analyzing such phenomena. Patiently working on and developing a network of distinctions (I know I now sound like an analytic philosopher) does not seem to be your thing. Many protagonists of your generation (and of my own) do look strangely “Hegelian” to me–but Hegelian with the ridiculous ambition to be geniuses and geistreich. Like those late nineteenth-century naturalists who were “hunting butterflies” with nets, and never caught any. Virilio, for example, looks to me like the embodiment of such bad intellectual taste; I have never managed to read any of his texts all the way through. Very seldom, Friedrich Kittler participates in such lapses of bad taste–but his best pages are of course sublime–and the admirable phenomenon is that most of his pages are “best pages.” Anyway, I am trying to make a pledge for patient and descriptive accuracy. Following this pledge, one will discover that we are of course not as exclusively surrounded by “floating images” as Godzich would have it. Not our entire world is MTV. Most of us are also surrounded, for many hours a day, by the environment of electronic mail and of the Internet, which is, after all, still a “verbal” environment. Now, the new thing, the thing yet to be analyzed by a good phenomenological description, is that, on the one hand, visual perception (“images”) is less embodied and requires different reactions from our bodies than visual perception that is not produced by a screen. On the other hand, communication by email and by the Internet “feels” different, in this very bodily sense, from writing a text by hand or on the typewriter, and from receiving a “traditional” letter on either beautiful or cheap stationery. The simple proof is, for me (if this observation requires proof at all), that I miss that old-fashioned type of correspondence every day when I look into my (real space) mailbox in the mailroom of my building at the university–and see that it is empty; whereas the “mailbox” on my screen contains around five hundred new electronic messages every day. Now, I shouldn’t fall back (or “fall ahead”) onto that tone of cultural criticism; all I want to say is that not only do I not have a formula for describing our profoundly changed communicative environment, I feel that one should not even go for such a formula. In more critical terms: I think that media research and media theory would have made much more sense and much more progress if it had concentrated more insistently and more broadly on good descriptions.

     

    UE: One of the recurring debates about the digital image concerns the question whether the condition of “post-photography” and the variability or manipulability of the digital image entail a more or less complete departure from ontological and realistic representational dimensions. Currently, Mitchell is very much concerned to counter exactly such leave-takings of realism, and others try to point out how work in this area does not exclude notions of realism in the first place and, secondly, is not unidirectional but rather seems to be undergoing a more differentiated development. In particular, Lev Manovich points out that the almost unlimited digital simulation in cinematic post-production that we know from the Wachowski brothers’ The Matrix, and from virtuality-oriented art more generally, now increasingly seems to be supplemented by new modes of work that focus on sampling rather than on pure simulation, or on documentary video realism rather than on the full-scale special effects of Hollywood cinema.5 If we keep in mind the rich set of focal interests for the study of the materialities of communication, how do you view such debates over the “real” status of (moving) digital images?

     

    HUG: Unfortunately I am not familiar with most of the works–artistic and academic–that you are invoking here. In this case, my ignorance has no excuse; it is sheer ignorance, and not a judgment, as in the case of Virilio, whose work I find grotesquely overrated. Sometimes, if you will allow me this remark, I am astonished to see–and grateful at the same time–that I have survived the challenges of an academic life, being the slow reader that I am. I read slowly, I spend a lot of time taking and making notes, and I write comparatively much. But that feeling of being “behind,” of not reading enough, of not responding to so many questions, grows, the older I get–and unfortunately, this is not just secretly self-congratulatory rhetoric. This is the reason why my reaction to your question about the “reality-status” of “moving” and digital images has to be all too general and abstract. Whatever degree of “reality” you want to invest them with of course depends on the epistemological premises, the philosophical system, or the conceptual network within which you are asking this question. Each framework (think of analytic philosophy, systems theory, deconstruction–you name it) will produce a more or less predictable answer. What I find interesting (and not in the sense of a judgment) is that I, for example (and I believe: like many people of my age) have a hard time reacting to (and an even harder time connecting with) some of these digital effects and miracles. I do not deny their value and their potential merit; it does not astonish me to see that you, for example, really enjoy and appreciate them. But in my case, they have produced a paradoxical reaction. The more I see myself confronted and surrounded by a technologically mediated environment of stimuli, the more I enjoy that which, at least from a naïve standpoint, is not mediated. As I said before, there is a huge difference for me between watching a game of American football on TV or in the stadium–and I am well aware that I see “less” in the stadium. As I am answering your questions, I am looking through the window of my library carrel, across the red roofs of the buildings of Stanford University, in their strangely nineteenth-century Spanish Colonial style–and in the background, I see a mountain range, and, faintly, the wings of a white bird. I find this moving; I wish I had learned earlier to be more a part, with my own body, of this natural and physical environment. Now, I am not talking (at least not mainly talking) about “ecological politics.” What I am trying to point to is an aesthetics, perhaps an impossible aesthetics, of “immediate experience”–which no doubt, in my case, depends on being overfed and overstimulated by manmade technologies. Yes, this is very romantic; you may even call it kitsch. But I do not seem to be the only one, at least in my generation. Read, for example, the book of my good friend and closest colleague Robert Harrison, The Dominion of the Dead. This book is about rediscovering a feeling for the ground we walk on as the ground that contains the remnants of our predecessors. It is a feeling that we have largely lost, and I will admit that this (objective) loss has only become a (subjective) loss for me in the past few decades.

     

    UE: You open your co-edited essay anthology Mapping Benjamin: The Work of Art in the Digital Age, by introducing the coupling of two critical terms, aesthetics and perception, as part of the reactualization of Benjamin’s work today. In the treatment of perception you point out that we might understand the intellectual background of “aura” as “Benjamin’s last-ditch effort to save, in the face of a growing challenge from technology, the physical limits of our human bodies as the yardstick of perception itself” (7). More specifically, you see in Benjamin’s polarization of “cult value” and “exhibition value” a certain reintroduction of the traditional philosophical dualism of what you call nativist and empiricist models of perception. On this view Benjamin seems unable or unwilling to consider perception in a technologically expanded field. Could one understand you as saying that he allows for an opening, at the very least, of the question respecting whether and how “the fundamental parameters of perception itself might escape the limits of our physical bodies” (6)? In that same passage regarding perception, and the missing link in Benjamin to seemingly inhuman models of perception, you describe today’s dominant model of perception as based on the body qua “information processor”–one that “deploys a complex system of long-term and short-term memory storage, of hierarchical coding schemes, and a modular chain of cognitive operations very much like a computer” (6). In that case, embodied perception would be attuned to the production, dissemination, and reception of digital data. While the reception of Benjamin’s mechanical production essay is famously multiplicitous, at least two recent efforts draw extensively on Benjamin as a source of inspiration for a materialist theory of digital media and a notion of the lived body as the framing capacity vis-à-vis digital art. I am thinking here of the reactualization of Benjamin and cinematic paradigms in Manovich’s widely read study, The Language of New Media, and of Mark B. Hansen’s more recent New Philosophy for New Media, which opens by citing Benjaminian perception as a source of hope for the survival of media today in spite of digital convergence and various posthuman positions. Hansen devotes his entire text to fleshing out the notion of the body as the framer of information artworks. In addition, at least two of the essays in Mapping Benjamin, by Bolz and Werber, go quite far, albeit differently, towards actualizing Benjamin’s notion of the “training of perception” as something valuable today. I know that bodily being-there, the experience proper to the life world, as well as (mediated) spectatorship and/or participation figure very prominently in your work, including in the recent text on athletic beauty.6 How do you see Benjamin, the body, and the training of perception in our digital age?

     

    HUG: Of course I find Benjamin’s essay (which someone told me is the most frequently cited essay in the academic humanities) very important–otherwise I would not have invested my time into a collective volume discussing it. But I find it important as a symptom of its own time, the late 1930s, of its specific sensitivities, hopes, and above all prognostics. For me (and I know how irreverent this may sound), Benjamin’s prognostics were about as grotesquely wrong as Jules Vernes’s imagination of the future world (although it is very interesting that, in both cases, intellectuals passionately insist on how miraculously right they both were). Look, for example, at how Benjamin predicts that aura will disappear–whereas our contemporary truth is that so many more artifacts than in the mid-twentieth-century have become “auratic.” If, in Benjamin’s time, a drawing by Paul Klee or a picture by Picasso had an aura, today we consider even the (very “selective”) posters (I always find a touch of kitsch there) of Klee and Picasso exhibits auratic, and subsequently frame them. Or take the moving but completely erroneous idea that a multiplication of “cameramen” would entail some effect of “emancipation” (whatever this may mean). Technologically, this has happened. But I cannot imagine that anyone would seriously claim that running through the world with a camcorder, or being able to take photographs with a cell phone, has had any “emancipatory” effect. Now, I am not blaming Benjamin–I think his essay is a bundle of strong intellectual intuitions–whose incoherence (and I mean it in the sense of “glorious incoherence”) has probably contributed to the unique breadth of its reception. But give me a break! Can people be serious when they claim that Benjamin’s concepts will help us to analyze our present-day media environment? This would be even more hilarious than to claim that scientific labs of the late 1930s were superior in terms of the “truth value” that they produced, than contemporary labs. So I won’t even begin to discuss the question of whether Benjamin’s concepts or intuitions can be helpful in analyzing our present-day technological and media environment. They can definitely not. The interesting question is, once again, why so many of my colleagues, specifically younger colleagues (colleagues of your generation), are so obsessed with and so insistent in finding more than inspiration, in finding, indeed, “Truth,” in the classics of our field. It is as if today, very different from those days around 1980, when my friends and I (with the beginning of the Dubrovnik colloquia) tried “to keep intellectual movement alive” we have fallen under a paralysis or a prohibition of independent thinking. Why do those who are interested in digital art not use their own competence to describe and analyze it, to develop theories? Why do you read Benjamin with the hope of finding help for the analysis of contemporary technology, instead of thinking for yourselves?

     

    UE: I was quite intrigued when watching the opening ceremony of the most recent Olympic Games–for on that occasion bodily presence, perception, participation, and the spectacle of the sports event all seemed to be displaying in uncircumventable ways the changes our culture and our life world are currently undergoing due to digital augmentation and the pervasiveness of computing. I am not just talking about the real time or “live” televising with multiple cameras and the big screens on the stadium, but also about the fact that a most of the spectators present and the participants themselves were carrying and actively using cellular phones, digital cameras, as well as digital video cameras. “Presence,” “being-there,” and “participation” here rather obviously included the navigation through the augmented dimension, in the sense of engaging with quite complicated overlays of physical space and data spaces, place and tele-distance–just as the pervasiveness of computing made it difficult, if not impossible, to distinguish clearly between embodied and digital perception at the level of at least the audio-visual and the haptic or tactile. You have written extensively on sports events, spectatorship, participation, and the relation to the media,7 but today how is one to make sense of, and is one indeed to make sense of, so many athletes and spectators pointing and waving with one hand, while talking right there as well as via their wireless headsets, and video recording with the other hand?

     

    HUG: Yes, this time I am familiar with the (screen) images that you are referring to. I have seen those closing ceremonies of the Olympic Games, for example, where the athletes whom we see on the screen have nothing better to do than to shoot photographs or use their cell phones. Frankly (and after the first part of our conversation, you won’t be surprised to hear this), I find these images depressing–I certainly cannot identify with this attitude. Had I ever had the privilege of participating in the Olympic Games, I would have tried to indulge, as best I could, in the immediacy (here is this kitsch word again!) of every moment. It wouldn’t have crossed my mind to become an amateur reporter–and why would I ever take photos or produce a video in order to enjoy the event retrospectively, instead of enjoying the event in real time? But this movement and practice have a long history, meanwhile. When my four children (today 27, 23, 16 and 14 years old) were born, I was of course present in the delivery room–and, quite honestly, I cannot remember any other moments or events that I have found more impressive or incisive for my life. But alreaady at that time (back in the spring of 1978), there were dads who filmed the “event” with their camcorders. I found that obscene–but even forgetting the criticism of “obscenity”–how can one possibly forego the immediacy of the event in order to prepare for a retrospective viewing? Now, let me become self-critical here: there is clearly something that I do not get. Of course these children, today, use their computers as photo albums; they edit pictures; they fast-forward through them; they enjoy them in a way that I cannot follow–I always want to tell them that I want to take more time with each picture (and I no longer dare to tell them that I would so like to have a print–and an album full of prints). It is as if the speed of beauty was not for me.

     

    UE: This problematic of sense-making, assumption or attribution of meaning, and of semantics generally has been a lasting concern, indeed one of the most indisputable and energized foci of your work. It is evident in your approaches to the everyday life world on psychological and socio-cultural planes both, and in your reconsideration of what the role of meaning can be in the encounter with art and the spectacle, but perhaps it is enjoying special foregrounding in your explicit reflections upon the difficult challenges posed by a new epistemology that does not grant that traditional kind of privilege to interpretation and hermeneutics which we find not least in Germany. What was the original motivation for your questioning of interpretation, and what do you consider to be the more or less unmet challenges today for post-hermeneutic epistemology, or epistemologies?

     

    HUG: Although I get the impression that this, the “non-hermeneutic” epistemology, is what colleagues and readers most associate with my work and with me, this is indeed a good question in many ways. The most banal way in which it is a good question (and the most interesting one for me personally) is that if I am such a verbally exuberant person, someone who always interprets, who always attributes meaning, why am I so radically against the “universality claim of hermeneutics”? Of course I will not venture any kind of self-reflexive psychoanalysis here. Let me admit, rather, that there is clearly some academico-Oedipal dynamic at play here–about which I have recently written for the first time (symptomatically enough, the essay was first published in Russian, but will soon come out in the American journal Telos8. My own Doktorvater and first academic boss (whose name I had sworn I would not mention in the public sphere again) was a great admirer (rather than a student, as he claimed) of Hans-Georg Gadamer, who was himself a student of Heidegger–who was a student of Husserl; this is a heavy genealogy already, which, despite a remark I made earlier in our conversation, probably did incite some Oedipal energies. But while I have come to greatly admire Gadamer’s work (and Heidegger’s even more so), I have always hated the authoritarian way in which my academic advisor handled interpretation–even more so when he pretended that his method was “dialogic.” Another, very German, way of answering your question would be to say that what separated that advisor of mine and myself was the (never to be underestimated) distinction between German Protestant culture and German Catholic culture. While my parents did not give me an orthodox Catholic upbringing, I was an altar boy, I enjoyed incense, sumptuous religious rituals, the “real presence” of God in the Eucharist–rather than the Lutheran insistence on the gospels, the Word, and their meaning. Some people have said that I am simply “sensual”–and of course I hope that this is also true. Nevertheless, I believe–or should I say: I fear?–that the Oedipal (self-)interpretation goes a long way in my case.

     

    UE: When reading through your texts on post-hermeneutic epistemology as an historical sequence, according to their date of publication, my impression is that a certain transformation is gradually taking place: the earlier texts appear quite a lot more radical, either in their call for a strict departure from hermeneutics and sense-making or in their emphasis on the severity of the difficulties that work on a new epistemology is facing, and the later texts sketch out a more balanced and consensus-seeking approach to meaning-production and interpretation. I am thinking of certain earlier passages in Making Sense in Life and Literature and in Materialities of Communication as read in dialogue with the more recent comments in The Production of Presence. Let me try to unfold this a bit.

     

    In the first of these texts you point out that: “the proposal to analyze sense making as an intrasystemic operation depending on each system’s specific environment (without ‘picturing’ it) generates the new question of whether we have to count, according to the high variation in the frame conditions of sense making, on a multiplicity of different modalities in sense and meaning” (Making Sense 12). You remark that you are not taking any answer to this question for granted but rather consider its pursuit “important in an epistemological situation in which we have been aware for quite a long time of the fact that our concepts for the description and the analysis of sense making turn out to be insufficient whenever we apply them to contemporary culture (12). At that time your conclusion was first that we were facing the task of inventing “a new epistemology capable of theorizing and analyzing ways of sense making that perhaps no longer include effects of ‘meaning’ and ‘reference,’” and, secondly, that so far we “simply do not know what interfaces such as those between TV and psychic systems, or between computers and social systems, look like.” Accordingly, the question of “sense making” might continue to be the issue at hand, but this would no longer hold for meaning, representation, and reference–which leads one to suspend the question whether “our dealing with new modes of sense making will make sense” (13).

     

    In your closing essay for the second volume you undertake a more detailed macro- and micro-mapping of the urgent tasks for projects working on materialities of communication, and your key hypothesis here is that quite a few emergent theory-positions could be seen to converge in a shared problematizing of conceptualizing the humanities as hermeneutics, i.e., “as a group of disciplines grounded on the act of interpretation as their core exercise” (Materialities 396). In the case of the inquiry into the materialities of communication, such problematizing of interpretation would cause, you remark, a shift in the main perspective of investigation. This shift would go “from interpretation as identification of given meaning-structures to the reconstruction of those processes through which structures of articulated meaning can at all emerge” (398). Rather than assuming given meaning or unproblematic attribution of such meaning, the projects gesturing towards the materialities of communication would thus be trying to take care of all the phenomena that somehow contribute to the constitution of meaning without being meaning themselves. Hence the difficult question whether and how it is at all possible for psychic and social systems to constitute meaning, a question that simultaneously pursues a replacement of “interpretation” with “meaning constitution” and seeks to pay much more attention to the human body and the physical qualities of signifiers.

     

    In contrast to such marked departures towards a rather decidedly post-hermeneutic condition, The Production of Presence emphasizes the various ways one should precisely not take you to be opposing or abandoning meaning, signification, and interpretation. For example, when reflecting upon Derrida’s early remark that “the age of the sign” will “perhaps never end. Its historical closure, however, is outlined,” you point out that whatever else this kind of “beyond” might involve, putting an end to the age of the sign and the metaphysics of presence can “certainly not mean that we would abandon meaning, signification, and interpretation” (Derrida, Of Grammatology 14; Gumbrecht, Production of Presence 52).9 Rather, if we are to talk of such a “beyond” and of what it would take to end metaphysics, this can, you emphasize, “only mean something in addition to interpretation–without, of course, abandoning interpretation as an elementary and probably inevitable intellectual practice” (52).

     

    Some of this perceived change in your work could, of course, just be due to a later, strategic response on your part, not least because you have been misread so often on this score, but if there is some truth to the impression of such a gradual change of your position, could you elaborate on the implications of this movement you now seem to be gesturing towards, a movement somehow between interpretative meaning and a “beyond” whose birth is otherwise? HUG: You are right, the insistence on the “non-hermeneutic” character of my work has certainly changed over the past decades (or over the past two decades)–my tone has become more conciliatory. I will not even try to deny that this is, partly at least, an effect of (incipient?) old age, and of becoming more established. I wouldn’t go so far, as a Berlin newspaper recently did, as to say that I have now “joined the club of toothless old ex-intellectuals”–but, yes, it would be pathetic to try to maintain a full-fledged “Oedipal energy” at age 57. But the most important answer to your question–at least for me–lies elsewhere. As I mentioned before, when we organized the “Materialities of Communication” colloquium, when I was experimenting with a concept (if it was a concept at all) such as the “non-hermeneutic,” it was not quite clear where this journey would take me–if it took me anywhere at all. This fact, that I had a vague feeling and intuition of wanting to find something like an “alternative” to hermeneutics and interpretation, made it more or less necessary to be very radical. Ever since I “found” (not the Promised Land, but) the dimension of “presence,” since I have begun to develop, as best I could, a network of concepts regarding presence, I can afford to be less fanatical. Besides that, would it not be ridiculous to “deny” the existence of meaning and of interpretation? Of course we do interpret all of the time; it is (Heidegger was right) one of our more basic existential conditions–up to the point that I would confirm that we cannot not interpret. But the point is (and here again, I turn against the “linguistic turn,” that there is more to our lives than just interpretation; there is what I call “presence”–and there might well be other dimensions that, like presence, our Western philosophical tradition has abandoned and neglected for many centuries. So, to come back to your question, the answer is that I believe that I could begin to be more open to “meaning” again as soon as I had a clearer conception of what was the non-hermeneutic dimension on which I wanted to concentrate.

     

    UE: I was particularly intrigued by the possible convergences between your notion of an in-between movement for sense-making and a different production of presence on the one hand, and the situation facing one in the contemporary field of digital art and aesthetics. Perhaps the latter can be seen to be almost the obverse of the traditional privileging or taking for granted of meaning and interpretation in the humanities. That is, digital artworks more often than not present one with the difficulty or even impossibility of sense making, seeing that whatever we might take to be meaningful here implies and originates from digital media, communication, discrete code and programs, and technology–all of which most often operate well beyond human ratios of perception, or well beyond the speeds of either embodied interaction or conceptualization. This is most evident when purely technological and machinic agency drives the artwork, but it appears in video installations and hyperfictions depending on human interaction as well–for example, in Bill Viola’s work with technological and media-specific slowness or acceleration as paths towards the delimitation and/or reactualization of affect in Anima (2000), or in Urs Schreiber’s sometimes rather radical departures from printed text, literacy, literariness, and the tradition of the book in Das Epos der Maschine (2001). Would it be possible to see in your recent work the emergence of a more visible limit, border, skin, communicative membrane, or level of structural coupling between sense making and “presencing”: constitutive of meaning in various ways and yet vanishing in the very birth to presence of sense, sensation, and the sensible? What would the prospects be, do you think, of approaching meaning-effects and presence in the area of digital art and aesthetics via your reflections on such an in-between, perhaps more specifically via your notions of rhythm, oscillation, and speed?

     

    HUG: No doubt you are right. I think my old “Oedipal” and radical denial of the hermeneutic dimension has morphed into an insistence on the difficult, tense, always complex and never “natural” cohabitation of “meaning” and “presence.” When I talk about “oscillations” between meaning and presence, I mean “oscillation” in the sense of a pluraletantum–there is a variety of such oscillations–and given that the variety might be endless, I am simply not sure at this point whether it makes sense, as I used to think, to work towards a “typology” of such oscillations. Clearly, however, the proportion–the “weight,” if you will–of “meaning” in relation to “presence” is different for different media. It would certainly be hilarious to say that, in reading a novel, the material “presence” effects of the book are as important as the meaning conveyed by the text. Instrumental music might be the opposite: we can certainly not help but produce associative meanings while we are listening to music–but I believe that these meanings are highly personal, futile, and that they ultimately draw our attention away from what only music can provide: the beautiful feeling of being wrapped in the light and soft touch of the materiality of sounds.

     

    UE: In your more recent engagements with art and aesthetics you explicitly reintroduce the distinction between the beautiful and the sublime, but now with the intent of foregrounding and granting a different privilege to beauty and the beautiful. Perhaps this move has an element of surprise to it and is not immediately part of the intuitive horizon of expectation for many readers–considering the import of the limits of the Kantian imagination for, say, Heidegger’s relatively early work, the attention paid to the sublime in several strands of what often passes under the somewhat homogenizing rubric of poststructuralism, the role played by overwhelming complexity in a Luhmannian notion of art as a social system, or the emphasis in many other efforts towards a contemporary aesthetics that cares for the avant-garde or for the strict singularity of the experience of art. So, my question is triple, I think: What is at stake in this actualization and bringing into movement of the beautiful, under what conditions do digital works of art present beauty from your perspective, and do the experience of art as well as art as a social system retain a distinguishable or even privileged role in contemporary culture?

     

    HUG: Again, you have it right–and I am beginning to be scared by how familiar you are with my thought, far beyond what I make explicit and (sometimes at least) have come to understand myself. But there is nothing terribly programmatic or symptomatic about my “preference” for the beautiful (in comparison to “the sublime”). As I said before, it seems to lie in my temperament that I want to speak about “the beautiful,” but everyone else seems to concentrate on the sublime (about “the non-hermeneutic,” when everyone else discusses interpretation), about literature “itself,” when everybody feels that theory is the only thing, and so forth. In this very (ultimately banal) spirit, some of my colleagues and I, back in the early 1990s, had planned to work towards an issue of an academico-intellectual journal on “Beauty”–but, fortunately for us, the journal did not survive, and some of its projects shared this fate. A project from the same journal that did survive, by the way, is the volume on Benjamin that we have discussed. The one case where I have used the concept of “the beautiful” quite systematically (and to a certain extent: to my surprise), was my book In Praise of Athletic Beauty. While I am of course not saying that watching sports does not have any “sublime” moments, I am convinced that, in most cases of spectator sports, “beauty” (according to Kant: the impression of purposiveness without purpose) is the more feeling concept than the sublime. Not unexpectedly, several reviewers have taken issue with this opinion–but, interestingly enough, they never argued about it. It was as if they wanted to say that there was one and only one category to describe aesthetic experience, and that was “the sublime.”

     

    UE: The field of digital art has focused from the late 1980s to the last half of the 1990s on virtuality and thus on immersion, simulation, and abstract or even transcendent self-reference as aesthetic paradigms–witness such works as Charlotte Davies’s Osmose (1995) and Ephemere (1998)–the history and structures of which have been charted quite engagingly in Oliver Grau’s book on virtual art. However, already with Jeffrey Shaw’s Eve (1993) and ConFIGURING the CAVE (1996), the focus has shifted not only towards the use of physical and architectural structures to achieve immersion effects, but towards opening up embodiment and the relation between the body and space as altogether dominant issues. When one considers the subsequent developments in the field, one is tempted to diagnose symptoms of what one might call “the physical turn” of digital art. For instance, the works in tele-presence by Roy Ascott, Ken Goldberg, and Eduardo Kac, the broadening of interest in transgenic art and artificial life, the entry on stage of augmentation not only in everyday and commercial culture but also in more classical art forms such as in Christian Ziegler’s dance performance scanned I-V (2000-01), and the very recent peaking of interest in pervasive computing–all of this bespeaks amarked change of aesthetic focus which seems to bring us far away from the Cartesianism evident in William Gibson’s early exploration of the notion of “cyberspace” or in most earlier artistic and critical theoretical engagements with virtuality. But perhaps this change is most visible and tangible in the rather radical widening of the field of digital art and aesthetics concerned with the body–Stelarc is an obviously provocative example, but a visitor to Medien Kunst Netz will confront around 200 digital artworks that explore the body, embodiment, and social or psychic effects of framing and/or identity-formation. Or, as Manovich formulates this predicament more generally, the 1990s

     

    were about the virtual. We were fascinated by new virtual spaces made possible by computer technologies. The images of an escape into a virtual space that leaves the physical space useless and of cyberspace–a virtual world that exists in parallel to our world–dominated the decade . . . It is quite possible that this decade of the 2000s will turn out to be about the physical–that is, physical space filled with electronic and visual information.

     

    I was wondering how one would want to think about this physical turn in digital art, and, considering your inquiry into the materialities of communication as well as the beauty of bodies that matter, how you approach this emergence of digital body art. In particular, I was struck by the impression, when confronting the research in the field, that Cartesianism and more or less strict dualisms of body and mind are not so easily left behind. In the middle part of your Production of Presence you devote quite some energy and reflection to reconsidering Heidegger’s thinking of “world” and “earth” in “The Origin of the Work of Art,” and you rightly emphasize Heidegger’s critique of Descartes in that context.10 In a recent essay, Katherine N. Hayles–whose study How We Became Posthuman was instrumental in provoking a more differentiated and qualified critical debate over the posthuman, which Friedrich Kittler has also enriched in so many ways–reconsiders her position and recognizes that she is still haunted by the incessant returns of such dualisms. That later essay sketches out a relational notion of emergence from a dynamic flux both of the body and of embodiment, a relationality that departs in a different way from Cartesianism than her earlier work does.11 How do you think of the emergence or presencing of embodiment and of the experience of beauty in a digital age–on the other side of Cartesian and posthuman temptations both? In particular, how would one want to consider the beauty of digital art and embodiment in their concretely specific differentiation and materiality–even on that level of gendered difference which Lyotard brought into his work on the inhuman, or on that level of “an erotics of art” which Susan Sontag was thinking of in Against Interpretation?

     

    HUG: Of course, “dualisms like body and mind are not so easily left behind.” For my part, I do not believe that I have ever promised (!) to leave either “body” or “mind” behind (I may have said that there are other tasks for the mind to get engaged in than interpretation). In this spirit, I am convinced that the provocative power of the concept of the post-human has long since worn out. When Foucault (if it was Foucault) first used it, it was beautifully provocative because it made us aware that a certain concept of the “human” that we had thought to be metahistorical and transcultural was indeed both culturally and historically very specific (i.e., it was rooted in the eigtheenth century). So Foucault’s provocation helped us to not feel forever obliged to live up to the eigtheenth-century concept of the “human.” For example, we have become much less optimistic regarding the natural generosity of “humans” towards other humans–and we no longer even think that this is such a devastating insight. But will we ever become post-human, in the sense of not living through (in one way or the other), this dualism (or should I say oscillation) between “body” and “mind” (and again, what would be wrong with this)?

     

    UE: I know that Luhmann’s work and his intellectual impact on the academy have been of extraordinary import to you and, naturally, the lasting fascination with his social systems theory has left many traces in your own production. On the one hand, I wonder how you see the fate of Luhmann’s work today, in the face of a pervasively digital culture? Specifically, how do you evaluate and handle the absence in Luhmann’s work of a refined and differentiated set of concepts and distinctions relating to new media, including the questions raised, and debated by many of Luhmann’s readers, by the introduction of the notion of the “code” versus the eventual discreteness of information in The Reality of the Mass Media? On the other hand, you yourself on occasion gesture towards what you find to be relatively unelaborated aspects of Luhmann’s work, his concepts of time and space in particular.12 How would you describe your own departure here towards different notions of form, event, position, distance, movement, and the widening of the present as a dimension of simultaneity?

     

    HUG: Two or three years ago, in Copenhagen (indeed), I was invited to give the closing lecture for the (at least then) “largest Luhmann Congress ever.” I accepted–but I did feel slightly uneasy, because, by then, I had somehow ceased to be “Luhmannian.” My solution to this (emotional, rather than cognitive) dilemma was to start the lecture by confessing (and this is still true) that “Niklas Luhmann’s work was the intellectual love of my life.” It had never before happened with the same intensity as in the case of Luhmann’s work–and I anticipate that it will never happen again in my intellectual life: I absolutely had to read each new book, each new article by this author. It wasn’t even a question of whether I agreed or not; I fear (but why am I saying “fear”?) that “rapture” would have been the adequate word here. I was in a true Luhmann-fever–it was something like a novel released in serial form, to see how he complicated his thought and his philosopy in a way that I found aesthetically fascinating. This is the one side. On the other side, however (and this is the simple reason why I am no longer a Luhmannian–a reason, of course, that doesn’t say anything against Luhmann’s work), what I have increasingly concentrated upon over the past decade, i.e., the dimension of “presence,” does not have a place in Luhmann’s work. Now, this fact is altogether undramatic. Each philosophy, programmatically or preconsciously, opts for certain problems and concepts that it can deal with–and thus automatically excludes others. What my friends and I used to call “materiality” (and what today I refer to as “presence”) is something that Luhmann’s philosophy could not capture from the (very foundational) moment Luhmann decided to make meaning (Sinn) the key-concept of his work. In this sense, it is perhaps more than a bon mot to say–rather it is an ultimately laudatory description–that Luhmann’s philosophy is the “hermeneutics of the digital age.” I do not know whether his concept of “communication” was deliberately or unintentionally adapted to electronic communication–but I imagine that it would work beautifully and gloriously to describe and to analyze our technological and mainly electronic communication environment. Now, I insist: all of this is not a criticism of Luhmann; rather it explains why I don’t have much use for the entire edifice of Luhmann’s philosophy. Nevertheless, his name still plays an important role in my ongoing work–and it is not derogatory if I characterize this role by saying that Luhmann has become my “main provider of punch lines.” Like many other stunning intellectual talents (he certainly belongs to the five or even three most intelligent persons I have ever seen), he was fantastic at coming up with sharp and always surprising (i.e., counterintuitive) definitions. Many of these definitions function as healthy thought-provocations even if you do not buy into the entire complexity of Luhmann’s system. And this is how I use him today. Let me end with one further comment on your question–which indirectly also refers back to our Benjamin discussion. That author “X” (Niklas Luhmann, for example) does not provide a full-fledged theory of phenomenon “Y” (in which you happen to be interested), does not mean that author X is not interesting. Here it is again, for me: this feeling of a taboo imposed on independent thinking. Unlike your generation, I have to say that I am always (and not only secretly) happy when I see that my great intellectual heroes (even my great intellectual heroes) have their limits.

     

    UE: You chose “Beyond Meaning: Positions and Concepts in Motion” as the title of the third, very important chapter of The Production of Presence. I was very taken by the possibility of inquiring further into the notion you develop there of presence in movement, for bodies in space as well as for the conceptualizations proper to more mindful bodies, so as to sense in it the delimitation of an aesthetics of movement for digital art. I was perhaps particularly piqued by the kind of approach you brought out here to such movement–since it not only encompassed the dimensions of “vertical” movement (emergence into being-there so as to occupy space) and “horizontal” movement (being qua appearance or something that moves towards or against an observer), but paid special attention to the more difficult dimension of negativity in movement, i.e., the dimension of “withdrawal” as in some (non-)sense prior to and (de)constitutive of both verticality and horizontality, emergence and appearance. You draw to good effect on the admirable work of Nancy and Bohrer here, as well as on Seel’s ingenious ways of pointing out the limits of human control of “appearance” via his notion of Unfervügbarkeit.13 In a way, then, my question is disturbingly simple: what would, for you, constitute a “composure” for Dasein in relation to the happening or taking place in movement of the text, images, sound, and touch of contemporary digital artworks, a “composure” that cares for the ontology of the digital work of art so as not to forget either the Unfervügbarkeit of its appearance or its “birth” to presence, nor simply denying its movement of withdrawal and dis-appearance into discreteness?

     

    HUG: Well, let me confess that, honestly (not the least thanks to your influence), I am increasingly trying to expose myself to digital art whenever I have the chance to do so. Sometimes I find it terribly pretentious, and it triggers that horribly petit bourgeois question in me of whether the (aesthetic) effect was worth all of the financial and technological investment. Sometimes I find that there is too much self-reflexive ambition–as if self-reflexivity were, without any question, the best thing our life can offer. But sometimes I am impressed, I like what I see, I could and would stay forever–and then, at the moment that I have to go or decide to go, I find it consoling to know that this digital work of art will not only continue to exist, but will continue to “play,” even in my absence. While there is nothing terribly surprising in this description, I think it is already the main effect of Gelassenheit. To be able to let go, to know that certain things are unverfügbar (strange, by the way, that German, of all languages, has such a differentiated repertoire for describing this state of mind). So, yes, for once I am able to associate digital art with something that is dear to me, i.e., Gelassenheit. Now this is an effect that has a strange, not to say decisive, existential impact for me. I hope (and would perhaps even dare to claim) that I am not a complete control freak. But if I am not a complete control freak, as I hope, my belief in the capacities of human agency, despite all theoretical and philosophical reservations, is unlimited. Yes, subconsciously and pre-philosophically, I seem to assume that you can achieve whatever you want enough to achieve. So it is good, it makes a huge difference for me to realize that I cannot “force” certain things–not even what matters most to me–my children’s success, my wife’s good humor (on a Friday night), and the success of my favorite sports team, the Stanford (American) Football Team. As I am trying to answer you, I realize that there is astonishingly little to say about Gelassenheit. Perhaps I should add, however, that Gelassenheit could always be an anticipation, a blank cheque, so to speak, of that desire for (as I call it) “being in synch with the things of the world.” It is true and embarrassing, at the same time, that, in this very sense, I find certain animals terribly attractive–and the way I describe this attraction is to say that, most likely, they don’t have problems with their self-reflexivity. These days, I am specifically impressed by a population of sea elephants (I hear there are only a couple of hundred left on the planet) that happen to mate on a Pacific shore not too far from Stanford. When you first see them lying on the dunes, they look like stones, like things. From time to time, they move around, slowly. Yes, I tend to believe that it would be beautiful to be a sea elephant–if you only don’t take me too seriously here. And let me add that, as a mating ritual, sea elephants seem to engage in the cruelest and most bloody fights.

     

    UE: In 2001 the media installation artist David Rokeby opened the work n-Cha(n)t to the public at the Banff Centre for the Arts, a work that won prizes for interactive art the year after. Rokeby described the motivation for the work as “a strong and somewhat inexplicable desire to hear a community of computers speaking together: chattering amongst themselves, musing, intoning chants.” The work is an advanced elaboration of the effort over ten years to make rather intelligent “Givers of Names,” i.e., linguistically intelligent IT-systems that can recognize objects on location and give them names. In n-Cha(n)t the human interactants encounter a community of networked “Givers of Names,” where these intercommunicate among themselves in order to synchronize their “states of mind.” This communicative process of synchronization goes on semi-organically; left to their own devices, the “Givers of Names” will eventually arrive at a coherent and shared chanting. The human interactants, however, constitute a channel of disruption of this communication, a source of disturbance, distraction, perhaps fragmentation or at least slowing down of the speed of shared chanting of the “Givers of Names.” This is how Rokeby describes that part of the work:

     

    When left uninterrupted to communicate among themselves, they eventually fall into chanting, a shared stream of verbal association. This consensus unfolds very organically. The systems feel their way towards each other, finding resonance in synonyms and similar sounding words, working through different formulations of similar statements until finally achieving unison. Each entity is equipped with a highly focused microphone and voice recognition software. When a gallery visitor speaks into one of the microphones, these words from the outside “distract” that system, stimulating a shift in that entity’s “state of mind.” As a result, that individual falls away from the chant. As it begins communicating this new input to its nearest neighbors, the community chanting loses its coherence, with the chanting veering towards a party-like chaos of voices. In the absence of further disruptions, the intercommunications reinforce the similarities and draw the community back to the chant.

     

    In one of the most recent of his works, SubTitled Public (2005), which is about pervasive computing (rather than forming a part of the ongoing series of works concerned with relational architecture), Raphael Lozano-Hemmer created an empty exhibition space where human visitors are tracked with a computerized infrared surveillance system and specific texts, or subtitles, are projected onto their bodies, following them everywhere they go.14 No matter what kind of body-movements the visitors perform, these textual brandings of individuals are impossible to get rid of–except when you touch somebody else, in which case the words are exchanged with the other. Lozano-Hemmer’s work makes obvious and ironic reference to the security-specific, juridical, and political problematics of pervasive computing, in this case the dimension of surveillance in particular.15 But again, as in Rokeby’s work, it is noteworthy that a posthuman dimension informs the work: human bodies, interaction, and communication pose at best as minor modes of suspension or temporary interruption of informational speed.

     

    Even such an impressively humanistic artist as Bill Viola works on and with that sort of inhuman speed in his video installations, in this case very often by using analog and digital video-technology to achieve (almost) imperceptible effects of slowness rather than radical acceleration. In Viola’s case, one notices an incessant effort towards crossing back and forth over the limits of human affect at the micro-physical or micro-perceptual level and always via digital speeding or slowing down. Witness the series of works in The Passions, for example.16

     

    You deal with the problematic of speed in various places in your texts, at least one of them directly relating to the question of the materialities of communication.17 On that occasion you describe speed as yet another aspect of coupling and resonance. From this systems-theoretical perspective “rhythm” gains a new relevance, because “rhythm” can be understood as speed that facilitates coupling. You also note that such reflection upon coupling and its conditions might furnish interesting ways of rephrasing the contemporary philosophical tendency to problematize concepts such as “agency” and “subjectivity.” I was struck by the ways in which this approach to speed seems so much cooler and formally dry than, say, Virilio’s very important, but tendentially catastrophic diagnosis of an information society touching upon the absolute speed of light, on the other side of the modern transmission revolution, but also displaying much more interesting critical potential than such utopian-minded thinkers of the speed of posthuman robotics and intelligence as Moravec and Minsky. Not surprisingly, perhaps, I want to ask you how you would flesh out your notion of speed in relation to digital works of art whose tempi and rhythms touch upon the limits of human affectivity, interfaces, as well as modes of communication.

     

    I wondered whether one can get far enough here to meet an all too common reaction to the question concerning posthuman speed: “Yes, sure, digital technology, mediation, and communication introduce accelerations that go beyond the human in quite a few ways, but, then, what does it matter?” Particularly in the area of digital art and aesthetics people often shrug off this question of speed, typically with a remark to the effect that, if indeed we cannot perceive it nor place it in the sensible nor make sense of it, we are not talking about art anymore anyway. And to a certain extent I understand that response, at least if one can describe it as the urge to abandon the question when we are not even dealing with coding and hence with information–information in Luhmann’s sense. That is, I can understand it as a response of this kind: “If this thing about speed is supposed to have to do with ‘digital art,’ then ‘digital art’ does not matter–what difference does it make?” The question becomes somewhat more pressing, however, once we are dealing with speeds of coding and information, for what to make of works that at least in part move too fast, or too slowly, for the human sensorium, language, or thought, but achieve artful or aesthetic effects nonetheless? Hence the title of this interview: how are the speeds that grant beauty to digital artworks, and how are we humans and our bodies, placed in relation to this?

     

    HUG: Again, this weird and passé concept of the “post-human.” What would be “human” speed–and why should any kind of speed, so to speak, bother to be “human”? Isn’t this ridiculously anthropocentric, once you agree that the entire dimension and category of the “sublime” (which we discussed earlier) could not possibly exist if it were not for all of those (endless, innumerable) phenomena that exceed the different human capacities for decomplexification? Let me just suggest a very simple comparison: we know that each of the different human senses only covers or captures a limited range of what other living beings can capture, and therefore perceive and even experience. There are levels of speed (and slowness) that we may be able to calculate, but for which we will never have any mental or physical affinity. So what’s the big deal? I suppose that any kind of speed or slowness that can ever become aesthetically relevant cannot be post- or meta-human. In this sense, I believe that those phenomena and works of art that we like to call “sublime” are those that exceed the capacity of the human senses just by a bit. The extent of this universe may be “way too big to be sublime.” The same is true for speed. If certain digital artists produce effects of speed that are appealing to some or many viewers (seemingly not to me), then these viewers must be capable of relating to this speed. What I call “rhythm,” I assume, helps to relate to different speeds in the perceived transformation of phenomena, without of course being a necessary condition of such relating. Now I define/describe “rhythm” as a form given to (wrested from) a “time-object” in the proper sense, i.e., an object that exists in an ongoing self-transformation. So I assume that our possibility for capturing the speed of such transformation is greatly enhanced if these transformations take place in a rhythmic form. Of course there might be transformations that do have a form and that do take place at a rate of speed that simply exceeds our perceptive capacities.

     

    What I do not understand is why and how, for example, it would be a “catastrophy” to discover (if this were ever the case) that the speed of information comes close to the speed of light. Can channels of information that have to do with electricity ever have been much slower? And why would we want to perceive all of the screams and waves of technologically-produced electricity (for example) that surround us? Would it not only be to give us the right to complain about present-day culture?

     

    Notes

     

    1. See Gumbrecht and Pfeiffer, eds., Materialities of Communication.

     

    2. See, for instance, Gumbrecht, “Epistemologie / Fragmente” in Gumbrecht and Pfeiffer, eds., Paradoxien 837-50, 839.

     

    3. For Gumbrecht’s remarks on this text, see Making Sense 12.

     

    4. See Cubitt, Couchot, Hansen, Stiegler, Mitchell, and Crary.

     

    5. See Manovich, Image Future.

     

    6. See Gumbrecht, Lob Des Sports, translated as In Praise of Athletic Beauty.

     

    7. See, for example, “‘Dabei Sein Ist Alles’,” “It’s Just a Game,” “Epiphany of Form,” and In Praise of Athletic Beauty.

     

    8. In Russian, see Gumbrecht, “From Oedipal Hermeneutics”; the original English version appeared in Telos.

     

    9. Gumbrecht writes in more detail about Derrida’s work and the institutional impact of deconstruction, in the U.S. in particular, in “Deconstruction Deconstructed,” “Who Is Afraid of Deconstruction?” and “Martin Heidegger and His Interlocutors.”

     

    10. See Gumbrecht, Production of Presence 65-67.

     

    11. See Hayles, “Flesh and Metal” 297-99. Hayles’s text is also available at Medien Kunst Netz (<http://www.medienkunstnetz.de/search/?qt=hayles>. That site includes half a dozen rich critical articles that work towards rethinking “cyborg bodies” today; see <http://www.medienkunstnetz.de/themes/cyborg_bodies>.

     

    12. See Gumbrecht, “Form without Matter.” Note also Gumbrecht’s turn to Heidegger in The Production of Presence when engaging in a rethinking of space and bodily presence.

     

    13. The latter translated as Aesthetics of Appearing (Stanford: Stanford UP, 2005).

     

    14. A four-minute video of the work is available at <http://www.fundacion.telefonica.com/at/rlh/video/subpub.html>.

     

    15. ZKM arranged an important exhibition on precisely this, and the resulting publication is of seminal importance in the field; see Frohne et al., eds.

     

    16. See Hansen’s interesting article on this aspect of Viola’s work.

     

    17. See Gumbrecht, “A Farewell to Interpretation” 400.

     

    References

     

    • Bohrer, Karl Heinz. Ästhetische Negativität.München: C. Hanser, 2002.Bolz, Norbert. “Aesthetics of Media: What Is the Cost of Keeping Benjamin Current?” Gumbrecht and Marrinan 24-29.
    • Couchot, Edmond. La technologie dans l’art: de la photographie à la réalité virtuelle. Nîmes: Éditions Jacqueline Chambon, 1998.
    • Crary, Jonathan. Suspensions of Perception. Attention, Spectacle, and Modern Culture. Cambridge: MIT P, 1999.
    • Cubitt, Sean. Digital Aesthetics. London: Sage, 1998.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Of Grammatology. Trans. Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1997.
    • Frohne, Ursula, Peter Weibel, Thomas Y. Levin, and Zentrum für Kunst und Medientechnologie, eds. Ctrl Space: Rhetorics of Surveillance from Bentham to Big Brother: Exhibition: 12 October 2001-24 February 2002. Cambridge: MIT P, 2002.
    • Godzich, Wlad. “Language, Images, and the Postmodern Predicament.” Gumbrecht and Pfeiffer, Materialities 355-70.
    • Grau, Oliver. Virtual Art: From Illusion to Immersion. Rev. ed. Cambridge: MIT P, 2003.
    • Gumbrecht, Hans Ulrich. “‘Dabei Sein Ist Alles’: Über Die Geschichte Von Medien, Sport, Publikum.” Arete: The Journal of Sport Literature 4.1 (1986): 25-43.
    • —. “Deconstruction Deconstructed: Transformationen Französischer Logozentrismus-Kritik in Der Amerikanischen Literaturtheorie.” Philosophische Rundschau 33.12 (1986): 1-35.
    • —. “Epiphany of Form: On the Beauty of Team Sports.” New Literary History 30.2 (1999): 351-72.
    • —. “A Farewell to Interpretation.” Gumbrecht and Pfeiffer, Materialities 389-402.
    • —. “Form without Matter Vs. Form as Event.” MLN 111.3 (1996): 578-92.
    • —. “From Oedipal Hermeneutics to Philosophy of Presence (an Autobiographical Fantasy).” New Literary Review (Moscow) 2005.
    • —. “From Oedipal Hermeneutics to Philosophy of Presence (an Autobiographical Fantasy).” Telos (forthcoming 2006).
    • —. In 1926: Living at the Edge of Time. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1997.
    • —. In Praise of Athletic Beauty. Cambridge: Belknap P, 2006.
    • —. “Introduction: How Much Sense Does Sense Making Make? Californian Retrospective to a German Question.” Gumbrecht, Making Sense 3-13.
    • —. “It’s Just a Game: On the History of Sports, Media, and the Public.” Gumbrecht, Making Sense 272-87.
    • —. Lob Des Sports. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp, 2005.
    • —. Making Sense in Life and Literature. Ed. Wlad Godzich. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1992.
    • —. “Martin Heidegger and His Interlocutors: About a Limit of Western Metaphysics.” Diacritics 30.4 (2000): 83-101.
    • —. Production of Presence: What Meaning Cannot Convey. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2004.
    • —. “Who Is Afraid of Deconstruction?” Diskurstheorien Und Literaturwissenschaft. Eds. Jürgen Fohrmann and Harro Müller. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp, 1988. 95-114.
    • Gumbrecht, Hans Ulrich, and Michael Marrinan, eds. Mapping Benjamin: The Work of Art in the Digital Age. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2003.
    • Gumbrecht, Hans Ulrich, and Karl Ludwig Pfeiffer, eds. Materialities of Communication. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1994.
    • Gumbrecht, Hans Ulrich, and K. Ludwig Pfeiffer, eds. Paradoxien, Dissonanzen, Zusammenbrüche: Situationen Offener Epistemologie. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp, 1991.
    • Hansen, Mark B. N. New Philosophy for New Media. Cambridge: MIT P, 2004.
    • —. “Seeing with the Body: The Digital Image in Postphotography.” Diacritics: A Review of Contemporary Criticism 31.4 (2001): 54-84.
    • —. “The Time of Affect, or Bearing Witness to Life.” Critical Inquiry 30.3 (2004): 584-626.
    • Hayles, N. Katherine. “Flesh and Metal: Reconfiguring the Mindbody in Virtual Environments.” Configurations 10 (2002): 297-320.
    • —. How We Became Posthuman: Virtual Bodies in Cybernetics, Literature, and Informatics. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1999.
    • Lozano-Hemmer, Rafael. “Subtitled Public.” < http://www.fundacion.telefonica.com/at/rlh/eproyecto.html> 21 Dec. 2001.
    • Luhmann, Niklas. The Reality of the Mass Media. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2000.
    • Lyotard, Jean-Francois. “Can Thought Go on Without a Body?” Gumbrecht and Pfeiffer, Materialities 286-300.
    • Manovich, Lev. Image Future. <http://www.manovich.net/DOCS/image_future.doc> 21 Dec. 2005.
    • —. The Language of New Media. Cambridge: MIT P, 2001.
    • —. The Poetics of Augmented Space. <http://www.manovich.net/DOCS/augmented_space.doc.>. 7 Oct. 2005.
    • Mitchell, William J. The Reconfigured Eye. Visual Truth in the Post-Photographic Era. Cambridge: MIT P, 1992.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. The Birth to Presence. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1993.
    • Rokeby, David. “n-Cha(n)t.” Walter Phillips Gallery, Banff Centre for the Arts, Canada. 2001. <http://homepage.mac.com/davidrokeby/nchant.html> 21 Dec. 2001.
    • Seel, Martin. Aesthetics of Appearing. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2005.
    • —. Ästhetik Des Erscheinens. München: Hanser, 2000.
    • Sontag, Susan. Against Interpretation and Other Essays. New York: Farrar, 1966.
    • Stiegler, Bernard. “The Discrete Image.” Echographies of Television: Filmed Interviews. Eds. Jacques Derrida and Bernard Stiegler. Cambridge: Polity, 2002. 147-63.
    • Werber, Niels. “Media Theory after Benjamin and Brecht: Neo-Marxist?” Gumbrecht and Marrinan 230-38.

     

  • Lose the Building: Systems Theory, Architecture, and Diller+Scofidio’s Blur

    Cary Wolfe

    Department of English
    Rice University
    cewolfe@rice.edu

     

    “The work of art is an ostentatiously improbable occurrence.”

    –Niklas Luhmann, Art as a Social System (153)

     

    The Blur building designed by the New York architectural team of Ricardo Scofidio and Elizabeth Diller–a manufactured cloud with an embedded viewing deck, hovering over Lake Neuchatel in Switzerland–seems to have enjoyed nearly universal acclaim from the moment it opened to the public in October of 2002 as part of media Expo ’02. The reasons for this are not far to seek; they range from what a Swiss newspaper reviewer characterizes as the liberating effect of the zany cloud on “the crotchety Swiss”–“What a crazy, idiosyncratic thing! How deliciously without purpose!,” he exclaims (Diller+Scofidio 372)–to Diller+Scofidio’s knowing deployment of the relationship between public architecture, the history and function of the exposition as a social form, and the manufacture and use of spectacle in relation to both (92, 162). The project went through many different elaborations, enhancements, and embellishments between July of 1998, when Diller+Scofidio was invited to participate, and the closing of the Expo in October of 2002. Almost all of these were, for various reasons, unrealized in the final project. At one point, the cloud was to house an “LED text forest” of vertical LED panels that would scroll text–either from an Internet feed (including live “chat” produced by visitors to the structure) or, in a later version, produced by an artist such as Jenny Holzer (163, 324). Another idea early in the project was to build an adjacent “Hole in the Water” restaurant made of submerged twin glass cylinders with an aquarium layer in between, in which diners would sit at eye level with the lake and eat sushi (100-111); another, to have an open air “Angel Bar” embedded in the upper part of the cloud, in which patrons could select from an endless variety of the only beverage served there: water–artesian waters, sparkling waters, waters from both glacial poles, and municipal tap waters from around the world (“tastings can be arranged,” we are told) (146-55). Yet another elaborate idea, rather late in the project’s evolution, involved the distribution of “smart” raincoats–or “braincoats”–to visitors to the cloud, which would indicate, through both sound and color, affinity or antipathy to other visitors on the basis of a preferences questionnaire filled out upon entry to the cloud (209-51).

     

    Figure 1
    Figure 1: The “Blur Building.”
    Courtesy of Diller+Scofidio

     

    As even this brief list suggests, the project went through many permutations. But in the end–not least for reasons of money–what we are left with in Blur is the manufactured cloud with the “Angel Deck” (now, not a water bar but a viewing deck) nestled at its crest. For reasons I will try to explain by way of contemporary systems theory, the fact that these permutations and sideline enhancements were not realized in the end is not entirely a bad thing, because it rivets our attention not only on what has captivated most viewers from the beginning, but also on what makes the project a paradigmatic instance of the way contemporary architecture responds to the complexities of its broader social environment in terms of its specific medium–and that is, as Diller+Scofidio put it, “the radicality of an absent building” (15), the remarkable, audacious commitment to a building that was not a building at all but a manufactured cloud: “the making,” as they put it, “of nothing.” This core commitment was sounded by Diller+Scofidio early and often; at the core of the project, as it were, was no core at all, but a commitment to something “featureless, depthless, scaleless, spaceless, massless, surfaceless, and contextless” (162). And this overriding concern was reiterated at the end of the design phase, about a year before the Expo opened, in a very important communiqué from Diller:

     

    BLUR is not a building, BLUR is pure atmosphere, water particles suspended in mid-air. The fog is a dynamic, phantom mass, which changes form constantly . . . . In contradiction to the tradition of Expo pavilions whose exhibitions entertain and educate, BLUR erases information. Expos are usually competition grounds for bigger and better technological spectacles. BLUR is a spectacle with nothing to see. Within BLUR, vision is put out-of-focus so that our dependence on vision can become the focus of the pavilion. (325)

     

    And, she adds in bold type: “The media project must be liberated from all immediate and obvious metaphoric associations such as clouds, god, angels, ascension, dreams, Greek mythology, or any other kitsch relationships. Rather, BLUR offers a blank interpretive surface” (325).

     

    But not quite blank, as it turns out. In fact, the architects thought the perceptual experience of the Blur building would either metaphorize or, conversely, throw into relief a larger set of concerns about electronic media and how we relate to it. Midway through the project, in a presentation to a media sponsor, they characterized it this way:

     

    To “blur” is to make indistinct, to dim, to shroud, to cloud, to make vague, to obfuscate. Blurred vision is an impairment. A blurry image is the fault of mechanical malfunction in a display or reproduction technology. For our visually obsessed, high-resolution/high-definition culture, blur is equated with loss . . . . Our proposal has little to do with the mechanics of the eye, but rather the immersive potential of blur on an environmental scale. Broadcast and print media feed our insatiable desire for the visual with an unending supply of images . . . [but] as an experience, the Blur building offers little to see. It is an immersive environment in which the world is put out of focus so that our visual dependency can be put into focus. (195)

     

    At a different stage–one in which the LED text forest played a central role–the experience of the cloud figures “the unimaginable magnitude, speed, and reach of telecommunications.” As Diller+Scofidio put it, “unlike entering a building, the experience of entering this habitable medium in which orientation is lost and time is suspended is like an immersion in ‘ether.’ It is a perfect context for the experience of another all-pervading, yet infinitely elastic, massless medium–one for the transmission and propagation of information: the Internet. The project aims to produce a ‘technological sublime’ . . . felt in the scaleless and unpredictable mass of fog” (qtd. in Dimendberg 79).

     

    There are some interesting differences between these versions of the cloud, of course. In the first version, the resonance of the project falls on the iconographic and visually based forms of mass media; in the second, it is the ephemeral yet pervasive presence of electronic, digital forms of telecommunication generally that is in question. In the first, the point of the cloud is that it deprives us of the unproblematic visual clarity, immediacy, and transparency that the mass media attempt to produce in its consumers; in the second, the cloud’s water vapor metaphorically envelopes us in the electronic ether that we inhabit like a medium in contemporary life, but deprives us of the information that usually accompanies it and therefore distracts us from just how immersed in that medium we are. I am more concerned here, however, with what the two accounts have in common: that this particular form has been selected by Diller+Scofidio, and selected, moreover, to represent the unrepresentable–hence the notion of the “technological sublime” upon which both accounts converge.

     

    We ought not, however, take this notion of the sublime (or the term “representation,” for that matter) at face value. In fact, resorting to the discourse of the sublime here can only obscure the specificity of the project’s formal decisions–why it does what it does how it does–and how those decisions are directly related to the ethical and political point that the project is calculated to make. At its worst, it leads down the sorts of blind alleys we find in the July 2002 issue of Architecture, where one reviewer reads the project in terms of the symbolic significance of clouds and of Switzerland in Romantic literature (Mary Shelley’s Frankenstein, among others) and painting (J.M.W. Turner, among others), all of which is supposedly mobilized in Blur‘s rewriting of the sublime as a “cautionary tale about the environment” (Cramer 53). And all of which recycles exactly the sorts of “immediate and obvious metaphoric associations” and “kitsch relationships” that, as we have just seen, Diller rightly rails against.

     

    It might seem more promising, at least at first glance, to pursue more theoretically sophisticated renderings of the sublime in contemporary theory, most notably in the work of Jean-François Lyotard (though other recent renditions of the concept, such as we find in Slavoj Zizek’s conjugation of Kant and Lacan, might be invoked here as well). In Lyotard–to stay with the most well-known example–the locus classicus is a certain reading of Kant. The sublime is rendered as a kind of absolute outside to human existence–one that is, for that very reason, terrifying. At the same time, paradoxically (and this is true of Zizek’s rendering as well), that radically other outside emerges as a product of the human subject’s conflict with itself, a symptom of the Enlightenment subject running up against its own limits. In Lyotard’s famous rendering of the Kantian sublime in The Postmodern Condition, it emerges from the conflict between “the faculty to conceive of something and the faculty to `present’ something” (77). “We can conceive the infinitely great, the infinitely powerful,” he explains, “but every presentation of an object destined to ‘make visible’ this absolute greatness or power appears to us painfully inadequate. Those are ideas of which no presentation is possible. Therefore they impart no knowledge about reality (experience)” (78). And the entire ethical stake of modern art for Lyotard is “to present the fact that the unpresentable exists. To make visible that there is something which can be conceived and which can neither be seen nor made visible” (78). But how to do this? Here, Lyotard follows Kant’s invocation of “‘formlessness, the absence of form,’ as a possible index to the unpresentable,” as that which “will enable us to see only by making it impossible to see; it will please only by causing pain” (78). The sublime, then, is a “feeling” that marks the incommensurability of reason (conception) and the singularity or particularity of the world and its objects (presentation). And it is an incommensurability that carries ethical force, for it serves as a reminder that the heterogeneity of the world cannot be reduced to a unified rule or reason. And this incompleteness in turn necessitates a permanent openness of any discourse to its other, to what Lyotard calls, in a book by the same title, the “differend.”

     

    Lyotard’s rendering of the Kantian sublime would seem to be useful in approaching Blur, and Kant’s invocation of “formlessness” as the sublime’s index would seem doubly promising. But its limitations may be marked by the fact that Kant’s sublime remains tethered to “something on the order of a subject” (to use Foucault’s famous phrase)–hence it remains referenced essentially to the language of phenomenology, to the affective states of a subject-supposed-to-know who, in experiencing her non-knowledge, experiences pain, and thus changes her relation to herself. What I am suggesting, then, is that in Lyotard’s rendering of the sublime–and it would be far afield to argue the point in any more detail here–the price we pay for a certain deconstruction of the subject of humanism (one that will be traced from Kant to Nietzsche in The Postmodern Condition) is that the subject remains installed at the center of its universe, only now its failure is understood to be a kind of success (77). Moreover, the fact that this failure is ethical–is the hook on which the ethical rehabilitation of the subject hangs in its forcible opening to the world of the object, the differend, and so on–is the surest sign that we have not, for all that, left the universe of Kantian humanism. For we must remember that the ethical force of the sublime in Lyotard’s Kant depends upon the addressee of ethics being a member of the community of “reasonable beings” who must be equipped with the familiar humanist repertoire of language, reason, and so on to experience in the ethical imperative not a “determinant synthesis”–not one-size-fits-all rules for the good and the just act–but “an Idea of human society” (which is why Kant will argue, for example, that we have no direct duties to non-human animals) (Lyotard and Thébaud 85). And this in turn re-ontologizes the subject/object split that the discourse of the sublime was meant to call into question in the first place.

     

    In contrast to this, Diller+Scofidio insist that their work be understood in “post-moral and post-ethical” terms (qtd. Dimendberg 79). This does not mean I think, that they intend their work to have no ethical or political resonance–that much is already obvious from their comments on Blur–but rather that they understand the relationship between art, the subject, and world in resolutely post-humanist terms. In Diller+Scofidio, the human and the non- or anti- or a-human do not exist in fundamentally discrete ontological registers but–quite the contrary–inhabit the same space in mutual relations of co-implication and instability. This boundary-breakdown tends to be thematized in their work in the interlacing of the human and the technological (as in, for example, the multimedia theater work Jet Lag, the Virtue/Vice Glasses series, and the EJM 2 Inertia dance piece); it is also sometimes handled even more broadly in terms of the interweaving of the organic and the inorganic, the “natural” and the “artificial” (think here not only of Blur, but also of projects like Slow House and The American Lawn). Sometimes those unstable relations are funny, sometimes they are frightening, but almost always the signature affect in Diller+Scofidio is radical ambivalence–an ambivalence that, in contrast to the sublime, isn’t about a clear-cut pain that becomes, in a second, pedagogical moment, pleasure, but rather an ambivalence from the first moment of our experience of the work. This ambivalence is often tied to the difficulty of knowing exactly what is being experienced (as in works that intermesh real video surveillance with staged scenes, such as the Facsimile installation at the Moscone Convention Center in San Francisco), or, if we do know, how we should feel about it (think here of Jump Cuts or, again, Blur). All of which leads, in turn, to the ultimate question: namely, who is doing the experiencing? Who–in phenomenological, ethical, and political terms–are “we,” exactly? In this light, Diller+Scofidio (like Lyotard’s Kant) show us how questions of ethics are just that: questions; but they do so (unlike Lyotard’s Kant) without recontaining the force of that radical undecidability in terms of a humanist subject, an all too familiar “we”–a “reasonable being” directed toward an “idea of society”–for whom, and only for whom, those questions are.

     

    What this suggests, I think, is that a move beyond an essentially humanist ontological theoretical framework is in order if we are to understand the Blur project or, indeed, Diller+Scofidio’s work as a whole. We need, in other words, to replace “what” questions with “how” questions (to use Niklas Luhmann’s shorthand) (Art 89). Here, recent work in systems theory–and particularly Luhmann’s later work–can be of immense help, not least because it gives us a theoretical vocabulary for understanding the sorts of things that Diller+Scofidio have in mind when they suggest that in Blur “our objective is to weave together architecture and electronic technologies, yet exchange the properties of each for the other” (44). For the fundamental postulate of systems theory–its replacement of the familiar ontological dichotomies of humanism (culture/nature and its cognates: mind/body, spirit/matter, reason/feeling, and so on) with the functional distinction system/environment–is indispensable in allowing us to better understand the sorts of transcodings that Diller+Scofidio have in mind, because it gives us a common theoretical vocabulary that can range across what were, in the humanist tradition, ontologically discrete categories. Moreover, systems theory will allow us to explain not only how those transcodings are specific to particular systems–how art and architecture, for example, integrate electronic technologies as Art–but also how, in being system-specific, they are paradoxically paradigmatic of, and productive of, the very situation to which those systems respond.[1] That situation is “hypercomplexity,” created by what Luhmann calls the “functional differentiation” of modern society (what other critical vocabularies would call its specialization or, more moralistically, its fragmentation), which only gets accentuated and accelerated under post-modernity.[2]

     

    For Luhmann, the social system of art–like any other autopoietic system, by definition–finds itself in an environment that is always already more complex than itself, and all systems attempt to adapt to this complexity by filtering it in terms of their own, self-referential codes which are based on a fundamental distinction by means of which they carry out their operations. The point of the system is to reproduce itself, but no system can deal with everything, or even many things, all at once. The legal system, for example, responds to changes in its environment in terms of–and only in terms of–the distinction legal/illegal. In litigation, decisions are not based–and it is a good thing too–on whether it is raining or not, whether you went to Duke or to Rice, if you are wearing a blue shirt or a white shirt, whether or not you’re a vegetarian, and so on. One might well object that this ignores, say, the obvious influence of the economic system on the legal system, but for Luhmann this is simply evidence of the need for the legal system to further assert its own differentiation and autopoietic insularity. The determination of the legal by the economic system would be a symptom, to use Raymond Williams’s well-worn distinction, of the undue influence of a residual, premodern mode of social organization (center/periphery or top/bottom), in which one system dominates and determines the functions of the others, on the dominant, yet incompletely realized, mode of functional differentiation that characterizes modernity.

     

    Two subsidiary points need to be accented here. First, it is by responding to environmental complexity in terms of their own self-referential codes that subsystems build up their own internal complexity (one might think here of the various sub-specialties of the legal system, say, or for that matter the specialization of disciplines in the education system, particularly in the sciences); in doing so, systems become more finely grained in their selectivity, and thus–by increasing the density of the webwork of their filters, as it were–they buy time in relation to overwhelming environmental complexity. As Luhmann puts it in Social Systems, “Systems lack the `requisite variety’ (Ashby’s term) that would enable them to react to every state of the environment . . . . There is, in other words, no point-for-point correspondence between system and environment . . . . The system’s inferiority in complexity [compared to that of the environment] must be counter-balanced by strategies of selection” (25). But if the self-reference of the system’s code reduces the flow of environmental complexity into the system, it also increases its “irritability” and, in a very real sense, its dependence on the environment.

     

    As for this latter point, it is worth noting that systems theory in general and the theory of autopoiesis in particular are often criticized for asserting a kind of solipsism separating the system from its environment, but what this rather ham-fisted understanding misses is that systems theory attempts to account for the complex and seemingly paradoxical fact that the autopoietic closure of a system–whether social or biological–is precisely what connects it to its environment. As Luhmann explains, “the concept of a self-referentially closed system does not contradict the system’s openness to the environment. Instead, in the self-referential mode of operation, closure is a form of broadening possible environmental contacts; closure increases, by constituting elements more capable of being determined, the complexity of the environment that is possible for the system” (Social Systems 37). And this is why, as Luhmann puts it in Art as a Social System,

     

    autopoiesis and complexity are conceptual correlates . . . . Assuming that the system’s autopoiesis is at work, evolutionary thresholds can catapult the system to a level of higher complexity–in the evolution of living organisms, toward sexual reproduction, independent mobility, a central nervous system. To an external observer, this may resemble an increase in system differentiation or look like a higher degree of independence from environmental conditions. Typically, such evolutionary jumps simultaneously increase a system’s sensitivity and irritability; it is more easily disturbed by environmental conditions that, for their part, result from an increase in the system’s own complexity. Dependency and independence, in a simple causal sense, are therefore not invariant magnitudes in that more of one would imply less of the other. Rather, they vary according to a system’s given level of complexity. In systems that are successful in evolutionary terms, more independence typically amounts to a greater dependency on the environment . . . . But all of this can happen only on the basis of the system’s operative closure. (157-58)

     

    Or as Luhmann puts it in one of his more Zen-like moments, “Only complexity can reduce complexity” (Social Systems 26).

     

    The information/filter metaphor already invoked is misleading, however, on the basis of the second subsidiary point I mentioned above: because systems interface with their environment in terms of, and only in terms of, their own constitutive distinctions and the self-referential codes based upon them, the “environment” is not an ontological category but a functional one; it is not an “outside” to the system that is given as such, from which the system then differentiates itself– it is not, in other words, either “nature” or “society” in the traditional sense–but is rather always the “outside” of a specific inside. Or as Luhmann explains it, the environment is different for every system, because any system excludes only itself from its environment (Social Systems 17). All of this leads to a paradoxical situation that is central to Luhmann’s work, and central to understanding Luhmann’s reworking of problems inherited from both Hegel and Husserl: What links the system to the world–what literally makes the world available to the system–is also what hides the world from the system, what makes it unavailable. Given our discussion of the sublime and the problem of “representing the unrepresentable” this should ring a bell–but a different bell, as it turns out. To understand just how different, we need to remember that all systems carry out their operations and maintain their autopoiesis by deploying a constitutive distinction, and a code based upon it, that in principle could be otherwise; it is contingent, self-instantiated, and rests, strictly speaking, on nothing. But this means that there is a paradoxical identity between the two sides that define the system, because the distinction between both sides is a product of only one side. In the legal system, for example, the distinction between the two sides legal/illegal is instantiated (or “re-entered,” in Luhmann’s terminology) on only one side of the distinction, namely the legal. But no system can acknowledge this paradoxical identity of difference–which is also in another sense simply the contingency–of its own constitutive distinction and at the same time use that distinction to carry out its operations. It must remain “blind” to the very paradox of the distinction that links it to its environment.

     

    That does not mean that this “blind spot” cannot be observed from the vantage of another system–it can, and that is what we are doing right now–but that second-order observation will itself be based on its own blind spot, the paradoxical identity of both sides of its constitutive distinction, and so on and so forth. First-order observations that deploy distinctions as difference simply “do what they do.” Second-order observations can observe the unity of those differences and the contingency of the code of the first-order observer–but only by “doing what they do,” and thus formally reproducing a “blindness” that is (formally) the same but (contingently) not the same as the first-order system’s. And here, as I have suggested elsewhere, we find Luhmann’s fruitful reworking of the Hegelian problematic: Hegel’s “identity of identity and non-identity” is reworked as the “non-identity of identity and non-identity”–and a productive non-identity at that.[3] As Luhmann explains:

     

    The source of a distinction’s guaranteeing reality lies in its own operative unity. It is, however, precisely as this unity that the distinction cannot be observed–except by means of another distinction which then assumes the function of a guarantor of reality. Another way of expressing this is to say the operation emerges simultaneously with the world which as a result remains cognitively unapproachable to the operation. The conclusion to be drawn from this is that the connection with the reality of the external world is established by the blind spot of the cognitive operation. Reality is what one does not perceive when one perceives it. (“Cognitive Program” 76)

     

    Or as he puts it in somewhat different terms, the world is now conceived, “along the lines of a Husserlian metaphor, as an unreachable horizon that retreats further with each operation, without ever holding out the prospect of an outside” (Art 92).

     

    The question, then–and this is directly related to the problems raised by the topos of the sublime–is “how to observe how the world observes itself, how a marked space emerges [via a constitutive distinction] from the unmarked space, how something becomes invisible when something else becomes visible.” Here, we might seem far afield from addressing the Blur project, but as Luhmann argues, “the generality of these questions allows one to determine more precisely what art can contribute to solving this paradox of the invisibilization that accompanies making something visible” (Art 91). In this way, the problems that the discourse of the sublime attempts to address can be assimilated to the more formally rigorous scheme of the difference between first- and second-order observation. Any observation “renders the world invisible” in relation to its constitutive distinction, and that invisibility must itself remain invisible to the observation that employs that distinction, and can only be disclosed by another observation that will also necessarily be doubly blind in the same way (91). “In this twofold sense,” Luhmann writes, “the notion of a final unity–of an ‘ultimate reality’ that cannot assume a form because it has no other side–is displaced into the unobservable . . . . If the concept of the world is retained to indicate reality in its entirety, then it is that which–to a second-order observer–remains invisible in the movements of observation (his own and those of others)” (91). This means not only that “art can no longer be understood as an imitation of something that presumably exists along with and outside of art,” but more importantly for our purposes, “to the extent that imitation is still possible, it now imitates the world’s invisibility, a nature that can no longer be apprehended as a whole” (92). “The paradox unique to art, which art creates and resolves,” Luhmann writes, “resides in the observability of the unobservable” (149). And this is a question of form.

     

    It is in these terms–to return to Diller+Scofidio–that we might best understand the uncanny effect of Blur‘s manufactured cloud hovering over a lake, with the point being, we might say, not that the cloud is not a cloud but rather that the lake is not a lake, precisely in the sense that art can be said to imitate nature only because nature isn’t nature (an insight that is surely at work as well in Diller+Scofidio’s Slow House project)–which is another way of saying that all observations, including those of nature, are contingent, and of necessity blind to their own contingency. To put it in a Deleuzean rather than Luhmannian register, we might say that Blur virtualizes the very nature it “imitates,” but only, paradoxically, by concretizing that virtualization in its formal decisions–an “imitation of nature” that formally renders the impossibility of an “imitation of nature.” As Luhmann puts it, in an analysis that is thematized, as it were, in the blurriness of Diller+Scofidio’s project (and in the critical intent they attach to it), “Art makes visible possibilities of order that would otherwise remain invisible. It alters conditions of visibility/invisibility in the world by keeping invisibility constant and making visibility subject to variation” (Art 96). And here I think we can bring into the sharpest possible focus (if the metaphor can be allowed in this context!) the brilliance of the project’s “refusal” of architecture and its strategy of focusing on “the radicality of an absent building.” In this context, the strength of Blur’s formal intervention via à vis the medium of architecture is precisely its formlessness, because it is calculated to show how “the realm officially known as architecture” (to borrow Rem Koolhaas’s and Bruce Mau’s phrase)[4] can no longer “keep invisibility constant and make visibility subject to variation.” “Official architecture” renders the invisibility of the world invisible precisely by being too visible, too legible. And in so doing, as art, it might as well be invisible.

     

    Here, we might recall Luhmann’s suggestive comments about Christo’s and Jeanne-Claude’s wrapping of architectural structures. In an earlier moment of the “postmodern” in architecture, “quotation” of historical styles and elements attempts, as Luhmann puts it, “to copy a differentiated and diverse environment into the artwork,” but this in turn only raises the formal problem of “whether, and in what way, the work can claim unity, and whether it can assert itself against its own (!) ‘requisite variety’” (Art 298-89). “How,” as Luhmann puts it, “can the art system reflect upon its own differentiation, not only in the form of theory, but also in individual works of art?” (299). Christo’s and Jeanne-Claude’s response to this problem, he suggests, is “particularly striking: if objects can no longer legitimize their boundaries and distinctions, they must be wrapped” (400 n.220). From this perspective, we might think of Blur as a wrapped building with no building inside. Or better yet, as a wrapped building in which even the wrapping has too much form and begins to obsolesce the minute form is concretized.

     

    Figure 2
    Figure 2: Wrapped Reichstag, Berlin 1971-95.
    Christo and Jeanne-Claude
    Photo: Wolfgang Volz

     

    But what can it mean to say that an architectural project is concerned primarily with having little enough form? Here–and once again the otherwise daunting abstraction of systems theory is indispensable–we need to understand that when we use the term “form,” in no sense are we talking about objects, substances, materials, or things. Nor are we even, for that matter, talking about “shape.” As Luhmann explains,

     

    The word formal here does not refer to the distinction, which at first guided modern art, between form and matter or form and content, but to the characteristics of an indicating operation that observes, as if from the corner of its eye, what happens on the other side of form. In this way, the work of art points the observer toward an observation of form . . . . It consists in demonstrating the compelling forces of order in the realm of the possible. Arbitrariness is displaced beyond the boundaries of art into the unmarked space. If . . . one transgresses this boundary and steps from the unmarked into the marked space, things no longer happen randomly. (Art 147-48)

     

    In this way, form stages the question of “whether an observer can observe at all except with reference to an order” (148), andit stages the production of the unobservable (the “blind spot” of observation, the “outside” of any distinction’s “inside”) that inevitably accompanies such observations (149). As Luhmann will put it (rather unexpectedly), “the world displays all the qualities that Nicholas of Cusa ascribed to God: it is neither small nor large, neither unity nor diversity, it neither has a beginning nor is it without beginning–and this is why the world needs forms” (150). “From this vantage,” he writes,

     

    the function of art, one could argue, is to make the world appear within the world–with an eye toward the ambivalent situation that every time something is made available for observation something else withdraws, that, in other words, the activity of distinguishing and indicating that goes on in the world conceals the world . . . . Yet a work of Art is capable of symbolizing the reentry of the world into the world because it appears–just like the world–incapable of emendation. (149, emphasis added)

     

    With regard to this “reentry,” two related points should be highlighted here to fully appreciate the specificity of Blur‘s formal innovations. First, form is in a profound sense a temporal problem (if for no other reason than because of the contingency of any constitutive distinction); and second, formal decisions operate on two levels, what we might call the “internal” and “external”; they operate, that is, in relating the formal decisions of the artwork itself to the larger system of art, but also in relating the artwork as a whole to its larger environment, of which the subsystem of art is only a part. As Luhmann explains,

     

    What is at stake, operatively speaking, in the production and observation of a work of art is always a temporal unity that is either no longer or not yet observed. In this sense, the artwork is the result of intrinsic formal decisions and, at the same time, the metaform determined by these decisions, which, by virtue of its inner forms, can be distinguished from the unmarked space of everything else–the work as fully elaborated “object.” (Art 72)

     

    Even more forcefully, one can say that here we are not dealing with objects at all but rather with what systems theory sometimes calls “eigenvalues” or “eigenbehaviors,” recursive distinctions that unfold–and can only unfold–over time, even as they can only be experienced in the nano-moment of the present.[5] From this vantage, “objects appear as repeated indications, which, rather than having a specific opposite, are demarcated against `everything else’” (46). In fact, Luhmann suggests that we might follow Mead and Whitehead, who “assigned a function to identifiable and recognizable objects, whose primary purpose is to bind time. This function is needed because the reality of experience and actions consists in mere event sequences, that is, in an ongoing self-dissolution” (46).

     

    These terms, it seems to me, are remarkably apt for understanding how Blur‘s significance as a work of art under conditions of postmodernity goes far beyond the mere thematizations we can readily articulate. Indeed, in its unstable shape, shifting constantly in both density of light and moisture, this building that is not a building could well be described as epitomizing “a temporal unity that is either no longer or not yet observed”: a something that is also, to use Diller+Scofidio’s words, a nothing–in short, a blur. At the same time, paradoxically, as a “metaform,” one could hardly imagine a more daring and original formal decision that dramatically distinguishes itself from “the unmarked space of everything else.”

     

    Figure 3
    Figure 3: The “Blur Building.”
    Courtesy of Diller+Scofidio

     

    When we combine this understanding of the artwork as what Luhmann (following Michel Serres) calls a “quasi-object” with attention to the double aspect of its formal decisions outlined above, we can zero in on the fact that, paradoxically, the “shapelessness” of the Blur building is precisely what constitutes its most decisive and binding formal quality–and not least, of course, with regard to adjacent formal decisions in architecture. Its “refusal” of architecture and its dematerialization of the architectural medium paradoxically epitomize the question of architectural form from a Luhmannian perspective; the shape-shifting, loosely-defined space of Blur only dramatizes what is true of all architectural forms. As the shifting winds over Lake Neuchatel blow the cloud this way and that, the joke is not on Blur, but rather on any architectural forms that think they are “solid,” real “objects”–that have, one might say, a compositional rather than systematic understanding of the medium. In this light, one is tempted to view those moments when the winds at Lake Neuchatel swept nearly all the cloud away to reveal the underlying tensegrity structure of Blur–leaving, as one reviewer put it, the view of “an unfinished building awaiting its skin” (Schafer 93)–as the most instructive all, insofar as THE BUILDING (as object), “official architecture,” is revealed to be precisely not “the building” (as form).

     

    And as we have already noted, the effectiveness of these formal decisions is only enhanced by the fact that they are smuggled inside the Trojan Horse of the work’s savvy play with the “art imitates nature” theme. From a systems theory point of view, the joke is not on those who think that art imitates nature, but rather on those who think it doesn’t–not in the sense of “an imitation of something that presumably exists along with and outside of art,” but rather in the sense that “it now imitates the world’s invisibility, a nature that can no longer be apprehended as a whole” (Art 92). Another name for this fact, as we have already noted, is contingency–namely, the contingency of the distinctions and indications that make the world available and that, because contingent, simultaneously make the world unavailable. And it is against that contingency that the artwork and its formal decisions assert themselves. To put it succinctly, the work of art begins with a radically contingent distinction–a formal decision that could be otherwise–and then gradually builds up, through recursive self-reference, its own unique, non-paraphrasable character–its internal necessity, if you like. As Luhmann characterizes it,

     

    The artwork closes itself off by reusing what is already determined in the work as the other side of further distinctions. The result is a unique, circular accumulation of meaning, which often escapes one’s first view (or is grasped only “intuitively”) . . . . This creates an overall impression of necessity–the work is what it is, even though it is made, individual, and contingent, rather than necessary in an ontological sense. The work of art, one might say, manages to overcome its own contingency. (120)

     

    But here (and this is a crucial point), the recursive self-reference of form–and not the materiality of the medium per se–is key; as Luhmann puts it, “in working together, form and medium generate what characterizes successful artworks, namely, improbable evidence” (119). The genius of Blur from this vantage is that submits itself to this contingency in the vagaries and malleability of its shape, its “loose” binding of time (to recall Whitehead and Mead’s definition of objects), while simultaneously taking it into account, but as it were preemptively, within its own frame, as “an indicating operation that observes, as if from the corner of its eye, what happens on the other side of form” (147-48). And in doing so, “it employs constraints for the sake of increasing the work’s freedom in disposing over other constraints” (148), and this includes, of course, those contingencies that, rather than threatening the work with obsolescence, now increase the resonance of the work with its environment.

     

    Of course, this raises the question of what, exactly, art is, if the formlessness of the object is equated with the strength of its formal statement–if the strongest form of “something” turns out to be “nothing.” Here, however, we need only remind ourselves of the point we made a moment ago: that questions of form are not questions of objects (and indeed, if we follow Whitehead, Mead, and systems theory, even objects are not questions of objects). Or to put it another way, it is a question not of the being of the artwork but rather of its meaning. And if that’s the case, then we would do well, Luhmann rightly suggests, to remember the lessons of Duchamp, Cage, and conceptual art in general.[6] “One can ask how an art object distinguishes itself from other natural or artificial objects, for example, from a urinal or a snow shovel,” Luhmann writes (Art 34). “Marcel Duchamp used the form of a work of art to impress this question on his audience and, in a laudable effort, eliminated all sensuously recognizable differences between the two. But can a work of art at once pose and answer this question? ” (34). The answer, as it turns out, is no, because the meaning of Duchamp’s snow shovel–the significance of its first-order formal decisions–depends upon (and indeed ingeniously anticipates and manipulates) a second-order discourse of “art” criticism and theory in terms of which those first-order decisions are received. The first-order observer need only “identify a work of art as an object in contradistinction to all other objects or processes” (71). But for those who experience the work and want to understand its significance, the situation is quite different. Here, the project of Cage and Duchamp is “to confront the observer with the question of how he goes about identifying a work of art as a work of art. The only possible answer is: by observing observations” (71):

     

    The observer uses a distinction to indicate what he observes. This happens when it happens. But if one wants to observe whether and how this happens, employing a distinction is not enough–one must also indicate the distinction. The concept of form serves this purpose . . . . Whoever observes forms observes other observers in the rigorous sense that he is not interested in the materiality, expectations, or utterances of these observers, but strictly and exclusively in their use of distinctions. (66-7)

     

    Luhmann argues, in fact, that this is the issue that art and art criticism have been struggling with at least since the early modern period. The convention of the still life, for example, which assumes great importance in Italian and Dutch painting, presents us with “unworthy” objects that “could acquire meaning only by presenting the art of presentation itself,” focusing our attention on “the blatant discrepancy between the banality of the subject matter and its artful presentation” (Art 69)–a process that is only further distilled (more abstractly and formally, as it were) in Duchamp’s snow shovel. Indeed, part of the genius of Duchamp’s work is that it reveals how the formula of “disinterested pleasure” fails to clarify what can be meant by artful presentation as “an end in itself,” which only begs the question of whether “there is perhaps a special interest in being disinterested, and can we assume that such an interest also motivates the artist who produces the work, and who can neither preclude nor deny an interest in the interests of others?” (69). For Luhmann, such questions index the situation of art as a social system under functionally differentiated modernity, of art struggling to come to terms with its raison d’être–in systems theory terms, to achieve and justify its operational closure, its newly-won “autonomy.” “To create a work of art under these sociohistorical conditions,” then, “amounts to creating specific forms for an observation of observations. This is the sole purpose for which the work is ‘produced.’ From this perspective, the artwork accomplishes the structural coupling between first- and second-order observations in the realm of art . . . . The artist accomplishes this by clarifying–via his own observations of the emerging work–how he and others will observe the work” (69-70).

     

    Now such an understanding is well and good, but it would seem to leave wholly to the side the question of the experience of art as a perceptual and phenomenological event–something that would appear to be rather spectacularly foregrounded in Blur, as Mark Hansen has recently argued, and foregrounded, moreover, quite self-consciously in terms of the function of spectacle in the tradition of the international Expo as a genre (a matter emphasized in Diller’s lectures about the project at Princeton and elsewhere) (Hansen 325-30; Diller+Scofidio 92-4). Indeed, one might well argue that this, and not the coupling of first- and second-order observations by means of form, is what motivates contemporary art, its experimentation with different media, and so on–a rule that is only proved, so the argument would unfold, by the exception of conceptual art. Yet here, it seems to me, we find one of the more original and innovative aspects of Luhmann’s theory of art as a social system. Luhmann’s point is not to deny the phenomenological aspect of the artwork, but rather to point out the fact–which seems rather obvious, upon reflection–that the meaning of the artwork cannot be referenced to, much less reduced to, this material and perceptual aspect. Rather, the work of art co-presents perception and communication–and does so in a way that turns out to be decisive for what another theoretical vocabulary might call art’s “critical” function in relation to society.

     

    To understand how this happens, we need to remember that for Luhmann, perception and communication operate in mutually exclusive, operationally closed, autopoietic systems, though they are structurally coupled through media such as language. As Luhmann puts it in a formulation surely calculated to provoke: “Humans cannot communicate; not even their brains can communicate; not even their conscious minds can communicate. Only communication can communicate” (“How Can the Mind” 371). “Communication operates with an unspecific reference to the participating state of mind,” he continues; “it is especially unspecific as to perception. It cannot copy states of mind, cannot imitate them, cannot represent them” (381). At first, this contention seems almost ridiculously counter-intuitive, but upon reflection it is rather commonsensical. As Luhmann explains–and there is ample evidence for this in contemporary neurobiology and cognitive science–“what we perceive as our own mind operates as an isolated autopoietic system. There is no conscious link between one mind and another. There is no operational unity of more than one mind as a system, and whatever appears as a consensus is the construct of an observer, that is, his own achievement” (372). At the same time, however, consciousness and perception are a medium for communication. On the one hand, unperceived communications do not exist (if they did, how would we know?); communication “can hardly come into being without the participation of the mind,” Luhmann points out, and in this sense “the relationship is asymmetrical” (374). On the other hand, “communication uses the mind as a medium precisely because communication does not thematize the mind in question. Metaphorically speaking, the mind in question remains invisible to communication” (378). The mind is its own operationally closed (biological) system, but because it is also a necessary medium for communication, “we can then say that the mind has the privileged position of being able to disturb, stimulate, and irritate communication” (379). It cannot instruct or direct communications–“reports of perceptions are not perceptions themselves”–but it can “stimulate communication without ever becoming communication” (379-80).

     

    This “irreducibility” of perception to communication (and vice versa) and their asymmetrical relationship are important to art for several reasons. First, as Dietrich Schwanitz notes, perception and communication operate at different speeds–and this is something art puts to use. “Compared to communication,” he writes,

     

    the dimension of perception displays a considerably higher rate of information processing. The impression of immediacy in perception produces the notion that the things we perceive are directly present. Naturally, this is an illusion, for recent brain research has proven that sensory input is minimal compared with the complexity of neuronal self-perception . . . . Together, cultural and neuronal construction thus constitute a form of mediation that belies the impression of immediacy in perception. That does not, however, alter the fact that perception takes place immediately as compared to communication, the selective process of which is a sequential one. (494)

     

    To put it another way, although both perception and communication are autopoietic systems that operate on the basis of difference and distinction, their very different processing speeds make it appear that perception confirms, stabilizes, and makes immediate, while communication (to put it in Derridean terms) differs, defers, and temporalizes. In the work of art, the difference between perception and communication is “re-entered” on the side of communication, but (because of this asymmetry in speeds) in a way that calls attention to the contingency of communication–not of the first-order communication of the artwork, which appears incapable of emendation (it is what it is), but of the second-order observation of the work’s meaning vis à vis the system of art. This can be accomplished, as in Blur, by making perception “outrun” communication, as it were (a process well described by Hansen), the better to provoke a question that the work itself is made to answer; or, conversely, in a work like On Kawara’s Date Paintings, by using the calculated deficit of perceptual cues and information in the “paintings” themselves to call attention to the difference between the work’s immediate perceptual surface and its meaning.

     

    Figure 4
    Figure 4: Date Painting
    On Kawara

     

    Thus, the artwork co-presents the difference between perception and communication and it uses perception to “irritate” and stimulate communication to respond to the question, “what does this perceptual event mean?” And it is this difference–and how art uses it–that allows art to have something like a privileged relationship to what is commonly invoked as the “ineffable” or the “incommunicable.” As Luhmann puts it,

     

    The function of art would then consist in integrating what is in principle incommunicable–namely, perception–into the communication network of society . . . . The art system concedes to the perceiving consciousness its own unique adventure in observing artworks–and yet makes available as communication the formal selection that triggered the adventure. Unlike verbal communication, which all too quickly moves toward a yes/no bifurcation, communication guided by perception relaxes the structural coupling of consciousness and communication (without destroying it, of course) . . . . In a manner that is matched neither by thought nor by communication, perception presents astonishment and recognition in a single instant. Art uses, enhances, and in a sense exploits the possibilities of perception in such a way that it can present the unity of this distinction . . . . [T]he pleasure of astonishment, already described in antiquity, refers to the unity of the difference between astonishment and recognition, to the paradox that both intensify one another (Art 141).

     

    And, Luhmann adds–in an observation directly relevant to Blur‘s audacious formal solution to the “problem” of architecture–“Extravagant forms play an increasingly important role in this process” (141).

     

    This is not, however, simply a matter of “pleasure.” In fact, it is what gives art something like a privileged critical relationship to society, because art “establishes a reality of its own that differs from ordinary reality”; “despite the work’s perceptibility, despite its undeniable reality,” Luhmann writes, “it simultaneously constitutes another reality . . . . Art splits the world into a real world and an imaginary world,” and “the function of art concerns the meaning of this split” (Art 142). By virtue of its unique relationship to the difference between perception and communication, art can raise this question in an especially powerful way not available to other social systems. If we think of objects as “eigen-behaviors” (to seize once again on Heinz von Foerster’s term), as stabilizations made possible by the repeated, recursive application of particular distinctions, then we might observe that “the objects that emerge from the recursive self-application of communication”–versus, say, rocks or trees–“contribute more than any other kinds of norms and sanctions to supplying the social system with necessary redundancies.” They literally fix social space. This is probably even more true, Luhmann observes, of such “quasi-objects” (to use Michel Serres’s phrase) “that have been invented for the sake of this specific function, such as kings or soccer balls. Such ‘quasi-objects’ can be comprehended only in relation to this function”–indeed it is their sole reason for being. “Works of art,” Luhmann continues,

     

    are quasi-objects in this sense. They individualize themselves by excluding the sum total of everything else; not because they are construed as given but because their significance as objects implies a realm of social regulation. One must scrutinize works of art as intensely and with as close attention to the object as one does when watching kings and soccer balls; in this way–and in the more complex case where one observes other observers by focusing on the same object–the socially regulative reveals itself. (47, emphasis added)

     

    And when we remember that for Luhmann this “more complex” case is represented nowhere more clearly than in our experience of the mass media, the relationship between Blur‘s formal decisions as a work of art and its critical agenda of shedding light on “the socially regulative”–on the terrain of an international media Expo, no less–comes even more forcefully into view. In these terms, works of art, in calling our attention to the realm of “the socially regulative,” cast light on precisely those contingencies, constructions, and norms that the mass media, in its own specific mode of communication, occludes. In the first instance (the artwork), we seem to be dealing with completely ad hoc, constructed objects whose realm of reference is not “the real world” but rather that of the imagination; in the latter, we appear to be dealing with the opposite, in which the representations of the mass media are supposedly motivated by the objects and facts of “the real world.” In fact, however, this thematization in terms of “imaginative” and “real” only obscures the need to be rearticulate the relationship in terms of the dynamics of first- and second-order observation of different social systems. As Luhmann points out, “the mass media create the illusion that we are first-order observers whereas in fact this is already second-order observing” (“Deconstruction as Second-Order Observing” 775); or, more baldly still, “put in Kantian terms: the mass media generate a transcendental illusion” (The Reality of the Mass Media 4). The mass media’s rendering of reality, however–and this is a point that the “post-ethical” character of Diller+Scofidio’s work insists on as well–is not to be taken as, “as most people would be inclined to think, a distortion of reality. It is a construction of reality. For from the point of view of a postontological theory of observing systems, there is no distinct reality out there (who, then, would make these distinctions?) . . . [T]here is no transcendental subject,” Luhmann continues. “We have to rely on the system of the mass media that construct our reality . . . If there is no choice in accepting these observations, because there is no equally powerful alternative available, we have at least the possibility to deconstruct the presentations of the mass media, their presentations of the present” (“Deconstruction as Second-Order Observing” 776).

     

    That deconstruction of the mass media in Blur proceeds by means of the artwork’s second-order observation of the first-order system of the mass media, but it can carry out that observation only as art, only by “doing what it does” within the codes of the social system of art. The formal symmetry between those two observing systems, however–the fact that the dynamics of communication in autopoietic social systems operate in the same ways in each system (on the basis of the “blind spot” of paradoxical self-reference, and so on)–only throws into critical relief the important difference in the relationship of communication and perception (and in the case at hand, specifically visual perception) that is quite specific to each system: a difference that Blur will put to critical use under the thematics, as Diller suggests, of “spectacle.” We can gain a sharper sense of just how this is the case when we remember that for Luhmann, electronic mass media is just the latest in a series of powerful developments in the history of what he calls “media of dissemination,” beginning with language and then, crucially, the invention of writing and printing, whose power lies in their ability to make communication independent from a specific perceptual substrate or set of coordinates. “Alphabetized writing made it possible to carry communication beyond the temporally and spatially limited circle of those who were present at any particular time,” he writes, and language per se –and even more so writing and printing–“increases the understandability of communication beyond the sphere of perception” (Social Systems 160). Unlike oral speech, which “can compensate for lack of information with persuasion, and can synchronize speaking, hearing, and accepting in a rhythmic and rhapsodic way, leaving literally no time for doubt” (162), writing and printing “enforce an experience of the difference that constitutes communication,” and “they are, in this precise sense, more communicative forms of communication” (162-63).

     

    For Luhmann, the electronic mass media represent the culmination of this general line of historical development. Indeed, “for the differentiation of a system of the mass media, the decisive achievement can be said to have been the invention of technologies of dissemination which not only circumvent interaction among those co-present, but effectively render such interaction impossible for the mass media’s own communications” (The Reality 15-16)–a process begun with the advent of the printing press, when “the volume of written material multiplied to the extent that oral interaction among all participants in communication is effectively and visibly rendered impossible” (16). And so it is, Luhmann argues, that

     

    in the wake of the so-called democratization of politics and its dependence on the media of public opinion . . . those participating in politics–politicians and voters alike–observe one another in the mirror of public opinion . . . . The level of first-order observation is guaranteed by the continuous reports of the mass media . . . . Second-order observation occurs via the inferences one can draw about oneself or others, if one assumes that those who wish to participate politically encounter one another in the mirror of public opinion, and that this is sufficient (Art 64-65).

     

    It is just this situation that Blur attempts to address, if we believe Diller+Scofidio–namely, by subjecting communication in its mass mediated mode (as immediately legible and consumable) to a perceptual Blur, so that spectacle here operates not in the services of an immediately meaningful, pre-fab content (as in the electronic mass media) but rather as the quite unavoidable “irritation” or “perturbation” for another communication–one whose meaning is far from immediately clear and, in being so, operates directly in the services of art’s own communication and autopoiesis about itself (i.e. “what does this mean?; is this art?”), and its second-order observation of the all-too-tight coupling of perception and communication in the mass media. In this way, Diller+Scofidio’s Blur might be understood as bringing into focus 1)how the contingency of communication is managed and manipulated (quite improbably, as Luhmann reminds us) by the “socially regulative” in the electronic mass media and 2)how that dynamic, in turn, is coupled to a certain “consumerist” schematization of visuality, in which the difference between perception and communication is always already “re-entered” in mass-mediated communication to produce a “pre-digested,” iconographic visual space readily incorporated by a subject whose (un)ethical relation to the visual might best be summed up as: “CLICK HERE.”

     

    We could say, then, that Blur uses the difference between perception and communication in a way diametrically opposed to what we find it in the electronic mass media, and then routes that difference between art and the mass media through the work’s formal choices to render them specifically meaningful as art, and not just as well-meaning critical platitude. What is remarkable here, of course, is not that Blur makes this (somewhat unremarkable) observation about the relationship of perception and communication in electronic mass media, a relationship particularly evident in the realm of visuality; what is remarkable is that Blur does so without saying so, by insisting only on itself. This is simply to say that Blur communicates this difference as Art. And if it didn’t, we wouldn’t pay any attention to it.

     

    Notes

     

    1. It should be noted here–and it is abundantly clear in the catalog, Scanning, that accompanied the retrospective of Diller+Scofidio’s work at the Whitney in New York–that the distinction between “art” and “architecture” is of relatively little moment for Diller+Scofidio, and indeed their body of work is calculated to blur it (if the expression can be allowed in this context) beyond recognition. The same is true for Luhmann, who treats architecture as a subspecies of art, even while addressing here and there its differences from, say, painting or literary art.

     

    2. It should be noted that the term “postmodern” is one for which Luhmann has no use. For him, the postmodern is merely an intensification of features already fully present in modernity. On this point, see his essay “Why Does Society Describe Itself as Postmodern?”

     

    3. See on this point Wolfe, 67-68.

     

    4. This phrase was used by Koolhaas and Mau in their presentations of their Tree City project for the Parc Downsview Park competition in Toronto in 1999-2000. For an overview, see Polo.

     

    5. As Luhmann puts it, “Objects are therefore nothing but the eigenbehaviors of observing systems that result from using and reusing their previous distinctions” (“Deconstruction” 768).

     

    6. In this connection, we should remember, as Roselee Goldberg reminds us, just how influential conceptual art was for the early, formative stages of Diller+Scofidio’s career.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Anderson, Laurie, Aaron Betsky, and K. Michael Hays, eds. Scanning: The Aberrant Architectures of Diller+Scofidio. New York: Whitney Museum of Art, 2003.
    • Cramer, Ned. “All Natural.” Architecture 91.7 (July 2002): 51-59.
    • Diller+Scofidio. Blur: The Making of Nothing. New York: Abrams, 2002.
    • Dimendberg, Edward. “Blurring Genres.” Anderson et al. 67-80.
    • Goldberg, Roselee. “Dancing About Architecture.” Anderson et al. 44-60.
    • Hansen, Mark. “Wearable Space.” Configurations 10:2 (2002): 321-70.
    • Luhmann, Niklas. Art as a Social System. Trans. Eva M. Knodt. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2000.
    • —. “The Cognitive Program of Constructivism and a Reality that Remains Unknown.” Selforganization: Portrait of a Scientific Revolution. Ed. Wolfgang Krohn et al. Dordrecht: Kluwer, 1990. 64-85.
    • —. “Deconstruction as Second-Order Observing.” New Literary History 24 (1993): 763-82.
    • —. “How Can the Mind Participate in Communication?” Materialities of Communication. Ed. Hans Ulrich Gumbrecht and K. Ludwig Pfeiffer. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1994. 371-87.
    • —. The Reality of the Mass Media. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2000.
    • —. Social Systems. Trans. John Bednarz, Jr. with Dirk Baecker. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1995.
    • —. “Why Does Society Describe Itself as Postmodern?” Observing Complexity: Systems Theory and Postmodernity. Ed. William Rasch and Cary Wolfe. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2000. 35-49.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François. The Differend: Phrases in Dispute. Trans. George Van Den Abbeele. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1988.
    • —.The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge. Trans. Geoff Bennington and Brian Massumi. Fwd. Fredric Jameson. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1984.
    • Lyotard, Jean-François, and Jean-Loup Thè:baud. Just Gaming. Trans. Wlad Godzich. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1985.
    • Polo, Marco. “Environment as Process.” Canadian Architect 45.10 (Oct. 2000): 14-19.
    • Schafer, Ashley. “Designing Inefficiencies.” Anderson et al. 93-102.
    • Schwanitz, Dietrich. “Systems Theory and the Difference between Communication and Consciousness: An Introduction to a Problem and Its Context.” MLN 111.3 (1996): 488-505.
    • Wolfe, Cary. Critical Environments: Postmodern Theory and the Pragmatics of the “Outside.” Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1998.

     

     

     

  • Queer Optimism

    Michael Snediker

    English Department
    Mount Holyoke College
    msnedike@mtholyoke.edu

     

    Epithets

     

    While optimism has made cameos in the pages of queer theory, “queer” is not itself readily imaginable as one of optimism’s epithets. More familiar, perhaps, is Lauren Berlant’s and Michael Warner’s invocation of “hegemonic optimism” in their 1998 essay, “Sex in Public” (549). Berlant raises the spectre of “dubious optimism” in her 2001 essay, “The Subject of True Feeling: Pain, Privacy, and Politics” (129). The epithets “dubious” and “hegemonic” construe optimism as a tease, a seduction that queer theory might expose–and subsequently if not simultaneously jettison altogether–as that which cozens liberals (queer and non-queer) into complacency, the extensiveness and lure of which would all the more require optimism’s debunking.

     

    In the vernacular, optimism is often imagined epithetically as “premature”: as though if the optimist at hand knew all that she could eventually know, she would retract her optimism altogether. Prematurity would qualify optimism as a temporary state of insufficient information. The phrase “woefully optimistic,” on the other hand, implies that the knowledge that would warrant optimism’s retraction might never arrive. As an epithet, “woefully” (like “hegemonic,” “dubious,” or “premature”) subjects optimism to an outside judgment, the likes of which the optimist in question is presumed unable to make. It is difficult to imagine an optimist, as conventionally understood, denominating her own optimism as woeful or premature. Indeed, the moment at which a person is able to characterize her optimism as such might well mark the moment at which being optimistic cedes, as a position, if not to being pessimistic, then to something like being realistic. (I will return to the idea that being pessimistic potentially is potentially equivalent to being realistic.) The epithets delineated, that is, do not describe optimism so much as impose a diagnosis external to it that would make further characterizations of optimism (and more to the point, attachments to optimism) unnecessary.

     

    For all the lexical and semantic differences between the above epithets (“hegemonic,” for instance, hardly seems synonymous with “premature”), the optimism to which these epithets attach is fundamentally the same. This optimism can describe the utopic energy that motivates counterpublics (along the lines drawn by Michael Warner); or more generally, the liberal nation-state; or cynically, the inane recalcitrances of the Bush administration; or literarily, the pluck of Pollyanna or Horatio Alger’s Ragged Dick. I do not seek a new relation (oppositional, proponential) to this optimism. Rather, my essay calls for a revaluation of optimism itself. The particular élan that underwrites utopic optimisms can be traced to Leibniz, and I shall turn later in the essay to the ways Leibnizian optimism crucially differs from that of my own project. Succinctly: utopic optimism–and following, the optimism that crops up both in queer theory and critical theory more generally–is attached, temporally, to a future. Not unrelated to its futural (promissory, parousiac) stakes is its allergic relation to knowledge. For Leibniz, as we shall see, optimism’s attachment to faith would render knowledge superfluous. In current critical thought, optimism’s very sanguinity implies an epistemological deficit. This ostensibly definitional antagonistic relation to knowledge has had the perhaps unsurprising effect of taking optimism out of critical circulation. Queer optimism, oppositely, is not promissory. It doesn’t ask that some future time make good on its own hopes. Rather, queer optimism asks that optimism, embedded in its own immanent present, be interesting. Queer optimism’s interest–its capacity to be interesting, to hold our attention–depends on its emphatic responsiveness to and solicitation of rigorous thinking.

     

    Queer optimism, immanently rather than futurally oriented, does not entail a predisposition in the way that conventional optimism entails predisposition. More simply, it presents a critical field and asks that this field be taken seriously. If my investigation, then, extends to the likes of happiness, this is not because if one were more queerly optimistic, one would feel happier. Rather, queer optimism can be considered as a form of meta-optimism: it wants to think about feeling good, to make disparate aspects of feeling good thinkable.

     

    Queer optimism, then, seeks to take positive affects as serious and interesting sites of critical investigation. Likewise, queer optimism insists on thinking about personhood (as opposed to subjectivity) in terms of a durability not immediately or proleptically subject to structuralist or post-structuralist mistrust. Queer optimism concerns persons, rather than subjects or even selves. The latter categories inhabit (and unknowingly curate) particular discursive labyrinths (Cartesian, Foucaultian, Althusserian, Hegelian, Lacanian, etc.) of discipline, desire, and knowledge to which examinations of personhood at best only obliquely speak. My theoretical preference for persons over subjects asks how personhood variously can be characterized, removed from the columbarium of subjectivity.

     

    This critical project is born of the sense that queer theory, for all its contributions to our thinking about affect, has had far more to say about negative affects than positive ones. Furthermore, that in its attachment to not taking persons as such for granted, queer theory’s suspicious relation to persons has itself become suspiciously routinized, if not taken for granted in its own right. Risking charges of producing but another reductive binary, I shall for present, heuristic purposes be calling this tropaic gravitation toward negative affect and depersonation queer pessimism. It’s worth noting that queer pessimism has as little truck with conventional pessimism as queer optimism trucks with optimism, per se. Still, queer theory’s habitation of this pessimistic field is cause for real concern. Melancholy, self-shattering, the death drive, shame: these, within queer theory, are categories to conjure with. These terms and the scholarship energized by them do not in and of themselves comprise queer theory. To argue that they do caricatures both queer theory and the theorists who have put these terms on the map. However, these terms have dominated queer-theoretical discourse, and they have often seemed immune to queer theory’s own perspicacities.

     

    My essay conducts a purposive survey of the work of Judith Butler, Leo Bersani, Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick, and Lee Edelman. Without taking as definitive either this survey or my analysis of any given author, I wish these analyses to articulate a certain shape, to describe a current of enchantment that has privileged “suffering” and “dereliction” (to invoke two of Badiou’s terms) as sites both of ethics and understanding. Queer theory’s analyses of negative affect and ontological instability have been and continue to be both generous and generative. My wish is to clear a space for the possible generosities and generativities of queer optimism’s corresponding milieu. As space-clearing, this essay does not deliver the queer-optimistic “goods,” per se: positing a compact or even synecdochal account of queer optimism is at cross purposes with my reluctance to reduce queer optimism’s field before expanding it. I offer “Queer Optimism,” here, in the spirit of exordium and invitation.

     

    Of Sadness & Certainty

     

    The year I told my parents I was gay was also the year of my first sustained encounter with depression. At its bleakest, sadness and self-loathing felt like the sole remainders of a self which in all other aspects seemed untrustable and ersatz. Past happinesses seemed the feat of terrific mountebanking, moored either to monstrous ulterior motives or to machinically vacant automaticity. Delight was a little boat on a sad sea; it was slight and, simultaneously, perversely too heavy to be buoyant, too heavy because so quickly waterlogged.1

     

    What Elaine Scarry observed of physical suffering seemed as true of psychological suffering, that “for the person in pain, so incontestably, and unnegotiably present is it that ‘having pain’ may come to be thought of as the most vibrant example of what it is to ‘have certainty’” (4). Incontestable and unnegotiable, sadness seemed certain, tenaciously and vibrantly so. If sadness was the only thing I could feel utterly certain about, such an observation dovetailed with the inkling that certainty was itself a kind of sadness. Judith Butler’s accounts of melancholy seemed to confirm this latter possibility with an eloquence I had neither will nor skill to contest. “I want to suggest,” Butler writes, “that rigid forms of gender and sexual identification, whether homosexual or heterosexual, appear to spawn forms of melancholy” (Psychic Life 144). Not just particularly gendered or sexual identities, but “coherent identity position[s]” in general, are suspect within Butler’s account (149). “Perhaps,” Butler continues, “only by risking the incoherence of identity is connection possible” (149).2

     

    It seemed, in my first engagements with Butler’s texts, that I had two options. I could risk my own incoherence (which is as much to say, accept the originality of that incoherence), or can attach to coherence; as described by Butler, however, the latter can never really be an option. How can a nascent queer theorist indebted to and inspired by Butler choose the latter, when coherence was constitutively equivalent to reification, naturalization, and congealment? “Further,” Butler writes, “this [masculine or feminine] identity is constructed and maintained by the consistent application of this taboo [against homosexuality], not only in the stylization of the body in compliance with discrete categories of sex, but in the production and ‘disposition’ of sexual desire” (Gender Trouble 81). To attach to coherence would be to deny this series of “consistent applications,” to confuse repetition (amounting to congealment [81] or sedimentation [178]) with a “false foundationalism, the results of affectivity being formed or ‘fixed’ through the effects of the prohibition [against homosexuality]” (81).3 The globby abjection of a term like “congealment” should not, I think, go without saying. As though it weren’t bad enough that stability could come only on the heels of melancholy, this stability becomes, within Butler’s rhetoric, not just melancholic but disgusting, a sort of ontological aspic.

     

    My particular sadnesses, then, were all the more humiliating and confusing in so closely reflecting the critical writings to which I, as an initiate into queer theory, was attached. My experience of feeling ersatz, however, had none of the thrill of reading about being ersatz; likewise (to look ahead to another queer paradigm), my experience of feeling shattered lacked all the thrill of reading about being shattered. Stronger than the excitement of radical new possibilities of self-losing, of the vigorous embrace of factitiousness, was the grief of self-loss and the consuming repellence of feeling fictive. It seemed humiliating to approximate, even literalize, the conditions that in theory seemed so important, even exhilarating; but only to approximate them, to come up short. What I wanted for myself was the opposite of what I found intellectually most interesting and vital.

     

    What I noticed only later, returning to Butler’s texts, was the puzzling disjunction between the permanence ascribed to identities and the permanence ascribed to melancholy itself. Whereas identities appeared permanent (or became permanent through a process unsavory as congealment), melancholy simply was permanent. “This [melancholy] identification is not simply momentary or occasional, but becomes a new structure of identity” (Gender Trouble 74). Whereas the identity borne of melancholy required constant, quotidian maintenance, melancholy itself was described as a “permanent internalization” (74). Furthermore, Butler’s inclination to describe melancholy’s technique as “magical” rendered melancholy unimpeachable (73). Melancholy wasn’t like a magic trick, in the manner of debunkable smoke and mirrors; it was simply magic, a process beyond explanation, not entailing a suspension of disbelief, but seducing one into belief. Its effects were proof of its reality, and beyond analysis: unlike the identities that both “spawn[ed]” (Psychic Life 144) and were spawned by melancholy,4 whose congealed repetitions and machinic habits were nothing, under Butler’s perspicacious eye, if not susceptible to challenge and revision. Melancholy, that is, produced what would (erroneously) be experienced as coherent or certain identity, even as this false coherence was founded on the certain permanence of a melancholy whose reality was beyond reproach.

     

    For Leo Bersani, stable identities aren’t melancholic, but rather the source of interpsychical aggression. In one of his most recent books, Forms of Being: Cinema, Aesthetics, Subjectivity, Bersani reprises his conception of persons as fundamentally destructive, and sexuality as that which underwrites both auto- and allo-destructiveness. Bersani and co-author Ulysse Dutoit write:

     

    If we dismiss–as it seems to us we should–the more or less optimistic psychoanalytic theories between Freud and Lacan, theories that would make us more or less happy by way of such things as adaptation to the real and genital normalcy, then we may judge the great achievement of psychoanalysis to be its attempt to account for our inability to love others, and ourselves. The promises of adaptive balance and sexual maturity undoubtedly explain the phenomenal appeal of psychoanalysis as therapy, but its greatness may lie in its insistence on an intractable human destructiveness–a destructiveness resistant to any therapeutic endeavours whatsoever. This has little to do with sex, and we can distinguish between the practices normally identified as sex and a permanent, irreducibly destructive disposition which the great figures of psychoanalytic theory–especially Freud, Klein, Laplanche and Lacan–more or less explicitly define as sexuality. (124-25)5

     

    Bersani’s and Dutoit’s qualification of optimism and happiness as “more or less” connotes less optimism’s insidiousness–an allegation more readily detectable in Berlant’s and Warner’s affixing of “optimism” and “hegemonic”–than its inconsequentiality. Whether insidious or inconsequential, the result, however, is the same; optimism, for Bersani and Dutoit, calls not for further inquiry, but for “dismiss[al].” The grounds for dismissal, here, lie in the teleological alignment of those “more or less optimistic psychoanalytic theories’” with “real and genital normalcy.” In its imbricating of “real and genital normalcy” with the implicit factitiousness of both “real” and “normalcy” (and, in turn, its suggestion of heterosexuality’s conscription of this factitiousness as its own perseveratingly veracious prerogative), Bersani’s etiolated sketch of psychoanalysis resembles Berlant’s own recent analysis of optimism’s inextricability from the coercions of love.6 But even if queer theory positions normativity as heterosexual fantasy (and vice versa), why does it follow that heterosexuality necessarily monopolizes optimism? Why couldn’t optimism alternately navigate the non-normative? Or be conceived as other than universalized and universalizing? The dismissible inconsequentiality of the above passage’s optimism contrasts starkly with the passage’s subsequent account of “destructive disposition” as “permanent,” and “irreducibly so,” specifications rhetorically similar to Butler’s depictions of melancholy. Queer optimism seeks to turn these tables–to consider the possible permanences of optimism, the possible fictions of aggression.

     

    Bersani omits British psychoanalyst D.W. Winnicott from his catalogue of “great figures of psychoanalytic theory,” perhaps, in part, because Winnicott’s theorizations of aggression challenge the intrinsically negative, malfeasant valence of Bersani’s primordial destructiveness. Contrary to Bersani’s invocation of “human destructiveness” as commensurate with (if not underwriting) “our inability to love others,” Winnicott argues provocatively and sensitively that destructiveness is itself a condition for love. Unlike Bersani’s consideration of love’s destructive tendencies,7 Winnicott’s insights are not reducible to theorizations of masochism insistent upon desire’s inextricability from pain. Rather, Winnicott’s insights pertain to a sphere more expansive than that in which desire and masochism so quickly collide. Winnicott writes thus, in his crucial essay, “The Use of an Object and Relating Through Identifications”:

     

    This change (from relating to usage) means that the subject destroys the object. From here it could be argued by an armchair philosopher that there is therefore no such thing in practice as the use of an object: if the object is external, then the object is destroyed by the subject. Should the philosopher come out of his chair and sit on the floor with his patient, however, he will find that there is an intermediate position. In other words, he will find that after “subject relates to object” comes “subject destroys object” (as it becomes external); and then may come “object survives destruction by the subject.” But there may or may not be survival. A new feature thus arrives in the theory of object-relating. The subject says to the object: “I destroyed you,” and the object is there to receive the communication. From now on the subject says: “Hullo object!” “I destroyed you.” “I love you.” “You have value for me because of your survival of my destruction of you.” “While I am loving you I am all the time destroying you in (unconscious) fantasy.” Here fantasy begins for the individual. The subject can now use the object that has survived. It is important to note that it is not only that the subject destroys the object because the object is placed outside the area of omnipotent control. It is equally significant to state this the other way round and to say that it is the destruction of the object that places the object outside the area of the subject’s omnipotent control. In these ways the object develops its own autonomy and life, and (if it survives) contributes-in to the subject, according to its own properties. (89-90)

     

    Winnicott’s conception of destructiveness amounts to a theory of love (as opposed to desire) to the extent that the object survives the destructiveness dealt to it. This is to mark within Winnicott’s work an interest in and valuation of durability that is not inapposite to my own. Put more directly, an object’s durability as such signals that it is an object, and this durability is not recognizable to the Winnicottian subject without the fantasy of destroying it. The destructiveness that an object can withstand, for Winnicott, demonstrates not just the object’s own integrity (an integrity from which the subject might subsequently learn), but its own capacity for loving in spite of feeling damaged or even repelled by the subject. This form of durability (opposite Butler’s flinching congealment) offers an important psychoanalytic context in which to imagine my own subsequent readings. Winnicott’s work seems indispensable both to future queer engagements with psychoanalysis, and not unrelatedly to particularly psychoanalytically-conceived modes of optimistic thinking and practice.

     

    Contrary to Winnicottian destructiveness, Bersanian self-shattering amounts to a temporary figurative suicide, a moment’s disorganization within a field of otherwise intense regulation; or oppositely, an internalization of the destructive, shattering energies otherwise directed outward. Whereas Butler deploys Freud’s “Mourning and Melancholia” in the service of producing a genealogy of subjects, Bersani illuminates resistances and impasses internal to Freud’s Beyond the Pleasure Principle that collectively suggest a violence far more capacious than the one Freud’s text manifestly delineates. “What has been repressed from the speculative second half of Freud’s text,” Bersani writes, “is sexuality as productive masochism. The possibility of exploiting the shattering effects of sexuality in order to maintain the tensions of an eroticized, de-narrativized, and mobile consciousness has been neglected, or refused, in favor of a view of pleasure as nothing more than the reduction of all tension and the evacuation of all excitement” (Freudian Body 63-64). In “Is the Rectum a Grave?” Bersani more explicitly narrativizes self-shattering and the conditions from which its need arises:

     

    The self which the sexual shatters provides the basis on which sexuality is associated with power. It is possible to think of the sexual as, precisely, moving between a hyperbolic sense of self and a loss of all consciousness of self. But sex as self-hyperbole is perhaps a repression of sex as self-abolition. It inaccurately replicates self-shattering as self-swelling, as psychic tumescence. If, as these words suggest, men are especially apt to “choose” this version of sexual pleasure, because their sexual equipment appears to invite by analogy, or at least to facilitate, the phallicizing of the ego, neither sex has exclusive rights to the practice of sex as self-hyperbole. For it is perhaps primarily the degeneration of the sexual into a relationship that condemns sexuality to becoming a struggle for power. As soon as persons are posited, the war begins. It is the self that swells with excitement at the idea of being on top, the self that makes of the inevitable play of thrusts and relinquishments in sex an argument for the natural authority of one sex over the other. (218)

     

    Sex, for Bersani, becomes a spectacular, radical literalization of deconstruction. The “shattering” of sex undoes persons the way queer theory (as paradigmatically practiced by Butler) undoes persons.

     

    I might say here that this essay has less to do theoretically with my own engagements with Freudian or Lacanian psychoanalysis than it does with queer theory’s mobilizations of particular psychoanalytic topoi. More to the point, I am concerned with the particular strains of queer theory that such mobilizations both enable and preempt. For all my interest in Freud, my attention is not primarily to his texts, but to particular receptions of him within queer theory. Freud’s own body of work indubitably remains an important site from which to challenge ostensibly uniforming, simplifying distillations of psychoanalysis. As just one instance of Freud’s usefulness in the interrogation of his reception, one might consider Butler’s dependence on a particular passage from The Ego and the Id. Freud observes thus:

     

    When it happens that a person has to give up a sexual object, there quite often ensues an alteration of his ego which can only be described as a setting up of the object inside the ego, as it occurs in melancholia. (29)

     

    Butler’s reading of this passage takes for granted that a process structurally analogous to that of melancholic incorporation (“as it occurs in melancholia”) is itself equivalentto melancholia:

     

    If we accept the notion that heterosexuality naturalized itself by insisting on the radical otherness of homosexuality, then heterosexual identity is purchased through a melancholic incorporation of the love that it disavows: the man who insists upon the coherence of his heterosexuality will claim that he never loved another man, and hence never lost another man. That love, that attachment, becomes subject to a double disavowal, a never having loved, a never having lost . . . . What ensues is a culture of gender melancholy in which masculinity and femininity emerge as the traces of an ungrieved and ungrievable love. (Psychic Life 139-40)

     

    My interest, contra Butler’s, lies in the extent to which Freud’s account does not literally produce equivalence so much as insist upon similarity. In following a structural pattern that is like melancholia, the process described seems most readily not to be melancholic; analogy marks a structural similarity but explicitly not an affective one. Thus, such a passage from Freud’s writings might not singularly corroborate Butler’s argument that sexual loss effects gender melancholy, but also pressure Freud’s and Butler’s readers to query precisely the differences between the loss of a sexual object and the losses particular to melancholy as such.

     

    There is much in Bersani and Butler to disagree with. Nonetheless, within queer theory (as it has been and is currently being practiced), no one with the exception of Sedgwick has been more influential. The list of essays and books variously indebted to the insights of Butler and Bersani is long, and ever lengthening. The number of times Butler and Bersani are noted in the index of Tim Dean’s and Christopher Lane’s Homosexuality and Psychoanalysis (well over fifty instances) far exceeds references to such seminal psychoanalysts as Sándor Ferenczi (four cites) or Winnicott (zero). While one cannot equate influence with this kind of indexical showing, one nonetheless can get a sense of the extent to which Butler and Bersani have become part of a canon, contested as the category of canonicity (in queer theory or in psychoanalysis) might be.8

     

    Even as Butler and Bersani have positioned their work in the context of AIDS, hate-crimes, and other lived domains of crisis,9 their work, with telling insistence, often depends on abstraction, on metaphor. One doesn’t really shatter when one is fucked, despite Bersani’s accounts of it as such; millions of persons who imagine their subjectivity as fairly cohesive and non-fictive do not necessarily feel melancholy, even if Butler would claim melancholy as the inevitable cost of that cohesiveness. If these models of shattering and gender-melancholy seem less than practicable in lived experience, they’ve become ubiquitous in the no less lived biosphere of the academy.

     

    The alchemy of such figurations demarcates an ever-fluctuating space between (theoretical) scrutiny and (ontological) practice. How to get from one domain to another, without the complex alchemy of figurativity? How might one articulate what happens within the limbo of the figurative? I see figuration as syncope between theoretical and practical domains, between literary and lived investments. Deleuze, in Essays Critical and Clinical, writes that “health as literature, as writing, consists in inventing a people who are missing. It is the task of the fabulating function to invent a people” (4). What if the people who were missing, the people this essay sought to invent, were missing optimists? The non-Bush optimists, the queer optimists, with a voice differing from both queer theory and optimism, as usually understood?

     

    If Deleuze’s turn to literature’s “fabulating function” does not exactly illuminate fabulation’s particular mechanisms, it nonetheless reminds us that fabulation is a function (of something, on something), whose structures and ends can and ought prompt explication in ways that figuration, in its slippery whisper of self-evidence, too often theoretically eludes. At the same time, it strikes me that the move to figuration within theoretical discourse often is a premature one. The transformation of non-figurative phenomena into figurative phenomena as often is a consequence of saturating cathexes that fetishize (and fetishistically treat) phenomena without acknowledgment of either their cathectic pulsions or the fetishization in which they participate.

     

    Along these lines, I again stress the salutary utility of Winnicott, specifically Winnicott’s non-ironic denomination of adolescent depression as “doldrums.” Adumbrated by the gravities of melancholy, doldrums might seem comparably slight. Winnicott, however, does not take his nominally non-enthralled category lightly. Doldrums, clinically, are experienced as miserable, and theoretically, are something that psychoanalysis can engage seriously (and compassionately), from which psychoanalysis can learn. For the purposes of queer optimism, I value the extent to which doldrums resist melancholy’s ostensible capacity to nominally colonize all experiences similar to it. The more there are doldrums, the less of a stronghold melancholy maintains over a field more various and differentiated than one term ever could describe. This Winnicottian de-fetishization of terms seems all the more salient an intellectual (and therapeutic) model in the context of David Eng’s and David Kazanjian’s edited volume, Loss (2003), in which accounts of intense resilience and creativity seem ultimately mischaracterized by their no less intense absorption into the category of melancholia, which, write Eng and Kazanjian, “at the turn of the century has emerged as a crucial touchstone for social and subjective formulations” (23).

     

    There seems in Eng’s and Kazanjian’s collection a conspicuous disparity between innovative scholarship and regression to nominal “touchstones,” as though after Freud’s dichotomizing of mourning and melancholia, a scholar’s choice were de facto only between these two categories. Such a disparity likewise is manifest in Ann Cvetkovich’s coterminous An Archive of Feelings. “What’s required,” Cvetkovich writes, “is a sex positivity that can embrace negativity, including trauma. Allowing a place for trauma within sexuality is consistent with efforts to keep sexuality queer, to maintain a space for shame and perversion within public discourse rather than purging them of their messiness in order to make them acceptable” (63). Cvetkovich wants a trauma that could describe nearly any lesbian experience (53-55), insisting on the de-pathologization of trauma (44-46), but simultaneously wants perversities to sustain their shocking edge. The result is an astute study that seems less energized by its recurrent invoking of trauma, than hampered by a misnomer for a range of experiences better left articulated in their specificity, rather than condensed to a single traumatic term. Winnicott speaks of a similar condensation in Freud’s original delineation of the death drive:

     

    when we look anew at the roots of aggression there are two concepts in particular, each of which must be thrown away deliberately, so that we may see whether . . . we are better off without them. One is Freud’s concept of a death instinct, a by-product of his speculations in which he seemed to be achieving a theoretical simplification that might be compared to the gradual elimination of detail in the technique of a sculptor like Michelangelo. The other is Melanie Klein’s setting up of envy in the prominent place that she gave it at Geneva in 1955. (“Roots” 458-59)

     

    Winnicott’s polemic distinguishes helpfully between the existence of a range of energies or pulsions and the denomination of that range as one “concept.” My reservation regarding works such as Cvetkovich’s has less to do with any given set of “speculations,” which (as Winnicott suggests) are often innovative and adroit, than with their resigned gravitation to a single concept, which can’t possibly do speculations as such justice. The more one can transform speculations into concepts, the more likely one is to turn observations into figurations. Easy enough, as Eng and Kazanjian demonstrate, to wax lyrical on melancholy.10 Harder to wax lyrical about “doldrums,” and thus “doldrums,” for all its banality, retains a useful nonfigurative (or at least differently figurative) specificity.

     

    Loving Shame

     

    Faithful, was all that I could boast
    But Constancy became
    To her, by her innominate
    A something like a shame
    –Emily Dickinson, Franklin 1716

     

    Melancholy and aggression, this essay has argued, are undertheorized terms in queer theory that have nonetheless galvanized a vital and proliferative body of work. Vital and proliferative, but also foreclosing, in its demarcation of an intellectual field that reinforces the intellectual non-viability of a different terrain, which I am calling the field of queer optimism. This section of the essay engages with shame (as opposed to melancholy, aggression, or self-shattering); it departs from the psychoanalytic, partly to attest that queer pessimism isn’t more simply a psychoanalytic pessimism. I’m likewise moved to write about queer theorizations of shame because much of this work (itself intentionally seeking to circumnavigate a psychoanalytic argot) in fact seems optimistically motivated. This is not to say that much of queer theory isn’t likewise optimistically motivated: much of Butler’s work seems thus energized, even as its optimistic premise nevertheless deploys a comparatively less optimistic-seeming lexicon of melancholy.

     

    I mean, here, to distinguish between the energy that motivates a theoretical enterprise and the subject of that enterprise. Queer optimism (pace inevitable charges of sloppiness by hard-core nominalists) speaks less to what motivates a project than to a project’s content. Optimistic motivations (of Butler, or even Bersani, and many other theorists[11) could correspond to Gramsci’s “optimism of the will,” while queer optimism would not. This is the case because Gramsci’s optimism does not seem radically different from optimism as usually conceived, whereas queer optimism, prima facie, seeks to complicate how optimism is conceived. This is not to say that I do not feel solidarity with recent interventions in pessimistic methodology (for instance, challenges to what Paul Ricoeur first termed a hermeneutics of suspicion).12 Queer optimism, however, calls for a different sort of intervention, an intervention on the level of content rather than of practice. On the level of practice, then, I’m sympathetic toward Butler’s recent invoking of hope. “I hope to show,” Butler writes in Giving an Account of Oneself, “that morality is neither a symptom of its social conditions nor a site of transcendence of them, but rather is essential to the determination of agency and the possibility of hope” (21). The formulation, “possibility of hope,” confirms what in a subsequent sentence Butler makes clear: that hope inhabits a horizon, emergent “at the limits of our schemes of intelligibility” (21). This hope, in content if not necessarily in practice, differs from queer optimism in that hope held-as-promissory (or “possibility”), or consigned to intelligibility’s limits, is only fleetingly intelligible–which is to say, estranged from immanent, fastidious articulation.

     

    Hope is promissory, hope is a horizon. Shame, on the other hand, occurs in a lavish present tense. This, again, helps clarify my turn to shame. What if the field of queer optimism could be situated as firmly in the present tense as shame? Even as work on shame may arise out of generosity and hopefulness, this work, within queer theory and affect theory, provides shame all the more eloquent and vibrant a vocabulary, leaving positive affect itself lexically impoverished. That positive affect would seem naturally less available to thinking (or that hope definitionally would exist futurally, and shame immanently) is the sort of temporal donnée against which this essay speaks.

     

    I have here distinguished between motivation and content because Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick’s theorizations of shame are indubitably, magnanimously optimistic and good-intentioned. Furthermore, the bon esprit that suffuse Sedgwick’s work–the inseparability, in her writing, of delight and perspicacity–have inspired my own thinking in ways for which I hardly can account. If ignorance attaches to bliss,13 Sedgwick’s trenchant complicating of ignorance (Epistemology 5) has made my chiasmatic attempt to complicate bliss possible. More simply, I imagine my project as a furthering of Sedgwick’s account of tantalizingly immanent joy, in Proust:

     

    In Freud, then, there would be no room–except as an example of self-delusion–for the Proustian epistemology whereby the narrator of A la recherche;, who feels in the last volume “jostling each other within me a whole host of truths concerning human passions and character and conduct,” recognizes them as truths insofar as “the perception of [them] caused me joy.” In the paranoid Freudian epistemology, it is implausible enough to suppose that truth could be even an accidental occasion of joy; inconceivable to imagine joy as a guarantor of truth. Indeed, from any point of view it is circular, or something, to suppose that one’s pleasure at knowing something could be taken as evidence of the truth of the knowledge. (“Paranoid Reading” 137-38)

     

    I’m riveted by the idea that joy could be a guarantor of truth–differently put, that joy could be persuasive. While qualifying the above observations with a caveat against tautology, Sedgwick’s later analyses of shame are marvelous in part for their escape of tautology, such that shame would yield knowledges not at all equivalent to the sense of shame with which one starts. This new body of knowledge, all the same, defers to a nominal circularity–what no longer resembles shame, in Sedgwick’s writing, still is called shame. Why would this necessarily be the case? Given shame’s (or, for that matter, melancholy’s) lability within queer theory, why might queer optimism’s subjects not be analogously labile?

     

    In “Shame, Theatricality, and Queer Performativity,” Sedgwick charts the exuberant, ambivalent affects of Henry James as he returns (in writing the prefaces for the New York Edition) to his own earlier novels and characters and to his own earlier authorial selves. In these prefaces (as in nearly everything he writes), James’s affective range is expansive, fastidious and ravishing, but the affect toward which Sedgwick turns (indeed, the affect, for Sedgwick, that comes to organize, beget and describe most other affects) is shame:

     

    The speaking self of the prefaces does not attempt to merge with the potentially shaming or shamed figurations of its younger self, younger fictions, younger heroes; its attempt is to love them. That love is shown to occur both in spite of shame and, more remarkably, through it. (40)

     

    The love of shame is the love between a “younger self” and the self that is currently writing; in the distance between selves, the younger self might arguably be experienced not only as having written those “younger fictions,” but as a “younger fiction” in its own right. The love of shame occurs in the disruption of what might otherwise be seen as a continuous self. The love of shame does not “merge,” does not synthesize, but flourishes in the very space of personal fissure. This is unsurprising, in that Silvan Tomkins (whose work Sedgwick’s extends and to which it pays homage) describes shame as “strik[ing] deepest into the heart of man”:

     

    While terror and distress hurt, they are wounds inflicted from outside which penetrate the smooth surface of the ego; but shame is felt as an inner torment, a sickness of the soul. It does not matter whether the humiliated one has been shamed by derisive laughter or whether he mocks himself. In either event he feels himself naked, defeated, alienated, lacking in dignity and worth. (133)

     

    Tomkins associates shame with guilt, and to a lesser extent with humiliation. I think also of a particularly resonant (if only because so pervasively, campily familiar) articulation of the link between shame and embarrassment: I could just die! Teenagers often say this in movies after they have done something embarrassing, or if their parents have done something terrible in their presence. Less common now than in the fifties (cf. Sandra Dee), the articulation clarifies an implicit relation between shame and the strategies of self-abdication found in Butler and Bersani. I could just die! More often a performance of shame than a literal threat (shame, after all, is, as Sedgwick suggests, the performative affect par excellence14), this articulation of shame nonetheless speaks to the ways shame, as an affect, erupts not just in the space between one version of self and another (as in James), but also in the space where one wants another self, and more acutely, to give up the self one has.15

     

    “Shame,” Tomkins writes, is “a specific inhibitor of continuing interest and enjoyment” (134). I want to emphasize that shame can also inhibit continuity. To live without shame, putatively, would be to live continuously, without the trauma of wanting to disappear, without the need to reinvent one’s “younger self” as a new if no less fictional person. A life without shame (neither plausible nor necessarily desirable, but entertained here hypothetically) might approach the stability of Butler’s melancholy congealment, even as Tomkins writes that shame, in its renunciation of or abandonment by a loved one, is “not unlike mourning, in which I become exquisitely aware of the self just because I will not surrender the love object which must be surrendered” (138). Here we come to a double-bind. The stable self is constitutively melancholic, and yet the unstable self, florid with “its own, powerfully productive and powerfully social metamorphic possibilities” (Sedgwick, “Shame” 65) is constituted by an affect that might “not [be] unlike mourning.” Why should the opposite paths of ontological stability and instability seem to go in circles?

     

    Shame, for Sedgwick, “generates and legitimates the place of identity . . . but does so without giving that identity space the standing of an essence” (64). While identities are not to be essentialized, however, Sedgwick claims that “at least for certain (‘queer’) people, shame is simply the first, and remains a permanent, structuring fact of identity” (64). Sedgwick’s “simply,” “permanent” and “fact” effect a strange dissonance between shame’s fostering of affective and ontological equivocation (what Sedgwick terms “possibilities”) and its own utterly stringent unequivocality. Shame, as conjured by Sedgwick, seldom seems shame-like, per se. So to Sedgwick’s credit, we can see in James how a “potentially paralyzing affect” can be “narratively, emotionally, and performatively productive” (44). What Sedgwick identifies in James’s writing as “occasions for shame and excitement” (46) do not, however, seem directly to bear on shame. Sedgwick cites this passage from James’s preface to The Wings of the Dove:

     

    I haven’t the heart now, I confess, to adduce the detail of so many lapsed importances; the explanations of most of which, after all, I take to have been in the crudity of a truth beating full upon me through these reconsiderations, the odd inveteracy with which picture, at almost any turn, is jealous of drama, and drama (though on the whole with greater patience, I think) suspicious of picture. Between them, no doubt, they do much for the theme; yet each baffles insidiously the other’s ideals and eats round the edges of its positions. (46)

     

     

    Why denominate these various affective maneuvers–these magnificently odd personifications of aesthetic media–shame, when they seem, affectively, so variously tinged with delight (for instance, the delight of imagining “drama” and “picture” eating around each other’s edges)? Such a question, following both the early work of Charles Darwin, and the more recent work of Mark Hansen, attempts to characterize not just what any particular affect is, but how long it lasts, what it cedes to, and why or how it cedes.16 The degree to which Sedgwick’s conception of shame, at this Jamesian juncture, seems more convincing on a nominal rather than affective register recalls, again, the ways Butler’s melancholy often doesn’t quite seem melancholic (in her work or as recounted in a work such as Julia Kristeva’s Black Sun). Or the way Bersani’s self-shattering describes an obliteration that on a somatic level (or even, speculatively, on a psychical one) doesn’t occur so much as hover, tantalizingly, as an idea.

     

    “Blazons of shame, the ‘fallen face’ with eyes down and head averted–and, to a lesser extent, the blush–are semaphores of trouble and at the same time of a desire to reconstitute the interpersonal bridge” (Sedgwick, “Shame” 36). I would question the inevitable simultaneity of shame’s semaphoric “trouble” and its desire for reconnection. Shame (at its most felicitous) cedes to a desire to reconstitute interpersonality, but this desire is neither synchronous with nor necessarily equivalent to shame’s desire to hide. Sedgwick posits shame as “the first” and “permanent, structuring fact of [certain (‘queer’)] identity”:

     

    Queer, I’d suggest, might usefully be thought of as referring in the first place to this group or an overlapping group of infants and children, those whose sense of identity is for some reason tuned most durably to the note of shame . . . . The shame-delineated place of identity doesn’t determine the consistency or meaning of that identity, and race, gender, class, sexuality, appearance, and abledness are only a few of the defining social constructions that will crystallize there, developing from this originary affect their particular structures of expression, creativity, pleasure, and struggle. (63)

     

    Why, in the midst of all these social constructions, is shame granted originary privilege? Tomkins usefully notes that before shame there exists an even more originary positivity:

     

    One of the paradoxical consequences of the linkage of positive affect and shame is that the same positive affect which ties the self to the object also ties the self to shame. To the extent to which socialization involves a preponderance of positive affect the individual is made vulnerable to shame and unwilling to renounce either himself or others. (138-39)

     

    Before one can have shame, before one can be disappointed into blushing (or performative blazoning), one must previously have nursed some “preponderance of positive affect.” But why, if positive affect so clearly precedes shame, is shame so unequivocally pronounced foundational? I don’t disagree with Sedgwick on the point of shame’s seeming intertwined in queer experience. I nonetheless challenge the insistence of shame’s anteriority; at the expense of elaborations of the sorts of positivity that might have preceded it, at the expense of the queer continuities which shame might be able to interrupt.

     

    Toujours du Jour

     

    I do not take my readings of Butler or Bersani as definitive, nor do I imagine these moments in the work of Butler or Bersani as synechdocally representative of their work. I mean, rather, to articulate some of the ways in which Butler’s and Bersani’s rigorous thinking itself sometimes seems predicated on curiously nonrigorous attachments (in the case of Butler) to melancholy, or (in the case of Bersani) to an unqualified aggression calling forth a no less qualified resort to self-shattering. My account of Sedgwick does not critique Sedgwick’s analyses of shame for lack of inventive and generous scrutiny (the sort of scrutiny I find absent in Butler’s and Bersani’s respective accounts of melancholy or aggression). Rather, I’ve sought to note how Sedgwick’s thinking makes available an affective territory far more interesting and various than the denomination “shame” could (or further, should) describe.

     

    Juxtaposed with Lee Edelman’s 2004 book, No Future, the orchestratively powerful but nonetheless opaque queer pessimism of the above theorists would seem like kid stuff (to invoke Edelman’s own charged turn to this formulation). The queer pessimism of Butler and Bersani, circuited from text to text in a persuasiveness inseparable from its occludedness, brings to mind Jean Laplanche’s enigmatic signifier.17 Edelman’s queer pessimism, by contrast, insistent on its own absolute non-enigmatic unequivocality, might suggest the draconian bravura of a superego were Edelman’s project not so pitted against the superego, pitted against all forms of stable identity except the “irreducible” (No Future 6) identity of the death drive. Though moving beyond the strictures of psychoanalysis, it is difficult for me not to hear in the sheer absoluteness of Edelman’s dicta something like a superego’s militancy.

     

    Edelman insists that “the only oppositional status to which our queerness could ever lead would depend on our taking seriously the place of the death drive we’re called on to figure” (30). Edelman, as the passage I’ve cited suggests, doesn’t seem to leave queers a lot of options, even as the option he adjures hardly seems self-evident. The egregious militancy of No Future presents an apogee of what I’ve been calling queer pessimism. Or if not an apogee, then a sort of pessimism-drag. My own thinking differs from Edelman’s in many ways, and might often go without saying.18 How, for instance, could a project attached to queer optimism not bristle at a book that insists unilaterally that “the only oppositional status” available to queers demands fealty to the death drive? Edelman’s book certainly trounces optimism, but the optimism he trounces is not the optimism for which my own project lobbies. Edelman writes thus:

     

    The structuring optimism of politics to which the order of meaning commits us, installing as it does the perpetual hope of reaching meaning through signification, is always, I would argue, a negation of this primal, constitutive, and negative act. And the various positivities produced in its wake by the logic of political hope depend on the mathematical illusion that negated negations might somehow escape, and not redouble, such negativity. My polemic thus stakes its fortunes on a truly hopeless wager: that taking the Symbolic’s negativity to the very letter of the law . . . that turning the force of queerness against all subjects, however queer, can afford an access to the jouissance that at once defines us and negates us. Or better: can expose the constancy, the inescapability, of such access to jouissance in the social order itself, even if that order can access its constant access to jouissance only in the process of abjecting that constancy of access onto the queer. (5)

     

    As I’ve made clear, and as this essay’s final section will make clearer, queer optimism is no more attached to “the logic of political hope” than No Future is. Even as I think there are some forms of hope worth defending, I’m not interested, for present purposes, in demarcating good and bad hopes, hegemonic and nonhegemonic attachments to futurity. To the extent that my own project seeks to recuperate optimism’s potential critical interest by arguing for its separability from the promissory, I’m here insisting that there are ways of resisting a pernicious logic of “reproductive futurism” besides embodying the death drive. If Edelman opines that all forms of optimism eventually lead to Little Orphan Annie singing “Tomorrow,” and therefore that all forms of optimism must be met with queer death-driven irony’s “always explosive force” (31), I oppositely insist that optimism’s limited cultural and theoretical intelligibility might not call for optimism’s grandiose excoriation, but for optimism to be rethought along non-futural lines. Edelman’s hypostasization of optimism accepts optimism as at best simplistic and at worst fascistic. This hypostasization leaves unthinkable queer optimism’s own proposition that the reduction of optimism to a diachronic, futurally bound axis is itself the outcome of a machinery that spits out optimism as junk, and renders suspicious any form of “enjoyment” that isn’t a (mis)translation of jouissance, “a violent passage beyond the bounds of identity, meaning, and law” (25), the production of “identity as mortification.” Enjoyment, anyone?19

     

    Edelman’s might be one way of refusing the logic of reproductive futurism, but not the only one. That there would be many possible queer courses of action might indeed seem to follow from Edelman’s invoking of Lacanian truth (“Wunsch“) as characterized by nothing so much as its extravagant, recalcitrant particularity. “The Wunsch,” Lacan writes in a passage cited in No Future‘s introduction, “does not have the character of a universal law but, on the contrary, of the most particular of laws–even if it is universal that this particularity is to be found in every human being” (6). This truth, which Edelman aligns with “queerness” (and ergo with negativity, the death-drive, jouissance, etc.) “does not have the character of a universal law.” Edelman, for all his attentiveness to the Lacanian “letter of the law,” glosses Lacan’s own argument with a symptomatic liberality. “Truth, like queerness,” Edelman writes, “finds its value not in a good susceptible to generalization, but only in the stubborn particularity that voids every notion of a general good. The embrace of queer negativity, then, can have no justification if justification requires it to reinforce some positive social value” (6). Lacan, however, does not speak, even in Jacques-Alain Miller’s translation, of a “general good.” He speaks of a universal, which might be good or bad. Furthermore, if the only characteristic universally applicable to this “truth, like queerness” is its particularity, what sort of particularity voids every notion of a general good? Might so intransigent a particularity sometimes not void a universal, good or bad?

     

    My line of inquiry might seem petty, but my question, in fact, illuminates how little Edelman’s argument can hold onto the particularity on which it is partly premised. “The queer,” Edelman insists, “insists that politics is always a politics of the signifier” (6). Edelman likewise insists that “queer theory must always insist on its connection to the vicissitudes of the sign” (7). The ubiquity of “always” and “every” in Edelman’s argument is nearly stunning, and it seems to me indicative of No Future‘s coerciveness, as a different passage from No Future‘s introduction quite handily demonstrates:

     

    Rather than rejecting, with liberal discourse, this ascription of negativity to the queer, we might, as I argue, do better to consider accepting and even embracing it. Not in the hope of forging thereby some more perfect social order–such a hope, after all, would only reproduce the constraining mandate of futurism, just as any such order would equally occasion the negativity of the queer–but rather to refuse the insistence of hope itself as affirmation, which is always affirmation of an order whose refusal will register as unthinkable, irresponsible, inhumane. And the trump card of affirmation? Always the question: If not this, what? Always the demand to translate the insistence, the pulsive force, of negativity into some determinate stance or “position” whose determination would negate it: always the imperative to immure it in some stable and positive form. (4)

     

    Always this, always this, always that. This absoluteness in Edelman’s characterization of affirmation, meant to rally and provoke, recalls Sedgwick’s incredulous reading of Fredric Jameson’s ukase, “Always historicize.” “What could have less to do,” Sedgwick rightly asks, “with historicizing than the commanding, atemporal adverb ‘always’” (“Paranoid Reading” 125)? What, for that matter, could have less to do with particularizations? The axiomatic thrust of Edelman’s “always” would seem to make the world so irrevocably one thing that response to the world would amount to one thing. But still: why would rejecting a primary attachment to futurity (regardless of what this futurity always does or doesn’t do) necessarily require embodying negativity?20

     

    Edelman’s queer pessimism positions itself as “our” only option without having exhausted what other options might glimmeringly look like. This glimmer doesn’t conjure the sort of horizon Edelman would be so quick to dismantle. Rather, it suggests that not all optimisms are a priori equivalent to each other. And as importantly, that not all queer theories need look like Edelman’s. “As a particular story . . . of why storytelling fails,” Edelman writes, “queer theory, as I construe it, marks the ‘other’ side of politics . . . the ‘side’ outside all political sides, committed as they are, on every side, to futurism’s unquestioned good” (7). This account of queer theory, even as construed by one theorist, hardly seems like a “particular” story, not at least particular enough. Queer theory, on this account, doesn’t seem like an escape from the political’s claustrophobically refracted unavailing sides, but a claustrophobia unto itself.21

     

    “If not this, what?”

     

    To return to the question Edelman raises, if not this, what? The structure of such a question importantly allows possible answers beyond the foreclosing choices that queer theory, these past decades, often has been asked to make. Mourning or melancholia? Gay pride or queer shame? Utopic or nonutopic? Even as the diacritical assertion of queer pessimism versus queer optimism might seem yet another reductive binary, queer optimism, as an answer to if not this, what?, first and foremost resists the self-evidence of the diverse things this “what” is. For instance, Butler reiterates in Giving an Account of Oneself what she earlier maintains in The Psychic Life of Power as the ethical value of “affirm[ing] what is contingent and incoherent in oneself” (Giving an Account 41). It seems crucial, in affirming what is incoherent in oneself, to understand likewise what is coherent, and furthermore, crucial to have a vocabulary as adequate to coherence as to coherence’s disruption. Why take coherence for granted? Why presume that coherence necessarily is characterizable only in the attenuated, non-critical terms that queer theory and other post-structuralist disciplines seek to challenge? Dissatisfaction with a given regime of coherence might sponsor a critical commitment to dismantling coherence tout court. Such a dissatisfaction, however, might likewise productively sponsor a reconfiguration of coherence–the cultivation of a vocabulary of coherence that more precisely does justice to the ways in which coherence isn’t expansively, unilaterally destructive, reductive, or ideological.

     

    To imagine a reevaluation of something like personal coherence as a queer-optimistic project requires, as I have been arguing, a reevaluation of optimism itself. Disdain for optimism as commonly practiced or invoked might solicit optimism’s wholesale repudiation (a la Edelman)–or it might solicit optimism’s own redress. Optimism’s queer contents seem inaccessible so long as optimism is sustained as futural, as allergic to scrupulous thinking. To more fully account for what in optimism heretofore has seemed unthinkable, it seems useful to return to Leibniz, insofar as Leibniz’s thinking remains exemplary of the context in which optimism is thought (or more to the point, not thought) about. Here I only want to note where Leibnizian optimism departs most starkly from my own essay’s investigations. My critique of Leibniz isn’t incommensurate with my critique of queer theory. And as this essay wishes already to have made clear, one of the ends of reconceiving optimism as an intellectual venture would be to open the possibility of a criticism–even skepticism–that is itself optimistically motivated. I conclude with an account of Leibniz–and by extension, Leibnizian and non-Leibnizian happiness–to suggest the penuries of our current repertoires of optimism and happiness. Again: what if these penuries compelled us to think harder about optimism or happiness, rather than accept their straw-figure hypostasizations as grounds for their dismissal or too easy excoriation?

     

    Before turning to what in Leibniz underwrites the modes of optimism from which my own project diverges, I wish to note one extraordinary way in which Leibnizian optimism itself differs from the optimisms invoked by Berlant, Bersani, Edelman, or Warner. Leibnizian optimism is not, in fact, oriented to the future. Optimism, etymologically evoking one who hopes, might somehow have come to name one strain of Leibniz’s philosophy, but Leibniz’s writing–even when most resembling Panglossian caricature of it–has nearly as little staked in hope or future as Edelman’s anti-optative No Future. In his 1686 Discourse on Metaphysics, Leibniz delineates the tenets of what would later be described as his optimism. “Therefore,” Leibniz writes,

     

    it is sufficient to have the confidence that God does everything for the best and that nothing can harm those who love him. But to know in detail the reasons that could have moved him to choose this order of the universe–to allow sins, to dispense his saving grace in a certain way–surpasses the power of a finite mind, especially when it has not yet attained the enjoyment of the vision of God. (38)

     

     

    As Deleuze succinctly notes, “Leibniz’s optimism is really strange” (The Fold 68). Really strange, in that “miseries are not what was missing; the best of all possibilities only blossoms amid the ruins of Platonic Good. If this world exists, it is not because it is the best, but because it is rather the inverse; it is the best because it is, because it is the one that is. The philosopher is still not the Inquisitor he will soon become with empiricism . . . . He is a Lawyer, or God’s attorney. He defends God’s Cause, following the word that Leibniz invents, ‘theodicy’” (68). That is, when Leibniz exhorts that we find all God’s works excellent and in complete conformity with what we might have desired, he neither claims that any given work would seem manifestly delightful, nor that our desires only retroactively could be known.

     

    Adjacent but by no means equivalent to Leibnizian tautology is a more familiarly teleological model of wishful thinking, whereby time could reveal the commensurability of God’s work and our desire. Leibniz, however, doesn’t need time to prove what faith simply makes known,22 faith being that which posits optimism not as practice but as given. Following Leibniz, a struggle to remain optimistic in the face of calamity or distress signals not a wavering of optimism, per se, but a wavering of faith, whose digital robustness forecloses faith as analogic sliding-scale. One believes or one does not, without gradation. Similarly, either one is optimistic, or one is not. To struggle to remain optimistic most reductively belies that one is not optimistic, that one already has fallen from the logic by which optimism is upheld. To believe absolutely in the goodness of God makes optimism not a choice, or even an attitude, but that faith’s inevitable extension. Faith’s capacity to convert all crises (past, present, future) into manifestations of the good indicates the extent to which Leibniz’s theodicy is as imperializing as the pessimisms of queer theory. That is, the semper of Leibniz and the semper of Edelman seem equivalently suspect, even if programatically opposed.

     

    At the same time, however, this Leibnizian semper is exactly that which countermands any privileging of futurity. Faith subordinates human experience of time (past, present, future) to a divine temporality in which temporal distinctions all but vanish; God already has orchestrated what will happen no less than what already has happened. Leibniz writes thus:

     

    The whole future is doubtless determined: but since we know not what it is, nor what is foreseen or resolved, we must do our duty, according to the reason that God has given us and according to the rules that he has prescribed for us; and therefore we must have a quiet mind, and leave to God himself the care for the outcome. (Theodicy 154)

     

     

    Humans perhaps equivocate, but Leibniz’s God does not, and in the fundamental non-equivocality of what divinely will happen, the future consequently for all practical purposes lies beyond engagement, revision, or hope–contrary the ways optimism, after Leibniz, is not beyond hope but generated by it.

     

    My turn from Leibniz, then, does not stem from his intense valuation of futurity; optimism as valuation of futurity seems a gross mischaracterization of both Leibniz’s Discourse and his Theodicy. Rather, queer optimism most significantly departs from Leibniz in indirect (and perhaps counterintuitive) response to Leibniz’s radical deflation of futurity. Leibnizian optimism lies beyond theorization not because it consigns determination or delight to a futural horizon, but because the faith that underwrites it looms beyond interrogation. This brand of optimistic unimpeachability characterizes both George W. Bush’s exasperating contumaciousness, as well as Howard Dean’s infamously Whitmanian barbaric yawp. The former is beyond theorization because (among myriad less glib reasons) Bush is incapable of theorizing; the latter, beyond theorization to the extent that Dean’s whoop came on the heels of defeat, what J.L. Austin might characterize as an optimistic performative utterance executed under infelicitous conditions. A person (e.g., George W. Bush) might possess the faith that prosthetically would make credible (which is to say, make credibly existent) the divinely infinite logic which to his finite mind is otherwise incomprehensible, or he might not. The optimism that this essay introduces, it nearly goes without saying, is not predicated on faith, at very least because concertedly wary of the seductions of absolutes over the comparably vulnerable values of particularity. I raise the examples of Bush and Dean to note the ways in which optimism already saturates the political field, both making and breaking presidential campaigns, initiating and sustaining otherwise untenable-seeming policies and positions (not to mention wars). Optimism’s political power (if not eloquence) makes its critical re-examination–as opposed to its critical eschewal–all the more timely, and crucial.

     

    Like optimism’s iron fist, Leibnizian happiness is chronic and beyond question, even as the means of this interminable happiness are in a secular register altogether unavailable. Leibnizian optimism purports a structure in which non-happiness might arise as an erosion of faith, as an erosion, that is, of a happiness that is otherwise structurally inescapable. I find the possible ordeal of inescapable happiness fascinating, in part because such an understanding so extravagantly revises how happiness ordinarily is considered. If optimism eludes or renders gratuitous theorization via a tautology (Deleuze’s “it is the one that is”) that fashions optimism as conceptually expansive and indelible as the world itself, happiness–plain old happy, not Leibniz’s mega-happy–oppositely eludes theorization because so transient. Non-Leibnizian happiness isn’t inextricable from structure (for instance, Leibnizian faith) but more precisely experienced as a disruption of structure.

     

    To speak of optimism’s relation to the timely likewise is to speak of optimism’s strenuous and strange relation to time. In Leibniz, a finite mind could come (if at best asymptotically) closest to accessing infinite knowledge through the exercise of an intense patience by which future events could make sense of past ones. The optimism of my study isn’t interested in the capacity of time to render the meaning of apparently terrible circumstances felicitous. My project more fundamentally challenges the temporal narratives to which both (Leibnizian) optimistic happiness and non-optimistic happiness ordinarily are subjected. For instance: Leibnizian happiness is chronic and beyond question, but the means of this durability are in a secular domain altogether unavailable. Leibnizian optimism imagines a structure in which nonhappiness might erupt as a wavering of faith, as a wavering, that is, of a happiness that is otherwise structurally inescapable. On the contrary, non-Leibnizian happiness (as vernacularly understood) isn’t inextricable from a structure (for instance, the strong theory of faith), but is more acutely experienced as a disruption of structure.

     

    The psychoanalyst Jonathan Lear describes happiness as disruption in his account not of Leibniz, but of Aristotle:

     

    If contemplation were a state that one could achieve and sustain indefinitely and unproblematically, then Aristotle would have been led to feel discontent within it–and he would start to fantasize a real happiness which lies just outside. (50)

     

    Continuing his discussion of contemplation, for Aristotle, as a site of happiness happier than that derived from living ethically, Lear observes that “those few who do manage to find time to contemplate will experience that time as precious and short-lived” (50). The supreme happiness afforded by contemplation, that is, lies outside the realm of ethics. This moment in which contemplation occurs is “precious and short-lived.” In the Leibnizian model, happiness is the structure from which one falls. In the Aristotelian model, happiness lies outside of structure. Indeed, in Lear’s work, happiness more closely resembles the death drive (in its disruption of life-as-lived) than it does the pleasure principle (despite happiness’ quotidian imbrications with pleasure), whose status as principle Lear finds antithetical to happiness’ propensity to disrupt principles as such:

     

    Here we need to go back to an older English usage of “happiness” in terms of happenstance: the experience of chance things’ working out well rather than badly. Happiness, in this interpretation, is . . . a lucky break . . . . If one thinks about it, I think one will see that in such fleeting moments we do find real happiness. (129)

     

    Despite Lear’s chiasmatic invoking of thinking, it seems unclear how such constitutively fleeting happiness could be thought about. One could recollect it, but could one articulate it beyond the fact that it feels good, quickly? Or that it feels so different from the rest of life that it approaches something like death? As Lear writes, “the fantasy of a happy life becomes tinged with the suggestion of a life beyond life–a certain kind of living death” (27). It is not surprising, given this claim, that Lear finally opines that “there are certain structural similarities between Aristotle’s treatment of happiness and Freud’s treatment of death. Happiness and death are each invoked as the purported aim of all striving” (98). The difficulty of really thinking about happiness (as opposed to the ease of thinking that real happiness arrives fleetingly) is, I think, a function of its putative fleetingness. Were one able to articulate happiness more thoroughly, or even imagine it as less fleeting, would it seem as authentically happy?

     

    Queer optimism involves a kind of thought-experiment. What if happiness could outlast fleeting moments, without that persistence attenuating the quality of happiness? What if, instead of attenuating happiness, this extension of happiness opened it up to critical investigations that didn’t a priori doubt it, but instead made happiness complicated, and strange? If the insights of the past few decades could newly mobilize shame, shattering, or melancholy as interesting, as opposed to merely seeming instances of fear and trembling; what if we could learn from those insights and critical practices, and imagine happiness as theoretically mobilizable, and conceptually difficult? Which is to ask, what if happiness weren’t merely, self-reflexively happy, but interesting? Queer optimism cannot guarantee what such a happiness would look like, how such a happiness would feel. And while it does not promise a road to an Emerald City, queer optimism avails a new terrain of critical inquiry, which, surely, is a significant felicity in its own right.

     

    Notes

     

    1. I offer this anecdote to suggest the difficulty of sequestering feelings from metafeelings. Or to conjure Isabel Archer or Maggie Verver, the frustrating and exhilarating perviousness of thinking and living. I’m not telling this particular story as a retreat from the discursive or critical, but to note the strangeness of having felt like an allegory for my own subsequent academic work. Why did sadness feel indomitable? Why did happiness, in comparison, seem to offer so impoverished and ineloquent a vocabulary?

     

    2. What Butler openly invokes as “connection”–implying connection between others on political, erotic, and any number of less recognizably charged registers–returns, more recently, in Lauren Berlant’s invoking of “collective attachment.” I wish to juxtapose Butler’s emphasis on “incoherence” with Berlant’s emphasis on attachment itself. “I propose,” Berlant writes, “that we turn optimism itself into a topic probably best phrased as collective attachment. Optimism is a way of describing a certain futurism that implies continuity with the present” (“Critical Inquiry” 449). I continue to be grateful for Berlant’s insistence on returning the term “optimism” to the critical field.

     

    3. For other references to congealment in Butler’s writing, see Gender Trouble, xii and 43, as well as Bodies that Matter, 244.

     

    4. “Spawn,” with its suggestion of mass hatchings of creatures, arguably resonates within the same implicit science-fictional register as “congealment.”

     

    5. Bersani’s account of a person’s hardwiring for destructiveness, “something as species-specific as the human aptitude for verbal language” (126-27), indulges a fantasy of primordiality that recalls and arguably is indebted to Foucault’s account of disciplinary subjectivity, even as the former’s insistence on a radical interiority starkly departs from the emphatically non-psychologizing dermal attentions of the latter. See Foucault, Discipline & Punish 153.

     

    6. “The centrality of redemptive and therapy cultures to the promise of love’s formalized satisfactions means that where love provides the dominant rhetoric and form of attachment, so a discussion of pedagogy must be. Popular discourses that merge scientific expertise with a putatively general desire for better techniques of the self–as we see in talk shows, self-help books, and twelve-step semipublics–provide maps for people to clutch in their hands so that they can revisit the unzoned affective domain of which love is the pleasant and thinkable version. In these contexts love–never fully secularized–is the church of optimism for the overwhelmed. The currency that pays the price of entrance is the loss of everything except optimism” (Berlant, “Love, a Queer Feeling” 441).

     

    7. See, for instance, The Freudian Body: Psychoanalysis and Art 38-40.

     

    8. For other queer-theoretical texts less thinkable without the preceding work of Butler or Bersani, see Tim Dean’s Beyond Sexuality; David L. Eng’s and David Kazanjian’s edited collection, Loss, for which Judith Butler writes an afterword; Diana Fuss’s Identification Papers; Ann Cvetkovich’s An Archive of Feelings: Trauma, Sexuality, and Lesbian Public Cultures; Teresa de Lauretis’s The Practice of Love: Lesbian Sexuality and Perverse Desire, whose first chapter takes as epigraph one of Bersani’s articulations on Freudian desire; Brett Farmer’s Spectacular Passions: Cinema, Fantasy, Gay Male Spectatorships; Didier Eribon’s Insult and the Making of the Gay Self; Esther Sánchez-Pardo’s Cultures of the Death Drive: Melanie Klein and Modernist Melancholia; Jeffrey T. Nealon’s Alterity Politics: Ethics and Performative Subjectivity; José Muñoz’s Disidentifications: Queers of Color and the Performance of Politics. The above list, neither alphabetical nor chronological, intends only to suggest the iceberg’s tip; the single essays written under the influence of Bersani or Butler are nearly countless. Butler and Bersani have proliferated and inspired a kind of critical mass, such that my essay positions itself not just in relation to the work of two scholars (or three, or four), but in relation to the veritable queer cottage-industry that these scholars have engendered.

     

    9. See, for instance, Judith Butler’s trenchant analysis of hate speech in Excitable Speech: A Politics of the Performative, and more recently her critique of post-9/11 politics in Precarious Life: The Powers of Mourning and Violence.

     

    10. Curious how both Loss and An Archive of Feelings seek to depathologize their respective melancholia and trauma, as though these books weren’t being published at a time when pathologization itself seemed critically so far afield; as though, if not post-Butler or Bersani, then post-Oprah, melancholia and trauma hadn’t themselves long-trafficked in nonpathological, celebrity-like circuits.

     

    11. Regarding these “countless other thinkers,” I think, for instance, of Michael Moon, Biddy Martin, Jane Gallop, Lauren Berlant, Henry Abelove, and of course, Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick, to whom this section returns.

     

    12. For a lucid critique of the hermeneutics of suspicion along Laplanchian lines, see Tim Dean’s recent “Art as Symptom: Zizek and the Ethics of Psychoanalytic Criticism.”

     

    13. Think, for instance, of Thomas Gray’s paradigmatic “Ode on a Distant Prospect of Eton College”:

     

    Yet, ah! why should they know their fate,
    Since sorrow never comes too late,
    And happiness too swiftly flies?
    Thought would destroy their paradise.
    No more;–where ignorance is bliss,
    ‘Tis folly to be wise.

     

    14. “Shame is the affect that mantles the threshold between introversion and extroversion, between absorption and theatricality, between performativity and–performativity” (Sedgwick, Touching Feeling 38).

     

    15. Whereas Sedgwick celebrates shame’s blossoming between otherwise ossified formulations of selves (for instance, between the Henry James of 1875 and the Henry James of 1907), Giorgio Agamben, in a recent essay titled “Shame, or On the Subject” notes, following Levinas, that “shame is grounded in our being’s incapacity to move away and break from itself” (Remnants 104-05). “In shame,” Agamben writes, “we are consigned to something from which we cannot in any way distance ourselves” (105). From this opposite beginning, and in the radically different (which is to say, most accurately, literal) context of the book’s titular Auschwitz, Agamben nonetheless reaches a conclusion that is nearly identical to Sedgwick’s. “It is now possible to clarify,” Agamben writes, “the sense in which shame is truly something like the hidden structure of all subjectivity and consciousness” (128). I juxtapose Sedgwick’s account of shame with Agamben’s as a way of illustrating the persuasiveness of shame, as a trope, beyond the essay’s immediate queer purlieu. If Sedgwick will eventually make a claim for shame that universalizes its relation to queers, Agamben goes one step further, extending his reading of shame within Primo Levi’s The Reawakening to pertain to everyone. I introduce Agamben to recall the fact that queer theory’s energies are not necessarily constitutively different from theories of people as such; and as often, are mutually informing.

     

    16. See Charles Darwin’s The Expression of the Emotions in Man and Animals and Mark Hansen’s New Philosophy for New Media.

     

    17. Laplanche situates his theorization of the enigmatic signifier in the context of the primal scene. Without speculating on any possible primal scene or scenes in the genesis of queer theory, I find heuristically valuable Laplanche’s account of an enigmatic signifier’s simultaneous transmittability and nonintelligibility: the absorption and circulation of a message’s form, irrespective of recognition of message’s content. Laplanche writes,

     

    The primal scene conveys messages. It is traumatising only because it proffers, indeed imposes its enigmas, which compromise the spectacle addressed to the child. I certainly have no wish to make an inventory of these messages, for there are, in my sense no objective enigmas: the only enigmas that exist are ones that are proffered, and that reduplicate in one way or another the relationship that the sender of the message has with his own unconscious. (170-71)

     

     

    In suggesting the circulation of something like melancholy from one theoretical text to another, I imagine Butler (or Bersani) not as “the sender[s] of the message,” but rather as themselves recipients of an enigma antecedent to their own work.

     

    18. The interminable gadflying of No Future itself constitutes a peculiar and peculiarly capacious generosity, insofar as it is near impossible not to feel something toward Edelman’s work. How not to be grateful for a book that solicits intense feeling from nearly anyone who reads it?

     

    I balk, for instance, at the possibility of a revamped queer ethics predicated on “the corrosive force of irony” (No Future 23), predicated on the slap-happy eschewal of The Child, as though there were only one ideological Child. As though there weren’t within cultural discourse (not just the specter, but) the tenable, exquisitely precocious, touched and touching figure of a Queer Child. “The cult of the Child,” Edelman writes, “permits no shrines to the queerness of boys and girls, since queerness . . . is understood as bringing children and childhood to an end” (19). Such claims seem so patently misguided and foreclosing that it’s difficult to know how to respond, beyond the obvious fact that there’s nothing queerer than childhood: c.f. Henry James’s Maisie, or JonBenet Ramsey, or “Ma Vie en Rose’s” Ludovic, or my own childhood home videos, which motivate in me a certain pathos not because childhood ends where queerness begins, but because my own queerness, as I bat my seahorse eyelashes or wander through leaf-piles, is so effusively, if confusedly, in full-gear. Were one to claim that Edelman’s hypostasizations of the Child seem to do more harm than good, Edelman, impeccably, might say, of course, more harm than good. In fact (of course), Edelman already says as much:

     

    The queerness of which I speak would deliberately sever us from ourselves, from the assurance, that is, of knowing ourselves and hence of knowing our “good.” Such queerness proposes, in place of the good, something I want to call “better,” though it promises, in more than one sense of the phrase, absolutely nothing. (5)

     

    I have written this essay for those wanting (“in more than one sense of the phrase”) something “better” than “nothing.”

     

    To be sure, I’m not the only scholar rankled by Edelman’s immodest proposals. In the introduction to Curiouser: On the Queerness of Children, Steven Bruhm and Natasha Hurley similarly question Edelman’s preemptive inscription of the Child into a predetermined ideological matrix: “What is the effect,” Bruhm and Hurley write, “of projecting the child into a heteronormative future? One effect is that we accept the teleology of the child . . . as heterosexually determined” (Curiouser, xiv). Curiouser‘s essays importantly challenge simplifying or evacuating narratives of childhood sexuality, rescuing children from hypostasized forms of innocence. My own project, on the other hand, seeks to rescue (not children, but) optimism from innocence. Thus, one way of distinguishing my ambitions from those of Bruhm and Hurley is that the latter engage Edelman on the level of No Future‘s subject (the child, or more precisely, the child-under-erasure), whereas I take Edelman’s subject as symptomatic of the book’s methodology, as such. Differently put, Bruhm and Hurley, along with Edelman, presume within a given cultural archive innocence’s epistemic force. If this innocence is linked to a sort of optimism (specifically, for these scholars, through children such as Ragged Dick, Heidi, Pollyanna, etc.), I’m interested in the ways that optimism, within an intellectual archive, hasn’t been hegemonically organizing, so much as a priori ineffectual and depleted.

     

    On a different register, Susan Fraiman interestingly challenges the foreclosure, in No Future, of a queer pregnant body. Fraiman writes at the close of her book Cool Men and the Second Sex,

     

    My interest here is not in the merits of campaigns for gay “normalization” and marriage rights but rather in Edelman’s suppression of procreative queerness even as he brings up lesbian and gay parenting. By tying this firmly and exclusively to adoption, Edelman keeps the category of queerness apart from the feminized, reproductive body, which is imagined as scarcely any closer or more familiar than China or Guatemala. (133)

     

     

    Fraiman’s interceding is timely (and not just because the pregnancy of Katie Holmes has brought home to all checkout-aisle tabloid-readers how utterly queer pregnancy itself can be)–albeit the queer unheimlichof pregnancy has been available for scrutiny, at very least, since Sigourney Weaver’s Ripley. Neither my interest nor Fraiman’s, however, is in a pregnancy that could assert its queerness only along these limited, science-fiction (or Scientological) lines. Rather, I admire Fraiman’s appraisal of Edelman for its vision of queer theory that could accommodate (and not merely chide) the complicated lexicons of maternal affect. Here, again, I would invoke Winnicott, whose own meticulous and insightful theorizations of maternity salubriously supplement those enabled by Fraiman’s work, or (psychoanalytically) the work of Melanie Klein.

     

    19. The argument (if not the polemical affect) of Edelman’s recent study implicitly suggests various moments in Bersani’s corpus, but more explicitly recalls an earlier proposition made by Peggy Phelan, in her 1995 essay, “Dying Man with a Movie Camera, Silverlake Life.” Phelan writes thus:

     

    Let’s suppose that lesbians and gay men in the academies and institutions of the contemporary United States have a particularly potent relation to grief. Exiled from the Law of the Social, many gay men and lesbians may have introjected the passionate hatred of mainstream homophobia and taken up an embattled, aggressive, and complex relation to the death drive. The aggressivity of this relation, the theory goes, makes it possible for us to survive our (first) deaths. While we wait for the next, we perform queer acts. (380)

     

    Such “queer acts,” folded back into Edelman’s No Future, would entail acting as though there were no future, executing actions directly (if not solely) motivated by the death drive. Phelan’s essay, meditating on the utterly harrowing documentary, “Silverlake Life,” is itself harrowing in the austere deference with which Phelan approaches her topic.

     

    20. There isn’t space in this essay to do justice to Edelman’s complicated and saponifying rhetoric of embodiment and figuration.

     

    21. This claustrophobia might account, in part, for the ellipses that conclude No Future‘s second epigraph, by Virginia Woolf. “Yes, I was thinking: we live without a future. That’s whats queer….” One could variously speculate how Woolf’s “queer” differs from Edelman’s, when Woolf continues, beyond Edelman’s ellipses: “That’s whats [sic] queer, with our noses pressed to a closed door” (355).

     

    22. “I hold, therefore, that, according to these principles, in order to act in accordance with the love of God, it is not sufficient to force ourselves to be patient; rather, we must truly be satisfied with everything that has come to us according to his will” (Leibniz, “Discourse on Metaphysics” 37-38). If optimism is difficult to cultivate, this is because a person can never know as much as God does. Leibniz’s conception of God, in this respect, is analogous to Freud’s conception of an unconscious. Both God and the unconscious delineate what a person at any given moment cannot know. Several years later after Leibniz’s writing, in response to Hobbes’s condemnations of humanity, Shaftesbury appositely describes an epistemological predicament which Leibnizian optimism would innoculate altogether, or which something like psychoanalysis might take as point of departure. “In an infinity of things, mutually relative, a mind which sees not infinitely can see nothing fully, and must therefore frequently see that as imperfect which in itself is really perfect” (The Moralists: A Philosophical Rhapsody, qtd. in Tsanoff 113).

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Agamben, Giorgio. Remnants of Auschwitz: The Witness and the Archive. Trans. Daniel Heller-Roazen. New York: Zone, 1999.
    • Berlant, Lauren. “Critical Inquiry, Affirmative Culture.” Critical Inquiry 30.2 (Winter 2004): 445-51.
    • —. “Love, a Queer Feeling.” Homosexuality & Psychoanalysis. Eds. Tim Dean and Christopher Lane. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2001. 432-51.
    • —. “The Subject of True Feeling: Pain, Privacy, and Politics.” Feminist Consequences: Theory for the New Century. Ed. Elisabeth Bronfen and Misha Kavka. New York: Columbia UP, 2001. 126-60
    • Berlant, Lauren, and Michael Warner. “Sex in Public.” Critical Inquiry 24.2 (Winter 1998): 547-66.
    • Bersani, Leo. The Freudian Body: Psychoanalysis and Art. New York: Columbia UP, 1986.
    • —.”Is the Rectum a Grave?” October 43 (Winter 1987): 197-222.
    • Bersani, Leo, and Ulysse Dutoit. Forms of Being: Cinema, Aesthetics, Subjectivity. London: British Film Institute, 2004.
    • Bruhm, Steven, and Natasha Hurley, eds. Curiouser: On the Queerness of Children. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2004.
    • Butler, Judith. Bodies that Matter. New York: Routledge, 1993.
    • —. Excitable Speech: A Politics of the Performative. New York: Routledge, 1997.
    • —. Gender Trouble: Feminism and the Subversion of Identity. New York: Routledge, 1999.
    • —. Giving an Account of Oneself. New York: Fordham UP, 2005.
    • —. Precarious Life: The Powers of Mourning and Violence. New York: Verso, 2004.
    • —. The Psychic Life of Power. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1997.
    • Cvetkovich, Ann. An Archive of Feelings: Trauma, Sexuality, and Lesbian Public Cultures. Durham: Duke UP, 2003.
    • Darwin, Charles. The Expression of the Emotions in Man and Animals. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1965.
    • Dean, Tim. “Art as Symptom: Zizek and the Ethics of Psychoanalytic Criticism.” Diacritics 32.2 (2002): 21-41.
    • —. Beyond Sexuality. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2000.
    • Dean, Tim, and Christopher Lane. eds. Homosexuality and Psychoanalysis. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2001.
    • de Lauretis, Teresa. The Practice of Love: Lesbian Sexuality and Perverse Desire. Bloomington: U of Indiana P, 1994.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Essays Critical and Clinical. Trans. Daniel W. Smith and Michael A. Greco. London: Verso, 1998.
    • —. The Fold: Leibniz and the Baroque. Trans. Tom Conley. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993.
    • Edelman, Lee. No Future: Queer Theory and the Death Drive. Durham: Duke UP, 2004.
    • Eng, David L., and David Kazanjian, eds. Loss: The Politics of Mourning. Berkeley: U of California P, 2003.
    • Eribon, Didier. Insult and the Making of the Gay Self. Trans. Michael Lucey. Durham: Duke UP, 2004.
    • Farmer, Brett. Spectacular Passions: Cinema, Fantasy, Gay Male Spectatorships. Durham: Duke UP, 2000.
    • Foucault, Michel. Discipline & Punish: The Birth of the Prison. Trans. Alan Sheridan. New York: Vintage, 1995.
    • Fraiman, Susan. Cool Men and the Second Sex. New York: Columbia UP, 2003.
    • Freud, Sigmund. The Ego and the Id. The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud. Ed. and trans. James Strachey. 24 vols. London: Hogarth, 1953-1974. 3-68.
    • Fuss, Diana. Identification Papers. New York: Routledge, 1995.
    • Hansen, Mark. New Philosophy for New Media. Cambridge: MIT P, 2004.
    • Laplanche, Jean. “Seduction, Persecution, Revelation.” Essays on Otherness. Ed. John Fletcher. London: Routledge, 1999.
    • Lear, Jonathan. Happiness, Death, and the Remainder of Life. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 2000.
    • Leibniz, G.W. “Discourse on Metaphysics.” Philosophical Essays. Ed. and trans. Roger Ariew and Daniel Garber. Indianapolis: Hackett, 1989. 35-68.
    • —. “Discourse on Metaphysics” and Other Essays. Trans. Roger Ariew and Daniel Garber. Indianapolis: Hackett, 1991.
    • —. Theodicy: Essays on the Goodness of God and the Freedom of Man and the Origin of Evil. Ed. Austin Farrer. Chicago: Open Court, 1998.
    • Muñoz, José. Disidentifications: Queers of Color and the Performance of Politics. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1999.
    • Nealon, Jeffrey T. Alterity Politics: Ethics and Performative Subjectivity. Durham: Duke UP, 1998.
    • Phelan, Peggy. “Dying Man with a Movie Camera. Silverlake Life: The View from Here.” GLQ 2.4 (1995): 379-98.
    • Sánchez-Pardo, Esther. Cultures of the Death Drive: Melanie Klein and Modernist Melancholia. Durham: Duke UP, 2003.
    • Scarry, Elaine. The Body in Pain: The Making and Unmaking of the World. New York: Oxford UP, 1985.
    • Sedgwick, Eve Kosofsky. Epistemology of the Closet. Berkeley: U of California P, 1990.
    • —. “Paranoid Reading and Reparative Reading, or, You’re So Paranoid, You Probably Think this Essay Is About You.” Touching Feeling: Affect, Pedagogy, Performativity. Durham: Duke U Pres, 2003. 123-51.
    • —. “Shame, Theatricality, and Queer Performativity: Henry James’s The Art of the Novel.” Touching Feeling: Affect, Pedagogy, Performativity. Durham: Duke UP, 2003. 35-65.
    • Tomkins, Silvan. Shame and its Sisters: A Silvan Tomkins Reader. Ed. Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick and Adam Frank. Durham: Duke UP, 1995.
    • Tsanoff, Radoslav Andrea. The Nature of Evil. New York: MacMillan, 1931.
    • Winnicott, D.W. “Adolescence: Struggling through the Doldrums.” The Family and Individual Development. London: Tavistock, 1965. 79-87.
    • —. “The Family Affected by Depressive Illness in One or Both Parents.” The Family and Individual Development. London: Tavistock, 1965. 50-60.
    • —. “Roots of Aggression.” Psycho-Analytic Explorations. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1989.
    • —. The Use of an Object and Relating through Identification.” Playing and Reality. New York: Basic, 1971. 86-94.
    • Woolf, Virginia. The Diary of Virginia Woolf, v.5. London: Chatto and Windus/ Hogarth, 1984.

     

  • Stylistic Abstraction and Corporeal Mapping in The Surrogates

    D. Harlan Wilson

    Liberal Arts
    Wright State University, Lake Campus
    david.wilson@wright.edu

     

    Review of: Venditti, Robert, and Brett Weldele’s The Surrogates. Issues 1-5. Marietta: Top Shelf Productions, 2006.

     

    In the tradition of Blade Runner (1981), Akira (the early 1980s comics and film), Neuromancer (1984), Watchmen (1987), Ghost in the Shell (1995), Dark City (1998), the Matrix trilogy (1999-2003), and other neocyberpunk texts, The Surrogates, a five-issue serialized comic, deploys a host of traditional postmodern science fiction motifs, themes and gadgetry as fortification for its tech-noir storyline. The main prescriptions for the plot include a formative crime, a protagonist who is forced to solve that crime, a gradual process of psychological awakening that echoes the method of crime-solving, an urban labyrinth setting, and high-tech machinery that has gone hog-wild and produced a dystopian society. Surrogates uses this genre recipe, harnessing the techniques of past futurologies and narrative spaces as conceived by the cyberpunks of the 1980s. The comic differs from its forerunners, however, by representing a post-capitalist condition that is defined by stylistic abstraction rather than by the stylistic superspecificity of former conceptions. William Gibson’s novelistic version of cyberspace, for instance, is propelled by hyperdescriptive language and imagery, and the cyberspace of the Wachowski brothers’ Matrix films (flagrantly extrapolated from Gibson) is entirely rendered by state-of-the-art special effects. Illustrator Weldele works in a different style. He minimalizes and abstracts the stylization of many previous cyberpunk forms by consistently composing panels that look like sketches more than finished products. As such, he constructs an innovative mapping of the body. In Matters of Gravity, Scott Bukatman explains:

     

    Comics narrate the body in stories and envision the body in drawings. The body is obsessively centered upon. It is contained and delineated; it becomes irresistible force and unmovable object. . . . The body is an accident of birth, a freak of nature, or a consequence of technology run wild. The . . . body is everything--a corporeal, rather than a cognitive, mapping of the subject into a cultural system. (49)

     

    Bukatman’s analysis focuses on the superhero body, but his general idea can be applied to other comics. Surrogates thus corporeally maps the subject into a system distinguished by technological excess and denaturalization (cyberpunk’s overriding themes). Unlike former maps, this one demonstrates an aesthetic destylization to represent the nature of machinic desire and selfhood. By destylization, I mean calculatedly threadbare graphics that indicate a “mode of awareness” in the science-fiction genre, which has consistently functioned as “a complex hesitation about the relationship between imaginary conceptions and historical reality unfolding into the future” (Csicsery-Ronay, Jr. 388). More specifically, The Surrogates revises the nature of cyberpunk subjectivity, which has generally been perceived in dystopian terms. It does so by illustrating (through the medium of its illustration) how cyberpunk texts are positively charged–not technologically ravished dystopias, but nostalgic matrices of hope and promise gesturing in utopian directions.

     

    Set in the Backbone District of Central Georgia Metropolis in 2054, The Surrogates depicts a future where 92% of adult humans supplant themselves with androids. In lieu of going to work or to dinner parties, people spend their time in a somnambulant state, reclining on lounge chairs. Their real, docile bodies are remotely wired into mechanical bodies by means of spider-like mechanisms placed on the temples. Surrogates experience the actual goings-on of daily life for their human users, who experience the full spectrum of sensory impressions through their surrogates. This science-fictional novelty is the maypole around which revolve the action and plot of the comic. The protagonist is Harvey Greer, a police lieutenant in search of a serial killer. Greer himself owns and uses a surrogate, which divides him against himself. As a cop, his surrogate technology protects him in the event of being wounded or killed (he can simply get another one); at the same time, he resents being dependent upon technology, physically and emotionally, and wants to exist purely as a real person. This tension is set against the main plot: Greer’s hunt for the serial killer, a surrogate named Steeplejack. Steeplejack is owned and operated by Lionel Canter, former employee of Virtual Self Incorporated (VSI) and inventor of surrogate technology, who is disgruntled because he originally conceived of the surrogate “as an elaborate prosthetic, and never supported any use of the technology beyond that purpose. . . . He felt that the widespread use of surrogates among adults was bad enough, but among children . . . that was more than he could accept” (5:14). Hence Canter, in the form of Steeplejack, assassinates the leader of a volatile anti-surrogate faction called the Dreads, sets off an EMP weapon of mass destruction that deactivates all surrogates, and provokes the Dreads to march on and demolish the factories of VSI. In the end Greer, who has stopped using his surrogate, solves the case, and the Dreads initiate a “massive surrogate cleanup campaign.” Surrogates concludes on a proverbially grim cyberpunk note when Greer goes home to find that his wife, unable to bear life without her surrogate, has overdosed on valium.

     

    The idea of surrogates invokes what is perhaps cyberpunk’s principal theme: the invasion of body and mind by the likes of “prosthetic limbs, implanted circuitry, cosmetic surgery, genetic alteration . . . brain-computer interfaces, artificial intelligence, neurochemistry–techniques radically redefining the nature of humanity, the nature of the self” (Sterling xiii). The flesh is treated with Gibsonian aversion. Subjects prefer to operate in the world as re-embodied consciousnesses, neurally interfaced with their “surries.” There are several reasons for the popularity of surrogates as described in a fictional academic essay, “Paradise Found: Possibility and Fulfillment in the Age of the Surrogate,” published at the end of Issue 1. Above all, surrogates, which look exactly like humans, permit one to assume different genders, races, and physicalities so as to avoid, for instance, “gender discrimination in employer hiring practices” and to “abolish such separatist philosophies as prejudice and stereotyping.” Mere vanity is of course also a concern. So is the marked decrease in crime (murder is a monetary issue–users losing their commodity-selves rather than their actual lives) and the health benefits (one can experience the pleasure of smoking and drinking through the vehicle of a surrogate without experiencing detrimental health effects). Written by Dr. William Laslo, the essay is overtly biased towards the dominant post-capitalist technology. Laslo’s views, however, are countered by religious fanatics (Zaire Powell III, a.k.a. “The Prophet,” and his constituency of Dreads), who perceive technology as an abomination, and whose actions provide the central conflict of The Surrogates. That said, both parties (if only unconsciously) seem to recognize that surrogate-usage is a symptom of the imaginative constraints placed on subjects by commodity culture and technological proliferation. They merely attempt to spin that symptom for their own ends. Dreads and non-Dreads alike need surrogates. Without the symptom, there can be neither disease nor cure.

     

    Laslo’s essay implicitly challenges the modalities of posthuman selfhood. As N. Katherine Hayles defines the problem,

     

    at stake in my investigation into the posthuman is the status of embodiment. Will the body continue to be regarded as excess baggage, or can versions of the posthuman be found that overcome the mind/body divide? What does it mean for embodiment that those aspects of the human most compatible with machines are emphasized, while those not easily integrated into this paradigm are underplayed or erased?. (246)

     

     

    By itemizing the essentially Deleuzoguattarian potential of surrogate technology, Laslo speaks to this question of embodiment. Real bodies are residual, “excess baggage” that serves little purpose other than to house the minds that control surrogate bodies. Surrogate bodies, on the other hand, do not simply serve as “fashion accessories,” a state of posthumanism that invokes Hayles’s fear and loathing, but rather as a “ground of being” that does not allow users to thrive on “unlimited power and disembodied mortality” (266) as they do in Neuromancer and its many spinoffs, whose protagonists crave cyberspace (and the loss of the human body) like a drug. For protagonists like Neuromancer‘s Case in particular, this loss of “meat” is the ultimate empowerment, providing for a superheroic state of disembodiment free from the confines of flesh. With surrogates, however, subjects merely trade one form of meat for a more dynamic and fluid form; and it is this state of re-embodiment that functions as a “ground of being,” in that subjects use it not to get high but to perform/exist on the stage of life. Surrogate bodies can take multiple forms–they are rhizomes authorizing lines of flight from the constructedness of gender and race into a matrix of social and biological anonymity where one’s true identity is altogether subsidiary to one’s machinic function. In theory, then, Surrogates possesses a utopian mettle with a technology capable of realizing an agential posthuman subject (à la Hayles).

     

    The diegesis of the comic, however, exhibits only a latent utopianism; agency lurks beneath the thick-skinned veneer of a dystopian tone, characterization, atmosphere and style. According to The Encyclopedia of Science Fiction, dystopias point “fearfully at the way the world is supposedly going in order to provide urgent propaganda for a change in direction” (360). Surrogates resists being polemical, leaving readers uncertain as to the ethics of its technology. Venditti himself says he wanted to leave the comic morally and ideologically ambiguous on this point:

     

    Whether The Surrogates is about the positive or negative aspects of technology's rapid growth is a question for each individual reader. Personally, I don't know where the line is drawn between good advancements and bad. To reflect that, I tried to populate the story with characters that represent both sides of the surrogate issue. Some are for surrogates and some are against them, and it's up to the reader to decide which group is more sympathetic. (Pop Thought)

     

    Venditti’s sentiment is a staple of what Brian McHale has called POSTcyberMODERNpunkISM, which represents electric technology in equivocal terms, characters both desiring and detesting the machines that speak their bodies and minds. Bukatman calls it terminal identity, a pathological subject-position incited by “the technologies of the twentieth century [which] have been at once the most liberating and the most repressive in history, evoking sublime terror and sublime euphoria in equal measures” (4). Such a schized condition is a prerequisite for post-capitalist life, a life that, in The Surrogates, people enact by literally reinventing themselves in the form of the commodity (surrogates are retail merchandise). This form of the commodification has been explored by Marshall McLuhan in The Mechanical Bride (1951), a study of “industrial man” and the way subjectivity is remastered by the symbolic economy of corporate advertisements. Surrogates reinvigorates this concept, exhibiting a categorical fluidity made possible by the commodification of the body. This differs from customary cyberpunk, whose fluidity is contingent on bodily disconnection, whereas here the body is foregrounded. Characterized by what Stelarc identifies as “anaesthetized bodies,” “VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling Language) entities” and “fractal flesh,” surrogate fluidities manifest as seemingly agential phenomena. Surrogate technology “pacifies the body and the world” and “disconnects the body from many of its functions” (Stelarc 567), but in so doing it invites bodies to become chronic dissemblers, slipping in and out of whatever race, gender, or occupation one likes. The effect of the technology is, again, a healthy actualization of Deleuzoguattarian flows. And yet, ironically, all this is linked to capital–the less money a body possesses, the less fluid and more static it must inevitably be. That is the fate of the post-capitalist subject: having the dash to become schized but lacking the capital to execute it. Here Deleuze and Guattari’s anti-capitalist agenda becomes inextricably bound to the system of desire and ethics it aspires to transcend. Their agenda, in other words, becomes a post-capitalist phenomenon that can only be successfully applied and fulfilled if it successfully fails.

     

    There are two dominant visions of post-capitalism. Some associate it with a reversion to a primitive society in the wake of a global cataclysm (representative texts are Mordecai Roshwald’s Level 7 [1959], Russell Hoban’s Riddley Walker [1980], Kim Stanley Robinson’s The Wild Shore [1995], and the Planet of the Apes films). Here the post-capitalist is the post-apocalyptic. More commonly it is used to denote an amplification or extrapolation of capitalism in its current form. Extrapolated diegeses of this nature are typically marked by a commodity-cultural pathology that has been induced by the fusion of humanity and technology. This fusion resonates in the post-capitalist future as shown by Venditti and Weldele as well as by their neocyberpunk precursors, especially the movement’s two paradigmatic texts, Ridley Scott’s Blade Runner and William Gibson’s Neuromancer, both of which are also stock technoirs set in blipped urban labyrinths that feature beat protagonists. These classic elements of genre, setting and character continue to be regularly adapted by authors of post-capitalist literature and film, who usually focus on dynamism of prose and on special effects. Venditti’s protagonist is a desensitized subject whose quest to unmask Steeplejack mirrors a quest to unmask his own identity and to resensitize himself. While lacking rock star-machismo in virtually every way, Harvey Greer is a machinic body wired to and produced by cybernetic, consumer-capitalist technology, and is thus emblematic of the cyberpunk hero. His diegetic reality also belongs to cyberpunk, which, in its most effective guises, has always flaunted a hardboiled noir sensibility and aesthetic. In this way the comic exploits the mechanisms of its antecedents.

     

    One crucial element of The Surrogates, however, diverges from cyberpunk convention: the style of its illustration. Sterling says that cyberpunk is “widely known for its telling use of detail” and “carefully constructed intricacy” (xiv). In written form, this has manifested as a descriptive superspecificity of bodies, technologies, and spatial realms (see, for example, any of the stories collected in Sterling’s authoritative Mirrorshades: A Cyberpunk Anthology [1986]). In cinematic and comic strip form, it manifests a crispness of imagery, vibrancy of color, and manic deployment of special effects, usually CGI (recent instances include Ultraviolet [2006], the Korean Natural City [2006], and Natural City [2003, 2005]). Surrogates opposes these forms of representation. Weldele’s illustrations are abstract, obscure, shadowcast. Use of color is limited primarily to dull grays, browns and blues, and the appearances of characters and their surroundings are roughly defined. In some cases characters are depicted as stick figures. There is an attentiveness to detail in terms of exterior media, which, like Alan Moore and Dave Gibbons’s Watchmen, The Surrogates uses to deepen and contextualize its diegesis (in addition to the aforementioned academic essay, these media consist of a classified ads page, a newspaper article, a television script, and VSI advertisements). But in terms of the action that unfolds on its storyboard, the comic rejects detail and intricacy. At the same time, it is carefully constructed–clearly a conscious act of rejection on the part of Weldele.

     

    What, then, does such an abstraction of style, an exercise in minimalist aesthetics, indicate about the state of twenty-first century electronically enhanced society? Neocyberpunk has always functioned as technosocial critique, and The Surrogates is no exception. Most of all, it indicates a full-fledged exhaustion of the real and dissolution of the self brought on by media technologies, which have surrogated existence. The comic defines a panic culture, a “floating reality, with the actual as a dream world, where we live on the edge of ecstasy and dread. Now it is the age of the TV audience as a chilled superconductor, of the stock market crash as a Paris Commune of all the programmed supercomputers, of money as an electric impulse fibrillating across the world” (Kroker 14). In short, the body, identity, existence itself are devoured by the commodified image. This dynamic is particularly visible when comparing the VSI ads with the comic’s storyboard. Sporting the catch phrase “Life . . . Only Better,” the ads feature photographs of real people (that is, real models) whose purpose is to lure the fictional characters of the comic into purchasing androids (fake people) to replace themselves. The levels of representation here fall into the realm of Baudrillardian simulacra and suggest that the (science) fictional is more real than the real, if only insofar as desire determines perception and thus reality. The business of the post-capitalist advertisement, after all, is to convince consumers that, with the aid of a given commodity, they will become superhuman, which is to say science-fictional, as in Nike commercials featuring Just-Do-Iters who, thanks to their shoes, can leap over tall buildings in a single bound. Surrogates‘ visually destylized corporeal map shows how this process of commodification has weathered the contours of body, perception, and consequently desire. The comic’s dystopian mood is most pronounced in this respect.

     

    More importantly, the comic’s corporeal map introduces a curious dissolution of the technological sublime. Of the technological sublime, Bukatman writes:

     

    Just as Gibson’s cyberspace recast the new “terrain of digital information processing in the familiar terms of a sprawling yet concentrated American urbanism, the sublime becomes a means of looking backward in order to recognize what’s up ahead.

     

    But there’s something else going on. The sublime not only points back toward a historical past; it also holds out the promise for self-fulfillment and technological transcendence in an imaginable near future . . . . The sublime presents an accommodation that is both surrender and transcendence, a loss of self that only leads–back? forward?–to a renewed and newly strengthened experience of self. (106)

     

    This surrender/transcendence resonates throughout cyberpunk literature and film, which points back to the womb of an industrial past that bore the electronic present of their respective futuristic accounts as well as to the technocapitalist world we live in. The technological sublime is reified by the novel manner in which cyberpunk signifies past science fiction tropes and themes to represent its imagined presents. This retroaction includes 1980s cyberpunk and their 1990s and twenty-first century offspring, products of a progressively science fictionalized world that continue to witness the literalization of formerly fictional cyberpunk realities. In contrast to other neocyberpunk texts, however, The Surrogates renovates its cyberpunk origins, rather than simply build upon them. Conventional cyberpunk represents the technologized body in negative terms, depicting its cybernetic pathology in excruciating detail. By representing the technologized body through the medium of a stylized destylization that indicates a devolution of the human condition, conventional cyberpunk becomes a source of great positive potential from which Hayles’s agential posthuman might emerge. Where once the posthuman was, while degraded, sharply defined and capable, in The Surrogates it is ill-defined and burnt out. Here the technological sublime does not entail a loss of self that leads to a “strengthened experience of self.” Instead it leads to an eroded experience of self. Its primary effect is nostalgia for an inherently optimistic posthumanism that, in its time, was explicitly pessimistic. What the aesthetic of The Surrogates finally maps, then, is a new neocyberpunk that both stands on the shoulders of its precursors and delimits a new narrative physique and spatiality, that prompts us to rethink its precursors’ method of representation. Surrogates‘ achievement is a mode of awareness that permits us to look awry at the science fiction genre’s past, present and potential future. Even more, as a poignant metanarrative and real world critique, the comic shows us a post-capitalist condition in which the erosion of selfhood is synonymous with an erosion of the (disembodied) psyche and style, two key factors of cyberpunk literature. The Surrogates confirms that, in Bukatman words, the “body is everything.” But likewise does it assert that the body is fading out.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Bukatman, Scott. Matters of Gravity: Special Effects and Supermen in the 20th Century. Durham: Duke UP, 1993.
    • —. Terminal Identity: The Virtual Subject in Postmodern Science Fiction. Durham: Duke UP, 1993.
    • Cook, David, and Marilouise Kroker. Panic Encyclopedia. New York: St. Martin’s, 1989.
    • Csicsery-Ronay, Jr., Istvan. “The SF of Theory: Baudrillard and Haraway.” Science Fiction Studies 18:3 (November 1991): 387-404.
    • Gibson, William. Neuromancer. New York: Ace, 1984.
    • Hayles, N. Katherine. “The Posthuman Body: Inscription and Incorporation in Galatea 2.2 and Snow Crash.Configurations 5.2 (1997): 241-66.
    • McHale, Brian. “POSTcyberMODERNpunkISM.” Storming the Reality Studio. Ed. Larry McCaffery. Durham: Duke UP, 1991.
    • McLuhan, Marshall. The Mechanical Bride: Folklore of Industrial Man. 1951. Corte Madera: Ginko, 2002.
    • Stableford, Brian. “Dystopias.” The Encyclopedia of Science Fiction. Eds. John Clute and Peter Nicholls. New York: St. Martin’s Griffin, 1995.
    • Stelarc. “From Psycho-Body to Cyber-Systems: Images as Post-Human Entities.” The Cybercultures Reader. London: Routledge, 2000.
    • Sterling, Bruce, ed. Mirrorshades: A Cyberpunk Anthology. New York: Ace, 1986.
    • Venditti, Robert. “Robert Venditti Talks About The Surrogates.” Pop Thought. Interview with Alex Ness. <www.popthought.com/display_column.asp?DAID=742>.

     

  • In the Still of the Museum: Jean-Luc Godard’s Sixty-Year Voyage

    Jehanne-Marie Gavarini

    Art Department,

    University of Massachusetts Lowell
    Visiting Scholar,

    Women’s Studies Research Center,

    Brandeis University
    gavarini@brandeis.edu

     

    Review of: Voyage(s) en Utopie, Jean-Luc Godard 1946-2006, In Search of Lost Theorem. Paris: Pompidou Center, 11 May-14 Aug 2006.

     

    Voyage(s) en Utopie, Jean-Luc Godard 1946-2006, In Search of Lost Theorem was presented at the Pompidou Center in Paris from May 11 to August 14, 2006. With this installation, Godard pushes the cinematic envelope a step beyond his legendary experimental aesthetic. Rather than offer a retrospective or traditional cinematographic exhibition, Voyage(s) en Utopie stands at the intersection between cinema and the visual arts. Faithful to Godard’s cinematic style, his museum piece does not pre-digest the filmmaker’s thoughts for his audience. Juxtaposed signs and symbols produce unexpected associations; combined, they form a gigantic puzzle. The viewer is expected to gather and decode a plethora of information in order to create an individualized mental montage. The exhibition uses strategies such as appropriation of imagery, found text, and film that have been championed by Godard since his early films. Although contemporary visual art is little quoted in Godard’s films, Voyage(s) en Utopie confirms that a two-way dialogue exists between Godard and other contemporary art. The poetry, revolutionary aesthetics, and political engagement of Godard’s films inspired numerous art practitioners. His influence on several generations of filmmakers, visual artists, and video artists is well documented. Correspondingly, Godard is clearly aware of developments in visual arts where strategies of appropriation are strongly rooted. From the cubists to Marcel Duchamp and Sherrie Levine, visual artists have endlessly quoted one another. Additionally, many visual artists such as Douglas Gordon or Matthias Müller have appropriated from cinema.1 While the form of Voyage(s) en Utopie is not necessarily groundbreaking, the multiple meanings and associations found in this exhibition set Godard apart from present-day artists who use similar strategies only to reduce their comment on contemporary culture to one-liners.

     

    Voyage(s) en Utopie was originally planned as a different show titled Collage(s) de France, archéologie du cinema, d’après JLG.2 The former director of the Cinémathèque Française, Dominique Païni, who was the curator of Collage(s), explains that in the original show, space was meant to be “used to describe a temporal process, that of thought itself.” Païni adds:

     

    In fact the visitor was invited to experience the time of a film’s conception in a new way: the time of “materialization” (to use JLG’s words), the time that passes between the phases of imagining and making, before arriving at the condensed time of the finished work, which is then painfully separated from its maker and swallowed up into the tomb of distribution and communication.

     

    Voyage(s) en Utopie differs from Collage(s) de France. Here space is used not merely to provide the viewers with the experience of the duration of a film’s conception, but more as a mean to travel in time, give a material form to memory, and reify the history of cinema and culture. Godard’s shift from motion pictures to the presence and power of still objects in a museum setting appears to conjure up a desire to stop the forward motion of cinema. The filmmaker’s object-based installation is grounded in the material world, but like all installations it will cease to exist at the end of the show. A still frame in the history of motion pictures, Voyage(s) en Utopie provides a short pause in the filmmaker’s prolific sixty-year journey.

     

    Despite having abandoned the original project, Godard refers to Collage(s) de France throughout Voyage(s) en Utopie. From the moment viewers enter the exhibition space, they are presented with the history and archeological strata of Voyage(s) en Utopie. On the wall immediately behind the entrance turnstile Godard places an initial placard indicating that the Pompidou Center decided to cancel the exhibition because of artistic difficulties. Two other reasons (financial and technical difficulties) are also mentioned but crossed out by Godard’s hand along with a photo of one of the scale models for the original show. The same placard is seen in several other spots within the exhibition. Although no further explanation is provided, the viewers get a sense of the built up tensions and difficult relationships that can develop between artists, curators, and institutions. The crossed out text undoubtedly signifies Godard’s disagreement with the Pompidou Center’s official version of why Collage(s) was abandoned. By exposing the history and baggage behind the show, this rebellious and ever-questioning artist refuses to abide by the rules. When he reveals what took place behind the scene, Godard goes against the expected sanitized façade usually presented to museum audiences.

     

    Voyage(s) consists of three rooms, but viewers are not told what order they should follow while visiting the exhibition. Their intuition alone guides them through the show. The first room, Salle -2: Avant Hier (“Room -2: The Day Before Yesterday”) is dedicated to Collage(s) de France. Here Godard shows the remains of the first project: models and models of models for nine separate rooms along with some full-scale objects intended to be in the original show. Although frequently shown in architecture exhibitions, models in the context of an art installation are more of a surprise. This is particularly true because these models are roughly finished and are not presented in a glass case, as they would be in traditional displays. Their integration within the installation introduces the idea of a story. But Godard’s narratives are typically nonlinear and their decoding requires nondiegetic information. The presence of the models, and in particular the use of several scales of models, creates a mise en abîme that elicits questions about the nature of the objects presented; viewers may wonder whether they are actually looking at Collage(s) or Voyage(s). Furthermore, are the models actual art objects or simple devices documenting the history of the exhibition? This approach transforms the status of the abandoned project from rough draft to work of art. It creates confusion between originals and their copies, art objects and their representation; and destabilizes the nature of conventional exhibitions.

     

    Figure 1: View of the exhibition “Voyage(s) en utopie,
    Jean-Luc Godard 1946-2006,
    à la recherche d’un théorème perdu.”

    © Jean-Claude Planchet, Centre Pompidou 2006

     

    The difficulties Godard encountered with the abandoned project are visually and perceptually emphasized by the unstable environment he creates in this room. The models are stacked, sometimes precariously. Remnants of floorboards and metal fences scattered on the ground produce uneven floor covering on which the viewers are walking. Contrasting with the extraordinary aesthetic character of recent films like Notre Musique (2004), this show aligns itself with the anti-aesthetic of contemporary visual art.3 It derives from the unfinished look that prevails in many contemporary art installations. In particular, Godard borrows from Christian Boltanski’s signature style by making visible large black webs of electrical cables on the gallery’s white walls.4 Voyage(s) also resembles the visual and conceptual wreckage of Ilya Kabakov’s L’Homme qui s’est envolé dans l’espace, (The Man Who Flew into Space) an installation presented at the Pompidou Center in the late nineteen eighties. In this installation, Kabakov’s fictional character supposedly flew through the ceiling of his apartment leaving behind a wrecked environment in which sits the contraption he built to escape communism and his reality. Similarly, in Voyage(s) trash and debris are strewn around the floor. Unfinished and partially painted walls reveal the guts of the show: DVD players and other electronic devices, layers of sheetrock, and tangles of wires and cables. Enclosed behind a fence, the objects planned for Collage(s) are not accessible to viewers. To emphasize the idea of prohibition further, Godard uses a clip from The Old Place (1999), a film commissioned by the New York Museum of Modern Art that he co-directed with Anne-Marie Miéville.5 This clip features the opening shot from Citizen Kane (1941). Welles’s notorious “No Trespassing” sign is immediately followed by a clip of another sign also shot through a metal fence: “Défense d’entrer, propriété de l’État” (“No Trespassing, State Property”). This juxtaposition of signs suggests the ban of Collage(s) de France by the Pompidou Center, a state-funded institution.

     

    Beyond this jab at the hosting museum, Room -2 looks at cinema as metaphor. In one of the models, a short text tells the story of a woman who finds drawings she created as a little girl; fifty years later she realizes that the drawings match a series of quotes she has gathered throughout her life. The story concludes that such a moment corresponds with the end of the battle between the image and the spirit of the text.6 To give form to the story, Godard creates an object that resembles a Mutoscope, one of the flip-card devices that preceded the film projector. A full-scale replica sits behind the metal fence along with other objects intended to be in Collage(s). This visual element creates free association between memory and the Mutoscope, the mechanisms of the psyche and cinema. Room -2 itself stands for Collage(s); it represents what has been repressed, the unconscious of Voyage(s). Cinema’s history is embedded in our psyche; it performs the role of social unconscious.

     

    Further examining the social unconscious, responsibilities, and guilt, another model addresses the European powers’ lack of involvement in the War in the Former Republic of Yugoslavia. After For Ever Mozart and Notre Musique, this model denounces imperialist ideology and ethnic cleansing. Wood fences that bring to mind imagery from old military forts cut through the space. An American flag overlaid with an eagle is juxtaposed with a sepia-toned photograph of a Native American. Other flags from the European Union hang on a metal fence whose stakes are driven into images of Bosnia. A miniature drive-in theater projects a clip from Je vous salue Sarajevo (1993) on an iPod. This two-minute film was conceived as a video-letter from Godard to the inhabitants of Sarajevo. It denounces war, military power, and the European Union in a poetic and dramatic manner. Godard, who has dedicated a large part of his oeuvre to the examination of the politics of war and the denunciation of Nazism, condemns the passivity of viewers who watched the horrific war in Bosnia on screens designed for entertainment. The size of the projection signifies the minimal importance of the horrors of the war in the former Republic of Yugoslavia. Furthermore, it comments on the shrinking size of screens. With the digital revolution, the number of screens is growing at an exponential rate, but their increasingly smaller sizes diminish the impact of the images.

     

     

    Figures 2 & 3: Views of the exhibition “Voyage(s) en utopie,
    Jean-Luc Godard 1946-2006,
    à la recherche d’un théorème perdu.”

    © Jean-Claude Planchet, Centre Pompidou 2006

     

    Salle -2: Avant Hier connects with Salle 3: Hier (“Room 3: Yesterday”) via a tunnel with an electric train traveling back and forth. In Salle -2, the words “Avant Hier,” instead of being hyphenated as they are in standard French, are separated by a large space.7 This creates a visual division between these words and Godard’s subtitle for the room: Avoir Été. “Avant” (“before”) is stacked with “Avoir” (“to have”), and “Hier” (“yesterday”) with “Été” (“summer”). Thus, the words can be read as groups or as separate entities, creating several possible interpretations for this room’s title. Typical of Godard’s clever and playful language manipulations, this title’s basic interpretation, “The Day Before Yesterday” or “To Have Been,” is complicated by the separation and stacking of the words. Viewers can also understand this title as bringing together the concepts of “before” with “having” and “yesterday” with “summer” and with “the past.” In the next room, the visual division is even more obvious. A window cuts through the word Hier, separating it into two sets of letters, “Hi” and “Er,” neither of which constitutes a word in French. Recalling Godard’s numerous denunciations of totalitarian regimes and Nazism in particular, this author stood in front of the room’s title wondering if she was the only viewer who felt tempted to fill in the gap to create the word Hitler. The subtitle Avoir is also divided into two words, “A” and “voir,” by the same window.8 “Yesterday” equals “to have,” but viewers also understand that something that took place yesterday needs to be seen; most likely, Godard is referring to twentieth-century cinema. In this room, he introduces the filmmakers who have shaped his vision: for instance, Fritz Lang, whom he quoted in his elaborate Histoire(s) du cinéma, and, maybe more importantly, who plays the film director in Contempt (1963) while Godard holds the role of his assistant. The use of a clip from Orson Welles’s self-produced and unfinished epic Don Quixote is another reference to the impossibility of Collage(s). Godard uses many more clips from films, such as Nicholas Ray’s Johnny Guitar (1954), that he has quoted repeatedly in his own works. Excerpts by filmmakers who have been Godard’s role models, his friends, or collaborators such as Roberto Rossellini, Jean Renoir, Robert Bresson, Jean Cocteau, Jean-Pierre Melville, and Jacques Becker among others attest to the extraordinary intellectual web formed by the Nouvelle Vague. Godard also includes sixteen clips and short films of his own work and that of Anne-Marie Miéville. These range from classical Godard like Weekend (1967), a provocative caricature of the life of the French middle class in the sixties, to Vrai Faux Passeport (2006), a film created for this exhibition that comments on the rating by critics of television and cinema. Godard, who appears increasingly concerned with historical memory and with the need for preserving his own oeuvre, lures his viewers with these teaser-clips. Their voyage might expand beyond the walls of the Pompidou Center and be prolonged by a trip to the cinemathèque, the movie theater, or the video store to explore further the dialogue he sets up between these fragments of films.

     

    Figure 4: View of the exhibition “Voyage(s) en utopie,
    Jean-Luc Godard 1946-2006,
    à la recherche d’un théorème perdu.”

    © Jean-Claude Planchet, Centre Pompidou 2006

    In Salle 1, Aujourd’hui, Godard recreates a contemporary home, including bedroom, kitchen, living room, and office. This room represents or documents life in today’s world. This is perhaps the most explicit or literal part of the exhibition. People walking on Beaubourg Street, which is on the east side of the Pompidou Center, appear included in the installation. Viewed through the window, they rush pass Godard’s sign “Aujourd’hui: Etre” (“Yesterday: To Be”) and enter his scenography; their mere presence under Godard’s placard makes them live material in this contemporary art installation. They are transformed into philosophical beings who exist within today’s world. On the west side of the large glass-enclosed space, the slightly opaque and partially open blinds reveal a group of homeless people living in tents and forming a tidy camp.9 Although not officially part of the exhibition, they are unofficially included in the show. Their presence is an uncomfortable reminder of the inequalities dividing museum audiences from street people.

     

     

    Figure 5 & 6: Views of the exhibition “Voyage(s) en utopie,
    Jean-Luc Godard 1946-2006,
    à la recherche d’un théorème perdu.”

    © Jean-Claude Planchet, Centre Pompidou 2006

     

    Like an open loft space, this imaginary home is subdivided into several living areas. Directly across the entrance to the room, two gigantic screens set horizontally on a tabletop broadcast French TV. In an interview with Christophe Kantcheff, Godard explains that the screens are presented horizontally because they are called flat screens. He adds that their flatness is a metaphor for the lack of depth of this apartment.10 Entering the room, Godard’s viewers will probably agree that

     

    there is nothing more mysterious than a TV set left on in an empty room. It is even stranger than a man talking to himself or a woman standing dreaming at her stove. It is as if another planet is communicating with you. Suddenly the TV reveals itself for what it really is: a video of another world, ultimately addressed to no one at all, delivering its images indifferently, indifferent to its own messages (you can easily imagine it still functioning after humanity has disappeared). (Baudrillard 50)

     

    A typewriter, precariously resting behind the television screens, appears to have been violently hacked to pieces. Its bare parts and missing keys are a commentary on the rapid changes in technologies. With this object, Godard creates a nostalgic image for a time gone by, the time of the mechanical era that preceded the violence and speed of the digital revolution. The ubiquitous presence of new media in this contemporary environment is alarming, particularly in the bedroom. Behind soft pillows, the bed’s headrest is an LCD screen displaying a clip from Ridley Scott’s Black Hawk Down (2001). Godard’s appropriation of this Hollywood film is in line with his relentless questioning of the politics of war and his examination of representations of violence in cinema. The clip also signifies not only the presence of cinema and of Hollywood in our dreams; it also graphically illustrates how images of wars haunt our sleeping hours and make a way into our unconscious.

     

    Although it features some realistic elements, “Today’s” apartment is obviously a set. The general feeling of this home is emptiness; however, the center of the room is occupied by oversized scaffolding left lying on its side. This evokes Contempt‘s paint cans and ladders in Paul and Camille’s new and unfinished apartment. While the apartment was a sign of the young couple’s climbing up the social ladder and their access to the dream of modernity, their relationship was coming undone. In Voyage(s), the use of contemporary furniture makes the apartment look familiar to the viewers who casually sit on the bed or the sofa to rest or watch a film clip. In doing so, they become actors in Godard’s installation. His set becomes the mirror of their domestic space and personal lives. His comment on contemporary society interpellates the viewers directly: “Today’s homes are not safe nests, and your house itself is most likely a site of indoctrination.” Other details in the room add to Godard’s critique of the present era. On the living-room table, a letter scale weighs an envelope on which the viewers can read the words “plus jamais ça” (“never again”). Empty, the envelope weighs little on “Today’s” scale. This saying, often used to refer to the Holocaust, reminds the viewers that Europe closed its eyes once again during the war in the Former Republic of Yugoslavia. Two other phrases–“Les lendemains qui chantent and “L’appel de Stockholm“–reaffirm his long-term alignment with left-wing politics.11

     

    Figure 7: View of the exhibition “Voyage(s) en utopie,
    Jean-Luc Godard 1946-2006,
    à la recherche d’un théorème perdu.”

    © Jean-Claude Planchet, Centre Pompidou 2006

     

    The kitchen area adds to the domestic atmosphere with its appliances and modern home décor. However, once the viewers get closer, they discover that pornographic images are the centerpiece of Godard’s table whose surface is another oversized flat-screen television. A Godardian pun, this tabletop features two versions (one short and the other longer) of x-rated films. A mound of lubricated flesh squirms on the screen while the individual human bodies suck, grab, and penetrate each other obsessively with little apparent pleasure. Consumers of objects, images, and flesh, Godard’s viewers are reminded of their affliction. Today’s culture keeps generating new and insatiable desires for its potential shoppers. Like processed foods and other commodities, pornographic images have entered contemporary homes. No more seen through peepholes, pornography has become one of the models that structure the human psyche. The inclusion of x-rated films adds to the cynicism of the exhibition. The utopia presented in Voyage(s) is clearly ironic. “Today’s” apartment represents the fake dreams offered by consumer culture. Godard has examined popular culture and scrutinized the role of cinema for several decades. Hence, while he packs thirty-one film clips in Avant-hier and Hier–the rooms that represent the past–Godard includes only five clips in Aujourd’hui. Besides the excerpts discussed above, he shows a clip from Barocco by André Téchiné, a filmmaker who has written about him in Cahiers du cinéma, and another from La Môme vert de gris, a film in which Eddie Constantine plays Lemmy Caution, the famous FBI agent that Godard recontextualized in Alphaville. Thus popular culture is taking center-stage in “Today’s” world while Godard’s films are noticeably absent from the present, on which they have barely left a trace.

     

    Voyage(s) en Utopie continues Godard’s investigation of linear time. In Notre Musique the script declares repeatedly that “before” is “after.” In this installation, Godard takes his viewers from the present to the past and back, from Voyage(s) to Collage(s). Although he gives a semblance of chronology by numbering the rooms, their numbers are odd and non-sequential. Meaning only appears when solving the implied equation (-2 +3 =1) that translates into text: Avant-hier + Hier = Aujourd’hui (The Day Before Yesterday + Yesterday = Today). Godard, critical of an empty present, has poetically calculated a theorem ascribing today’s absolute value as less than yesterday’s. The Pompidou Center’s ban on Collage(s) amplifies the mathematical metaphor. Godard presents the loss of the original show as taking away from yesterday’s cultural heritage. Devoid of Godard’s films, “Today” might consider itself number one, but it remains an impoverished experience that is marked negatively. The lack of representation of Godard’s oeuvre in today’s room makes him a phenomenon of the past. Thus, beyond his obvious bitterness at the Pompidou Center, Godard provides a nostalgic view of a time when he received more social recognition. Collage(s) could have brought Godard’s public image up to date and strengthened it, but instead viewers are presented with Voyage(s), its truncated version. Godard does not merely tackle the French institutional and social system. His use of still objects is an attempt to suspend linear time. It is a buffer against cinema’s fleeting images and its time-based constraints. Viewers, who weave in and out of the three separate rooms, move forward and back; they stop at their own leisure. Like the hands of a clock, their movement within the space keeps track of time, but does not go solely in one direction. Traveling through the exhibition, they draw their own map according to the visual and conceptual connections they make. In this battle against time, the viewers’ movement in space counters the forward motion of cinema. Choosing to exhibit static objects, and taking refuge within the stillness of the museum, the filmmaker could be warning us about cinema in the digital age. Interestingly, Voyage(s) surveys the history of cinema but stops just before the contemporary era. The aging filmmaker does not give a sense of his beliefs in or of his vision for the future of cinema. Is he telling the world that the history of cinema stops with Godard? In Contempt, his set for Cinecittà proclaims an unexpected slogan in very large letters: “Il cinema è una invenzione senza avvenire.”12 Could Godard have been anxious about the evolution of technology as early as 1963? Could he have foreseen that films would be viewed on iPods and cellular phones? Godard may be telling his viewers that cinema is now in need of seclusion, retreat, or protection, and that it will become necessary for filmmakers and their oeuvre to find sanctuaries outside movie houses.

     

    Notes

     

    1. For instance, Gordon’s installation 24 Hour Psycho (1993) slowed down Alfred Hitchcock’s Psycho to make it last twenty-four hours. In Home Stories (1991), Matthias Müller appropriates Hollywood clips. The collaged piece reflects on the construction of femininity and confronts the audience with their own voyeurism.

     

    2. The original title translates to “Collage(s) of France, archeology of the cinema, according to JLG.

     

    3. For further ideas on this concept, see Foster, particularly Rosalind Krauss’s essay, “Sculpture in the Expanded Field.”

     

    4. Noticeably, Boltanski is the only contemporary artist quoted by Godard in The Old Place, a film on the role of art at the end of the twentieth century.

     

    5. Along with directing her own films, Anne-Marie Miéville has been Godard’s main collaborator since 1973. They have co-directed several films and she is the Art Director of Notre Musique.

     

    6. “Pour elle le combat de l’image avec l’ange du texte était achevé.”

     

    7. When hyphenated, these words mean “the day before yesterday.”

     

    8. “Avoir” means “to have,” but “À voir” means “must be seen.”

     

    9. A very controversial subject, these tents were distributed to homeless people in 2005 and 2006 by Médecins du Monde (Doctors of the World.) This health and human rights organization has been working to fight poverty and find housing for all for several decades. Médecins du Monde provided the tents as a temporary solution for homeless people in Paris. The goal was not only to give back some dignity to these people but also to make the problem of homelessness visible. Besides several acts of vandalism against the tents, the summer’s tourist season has brought many attempts from the city of Paris to get rid of the camps.

     

    10. “Puisqu’on les appelle des écrans plats, je ne vois pas pourquoi on ne les mettrait pas à plat. Dans cette salle, on est effectivement dans la platitude. On a la cuisine, la chambre à coucher, la cuisine, le bureau, c’est plat. Il n’y a pas de profondeur” (Kantcheff).

     

    11. The first phrase translates to “Toward Singing Tomorrows.” This is the title of Gabriel Peri’s autobiography. Peri was a communist leader who was executed by the Nazis in 1941. Full of idealism and passion, his last letter describes communism as a way of life that will bring happy days for the future. The second phrase translates to “The Stockholm Appeal,” which was a call against nuclear armaments that was signed by one hundred and fifty million people including Jean-Luc Godard in1950.

     

    12. “Cinema is an invention with no future.”

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Baudrillard, Jean. America. London: Verso, 1988.
    • Foster, Hal, ed. The Anti-Aesthetic: Essays on Postmodern Culture. Seattle: Bay, 1983.
    • Kantcheff, Christophe. “Un entretien avec Jean-Luc Godard à propos de son exposition au Centre Pompidou: Je n’ai plus envie d’expliquer.’Politis 29 Jun 2006. <http://www.politis.fr/article1760.html>.
    • Païni, Dominique. “D’après JLG …” Jean-Luc Godard: Documents. Ed. Nicole Brenez and Michael Witt. Paris: Editions du Centre Pompidou, 2006.

     

  • History and Schizophrenia

    Michael Mirabile

    English and Humanities
    Reed College
    michael.mirabile@reed.edu

     

    Review of: Sande Cohen, History Out of Joint: Essays on the Use and Abuse of History.Johns Hopkins UP, 2006.

     

    History Out of Joint: Essays on the Use and Abuse of History begins by expressing surprise at the various claims that fall under the rubric of history today. Cohen asks why contemporary culture values historicism so highly and allows it to acquire the force of necessity.

     

    “Always historicize!” is Fredric Jameson’s famous command in the opening of The Political Unconscious (1981). He humorously adds that it is almost possible to consider this a transcendental or “transhistorical” imperative (9). Of course the concept of history must only be almost transcendental, must always stop short of being a noncontingent evaluative principle, which Jameson acknowledges. Absent that delimitation it would not, according to habitual and circular thinking, be judged rigorously “historical.” Cohen sees this general historicizing tendency as culturally symptomatic, hardly restricted to Jameson or to Marxist criticism. Covering a variety of topics, from Deleuze’s theory of repetition and Derrida’s reading of Marx to the politics of the Los Angeles art world and Taiwanese resistance to the “one China,” History Out of Joint is above all distinctive for its sustained effort to bring something like the full weight of the postmodern condition–including media saturation, the cultural effects of globalization, skepticism about linguistic referentiality–to bear on historiography. Just as the “critiques of metanarratives” have “unsettled historical synthesis,” historians writing in the age of hypertext may no longer “trust in the sense of continuity of plot if their readers are increasingly pre- and postliterary” (History 106, 104). At times the territory appears too vast to map or, at the very least, resistant to the micro-examination Cohen evidently prefers. Put still another way: his approach raises the question whether a subject as large as history, or as the end of history’s descriptive efficacy, may be addressed comprehensively through selective readings of uses of history. However, even the book’s most contestable critical interventions produce valuable insights that might have been missed in a less ambitious book.

     

    Cohen’s thesis, stated most concisely, is that “we are overhistoricized and undercritical” (History 125). He opposes the reductionism of what he variously labels “normative criticism,” “university-based legitimations of criticism,” and “the explanatory models of modern thought.” He nevertheless upholds a firm notion of critique throughout History Out of Joint. In one intervention that I examine at length because it exemplifies the book’s analytical labor, Cohen associates Derrida’s Specters of Marx (1998) with a trend toward “anticriticism” (155). Cohen continues to pursue the concern with academic criticism of his earlier Academia and the Luster of Capital and Passive Nihilism, but expands his focus beyond that of a single institutional formation and discursive practice to include the contemporary cultural field in general. In History Out of Joint he also considers popular representations of history and the historian, such as those advanced in Los Angeles Times editorials. The interest of the book consequently far exceeds the specific disciplinary frame professional historians would likely bring to it.

     

    Despite many apparent and some actual similarities between Cohen’s work and Hayden White’s, Cohen distinguishes his critical revaluation from White’s metahistorical and tropological analysis. Having denied the possibility of applying critical insight from historiography to the real, Cohen moves from forms of order and patterning to those of contingency and alterity–from, as he announces, narrative to event. White, accounting in Metahistory (1973) for the deep structure of the nineteenth-century European historical imagination, and in Tropics of Discourse (1978) for recurrent figurations traced back as far as Vico that offer “the key to an understanding of the Western discourse about consciousness” (12), examines the importance of narrative and rhetorical conventions in historical writing. “Metahistory,” as its project is summarized in History Out of Joint, examines “the conditions of possibility in the writing of a narrative (the use of criteria to select things to narrate)” (168), whereas Cohen, confining himself to the present or to the recent past of modernity, engages ongoing cultural debates in the absence of a shared, pre-constituted language. In a thoroughly “out of joint” present, historians and cultural analysts can no longer have recourse to homology, to recurrent paradigms that hold across discourses, disciplines, and geographies.

     

    To historicize goes schizo,” according to one particularly suggestive formulation, when historians incorporate into the writing of history a consciousness of the reductionism of history as a concept and category (History 124). With this momentous shift they register a crisis in the use-value of historicity: “schizophrenia comes into historiography when one actively notices the restrictions placed on what can count as a narrative subject” (106). In Academia and the Luster of Capital Cohen also sees history not in epistemological terms, as process and procedure, but as mediation: “As a concept concerning reality, ‘history’ . . . will be treated here as an essentially politicizing construct” (81). More generally the crisis concerns changes in our collective experience of time. “Nonsynchronous movements and actions” follow, for instance, from “a ‘vampiric’ or zombie-like time (shopping)” (Academia 83). The contemporary scene is characterized, in Cohen’s view, by such distinct, site-specific temporalities for which the framework of history provides only inapt analogies and metaphors.

     

    Still, Cohen observes, occasional recognition of the crisis coexists with a renewed commitment to historicism. One hears calls for returns to history and promises of history’s return–as in the inevitable return of the repressed. In the countervailing and culturally dominant refusal to “schizophrenize” history, Cohen discerns a reaction-formation against an ever more politically and socially elusive moment. Thus precisely now, when “the pressure to historicize is so great,” Cohen insists on the need for a questioning, a genealogical rethinking, of historical representation itself (History 105). As a self-declared “ex-historian” working amidst the paradoxical conditions of “posthistory,” Cohen pushes back against the archivilist trend in scholarship toward increasing contextual specificity. “Historical context,” as the indispensable category and mantra for “verbal aggressions in support” of history’s return among groups as dissimilar as new historicists and revisionists, “promises an iconic and indexical satisfaction” (Academia xii) yet merely results in “historicization by restriction” of meaning (History 111). “Historical criticism” amounts, for Cohen, to a contradiction.1 In sum, he reorders the terms of the discussion. On the side of history and its methodological extensions (historiography, historicism) he ranges narrative, repression, institutionalization, selection, and telos, which signal interpretive and referential closure. In contrast, he associates what I have been cautiously calling the real with plenitude, the continual production of meaning. Finally, history is “out of joint” for Cohen because, as a prime instance of territorialization, it is out of step with the massive deterritorializing machines of capital and modernity. (At the opposite end of this spectrum stands Jameson’s equation of the Lacanian Real with a capitalized “History” in his “Imaginary and Symbolic in Lacan” [1977].) Cohen concludes that history can no longer “speak” to the conditions of the present.

     

    I expected the chapter on Derrida’s reading of Marx to disavow academic enthusiasm for deconstruction. Cohen’s sensitivity to the perils of critical reductionism, on the other hand, made counterclaims on behalf of dialectical or materialist categories, in particular Marxian historiography, appear unlikely. I prepared myself to encounter, in short, an interpretation resembling the more anti-Derridean contributions to the valuable collection Ghostly Demarcations (1999; edited by Michael Sprinker) without the corresponding New Left ideological investments.

     

    In the opening pages, aspects of the chapter’s discussion seemed to fulfill my expectations: if not in Cohen’s forthright declaration that his “reading is at odds with Derrida’s project,” then in the willingness to revisit apolitical characterizations of deconstruction common in Derrida’s Anglo-American reception history (History 155). Cohen trespasses what would appear unassailable territory for deconstructionists: the exposure of binary thinking. Undaunted by the task, he questions deconstruction’s global relevance “in the face of nearly universal extreme concentrations of wealth, authority, and value” (166). Wouldn’t a criticism that begins by specifying instead of undermining distinctions prove more politically useful? Of course this assumes, against the use of deconstruction to begin, in Drucilla Cornell’s words, an inquiry into “the current conditions of society and the possibilities of social change” (69), that Derrida advances a value-neutral language or form of linguistic reflexivity.2 The neglect of this prominent, by now long-standing practice of reading Derrida politically in Cohen’s own presumed politicization of deconstruction is a major shortcoming of the chapter.

     

    At, if not beyond, the limits of Cohen’s politicizing gesture, just as he considers that it might be “unfair” to mention “that one-third of the world’s actual population has no daily, reliable source of potable water,” he transfers his critical energies to a more foundational inquiry into the precepts of Derrida’s deconstruction (History 166). Cohen’s reading transitions, in other words, from a mere charge of hermeticism to a meditation on the fate of differential critique. He eventually attempts to turn Derrida’s attack on metaphysics against his own critical procedure. The challenge that Cohen advances from this point of the chapter on is a serious one. Nevertheless it will likely elicit the charge that Cohen is simplifying Derrida’s engagement with Marxism. In light of the pressing question, raised in the later chapter on Deleuze, whether forms of critique “give the concept of difference its difference,” Cohen finds Specters of Marx lacking (229). While Deleuze “wants to make difference a catastrophe,” Derrida restages, according to Cohen, the promised return of history not as the irrecuperable singularity of the event but as repetition of the same (235). More specifically, “true repetition”–likewise following a Deleuzian formulation–repeats without identity, perhaps even paradoxically “repeats something unrepeatable” (232). Cohen alludes to Derrida’s “meta-metahistory” not as the condition of possibility for narrativization–as in White–but as “the condition of conditions” that guarantees an unchanging structural disparity of privilege and supplement as well as the past’s latent visitation upon the present in spectral form (168). In a conclusion to which many readers of Derrida will object, Cohen accuses Derrida of indifference to discursive and temporal difference.

     

    No less contestable is Cohen’s portrayal of Taiwanese resistance to Chinese hegemony as nothing short of “resistance to history–something more affirmative than opposition” (History 49). Taiwan’s unique geopolitical situation subjects it to the distinct but often combined economic forces of China and the United States. It provides Cohen with an opportunity to scrutinize an example of simultaneous self-enclosure and event-like semiotic openness. Based partly, as Cohen notes, on his personal experience of living in Taiwan, this chapter demonstrates how meticulous his analysis can be. At the same time Taiwan’s situation functions as a kind of parable of the limits and potential dangers of historicizing. Indeed, media coverage of Taiwan, symptomatic for Cohen of the “abuse” of history, reveals the territorializing force of historical narration. Here it is employed to secure proleptically an uninterrupted flow of capital. “To historicize,” Cohen reminds us, “is as much now a tactic placed in the service of making a future as it is a recuperation of any lost and forgotten past” (124). By contrast, Taiwan embodies for some (including Cohen) local political struggle against globalization and the imposed narrative of progressive economic expansion. The repeated neo-liberal exhortations in the Los Angeles Times and the New York Times in the name of the marketplace, as “a paramount instance of misfiguration” involving among other things the repression of Taiwan’s colonial past, prompt Cohen to conduct an analysis of the politics of representation in the American media (61, 49). To be sure, the predispositions and socio-political horizons of individual readers will to a large extent dictate how viable the analysis appears. Its final turn is, again, not to recommend a more proper use–against the abuses–of history. Instead Cohen’s strategy is to embrace the “ahistorical” in its full anti-foundationalist implications.

     

    Does political resistance receive fresh impetus from the revelation of history as mediation and fetish? Or does the revelation bring us one step closer to nihilism? The option of an “ahistorical” collective identity, which History Out of Joint ascribes to Taiwan, may not at first glance seem particularly empowering, though Cohen’s redefinition of “ahistorical” as that which designates “those times when a people or group cannot be assimilated to Western narratives” should compel readers to question the value habitually attached to historical consciousness (History 48). I am convinced that the non-metaphysical end-of-history gesture offered here is more than a clever reordering of terms and associations–with interpretive and referential plenitude, typically assigned to the historically contextualized event, being replaced by impoverishment. More immediately, however, will Cohen’s proclamation of an irreducible, posthistorical present correspond to actual reductions in the use of historicism? Will injunctions such as Jameson’s that we always historicize lose their authority? On these latter questions I am left to conclude, no doubt reductively and conventionally, that only time will tell. In any case, Cohen has helped start a difficult and long overdue conversation.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Expanding upon and clarifying this point, Cohen notes that “‘historical criticism’ or criticism ‘founded’ upon ‘history’ is an unnecessary recoding of one or more versions of the endemic myth that criticism equals enlightenment.” “Criticism,” he concludes, “would be better off if it were groundless and elicited meanings that tried to reach the limits of language rather than constantly producing the effect of oversignification” (Academia 28).

     

    2. I take the citation above from Cornell’s contribution to the collection Deconstruction and the Possibility of Justice. The attitude expressed strikes me as representative of that informing the overall project of the juridical extension of deconstructive critique. Other collections, such as Consequences of Theory, eds. Jonathan Arac and Barbara Johnson, and Critical Encounters, eds. Cathy Caruth and Deborah Esch, focus less on law and more on the general political field, but join Deconstruction and the Possibility of Justice in rejecting the apolitical reading of deconstruction.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Arac, Jonathan, and Barbara Johnson, eds. Consequences of Theory: Selected Papers from the English Institute, 1987-88. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1991.
    • Caruth, Cathy, and Deborah Esch, eds. Critical Encounters: Reference and Responsibility in Deconstructive Writing. New Brunswick: Rutgers UP, 1995.
    • Cohen, Sande. Academia and the Luster of Capital. Minneapolis: Minnesota UP, 1993.
    • Cornell, Drucilla. “The Philosophy of the Limit: Systems Theory and Feminist Legal Reform.” Deconstruction and the Possibility of Justice. London: Routledge, 1992. 68-91.
    • Jameson, Fredric. “Imaginary and Symbolic in Lacan.” The Ideologies of Theory. Vol. I: Situations of Theory. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1988. 75-115.
    • —. The Political Unconscious: Narrative as a Socially Symbolic Act. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1981.
    • White, Hayden. Tropics of Discourse: Essays in Cultural Criticism. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1978.

     

  • Not What It Seems: The Politics of Re-Performing Vito Acconci’s Seedbed (1972)

    Theresa Smalec

    Performance Studies
    New York University
    tks201@nyu.edu

     

    Review of: Marina Abramovic’s Seedbed. Solomon R. Guggenheim Museum, New York. 10 Nov. 2005.

     

    For seven days last November, Marina Abramovic engaged in a seemingly simple art experiment. The Solomon R. Guggenheim’s program straightforwardly outlines her weeklong endeavor: “In Seven Easy Pieces, Abramovic reenacts seminal performance works by her peers dating from the 1960s and 70s, interpreting them as one would a musical score and documenting their realization” (9). Myriad complexities unfold, however, as soon as one asks what it means to re-enact a performance that was arguably only supposed to happen once. Furthermore, a musical score is typically understood as written composition, where parts for different instruments appear on separate staves. By contrast, performance has historically been viewed as a profoundly embodied phenomenon, with no easy way to isolate its formal, sociopolitical, and site-specific elements.

     

    I explore the tensions outlined above by reviewing a particularly fertile and perplexing example of Abramovic’s efforts to re-perform the score. Before turning, however, to address the factors that make her rendition of Vito Acconci’s Seedbed so oddly provocative, I must elaborate on the basic theoretical issues at stake in her larger project. Back in the 1960s and 70s, the rules of performance were threefold: 1. No rehearsal. 2. No repetition. 3. No predictable end.1 Each of the earlier pieces featured in Abramovic’s 2005 program loyally followed these maxims. Bruce Nauman’s Body Pressure (1974), Vito Acconci’s Seedbed (1972), Valie Export’s Action Pants: Genital Panic (1969), Gina Pane’s Self-Portrait(s) (1973), Joseph Beuys’s How to Explain Pictures to a Dead Hare (1965), and her own Lips of Thomas (1975) shared a commitment to performance’s one-time insurgence. Because there were no dry runs, no one knew how things would turn out, not even the artists. And because these precarious acts were never repeated, many people argue that it has since become very difficult to pass on the knowledge they shared to new audiences. Indeed, the question of how to rebuild the genre’s ephemeral modes of transmission is integral to the museum’s account of what motivates Abramovic: “The project is premised on the fact that little documentation exists for most performance works from this critical period: one often has to rely upon testimonies from witnesses or photographs that show only portions of any given piece” (9).

     

    Yet as usefully urgent as Seven Easy Pieces seems to be, the artist’s proposal to research and re-do the works of her peers threatens the cardinal rules that have long defined this art form as singular. Peggy Phelan explains her sense of the non-reproductive ontology of performance in Unmarked (1993):

     

    Performance’s only life is in the present. Performance cannot be saved, recorded, documented, or otherwise participate in the circulation of representations of representations: once it does so, it becomes something other than performance . . . . The document of a performance then is only a spur to memory, an encouragement of memory to become present. (146)

     

    Part of Abramovic’s challenge to Phelan’s ontology comes from her never actually having witnessed most of the actions whose scores she would reenact. Her engagement with the remnants that survive of these works is not merely “a spur to memory,” because she has no first-hand knowledge to reactivate. Rather, her plan to use archival remains to literally reproduce acts that were previously “live” suggests that performance can be transmitted across timeframes. Phelan insists that performance’s affective and authoritative power thrives solely in the here and now: “Performance honors the idea that a limited number of people in a specific time and place can have an experience of value which leaves no visible trace afterward” (149). Contrarily, Abramovic locates its ability to endure and inspire new audiences as residing in the copy: “Seven Easy Pieces examines the possibility of redoing and preserving such performance work” (9).

     

    In an unlikely way, then, Abramovic’s embodied experiment appears to support the counterintuitive theory that Philip Auslander puts forth in “The Performativity of Performance Documentation” (2006). Her implicit understanding of Acconci’s documentation as a mode of composition (a musical score that can be replayed) corresponds with Auslander’s sense of the document as self-consciously arranged for a future audience. In an effort to challenge the traditional way in which the relationship between performance art and its documentation is perceived, he initially distinguishes two categories of artifacts, “the documentary and the theatrical” (1). The documentary type is based on the premise that “documentation of the performance event provides both a record of it through which it can be reconstructed . . . and evidence that it actually occurred” (1). Historians and scholars tend to assume that the event” is staged primarily for an immediately present audience,” whereas the document” is a secondary, supplementary record of an event that has its own prior integrity” (4). By contrast, the theatrical type refers to performances such as Cindy Sherman’s photos of herself in various guises: acts that “were staged solely to be photographed or filmed and had no meaningful prior existence as autonomous events presented to audiences” (5). In these theatrical cases, “The space of the document (whether visual or audiovisual) is the only space in which the performance occurs” (2, emphasis added). Auslander’s radical goal is to extend this internal performativity to the documentary class of documents, as well. Drawing on J.L. Austin’s theory of speech acts, he posits that such artifacts “are not analogous to constatives, but to performatives: in other words, the act of documenting an event as a performance is what constitutes it as such” (5).

     

    Figure 1: Marina Abramovic performing performing Vito Acconci’s Seedbed (1972)
    at the Solomon R. Guggenheim Museum on November 10, 2005.

    Photograph by Kathryn Carr.
    © The Solomon R. Guggenheim Foundation, New York.

     

    The documentary is, of course, the category concerning both Phelan and Abramovic. While Phelan says that the documentation of live actions is “only a spur to memory” (146), Auslander and Abramovic reject this accepted view, albeit in distinct ways. On the one hand, Auslander refuses to treat the document as an “indexical access point to a past event” (9). He argues that many early performers (especially Acconci) stage actions “to be documented at least as much as to be seen by an audience” (3). In short, it is only through self-conscious, selective, and forward-looking acts of documentation that events such as Chris Burden’s Shoot (1971) become available as performances for future audiences. The reason we recognize them today as performance art is that they exist as documents: “In that sense, it is not the initial presence of an audience that makes an event a work of performance art: it is its framing as performance through the performative act of documenting it as such” (7).

     

    Conversely, Abramovic embraces the documents of Acconci’s Seedbed as entry points into the past. Nevertheless, she departs from the standard belief that such artifacts are inferior to the inter-subjective exchanges that take place between a performer and their initial audience. Her willingness to put herself in Acconci’s place anticipates Auslander’s hypothesis: “Perhaps the authenticity of the performance document resides in its relationship to its beholder rather than to an ostensibly originary event” (9). Yet even as her aim to “re-perform the score” hinges on the copy, and not on any ontological privileging of the live, she ultimately unsettles Auslander’s conclusion about where the affective force of performance resides. According to him, “our sense of the presence, power, and authenticity” of these classic works comes from “perceiving the document itself as a performance that directly reflects an artist’s aesthetic project or sensibility and for which we are the present audience” (9). Meanwhile, Abramovic dislodges the issues of presence, power, and authenticity from the static archive, and relocates them to the volatile site of her female body. Her embodied perception is, in fact, the medium and mediation through which a present audience translates Acconci’s aesthetic project and sensibility.

     

    So can it be done? Apart from the philosophical tensions involved in videotaping one’s present tense repetitions of the so-called inimitable past–thus doubly embracing the reproductive economies that performance allegedly eschews–Seven Easy Pieces raises some daunting methodological concerns. For one thing, how does a female performer “pull off” a male performer’s endurance piece about masturbation? In Seedbed, a legendary fusion of performance and sculpture, Vito Acconci lay hidden under a wooden ramp installed at the Sonnabend Gallery. He masturbated eight hours a day, three times a week, all the while vocalizing his fantasies about the visitors walking above him. He spoke to those who entered the gallery as if they were lovers, imagining his sexual relations to them. Audiences could not actually see Acconci masturbating; nor could he see them. Nevertheless, they could hear him becoming aroused as he addressed them through a microphone, murmuring things like, “You’re pushing your cunt down on my mouth,” or “You’re ramming your cock down into my ass” (Saltz 2004). A loudspeaker situated on top of the ramp projected his words and sounds. In “Learning from Seedbed,” Brandon LaBelle argues that this ramp created “a hidden space, embedded in the gallery as an anomaly, and yet acting as an ‘amplifier’ for the desires of an individual body seeking its social partner” (2006).

     

    Acconci’s larger goal was to involve the public in the work’s production by establishing an “intimate” connection with visitors. He followed the footsteps of those who traversed the space, encouraging patrons to view their audible movements as part of an amorous exchange: “I am doing this with you now . . . I’m touching your hair . . . I’m running my hand down your back . . . I’m touching your ass” (Kirshner 17). Whether or not he succeeded in creating a mood of reciprocity is highly debatable. British critic Jonathan Jones depicts Seedbed as “an aggressive, alienated act,” arguing that its “social and aesthetic disjuncture goes to the heart of 1970s America” (2002). Indeed, even Acconci recalls feeling disturbed after putting himself in the place of several audience members who lingered outside the gallery after his performances, wordlessly staring at him: “What can you possibly say to a masturbator?” (Bear 94). Some people (including the artist) found the piece unsettling and even hostile. Inviting strangers to share one’s innermost fantasies in public was, indeed, a radical act that also marked an era of sexual freedom. Acconci’s goal of covering a conventional gallery with semen was even more audacious from a sociopolitical perspective.

     

    But why would Abramovic revive Seedbed in 2005, now that both public intimacy and transgressions of art space decorum seem fairly passé? Today’s strangers forge connections with the click of a mouse, becoming “intimate” in a mind-blowing spectrum of ways. Many artists (including Ron Athey, Karen Finley, and Chris Ofili) have since smeared bodily fluids across the cultured venues of America. How does a female performer position herself in relation to various forms of visceral transgression that have “come” before her own? Indeed, the very title of Acconci’s seminal project suggests the obstacles facing a woman who seeks to re-perform his score. Can we still call it Seedbed if a trail of “seed” does not remain on the gallery’s floor “bed?” The question of what else one might dub Abramovic’s rendition remains elusive, since women’s sexual emissions are not typically recognized as substantial. Years before she began rebuilding this piece, the artist explained her fascination with it during an interview with Janet A. Kaplan. “What’s interesting about masturbation is that you are producing something. There is a product. But what does a woman produce in masturbating?” (7).

     

    Though known for pushing the limits of physical potential, Abramovic did not re-perform Seedbed “as if” she were a man. For Acconci, the act of releasing semen was not only symbolic proof of his imagined union with viewers, but also the literal fruit of his labor: “I masturbate; I have to continue doing it the whole day–to cover the floor with sperm, to seed the floor” (Diacono 168).[2] By contrast, Abramovic seemed less concerned with performing productivity; hours often passed between her ostensibly traceless orgasms. She did, however, engage with Acconci’s focus on output in terms of gender. What types of seedy and/or verdant results might a woman provoke by playing with herself inside the highbrow Guggenheim? What sorts of interpersonal exchanges could her acts of self-stimulation yield?

     

    The question of historical accuracy thus became central to my experience of Abramovic’s Seedbed. Mindful of the artist’s stated intent to interpret the traces of past performances as a musical score, I soon noted stark deviations that led me to ask if this plan was not fraught with institutional obstacles beyond her control. In what did the project’s authenticity lie if the scene of her reenactment looked nothing like existing photographs of Acconci’s original? Upon closer scrutiny, however, I began to perceive Abramovic’s visual departures as tactical, as deftly designed to expand an audience’s sense of what it means for a female performer to inhabit faithfully an overtly masculine opus. I now turn to analyze the multiple levels on which she transgressed–and fruitfully transformed–the aesthetic and sociopolitical arrangements found in surviving accounts of Acconci’s embodied composition.

     

    First, there is the element of space. Even as the dimensions of Acconci’s installation were the same ones Abramovic used (22 feet wide, 16 feet long, and 2 feet high), his Seedbed took place within a carefully confined perimeter. The ramp that at once concealed his body and revealed his performed desires was sharply angled, obliging visitors to move above him on a slant. He later acknowledged that this sculptural element placed him in a position of psychological dominance, even as he was literally below his spectators: “Already with Seedbed, I was part of the floor; a viewer who entered that room stepped into my power field–they came into my house” (Bomb 1991). Although he’d claimed he’d intended the piece to enact mutuality, in an ironic twist Acconci produced the opposite effect instead, assuming the role of a patriarchal homeowner who lays down the foundational rules for his guests to follow.

     

    Meanwhile, with its domed ceiling and spiraling ramps, the Guggenheim’s towering rotunda feels strangely cathedral-like. Russian Orthodox icons lining the walls add to its formal solemnity, and spectators poised on several levels foster a mood of surveillance. Many viewers take notes, pointing or staring at others below. This panoptical structure diffuses the flow of power more than the structure Acconci described did. His house had only one host, but the Guggenheim’s public nature allows multiple sets of eyes to roam over and to possess one’s body. In contrast to Acconci’s semi-erect slope, Abramovic’s architectural intervention is level with the floor; its gently raised surface seems unobtrusive, even “feminine” somehow. If one didn’t know that this subtle inner ring comprises the structural heart of Seedbed, one could easily overlook it.

     

    The work is also occupied with sound. Apart from a single loudspeaker, there were no visual distractions in the Sonnabend Gallery during Acconci’s masturbation, obliging viewers to focus on the male artist’s sonorous voice. Meanwhile, I barely reach the third tier of ramps when I can no longer hear Abramovic. The massive rotunda, coupled with the din caused by patrons, easily drowns her out. Surprised by this contrast between what the archive describes as the primacy of Acconci’s audible presence and the muted nature of Abramovic’s self-assertions, I join the line to access her interior. It is only then that I realize the extent to which her hushed intonations fashion the give-and-take bond that Acconci sought to achieve. There are, in effect, two performances going on here. One performance absorbs Abramovic into the museum’s rubric of display, allowing us to view her installation as one of many exhibits–no more and no less interesting. By contrast, a second performance subtly commands our attention, obliging us to move closer and to listen more carefully. Without forcing herself upon us, her whispers invite us to intuit privately what we cannot grasp within the clamorous public caverns of the Guggenheim. In this sense, Abramovic enacts the paradoxical both/and position that Auslander disallows. Where he insists that the “pleasures available from the documentation . . . do not depend on whether an audience witnessed the original event” (9), her Seedbed effectively generates two sets of pleasures, and two performances. One performance relies on conventional documents. Through select photos, videos, and audiotapes of this show it will attain symbolic status in the cultural domain; this is the framed performance that future spectators will know. The second performance is her unruly engagement with Acconci’s original, and the subversive ways in which her use of his documentation deflects–as opposed to “directly reflects” (Auslander 9)–his aesthetic project and sensibility. While it might not require “being there,” the palimpsest of pleasures that emerges from her simultaneous recital and revision of Acconci’s musical score does require a different mode of transmission than the ones Auslander privileges: the visual and audiovisual.

     

    Figure 2: Marina Abramovic performing performing Vito Acconci’s Seedbed (1972)
    at the Solomon R. Guggenheim Museum on November 10, 2005.

    Photograph by Kathryn Carr.
    © The Solomon R. Guggenheim Foundation, New York.

     

    At six p.m., I finally reach the base of Abramovic’s inner circle. A security guard lets people in one by one, as others depart. Even here, there is mediation. Not unlike Acconci’s ramp, which became a fellow performer in his piece, the Guggenheim takes on an authoritarian role in Abramovic’s reenactment. As a result, her personal architecture becomes something of a sanctuary, whereas Acconci’s left no place to hide. Inside her inner circle, I’m struck by how bright it feels under the spotlights, how warm it seems in the presence of Marina’s luxuriant voice: “I don’t want to ask your name, or who you are, or what you want. I recognize you have the same heat, the same desire.” Under normal circumstances, such dialogue sounds patently false. Inside her circle, however, it seems specific and sincere. For the first time that evening, I sit down, allowing the forceful vibrations of Marina’s syllables to enter my body. She abruptly asks, “Where are the steps? I need to hear steps.” Several people stomp or tap their heels. “I’m coming,” she replies, “just for you.”

     

    Though Abramovic fantasizes about sucking cock, it’s oddly unproblematic to imagine that she’s coming just for me. Later, I will overhear two young men express disappointment in the content of her fantasies. One says, “They’re fairly feminized in a fairly stereotypical, heteronormative way.” The other agrees; “Has she made love to a woman yet?” In the moment, however, I am unconcerned with whether or not she obeys these perfunctory calls for “diversity.” “I’m going to come,” Marina promises, “I need you to tap on the tip of my pussy. Yes, faster, faster.” The next sound I hear is a pleasurable howl, “Ohww! Ohwwww!” Clichés about women as animals enter my mind, yet Marina’s orgasm paradoxically disarms my self-consciousness. All around me, people smile and seem happy for her. Next is the hollow sound of rattling. We chuckle, astonished to realize it’s a toilet flushing. She tells us she always has to pee after coming, and resumes masturbating.

     

    The circle seems a space of true reciprocity. Abramovic is not antagonistic towards audiences, as certain viewers accuse Acconci of having been. Although Acconci implicated spectators in his performance, he described their contributions as passive: “I use the viewers as an aid, I build up sexual fantasies on viewers’ footsteps” (Kirshner 17). Abramovic takes a different approach, insisting that our footsteps are not enough; we must actively immerse ourselves in shaping our contact with her: “Close your eyes and keep them closed. Forget you’re at the museum. Don’t be afraid. Don’t be ashamed. Give to me all that you desire.” I set down my notepad, devoting myself to her carnal imaginings. In doing so, I have no sense of being used or coerced; my efforts are wholly voluntary, and surprisingly pleasurable. Ironically, though, the Guggenheim’s institutional arm subverts Marina’s hypnotic voice. Just as she invites us to “Let time stop,” a guard steps in and informs us that our time is up: time for the next twenty people to have their turn. Will Abramovic (or anyone else) notice our expulsion in the footage provided by the museum professionals who document the event? What will she (and future audiences) think? In the space of the document, our exile is likely illegible; in the space of the live event, however, it feels like a temporary betrayal of her aesthetic project and sensibility.

     

    The museum’s insistence on protecting the artist censors other facets of peoples’ interaction with her. Contingency is constantly kept at bay, even though unforeseen risks were vital to early performance art. At one point, a man starts vigorously rubbing his groin against the edges of the inner circle. As Marina climaxes yet again, he drops to the ground on all fours and luridly yells, “Does that excite you?” Security immediately rushes in, commanding him to leave. What’s uplifting is how onlookers protest this encroachment: “You don’t understand the performance!” “Are there rules against making noise?” Eventually, the guards relent: the unruly man is permitted to stay. We’ve won our little victory against the sanitized machine.

     

    Throughout the performance, Abramovic ponders her role as a woman, an artist, and an embodied translator: “Vito said he produced semen when he did his Seedbed back in the 1970s. But what do I produce? I produce moist [sic] and heat under you that your semen can just drop on.” Her repetition unsettles performance scholarship’s overly simple equations between vision, reproduction, and commodity. For Phelan, the notion that a live event can be recorded diminishes its psychic and political agency: “Without a copy, live performance plunges into visibility . . . and disappears into memory, into the realm of invisibility and unconsciousness where it eludes regulation and control” (148). Yet despite the volumes of film and audiotape preserving Abramovic’s adaptation, what I will remember is precisely what cannot be captured: the visceral exhilaration I felt as Marina came. And while the forces through which Seedbed fulfilled me cannot be archived or seen, they might indeed be “copied” and passed on to others in politically meaningful ways. We, too, can give seemingly faceless strangers our time, forging relations of caring attention through our erotic and intellectual curiosity.

     

    Many people might stigmatize Seedbed as a self-indulgent and colonizing act, or claim that its architecture permits a hidden manipulator to live out fantasies at unseen others’ expense. Abramovic acknowledges this predominant vision and reworks it. Her rendition makes it hard to imagine violating those about whom we fantasize. If we allow ourselves to masturbate about those “others” whom our culture instructs us to hate, can we engender tender interest and cautious desire in place of suspicion and rage? This may be a valuable risk to take in our violent age.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Abramovic made this remark about the rules of early performance art at “(Re)Presenting Performance” [Symposium], Solomon R. Guggenheim Museum, New York, 8 April 2005.

     

    2. Diacono provides an Italian transcription of what Acconci said and did during Seedbed. Kinga Araya, an Italian-Canadian scholar, translated Diacono’s text into English for the purpose of this publication.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Auslander, Philip. “The Performativity of Performance Documentation.” PAJ 84 (2006): 1-10. http://muse.jhu.edu/journals/performing_arts_journal/toc/paj28.3.html
    • Bear, Liza. “Excerpts from Tapes with Liza Bear: The Avalanche Interview 1972.” Vito Acconci. Eds. Frazer Ward, Mark C. Taylor and Jennifer Bloomer. London: Phaidon, 2002. 94-99.
    • Diacono, Mario. Vito Acconci: Del Testo-Azione Al Corpo Come Testo. New York: Out of London Press: A. H. Minters, 1975. 168.
    • Jones, Jonathan. “See Through, Vito Acconci (1969).” The Guardian: 23 Nov. 2002. <http://arts.guardian.co.uk/portrait/story/0,,845513,00.html>. 27 Aug. 2006.
    • Kirshner, Judith Russi. Vito Acconci: A Retrospective, 1969 to 1980: An Exhibition Organized by the Museum of Contemporary Art, Chicago, Mar 21-May 18, 1980. Chicago: Museum of Contemporary Art, 1980.
    • LaBelle, Brandon. “Learning from Seedbed.” <http://www.errantbodies.org/standard.html>. 12 Aug. 2006.
    • Phelan, Peggy. “The Ontology of Performance.” Unmarked: The Politics of Performance. London: Routledge, 1993. 146-66.
    • Prince, Richard. “Vito Acconci: Interview with Richard Prince.” Bomb 36 (Summer 1991).
    • Saltz, Jerry. “Vito de Milo.” Artnet.com 2004. <http://www.artnet.com/Magazine/features/jsaltz/saltz4-28-04.as>. 25 Aug. 2006.
    • “Seven Easy Pieces: November 9-15, 2005, 5 PM-12 AM.” Guggenheim Guide: Exhibitions/Programs, September 2005-January 2006. New York: Guggenheim Museum: 9.

     

  • After the Author, After Hiroshima

    Bill Freind

    Department of English
    Rowan University
    freind@rowan.edu

     

    Review of: Araki Yasusada’s Also, With My Throat, I Shall Swallow Ten Thousand Swords: Araki Yasusada’s Letters In English.Eds. Kent Johnson and Javier Alvarez. Cumberland, RI: Combo, 2005.

     

    While Foucault imagines a time in which questions of the “authenticity” and “originality” of the author would become irrelevant (138), and while Barthes famously concludes that “the birth of the reader must be ransomed by the death of the Author,” “the author” still plays a great role in our modes of reading. Until the early twentieth century, writers routinely published anonymous or pseudonymous works, and the reading public showed little reluctance in purchasing a text whose author remained unknown. In contrast, contemporary writers and readers have demonstrated little inclination to do away with the author function in the text. The journal Unnatural Acts, co-edited by Ed Friedman and Bernadette Mayer in the early 1970s, provides an instructive example. Work for the first issue was composed in Mayer’s first workshop at the Poetry Project at St. Mark’s in New York City and Friedman offers the following explanation of the method:

     

    we decided to have everyone in the workshop writing in the same place for an extended time period. Everyone anonymously contributed a piece of writing, which someone else in the group used as the basis for composing a new work. The “originals” were then discarded and the afternoon proceeded with everyone continuing to write works inspired by the reworkings of reworkings of reworkings. (Kane 199)

     

    Because the work was collaboratively produced, none of the writers was credited with the authorship of a specific piece. Yet by the second issue many writers resisted this lack of attribution. Mayer notes that

     

    it was hard to get people to do it [i.e., publish without attribution], because they didn’t want to lose their identity. Someone came up to me. . . and said to me “Is anyone going to know what part I wrote?” I said, “No, I don’t think so.” This was a big problem for this writer. (Kane 200-01)

     

    Even authors whose techniques actively undermine the authority of the writer, such as William S. Burroughs with the cut-up method he borrowed from Brion Gysin, and Kathy Acker with her piracies and appropriations, earned a degree of fame that was more than a little ironic. For the foreseeable future, Barthes’s and Foucault’s meditations on the irrelevance of the author represent a distant horizon or perhaps even an unattainable ideal of a mode of reading in which the text is freed from the potentially limiting function of the author.

     

    The case of Araki Yasusada provides one strategy for getting beyond the authorial. Yasusada was born in Kyoto in 1907 and moved with his family to Hiroshima in 1921. After studying Western Literature at Hiroshima University, he became involved with Soun, or Layered Clouds, an avant-garde haiku group. In 1936 he was conscripted into the Japanese army and served as a clerk in the Military Postal Service during the Second World War. Yasusada was stationed in Hiroshima and his wife Nomura and daughter Chieko were both killed in the atomic bombing; his daughter Akiko succumbed to the effects of radiation sickness less than four years later. Yasusada himself died of cancer in 1972 and after his death his son discovered manuscripts that in the early 1990s were published in translation in journals in North America and Europe.

     

    Yasusada would almost certainly have earned posthumous fame–except that he never existed. Shortly after the poems began to garner widespread praise, some readers began to notice holes in his putative biography, many of which were chronicled by Marjorie Perloff. For instance, Hiroshima University wasn’t established until 1949 and “Western literature” was never a course of study. Yasusada reads Roland Barthes’s Empire of Signs in 1967, five years before it was published; with the Soun group, he studies the poetry of Paul Celan in the 1930s although Celan’s first book was published in 1952, and in German, which Yasusada did not read. So if Yasusada never existed, who wrote the work? Suspicions fell on Kent Johnson, a poet and translator who acted as intermediary in the publication of the poems (and who holds the copyright on them). Johnson denied authorship, claiming the work’s actual creator was Tosa Motokiyu, who had been listed as one of the translators; however, Johnson added that Motokiyu was the pseudonym of an unnamed writer who was now deceased: a kind of literal death of the author, if Motokiyu had in fact been “real.” Many people who had praised Yasusada’s work now denounced it as a hoax. Arthur Vogelsang, editor of American Poetry Review, claimed that Yasusada’s work was “essentially a criminal act” (qtd. in Nussbaum 82). Others still supported the work and in 1997 Roof Books published Doubled Flowering: From the Notebooks of Araki Yasusada. Doubled Flowering clearly demonstrates that Yasusada could not be dismissed as a mere hoax: in addition to the striking emotional range of the poems, which move between poignant meditations on the deaths of his wife and daughter, to fragments that show the influence of European and North American avant-gardes, to shopping lists and Zen exercises, the questions the text raises about the continuing role of the author even after his or her ostensible death are so pointed that Yasusada is obviously more than a prank.

     

    For his part, Johnson became a tireless promoter of Yasusada’s work, suggesting that Araki Yasusada is a “heteronym” along the lines of those created by the Portuguese poet Fernando Pessoa (1888-1935). Pessoa, who developed at least seventy-two heteronyms, each of which had a distinctive style, insisted they were not merely aesthetic masks for aspects of his own personality. Instead, he claimed they

     

    should be considered as distinct from their author. Each one forms a drama of sorts; and together they form another drama . . . . The works of these three poets constitute a dramatic ensemble, with careful attention having been paid to their intellectual and personal interaction . . . . It is a drama in people instead of in acts. (3)

     

    For a number of reasons, this works as an especially good description of the ways in which Also, With My Throat, I Shall Swallow Ten Thousand Swords operates. The text is supposed to be a collection of letters written by Yasusada in English to a mysterious correspondent named Richard, but in part it focuses on Tosa Motokiyu. In Doubled Flowering, the poems, letters and drafts are so rich that it is almost possible to “believe” in Yasusada in the way we believe in a character in a film or play, but the notes in Also, With My Throatmake that more difficult, if not impossible. Almost every letter features end notes from Motokiyu, in which Motokiyu enacts (or simulates) his role as editor. However, most letters include an additional set of notes written by Kent Johnson and (ostensibly, at least) Javier Alvarez, Johnson’s shadowy and perhaps non-existent co-editor. This second set of notes frequently comments on Motokiyu’s. For instance, a letter dated 7 May 1926 reads:

     

    Dear Richard,

    What was there before your birth?

    What was there after your death?

    Who or what is it, at this moment, that is reading?

    How can we have the apricot blossoms perfuming the whole world?

    I am sincere,

    Araki Yasusada (Motokiyu 5)

     

    Motokiyu’s note on this letter reads: “in our opinion, as editors and translators, this is the most mysterious and beautiful of all the letters” (5). The first person plural indicates that Motokiyu is speaking with his fictional co-editors, Ojiu Norinaga and Okura Kyojin, but is he himself fictive? To Motokiyu’s note, Kent Johnson and Javier Alvarez respond: “as the editors of the ‘editors,’ we don’t necessarily concur, but that would be, of course, neither here nor there” (5). Their note amounts to a kind of passive-aggressive pulling of rank: Johnson and Alvarez don’t explicitly contradict Motokiyu, et al., but as “editor of the editors” they reserve the right to do so. At the same time, some of the notes apparently don’t have a reference (e.g., note 1 on page 32 and note 6 on page 33). The notes both emphasize and denigrate the roles of the various authors. Far from enacting their deaths, Also, With My Throat offers a proliferation of heteronymic authors and editors in a sort of drama that simultaneously highlights and undermines the different forms of authority that occur in an edited collection of poetry. Furthermore, the “ten thousand swords” in the book’s title echo the daggers that sometimes indicate footnotes. These notes become a way of cutting gaps into the text, slicing spaces within both the notes and letters through which the readers can become producers of meaning along with the authors and editors, even if those authors and editors are fictive.

     

    Perhaps the most striking aspect of Also, With My Throat is its use of a non-standard and halting English that is both disorienting and often strangely beautiful. The language doesn’t resemble anything a non-native speaker might write; instead, it seems to intentionally avoid “yellowface” in favor of a richly fractured syntax in which the infelicities are strikingly felicitous:

     

    Are you that man in an ocean’s center whom is screaming there is no water? Right or wrong, you must swim, even if swimming is not. Are you that man whom is holding a pipe in smokeness so dreamy? Right or wrong, stripped bare of its pipeness, even, you must smoke, even if smoking is not. More or less, Dogen Zenji said so. But my grammar makes the lover’s eyes fall out. (12)

     

    In spite of the reference to Dogen Zenji (whom a footnote identifies as the founder of a sect, Soto Zen) the section seems less a Buddhist meditation than a tapestry of western sources. The man “screaming there is no water” seems to rework the famous line from Coleridge’s “The Rime of the Ancient Mariner”: “Water, water, every where,/ nor any drop to drink.” The reference to the pipe echoes René Magritte’s “Ceci n’est pas une pipe.”[1] While Magritte’s painting emphasizes the essential division between the painting and what it purports to depict, Yasusada’s letter is more nuanced: Yasusada both is and is not “real,” since Yasusada-as-heteronym remains as actual as any literary character. The note from Motokiyu states that the last line is from Dogen’s Mountains and Waters Sutra; in fact, as Johnson and Alvarez indicate in their own note, it is from the poet Jack Spicer’s 1965 lectures in Vancouver.[2] The text first presents an all-too-familiar stereotype of Japan as a mystical other, then undermines that stereotype by revealing that the source of this “Eastern” wisdom is actually American. The pastiche of sources in Yasusada explicitly works against any n otion of authenticity; as Yasusada says in Doubled Flowering “I believe, very frankly, that all writing is quite already passed through the voices or styles of many others” (77).

     

    Also, With My Throat performs a similar move in a letter that appears to be a haibun, a series of haiku with interspersed prose sections. One section reads:

     

    (One night, in the prefecture of Kanda, I urined [sic] into some flowers of peony. The wind came and took my urination in a small spray to my geisha beside me. “I liked it,” said she. Thus I shivered and looked at the luminous moon.) (14)

     

    This passage borders on parody: the passive geisha who enjoys being urinated on, the peonies, the moon, and the prefecture all seem to endorse aesthetic, racial, and misogynist stereotypes of Japan. Those elements are given further weight when in a note Motokiyu claims that “This is truly a beautiful passage,” and when in a note to that note Johnson and Alvarez add, “Indeed it is” (14). However, Johnson and Alvarez also indicate that the image is in fact lifted from the American poet Jack Gilbert. The title of the poem (which they don’t specify) is “Textures”:

     

    We had walked three miles through the night
    When I had to piss. She stopped just beyond.
    I aimed at the stone wall of a vineyard,
    But the wind took it and she made a sound.
    I apologized. “It’s all right,” she said out
    Of the dark, her voice different. “I liked it.” (Gilbert 88)

     

    The fact that the image of the geisha comes from an Anglo-American poet helps to undermine the poem’s orientalisms, although not completely. Yasusada’s poem seems intentionally awkward, as if the stilted language were supposed to highlight the absurdity of the images. (One can also see a crude pun in the word “peony,” which further deflates the passage.) Still, the deflation of racist stereotypes does not negate the fact that they are presented in the first place. That’s one of the reasons that reading Yasusada’s work is fundamentally disturbing: the texts never offer anything like a moral or ethical position from which to examine these prominent questions of race, gender, and history.

     

    As the passage cited indicates, a pronounced and complex sexuality marks many of the letters. For instance, in one undated letter, Yasusada writes “Are these bodies in some letters? Are these two tongues touching in some orchard? Who is it speaking in the dirty-talking?” (10). The first question is curious: because the text distributes authority among so many authors and editors, the letters often seem oddly incorporeal, as if they are voices (or language) without a body. Even the sexual images in this passage are disembodied: the poem mentions tongues and a “vagina-organ” but we don’t know whose, nor who is doing the “dirty-talking.” In contrast to this dismembering, a few important sections in Also, With My Throat go to the opposite extreme and offers masses of undifferentiated bodies. In the first letter Yasusada tells Richard about his girlfriend, or at least a woman he desires: “her sexual hair is a whole forest, smelling after rain falling. It is very dark within there. Bodies in piles are burning” (3). While the metaphor of sexual desire as flame is familiar, in the work of a poet who is writing in Hiroshima it inevitably evokes the atomic bomb that was dropped on that city. Lines that appear to refer to the bombing are much more common in this volume than in Doubled Flowering, in spite of the fact that these letters ostensibly date from the mid-1920s. The text seems to suggest that for Yasusada, and for his readers, there can be no “before-the-bomb.” The reason for that might be implied in a question Yasusada asks Richard: “Would you like some Hiroshima?” Because we’re reading the letters, that’s a rhetorical question, and it implicitly highlights the voyeuristic fascination with the suffering of others available in Yasusada’s work. Also, With My Throat both indulges that fascination and calls it into question: those sexualized bodies are “burning” in “piles.” This is a kind of self-conscious pornography of violence, and as readers we often catch ourselves looking.

     

    The Yasusada project implicitly acknowledges that the author function remains central to our modes of reading. Also, With My Throat offers a proliferation of authors and editors, but they remain fundamentally unstable. Yasusada is obviously an invention, but is Tosa Motokiyu or Javier Alvarez? Is the “Kent Johnson” who serves as editor the same as the biological entity known as Kent Johnson, or is he a persona, just as Fernando Pessoa had an orthonym known as “Fernando Pessoa?” Instead of limiting our readings, the writers in Also, With My Throat enlarge the range of meaning in the text: as a cross-national work that evokes and critiques authority, the stereotype, racism, and misogyny, the Yasusada project remains both timely and compelling.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Yasusada’s “What Is the Diffirince [sic]?” which was published in Doubled Flowering, also alludes to this painting: “Is a rose is a rose is a rose the same as Ceci n’est pas une pipe?” (90). Thus a one-line poem manages to link Magritte, Stein and (in the title), Derrida’s notion of difference, a web of allusions that echoes this particular letter to Richard.

     

    2. Spicer (1925-1965) is an obvious influence on the Yasusada project, especially his 1957 book After Lorca which claimed to be translations of poems written by Federico Garcia Lorca, as well as letters to the Spanish poet who had been dead for over twenty years when the volume was published. Nonetheless, the fact that “Lorca” wrote an introduction to the volume and that some of the translations are actually poems written by Spicer, indicates that in that text “Lorca” is a kind of heteronym to whom and through whom Spicer is speaking. Spicer is a major presence in Doubled Flowering: one poem by Yasusada and Akutagawa Fusei is called “Sentences for Jack Spicer Renga,” one of the final entries in Doubled Flowering is a letter from Yasusada to Spicer, and at the time of his death Yasusada was working on a volume entitled After Spicer.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Barthes, Roland. “The Death of the Author.” Trans. Richard Howard. Aspen 5-6 (Fall/Winter 1967): n.p.
    • Foucault, Michel. “What Is an Author?” Language, Counter-Memory, Practice. Ed. Donald F. Bouchard. Trans. Donald F. Bouchard and Sherry Simon. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1977.
    • Gilbert, Jack. Monolithos. New York: Knopf, 1982.
    • Kane, Daniel. All Poets Welcome: The Lower East Side Poetry Scene in the 1960s. Berkeley: U of California P, 2003.
    • Motokiyu, Tosa. Also, With My Throat, I Shall Swallow Ten Thousand Swords: Araki Yasusada’s Letters in English.
    • Nussbaum, Emily. “Turning Japanese: The Hiroshima Poetry Hoax.” Lingua Franca 6: 7.
    • Perloff, Marjorie. “In Search of the Authentic Other: The Araki Yasusada ‘Hoax’ and What It Reveals about the Politics of Poetic Identity.” Boston Review 22.2 (1997): 26-33.
    • Pessoa, Fernando. Selected Poems. Ed. and trans. Richard Zenith. New York: Grove, 1998.
    • Yasusada, Araki. Doubled Flowering: From the Notebooks of Araki Yasusada. New York: Roof, 1997.

     

  • The Past Is a Distant Colony | Explosions in the Sky

     

     

     

    Read an introduction to these videos written by Viet Thanh Nguyen.

     

    View Flash streaming video of The Past is a Distant Colony | Explosions in the Sky

     

    View Quicktime movie of Explosions in the Sky

     

    View Quicktime movie of The Past is a Distant Colony

     

    University of California, Irvine
    hongan.truong@gmail.com

     

  • Radical Indulgence: Excess, Addiction, and Female Desire

    Karen L. Kopelson

    Department of English
    University of Louisville
    karen.kopelson@louisville.edu

     

    What exactly is morally objectionable about excess?

     

    –Stuart Walton, Out of It

     

    By Way of (an Excessive) Introduction

     

    In the introduction to The Female Grotesque, Mary Russo writes that feminism has often “stood for and with the normal”; that in efforts not to alienate men (or other women) made uneasy by departures from “proper” femininity, feminists have made sure we do not make “spectacles” of ourselves, consistently offering “reassurances that feminists are ‘normal women’ and that our political aspirations are mainstream”–efforts that have resulted, in Russo’s view, in a “cultural and political disarticulation of feminism from the strange, the risky, the minoritarian, the excessive, the outlawed, and the alien” (12). Yet in the midst of these efforts, and sometimes as corrective responses to them, feminism has also undeniably linked itself with the alien and excessive. Indeed, the notion of “excess” has for some years now served as a productively disruptive trope for a variety of postmodern feminist theories working to counter and subvert dominant, masculinist logics. Both psychoanalytic and sexual-difference theories, for example, have made use of ideas of excess to release feminine desire from its supposed basis in “lack” and refigure it as fluid, abundant, overflowing, and diffuse. Alternatively, but to similar ends, these and other theories have reclaimed the prevalent cultural associations of female desire with excess–with a “formlessness that engulfs all form, a disorder that threatens all order” (Grosz 203)–to capitalize on the potent force of these longstanding associations. In other contexts, French feminist writers have posited excess as an insurgent characteristic of feminine language/writing, one that can derail phallogocentric, disciplinary expectations for discursive linearity and closure. Feminist discussions of body image as well, academic and activist alike, have for over two decades attempted to recuperate excess, in the forms of voluptuousness and largeness, as modes of what Susan Bordo and others have repeatedly called “embodied protest” against cultural demands that women at once contain their appetites and remain diminutively un-threatening to men. More recently, queer feminist theorists have appealed to excess, at least implicitly, in conversations that have sought to extricate sex from gender, sex and gender from sexuality, and to multiply all of the above beyond any notions of correspondence or of binary construction. In short, excess has become a postmodern feminist rescue-trope, if you will, with some of us even suggesting that excess can rescue feminism from itself–and not only in the sense that Russo describes, but from dualistic models of generational conflict, or, conversely, from demands for transgenerational “paradigmatic coherence,” both of which would prohibit non-identical feminist practices, and diverse theoretical assumptions (see Weigman).

     

    Yet a particular, and particularly derided, notion of excess that has not been as thoroughly redeployed to postmodern feminist ends is the excess of addiction and/or intoxication.1 I must note immediately that in making such a claim I hardly mean to suggest that the concept of “addiction” has not been thoroughly interrogated and problematized. Culturally dominant understandings of alcoholism, addiction, and drug use have been contradicted, and convincingly up-ended, from historical, sociological, anthropological, literary-critical, philosophical/ theoretical, and medical/scientific perspectives alike, and, as I show in this essay, feminist theorizing has played no small role in advancing this broadly interdisciplinary critique. However, while feminist critics have performed many counterintuitive, deconstructive readings of addiction–Melissa Pearl Friedling’s 2000 book, Recovering Women: Feminisms and the Representation of Addiction is exemplary here–these critiques usually stop just short of actually rehabilitating addiction, fearing, as Friedling puts it, that such a strategy potentially “insists on female suffering as the prerequisite for feminist agency” (3), or, at the least, risks re-establishing associations of femininity with passive receptivity and dependence. In short, feminist critics (and others) who have theorized the subject of addiction have often been wary, and justifiably so, of arguing for, or being perceived as arguing for, the “emancipatory possibilities in compulsive drug use” (Friedling 31; see also Keane, Ronell, and Derrida).

     

    Another boundary that feminist critiques of addiction have tended not to cross separates the figurative from the “real,” lived experiences of “excessive” drinking and drugging, and I mean this in two crucial senses. In one sense, and perhaps because of a reluctance to disregard the sometimes catastrophic results of drug use, we have tended to privilege analyses of media representations of the addicted subject, rather than analyses of the ontology of addiction (being on drugs). Friedling is careful to make this very distinction, saying in the introduction to her book: “Often the addict that I discuss only looks or acts like an addict.” Friedling is most often reading the “stylized acts of addiction” (the “heroin chic” look in fashion journalism, for example, as well as performances of addiction in music, film, and television), and says that “mistaking performance for ontology is an error” (13). However, in a second sense, we have retreated from the “real” of being addicted to or being on drugs not by studying addiction’s media representations, but by making addiction/drug use representative of something else–a pattern, we might note, that far precedes postmodern feminist examinations. At least since Heidegger, perhaps since Schelling (according to Heidegger), and even perhaps as far back as Plato, addiction–framed variously, depending on the cultural parlance of the day, as pharmakon, narcotica, toxicomania, intoxication, being-on-drugs–has served as what David L. Clark calls a “figure par excellence” (25); it has been made an allegory for (among other phenomena) myriad forms of consumption, for writing and literature, for cultural anxieties about the invasion and contagion of the “foreign” across permeable borders, for our relationship to time, for the fundamental structure of all desire, and even for the structure and experience of being itself.2 True to its own definitive traits, then, addiction seems to have produced and sustained in us the desire to figure it repetitively, compulsively, to the point that Clark suggests figurations of addiction are “complexly symptomatic” of our addiction to figurative language itself: “philosophical narratives about addiction,” Clark writes, “have a habit of becoming evocatively pharmaceutical,” of obeying–and remaining fixed within–the “logic of the supplement” (26, 10).

     

    I am not sure whether to read Clark’s statement as a true indictment of philosophical discourses on addiction, or as playful philosophizing, though I tend toward the latter as he announces in his essay’s introduction that his own analysis will “risk the hermeneutical equivalent of ‘narcoticizing,’” “planting drugs,” of “looking for contraband and finding it everywhere” (10). However, for the sake of my own argument, I take Clark literally, and posit as a flaw, or at least as a timid retreat-response, the tendency of discussions of addiction to get stuck in the figurative, to construct and deconstruct addiction as representative of something other than/supplemental to itself, or, alternatively, to examine performances of addicted subjectivity in film, literature, television, music, and a variety of other cultural texts. In this essay, therefore, I risk the hermeneutical counter-stance of analyzing the ontology of addiction itself (as it is embodied by the female subject), rather than making the ontology of addiction/intoxication metaphorical, and of interpreting the state of “being on drugs,” rather than “looking” or “acting” like one is on drugs.3 Specifically, I take the risk of rehabilitating addiction and/or “excessive” drinking/drug use as another form of women’s lived, embodied protest against patriarchal structures of containment. While I offer my own concessions that drug and alcohol use wreaks havoc in the lives of many, it is perhaps precisely because these lived, embodied practices are among the most derided, dangerous, and (often literally) “outlawed” manifestations of excessive female desire that their interpretation can be productively, seditiously mobilized to postmodern feminist ends. To argue for the emancipatory properties of addiction and drug use may indeed seem unreasonable, even impossible. “Reason,” however, is a hegemonic, masculinist logic par excellence, and the circumscription of possibility is what feminist deployments of excess have always aimed to transgress.4

     

    What Do We Hold Against The Drug Addict?

     

    What are the antecedents of this infuriated, unforgiving attitude to intoxication in others?

     

    –Stuart Walton

     

    As Alcoholics Anonymous and its many offspring make clear, any act of rehabilitation must start at the proverbial “rock bottom,” and so in order to rehabilitate addiction from a postmodern feminist perspective, we must begin by reviewing some of the primary bases for the addict’s abjection more generally. In his interview, “The Rhetoric of Drugs,” Jacques Derrida answers his own, now famous question, “What do we hold against the drug addict?” by arguing that our discomfort arises because “his is a pleasure taken in an experience without truth.” The search for pleasure is not itself always socially condemned, Derrida clarifies, but we condemn the drug addict’s pleasure because it is obtained by escapist, artificial, inauthentic means removed from “objective reality.” The question of drugs, Derrida says, is thereby one and the same with “the grand question–of truth. Neither more nor less” (7-8). But the question of drugs is related to another grand question, which Derrida also acknowledges: the question of citizenship and social responsibility. And here we condemn the drug addict, Derrida continues, because he “cuts himself off from the world,” because we perceive his pleasure as “solitary and desocializing” (7, 19). Jeffrey Nealon, in “‘Junk’ and the Other: Burroughs and Levinas on Drugs,” similarly concludes that we hate the drug addict because of his “attempt to withdraw from contact with and responsibility for the other,” because he “is inexorably and completely for himself” (56, 62): “junkies want to be inside,” Nealon writes; “they want the pure, interior subjectivity of the drug stupor” (54). Or, as Levinas himself dramatically put it, “the relaxation in intoxication is a semblance of distance and irresponsibility. It is a suppression of fraternity, or a murder of the brother” (qtd in Nealon 56).

     

    Many of the critics who have disrupted dominant views of addiction would remind us, however, that intoxication is not inherently desocializing, or inherently “stupefying.” Far from it, many intoxicants facilitate social connection, and lend considerable conviviality to social engagement, while others actually accelerate productivity. As Stuart Walton writes in his cultural history of intoxication, Out of It, a “working mother of the 1960’s, zipping through the ironing on prescription speed,” or the “superstar chef on cocaine,” immediately reveal the inadequacy of the “hazed out trance” to serve as the “paradigm state of ‘being on drugs,’” and so Walton asks “what sort of agenda is served by such a malevolent act of synthesis” (11). Answering his own question, Walton asserts that “to posit the existence of a single, compendious substance called ‘drugs,’” and to construct “drugs” as always “inimical to social functioning,” is to “get away with the fiction that taking them is an eccentric pursuit found only in a deviant, dysfunctional subculture” (11). In other words, the paradigm serves, as paradigms will, to squelch any differences that would disrupt the order of exclusion which produces and constrains normative, “authentic” subjects.

     

    Like Walton, I seek to call attention to these differences within the master-category of “being on drugs” primarily to call attention to the paradigm itself, and it is within and against this hegemonic, socially constructed (because necessary) paradigm that I perform my analysis. I do this not to squelch differences myself, but in order to reveal, from a feminist perspective, what sort of agenda is served by ignoring the zippy ironer (or today, the female superstar chef), by rendering the female drug user, in particular, a socially dysfunctional deviant.

     

    In Unbearable Weight: Feminism, Western Culture, and the Body, Bordo firmly established that the cultural need to control woman’s appetite for food is a symbolic crystallization of the need to police her appetites and desires more generally, in order to ensure that she “develop a totally other-oriented emotional economy.” “The rules for the construction of femininity,” Bordo writes, “require that women learn to feed others, not the self, and to construe any desires for self-nurturance and self-feeding as greedy and excessive” (171). Though Bordo never makes the connection between eating and drug use, the overlap is obvious: women’s drug use is a self-indulgence–verboten because it may take her away from her social and, especially, familial duties. In What’s Wrong with Addiction?, Helen Keane similarly reminds us that “normative femininity includes sociability and caring for others. Women who are obsessed with a solitary activity which they find more rewarding than family life are much more disturbing than men who neglect family and friends for the sake of a solitary pursuit, whatever those pursuits might be” (118). For women, it is hardly just clandestine drug use, but, as Keane says, any “desire for uninterrupted time alone” that is considered “pathological” (118), while for the male subject–as long as he is ultimately productive in the fraternal order–the withdrawal from family life is not only accepted as his rightful reward, but is even rewarded as his correct investment in the home. Clearly, as provider, the ideal family man must spend much time removed from the domestic space.

     

    However, when we remember that drug use is often not a solitary pursuit, that it is as often a communal activity as it is a withdrawal from community, we glimpse another way in which women’s drug use becomes an expression of female desire presented as inauthentic because dangerous to the social and familial order. While the hazed out, interiorized subjectivity of a drug stupor certainly constitutes woman’s improper removal from a domestic sphere that requires other-orientation, the other-orientation of much drug use itself becomes an improper sociality that similarly threatens to, and often literally does, take women away from familial space, and which must therefore be curtailed. A bit of transcontinental history here can serve to make the surveillance and punishment visited upon women for partaking in intoxicated public life most apparent: As both Walton and criminologist Mariana Valverde have documented, the Habitual Drunkards/Inebriates Acts instituted in Great Britain in the late nineteenth/early twentieth centuries were subject to much “gender specific enforcement,” and while many of the women put away under the acts (usually into Inebriates Asylums) were prostitutes, most were mothers charged with child neglect–charged, essentially, with the act of “enjoying themselves in pubs” and thereby causing “domestic chaos” (Valverde 52-53; also Walton 262). Several years later, and across the pond in Post-Repeal Massachusetts, women were officially barred from taverns altogether, and were forced to remain seated while drinking in other types of establishments where they were permitted entry (Valverde 157). In sum, women were punished by such legislation not for partaking of a desocializing, solitary pleasure, but for attempting to enjoy the male prerogatives of inhabiting public space, and for prioritizing sociality over domesticity. Through the threat of literal commitment (in the case of the Inebriates Acts), and through other more subtle but still effective forms of control, women’s commitment to, and confinement within, the private sphere was thus publicly enforced.

     

    U.S. society today has not overcome such expectations of women’s other-orientation in the domestic sphere, nor has it given up related denunciations of their inappropriate, because other-oriented, participation in the public sphere. Thus, if we think back to Walton once more, and revisit from a feminist perspective the question why the “hazed out trance” has become misrepresentatively representative of all drug use, it is possible to conclude that we must characterize the woman drug user as a deviant (non)subject removed from the reality of public life precisely because she is not sufficiently removed from it; we must present her search for pleasure as inauthentic and inimical to social functioning in order to keep her functioning properly. But the hazed out trance is not only non-paradigmatic of women’s (or anyone’s) drug use, it is the least of the woman drug user’s offenses. Society may claim–for the ideological reasons just mentioned–to hate the female drug addict for her self-containment and interiorized absorption, or for her determination to put her own desires first, whether that be socially or in private, but it hates her all the more for her resolute lack of self-containment in other, more obvious senses and incarnations of that term. Society has left the Inebriates Acts behind, but it is not beyond gender-specific discipline of public inebriation. Women must still be seated while drinking.

     

    Unruly Women

     

    “What the fuck am I doing here?” I mumble as the center of our attention, a big loud drunk woman, hops onto her dining room table with a Japanese Kitana sword, strips off her blouse and begins to gyrate to an old Van Halen tune . . . . “Nothing, I repeat, nothing, is worse than a woman who can’t handle her booze.”

     

    –Jim Marquez, “Girl Crazy”

     

    There is a phrase that still resonates from my childhood. Who says it? . . . “She is making a spectacle out of herself.”

     

    –Mary Russo, The Female Grotesque

     

    As Russo explains, “making a spectacle out of oneself” seems a “specifically feminine danger” (53); the phrase is almost singularly associated with women’s public transgressions of the rules surrounding femininity. While men may occasionally get bounced from the bar for bad behavior, the “big loud drunk woman” inevitably becomes an object of derision and disgust, and not only because she is associated with largeness, with taking up too much space, or, as Russo puts it, “step[ping] into the limelight out of turn” (53), but because she is (again significantly) associated with an inappropriate, because excessive, sexuality. When a drunk woman steps into the limelight, she clambers onto tables and rips off her clothes. She stumbles onto center-stage and acts like a slut.

     

    Though this essay hopes to move beyond analyses of stylized performances of addiction, I would like to take a particularly illustrative detour into an analysis of one such performance: that of rock star turned general icon of inappropriateness Courtney Love. In her Bad Subjects article, “Staging the Slut,” Kim Nicolini asks the Derridean question, “Why does the world love to hate Courtney?” and answers, “because she is a slut; because she’s totally fucked up; . . . because she’s totally out of control.” Nicolini remembers that audiences at typical (and still legendary) Hole performances of the 1990s were often seduced by Love’s apparent drunken/drugged accessibility and voracious sexuality, and yet repulsed by her sloppy, pornographic qualities, and repelled as well by the interplay of Love’s staged-slut persona with the band’s music: “equipped with electric guitar,” Nicolini writes, Love “denies her audience the satisfaction of a pure pornographic/erotic moment by disrupting its sexual pleasure with a bunch of ugly noise.” Nicolini sees this “slut/audience relationship” as a productive and positive dynamic, claiming that it unsettles audience members into confronting their expectations of a quiet and constrained female sexuality, and goes so far as to suggest that we may read Love, and other female performers like her, as “taking control of their bodies by losing control of their bodies.”

     

    This may seem like a generous, or at least a very optimistic reading. Performances are only actualized in their reception, after all, and Nicolini does acknowledge that her radicalizing interpretation of the Love-spectacle might not be shared by those “less conscious”–those who are more likely to ridicule and trivialize Love before she can even become (because she is about to become) unsettling. But the very need to ridicule and trivialize guitar-or-sword-brandishing women who make spectacles of themselves is a testament to their power, to what Kathleen Rowe calls their “vaguely demonic” threat to “the social and symbolic systems that would keep women in their place” (3). (Love has a lyric in which she calls herself “a walking study in demonology.”) What may be especially threatening about Love, moreover, is that she is not just performative spectacle; she does not just look or act like an addict, does not just look or act like a slut for that matter. Before she was a star, Love worked in the sex industry across the globe, and has for over a decade now had a very public, very troubled relationship with drugs and alcohol. With Love, though she is a cultural icon delivered to us via the media, we are nonetheless in the realm of the real and the lived, and she forces us to reckon with the unwelcome image/reality of a woman on drugs, a woman on, and often way past, the verge. Whether Love and other women who step into the limelight as drunken/drugged-out sluts are taking control by losing control, or are wholly beyond the horizon of intention, is not important. Rather the drunk/drugged, “addicted” female body, because it is equated with a confusing sexual excess at once inviting and repellant, and because it enacts the male prerogatives of occupying–or, we might say, spilling into–public space in forceful ways, disturbs several normative ideals of what is befitting gendered, sexual conduct for a woman. The drunken/drugged woman’s way of living and being in the world, intentional or not, read as radical or repulsive, becomes an embodied refusal of gender-specific enforcements around inebriated and other “indecorous” acts.

     

    Finally, and perhaps much more counterintuitively, the spectacle of women’s intoxication is potentially subversive not only of a femininity that would keep women in their place, but of a hegemonic masculinity as well. While men are permitted their public rowdiness in certain contexts, and while they are generally permitted more than women the indulgence of appetites of all kinds, they are also required in other contexts, particularly the civic or professional, to display cool self-discipline. For these reasons Bordo has suggested that anorexia (or thinness more generally) can be read not, or not only, as the absolute non-spectacle of women’s diminution and fragility, but, because of the intense self-discipline that anorexia entails, as an embodied cooptation of professionalizing “male virtues,” and that fatness, conversely, can be read as a “lack of discipline, unwillingness to conform, and absence of all those ‘managerial’ abilities that . . . confer upward mobility” (171-72, 195). I am arguing by extension, then, that women’s intoxication/addiction, even if it does take a more interiorized form, can be interpreted as–can enact–a similar unwillingness to be disciplined into the fraternal order.

     

    In The Use of Pleasure: The History of Sexuality, Volume 2, Michel Foucault describes in great detail the supreme “virility” that was associated with moderation and self-restraint in ancient Greece, and hence the centrality of these qualities to the constitution of the proper male subject. To properly “rule,” man had first to be ruler of his own passions, and to take his pleasures only in ways that were considered “right use.” When a man was immoderate, he was considered to be feminine: in a state of weakness, passivity, non-resistance, and submission. These mandates of masculinity, however, did not mean that women were not also expected to be moderate and self-restrained; rather, the ideal female subject–that is, the woman befitting of her self-mastering husband’s company–was expected to transcend her feminine nature and achieve a “domination over herself that was virile by definition.” Yet, even when a woman did attain this idealized because masculinized state, her virtues of self-mastery, according to Foucault, were not considered “ruling virtues,” as were the man’s; they were considered “serving virtues,” precisely because they made her a worthy wife (82-84). It is in the context of this simultaneous demand for virility in women and the denial of virility to women that we might discern what I see as the triple-threat wrought by the woman-on-drugs. One, she rejects what Bordo and Foucault both see as definitive male traits of self-control that have long served to confer masculine (and upper-middle-class) power and privilege. Two, in this refusal to master herself, the drugged/addicted woman refuses to be the servile, docile counterpart to the ruling, virtuous male; and three, to invoke my earlier discussion, in her (self)indulgence she casts off demands for masculine self-discipline and for feminine appetitive restraints that help ensure her other-orientation. Addiction is simply “wrong use.” It is only an “irrational being,” says Foucault of Plato’s views on moderation and excess, who would pursue the desire for pleasure beyond satiation (87).

     

    Irrational Desire, or, Women Who Love Too Much

     

    In the introduction to her memoir, Drinking: A Love Story, Caroline Knapp waxes eloquent about her past relationship with alcohol:

     

    A love story. Yes: this is a love story . . . . It’s about passion, sensual pleasure, deep pulls, lust, fear, yearning hungers . . . I loved the way drink made me feel . . . I loved the sounds of drink: the slide of a cork as it eased out of a wine bottle, the distinct glug-glug of booze pouring into a glass, the clatter of ice cubes in a tumbler. I loved the rituals, the camaraderie of drinking with others, the warming, melting feelings of ease and courage it gave me. (5-6)

     

    Such nostalgic descriptions are a common enough feature of addiction narratives: authors recount what was, and what now can never be, much as one remembers a romantic relationship before its ruin. But these descriptions are usually trumped by Reason. They are rewritten–or at least written over (as on a palimpsest) and thus obscured–by the addiction memoir’s inevitable turn to tales of despair, and while Knapp, too, ultimately hits her “rock bottom” and enters an equally glorious relationship with recovery, what distinguishes her story is that she lets this portion of her narrative stand, and even dominate; that even in the end she frames her “addiction,” as her book’s title suggests, as love and desire. If the question of drugs is one and the same with the grand question of Truth, as Derrida says, here we have a truth impermissible, and thus no truth at all. “In the modern definition of alcoholism,” George Levine writes in “The Discovery of Addiction,” “the problem is not that alcoholics love to get drunk, but that they cannot help it–they cannot control themselves. They may actually hate getting drunk, wishing only to drink moderately or socially.” Levine notes that in older views, however, that is, before the emergence in the mid-nineteenth century of the medicalized model of “addiction” as “disease,” and that model’s attendant understanding of the disease as marked by destructive compulsion, “drunkards” were perceived as driven not by a tormenting force they “truly” wanted to reject, or at least to control, but by the love for drink that Knapp expresses so well; by a “great affection”–a too great affection perhaps, but affection nonetheless–for the state of intoxication. The drunkard’s pursuit of intoxication was seen as the simple pursuit of happiness, the choice to pursue the object of his deepest desire, even if that choice was considered by some to be a bad one (Levine 4-5 of 16; see also Sedgwick).

     

    Today, however, the excessive drinker or drugger isnot only making bad object choices, she is also in a state of bad faith (Keane 79). The addict does not “really” want what she wants, and it is not just her desires and pleasures that are inauthentic but her whole way of being that is void of truth. She is an ontological error. Such a conception becomes most pragmatically apparent when we think of that most pivotal of moments in the addict’s life: the Intervention, the moment when the drug user is corralled by friends and family members, reasoned with, told in no uncertain terms that she is in “denial,” and then shipped off to treatment which will return her to reality and “recover” her authentic self. As Keane says of this process, “the addict and truth are being constructed in such a way that they cannot coincide. The discourse and structure of intervention produce the addict as a subject excluded from the truth, because the truth resides in the story of disease and loss of control.” Any other story, like the speech of Foucault’s madman, is considered “null and void, mere noise” (81-82).

     

    There have been theoretical accounts of the displacement of earlier understandings of drinking and drugging by a current model that inserts pathology into the place of pleasure, and dishonesty into the space of desire. For my purposes, the question is to what effects this newer model is mobilized against the female subject, and to what counter-effects one might revisit older, or simply different, conceptions of drug and alcohol use to rewrite the validity of women’s desire, and to continue to upset dominant structures that work to contain it. In response to these questions I will suggest that the woman who loves her drugs too much disturbs society–and does it so productively–because in this love she lays claim to a virility not hers for the taking, and because she needs nothing of man’s virility at all.

     

    While it is “true” that in many historical contexts excess (because understood as a weak-willed, irrational submission to desire) has been gendered feminine, there have been other, intervening historical moments characterized by quite different–and differently gendered–truths. For example, Valverde claims that at the time of the Inebriate Acts in Great Britain, when women were incarcerated for public intoxication and neglect of domestic duties, male inebriates, at least male inebriates of the upper classes, were often viewed positively because in possession of a hyper-masculinity. Though their pursuit of intoxication was considered excessive, that excess was seen to arise from the fact that these “gentlemen” “simply possess[ed] too much desire, too much virility”; men’s excessive drinking (in the U.S. of this time period as well) was seen “as rooted in an excess of masculine animal spirits.” Valverde concludes that though the association of excess, alcoholism, and addiction with femininity has come down to us as a “timeless truth,” it was only in the early 1940s that men’s drinking began “to be regarded as a symptom of dependence, of feminized weakness,” and that male drunkards were reconstituted as “a bunch of weak willed daydreamers of questionable virility” (92, 109).

     

    However, despite claims like Valverde’s that addiction is now thoroughly feminized, there is a sense in which, still today, the addict remains the masculine, too-virile subject associated with earlier epochs, for even though today’s addict is “diseased,” and thereby “powerless over alcohol,” the primary manifestation of this pathology is considered to be a focus on oneself bordering on egomania: a self-serving pursuit of what one wants (drugs/alcohol), without regard for others and at all costs–usually considered “masculine” traits (see Van Den Bergh). When we revisit the denial of virility to women described by Foucault, as well as the expectations for women’s other-orientation emphasized throughout this discussion, we can read women’s addiction as the forbidden cooptation of masculine attributes, and of masculine rights to self-privileging and self-indulgence. The female addict, rather than being redundantly feminized, is still in possession of too much selfish desire. She is too virile for her own–and certainly for the “greater”–good.

     

    In addition to its potential incursive affront to masculinity, there is another, definitive characteristic of addictive desire that makes the woman who loves her drugs too much particularly threatening. As Knapp’s account of her entrancement with drinking attests, addiction is indeed an all-consuming love; it is fiercely self-sufficient. Though I have argued against viewing intoxication as only interiorized absorption, to a certain extent it always is: intoxication, whether achieved with others or alone, needs nothing but itself to be, and it is the bodily “being” of intoxication, rather than the being with others, that the addict often seeks. Knapp can continue to serve as our exemplar here, when she describes her typical drinking outing:

     

    A drink or two at the Aku with work friends. Then dinner at a restaurant with someone else, three or four glasses of wine with a meal, perhaps a glass of brandy afterward. Then home, where the bottle of Cognac lurked beneath the counter, a bottle of white wine always stood in the refrigerator, cold and dewy and waiting. (25)

     

    Knapp’s fellow drinkers in this scenario are little more than props, the jovial “camaraderie with others” that she earlier mentioned alcohol facilitates secondary to satisfying the hunger for alcohol itself, secondary to the sensuous pleasure of intoxication, which is ultimately experienced most luxuriously at home alone. Knapp claims later, in the recovery portion of her narrative, that this pattern is hardly unique; that she discovered at AA meetings that “recovering alcoholics often talk about drinking ‘the way they wanted to’ when they were alone, drinking without the feeling of social restraint they might have had at a party or in a restaurant” (106). Alcohol is the paramour here–waiting at home–alcohol the “best friend,” a relationship, Knapp points out, she and others experience “on the most visceral level”: “when you’re drinking,” Knapp explains, “liquor occupies the role of lover or constant companion. It sits there on its refrigerator shelves or on the counter or in the cabinet like a real person, always present and reliable.” Knapp continues to describe alcohol as “a multiple partner,” since drinkers will have their “true love”–the drink they are most often drawn to–as well as “secondary loves, past loves, acquaintances, even (but not often) an enemy or two” (104).

     

    I focus on Knapp’s descriptions in such “excessive” detail to call attention to the lavish, loving, lust-filled nature of these descriptions and, by extension, to illustrate the danger of the female addict’s desire: Here we have a desire that is full and exclusive, a cathexis complete and non-transferable, a libidinal investment in an object for which there is no substitute. In fact, while addiction is often equated with and derided for its supposed narcissism, the “problem” here is quite the opposite. The social/sexual threat of addiction is not that it is an objectless investment, but that the certainty of the (bad) object choice obviates the need, even the possibility, for other (acceptable) choices. The female addict has what she needs, and in her fulfillment she threatens heteronormativity. Understood in this way, it is obvious why addiction cannot be what woman “really wants,” cannot be her authentic desire, and it is obvious what agenda might be served by rendering such modes of being void of truth. In the next section of this essay, I elaborate the female addict’s challenge to heteronormativity, and to the mandates for reproduction that heteronormativity entails. Addiction becomes productively disruptive in this case because, as I have begun to suggest, it reproduces nothing but itself.

     

    Off the Biological Clock: Women with a Queer Sense of Time

     

    I believe that children are our future.

     

    –Whitney Houston

     

    What . . . would it signify not to be “fighting for the children?”

     

    –Lee Edelman, No Future

     

    In my introduction, I noted that addiction has been made allegorical of many psychical and social phenomena, and perhaps none more so than our relationship to time and our anxieties about its appropriate management and control, its “right-use.” Addiction itself has often been characterized as a kind of “temporal disorder” (see Marder; Keane), a pathological inability or refusal to live in time: intoxication kills time, wastes time, seeks to escape the “objective reality” of time, and thereby leads to an apathetic failure to produce in time. Levine writes that as early as 1637 in the American colonies, “wealthy and powerful colonials complained about excessive drinking and drunkenness” as a “mispense of time,” and a “waste of the good creatures of God” (3 of 16). And Valverde observes that in the United Kingdom, Australia, and New Zealand alike, and I would say also in the U.S, “the history of licensing [for alcohol-serving establishments] has been largely a debate focussing [sic] obsessively on pub opening hours” (146-47, original emphasis), a debate that persists today (as does the related concern over hours during which liquor may be sold in stores). Even the determination of what constitutes addiction itself is dependent upon time: according to the National Council on Alcoholism and Drug Dependence, and to one of the “warning signs” that drug use is slipping into addiction is more frequent use of substances, while staying intoxicated for days in a row is considered symptomatic of the “final stages” of the disease (see Knapp; Keane). As Derrida summarily puts it, it is the “the possibility of repeating the act,” the “crossing of a quantitative threshold that allows us to speak of a modern phenomenon of drug addiction” (5). If we return to Derrida’s question, then, of what it is that we hold against the drug addict, another answer is, the “wrong use” of time.

     

    What kinds of physical bodies does the social body need? I have used the word “productive” repeatedly, and therein lies the answer. Since the seventeenth century, Foucault reminds us, networks of power have depended on “obtaining productive service from individuals in their concrete lives,” have had to ensure the “accumulation of men,” who could in turn produce an accumulation of capital (Power 125). There is simply no time in such a labor-reliant society for its “mispense.” If addiction is as much an abuse of time as it is of drugs, what is so dangerous about women who have this “temporal disorder?” The answer should be clear. If historically we have needed male bodies that are industrious and productive, we have needed female bodies that are diligently reproductive. As Walton claims of the disproportionate punishment visited upon women during the Inebriates Acts, the cause of public outcry, at least implicitly, was not only that pub-dwelling women were being neglectful mothers, but that they were being neglectful “of their duty to bear children for the propagation of the empire” (262); they were refusing to devote all of their energies to the accumulation of men. In this refusal, however, the woman who mis-spends her time drinking or drugging not only shirks her heterosexual duty to reproduce male bodies, she rejects the even more encompassing heteronormative logic of what Lee Edelman calls “reproductive futurism.”

     

    In No Future: Queer Theory and the Death Drive, Edelman focuses on the sanctified figure of The Child as emblematic of our cultural commitment to reproduction above all else. The book is essentially an extended response to question in my epigraph–“what would it signify not to be fighting for the children’?” (3)–and Edelman’s dramatic answer is that it would signify, or at least provoke mass anxiety about, the “undoing of social organization, collective reality, and, inevitably, life itself” (13). Such provocations and undoings, Edelman argues, are exactly the types of disruptions queerness should entail and enact, while instead gays and lesbians fight doggedly for the right to marry and become parents, to “kneel at the shrine of the sacred Child,” as he puts it, shoulder to shoulder with their “comrades in reproductive futurism”: a zealous Right Wing that seeks to deny us exactly these mundane futures (16-17, 19). Edelman’s figure for the resistance to this social order based on reproductivity is the “sinthomosexual”–a complex neologism that connotes a “child-aversive, future negating” queerness devoted only to the excesses of jouissance (113). I would like to extrapolate from Edelman’s premise to offer up the addict as a similarly queer figure, and, again, move beyond the figural to demonstrate ways in which being on drugs enables women to dwell outside of a collective reality that demands that we genuflect at this shrine of tomorrow.

     

    “Intoxication has no clock other than the body’s sheer physical capacity to withstand it,” Walton writes (180). But it is not permitted to be “off the clock” in a culture that requires the consistent production of goods and services, and being off the “biological clock” is certainly impermissible in a social order that demands reproduction of itself and of the life that ensures that ideological reproduction. For this reason Edelman takes the very queer position indeed of being “against” the future, for the future is always synonymous with reproduction of the same–a same that pathologizes in order to “other” all modes of being that deny its dominant values. As we have seen, the offenses of the woman on drugs are many: she abjures feminine (domestic) duties, appropriates masculine prerogatives and “virile” traits, makes a spectacle of herself, and loves too much, but not too well. Her cardinal sin may be that she lives primarily in the present moment, thereby rejecting not only her role as reproducer in, and of, what Edelman calls the “familial unit so cheerfully mom-ified as to distract us from ever noticing how destructively it’s been mummified,” but rejecting as well “the faith that properly fathers us all” (114): the various hegemonic religious doctrines that have always insisted we sacrifice and suffer in the present for an endlessly deferred hereafter.

     

    A counterintuitive reading may be necessary here once again, for the addict is commonly understood not as living in the moment, but as making a desperate and eventually, “diseased” attempt to escape the present moment. Hers is the pathological inability to “authentically” be in “real” time. Moreover, since the addict is always chasing “more” of the buzz, addiction can be read as a future-focused pursuit. However, this pursuit can also be read as seeking to prolong the perpetual present of intoxication, and thus as an attempt not to escape time, but to be, and stay, in it. As Keane writes in What’s Wrong with Addiction?, we can (re)conceive the addict not as a person who avoids the moment, but “as an active and skilful [sic] producer of time and pleasure” in the present, and in this reconception come face to face with what she calls “some positive attributes of addiction itself” (105). Though catchy slogans conspire to convince us otherwise, living “in the now”–or, as AA would have it, “one day at a time”–is not a culturally sanctioned mode of being, at least not when it persists beyond those few moments allowed us by the capitalist order for worry-free enjoyment; moments allowed us, moreover, precisely so we may return, refreshed and renewed, to the business of preparing for and producing the future. In fact, privileging the present over the future in ways that may put that future “at risk” becomes an expression of one of the most inauthenticated, irrational forms of desire (in)conceivable in our social order: the desire not to desire a life that lasts as long as possible.

     

    Judith Halberstam, in A Queer Time and Place, writes that within the “middle class logic of reproductive temporality,” “we create longevity as the most desirable future, applaud the pursuit of long life (under any circumstances), and pathologize modes of living that show little or no concern for longevity” (4). Yes, there are exceptions to this rule. Athletes and soldiers, people who scale Mt. Everest or swim the English Channel, are cultural heroes, as is anyone who risks life and limb for a child. But much as the society condemns the drug addict’s search for pleasure for its “artificiality,” so it condemns her jeopardizing longevity (actions that are considered non-active) for its insignificant and “inauthentic” results. Unlike Edelman, Halberstam mentions drug addiction as among our most culturally disparaged, pathologized modes of living, “characterized as immature and even dangerous” for its seeming refusal to honor life itself (4). But as both she and Keane remind us, pursuing longevity at all costs, and living according to what Halberstam identifies as bourgeois, biological, “repro-time” (5), is one logic of living among many, or what Keane calls a matter of “taste, rather than truth” (109). While positioning oneself “against health” would seem more irrational still than taking a “child aversive” stance “against” the future, Keane takes this risk to argue that the “use of ‘health’ to encompass almost all that is worthwhile and valuable” is another manifestation of the reigning ideology of futurism, and that it “ignores the fact that the desire for a long and disease-free life can, and often does, conflict with practices which make us feel like we are doing more than merely existing” (109). According to alternative, queer logics such as Keane’s, Halberstam’s, and Edelman’s, intoxication/addiction is not a “mispense” of time, but simply a different form of its expenditure–an expenditure derided because it refuses the logics of cost and of indebtedness to the future. The addict’s sin is that she does not fear that one day, she will pay. According to such alternative logics, there may be nothing “wrong with addiction” at all, other than the fact that it is “wrong life”: Complete in itself, moving toward nothing (and no one) but the excesses of jouissance, addiction, or prolonged intoxication, refuses to beget an “other,” but is determined just to be. In so doing, it fails the future, and so becomes a very queer (mis)use of time indeed. A misuse, I have been arguing, most impermissible for women, whose time is never their own, and whose bodies are needed to ensure that tomorrow comes. In yet another improper act of self-indulgence, the female addict privileges her own body, or refuses to privilege her body, if we insist on holding to this dominant view. She refuses to save herself for the sacred child, and so sins not only against Father Time, but against the Father of Faith, and against the familial, mom-ified culture that is her inheritance and her task to reproduce.

     

    Conclusion: Freedom’s Just another Word. . .

     

    The intersecting cut between freedom, drugs and the addicted condition (what we are symptomatologizing as “Being on drugs”) deserves an interminable analysis whose heavily barred doors can be no more than cracked open by a solitary research.

     

    –Avital Ronell, Crack Wars

     

    There is not enough space (or time) here, nor, as Ronell suggests, the possibility even if there were, to perform a conclusive analysis of addiction’s relationship to freedom, but, as I believe questions of freedom have been lurking at the edges of what has come before in this essay, a brief discussion of the intersecting cut to which Ronell refers seems in order. I have proffered several ways in which the woman on drugs poses threatening challenges to a social order that has long served to constrain the excesses associated with, or, more often, forbidden to, female desire. There are to be sure several potential challenges to my interpretations of (women’s) drug use and/or addiction as a kind of embodied practice of freedom. (This portion of my discussion speaks in more general, rather than gendered, terms.) First is the objection, and the danger, voiced representatively by Friedling and acknowledged at the outset of this essay, that arguing for the “emancipatory possibilities in compulsive drug use” may move beyond counterintuitive possibility and slip into the realm of genuine peril. Even if we choose queer interpretive logics that refuse to consider drug use “wrong life”–even if and as it risks death–it is often a life that potentially neglects other-orientation in such a way that it can put those others at significant risk–for loss, pain, and suffering. It would seem that even the most sophisticated deconstruction cannot escape the objective reality of drug use’s potential for destruction, and this is perhaps a reason most theorists stop short of addiction’s full rehabilitation. Ronell’s own deconstructive reading of addiction seems to come closest to cracking the door of this conundrum, when she writes plainly, drawing on Heidegger’s Being and Time, that in a state of “true” freedom “one can decide for destruction,” that “true freedom involves the freedom to choose what is good and what is bad” (45-46). Yet even this reading cannot circumvent, nor does it address, the potential consequences to others of such “bad,” destructive decisions. It does not circumvent, or address, what happens, what becomes of freedom itself, when its destructive force impinges upon freedoms (or lives) not ours for the taking. In addressing this question myself, I can do no more than suggest, problematically perhaps, that there is no Being which is free from the consequences of being-in-relation-to-others, including destructive, addicted others; that to be is always already to be in a state of peril.

     

    Ronell’s own follow-up questions to her reading of Heidegger (questions she believes Being and Time leaves unresolved) are these: iffreedom can, and does, decide for destruction, what then happens not to others, but to decision itself? Is it not also destroyed? And if freedom turns on decision, what have we left of freedom after decision is gone (46)? Put differently, in Friedling’s terms again, how can we argue for the emancipatory possibilities in compulsive drug use when emancipation and compulsion seem exclusive, or destructive, of one another? Compulsion is by definition an urge that trumps decision, an urge that constrains. But definition is the ultimate constraint, and this tidy dilemma actually becomes somewhat easier to outmaneuver than the one that cracks open into the ineluctability of others’ pain. The first maneuver side-steps the binary that insists on framing freedom and compulsion as exclusive in the first place, an insistence that is itself compelled by what Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick points out is an anxious need to preserve “a receding but absolutized space of pure voluntarity” (134).5 Yet the (fictitious) boundaries around this “absolute” space crumble immediately in the face of many human endeavors (I am compelled by my freely chosen profession to write this article), and certainly in the face of all desire–“healthy,” “addictive” or otherwise. Desire, by definition, compels, and then sustains both itself and its subject only by continuous compulsion.

     

    The second maneuver around the freedom/compulsion dichotomy points to the great irony that the “freedom” culturally sanctioned as “most true” turns out to be the least absolute. “True” freedom has most often been culturally constituted not as the ability to do and live as one wants, nor, in Heideggerian terms, as the existential state of being radically “given over to the world” (Ronell 46), but as a practiced condition achieved only by self-control. Foucault has illumined for us the centrality of this ideal to cultures of ancient Greece, and its still hegemonic position shows no signs of erosion despite an already-interminable analysis which has sought to chip away at its foundations. Among the theorists whose work I have engaged in my own analysis, Keane, Valverde, Levine, Sedgwick, Ronell, and Russo have all interrogated, at a general level, this paradoxical understanding of what true freedom is, and many have noted as well its constitutive relationship to what counts as, and to what is “wrong with,” addiction. Russo, for example, drawing on Deleuze and Guattari’s reading of Franz Kafka’s “A Report to an Academy,” writes of “the ludicrousness of the humanistic ideal of freedom as ‘self controlled motion.’” Within such an inhibiting ideal, the freedom “which makes ‘us’ human,” Russo observes, “turns out to be another version of imprisonment” (51). Or, as Levine similarly observes of addiction specifically, the freeing act by which the addict is “released from his chains” turns out to be stringent self-control, or, in the disease model, the compelled submission to total self-denial/abstinence (13 of 16). Though freedom as self-control is understood as freedom because it resists the supposed enslavement of compulsion and/as desire, within this paradigm freedom is oxymoronically attained via a socially compelled indentured servitude to the supreme values of moderation and restraint, values without which addiction as such could not exist. The official diagnostic criteria for addiction are again illustrative here, for the primary determinant of whether or not one is “truly” addicted (over and above even frequency of use) is the crossing of another nebulous threshold into “loss of control.” If there is loss of control over consumption and/or intoxicated behavior, we are obviously in the presence of a “disease,” for what else could explain such an “irrational” lack of restraint?

     

    The standard of self control as both a means and end of freedom traverses histories and cultures to such an extent that Valverde calls it “a common denominator for most of the history of the West” (18). Yet this consistency may attest more to the mutability of this idea(l) than to its immutability, for it attests to the great anxiety to maintain it, to the tremendous transcultural efforts, to which Sedgwick, to carve out spaces of absolute self-determination–efforts that keep subjects functioning properly precisely because they believe they are functioning voluntarily. In Foucauldian terms, this “great fantasy” of “a social body constituted by the universality of wills,” rather than by “the materiality of power operating on the very bodies of individuals,” serves to obscure awareness of those structures of power, and, most particularly, to obscure the awareness that these structures often render self-determinism an impossibility in the first place (Power 55). So the third and final maneuver around the freedom/compulsion binary, to put it plainly, is to burst the bubble of this fantasy, or, more elaborately, to recognize the ways, the means, and to what ideological ends we are compelled to believe we are autonomous and free. When we do so, we may discern that another one of the emancipatory possibilities in “compulsive” drug use lies in its embodied protest against the regulative ideal of freedom itself.

     

    Bordo, whose term “embodied protest” I have used as a framework for this discussion, concludes her reading of women’s eating “disorders” by reverting to the language of pathology, and by capitulating to the ideals of freedom scrutinized above. “To feel autonomous and free while harnessing body and soul to an obsessive body-practice is to serve, not transform, a social order that limits female possibilities,” she writes. She indicts postmodern feminist theorists for their inattention to this “reality”–for “too exclusive a focus on the symbolic dimension” of these protests, and inattention to the practical life of the body (179, 181). In other words, Bordo ends where I begin, and where I here end as well: with our tendency to get stuck in the figurative, and with a corrective call for renewed interest in the lived. Bordo’s own response to this call is the typically cautious retreat that marks and curtails feminist and other deconstructive readings of addiction. While she works from the opposing premise–that remaining wedded to the symbolic is itself a risk, rather than the refusal of risk, as I have been arguing–the message, and the fear, is one and the same: Emancipation is at stake, and the real, lived body, the body meant for (consigned to) a long and disease-free life, must be handled with care. While I once again acknowledge that I do not seek to disregard suffering, I do seek to exceed the confines of this typical retreat narrative, and to examine the ways in which the particular excesses of intoxication, addiction, being on drugs may be interpreted not only as symbolic crystallizations of cultural anxieties, and not only as symbolic subversions of gendered and other regulative constraints, but as lived, ontological protestations against these constraints. Excess has served postmodern feminists well in their rehabilitation of feminine desire, and I have attempted here to offer us one more for the road.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Because “addiction” is the arbitrary, recently constructed categorical term I am problematizing, I am conflating it with other terms, such as intoxication or “being on drugs,” rather than distinguishing between these states of being.

     

    2. For fine overviews and contextualizations of these discussions, see the spring 1993 special issue of differences on addiction, the 1997 Diacritics special issue on addiction (and especially Clark’s essay), Nealon’s “‘Junk’ and the Other: Burroughs and Levinas on Drugs,” from Alterity Politics, Ronell’s Crack Wars, and Sedgwick’s “Epidemics of the Will” from Tendencies.

     

    3. To a certain extent, of course, the addict I am discussing here is also a “representation,” and she is certainly an interpretive construction, as I do not have access to “ontology” other than through my synthesis of the theoretical, historical, and autobiographical accounts on which I draw. However, I seek to make this distinction between interpretations of the potential subversions wrought by an embodied subject, even as I construct and construe her and interpretations of subversively “stylized” media performances, and especially between interpretations of the “being” of addiction itself and the use of addiction to interpret and metaphorize other phenomena.

     

    4. In calling upon excess I am by no means suggesting that “reason” is the property of men, or that reason is somehow antithetical to feminist criticism, or that reason is always appealed to and deployed toward oppressive ends. As many theorists have reminded us, such an anti-reason stance is unreasonable for feminists to take, as it would potentially negate the possibility of setting evaluative criteria, of constructing (counter)narratives of legitimization, and would exclude women/feminists from the realm of rational argumentation more generally (see, for example, Waugh’s Feminine Fictions, Benhabib’s “Feminism and Postmodernism” in Feminist Contentions, Clément’s dialogue with Hélène Cixous, “A Woman Mistress,” in The Newly Born Woman, and Felski’s The Gender of Modernity). Indeed, it is precisely because reason has been equated with the masculine that feminists must reclaim and retain its powers, and it is only through reason that feminists can construct counternarratives that upset the idea of “Reason” as universal. In short, it is only through reason that we can expose what Felski describes as the “fundamental irrationaliy of modern [masculinist] reason” itself (5). This is the stance from which my essay proceeds, and the project within which my deployment of excess, and my counternarrativizing of addiction, seek to take their place.

     

    5. Sedgwick, Valverde, and Keane all attempt to recoup the lost concept of “habit” as what Sedgwick calls “an otherwise” to addiction’s absolutes of compulsion and voluntarity.

     

    Works Cited

    • Benhabib, Seyla. “Feminism and Postmodernism: An Uneasy Alliance.” Feminist Contentions: A Philosophical Exchange. Ed. Seyla Benhabib, Judith Butler, Drucilla Cornell, and Nancy Fraser. New York: Routledge, 1995. 17-34.
    • Bordo, Susan. Unbearable Weight: Feminism, Western Culture, and the Body. Berkeley: U of California P, 1993.
    • Cixous, Hélène, and Catherine Clément. The Newly Born Woman. Trans. Betsy Wing. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1986.
    • Clark, David L. “Heidegger’s Craving: Being-on-Schelling.” Diacritics 27.3 (1997): 8-33.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “The Rhetoric of Drugs: An Interview.” differences 5.1 (1993): 1-25.
    • Edelman, Lee. No Future: Queer Theory and the Death Drive. Durham: Duke UP, 2005.
    • Felski, Rita. Gender and Modernity. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1995.
    • Foucault, Michel. Power/Knowledge: Selected Interviews and Other Writings 1972-1977. New York: Pantheon, 1980.
    • —. The Use of Pleasure: The History of Sexuality. Vol. 2. New York: Vintage, 1990.
    • Friedling, Melissa Pearl. Recovering Women: Feminisms and the Representations of Addiction. Boulder: Westview, 2000.
    • Grosz, Elizabeth. Volatile Bodies: Toward a Corporeal Feminism. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1994.
    • Halberstam, Judith. In a Queer Time and Place: Transgender Bodies, Subcultural Lives. New York: New York UP, 2005.
    • Keane, Helen. What’s Wrong with Addiction? New York: New York UP, 2002.
    • Knapp, Caroline. Drinking: A Love Story. New York: Delta, 1996.
    • Levine, Harry G. “The Discovery of Addiction: Changing Conceptions of Habitual Drunkenness in America.” Journal of Studies on Alcohol (1978): 493-506. 7 September 2005 <http://www. soc.qc.edu/Staff/levine/doa.htm>
    • Marder, Elissa. “Trauma, Addiction, and Temporal Bulimia in Madame Bovary.” Diacritics 27.3 (1997): 49-64.
    • Marquez, Jim. “Girl Crazy.” Modern Drunkard Magazine Online. 13 June 2006 <http://drunkard.com/issues/01-05/0105-girl-crazy.htm>
    • Nealon, Jeffrey. “‘Junk’ and the Other: Burroughs and Levinas on Drugs.” Alterity Politics: Ethics and Performative Subjectivity. Durham: Duke UP, 1998. 53-72.
    • Nicolini, Kim. “Staging the Slut: Hyper-Sexuality in Performance.” Bad Subjects 20 (1995). 13 June 2006 <http://bad.eserver.org/issues/1995/20/nicolini.html>
    • Ronell, Avital. Crack Wars: Literature, Addiction, Mania. Lincoln: U of Nebraska P, 1992.
    • Rowe, Kathleen. The Unruly Woman: Gender and the Genres of Laughter. Austin: U of Texas P, 1995.
    • Russo, Mary. The Female Grotesque: Risk, Excess Modernity. New York: Routledge, 1995.
    • Sedgwick, Eve Kosofsky. “Epidemics of the Will.” Tendencies. Durham: Duke UP, 1993. 130-42.
    • Valverde, Mariana. Diseases of the Will: Alcohol and the Dilemmas of Freedom. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1998.
    • Van Den Bergh, Nan. “Having Bitten the Apple: A Feminist Perspective on Addictions.”Feminist Perspectives on Addictions . Ed. Nan Van Den Bergh. New York: Springer, 1991. 3-29.
    • Walton, Stuart. Out of It: A Cultural History of Intoxication. New York: Harmony, 2002.
    • Waugh, Patricia. Feminine Fictions: Revisiting the Postmodern. New York: Routledge, 1989.
    • Wiegman, Robyn. “Feminism’s Apocalyptic Futures.” New Literary History 31.4 (2000): 805-25.

     

  • The Unborn Born Again: Neo-Imperialism, the Evangelical Right, and the Culture of Life

    Melinda Cooper

    Global Biopolitics Research Group
    Institute of Health
    University of East Anglia
    M.Cooper@uea.ac.uk

     

    I also believe human life is a sacred gift from our Creator. I worry about a culture that devalues life, and believe as your President I have an important obligation to foster and encourage respect for life in America and throughout the world.

     

    –George W. Bush

     

    The Unborn at War

     

    In early 2002, George Bush issued a press release proclaiming January 22 as National Sanctity of Human Life Day. In the speech he delivered for the occasion, Bush reminded the public that the American nation was founded on certain inalienable rights, chief among them being the right to life. The speech is remarkable in that it assiduously duplicates the phrasing of popular pro-life rhetoric: the visionaries who signed the Declaration of Independence had recognized that all were endowed with a fundamental dignity by virtue of their mere biological existence. This fundamental and inalienable right to life, Bush insists, should be extended to the most innocent and defenseless amongst us–including the unborn: “Unborn children should be welcomed in life and protected in law.” What is even more remarkable about the speech is its smooth transition from right to life to neoconservative just war rhetoric. Immediately after his invocation of the unborn, Bush recalls the events of September 11, which he interprets as acts of violence against life itself. These events, he claims, have engaged the American people in a war of indefinite duration, a war “to preserve and protect life itself,” and hence the founding values of the nation. In an interesting confusion of tenses, the unborn emerge from Bush’s speech as the innocent victims of a prospective act of terrorism while the historical legacy of the nation’s founding fathers is catapulted into the potential life of its future generations. Bush’s plea for life is both a requiem and a call to arms: formulated in a nostalgic future tense, it calls upon the American people to protect the future life of the unborn in the face of our “uncertain times,” while preemptively mourning their loss.1

     

    In the wake of the terrorist attacks of September 11, 2001, it is easy to forget that the most explosive test confronting Bush in the early months of his presidency was not terrorism but the issue of whether or not to provide federal funds for research on embryonic stem cells. The issue had been on the agenda since 1998 when scientists funded by the private company Geron announced the creation of the first immortalized cell lines using cells from a frozen embryo and an aborted fetus. Bush, who had campaigned on an uncompromising pro-life agenda, put off making a decision for as long as possible. In July 2001 he made a visit to the Pope, who reiterated the Catholic Church’s opposition to any experimentation using human embryos (The White House, “Fact Sheet). On August 11, 2001, however, Bush declared that he would allow federal funding on research using the 60 or so embryonic stem cell lines that were already available (the actual number of viable cell lines turned out to be less than this). In making this concession to stem cell research, he claimed, the U.S. government was not condoning the destruction of the unborn. “Life and death decisions” had already been made by scientists, Bush argued. By intervening after the fact, the state was ensuring that life would nevertheless be promoted: in this case, not the life of the potential person but the utopia of perpetually renewed life promised by stem cell research.

     

    In the months leading up to his decision, Bush had attempted to soften the blow for the religious right by extending universal health coverage to the unborn, who thereby became the first and only demographic in the U.S. to benefit from guaranteed and unconditional health care, at least until the moment of birth (Borger). However it translates in terms of actual health care practice, the gesture was momentous in that it formally acknowledged the unborn foetus as the abstract and universal subject of human rights–something the pro-life movement had been trying to do for decades.

     

    In the meantime and in stark contrast to the U.S. government’s official moral stance on the field of stem cell research, U.S. legislation provides for the most liberal of interpretations of patent law, allowing the patenting of unmodified embryonic stem cell lines. For this reason, the most immediate effect of Bush’s decision to limit the number of stem cell lines approved for research was to ensure an enormous captive market for the handful of companies holding patents on viable stem cell lines. One company in particular is poised to profit from George Bush’s post life and death decision. The aptly named Geron, a start-up biotech company specializing in regenerative medicine, also happens to hold exclusive licensing rights to all the most medically important stem cell lines currently available. Uncomfortably positioned between the neo-liberal interests of the biomedical sector and of the moral absolutism of the religious right, Bush seems to have pulled off a political tour de force: while proclaiming his belief in the “fundamental value and sanctity of human life,” he was also able to “promote vital medical research” and, less ostentatiously, to protect the still largely speculative value of the emerging U.S. biotech sector.

     

    In his press release announcing the new National Sanctity of Life Day, George Bush expressed his faith in the future of life. But what kind of future does George Bush believe in? And what tense is he speaking in? Bush’s pro-life rhetoric oscillates between two very different visions of life’s biomedical and political future: one that would equate “life itself” with the future of the nation, bringing the unborn under the absolute protection of the state, and the other that less conspicuously abandons biomedical research to the uncertain and speculative future of financial capital investment. On the one hand, life appears as an inalienable gift, one that must be protected at all costs from the laws of the market, while on the other hand, the patented embryonic stem cell line seems to function like an endlessly renewable gift–a self-regenerative life which is also a self-valorizing capital.

     

    What appears to be at stake, behind the scenes of George Bush’s speech, is the determination of the value of life. How is the promise of biological life to be evaluated? Is its value relative or absolute? Perhaps what is most seriously at issue is the temporal evaluation of life, life’s relation to futurity (predetermined or speculative). How will this value, whatever it consists of, be realized? Given that the contemporary life sciences are tending to uncover a “proto-life” defined by its indifference to the limits of organic form, within what limits will its actualization nevertheless be constrained? Bush’s decision on stem cells provides two solutions to the problem of apprasing the value of life whose apparently conflicting valuations function together quite nicely in practice. According to media reports, Bush stacked his ethics committees with a half and half mix of pro-life supporters, determined to protect the sanctity of life, and representatives of the private biomedical sector, just as fervently opposed to any kind of federal regulation of stem cell research. Somehow the two positions managed to coexist in the person of George W. Bush.

     

    In keeping with the general tone of his public declarations, George Bush’s speeches on the unborn weave together a subtle mix of three tendencies in American political life–neoconservatism, neoliberal economics, and pro-life or culture of life politics. These three tendencies have coexisted in various states of tension and alliance since the mid-seventies. But they’ve been getting closer. Neo-liberals such as George Gilder have started to openly affirm their evangelical faith. Neoconservatives such as William Kristol have aligned themselves with the evangelical right in its defense of the right to life and its opposition to stem cell research. Both have more recently championed the cause of creationism in American schools. Michael Novak, the free-market neoconservative, has always quite happily embodied the tension between a capitalism of endless growth and an unshakeable faith in the absolute limits of life. In the meantime, evangelicals who were once content to fight over domestic moral and racial politics have embraced an increasingly militant and interventionist line on U.S. imperialism, seeing U.S. victory in the Middle East as the necessary prelude to the end times and the second coming of Jesus Christ. Under George W. Bush and indeed in the person of George W. Bush, these tendencies have become increasingly difficult to distinguish.

     

    Brought up as a mainstream Methodist, Bush was born again as an evangelical Christian around the age of forty (Kaplan 68-71; Phillips, American Dynasty 229-44). In the process, he moved from a religion based on personal self-transformation and discipline to one that espouses a decidedly more expansive, even world-transforming philosophy. More than one of Bush’s close associates have commented that he saw his investiture as President of the United States as a sign of divine election, one that linked his personal revival to that of America–and ultimately to that of the world. Luminaries of the evangelical right such as Pat Robertson could only agree with him. After all, it was largely thanks to the (white) evangelical right that he won the 2000 elections (Kaplan 3). And in return, the Bush administration allowed them an unprecedented influence in almost all areas of government policy (Kaplan 2-7).

     

    Bush’s economic philosophy, too, reflects a dramatic transformation in Protestant views on wealth and sin. The ethic of late Protestantism is much more investment than work-oriented, much more amenable to the temptations of financial capital than to the disciplines of labor, and evangelical Christians have found a welcome ally in the writings of various free-market and supply-side economists. In his biography of the Bush family clan, Kevin Phillips has argued convincingly that George W. Bush is also essentially a supply-sider: despite appearances, his economic outlook is more informed by his experience in investment banking and finance than by the nuts and bolts of the oil industry (American Dynasty 113-48).

     

    Bush’s conversion to the neoconservative cause was perhaps more contingent on the events of September 11 than is commonly recognized. In their careful study of the Bush team’s defense policy before late 2001, the political theorists Halper and Clarke point out that the early Bush was notably reluctant to engage in any nation building (America Alone 112-56). But the reasons for his alliance with the neocons, when it did happen, were certainly not lacking–since the mid-seventies, the neoconservatives had strategically aligned themselves with the prophets of supply-side economics, and during the nineties, their attentions turned to the populist appeal of the right to life movement (America Alone 42, 196-200). In the aftermath of the September 11 attacks, they were able to present George W. Bush with a ready-made blueprint for war, one that would satisfy both the millenarian longings of the Christian right and the evangelistic tendencies of free-market capitalism.

     

    How have these imperialist, economic and moral philosophies been able to work so tightly together under the presidency of George W. Bush and why have they converged so obsessively around the “culture” of promissory or unborn life? In order to address these questions, I first look at Georg Simmel’s work on the relationship between economics and faith. I then turn to a discussion of the links between Protestantism and capitalism, and more pertinently, between the history of American evangelical revivals and the specific cultures of American liberalism and life. U.S.-based evangelical Protestantism, I suggest, has developed a doctrine of debt, faith and life that differs in fundamental respects both from the Roman Catholic tradition and from mainline Reformationist Protestantism. These differences help explain the impulses informing the “culture of life” movement today. It is equally important, however, to look at the ways in which the evangelical movement has itself mutated over the last three decades, reorienting its traditional concerns with life, debt and faith around the focal point of sexual politics. The neo-evangelical movement, I argue, combines the revolutionary, future-oriented impulse of earlier American revivals with a new found sexual fundamentalism.2 It is this contrary impulse that informs George W. Bush’s culture of life politics and is reflected perhaps most forcefully in his ambivalent stance on stem cell research. It is also characteristic of the ambivalent tendencies of capitalism today, in which a speculative reinvention of life comes together with a violent desire to re-impose the fundamentals, if only in the figure of a future or unborn life.

     

    Economics and Faith

     

    Increasingly, it would seem, it is becoming difficult to confront the most violent manifestations of contemporary economic imperialism without at the same time thinking through their religious, salvationist dimensions. Yet there is too little in the contemporary economic literature on the relationship between the two.3

     

    One notable early exception is Georg Simmel’s Philosophy of Money, a work that combines anthropological, historical and economic perspectives on the emergence of modern capitalism in ways that might still prove fruitful. Simmel notes that all economic relations, to the extent that they require trust in the future, involve a certain element of faith. Yet it is only in a money economy, he argues, that this faith goes beyond a simple inductive knowledge about the future and takes on a “quasi-religious” flavor (179). A money economy, after all, is one in which the object to be exchanged (money) is itself born of faith: all money is created out of debt and is therefore of a promissory or fiduciary nature, even before it is exchanged. Simmel draws attention to the two-sidedness of this faith: money on the one hand embodies a promise (to the creditor) and a threat of violence (to the debtor); it brings together obligation and trust. And in the case of market economies, this two-sided faith relation is extended to all members of a community. A capitalist economy, Simmel asserts, is one in which the whole life of a community is indebted to the debt form. But having established its “quasi-religious” nature, how does Simmel define the particular religious form of capitalism? What kind of faith does capitalism require? And what are its specific forms of violence? In his historical account of capitalism, Simmel makes it clear that the emerging market economies of the early modern period fundamentally differ from and disrupt the established forms of sovereign medieval power with their close ties to the Catholic Church and their foundations in landed wealth. A basic premise of his argument is that the philosophy of money needs to be distinguished from the various political theologies of sovereign power. What then is the difference between the philosophy of early modern Christian faith, which we have largely inherited from the Middle Ages, and the “quasi-religious” faith of capitalism?

     

    It should be noted in the first place that the philosophy of Roman Catholicism, as exemplified in the work of someone like Thomas Aquinas, is at one and the same time a political and an economic theology, inasmuch as the authority of the Medieval Church extended to both domains. What unites these spheres, in the work of Aquinas, is a common understanding of foundation, origin and time (the transcendent or the eternal). This idea of foundation is most clearly enunciated in the doctrine of the Gift, which brings together the questions of theological, political and economic constitution. In Aquinas’s work, the Holy Spirit is the Gift of Life that reunites the finite and the infinite incarnations of the Holy Trinity (Basic Writings, 359-62). As such, the Gift is also the originary act through which God creates life, so that from the point of view of His creatures, life is a series of debt installments, a constant quest to repay the wages of sin. Implicit in his theology is the notion that the Gift (which is also a debt) is underwritten by an original presence, the eternal unity of finite and infinite, in which all debt is cancelled. In this way, Christianity promises the ultimate redemption of the debt of life, a final reunion of the finite and the infinite, even if it is unattainable in this world. It instructs the faithful to believe in a final limit to the wages of sin.

     

    If we turn then to Aquinas’s work on jurisprudence, which includes a consideration of price and exchange, it becomes apparent that his economic philosophy shares precisely the same mathematics of debt.4 His premise here is that any institutionalized political form such as the state must be underwritten by a stable referent or use value, an ultimate guarantor of the value of value, in order to maintain a proper sense of justice. In this way, Aquinas’s economic philosophy is founded on the possibility of debt redemption. All exchange values must be measurable against a “just price,” in the same way that each human life is redeemable against an original Gift.

     

    Historical work on the economic philosophy of the Middle Ages has emphasized just how closely such ideas reflect the actual position of the early Christian Church (see for example Gilchrist). The wealth of the medieval Church was based in landed property rather than in trade. For this reason, the Church was not opposed to a certain level of state regulation of exchange and to price control, as long as these worked to maintain the “just price” of Church property, while it virulently opposed certain forms of trading profit, particularly usury. Usury, after all, is a credit/debt relation that wagers on the instability of price. It aims to create money out of a perpetually renewed debt, and it does this without recourse to a fundamental reserve or guarantor of value. It has no faith in the measurability of value and no interest in the final redemption of debt.

     

    It is here that Simmel locates the fundamental difference between the early economic theory of the Christian Church and the particular faith-form of modern capitalism. The capitalist economy, he argues, is a form of abstraction that dispenses with all absolute foundation, all possibility of final measure, all substantial value. “The fact that the values money is supposed to measure, and the mutual relations that it is supposed to express, are purely psychological makes such stability of measurement as exists in the case of space or weight impossible” (Simmel 190). Simmel doesn’t want to deny the historical existence of all kinds of institutions designed to uphold the measurability of exchange value (his Philosophy of Money is in part a detailed history of such institutions, from precious metals to the Central Bank to the labor theory of value). Without such institutions and their lawful forms of violence, no creditor would be able to demand repayment. Yet he insists that such institutions, considered singly, are both mutable and not foundational to the creative logic of capitalism. Modern capitalism, in other words, is a social form in which the law no longer figures as a source of creation, but rather as an institution charged with the power of sustaining the faith a posteriori, through the threat of violence. In stark contrast to the economic theology of the Medieval Church, capitalism is a mode of abstraction that generalizes the logic of usury and constantly revolutionizes any institutional limits to its self-reproduction. What then is its particular mode of faith?

     

    Born-Again Nation: American Evangelicalism and the Culture of Life

     

    This is the question that preoccupies Max Weber in The Protestant Ethic. In Calvinism, Weber identifies the first religion to celebrate the life of business and the disciplines of labor, not merely as means to an end but as the very manifestation of faith in the Protestant God. In contrast to the Roman Catholic tradition, with its repudiation of earthly pursuits, Protestantism brings “God within the world” and espouses an immersive, transformative relation to God’s creation, rather than a contemplative one (Weber 75). And in late seventeenth-century variations on Protestantism, argues Weber, there is an even more extreme change in attitudes towards wealth creation–here usury, the creation of money from promise and debt, is accepted as a legitimate way of expressing one’s faith. This move away from a Calvinist doctrine of predestination, suggests Weber, is reflected in the rise of later, less “aristocratic” forms of Protestant faith such as Methodism, in which the doctrine of regeneration or the new birth, as espoused by John Wesley, becomes central (89-90). The Methodist philosophy of conversion through rebirth develops in England but will flourish in America–and it is here that Weber closes his analysis.

     

    Weber’s perspective on the European Protestant Reformation needs to be supplemented by an account of the specific inventiveness of American Protestantism–particularly in its understanding of life, faith, and wealth.5 Historian Mark Noll notes that the most successful currents in American Protestantism were self-consciously evangelical: they practiced a radically democratized form of worship, with a focus on the personal experience of conversion and rebirth (5). In the process, the American take on Methodism freed sanctification from the necessity of institutional mediation to an extent that could hardly have been imagined by Wesley himself. For the American evangelicals, being born-again was an experience of autonomous, although involuntary, self-regeneration–the Holy Spirit being wholly implicated in the self and vice versa, just as the self was implicated in the world.

     

    Moreover, the American evangelical experience was reflected in an enthusiasm for wealth-creation far surpassing its counterparts in the European tradition. Here, suggests Noll, the anti-authoritarianism of the American evangelicals expresses itself as an aversion to foundational value, a belief in the powers of money that separates promise from all institutional guarantee and regulating authority, figuring the market itself as a process of radical self-organization and alchemy (174). In this way the doctrine of the new birth merges imperceptibly with a theology of the free market, one that situates the locus of wealth creation in the pure debt-form–the regeneration of money from money and life from life, without final redemption. This is a culture of life-as-surplus that is wholly alien to the Catholic doctrine of the gift and its attendant political theologies of sovereign power. Pushed to its extreme conclusions, evangelicalism seems to suggest that the instantaneous conversion of the self–which is held to render an ecstatic surplus of emotion–is the emotive equivalent of a financial transmutation of values, the delirious process through which capital seeks to recreate itself as surplus.6

     

    The doctrine of regeneration imparts a highly idiosyncratic vitalism to the evangelical understanding of nationhood. Again as detailed by Noll, the extraordinary rise of Protestant evangelical faith between the Revolution and the Civil War was decisive in fusing together the discourses of republicanism and of religious experience, so that in an important sense the language of American foundation and independence became inseparable from that of evangelical conversion (173-74). It is therefore not only in the minds of latter-day fundamentalists that the founding of America came to be figured as an act of God-given grace: such analogies were already sufficiently self-evident in late nineteenth century America that Abraham Lincoln was able to refer to Americans as God’s almost chosen people, calling for a new birth of the American nation itself.

     

    What is the relationship between these earlier forms of American evangelicalism and the right to life movement of the 1970s? What has become of the experience of rebirth today? And what are its connections to evangelical views on capitalism? In order to respond to these questions, we need to look at the ways in which U.S. capitalism itself has mutated over the last three decades, redefining its relationship to the countries of the rest of the world, both creditors and debtors. In what follows, I argue that U.S. imperialism today is founded on the precarious basis of a perpetually renewed debt–and thus seems to take the evangelical doctrine of wealth-creation to its extreme conclusions. It is this extreme form of economic faith that is also celebrated in neo-liberal theories of wealth creation.

     

    Debt Imperialism: The U.S. Since 1971

     

    In his study of the changing faces of U.S. imperialism, revised and rewritten over three decades, the economist Michael Hudson has argued that the nature of U.S. imperial power underwent a dramatic change in the early 1970s, when Nixon abandoned the gold-dollar standard of the Bretton Woods era (Super Imperialism). Hudson was originally hired under the Nixon administration to report on the costs of the Vietnam War and its connection to the U.S.’s budget deficit. In 1972, and at the behest of various federal administrations, he published a full-length study on the question. His conclusions were damning: by demonetizing gold, the U.S. had initiated a form of super-imperialism that effectively left it off the hook in terms of debt repayment. Instead of taking this as an admonition, however, the U.S. administration received it as an unintended recipe for success, one that should henceforth be maintained at all costs. Hudson’s book reportedly sold well in Washington, although his work was strongly challenged.

     

    Hudson’s argument is complex, and at odds with the mainstream of left-wing commentaries, which tend to see America’s spiraling debt as the harbinger of its imminent decline. He identifies the early 1970s as a turning point. Before 1971, the U.S. was a creditor to other nations. In the period following World War II, the dollar was convertible against gold and thus remained indexed to a conventional unit of measurement. While the gold standard remained in force, the political and economic limits of the American nation were inherently circumscribed. It was the gold standard that prevented the U.S. from running up excessive balance-of-payment deficits, since foreign nations could always cash in surplus-dollars for gold. As a nation, the U.S. was underwritten by an at least nominal foundation.

     

    When gold was demonetized, however, the U.S. abandoned even this conventional guarantor of exchange value. As foreign governments could no longer cash in their surplus-dollars for gold, it was now possible for the U.S. government to run up enormous balance-of-payment deficits without being held to account. Indeed, it became feasible for the U.S., as a net importer, to create debt without limit and to sustain its power through this very process. Hudson contends that such a strategy inaugurates a fundamentally new kind of imperialism–a super-imperialism that is precisely dependent on the endless issuing of a debt for which there is no hope of final redemption. Hudson explains the details of this process as follows: all the dollars that end up in European, Asian, and Eastern central banks as a result of the U.S.’s massive importing now have no place to go but to the U.S. Treasury. With the gold option ruled out, foreign nations now have no other “choice” but to use their surplus dollars to buy U.S. Treasury obligations (and to a lesser extent corporate stocks and bonds). What this effectively amounts to is a forced loan, since in the process, they lend their surplus dollars back to the U.S. Treasury, thereby financing U.S. government debt. This forced loan, Hudson points out, is a losing proposition, as the falling dollar progressively erodes the value of U.S. Treasury IOUs (Hudson ix). And it is a “loan” without foreseeable return: U.S. debt cannot and will not be repaid, but will be rolled over indefinitely, at least as long as the present balance of international power remains in place (xv-xvi). The momentum attained by these dynamics is now such, according to Hudson, that U.S. debt creation effectively functions as the source of world capitalism, the godhead of a cult without redemption. Trends that were initiated in 1972 have now become blatant, particularly under George W. Bush: the U.S. Treasury has run up an international debt of over $60 billion, a deficit that finances not only its trade but also its federal budget deficit. Moreover, he argues, the cycle of U.S. debt creation has now become so integral to the workings of world trade that the consequences of any upheaval might well appear apocalyptic, even to countries outside the U.S.7

     

    Hudson’s work can help us understand the character of U.S. nationhood and imperialism today, and explain how we define a nation that seeks to recreate itself and world power relations out of a fount of perpetual debt. In terms of traditional theories of economic and political nationhood, Hudson’s analysis seems to lead to the unsettling conclusion that the American state is rigorously devoid of foundation, since the possibility of its continued self-reproduction has come to coincide with the temporality of perpetual debt. As a nation, the U.S. no longer rests on any minimal reserve or substance but, in tandem with the turnover of debt, exists in a time warp where the future morphs into the past and the past into the future without ever touching down in the present. In economic terms then, the American nation has become purely promissory or fiduciary–America demands faith and promises redemption but refuses to be held to final account. Its growing debt is already renewed just as it comes close to redemption, already born again before it can come to term. America is the unborn born again.

     

    And yet the importance of Hudson’s work is to show that there is nothing ethereal about the imperialism of U.S. debt creation. Indeed it is through the very movement by which it renounces all economic foundation–Hudson claims–that the U.S. is able to reassert itself as the most belligerent of political forces and the most protectionist of trading partners. The position of the U.S. at the very vortex of debt imperialism has meant that it has been able to function as a profligate, protectionist state, spending enormous amounts on the military, domestic trade subsidies, and R&D, while many other countries have had to subject themselves to the rigors of IMF-imposed budget restraint (xii). In other words, while the U.S., acting through the IMF and World Bank, imposes draconian measures of debt redemption on countries indebted to the IMF and the World Bank, it alone “acts uniquely without financial constraint,” turning debt into the very source of its power (xii).

     

    How has the U.S. ensured that the surplus dollars held by its foreign trading partners would be effectively reinvested in U.S. government securities? According to Hudson, essentially through the use–real or threatened–of institutional violence. The U.S. exercises unilateral veto power within such purportedly multilateral institutions as the IMF and World Bank (Susan George and Fabrizio Sabelli have analyzed the successive internal reforms of these institutions as so many attempts to establish an orthodox doctrine of the faith in the arena of world economic policy). But the economic prescriptions of the World Bank and IMF have also, necessarily, been backed up by the threat of military retaliation. U.S. diplomats, notes Hudson, have long made it perfectly clear that any return to gold or attempt to buy up U.S. companies would be considered as an act of war (Super Imperialism ix). The irony here is that the U.S.’s exorbitant military expenditure has been financed through the very debt-imperialism it is designed to enforce!

     

    All this suggests the need for a nuanced interpretation of the nature of U.S. nationalism in the contemporary era, one that takes into account both the deterritorializing and reterritorializing trends of debt imperialism. For it implies that the very loss of foundation is precisely what enables the U.S. to endlessly refound itself, in the most violent and material of ways. In the era of debt imperialism, nationalism can only be a re-foundation of that which is without foundation–a return of the future, within appropriate limits.8 The endless revolution (rolling over) of debt and the endless restoration of nationhood are inseparably entwined. The one enables the other. And the one perpetuates the other, so that revolution becomes a project of perpetual restoration and restoration a project of perpetual revolution. It is only when the double nature of this movement is grasped that we can understand the simultaneously revolutionary and restorative nature of contemporary capitalism in general: its evangelism and its fundamentalism.

     

    U.S. imperialism, in other words, needs to be understood as the extreme, “cultish” form of capital, one that not only sustains itself in a precarious state of perpetually renewed and rolled-over nationhood but which also, of necessity, seeks to engulf the whole world in its cycle of debt creation.9 The economic doctrine corresponding to U.S. debt imperialism can be found in several varieties of neo-liberalism, in particular the supply-side theories of the Reagan era. Its theological expression can be found in neo-evangelicalism, the various revived and militant forms of Christian evangelical faith that sprang up in the early seventies. Supply-side economists and neo-evangelicals share a common obsession with debt and creationism. For supply-side theorists such as George Gilder, economics requires an understanding of the operations of faith, and for the right-wing evangelicals who cite him, the creation of life and the creation of money are inseparable as questions of biblical interpretation.

     

    Neoliberalism: The Economics of Faith

     

    It is surely not incidental that one of the most influential popularizers of neo-liberal economic ideas, the journalist George Gilder, also happens to be a committed evangelical and creationist whose work argues for the essentially religious nature of economic phenomena.10 Gilder’s classic work, Wealth and Poverty, is as much a meditation on faith as a celebration of U.S. debt imperialism and debt-funded growth. Drawing on anthropological work on the relationship between promise, belief, and debt, Gilder sets out to explain the particular faith-form required by contemporary U.S. power. The new capitalism, he asserts, implies a theology of the gift–“the source of the gifts of capitalism is the supply side of the economy”–but one which differs in fundamental respects from Roman Catholic philosophies of debt and redemption (Wealth and Poverty 28). Here there are no fundamental values, no just price or Word against which the fluctuations of faith can be measured and found wanting. Nor is there any final redemption to look forward to. What distinguishes the gift cycle of the new capitalism, claims Gilder, is its aversion to beginnings and ends (23). In the beginning was not the Word, God the Father, or even the gold standard, but rather the promise, a promise that comes to us from an unknowable future, like Jesus before the resurrection. And in the end is not redemption but rather the imperative to renew the promise, through the perpetual rolling over of U.S. government debt. The promise may well be entirely uncertain, but this doesn’t mean that it won’t be realized at all. On the contrary, Gilder insists that it will be realized, over and over again, in the form of a perpetually renascent surplus of life. The return on debt may be unpredictable, but it will return nevertheless (25)–as long as we maintain the faith:

     

    Capitalist production entails faith–in one’s neighbors, in one’s society, and in the compensatory logic of the cosmos. Search and you shall find, give and you will be given unto, supply creates its own demand. (24)

     

    Importantly, what Gilder is proposing here is not merely an economic doctrine but a whole philosophy of life and rebirth. What neo-liberalism promises, he insists, is not merely the regeneration of capital but the regeneration of life on earth–out of the promissory futures of U.S. debt imperialism. It is this belief that informs Gilder’s strident anti-environmentalism (and that of many of his evangelical and neo-liberal siblings). In a world animated by debt imperialism, there can be no final exhaustion of the earth’s resources, no ecological limits to growth that won’t at some point–just in time–be renewed and reinvigorated by the perpetual renascence of the debt-form itself (259-69). His is a doctrine of the faith that not only promises to renew the uncertain future but also to reinfuse matter itself with a surplus of life, over and over again. The irony of this position lies in its proximity to the technological promise of regenerative medicine. The burgeoning U.S. stem cell market is one instance in which the logic of speculative accumulation–the production of promise from promise–comes together with the particular generativity of the immortalized embryonic stem cell line, an experimental life-form that also promises to regenerate its own potential for surplus, without end. What Marx referred to as the “automatic fetish” of financial capital here attempts to engender itself as a body in permanent embryogenesis.

     

    In this way, Gilder’s theology of capital sustains a belief in the world-regenerative, revitalizing powers of U.S. debt imperialism and its technological futures. It also offers one of the most comprehensive expositions of the neo-evangelical faith today. And it is no coincidence that his work is frequently cited in the voluminous evangelical literature on financial management, investment, and debt, where the creation of life and the creation of money are treated as analogous questions of theological doctrine.11 This is a faith that, in the first instance, separates the creation of money from all institutional foundations or standards of measurement; a religion that conceives of life as a perpetual renascence of the future, unfettered by origin.

     

    This, however, doesn’t mean that the question of foundations is overcome. On the contrary, Gilder’s neo-liberal philosophy is exemplary precisely because it brings together the utopian, promissory impulse of speculative capital with the imperative to re-impose the value of value, even in the face of the most evanescent of futures. The problematic can be summarized as follows: How will the endless promise of the debt be realized, distributed, consumed? How are we to restore the foundations of that which is without foundation? How will the gift of capital, which emanates from the U.S., be forced to repatriate within the confines of America the nation? After all, it could just as easily not return, go roaming around the world and reinvest somewhere else–or not at all. Gilder’s theology of capitalism is haunted by the possibility that the promissory future of the debt will not be reinvested within the proper limits of the American nation; that the promise that is America will not be realized, reborn, rolled over. More generally perhaps, he expresses the fear that faith, in the long run, may fail to reinvest in the property form at all–the fear of revolution without restoration, a gift without obligation. The law of value needs to be reasserted; actual limits need to be re-imposed on the realization of the future.

     

    For Gilder, these limits are of three mutually reinforcing kinds. The first is summed up in the brute law of property: there is no economic growth without inequality, scarcity, and poverty. There is no debt imperialism without debt servitude. The second is of a political kind: U.S.-based economic enterprise must be shored up by a “strong nation,” a nation, that is, that has emptied itself as far as possible of all social obligations towards its members, while investing heavily in law and order. Implied in these two conditions are certain limits on the biological reproduction of the American nation: America must continue to reproduce itself as white, within the proper restrictions of the heterosexual family. In this way, Gilder’s assertion of the law of property is strictly inseparable from his white nationalism and his avowed “moral conservatism.” The refoundation of value is the nation, which is the property form, which in turn is realized in the most conservative of moral institutions–the straight, white, reproductive family. It is this amalgam of political, economic, and moral law that gets summed up in the notion of a “right to life” of the unborn. The unborn, after all, is the future American nation in its promissory form, the creative power of debt recontained within a redemptive politics of familial life. And as the new right has made clear, its reproduction is the particular form of debt servitude required of the nation’s women:

     

    It is in the nuclear family that the most crucial process of defiance and faith is centered. . . . Here emerge the most indispensable acts of capital formation: the psychology of giving, saving and sacrifice, on behalf of an unknown future, embodied in a specific child–a balky bundle of possibilities that will yield its social reward even further into time than the most foresighted business plan. (Gilder, Men and Marriage 198-99)

     

    It is no accident then that the counter-active tendencies of neo-liberal conservatism come to a head on the question of embryonic life and its scientific regeneration. The stem cell line embodies the most radical materialization of the evangelical faith and its promise of an endlessly renewable surplus of life. At the same time, however, it threatens to undermine the very precepts of normative reproduction and therefore needs to be recaptured within the social and legislative limits of the potential person–and its right to life.

     

    The Unborn Born Again

     

    The movement that we now recognize as born-again evangelical Christianity underwent an extraordinary reawakening in the early seventies. In its revived form, the evangelical movement took up the Protestant ethic of self-transformation–impelling its believers to be born-again, in a kind of personal reenactment of Jesus’s death, burial, and resurrection–and turned it into something quite different in scope. What distinguished this movement both from main-line Protestantism and from earlier evangelical revivals was its intense focus on the arena of sexual politics and family values. Faced with a rising tide of new left political demands, from feminism to gay rights, the evangelical movement of the 1970s gave voice to a new-found nostalgia–one that obsessed over the perceived decline of the heterosexual, male-headed, reproductive white family. The concerns of the right to life movement have ranged from the introduction of domestic violence laws to equal opportunities, and most recently, gay marriage. But if there was one issue that focalized the energies of the early movement it was the Roe vs. Wade decision of 1973. As one editorial of the late seventies pointed out, Roe vs. Wade was the “moment life began, conception–‘quickening,’ viability, birth: choose your own metaphor–for the right to life movement” (“The Unborn and the Born Again” 5). The born-again evangelical right was reborn as a mission to save the unborn.12

     

    We now so commonly associate the evangelical right with a “pro-life” politics that it is difficult to recognize the novelty of this revival. The evangelical obsession with the question of abortion was, however, unprecedented in the history of Protestant evangelicalism–so much so that the early neo-evangelicals borrowed their pro-life rhetoric from orthodox Catholicism, if only to later rechannel it through distinctly mass-mediated, populist and decentralized forms of protest (see Harding 189-91). In the process, the evangelical right brought a new element into its own traditions of millenarianism and born-againism. For evangelicals awaiting the millennium, the unborn came to be identified with the last man and the last generation–indeed the end of the human race. At the same time, it was this last–and future–generation that most urgently required the experience of conversion or rebirth. The evangelical tradition had long identified the unsaved soul with Jesus before the resurrection, but now both were being likened to the unborn child in utero. In the born-again how-to tracts of the seventies, Jesus had become the unborn son of God, while we were all–prior to salvation–the fetal inheritors of the Lord.13 In this context of tortuous temporal amalgamations, it was no surprise that the question–can the unborn be born again?–emerged as a matter worthy of serious doctrinal debate.

     

    From the first, evangelicals understood the pro-life movement to be a project of national restoration. The United States was founded on religious principles–indeed on the principle of the right to life–according to the new evangelical right. Roe v. Wade–a decision that after all was most likely to affect young white women–was decried as an act of war that threatened to undermine the future reproduction of the (white) American nation, its possibility of a redemptive afterlife.14 It was also the last and fatal blow in the protracted process of secularization and pluralism that had led to the decline of America’s founding ideals. Roe v. Wade had emptied the gift of life of all foundation–the future existence of America had been effectively undermined, offered up in a precarious, promissory form, a promise that might never be redeemed. Ontologically, it seemed, America was suspended in the strange place that is also reserved for the frozen embryo (hence, an obsessive focus not simply on the unborn but more particularly on the frozen or in vitro unborn).

     

    At the same time, and characteristically for the evangelical right, these concerns about the sexual and racial reproduction of the American nation come together with a sense of malaise in the face of America’s growing state of indebtedness. As Pat Robertson remarks: “Any nation that gives control of its money creation and regulation to any authority outside itself has effectively turned over control of its own future to that body” (The New World Order 118). Here, the idea that the reproducers of the unborn nation might be at risk of defaulting feeds into the fear that the U.S.’s economic future might be similarly imperiled, suspended as it were on the verge of a promise without collateral. Thus, along with its enthusiastic support for U.S. debt-imperialism, the evangelical right also gives voice to the suspicion that the economic reproduction of the U.S. is becoming dangerously precarious, promissory, contingent, a matter of faith–in urgent need of propping up.15 The nightmare of someone like Pat Robertson is that the promissory future of U.S. debt may not be restored within the territorial limits of America itself, that the future may fail to materialize within the proper limits of self-present nationhood. And because he understands that the nation lies at the nexus of sexual and economic reproduction, he calls for a politics of restoration on both fronts.

     

    Delirious as it may seem, the religious right at least recognizes that from the point of view of traditional state financing, the postmodern American nation is literally poised on the verge of birth–unborn–its future contingent on the realization of a debt that has not yet and may never come to maturity. Their fear is that its potential may be realized in the form of excess, escaping appropriation. And in anticipation of this threat, they call for a proper rebirthing of the unborn, the resurrection of a new man and a new nation, from out of the future. But what would it mean to re-found the future? In what sense is it possible to re-birth the unborn? It is in the form of this temporal ellipsis that the right to life movement articulates its politics of nationhood: what needs to be restored is of course the foundational moment of America, the act through which the Founding Fathers inaugurated the nation, but this moment is itself constitutive of the right to life of the unborn, contingent, in other words, on the return of the not-yet. The pro-life movement has invented an extraordinary number of ritualistic methods for memorializing this contingent future: from online memorials to the unborn to court cases undertaken on behalf of the future victims of genocidal abortion. Herein lies the novelty of (neo)-fundamentalism, of fundamentalism for the neo-liberal era: in the face of a politics that operates in the speculative mode, fundamentalism becomes the struggle to re-impose the property form in and over the uncertain future. This property form, as the right to life movement makes clear, is inextricably economic and sexual, productive and reproductive. It is, in the last instance, a claim over the bodies of women. Except here the name of the dead father is replaced by the image of the unborn child as sign and guarantor of women’s essential indebtedness.

     

    Under Reagan, the rhetoric of the pro-life movement, with its rewriting of the Declaration of Independence as a right to life tract, entered into the mainstream of American political discourse, so that a hard-line conservative such as Lewis A. Lehrman could declare that the moral and political restoration of America would depend on the Republican Party welcoming the unborn “in life and law” (“The Right to Life”). Reagan himself, however, failed to live up to the expectations of his moral electorate, and it was not until George W. Bush came to power that the pro-life movement acceded to anything like a real presence within the decision-making processes of government. When it did so, it was after making a detour via the neoconservative right. In the course of the nineties, a period when both moralist and militant extremes of conservative thinking were on the back burner, a second generation of neoconservatives began to make overtures to the religious right, inviting pro-life representatives to work at their think-tanks while they themselves began to issue public declarations linking the political and strategic future of the American nation to its upholding the “founding” principle of the right to life.16 Since then, pro-lifers and neoconservatives have joined forces in mounting a more general assault on all kinds of embryo research, particularly in the area of stem-cell science. It was no surprise when the neoconservative Catholic thinker Michael Novak announced that Bush’s compromise stem-cell decision of 2001 threatened the unborn potential of America, and by extension the future salvation of the rest of the world:

     

    this nation began its embryonic existence by declaring that it held to a fundamental truth about a right to life endowed in us by our Creator. The whole world depends on us upholding that principle. (Novak, “The Principle’s the Thing”)

     

    But the 1990s had also seen more mainline, previously “secular” neocons such as William Kristol launching himself into the arena of right to life politics, in a series of impassioned stay of execution pleas on behalf of the unborn. For Kristol, the connection between a muscular, neo-imperialist foreign policy and a pro-life position is clear–what is at stake in both cases is the restoration of an emasculated America, the rebirth of its unborn nationhood:

     

    We will work to build a consensus in favor of legal protection for the unborn, even as we work to build an America more hospitable to children and more protective of families. In doing so, our country can achieve a commitment to justice and a new birth of freedom. (Kristol and Weigel 57)

     

    It is probably too early to assess the long-term consequences of these developments, but at the very least it might be ventured that the alliance between the neoconservative and Christian Right has brought a new and alarmingly literal legitimacy to the war-mongering, millenarian and crusading rhetoric of the right to life movement. After all, pro-life representatives now occupy key advisory positions at every level of U.S. government.17 The most obvious effect of this presence so far has been in the arena of foreign aid, where U.S. federal funds are now indexed to stringent anti-abortion, anti-prostitution, anti-contraception, and pro-abstinence guidelines. A less visible though surely no less significant phenomenon is the massive presence of evangelical missionaries in Bush’s military operations in the Middle East.

     

    On a rhetorical level too, George Bush has consistently drawn together the language of the Christian Right–with its evocations of a war on the unborn, its monuments and memorials to the unborn–with the newly legitimized, neoconservative defense of just war. Is this the harbinger of a new kind of war doctrine, one that returns to the doctrine of just war theory, while declaring justice to be without end? And one that speaks in the name of life, like humanitarian warfare, while substituting the rights of the unborn for those of the born? Certainly, this has been the subtext of George W. Bush’s official declarations on the “culture of life” in America.18

     

    As a counter to these slippages, it is important to remember that the most immediate precedent to the terrorist attacks of September 11 can be found in the string of bombings and murders committed by home-grown right to life groups and white supremacist sympathizers over the last few decades. These attacks have attracted nothing like the full-spectrum military response occasioned by September 11. On the contrary, one of the ironies of Bush’s war on terror is that it is being used as a pretext for bringing the culture of life to the rest of the world. In this way, even as it emanates from the precarious center of debt imperialism, Bush’s politics of life collaborates with the many other neofundamentalist movements of the neoliberal era.

     

     

    Notes

     

    1. I am here thinking of the temporal ellipsis about which Brian Massumi writes in “Requiem for our Prospective Dead (Toward a Participatory Critique of Capitalist Power),” 40-64. The motif of war was present in right to life rhetoric from the beginning. See for example Marx.

     

    2. I here follow Nancy T. Ammerman’s account of the American evangelical movement and its 20th century fundamentalist mutations (1-63). I am particularly concerned with the evangelical revival that occurred in the mid-seventies and has come to be associated with “born againism” and pro-life politics. The evangelical movement is generally understood to be an offshoot of mainline Protestantism. Other commentators have pointed out that both the Protestant and Catholic Churches sprouted right-wing, evangelizing and free-market wings around the same time. See for example Kintz 218, 226, and 230. This convergence is evident in George W. Bush’s frequent recourse to the advice of the Vatican. Because of this convergence, I cite the work of the Catholic free-market neoconservative Michael Novak, who has had a considerable influence over (and arguably been influenced by) evangelical thinking.

     

    3. There is a recent and growing literature on the role of emotions in finance; see in particular Pixley. Two interesting recent works on the relationship between faith, credibility, credit/debt relations, and the question of political constitution are Aglietta and Orléan’s edited La Monnaie Souveraine, and Aglietta and Orléan, La Monnaie: Entre Violence et Confiance. Following Aglietta and Orléan, I don’t make any essential distinction between the gift and the debt, assuming that what constitutes a gift for one person will probably be experienced as a debt by another. Where I do draw a distinction is between different kinds and temporalities of the gift/debt relationship. In other words, the pertinent question here is whether or not the gift/debt is redeemable.

     

    4. For an overview of Aquinas’s economic philosophy, see the articles collected in Blaug, St Thomas Aquinas (1225-1274).

     

    5. What interests me here is the importance of born-againism or regeneration within American evangelicalism in general. I make no attempt to provide an overview of the various denominational splits within American Protestant evangelicalism, although this would certainly be relevant for an historical understanding of the Republican-Southern Baptist alliance today. For a detailed insight into this history, see Phillips.

     

    6. There is thus an important distinction to be drawn between the Catholic philosophy of life (which presumes sovereign power) and the Protestant, evangelical culture of life, where life is in the first instance understood as a form of self-regenerative debt. In the Protestant tradition, sovereign power is not so much formative as reformative–it is the attempt to re-found that which is without foundation. One important corollary of my argument is that Agamben’s philosophy of bare life is wholly unsuited to a critical engagement with the contemporary phenomenon of culture of life politics. Indeed, to the extent that he reinstates the sovereign model of power–if only in inverted form–as constitutive of power itself, his philosophical gesture comes very close to that of the right-to-life movement. Bare life, in other words, is the suspended inversion of the vita beata and finds its most popular iconic figure in the unborn foetus. Agamben’s philosophy of biopolitics is not so much a negative theology as a theology in suspended animation.

     

    7. For a complementary reading of U.S. debt and its role in the financialization of world capital markets, see Brenner 59-61 and 206-08. See also Naylor for a fascinating account of the links between neoliberalism, debt servitude, and neo-evangelical movements in South America and elsewhere. It should be noted here that not all contemporary evangelical philosophies of debt are necessarily imperialist. Liberation theology is one instance of a faith that works against Third World debt.

     

    8. The neoconservative movement is quite lucid about the speculative, future-oriented thrust of its return to fundamentals. It is here that one of the founding fathers of neoconservatism, Irving Kristol, identifies its distinguishing feature: “What is ‘neo’ (‘new’) about this conservatism,” he proffers, “is that it is resolutely free of nostalgia. It, too, claims the future–and it is this claim, more than anything else, that drives its critics on the Left into something approaching a frenzy of denunciation” (xii).

     

    9. Here I’m thinking of Walter Benjamin’s analysis of the cult in “Capitalism as Religion.” In this piece, Benjamin asserts that the specificity of capitalism as a mode of worship lies in its tendency to dispense with any specific dogma or theology other than the perpetuation of faith (288). The religion of capital, he argues, comes into its own when God himself is included in the logic of the promise and can no longer function as its transcendent reference point or guarantor. In its ultimate cultic form, the capitalist relation tends to become a promise that sustains its own promise, a threat that sustains its own violence. The gifts it dispenses emanate from a promissory future and forego all anchorage in the past. In this sense, it institutes a relation of guilt from which there is no relief or atonement.

     

    10. There is debate about the intellectual sources of neoliberalism. In his recent history of the concept, Harvey discerns a complex fusion of monetarism, rational expectations, public choice theory, and the “less respectable but by no means uninfluential ‘supply-side’ ideas of Arthur Laffer” (54). Like many others, he points to the crucial role played by the journalist and investment analyst George Gilder in popularizing neoliberal and supply-side economic ideas. However, I here follow Paul Krugman’s more detailed analysis of supply-side theory to argue that the supply-siders actually offered a radical critique of neoclassically inspired models of equilibrium economics such as monetarism. It was on the question of debt and budget deficits that at least some supply-siders took issue with the more traditional conservative economists. On these points, see Krugman 82-103 and 151-69. The supply-side gospel has come to be associated with Reagonomics–and it was under Reagan that U.S. federal debt first began to outpace GDP in relative terms (Krugman 152). But by far the most extreme experiment in deficit free-fall has been carried out under the administration of George W. Bush (Phillips 119-28; Press).

     

    Others have analyzed the religious dimension of neoliberalism by looking at Chicago-school monetarism (see for example Nelson and Taylor). I tend to think that monetarism is an easy target and that supply-side ideas, particularly as espoused by George Gilder, had much more influence on actual economic policy and popular cultures of neoliberalism. In this sense too, I tend to see complexity-influenced approaches to economics not as a counter to neoliberalism (as Taylor does) but as its ultimate expression. Gilder, for example, is a committed complexity theorist. For Gilder’s thoughts on U.S. debt, see Wealth and Poverty, 230; for his views on budget deficits under Bush, see “Market Economics and the Conservative Movement.”

     

    11. For a more detailed discussion on the sources of evangelical economics, see Lienesch 94-138.

     

    12. On the history of Roe v. Wade and the Christian Right, see Petchesky. On the specific links between the right to life movement and the born-again movement see Harding, 183-209.

     

    How can we situate this most recent revival of evangelicalism within the longer tradition of American Protestantism? It might be argued that the born-again movement of the seventies brings together the abiding concerns of the various evangelical strains of American Protestantism–republicanism, anti-authoritarianism and personal rebirth–with the reactionary tendencies of Baptist fundamentalism. What is now known as the fundamentalist wing of evangelical Christianity emerged in the early part of the twentieth century as an internal reaction against progressive forces within the Protestant Church. “Fundamentalism,” writes Ammerman, “differs from traditionalism or orthodoxy or even a mere revivalist movement. It differs in that it is a movement in conscious, organized opposition to the disruption of those traditions and orthodoxies” (14). After losing battles to prohibit the teaching of evolution in schools, fundamentalists retreated into relative political obscurity even as a new generation of non-separatist evangelists such as Billy Graham were increasingly willing to engage in public life. It was only in the seventies that this rift was repaired, as evangelicals started obsessing about the moral decline of America and fundamentalists once again came out of hiding to do battle for their faith. No doubt this reunion accounts for the coexistence of apparently contradictory tendencies within the contemporary born-again movement: future-oriented, transformative, but reactive nevertheless. On the differences between fundamentalist and non-fundamentalist Protestantism, see Ammerman, 1-63.

     

    13. Again, Harding presents a compelling account of this identification in the work of fundamentalist Baptist Jerry Falwell. But it recurs in the literature of the period. For an insight into the born-again ethos of this era, see Graham.

     

    14. On the links between the right to life movement and white supremacist groups, see Mason’s astonishing essay “Minority Unborn.”

     

    15. There is thus a fundamental ambivalence within the economic writings of the evangelicals, who on the one hand celebrate U.S. debt-creationism and on the other obsess over the need to cancel all debt, restore strict tariff and exchange controls, and reinstate the gold standard. On this point, see Lienesch, 104-07. Interestingly, the same ambivalence can be found amongst supply-side economists, some of whom advocate a return to the gold standard.

     

    16. On the convergence of the neoconservatives and the Religious Right, see Diamond 178-202 and Halper and Clarke 196-200.

     

    17. On the increasingly global reach of right-wing evangelical opinion, see Kaplan 219-43.

     

    18. In his book Holy Terrors, Bruce Lincoln explores the ways in which George W. Bush’s speeches make implicit reference to the language of the Religious Right, often borrowing their syntax and phraseology from popular evangelical tracts.

     

    Works Cited

    • Aglietta, Michel, and André Orléan. La Monnaie: Entre Violence et Confiance. Paris: Odile Jacob, 2002.
    • Aglietta, Michel, and André Orléan, eds. La Monnaie Souveraine. Paris: Odile Jacob, 1998.
    • Ammerman, Nancy T. “North American Protestant Fundamentalism.” Fundamentalisms Observed. Eds. Martin E. Marty and R. Scott Appleby. Chicago and London: U of Chicago P, 1991. 1-63.
    • Aquinas, Thomas. Basic Writings of Saint Thomas Aquinas: Volume 1. Ed. A. C. Pegis. New York: Random House, 1945.
    • Benjamin, Walter. “Capitalism as Religion.” 1921. Selected Writings 1913-1926. Eds. Marcus Bullock and Michael W. Jennings. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1999. 288-91.
    • Blaug, Mark, ed. St Thomas Aquinas (1225-1274) . Vol. 3. Pioneers in Economics. Aldershot: Edward Elgar, 1991.
    • Borger, Julian. “Alarm as Bush Plans Health Cover for Unborn.” The Guardian 7 July 2001: 5.
    • Brenner, Robert. The Boom and the Bubble: The U.S. in the World Economy. London: Verso, 2002.
    • Diamond, Sara. Roads to Dominion: Right-Wing Movements and Political Power in the United States. New York: Guilford, 1995.
    • George, Susan, and Fabrizio Sabelli. Faith and Credit: The World Bank’s Secular Empire. London: Penguin, 1994.
    • Gilchrist, J. The Church and Economic Activity in the Middle Ages. London: Macmillan, 1969.
    • Gilder, George. “The Faith of a Futurist: In the Future, as in the Past, Religious Faith is Central to the Process of Innovation.” The Wall Street Journal 31 Dec. 1999.
    • —. “Market Economics and the Conservative Movement.” Address. Philadelphia Society Address. Chicago. 1 May 2004.
    • —. Men and Marriage. New York: Basic, 1986.
    • —. Wealth and Poverty. New York: Basic, 1981.
    • Graham, Billy. The Holy Spirit: Activating God’s Power in Your Life. London: Collins, 1979.
    • Halper, Stefan, and Jonathon Clarke. America Alone: The Neo-Conservatives and the Global Order. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2004.
    • Harding, Susan Friend. The Book of Jerry Falwell: Fundamentalist Language and Politics. Princeton: Princeton UP, 2000.
    • Harvey, David. A Brief History of Neoliberalism. Oxford: Oxford UP, 2005.
    • Hudson, Michael. Super Imperialism: The Origins and Fundamentals of U.S World Dominance. London: Pluto, 2003.
    • Kaplan, Esther. With God on their Side: How Christian Fundamentalists Trampled Science, Policy and Democracy in George W. Bush’s White House. New York: New, 2004.
    • Kintz, Linda. Between Jesus and the Market: The Emotions that Matter in Right-Wing America. Durham: Duke UP, 1997.
    • Kristol, Irving. Reflections of a Neoconservative: Looking Back, Looking Ahead. New York: Basic, 1983.
    • Kristol, William, and George Weigel. “Life and the Party.” National Review 15 (1994): 53-57.
    • Krugman, Paul. Peddling Prosperity: Economic Sense and Nonsense in the Age of Diminished Expectations. New York: Norton, 1994.
    • Lehrman, Lewis E. “The Right to Life and the Restoration of the American Republic.” National Review 38 (1986): 25-30.
    • Lienesch, Michael. Redeeming America: Piety and Politics in the New Christian Right. Chapel Hill, NC: U of North Carolina P, 1993.
    • Lincoln, Bruce. Holy Terrors: Thinking about Religion after September 11. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2003.
    • Marx, Paul. The Death Peddlers: War on the Unborn, Past, Present, Future. Collegeville, MN: Human Life International, 1971.
    • Mason, Carol. “Minority Unborn.” Fetal Subjects, Feminist Positions. Ed. Lynn Marie Morgan and Meredith M. Michaels. Pennsylvania: U of Pennsylvania P, 1999. 159-74.
    • Massumi, Brian. “Requiem for our Prospective Dead (Toward a Participatory Critique of Capitalist Power.” Deleuze and Guattari: New Mappings in Politics, Philosophy and Culture. Eds. Eleanor Kaufman and Kevin Jon Heller. Minneapolis: U of Minneapolis P, 1998. 40-64.
    • Naylor, R.T. Hot Money and the Politics of Debt. London: Unwin Hyman, 1987.
    • Nelson, Robert H. Economics as Religion: From Samuelson to Chicago and Beyond. Pennsylvania: Pennsylvania State UP, 2002.
    • Noll, Mark A. America’s God: From Jonathan Edwards to Abraham Lincoln. New York: Oxford UP, 2002.
    • Novak, Michael. “The Principle’s the Thing.” National Review Online 10 Aug. 2001. <http://www.nationalreview.com/contributors/novak081001.shtml>.
    • Peele, Gillian. Revival and Reaction: The Right in Contemporary America. Oxford: Clarendon, 1984.
    • Petchesky, Rosalind P. Abortion and Woman’s Choice: The State, Sexuality and Reproductive Freedom. New York: Longman, 1984.
    • Phillips, Kevin. American Dynasty: Aristocracy, Fortune and the Politics of Deceit in the House of Bush. London: Penguin, 2004.
    • —. American Theocracy: The Peril and Politics of Radical Religion, Oil, and Borrowed Money in the 21st Century. New York: Viking, 2006.
    • Pixley, Jocelyn. Emotions in Finance: Distrust and Uncertainty in Global Markets. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2004.
    • Press, Eyal. “Even Conservatives are Wondering: Is Bush One of Us?” The Nation 31 May 2004: 11-20.
    • Robertson, Pat. The New World Order. Dallas: Word Publishing, 1991.
    • Simmel, Georg. The Philosophy of Money. Trans. Tom Bottomore and David Frisby. London: Routledge, 1978.
    • Taylor, Mark C. Confidence Games: Money and Markets in a World without Redemption. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2004.
    • “The Unborn and the Born Again.” The New Republic 2 July 1977: 5-6.
    • Weber, Max. The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism. Trans. Talcott Parsons. New York: Routledge, 2001.
    • The White House (George W. Bush). “Fact Sheet: Embryonic Stem Cell Research.” Washington DC: The White House, 2001.
    • —. “National Sanctity of Human Life Day, 2002: A Proclamation.” Washington DC: The White House, 2002.

     

  • A Dialogue on Global States, 6 May 2006

     

     

     

     

    Introduction by Global States conference organizers Anna Cavness, Jian Chen, Michelle Cho, Wendy Piquemal, Erin Trapp, and Tim Wong. Video by Laura Johnson.

     

    [image of Judith Butler and Gayatri Spivak]
     

    The following dialogue between Judith Butler and Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak took place on 6 May 2006 as the keynote event of the “Global States” Conference at the University of California, Irvine.

     
    The conference was organized by graduate students in the Department of Comparative Literature at UC Irvine. Participants were invited to address the term “state” and to consider the effect of the “global” on discourses of knowledge and power, literary analysis, and theories of subjectivity. The conference sought to reconceptualize the global by delineating states of sentiment, desire, and affect, and examining their deployment on–or relation to–the global scene of political and economic states.

     
    In their dialogue, Butler and Spivak discuss alternative subjectivities and state forms in a “global state.” In arguing for the possibilities afforded by forms of belonging that are unauthorized yet exist within the state, Judith Butler suggests that the “right” to rights arises in the form of social discourse–calling for freedom is already an exercise of freedom. Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak disarticulates the identity of state and nation and develops the concept of critical regionalisms as a new analytics of power that rethinks territoriality and sovereignty.

     

     

    University of California, Berkeley
    Columbia University

     

  • Constructing Ethnic Bodies and Identities in Miguel Angel Asturias and Rigoberta Menchú

     

    Arturo Arias

    Program in Latin American Studies
    University of Redlands
    arturo_arias@redlands.edu

     

    At the first conference on Maya studies in Guatemala City (August 1996), Luis Enrique Sam Colop, a K’iché Maya academic, public intellectual and newspaper columnist who debates politics in the national press, accused the country’s most celebrated Ladino writer, novelist Miguel Angel Asturias, of racism on the basis of ideas he expressed in his graduate thesis in 1923. When Ladino conservative pundit Mario Roberto Morales defended Asturias in turn, Mayas in the audience heckled him and agreed with Sam Colop. Their support for Sam Colop attests to the radical position many Mayas take regarding ethnic identity and to the leading role Sam Colop has played in debates on the subject since 1991, when he began to expose the historical roots and perniciousness of racism in the country.1Sam Colop made his statements about Asturias not simply to attack an obscure work that the Nobel laureate had written when he was still a student, before he had published anything literary or left for Europe, where he gained his insights on Maya culture, but as part of a strategy to challenge those who have presumed to speak for Mayas. His intervention created a public controversy in the Guatemalan press, because, as Kay B. Warren has pointed out, Sam Colop’s attitude generalized essentialist constructions to all non-Mayas, suggesting that all non-Mayas are racist (21). This controversy dragged into 2003, when K’iché Maya poet Humberto Ak’abal became the first Maya writer in Guatemala to be awarded the Miguel Angel Asturias National Prize in Literature, an honor he declined. He said that he refused to accept the prize because it was named for a Ladino writer who had made racist comments against indigenous peoples, this despite the fact that it was bestowed upon him by the country’s first Maya Minister of Culture, Otilia Lux de Cotí, a member of Ak’abal’s same ethnic group though of a different social and professional class, who defended the name of the award.

     

    The stance adopted by the group surrounding Sam Colop implicitly disqualified Asturias’s creative attempts to portray Guatemalan identity as ethnically hybrid.2 Ironically, these Mayas end up validating an essentialist position on indigenous ethnicity that is the photographic negative of many Ladinos’ pernicious essentialism regarding Mayas. Other Maya leaders, however, have generated a displacement in indigenous identity as part of an effort to build bridges toward ladinidad. In 1999, it was 1992 Nobel Peace Prize recipient Rigoberta Menchú who inaugurated Asturias’s centennial celebration at UNESCO headquarters in Paris and wrote the introduction to the event’s catalogue. She stated:

     

    The life and work of our Guatemalan brother, his written words in literary works . . . demonstrate in contextual arguments that the word and ideas are more effective than arms and violence. Love for others, respect for difference . . . his constant dialogue and cultural interchange . . . constitute the strength and immortality of his words. (16-17)

     

    Menchú’s assessment of Asturias invents a new dimension in Maya/Ladino relations, in which neither is the stained/blemished image of the other, but in which the a focus on relations of power has been interestingly displaced in favor of an emphasis on the Maya woman, thus reconfiguring ethnic and gender power. Menchú in turn re-presents Asturias and revalidates him on the global scene, underscoring his “respect for difference,” which locates the intercultural dialogic relationship between Mayas and Ladinos as a foundational element of Asturian textuality.

     

    Why this apparent contradiction between the stance of some Maya intellectuals, who accuse Asturias of racism, and Menchú, who defends the most prominent Ladino writer and man of letters? The present article addresses this question. It is concerned with explaining ethnic and gender contradictions in Guatemala as represented in two particular books, I, Rigoberta Menchú and Mulata, that are emblematic of the country’s two Nobel laureates, Miguel Angel Asturias (1967 Nobel Prize for literature) and Rigoberta Menchú (1992 Nobel Peace Prize). The literary works of both articulate a politics beholden neither to the nation-state nor to transnational politics, but rather reorganize the ethnic question altogether through a re-semantization that transforms ethnic identities in a way that destabilizes racial and gendered hierarchies.

     

    The Maya/Ladino ethnic conflict is a consequence of the Spanish invasion in 1524. The Maya population began to exercise a degree of authority in present-day Guatemalan politics, culture, and economy as a result of 37 years of civil war in this Central American country. The U.N. Truth Commission report states that between 1980 and 1986, the army wiped out well over 600 Maya villages. Over 100,000 people were killed, primarily older people, women, and children, and over a quarter of a million were driven into exile.3 However, this genocide led to a Maya cultural revival as well. Grassroots Maya leaders, of whom Menchú is only one, emerged from this process. Based on contextual elements of the Pop Wuj, the sacred book of the Mayas,these leaders and “organic intellectuals” forged collectively a cultural memory to counter their historical exclusion.4 This common text has enabled present-day Maya intellectuals to generate complex layer of textual symbolism that interplays past and present through the repetition of classical Maya motifs. The symbolism of ancestral images underlines the uninterrupted continuity of culture and community for more than 1,500 years, and questions the notion of “the fatherland” founded by Spanish conquistadors, a construct that thus becomes simply another discursive fiction in a nineteenth-century rhetoric that conceived of the nation as the imagined community of criollos, that is, full-blooded Europeans born in the Americas. Never mind that Ladinos, in reality, are people of mixed ethnic origin.

     

    Technically speaking, a Ladino can be any person of mixed European and indigenous origins.5 The epistemic and colonial difference of being labeled “Ladino,” as opposed to “Maya,” plays a role in the binary representation of urban and rural in Central America, and in the correspondent difference between “modern” and “primitive.” Despite their repeated displays of an ethnic inferiority complex in relation to “white Europeans,” for the most part Ladinos have self-defined as white, Western, and Christian in the process of nation-building projects that enabled them to constitute themselves as a hegemonic class in Central America. However, given the preponderance of indigenous genetic traits even among the Ladino population, Western clothing and the Spanish language have served them as ethnic identity markers.

     

    In the re-semantization of Asturias, Menchú becomes a Maya transvestite in the sense that in the international arena, she plays an ethnicized representational role that grants her both celebrity and authority that also empower her at the local level, while performing the role of submissive Maya woman dressed in colorful hüipiles for public consumption. Marjorie Garber uses the term “transvestite” to indicate a “‘category crisis’ disrupting and calling attention to cultural, social, or aesthetic dissonances . . . to disrupt, expose, and challenge” (16), thus questioning the possibility of a stable identity. In A Finger in the Wound: Body Politics in Quincentennial Guatemala, Diane M. Nelson also uses Garber to help her define Menchú as a transvestite, though she works equally with Lacanian terms to signal not only a “category crisis,” but also a failure of distinctions, a bodily borderline where Menchú represents the opposite of the castration anxiety. That is, she embodies the phantasmatic object you are afraid to see, namely a “masculine” indigenous woman, masculine because of her power and her globalized political clout, a “phallic woman” wielding the power that traditionally belonged only to Ladino men:

     

    She represents a category crisis that is both already underway (in the vibrant Mayan rights movement, growing feminism and popular and revolutionary organizations) but that is also always already there in the fluid constitutions of national, ethnic, and gender bodies politic in pre-and post-Quincentennial Guatemala. (190)

     

    In other words, the provocative use of the term “transvestite” in this fashion addresses the regulatory norms and erasures that structure the impact of her performativity on an audience.

     

    According to this logic, cross-dressing signifies the inversion of identities perceptually considered one’s “own,” with the result that the subject is located in a space apparently “outside one’s nature.” It is an instance of passing oneself off as another, a representation. As Garber affirms, it defies binarism by creating a third possibility as a mode of articulation, as a way of describing a space of possibilities that breaks with the notion of unitary identity (11) and that can subsequently generate possibilities for a “third space” of reading. The irruption of an unexpected element generates a crisis in the stability of the identitary category. This would also explain what Nelson calls “gender-intrigued reactions” to Menchú that are anxious “about the crossing of ethnic identity boundaries occasioned by an indigenous woman who is a thoroughly modern and well-spoken international celebrity” (196).

     

    The relationship between Menchú and Asturias can serve as a starting point for a consideration of their links to guatemalidad, understood here as a symbolic dis-location from a territorial imaginary that forces many subjects to cross-dress in order to hide both their exilic and their subaltern positions. This is especially true in the context of the criticism generated by their respective Nobel Prizes, given that both laureates have at different times been accused of projecting a false identity, of pretending to be who they were not. Asturias was accused of falsely portraying himself as a Maya when he was a Ladino. Menchú was accused of falsely portraying herself as an indigenous leader when she was a revolutionary militant.

     

    Why this negative reaction to their discursivities? To my way of thinking, this reaction reflects the difficulty a wide range of critics have accepting parameters that diverge too much from Eurocentric ones, especially when they are dealing with, and framing, issues and problems of global coloniality.6 They also do not understand that indigenous movements constitute a break with the Western sense of nation-building in their aim to create political and ethical “re-foundations.”7 Finally, this reaction reflects fears of phallic inadequacy that both Asturias’s and Menchú’s works generate among many of Guatemala’s Ladino males.

     

    In the case of Asturias, this deliberate cross-dressing appears in the foundational origin of his work. From the outset he was interested in creating a transvestized alternative Otherness of an emancipatory sort; what we know today as Mulata arose from what he conceived as a totalizing masterwork in the late 1920s and first expressed in Leyendas de Guatemala (1930). In that text, a male subject has a feminine life-experience because of his ethnic nature. Symbolically, the Ladino imaginary establishes a binarism, attributing masculinity to Ladino hegemony and associating indigenous subalternity with femininity.8 When it comes to identity, the “poet-prince” (as the character is described in the text, because he is a manifestation of Quetzalcoatl, the Plumed Serpent, god of knowledge and culture) knows that he is a subaltern ethnic subject, whose identity is associated with femininity. For this reason, he seeks to escape the restrictions of both by affirming his royal lineage.9 Femininity in this context is simply a repressed presence, and it is transferred to the woods roamed by Cuero de Oro, who will later become Kukulkán, the Plumed Serpent in question10: “Darkness falls without twilight, rivulets of blood flow between the trunks, a faint redness glows in the frogs’ eyes, and the forest becomes a tender, malleable, boneless mass, undulant like hair that smells of resin and lemon-tree leaves.”11 Cuero de Oro associates the jungle with femininity, but the jungle is himself. This is a clear act of transference. In the role of woman he is passive; he cannot advance because “the four roads were forbidden me” (32). When the forest turns hostile after the symbolic rape of the indigenous people by Spanish conqueror Pedro de Alvarado, it becomes a forest “of human trees,” and the roads turn in on themselves. Cuero de Oro then transforms into Kukulkán, which implies “ceasing to be a woman,” acquiring a masculine image, exercising a new discipline of power over his body. Hence the process of coiling up the snakes around his body, an obvious phallic symbol emphasized as such in the text: “The black ones rubbed my hair until they fell asleep with contentment, like females next to their males” (33). Now Cuero de Oro is Kukulkán, the (multi)colored snakes that possessed him are females, and he, “concupiscent,” feels himself growing roots, experiencing this as “sexual agony.” His roots grow like erect phalluses, until they take on the power of destruction associated with phallic power. At the same time, he misses his lost mobility. This phallic power is also the embrace of death, and thus “hurts the heart all the deeper” (34). Cuero de Oro sacrifices his feminine vitality for masculine power, which implies death, and his repressed impotence is projected as the invalidated feminine subject.12 Kukulkán, purified, re-emerges as a masculine subject charged with lethal power. In this way he externalizes the inherent impediment he had encountered in becoming the subject he imagined himself to be, the desired subject. He mystifies his problematic “femininity.” Freighted with the illusion of masculinity, he has no problem existing as the cross-dressed Kukulkán. The story’s stylistic complexity simultaneously obscures and makes visible the fault-line, the suture, in the phantasmatic unity of Asturias’s project of mestizaje (miscegenation). The asymmetry that undermines the purported equality between the two ethnic groups, projected onto the plane of sexuality, creates a sort of void on the political plane of the text. The inner peace that this resolution generates for Cuero de Oro, however, entails an inability to love. For him to be a Maya god means to dedicate himself wholly to the function of artifice. This redeems his art because he has found an entry into language in the process of becoming aware of his identity. But it makes him distant, if not impotent, indifferent to the desire of the Other. He sublimates the negation of his own sexuality in a mystical project, as do Catholic saints whose motivations transcend desire.

     

    In Mulata de tal (1963; Mulata, 1967) Asturias presents such “inversions” as a code when he refers to the invasion of his country in 1954 as a sexual “perversion” going against the “normal” reproductive role of society. In this way, he makes ethnicity and power twist and turn on the axis of sexuality’s “unspeakable practices” and “abominable acts” in the process of codifying this language as the expression of a different epistemology.

     

    In Mulata, the sexual ambiguity of the Mulata provides the starting point for an unending series of ethnic transfigurations and re-semantizations of linguistic and cultural signs. No one can define the Mulata, not even on the purely biological level: “I don’t know what she is, but she isn’t a man and she isn’t a woman either. She doesn’t have enough inky-dinky for a man and she has too much dinky-inky for a woman. Since you’ve never seen her from the front.”13 The sexual ambiguity of the Mulata is another instance of the polyvalent Guatemalan identity, and her sexual ambiguity creates confusion and anxiety for all the characters of the text, disturbing their own identities to such an extent that they actually become transformed into other characters with different ethnicities and genders. In this sense, the Mulata plays the emblematic role of the “phallic woman,” and as such she threatens the main character, Celestino Yumí, with symbolic castration, a literary pre-enactment of the situation previously described of Menchú’s ambivalent relation to restrictive Ladino masculinist power in Guatemala. But by also being the moon, the Law of the Mother, the mulata implies fear of castration. Celestino finds and marries the Mulata after making a pact with the Maya devil (figured as the corn god Tazol) in which he trades his wife Catalina for the ability to turn corn into gold. The Mulata, in turn, torments Celestino, threatening to kill him for his golden skeleton. Later in the novel, Celestino repents of his choice and helps Catalina escape, but she is now a dwarf and becomes the Mulata’s slave and fetishized toy. Celestino and Catalina trick the Mulata and lock her in a cave and trade their ethnic peasant identities for the magical powers of a hybridized religion of devil-worship in Tierrapaulita, but the Mulata does not remain buried. Rather, she resurfaces in a catastrophic earthquake and reclaims her power through a series of transfigurations and fragmentations, which include the detachment of her prominent female sexual organs, which thereafter circulate on their own. For Freud, all fetishes are substitutes for the phallus the woman has lost: fetishism is a mechanism to quell the fear of castration on the part of male subjects. If the simulacrum of the phallus is at the base of Sadean representation, the fear of losing it is equally key to Asturian representation (Frappier-Mazur 80). Thus in Mulata the female sex organs acquire the value of a fetish object both from the semiotic and from the psychoanalytic points of view. Recall that in Freud’s thinking, if the female subject is “castrated,” the male subject is also in danger of becoming so. On the other hand, emphasis on the female sex organs can proclaim their superiority to the phallus, and this inversion can reverberate to the male subject as a sign of impotence.

     

    Asturias represents these travestisms as metamorphoses in Mulata, radical transformations in the bodies of the characters that make them almost unrecognizable and that illustrate the ways in which a variety of Guatemalan subjects cloak themselves in deceptive vestments to appropriate authority and power. At the novel’s climax, Celestino Yumí battles the Mulata, symbolically represented at this point by the priest, Father Chimalpín, who then takes the form of a cassocked spider, an emblematic act of transvestism, given that priests dress as women. But it is also an act of syncretism, where the devils, Tazol and Candanga, are embodied by priests, who are then variously gendered. The priest had earlier entered the body of the sexton, who himself becomes the character Jerónimo de la Degollación and tries to possess Celestino: he opens his cape, and “on the pretext of giving him the chamber pot (tries to) despoil him of his male attributes” (232). But Jerónimo is also the transvestite Mulata, the first “phallic” woman, complicating the sexual symbolism. The union of the priest, Jerónimo de la Degollación, and the sexton through this joint identification with and “possession” by the Mulata also underscores the eminently queer nature of the sexton, of the Mulata herself, and of Celestino’s desire for the Mulata (whom he always sexually possessed from behind). Celestino has never ceased to desire her, which implies a minimal recognition of his homosexual desire. Seeing himself confronted openly by Jerónimo, he reacts as would any “macho” who could not admit to homoerotic desire; that is, with violence. Textually, this is represented on a plane of illusion, of fantasy: in a symbolic cross-dressing, Celestino sprouts spines from his smallpox scars and is converted into a giant porcupine. Transformed, he penetrates Jerónimo–whose own desire is fully evident–with those phallic protuberances and leaves him for dead. Next he goes after the “cassocked spider,” the transvestized Father Chimalpín. The response of Celestino-as-porcupine may be fantasioso (conceited), but it is also phantasmatic. The subject’s orifices are transformed into barbs/penises, to carry out an imaginary penetration of Jerónimo, the Mulata, and the priest, who is also the “father,” reproducing his psychological struggle with the paternal image. Chimalpín ends up in the same condition as Celestino: pitted with smallpox, punctured with holes, feminized. The subject’s hatred for the paternal image is read as recognition of the father’s homosexual tendencies and as a deconstruction of the virile subject.

     

    These complex relations and representations delineate for Asturias the history of relations between the United States and Guatemala, and in particular the U.S.-sponsored 1954 invasion that overthrew Guatemala’s democracy and unleashed a 37-year-long civil war, an issue I develop extensively in my critical edition of Asturias’s Mulata.14 But he also sees that history as part of a global design, to paraphrase Mignolo. Reading the text as a symbolic re-encoding of the political, a metaphorized story of his country, gives it a new meaning. The subject’s inability to coexist with the figures of the father and the mother implies the impossibility of encountering common spaces in which to forge social, community, or national ties. The meta-fictional value of the text becomes evident when we understand its narrative as the encoded chronicle of a nation’s destruction.

     

    We can read the text another way by substituting for the signs in question the identity tropes of Ladinos and Mayas, and U.S. academics’ determination to normalize them within Western parameters. It may well be that Mulata is a novel and not a testimony, but the text certainly demands a knowledge of the paratextual context, as does Menchú’s text. They address the same local history, with the same imperial connotations. Nonetheless, in Guatemalan discourse, the relationships between enunciations and the institutional spaces of criticism have nothing to do with the nation-state, since the criticism of both proceeds from beyond its boundaries. Mulata was called an “untruthful novel” by South American critics of the 1960s, such as Emir Rodríguez Monegal and Angel Rama, who, defending existing hegemonic narratives, labeled it as “premodern” on the grounds that Asturias merely “copied” readily-available indigenous sources. By contrast, novels emphasizing urban/metropolitan topics were celebrated for accentuating their European roots in the process of elaborating stylistic experimentations. According to this bias, urban/cosmopolitan writers were read (and celebrated) for their innovative styles, whereas writers such as Asturias were read (and panned) for content, while their equally innovative styles went ignored. Once their work had been found guilty of essentialized primitivism because of its double consciousness of modernity/coloniality, much of Latin American metropolitan “taste” assumed that no possible notion of style or textual strategy could be submerged there.15 None of the critics who made these charges were Central American, nor did they take into account the region’s singular ethnic and political realities in their readings of the novel. They did, however, attempt to silence it, in a preamble to Menchú’s later testimony. As a result, it took Gerald Martin’s Journeys Through the Labyrinth: Latin American Fiction in the Twentieth Century (1989) to re-establish Asturias’s reputation as a precursor to Latin America’s 1960s literary boom in the English-speaking world, a prestige he had retained exclusively in France, thanks primarily to the efforts of Amos Segala and the Association d’Amis de Miguel Angel Asturias.16

     

    The South American furor against Asturias, which extended to the U.S. when his critics moved to leading American universities, brought to bear a power/knowledge relationship that imposed certain cosmopolitan prejudices against marginality: racial prejudices toward indigenous subjectivity, geopolitical prejudices toward Central America, machista prejudices against women and the specter of homosexuality. These came in the guise of supposedly modernistic aesthetics. Thus Asturian textuality remains to this day relegated in the Latin American literary canon, created by cosmopolitan critics from South America in U.S. universities, to the pejorative classification of “premodern literature” and to the sub-genre of the Latin American “novela indigenista,” and Mulata, a true masterpiece, languishes in critical oblivion, branded as an unintelligible or unstructured novel.17

     

    In an important section of Mulata Celestino meets the “Sauvages,” people transformed into boars for refusing to be dehumanized. That is, in this additional form of cross-dressing, the only civilized subjects are “mistakenly,” from an epistemological point of view, called “Sauvages.” Their description is accompanied by a meditation on writing, positioned as hieroglyphic repositories of collective memory: “Crags covered with blue-greenish lichens on which the tusks of the Sauvages had drawn capricious signs. Could that be their way of writing? Did they keep their annals in those drawings made with the tips of their tusks?”18 Celestino, in other words, cannot “read” them. The cryptic meaning of the capricious signs evokes the glyphs on Maya monoliths, which tell a story incomprehensible to a traditional Western mind that refuses to see how colonial power conforms the space-in-between. It is a story that has already ended, brought to closure by imperialist intervention. The subaltern subject, civilized despite being called “Sauvage” by the dominant Other, possesses a discourse and a history that remain incomprehensible to those who attempt to fit them into a foreign cultural mold.

     

    Now let us return to Menchú. Her testimonio I, Rigoberta Menchú (1984) is also misread because its project resembles Asturias’s:

     

    All the (Maya beauty) queens go with the customs from the different regions . . . . There are always a lot of tourists . . . . And they take all the photos they want. But, for an Indian, taking a photo of him in the street is abusing his dignity, abusing him . . . . A friend who was a queen told me that they taught her how to present herself. This compañera couldn’t speak Spanish very well, so she had to learn the boring little speech she was going to give: greetings for the President, greetings for the most important guests, greetings for the army officers . . . . This is what hurts Indians most. It means that, yes, they think our costumes are beautiful because it brings in money, but it’s as if the person wearing it doesn’t exist. (208-09)

     

    This fragment evidences an anxiety about dressing as a Maya woman for the Ladino gaze, and about being fetishized as such. The implication here is that Maya women are forced to perform an act that is not intrinsic to their culture, one for which only their exoticized clothing is valued, but not the person wearing it. The picture-taking implies a commodification of the person wearing Maya clothing as well, while having to learn a speech in the language, Spanish, that was the only official language in Guatemala until 1996, indicates the Mayas’ subaltern status as colonized subjects within their own country.

     

    However, Menchú herself turns the tables around by performing in public while wearing those very clothes as a sign of her identity; she has made a point of never appearing in public wearing Western clothes, though she normally switches to blue jeans and other Westernized items for comfort in private.19 This apparent contradiction has to do with Menchú’s intuitive recognition that, paraphrasing Saldaña-Portillo, Mayas might be Guatemala’s ideal ancestors, but Ladinos are Guatemala’s ideal citizens.20 At the same time, she knows that Maya clothing is both about social identity and about the construction of gender, which was a fluid potential, not a fixed category, before the Spaniards came to Mesoamerica in any case.21 Ethnicized clothing is, after all, a symbolic cultural product that represents cultural affirmation, and dress serves as a site for the continual renegotiation of identity–gendered, ethnic and otherwise. It is part of the systemic structure that supports ethnic identities and the formation of ethnicized communities. Thus Menchú places ethnicity at the fulcrum of a new, hybrid national identity that will redefine Guatemala in the future. That is why, in her book, every single chapter has an epigraph that quotes either the Pop Wuj, Asturias’s Men of Maize, or Menchú herself, the three dominant voices that articulate the interrleations in her understanding of a new matrix forming guatemalidad. Interspersed within her life story are chapters describing birth ceremonies, the nahual, ceremonies for sowing time and harvest, marriage ceremonies, and death rituals. For example:

     

    Every child is born with a nahual. The nahual is like a shadow, his protective spirit who will go through life with him. The nahual is the representative of the earth, the animal world, the sun and water, and in this way the child communicates with nature. The nahual is our double, something very important to us. (18)

     

    In the process, she impersonates male, foreign anthropologists, while simultaneously retaining her position as a subaltern indigenous woman informant. In the quote above, this tension is clear. The first three sentences could very well have been taken from any classical anthropological book, such as those by Adams.22 However, in the fourth sentence, the possessive pronoun “our” and the indirect object pronoun “us” that underline the “possession” of this trait, signal her belonging to that specific community and mark a crossing over in reverse: from the Western centrality of the discourse that names marginality, back to ethnicized marginality itself as “home.”

     

    Needing to appropriate for herself the construction of a Pan-Maya identity in this stance, Menchú represents herself as embracing traditional Maya religion, given its role as an axiological basis for the definition of identity. Still Menchú is, officially, a practicing Catholic, a member, as was her father, of Acción Católica, an organization that attacked the shrine of Pascual Abaj, one of the best-known shrines of traditional Maya religion, in Chichicastenango in 1976, as Duncan Earle has documented (292). The example quoted above is one indication of Menchú’s syncretism. Nahuals are exclusive to practicioners of Maya religion. The same is true of other rituals, such as the sowing ceremonies:

     

    The fiesta really starts months before when we asked the earth’s permission to cultivate her. In that ceremony we incense, the elected leaders say prayers, and then the whole community prays. We burn candles in our own houses and other candles for the whole community. Then we bring out the seeds we will be sowing. (52)

     

    This passage describes part of the fiesta system that Earle defines as the basis for the development of indigenous authority anchored in Maya religion (293). It underscores the Maya cosmological system whereby vegetation, the human life cycle, kinship, modes of production, religious and political hierarchy, and conceptions of time and celestial movement are unified. This quote also reflects the Maya cosmological viewpoint, a complex, three-dimensional conceptualization involving cross sections of the universe and specific boundaries or points in space. These are not, however, compatible with a Catholic understanding of the world. We can see another example of Menchú’s cross-dressing as a Maya shaman to imagine a syncretic religion when she details other prayers:

     

    We pray to our ancestors, reciting their prayers which have been known to us for a long time–a very, very long time. We evoke the representatives of the animal world; we say the names of dogs. We say the names of the earth, the God of the earth, and the God of water. Then we say the name of the heart of the sky–the Sun. (57)

     

    This cosmological vision is, again, typical of Maya religion and not at all Catholic. Still, Menchú makes it her own with the subject pronoun “we,” repeated five times in this short passage, which also denotes possession, and is marked emphatically by the object pronoun “us.” The phrase “a long time–a very, very long time” also gives rise to a textual interplay between the Maya classical past and the present, common among defenders of Maya religion; it denotes a desire to underscore the uninterrupted continuity of Maya culture and community of more than 1,500 years. This concept of time not only erases traditional Ladino periodicity, but also creates within the text a foundational act to nurture that imaginary continuity of Maya history. Nevertheless, it is a contradiction with the genealogy of her Catholic faith, and that of Acción Católica, the organization in which her father was a catechist, and which propelled her activism. These quotes show that, in her quest for a unification of heterogenous peoples and systems of belief, Menchú poses as a Maya priestess, a shamanic role that does not belong to her, as it involves the intertwining of cosmology, culture, history, and language.23 Her own words fail to account for these complex relationships. Earle situates Menchú’s need to anchor her vision in a religious axiological constituent, and to impersonate a shamanistic voice, “in the context of a priest-based” religious social system (305) that enables her to “make coherent and unified statements that are hopeful and empowering, without contradictions or inner conflicts” (306). This re-semantization transforms her into a symbolic ethnic religious cross-dresser.

     

    Like transvestism, “cross-dressing” also applies to Guatemalan ethnicity. Nelson begins her chapter on “Gendering the Ethnic-National Question” with a reference to Maya women “and the anxiety of cross-dressing” (170), linking this term to the ambiguity of dressing Western as opposed to dressing Mayan. There are lines of flight in it, because it is an assemblage of a multiplicity of perceptions without a center that does not refer to verifiable data but only to the actual process of its own reiteration as a “truth effect.” Its repetition–a sort of never-ending dress rehearsal–produces and sustains the power of the truth effect and the discursive regime that has constructed it and that operates in the production of racialized and ethnicized bodies.

     

    In this sense, the symbolic use of cross-dressing seems appropriate to describe the gendering of ethnic politics in a country where dressing in traditional Maya costume, as opposed to dressing in Western clothing, defined ethnicity for many decades.24 As Nelson indicates, Maya women’s traditional colorful clothing has been commodified to attract tourists (170), and their alleged passivity is supposed to be emblematic of the expected behavior of all indigenous peoples. She adds: “When Ladino candidates touring the country for votes think they’ve found ‘the real Guatemala’ on the shores of Lake Atitlán, it is the traditionally costumed, dutifully worshipping Mayan woman they refer to” (170). Nelson concludes that Mayas “disappear” when they take off their traje. She could have very well added that they become Ladinos, the simplest definition of which would be a person with indigenous traits dressed in Western clothing, as Adams asserted in the 1950s.

     

    Menchú was misunderstood and misrepresented by a U.S. anthropologist who spearheaded a conservative reaction against the testimonial genre by returning to universalist juridical principles that claimed to articulate known “truths.”25 Returning to the psychoanalytic reading I began with Asturias, we can also read in Menchú and in reactions to her a similar psychoanalytic imaginary, expressed by a whole series of linguistic cross-dressings, the symbolic re-encoding of Maya/Ladino relations. In this reading, the Maya becomes the fetish of the Ladino. The symbolic castration experienced by the subaltern subject also endangers the Ladino because the latter fears that castration can be reversed. Similarly, emphasis on what is Maya proclaims its superiority. This is why in Menchú the Ladino is obsessed with stealing the Maya’s jouissance. This act, however, would involve the negation of the differences between both groups. When the Maya acquires power, the Ladino subject makes a contract with his “ideal woman” to be reborn by her hands. However, the Candanga (Devil) from another world, the North American anthropologist David Stoll, breaks this contract by denying her validity, symbolically castrating her and by extension the male Ladino. Ladinos are forced into the position of having to defend Menchú against the attack that calls into question this new agreement. This would explain why figures from the Guatemalan Right, such as Jorge Skinner Kleé, joined forces to defend the wronged woman in 2000 (see The Rigoberta Menchú Controversy).

     

    Asturias was also misunderstood and misrepresented by a universalist literary criticism that reacted against the transcultural ethnic subjectivity, mockery of Western culture, and ambiguous sexuality in his novels.26 Thus Menchú and Asturias have in common, independently of their different géneros (genres, but also genders, in Spanish), the misreading by critics who cannot see the signs of an alternative set of principles that anchors Mesoamerican identity and constitutes its cultural matrix, outside the Western parameters they favor. Postcolonial theorists have argued that Western critics customarily encounter their own limitations when they confront that Other who does not return their gaze as they would like to see it returned. In this case, the problem arises from an original imperialist negation of the paratextual context that determines Menchú’s and Asturias’s particular ethnicizing positionalities, a hybrid but predominantly indigenous condition that is the source of all their enunciations. This discursivity can only be deciphered by looking beyond the boundaries of the Western genres–novel, testimonio–in which it is expressed, and by truly exploring a “third space” of reading in the sense defined by Garber. Nonetheless, criticism of Asturias has limited itself to the thematic aspect of his work, and assessments of Menchú are framed by a definition of what truthful testimony is supposed to be.

     

    But then, can we assume that the very guatemalidad that dispossesses them also unites them? Both Asturias and Menchú are “Sauvages.” Both are keepers of the capricious signs that guard their stories and remain meaningless to those who wish to invisibilize the guatemalidad in their writing as a conceptual horizon. Both of them depart from a specific referent to trace their singular vision of an imaginary community’s desire, structured by their phantasmatic nostalgia for a fatherland as an authenticating mechanism. However, even if both imagine a community named “Guatemala,” Asturias and Menchú–and the ethnicized classes they have come to represent–certainly imagine different cultural events and evoke emotional ties not necessarily leading to unification through a common language, religion, or race. The nation-state, Deleuze and Guattari claim, is nothing more than a model for a particular realization (456), an artifice, an illusion. Its formation usually implies a struggle against imperial powers, but it also connotes a totalitarian deployment against its own minorities for the sake of forming a new homogeneous space corresponding to a collective subjectivization that encodes the supposed nationality, as happened in Guatemala between Ladinos and Mayas. As with identity, nationality is a concept that at times only generates the illusion of a possible explanation for collective belonging, as a will to be a part of a political community emerging, in Latin America’s case, through the convergence of historical forces during the nineteenth century that led to the hegemony of a Western-looking patriarchal criollo oligarchy.27 Indeed, Menchú refuses to speak of a nation, to avoid both the trap of falling into Maya ethnic nationalism, extant among the various Maya ethnic groups vying for indigenous hegemony, and the negative model of the existing “Ladino nation.” However, she does speak of being “Guatemalan.” The desire for a collective identity shapes both her narrative and Asturias’s with similar symbolic assemblages, which allow a Ladino novelist and a Maya K’iché testimonialist to touch each other without becoming the same. “Guatemala” is in this way transformed into a conceptual horizon, a particular nostalgia for spaces with certain traits to which its members adhere emotionally, a certain cultural sensibility with unique inflections and connotations.

     

    Finally, it must be added that in both cases, the instability of the gendered, ethnic body is significant. It destabilizes identities at the biological level and resignifies them while revealing how the layers of meaning ascribed to them are instead colonizing strategies. Needless to say, that is why they make hegemonic heteronormative males nervous.

     

    Notes

     

    1. For Colop’s ideas and standing see chapter six in Warren’s Indigenous Movements and Their Critics: Pan-Maya Activism in Guatemala. The 7 August 1996 panel included the author of this article as well as Morales and Colop. Thus, though I also presented on Asturias on that occasion, I also witnessed Colop’s presentation, Morales’s reply, the audience heckling Morales and supporting Colop, followed by Morales stepping off the podium angrily and abandoning the room to a crescendo of boos from the audience.

     

    2. I employ hybridity here in relation to race, as it has developed in transnational theories of the 1990s traced by Lund in The Impure Imagination: Toward a Critical Hybridity in Latin American Writing.

     

    3. See the U.N.’s Truth Commission report, Guatemala, Memoria del Silencio.

     

    4. I use here Gramsci’s concept of “organic intellectuals” with the caveat that by organic intellectuals I mean Maya subjects who, emerging from subaltern conditions of exploitation and racism, nevertheless managed to obtain university degrees at U.S. or European universities. They returned to Guatemala’s civil society not as academics, but as grassroots leaders, or as professional cadres exercising governmental functions, or as leaders of international agencies that benefited Maya people.

     

    5.”Ladino” is a word originating in colonial times, designating someone who speaks Latin (and, thus, someone who works at the service of the local priest, an interstitial space and positioning between the West and its Other). Mayas were forbidden from learning Spanish during colonial times for fear that they could acquire useful knowledge along with their linguistic skills. During the nineteenth century there were sizable Belgian and German migrations to the country, and most Belgians and Germans mixed with Mayas, adding a new variant to Guatemala’s miscegenation process. In the late nineteenth century and early twentieth century significant numbers of Italian migrants also mixed with Mayas. Ladinos, however, regardless of their ancestry, generally consider themselves “white,” are proud of their European origins, frequently deny that they have any indigenous blood in their ancestry, and invariably consider themselves Western in outlook.

     

    6. Westernism, “Occidentalismo” in Spanish, as defined by Mignolo and Dussel, is the Other of Orientalism, in the sense employed by Said. In other words, it is a will to be Westernized, a will to belong to the Western world.

     

    7. Menchú is not interested in creating an autonomous Maya nation in the traditional sense, geographically separate from the Ladino-dominated Guatemalan nation, but rather to Mayanize the existing Ladino-dominated Guatemala in a co-habitation process that would lead ultimately to a recognition of the often hybrid and predominantly Mayan identity of the nation. See my article “Conspiracy on the Sidelines: How the Maya Won the War.”

     

    8. What is at play is power relations: what counts is who is “on top” and who is “on the bottom,” the last being associated with weakness, submissiveness, passivity, surrender, traits that justify oppression and discrimination. “The conquered was conquered for being weak, and therefore deserves to be treated like a woman” would be the operative axiom in the subconscious of the Ladino in this text, who is thus ashamed of and denies the indigenous/woman side of himself in the process of projecting his identity as an instrument to mediate his fragmented subjectivity, adapting the inner not only to the outer but to an imagined “Western” behavior pattern that expresses a desire more than a reality.

     

    9. Prieto notes that Asturias associated his “Spanish” side with his father, and his more mestizo, even more “indigenous” side with his mother (120), symbolically ratifying this binarism. All cited passages correspond to the 1993 edition.

     

    10. A similar transference occurs in El señor presidente (1945), Asturias’s best-known novel, in the scene where Cara de Angel and Camila walk through the forest toward the baths.

     

    11. In the original Spanish: “Oscurece sin crepúsculo, corren hilos de sangre entre los troncos, delgado rubor aclara los ojos de las ranas y el bosque se convierte en una masa maleable, tierna, sin huesos, con ondulaciones de cabellera olorosa a estoraque y a hojas de limón” (31).

     

    12. In this sense, it is a sort of “Faustian bargain” analogous to that of Celestino Yumí with Cashtoc in Mulata.

     

    13. In the original Spanish: “No sé lo que es, pero no es hombre y tampoco es mujer. Para hombre le falta tantito tantote y para mujer le sobra tantote tantito. A que jamás la has visto por delante” (60). The translation cited throughout is by Gregory Rabassa.

     

    14. See my “Transgresión erótica, sujeto masoquista y recodificación de valores simbólicos en Mulata de tal.” Unfortunately, this article has been published only in Spanish. The only other critic to mention this problematic is Prieto in his chapter on Mulata in Miguel Angel Asturias’s Archeology of Return.

     

    15. This assertion is mentioned originally by Gerald Martin in “Asturias, Mulata de Tal y el ‘realismo mítico’ (en Tierrapaulita no amanece).” Idelber Avelar also problematizes it in his introduction to Local Histories/Global Designs: Coloniality, Subaltern Knowledges, and Border Thinking. Finally, I develop it further in Taking Their Word: Literature and the Signs of Central America.

     

    16. Amos Segala, personal communication, Paris, 16 November 1998. Needless to say, Asturias has remained a celebrity in his native Guatemala, and in the entire Central American region. However, even in Mexico, he is overshadowed by the cult status of his Guatemalan contemporary Luis Cardoza y Aragón, a leading Surrealist poet who befriended Diego Rivera and Frida Kahlo.

     

    17. As we know, inside what is called “Latin American literature” there exist several marginalized, opaqued, sidelined literatures, “minor” literatures in the sense of Deleuze and Guattari. “Latin American literature” has been, by and large, one more illusion produced in the late 1970s, a phenomenon also worthy of a thoroughgoing study.

     

    18. In the original Spanish: “Peñascales recubiertos de líquenes azulverdosos, en los que los colmillazos de los Salvajos dibujaban signos caprichosos. Sería su forma de escribir? Guardarían en aquellos trazos hechos a punta de colmillo, su historia?” (83).

     

    19. Regarding her refusal to appear in public in western clothes, Menchú communicated this to me while wearing blue jeans during dinner in Arturo Taracena’s house, Paris, France, 26 January 1982. Besides Menchú, Taracena and myself, Pantxika Cazaux, Sophie Féral and Juan Mendoza were also present.

     

    20. In fact, Saldaña-Portillo is talking about Mexico. She originally states: “Indians may be Mexico’s ideal ancestors, but mestizos are Mexico’s ideal citizens” (294-95). The extrapolation is justified because Guatemala built its own modern national identity based on Mexico’s policies of indigenismo. Saldaña-Portillo mentions in her article that this happened in Mexico during the Cárdenas administration in the 1930s. The same policies were exported to Guatemala in the late 1940s through the dynamic relationship between Vicente Lombardo Toledano, founder of the Confederation of Mexican Workers (CTM) and a close collaborator of Cárdenas, and Guatemala’s labor leaders and cabinet members of the Arévalo government of this period, which included pro-indigenista social scientists such as Mario Monteforte Toledo and Antonio Goubaud Carrera.

     

    21. Joyce makes this argument in Gender and Power in Prehispanic Mesoamerica, stating that “unlike the modern European solution to the imposition of disciplinary norms of gender and the production of sexed positions, the citational norms of Mesoamerica were based on the conception of human subjectivity as fluid” (198).

     

    22. See, for example, Political Changes in Rural Guatemalan Communities: A Symposium.

     

    23. Indeed, at the Russell Tribunal trial in Madrid, Spain, that condemned Guatemala’s dictatorship for genocide, in January 1983, where both she and I were witnesses for the prosecution, I saw her literally perform the role of a Maya priestess on stage at the Teatro de la Villa, in a short presentation staged by Guatemalan playwright Manuel José Arce and directed by Roberto Díaz Gomar.

     

    24. See Adams’s writings on ethnic differentiation from the 1950s. His works are emblematic of the positivist, pre-structural legacy of American anthropology in Guatemala’s ethnic studies.

     

    25. See my edited book The Rigoberta Menchú Controversy regarding this matter.

     

    26. I refer to the criticism of Asturias’s work by Rodríguez Monegal, Rama, and Rufinelli, who accuse him of being a “bad writer.” See Martin’s “Asturias, Mulata de tal y el realismo mítico (en Tierrapaulita no amanece).”

     

    27. This is a preoccupation for Moreiras in examining the articles of Beverley and Sommer on Menchú (210). Shukla and Tinsman also show how Latin American cultural critics problematize the concept of nation.

     

     

    Works Cited

    • Adams, Richard N., ed. Political Changes in Rural Guatemalan Communities: A Symposium. MARI Pub.4. New Orleans: Tulane UP, 1957.
    • Anderson, Benedict. Imagined Communities: Reflections on the Origin and Spread of Nationalism. London: Verso, 1983.
    • Arias, Arturo. “Conspiracy on the Sidelines: How the Maya Won the War.” Cultural Agency in the Americas. Ed. Doris Sommer. Durham: Duke UP, 2006. 167-77.
    • —, ed. The Rigoberta Menchú Controversy. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2001.
    • —. Taking Their Word: Literature and the Signs of Central America. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2007.
    • —. “Transgresión erótica, sujeto masoquista y recodificación de valores simbólicos en Mulata de tal.” Miguel Angel Asturias, Mulata de tal: Edición crítica. Ed. Arturo Arias. Madrid: Archivos, 2000. 956-78.
    • Asturias, Miguel Angel. Leyendas de Guatemala. Madrid: Oriente, 1930.
    • —. Men of Maize. Trans. Gerald Martin. Pittsburgh: U of Pittsburgh P, 1995.
    • —. Mulata. Trans. Gregory Rabassa. New York: Seymour Lawrence/Delacorte, 1967.
    • Avelar, Idelber. The Untimely Present: Postdictatorial Latin American Fiction and the Task of Mourning. Durham: Duke UP, 1999.
    • Burgos-Debray, Elisabeth, ed. I, Rigoberta Menchú: An Indian Woman in Guatemala. Trans. Ann Wright. London: Verso, 1984.
    • Deleuze, Gilles, and Felix Guattari. A Thousand Plateaus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. Trans. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987.
    • Delgado, L. Elena, and Rolando J. Romero. “Local Histories and Global Designs: An Interview with Walter Mignolo.” Discourse 22.3 (Fall 2000): 7-33.
    • Dussel, Enrique. Etica de la Liberación en la Edad de la Globalización y de la Exclusión. Madrid: Trotta, 1998.
    • Earle, Duncan. “Menchú Tales and Maya Social Landscapes: the Silencing of Words and Worlds.” The Rigoberta Menchú Controversy. Ed. Arturo Arias. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2001. 288-308.
    • Frappier-Mazur, Lucienne. Writing the Orgy: Power and Parody in Sade. Trans. Gillian C. Gill. Philadelphia: U of Pennsylvania P, 1996.
    • Freud, Sigmund. “Fetishism.” On Sexuality. Vol. 7. London: Pelican Freud Library, 1977. 345-57.
    • Garber, Marjorie. Vested Interests: Cross-Dressing and Cultural Anxiety. New York: Routledge, 1992.
    • García Canclini, Néstor. La globalización imaginada. México: Paidós, 1999.
    • —. “Entrar y salir de la hibridación.” Revista de crítica literaria latinoamericana Año XXV No. 50. 2nd Semester 1999. 53-58.
    • Joyce, Rosemary A. Gender and Power in Prehispanic Mesoamerica. Austin: U of Texas P, 2000.
    • Lund, Joshua. The Impure Imagination: Toward a Critical Hybridity in Latin American Writing. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2006.
    • Martin, Gerald. Journeys Through the Labyrinth: Latin American Fiction in the Twentieth Century. London: Verso, 1989.
    • —. “Asturias, Mulata de Tal y el ‘realismo mítico’ (en Tierrapaulita no amanece).” Miguel Angel Asturias, Mulata de tal: Edición crítica. Ed. Arturo Arias. Madrid: Archivos, 2000. 979-86.
    • Mignolo, Walter. Local Histories/Global Designs: Coloniality, Subaltern Knowledges, and Border Thinking. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton UP, 2000.
    • Moreiras, Alberto. “The Aura of Testimonio.” The Real thing: Testimonial Discourse and Latin America. Ed. Georg M. Gugelberger. Duke UP, 1996. 192-224.
    • Nelson, Diane M. A Finger in the Wound: Body Politics in Quincentennial Guatemala. Berkeley: U of California P, 1999.
    • Pratt, Mary Louise. Imperial Eyes: Travel Writing and Transculturation. New York: Routledge, 1992.
    • Prieto, René. Miguel Angel Asturias’s Archeology of Return. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1993.
    • Saldaña-Portillo, María Josefina. “Reading a Silence: The ‘Indian’ in the Era of Zapatismo.” Nepantla 3.2 (2002): 287-314.
    • Shukla, Sandhya, and Heidi Tinsman. “Editor’s Introduction.” Radical History Review 89 (Spring 2004): 1-10.
    • Sommer, Doris. Proceed With Caution, When Engaged by Minority Writing in the Americas. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1999.
    • United Nations CEH. Guatemala, Memoria del Silencio. Vol 6: Casos Ilustrativos. Annex 1. Guatemala: Informe de la Comisión Para el Esclarecimiento Histórico, 1999.
    • Warren, Kay B. Indigenous Movements and Their Critics: Pan-Maya Activism in Guatemala. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1998.

     

  • Notices

    Ronald Sukenick/American Book Review Innovative Fiction Prize

    Eligibility

    The Ronald Sukenick/American Book ReviewInnovative Fiction Contest is open to any writer of English who is a citizen of the United States and who has not previously published with Fiction Collective Two. Submissions may include a collection of short stories, one or more novellas, or a novel. Works that have previously appeared in magazines or in anthologies may be included. Translations and previously self-published collections are not eligible. To avoid conflict of interest, former or current students or close friends of the final judge for 2008, Michael Martone, are ineligible to win the contest. Employees and Board members of FC2 are not eligible to enter.

    Judges

    Finalists for the Prize will be chosen by the following members of the FC2 Board of Directors: Kate Bernheimer, R. M. Berry, Brian Evenson, Noy Holland, Brenda Mills, Lance Olsen (Chair), Susan Steinberg, and Lidia Yuknavitch.

    The winning manuscript in 2008 will be chosen from the finalists by FC2 Board of Directors member Michael Martone.

    Selection criteria will be consistent with FC2’s stated mission to publish “fiction considered by America’s largest publishers too challenging, innovative, or heterodox for the commercial milieu,” including works of “high quality and exceptional ambition whose style, subject matter, or form pushes the limits of American publishing and reshapes our literary culture.”

    For contest updates and full information on FC2’s mission, history, aesthetic commitments, authors, events, and books, please visit the website at: http://fc2.org.

    Deadlines

    Contest entries will be accepted beginning 15 August 2007. All entries must be postmarked no later than 1 November 2007. The winner will be announced May 2008.

    Prize

    The Prize includes $1000 and publication by FC2, an imprint of the University of Alabama Press. In the unlikely event that no suitable manuscript is found among entries in a given year, FC2 reserves the right not to award a prize.

    Manuscript Format

    Please submit either TWO hardcopies of the manuscript, or ONE hardcopy and one Word file of the manuscript on a labeled CD.

    The manuscript must be:

    –anonymous: the author’s name or address must not appear anywhere on the manuscript (the title page should contain the title only); include a separate cover page with your name and contact information;

    –typed on standard white paper, one side of the page only; paginated consecutively; bound with a spring clip or rubber bands; no paper clips or staples, please.

    Please include a self-addressed, stamped postcard for notification that manuscript has been received, and a self-addressed, stamped, regular business-sized envelope for contest results.

    We strongly advise that you send your manuscript first class.

    Please retain a copy of your manuscript; FC2 cannot return manuscripts. Submission of more than one manuscript is permissible if each manuscript is accompanied by a $25 reading fee. Once submitted, manuscripts cannot be altered; the winner will be given the opportunity to make changes before publication. Simultaneous submissions to other publishers are permitted, but FC2 must be notified immediately if manuscript is accepted elsewhere. FC2 will consider all finalists for publication.

    Submission Address

    Full manuscripts, accompanied by a check made out to American Book Review for the mandatory reading fee of $25, should be sent to:

    Ronald Sukenick American Book Review Innovative Fiction Prize
    American Book Review
    University of Houston-Victoria
    School of Arts and Sciences
    3007 N. Ben Wilson
    Victoria, TX 77901-5731

    CLMP Contest Ethics Code

    CLMP’s community of independent literary publishers believes that ethical contests serve our shared goal: to connect writers and readers by publishing exceptional writing. We believe that intent to act ethically, clarity of guidelines, and transparency of process form the foundation of an ethical contest. To that end, we agree to: 1) conduct our contests as ethically as possible and to address any unethical behavior on the part of our readers, judges, or editors; 2) to provide clear and specific contest guidelines–defining conflict of interest for all parties involved; and 3) to make the mechanics of our selection process available to the public.

  • After Reading After Poststructuralism

    David Bockoven
    English Department
    Linn-Benton Community College
    bockoven@efn.org

    A review of: Colin Davis, After Poststructuralism: Reading, Stories and Theory. New York: Routledge, 2004.

    After reading the title of Colin Davis’s After Poststructuralism, my initial reaction is to ask whether the shark hasn’t been jumped once too often on a book written in the “post-theory” genre. Since at least the early 1990s, critical theorists have referred to the death of Theory, which seems invariably to prompt further theoretical reflection on what methodological norms in reading literature academically might come next. (The hackneyed idea that cultural studies eclipsed deconstruction as the predominant theoretical method comes to mind.) But the freshness of perspective Davis gives the subject recommends the book.

    To begin with, the first two chapters helpfully detail three academic controversies surrounding French theory–the ways its enemies have gone “after” it, so to speak, and taken it to task. Davis helps the inexperienced reader, or even a reader who just needs a short refresher course, by situating the topic in a polemical fashion. We instantly know what is at stake–namely, whether poststructuralism offers a legitimate methodology of reading, or whether as its attackers claim it is fashionable but ultimately fraudulent academic discourse. Of these three controversies, the 1965 dispute between Raymond Picard and Roland Barthes over how to read Racine is the most interesting because of its relative unfamiliarity. Most readers interested in theory are probably more familiar with the Alan Sokal affair of 1996 and with Jürgen Habermas’s The Philosophical Discourse of Modernity (1987), Davis’s other two examples. What I find particularly fascinating about the Picard-Barthes conflict is the way in which Picard’s indictment of Barthes and of, generally, what he called la nouvelle critique so eerily foreshadows the same complaints made by more recent critics of theory: its jargon is mere obfuscation, its interpretations are unverifiable, and it uses examples out of context (16-18). What is interesting is the date of this attack, coming as it does even before poststructuralism proper really got going. So from its very inception, these charges have dogged it. It’s like the experience of a young person today reading a Flannery O’Connor story written in the 1950s and coming to the realization that perhaps the “good old days” never really were.

    The Picard-Barthes controversy sets up a pattern of fierce traditionalist opposition to Theory that finds a recent echo in the Sokal affair. But if Picard spoke with the authority of a scholarly point of view, Sokal, as a physicist, attacks from the outside. Davis treats the Sokal affair with a humorous touch. It turns out that Sokal’s attempt to play gotcha with postmodernism by planting a “fake” academic article in the journal Social Text imbricates him all the deeper in the very social phenomenon he rails against.

    One sign of this postmodernism is the burgeoning controversy around Sokal’s original Social Text article and the later Impostures intellectuelles. Rather than putting an end to the babble of “fashionable nonsense,” Sokal and Bricmont found themselves increasingly engulfed in a media Babel, as the meaning and significance of their work were wrested from them . . . .But each new act of containment produces new misunderstandings and a renewed need to assert the meaning of the inaugural event in the controversy. The text cannot be trusted to speak for itself, it requires supplements and commentaries which fragment it at the very moment they endeavor to shore up its unity. (28-29)

    For Davis, the Sokal affair becomes the postmodern controversy par excellence: the more Sokal struggles to assert the real meaning of events, the deeper he is pulled into a moral quicksand.

    The meat of the book is four chapters that take an in-depth look at four French theorists: Jean-François Lyotard, Emmanuel Levinas, Louis Althusser, and Julia Kristeva. One of the unexpected qualities of the book is that it doesn’t focus directly on what are arguably the big names of poststructuralism: Derrida, Foucault, Lacan, and Deleuze. (Davis does bring in a discussion of Foucault and Derrida in one of his framing chapters on Habermas, and the conclusion’s meditation on the spectrality of theory seems largely informed by Derrida.) On the one hand, this choice offers a novel perspective on the subject, but on the other, Davis’s quirky decisions make his discussion unrepresentative of poststructuralism as a whole. Based on the book’s title, a reader may be expecting to come to some better understanding of “poststructuralism,” but, with the exception of Kristeva, these are not theorists one would put equally and unproblematically under this category. If one were looking for a basic introduction to poststructuralism, one would be better advised to consult a book such as Catherine Belsey’s Poststructuralism: A Very Short Introduction. Given the focus on the Sokal affair and on Lyotard, Davis risks conflating poststructuralism with postmodernism. Also, if one is truly interested in what comes after poststructuralism, why look back at Levinas and Althusser? Yes, these thinkers are indispensable to a better understanding of later writers–especially Derrida. (Davis notes the connection between Althusser’s notion of a “symptomatic” reading and Derrida’s “double science” of reading.) But if the book never follows through on a thorough engagement with Derrida, why focus on precursors?

    In looking at the before of poststructuralism as well as its after Davis focuses on the complex issue of legacy. This is one of the book’s major strengths. In the book’s introduction and in the chapter on Habermas, Davis points to Derrida’s discussion of “the constitutive ambiguity of legacies” (7) in Du droit à la philosophie. Unlike Habermas, for whom the concept of the unfinished project of the Enlightenment appears black and white–either you’re with Habermas’s efforts to complete the early Hegel’s abandoned project of communicative reason or you’re against the Enlightenment and all the fruits of modernity–Foucault, Derrida, and even Habermas’s own Frankfurt School progenitors Horkheimer and Adorno maintain a more complicated relationship with the philosophical past. For Derrida, in particular, “it is the nature of the legacy to be in dispute; and this is as true of Kant’s legacy as it is of the legacy of poststructuralism, which we have still not settled” (7). So in looking forward, we also need to look back, but perhaps look back “otherwise.” We can no more be “after” poststructuralism than poststructuralist philosophers can be “after” Kant, in the sense of being over Kant. Davis notes: “Like Foucault, Derrida does not endorse the prospect of any abrupt liberation from Kant; rather, he proposes to question the claims of philosophy by staying in touch with the great texts of the past and finding within them the moments of excess which make it possible to envisage a transformation of the intellectual programme” (54). The goal of Davis’s book is to access the contributions of these thinkers in helping to better understand “the grand philosophical problems of knowledge, meaning, ethics, and identity” (6).

    The book’s central treatment of Lyotard, Levinas, Althusser, and Kristeva is organized around four questions Kant considered to be of fundamental importance for philosophy to grapple with: What can I know; What ought I to do; What may I hope; What is the human being? On the face of it, the linkages between Lyotard and epistemology, Levinas and ethics, and Kristeva and identity make sense. But what of the link between Althusser and hope?

    If history is a process without a subject [as it is in Althusser’s structuralist Marxism], it is also a process without aim or end; the historical dialectic is always overdetermined, the superstructure interferes with the infrastructure rather than being obligingly transformed by it, there is always too much going on and too many factors to be accounted for to ensure a smooth continuation of the process of the past and present into a foreseeable future. (104)

    If history is an aimless process, then how can one come to have hope in any kind of better future? To answer this question, Davis does to Althusser what Althusser had earlier done to Marx and the entire Marxist tradition: reads the text against the grain.

    Davis accomplishes this by focusing primarily on Althusser’s autobiography L’Avenir dure longtemps, rather than on For Marx, Reading Capital, or “Ideology and Ideological State Apparatuses.” What Davis digs up between the lines of the book is Althusser’s search for a “materialism of the encounter” in which “meaning is made through the contingency of the encounter rather than given in advance and pre-inscribed in history” (127). This contingency holds the door open for a kind of hope. This is an odd kind of hope because it only arrives through contingency, hence entirely unlooked for. To answer Kant’s question “What may I hope?” in a poststructuralist problematic, then, is to allow for an unhoped for hope. This kind of hope doesn’t fall into a conventionally imagined narrative pattern. How can one narrate the contingent?

    Hence, besides Kant’s questions, a unifying thread of the book is the analysis of the reactions of the respective thinkers to the concept of “story.” In La Condition postmoderne, we may remember, Lyotard argues that when access to information proliferates at an exponential rate, grand, legitimizing meta-narratives collapse into a ragtag set of incompatible language games–displaying a seeming questioning of story. But Davis surveys a wider spectrum of attitudes toward the notion of story in French theory running from Kristeva’s enthusiastic embrace of the apparently pre-given urge of people to tell stories to Levinas’s ascetic desire to do without examples altogether in Autrement qu’être ou au-delà de l’essence. Kristeva’s taste for and Levinas’s dislike of story hinges on the same issue. For Levinas,

    The story is a site of disruption or resistance through which the text is fractured, brought up against its own otherness to itself. Through the example, the Other slips into the discourse of the same and insinuates a breach within it. The smooth surface of the text is broken, disclosing a moment of indecision, suggesting that the argument is not yet closed, that further revisions to the theory are still possible or necessary, that the Other’s voice may still be heard. (89)

    Kristeva’s interest in stories makes Levinas uncomfortable to the point of disavowal. “The story deforms what gives it form; in other words its form is uneasy, precarious, and at best provisional, it never entirely accommodates the material which it nevertheless makes intelligible” (146). This provisionality, like that of the dynamics of transference in psychoanalysis, allows it to elude the totalitarian attempt to control meaning.

    Davis concludes the book with a thoughtful meditation on the ghostly living on and spectral afterlife of theory after its apparent demise in the 1980s. This chapter reminds me of another book in the “post-theory” genre: Herman Rapaport’s The Theory Mess: Deconstruction in Eclipse. While Rapaport’s book–a really thorough consideration of the vicissitudes of the “life” of deconstruction–is good, Rapaport is more Derrida-centric. Davis’s approach is good because it opens onto others’ views in a more inclusive way. Both Davis and Rapaport fight a rearguard defense of theory, but Davis’s wider focus allows for more avenues of thought. Davis’s use of the four Kantian questions and his continuing attention to the role of story help keep the book together, as does his approval of the fact that theorists such as Barthes (21) and Lyotard (72-73) aren’t afraid to admit their own complicity in the issues they thematize. Those that try to criticize theory as “Theory” with a capital “t” create a strawman argument, in that poststructuralist philosophy has never been about creating the ultimate frame of reference, but wanted to open up philopsophy to other questions. It’s the opponents of theory–to varying degrees Picard, Sokal, and Habermas–who end up trying to create a definitive “scientific” platform from which to prosecute theory for foreclosing the Enlightenment project of modernity. Davis reminds us that poststructuralism doesn’t spell the death of philosophy or of Western civilization; rather, poststructuralism holds the door open to allow new questions to enter the unfinished project of modernity.

    David Bockoven is an instructor at Linn-Benton Community College. He graduated from the University of Oregon in 1998 with a dissertation, “For Another Time of Reading: Digressive Narrative Economies in Early Modern Fiction.” His work has appeared in Transactions of the Northwest Society for Eighteenth-Century Studies.

  • The Agony of the Political

    Department of English
    Texas State University
    robert.tally@txstate.edu

    A review of Chantal Mouffe, On the Political. London: Routledge, 2005.

    In On the Political, Chantal Mouffe argues that all politics, properly conceived, must be agonistic. The “political” for Mouffe names a field of struggle where contesting groups with opposing interests vie for hegemony. Rather than being the rational conversation of modern liberalism, politics involves a battle where a recognizable “we” fight against a likewise identifiable “they.” Mouffe agonizes over the fact that so many political theorists today would deny the antagonistic character of the political. She wishes to combat the pervasive sense among social theorists that, since the end of the Cold War and the advent of globalization, we are living in a “post-political” world, a world in which the problems of societies are resolved by recourse to universal human values, liberal consensus, and human rights.

    Mouffe argues that by denying the existence of partisan and adversarial interests based on collective identities, modern liberalism has foreclosed the symbolic space for such conflicts to occur. Mouffe enlists the aid of a strategic ally, the conservative theorist Carl Schmitt, to help make her case. This is a dangerous move, because Schmitt is opposed to the sort of pluralist democracy Mouffe wants to champion. Schmitt’s anti-liberalism provides a tincture against the platitudinous banalities of that philosophy. For Schmitt, politics always involves collective identities of we/they. This characterization of self and other is also a friend/enemy distinction, which can then lead to violent disavowals of the other’s right to exist at all. There can be no rational consensus because identity is always based on exclusion. There is no alternative to the we/they binary, so the goal cannot be to overcome this antagonism. According to Mouffe, Schmitt concludes that pluralism has no place in democratic society; only a homogenous society can work. For Mouffe, who insists on democratic pluralism, the goal is to maintain Schmitt’s agonism and to prevent it from becoming antagonism. In other words, she wants to maintain a we/they relationship while keeping it from devolving into a friend/enemy relationship. “The fundamental question for democratic theory is to envisage how the antagonistic dimension–which is constitutive of the political–can be given a form of expression that will not destroy the political association” (52).

    Mouffe insists that, contrary to appearances, the agonistic model actually makes for a more harmonious, and safer, society in the long run. This is in part because partisans have an arena in which to fight. She cites the rise of right-wing populist movements in Europe. As political parties and theorists deny traditional categories of collective identity, fringe parties championing just such traditional ideas (e.g., “the people”) have shown themselves able to garner strong support from those disaffected by society. By appearing to offer a real difference, clearly identifying a friendly “we” (the people) and an enemy “they” (foreigners, for instance), right-wing groups have filled a void left by post-political liberalism. Many liberal democrats might view these people as un- or anti-modern, residues of a passing era, epigones who will inevitably fade away before the inexorably open, rational, cosmopolitan world that is unfolding. But Mouffe shows that the return of such movements is a timely reaction to the current situation of global politics.

    The successes of these movements have also enabled a dangerous overlapping between morality and politics. If the “they” is our enemy, then they are not only wrong, but evil. This is not morality substituted for politics, but, as Mouffe says, politics “played out in the moral register” (75). Once this occurs, the opportunity for a truly agonistic politics is lost, because an evil enemy cannot be permitted to be part of the contest. Nor would a party that is considered “evil” want to play the game. Turning a “they” into an evil enemy can lead to nonparticipation in the political arena, which can lead to anti-democratic forms of protest (at the extreme, terrorism). Rather than acknowledging the merits of one’s opponents and striving to overcome the opponents in a contest, the moralists call their enemies immoral and have done with it.

    In the post-Cold War era, Mouffe says, we find ourselves in a unipolar world, one in which the hegemony of the United States seems unquestioned. The response of the “cosmopolitans” has been largely to celebrate this condition, viewing the globalization of capitalism and the triumph of liberal democracy as the “end of history” that Francis Fukayama once trumpeted. Against this theory, Mouffe calls for a multipolar world system, in which semiautonomous blocs–say, the countries of ASEAN or of Mercosur or the European Union–can vie with the U.S. for hegemony. Ultimately, this is the only way a globally democratic politics could work. In a unipolar world, after all, the reigning hegemon would not have to listen to others; indeed, it might cast the conversation in a language that makes the other’s inaudible or unintelligible. Mouffe does not address this aspect of power, which Gramsci and Foucault understood well.

    Perhaps as an after-effect of her earlier post-Marxist stance, Mouffe does not look at the economic conditions that affect the political. The reason the world looks the way it does has much less to do with how politics is “envisaged,” and a great deal to do with globalization, which arises from the real facts of imperialism and late capitalism. Works like David Harvey’s Spaces of Capital or The New Imperialism provide analyses of the political crises occasioned by, if not caused by, globalization. Although she takes some time to excoriate Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri’s Empire, she does so only to dispute the theoretical image of the political. She does not address the underlying arguments about the actual effects of power in an era of globalization. Nor does she examine the cultural aspects that clearly factor in to any political practices (see, for instance, Arjun Appadurai’s Modernity at Large).

    What would Mouffe’s adversarial, agonistic politics actually look like? Apparently, it would look quite familiar. The most damning critique of On the Political may be that it winds up reinforcing the status quo. To be sure, Mouffe’s language–involving antagonism, hegemony, and the we/they rubric–sounds less harmonious than liberal, “post-political” theory, but is her practice any different? When Mouffe cites with approval Elias Canetti’s claim that parliamentary systems defuse partisan tensions, she seems to be arguing in favor of a system already present in the U.S. and in Europe. Canetti notes that consensus is not what happens in a vote; each side fights for its respective interests and opposes the other’s. But the vote is then decisive. Nobody believes that, just because “our” side lost the vote, “their” side’s position was better, more moral, or more correct. As Canetti puts it, “the member of an outvoted party accepts the majority decision, not because he has ceased to believe in his own case, but simply because he admits defeat” (qtd. 23). Mouffe adds that without an arena for such contests (i.e., a parliamentary institution), anti-democratic forces will prevail. But how is this any different from the American or European political systems already in place?

    Indeed, Mouffe’s agonistic politics does not seem very radical at all. Whenever Mouffe addresses practical matters, she uses the language of adversarial or agonistic politics, but evokes tame and familiar scenes. Mouffe argues for a pluralism that recognizes real differences, but that also ensures that everyone plays by the same rules. “Partisans” who really want to change the political landscape may not be allowed to participate. As Mouffe puts it, this pluralism “requires discriminating between demands which are to be accepted as part of the agonistic debate and those which are to be excluded. A democratic society cannot treat those who put its basic institutions into question as legitimate adversaries” (120). Fair enough, but who decides? If it is the current hegemonic power, then isn’t the deck stacked against the opposition in the war of position? If the United States is allowed to decide which political demands are worthy and which cannot be allowed to gain legitimacy, then one can easily imagine a Bush-administration official agreeing with every word of this book, right down to the sorts of agonistic strategies needed to win elections. And speaking of a multipolar world order, will those regional blocs that do not maintain such basic institutions be eager to establish them?

    Mouffe’s image of a we/they politics in which collective identities vie with one another for hegemony looks a bit like organized sports. Consider the football game: rival sides squared off in a unambiguously agonistic struggle for dominance, with a clear winner and loser, yet agreeing to play by certain shared rules, and above all unwilling to destroy the sport itself (i.e., the political association) in order to achieve the side’s particular goals. Football teams have no interest in dialogue, and the goal is not consensus, but victory. The winner is triumphant, and the loser must regroup, practice, and try again later. A clearly defined “we” will fight against the “they,” but the aim is to win, not to destroy “them” or the sport itself. But, noteworthy in the extended metaphor, some organizing body (rarely democratic) has established the rules and standards by which the sport is played. The players have no say in how the game is structured.

    If the sports analogy seems too facile, consider Mouffe’s own characterization. Responding to the “fundamental question for democratic theory” (i.e., how to maintain antagonism in politics without destroying political association), Mouffe answers that it requires

    distinguishing between the categories of “antagonism” (relations between enemies) and “agonism” (relations between adversaries) and envisaging a sort of “conflictual consensus” providing a common symbolic space among opponents who are considered “legitimate enemies.” Contrary to the dialogic approach, the democratic debate is conceived as a real confrontation. Adversaries do fight—even fiercely—but according to a shared set of rules, and their positions, despite being ultimately irreconcilable, and accepted as legitimate perspectives. (52)

    Play ball! Of course this means that, if the opposition party–oh, let’s go ahead and call them the Reds–wishes to change the relations of power, it must do so within the political framework (e.g., legislative body or rules of the game). To be outside of the framework is to not be playing the game at all.

    A better model might be that of games on the playground. On the playground, children both organize and play games, often coming up with and changing the rules as they go along. Their power relations are constantly adjusted, modified so as to make the game more fair (“you get a head start”), more safe (“no hitting”), more interesting (“three points if you can make it from behind that line”), and so on. The overall structure of the game does not necessarily change, but the specifics of how the game is played can vary. This is not a utopian vision, obviously. The power relations on display at most playgrounds are not the most salutary. But this model at least provides an image of what a radical version of Mouffe’s agonistic, democratic politics might look like. How this would work outside the playground, in a global political context, is a different question. Can we get the world’s diverse “teams” together on the same playground? Would a multipolar world system enable multiple grounds for playing? Who would or would not be allowed to play? Who would decide?

    These practical questions are exceedingly tough to answer. The agonistic model of politics requires an arena where contestants can hold competitions. It requires rules that may be altered but that also must be in place in order to know what game is being played. And it requires a system that allows the sport to continue when particular games end. (That is, the winner cannot cancel further contests, a problem that has plagued nascent democracies.) A radical democracy founded on adversarial politics cannot simply replicate existing structures of liberal, parliamentary democracy. It must change the game.

    Robert T. Tally Jr. is Assistant Professor of English at Texas State University. His teaching and research focus on American and world literature, theory of the novel, and critical theory. He is currently completing a book, “American Baroque: Melville and the Literary Cartography of the World System.”

  • Mourning Time

    Aimee L. Pozorski

    Department of English
    Central Connecticut State University
    pozorskia@ccsu.edu

     

    Review of: R. Clifton Spargo, The Ethics of Mourning: Grief and Responsibility in Elegiac Literature. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 2004.

     

    R. Clifton Spargo begins The Ethics of Mourning: Grief and Responsibility in Elegiac Literature with a poignant discussion of Ruth Behar’s 1996 retelling of an Isabel Allende story: a story about a relationship between a girl dying beneath the rubble of an avalanche and the reporter who struggles as he watches her there. The poignancy of this scene, for Behar, depends on the tension the reporter feels between his professional obligation to narrate her story and his human obligation to ease her suffering.

     

    Such a scene of suffering, on a first reading, refers to a “time of mourning” crucial to Spargo’s book. As his reading of Behar illustrates, the time of mourning occurs when a witness confronts the loss of another. More importantly, this sense of time is also definitively “ethical.” For Spargo, “there is an ethical crux to all mourning, according to which the injustice potentially perpetrated by the mourner against the dead as a failure of memory stands for the injustice that may be done to the living at any given moment” (4). When phrased in this way, “ethics” here is not only concerned to recognize injustice, but, more crucially, to remember the dead adequately.

     

    But Spargo’s book also seems invested in another kind of time, when the grieving survivor comes to mourn time itself. Spargo’s understated second interest is about what it means to mourn the measured time that offers comfort and stability during moments of need; in other words, the book is equally about the kind of linear time in which we have all come to organize our lives, but have, despite ourselves, lost in this historical moment. Although he does briefly write in his chapter on Hamlet about a “time of mourning” (77), the theorization of mourning’s time that runs throughout the book in these terms is perhaps too implicit, and I could wish for a broader or more explicit theorization of the intersection between time and mourning. Specifically, I would call for a theory of mourning indebted to the time of the trauma, which Spargo sometimes invokes as analogous to mourning while seeing the two modes of psychic unpleasure as distinct in their social and literary implications. For Spargo, although he doesn’t quite phrase it this way, part of the value of literature lies in its potential to represent the traumatic time of the loss of a loved one in a way that straightforward, journalistic accounts fail to do. Literature can move the reader-as-witness because it functions like the unconscious mind: absolutely refusing the imposition of linear time in those moments that come too soon to be processed in a neat and linear fashion that cultural codes prescribe.

     

    One way literature invests the reader in the mourning process is through its reliance on what Spargo calls “elegiac address” (25-26, 188-89, 192-94). Otherwise known as “apostrophe,” the potential for literature to address an other is typically associated with elegies in the most traditional sense. Spargo’s reading of the literary, indeed, of “elegiac literature,” does not focus on traditional elegies, but on literature that invokes prosopopeia in order to call upon the reader as ethical witness (25). Drawing on a subtle and informed understanding of prosopopeia, Spargo’s theory of elegy explicitly refuses the trope of the personification of the dead and instead emphasizes the dimension of relationality created by literary texts–specifically, literature’s potential to render an alterity in space and time that signifies as responsibility. For example, Spargo claims that “mourning promotes a temporal confusion whereby the question of memory is treated as though the remembered dead stood within range of an imminent threat of violence to a living person” (4). Spargo posits Freud’s famous theorization of the dream of the burning child as an exemplary case of this temporal confusion. In The Interpretation of Dreams Freud recounts the story of a dead child who appears in the dream of a grieving father, a father who falls asleep as the child’s body lies surrounded by candles under the watch of an old man. After a few hours, Freud recalls, the father dreams that his child appears before him, grabs his arm, and whispers “Father, can’t you see that I am burning?” (330; qtd. in Spargo 173).

     

    On the one hand, this scene posits the father’s “temporal confusion” over whether the child is dead. Is the time of the dream before the child has died, or after? The answer, of course is both: In the dream, the child is both dead from burning and alive at his father’s side, as his reproachful whisper proves. As Spargo suggests, the lesson of Freud’s example is that “our capacity to revere the living other as an unassimilable, yet irremissible precondition for both relationship and subjectivity depends upon the paradoxical capacity of our consciousness to be dedicated to the permanently absent other as to the primary and abiding signification of alterity” (176). The literary nature of this father’s dream, in other words, necessarily conflates the living child with the dead child, allowing the father both to express a dedication to the child’s memory and to recognize that his child’s subjectivity is radically separate from his own. Spargo’s commitment to the impossibility, yet absolute necessity, of this ethical moment leads him to Cathy Caruth’s interpretive work on this very scene. As Spargo relates, Caruth reads it as “the story of an impossible responsibility of consciousness in its own originating relation to others, and specifically to the deaths of others” (176). Spargo emphasizes further the skewed timing that this dream reveals. For him, “this apprehension of an impossible responsibility is not merely retrospective, but prospective, since the child’s accusation reinstitutes and indeed redefines the father’s protective agency” (176). For this grieving father, in other words, the child’s ultimate death is yet to come, calling into question as it does the father’s ability to protect the body from burning even as it lies lifeless in the shroud.

     

    But this example, too, brings out an important tenet of Spargo’s ethics: that literary works are ethical not simply in their demand that we confront the radical otherness of the death of a loved one, but also in their critical rejection of more dominant cultural models for grief. As Freud’s discussion of this father’s dream makes clear, the culturally prescribed mourning process in the wake of a close relative’s death–recognizing it with a funeral service and then going about one’s daily life–is unworkable. Not only is it impossible, it is naïve: time, for the mourner, does not work so neatly. Spargo uses mourning, often literally, but sometimes as a figure, to reveal “a belated protection of the dead” (6). For him, “this retrospective effort always pertains to a question about the place the other still holds in the world” (6). After death comes life–for the mourner, but for the deceased as well. In this resistance to passing out of memory Spargo senses a “resistant strain of mourning,” a strain “in which there is opposition to psychological resolution and to the status quo of cultural memory” (6). Ultimately, “it is precisely because our cultural modes of memory so often neglect the other whom they would remember that unresolved mourning becomes a dissenting act, a sign of irremissible ethical meaning” (6). And this is why the literary work itself becomes so crucial to this study. In its very stylization, in addition to its content, literature bodies forth a capacity to refuse resolutions over and against more normative references to mourning.

     

    In describing literary representations of melancholia as “the elegy’s most persistent sign of dissent from conventional meanings” (11), Spargo closely and self-consciously aligns his book with such other studies on literary representations of mourning as Jahan Ramazani’s Poetry of Mourning: The Modern Elegy from Hardy to Heaney (1994). Both Ramazani and Spargo privilege poets in mourning for their potential to understand what we others do not: that social rules for mourning do not account for the problem of time–the lost time, the mourning time, the very time of mourning–following the deaths of those we love. According to Spargo, however, while Ramazani and Peter Sacks understand the “melancholic potential in all mourning,” “neither perceives melancholia as evocative of an ethical concern for the other elaborated by the mourner’s objections to the cultural practices presiding over grief” (11). In other words, whereas Ramazani values the modern elegy’s melancholic potential to “reopen the wounds of loss” (xi), Spargo reads melancholia as a “persistent sign of a dedication to the time and realm of the other” (11). And it is this focus on “the other”–more crucially, a radically other human being whom we possibly love, one for whom we feel a responsibility after death, but also, and simultaneously, impossibly, one whose alterity we are committed to preserve–that sets Spargo apart from some other scholars on elegiac literature.

     

    And there is no lack of scholarship in this field. Such recent books as William Watkins’s On Mourning (2004), Rochelle Almeida’s The Politics of Mourning (2004), Anissa Wardi’s Death and the Arc of Mourning (2003), Sam Durrant’s Postcolonial Narrative and the Work of Mourning (2003), and Alessia Ricciardi’s The Ends of Mourning (2003) are just five examples of studies published in the last four years. However, precisely because of the way it links the literary attributes of the elegy with the ethical imperative–with a necessary and impossible engagement with the other on his or her own terms–Spargo’s book accomplishes something these other books do not: it places the reader in the uncomfortable position of having to take responsibility not only for our own dead, but also for our reading of the figures to which Spargo turns in the book. In other words, invested as it is in the philosophical writings of Emmanuel Levinas, Spargo’s sense of literary and social ethics refers not simply to “doing the right thing” in the wake of a significant death, but rather to the impossibility of both adequately carrying forward the memory of the deceased other and of preserving the irreconcilability of death. In this way, Spargo’s ethics is as much an ethics of reading as it is an ethics of mourning–a move surprisingly antithetical to the philosophy upon which he relies so heavily.

     

    In order to think Levinasian ethics together with the ethical work of the elegy, Spargo must confront (and he does) an important Levinasian claim: that ethics does not “fit all that well with the imaginative capacities of literature” (9). Spargo’s defense, however, is that literature has a crucial indirect potential for conveying the untranslatable, as a way of marking particular limits of representation. Confronting this fact is one way of “facing the figure,” as Levinas himself commanded. While it is true that Levinas originally theorized the ethical relationship as taking place between two human beings, later scholars, like Spargo, have understood Levinas’s ethics through encounters with language and art. For example, Jill Robbins has suggested that we “face the figure otherwise,” extending Levinas’s theory of the “ethical relation to the other as a kind of language, as responsibility, that is, as language-response to the other who faces and who, ‘in turn’ speaks” (54). Levinas’s ethics of an other with a face, then, can also be understood as a standard for reading–a standard that requires us to “face the figure” as we would face an other.

     

    However, Spargo’s reading of the other, and particularly our disorienting relation to the other as it exists in both time and texts, appears as dependent upon Levinas as it is upon Freud. For Freud, the alternative state of mourning time is “traumatic,” not simply because it is difficult to endure or even unimaginable. Rather, it is an event that cannot be understood straightforwardly in linear time, and therefore returns experientially in the form of flashbacks, nightmares, and hallucinations. A closer reading of Levinas might also reveal that his ideas about ethics are closely bound up with the problem of time as Freud most famously articulated it with the notion of belatedness, or Nachträglichkeit as first introduced in his Project for a Scientific Psychology (1895). Granted, while Spargo is sensitive to Freud’s contributions to our theorization of mourning and is indebted to certain Freudian categories, he explicitly attempts to move beyond a psychic model of mourning that focuses on the survivor’s resolution, always cognizant of this model’s betrayal of the dead. But I am not confident that we can afford to forsake psychological priority in such a way. Perhaps we, too, need a greater reconciliation of Freud and Levinas, one that Spargo may not deem entirely possible or even desirable. While Spargo suggests Levinas’s implicit debt to Freud, contemporary readers of Freud might be interested in hearing more about this, especially considering Freud’s underestimated influence on Levinas.

     

    For Spargo, then, while “belatedness” is a significant category, obligation becomes more important. And even if chapter four, for example, argues that the belatedness of literary mourning corresponds to the belatedness of ethical mourning in everyday life, here Spargo’s turn from Freud does not quite answer what I see as the inevitable psychic consequences of such a view of responsibility–one that is traumatic in its own right. As such, Spargo’s account appears to take us too far afield of the necessarily psychic dimension of ethics which I see as more realistically explained by Freud’s account of the psychic time in which mourning occurs. For Freud, every newly discovered love object appears as a rediscovery of a former love. Love, and indeed death, operate on a model of traumatic repetition. Spargo’s understanding of ethics seems to recognize this impliclitly: an ethical obligation to the other takes place in skewed temporality, which is, perhaps, part of the point; a refusal to master the other, while still trying to recall her. It necessarily takes place in an alternative realm of time, an alienating sense of time that repositions us in “the time of the other”–both inside and out of time–both lost and perpetually losing.

     

    There is a “sense of peril” in this Levinasian (and, I would add, Freudian) ethics that is not based on what is to be gained in the name of “doing right,” but is structured around loss. For Spargo, this sense of peril comes with the recognition that “the death of the other demands a renewal of responsibility–on the other side of loss, as it were, in a beyond that structurally remembers the obligation that precedes the event of the death” (29). Ultimately this obligation, this responsibility, as the story of the troubled reporter in the beginning of the book reveals, is at the heart of Spargo’s model of ethics, which requires a willing listener who hears the testimony of a witness without reducing the speaker and his or her story to an easily assimilable experience.

     

    Thinking about the elegy in this way allows Spargo effectively to formulate the surprising proposition that the anti-elegiac tradition provides a trajectory for responsibility that in some way anticipates the necessarily literary strategies of elegies about the Holocaust. At first glance, it appears that Spargo chooses his particular subjects–literary texts that range widely from Hamlet to Renaissance, Romantic, and Modernist poetry, to Randall Jarrell’s and Sylvia Plath’s Holocaust poetry–because each of them has something to do with an ethical listener, and more crucially still, a persona who refuses consolation in the name of melancholy. However, a closer look, especially at the last two chapters on the Holocaust poetry, suggests that far more interesting claim is driving this book: The Holocaust appears here as the point at which the anti-consolatory gesture of the modern elegy is pushed too far and strains beneath its own weight.

     

    Spargo reads Jarrell’s poetic voice as Holocaust witness, for example, as a commentary on “the American public’s own unwillingness to have traded present pleasures for attitudes translating into practical actions on behalf of the refugees” of the Holocaust (210). In so doing, Jarrell struggles to transform his personal lyrics into something more wide-ranging that can take on a “persuasive public dimension” (222). Spargo’s defense of Sylvia Plath against charges that she appropriates the atrocity of the Holocaust to convey her own personal pain argues–to the contrary–that in her Holocaust imagery, Plath figures “the difficulty our society has in commemorating victims of atrocity” (244). Because he is a Holocaust scholar in his own right, this seems only natural, and it sheds new light on the book’s premise that we, as readers of poetry, like the poetry itself, not only recognize injustice but also maintain an adequate memory of the dead without perpetuating injustice itself. Ultimately, then, this is not just another book about mourning or loss, nor is it simply about time. It is a book that demands that we realize how implicated we all are in a traumatic past, and that–despite our own inclinations to the contrary–we can’t so quickly or easily forget our responsibility to the millions who have died unjustly.

     

    In keeping with this impossible model of responsibility–a responsibility for death and injustice that we must take on, but necessarily cannot take on–Spargo concludes his book by proposing that “mourning is both a figure for and expression of an impossible responsibility wherein one refuses to yield the other to the more comfortable freedoms of identity” (274). What are we to make of this conclusion, one not more comforting than the story of the reporter at the beginning of the book? Do we accept the impossibility, feeling–somehow–like more ethical beings, and then find a way to move on with our lives? Spargo’s answer, in fact, is a resounding No. There is no way to fulfill this sense of ethics, there is no way to forget injustice, there is no way to find closure, and then move on. And this is the point: to refuse consolation where there is none to be found. Spargo’s book rightly, albeit quietly, calls for a sense of collective ethics, an ethics that takes responsibility for those deaths in which we have not had a direct hand. If there is anything unsettling in this book, it must be that. Not only do the poets read here refuse consolation in this way, but Spargo’s book does as well. The Ethics of Mourning is about much more than a relationship between a poet and his or her personal dead. It is also about a significant relationship with those millions in history who have died at the hands of injustice. Such a recognition calls us all to be responsible not only for those we love, but for those who died–all those who died–in the name of love…and in the name of hate too, and history, as their stories have been recounted through the ages.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Freud, Sigmund. The Interpretation of Dreams. Trans. Joyce Crick. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1999.
    • Ramazani, Jahan. Poetry of Mourning: The Modern Elegy from Hardy to Heaney. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1994.
    • Robbins, Jill. Altered Reading: Levinas and Literature. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1990.

     

  • Bill Cosby and American Racial Fetishism

    Tim Christensen

    English Department
    Denison University
    christ65@msu.edu

     

    Review of: Michael Eric Dyson’s Is Bill Cosby Right? Or Has the Black Middle Class Lost Its Mind?New York: Basic Civitas, 2005.

     

    Ladies and gentlemen, listen to these people. They are showing you what’s wrong. People with their hat on backwards, pants down around the crack. Isn’t that a sign of something? [emphasis added]

    –Bill Cosby, “Address”

     

    Bill Cosby’s controversial “Pound Cake Speech,” delivered at the NAACP’s May 2004 commemoration of the fiftieth anniversary of Brown v. Board of Education, rapidly generated a stream of media commentary. The political context for the speech, which would have to include the conservative desire to criticize the NAACP and lay claim to the legacy of the civil rights movement, combined with the exhortative nature of the speech itself (Cosby told his audience to “hit the streets” and “clean it out yourselves”) that seemed to express deeply-held but taboo American sentiments regarding the black underclass, made for a voluminous and often virulent reaction. University of Pennsylvania humanities professor Michael Eric Dyson entered the fray almost immediately, and because, as he claims in Is Bill Cosby Right?, he “was one of the few blacks to publicly disagree with Cosby,” he “ended up in numerous media outlets arguing in snippets, sound bites, or ripostes to contrary points of view” (2). Having read or viewed some of Dyson’s early responses to Cosby’s remarks, I did not expect this book to deviate from the popular discourses through which issues of race are interpreted in the mainstream news media. Unsurprisingly, the media discussion of race following Cosby’s remarks was essentially similar to the one that preceded his remarks, with the difference, I think, that Cosby emboldened many white conservatives to make explicitly racist arguments about black bodies and black culture that they might otherwise have resentfully suppressed. Bill O’Reilly, for instance, complained that Cosby was allowed to say things for which “me and a number of other white Americans” have been “vilified” (“Cosby’s Crusade”). Liberal commentators, on the other hand, played their habitually impotent role in the debate on race, generally accepting Cosby’s remarks as truthful but claiming they were mean-spirited: they were careful not to question the dogma of black cultural pathology and instead limited themselves to critiquing the manner or spirit in which the remarks were made. Jabari Asim, for instance, believes “it is true that some blacks continue to engage in conduct that contradicts and undermines the aims of the civil rights movement,” adding that Cosby “has every right to take them to task.” Dyson, despite his comments about Cosby’s “elitism,” fits comfortably into the latter category, willing to concede the cultural inferiority of black Americans as the entry point into the legitimate discussion, and to work from there.

     

    In Is Bill Cosby Right?, however, Dyson deviates from the strict doctrine of black cultural pathology in a couple of significant ways. First, while Dyson’s argument does, ultimately, resolve itself into a classic liberal reprimand of Cosby for his lack of sympathy, at certain points in his argument he also emphasizes the distinction between the ethical and the normative that is so often lost in discussions of race and inequality in the United States. Additionally, he offers two brief discussions of the performativity of racial identity that might have provided an alternative framework to the stultifying American dogma of race had Dyson been willing to acknowledge and develop more fully the implications of a performative theory of racial identity.

     

    Dyson’s rhetorical strategy is to begin each chapter with a snippet of Cosby’s speech and to take Cosby’s claims initially quite literally, testing their facticity against empirical data. Cosby’s false claims and truncated analyses then serve as the basis from which Dyson provides a broader discussion of the immense gulf between the perceptions and realities of racial inequality in America. This strategy works most effectively, I believe, in the chapter titled “Classrooms and Cell Blocks,” which opens with Cosby’s assertion that there is a 50% drop-out rate for black high school students (a statistic Cosby also repeats in interviews and in subsequent speeches), and points out that this claim is simply wrong, a case of both factual inaccuracy and hyperbole. Dyson takes the actual figure from a study by Alec Klein, published in The Journal of Blacks in Higher Education (Autumn 2003), that estimates a 17% drop-out rate (Dyson 71). (The National Center for Education Statistics calculates a much lower 10.9% drop out rate for black high school students, compared to the overall national average of 10.7% [Kaufman 28]). Dyson then uses the difference between Cosby’s perception and any sort of empirically verifiable reality to contrast widely held and frequently expressed perceptions of the “black poor” (or “Ghettocracy”) among the “black middle class” (or “Afristocracy”) to various realities of the production and reproduction of inequality in American education (Dyson xiii-xiv).

     

    In the same chapter, Dyson takes Cosby to task for other erroneous claims, attempting to turn the tissue of factual error in Cosby’s speech back upon itself in order both to place Cosby’s remarks in a context of black middle class elitism and to redefine the discussion of American racial inequality in a more complex cultural and historical framework. I am pleased that Dyson (or anybody, finally) scrutinizes Cosby’s comments on Black English. Cosby derides the speech of “the lower economic [black] people” as essentially incomprehensible (“I can’t even talk the way these people talk”) and denies that is English (“It doesn’t want to speak English,” “There’s no English being spoken”); he justifies this position by claiming that “these people aren’t Africans; they don’t know a damned thing about Africa.” Yet, in attempting to disconnect black speech from African roots, Cosby unwittingly chooses as his example of “bad grammar” a construction in African American speech that linguists have demonstrated to come from West African languages (the construction “where you is,” which Cosby repeats and claims cannot understand). Dyson exploits Cosby’s statements on this matter and the practices of bodily adornment (dress and tattooing) first to expose his ignorance of African cultural practices (both contemporary and historical), then to put forth the ideas that black American culture need not draw from African culture to have value, and, finally, to expose the conflation of the normative and the ethical in the public discussion of black language and culture.

     

    The last example shows how exhausting it can be to attempt to isolate and to explain everything that is wrong with any given statement in Cosby’s speech. Here Cosby is not only factually wrong, but simple-minded in his conception of what makes for cultural legitimacy. Furthermore, the foundational assumption of Cosby’s critique (without which it would cease to be a critique) is the assumed equivalence of cultural “correctness” and moral virtue. It is therefore necessary first to demonstrate that he is wrong on a literal level (some Africans do, in fact, practice tattooing and body piercing, etc.), then to explain all the reasons that his criteria for establishing the relevance of his factually inaccurate observation are self-contradictory or simply dumb (why would the fact that a custom is not derived from an African culture strip it of expressive power or legitimacy?), and finally to explain that the foundational assumption behind the critique is an unthinking conflation of the regulative and the ethical. While the argumentative strategy of the book is up to this remarkably tedious task, Dyson nevertheless seems to get bogged down in this process to such an extent that he fails to develop his own arguments for an alternative approach to thinking about race in contemporary America.

     

    Dyson comes closest to developing an alternative frame for a discussion of race in those portions of the book that emphasize the performative aspect of racial identity, in which he focuses on the various conflictual processes according to which young African Americans, in particular, negotiate and renegotiate, enact, and, in the very process of enacting, redefine and resignify their racial subject positions. It is already a departure from American discourses of race for Dyson simply to distinguish between correctness (as in speaking “Standard English”) and moral value (Black English is often conflated with profanity and assumed to have somehow a causal relationship to intellectual degeneracy and moral turpitude), but it is in the sections of performative analysis that Dyson develops the distinction between the normative and the ethical that is the finest feature of his argument. Twice Dyson seems to be on the verge of offering a performative framework that could present an alternative to Cosby’s fetishistic ethics of race. The first instance occurs when, early in the book, Dyson introduces the term “antitype.” In this brief discussion, Dyson opposes the complexities of the semiotic construction of the subject exploited by those who employ “antitypical” strategies of resistance to the fetishistic world of absolutes that enables the Manichean moral universe of black conservatives such as Cosby. While many black conservatives rely on “a tradition of interpretation” that reduces “black identity . . . to a mantra of ‘positive’ versus ‘negative,’” those who employ the antitype assert that “black identity” cannot be reduced to “a once-and-for-all proposition that is settled in advance of social and psychological factors” because it is “continually transformed by these and other factors” (34). Antitypical strategies of resistance, it seems, exploit the irresolvable tension between the signifier and the signified, a tension that cannot be acknowledged by those who, like Cosby, seek to reduce images of blacks to either “positive” or “negative” “once-and-for-all” (34). In its simplest form, the antitype therefore alters the “positive” or “negative” valence of a given image, highlighting, in the process, the fact that the simple repetition of an image alters, distorts, and transforms its meaning. In Dyson’s terms, this means that black writers, artists, and musicians frequently employ the performative identity politics of the antitype so that “the line between stereotype and antitype is barely discernible, a point not lost on creators of black art who seek to play with negative portrayals of black life in order to explore, and, sometimes, unmask them” (33-34). The antitype forms a potentially effective method of resistance to the extent that it is at the same time different and indistinguishable from the stereotype that it repeats, or to the extent that it exploits the foundational ambivalence–the irreducible, uncanny difference from itself–of the stereotype.

     

    During his discussion of the antitype, Dyson often seems close to Homi Bhaba’s conceptualization of stereotyping. Bhabha conceives of the stereotype in racial discourse as a structuring device that provides a constitutive point of identification for the (racial) subject. Precisely because the stereotype serves this purpose, it “must always be in excess of what can be empirically proved or logically construed” (66). Because the antitype similarly draws attention to the stereotype as the always excessive foundation of racial subjectivity, Dyson might have used this concept in the way the black artists he cites in his discussion do (his literary example is Toni Morrison). That is, Dyson might have used the concept of the antitype as the basis for an alternative ethical framework for imagining racial identity. Such an ethical framework would be based on constantly calling attention to the stereotype’s uncanny difference from itself. Such an ethics would therefore be based on the refusal to attach an image to the aporetic point of identification that (reiteratively) founds the subject. This refusal would, of course, require the sacrifice of the false sense of subjective self-consistency and metaphysical certainty that attaching any definitive image to this space of subjective paradox supplies. Such an ethical framework would, instead, recognize and leave open the space of what Derrida has termed the “ungraspable . . . instant” of “exceptional decision” that marks the discursive emergence of the (in this case, racial) subject (274). Because the antitype differs from conventional stereotypes precisely because it is built on a recognition of the ultimately indeterminable founding moment of selfhood, it might have provided the basis for a reconceptualization of the (racial) self along the lines opened by this acknowledgement. Such a reconfigured notion of selfhood would contrast starkly with the imaginary subjective wholeness produced through papering over the space of the real with the image of the black body–in other words, through the fetishization of the black body–as Cosby does on behalf of the black middle class (274). It would render the Manichean worldview dictated by the assumption of the fetishized absolute–in this case the racial stereotype–untenable, because it would expose the stereotype as contingent, a logically arbitrary and infinitely exchangeable effect of the semiological construction of the self.

     

    Dyson engages in a second analysis of black identity as performance when he discusses black fashion and speech in the context of American consumerism in the chapter “What’s in a Name (Brand)?” Here he argues at length that the revulsion Bill Cosby expresses toward black bodies and black speech

     

    echoes ancient white and black protests of strutting and signifying black flesh. It is impossible to gauge Cosby’s disdain, and the culture’s too, without following the black body on the plantations and streets where its styles were seen as monstrous and irresistible. (103-04)

     

    Arguing that black youth culture should be understood as the negotiation of identity in a broader consumer culture “where performance has always been at a premium,” he maintains that black youth forge identities through a complex dialectical interaction with mainstream images and ideals that allows them to “both embrace and resist the mainstream in finding their place in the aesthetic ecology” of American society (113). Dyson here terms this strategy of creating and recreating one’s identity in a hostile environment “jubilant performance,” and once again seems on the verge of offering an alternative to Cosby’s fetishism (113).

     

    Here, however, Dyson does not just drop the subject of performativity before it yields any substantive analysis, as he does with the antitype earlier in the book, but actually repudiates the possibilities of a performative ethics. When he argues that the performance of black identity does not draw its power from “the ethically questionable gesture” of “merely posing,” but is instead rooted in black cultural traditions, Dyson retreats into a humanistic ethics of identity for which identity must ground itself in some cultural essence in order to achieve depth and meaning, despite his having profoundly problematized the idea of “authenticity” in his criticisms of Cosby’s speech (115). We are not surprised to discover that this retreat is marked by an avowal of black cultural pathology (“There is no denying that black youth are in deep trouble” due in part to their “hunger to make violence erotic” [116]) that places Dyson comfortably back inside the boundaries of mainstream acceptability. The rest of the book is largely defined by this shift from a performative to a humanist ontology of racial identity, and Dyson, in the last two chapters, closes his book with an appeal to Christian charity that is, I think, tainted with the plea to all the Cosbies out there to feel sorrier for poor black youth and thereby overcome their “empathy deficit” (234). This appeal implicitly restores the condescending liberal acceptance of the cultural pathology of the black poor that Dyson elsewhere works hard to banish.

     

    It is in the midst of Dyson’s appeal to Christian charity in these chapters, in fact, that we become fully and unequivocally aware of the meaning of the book’s subtitle. Earlier in the book, we cannot help but be aware that Dyson scrupulously distances himself from those who define the black poor in terms of moral and intellectual deficiency. When, for instance, he defines the “Ghettocracy” not only in terms of material affluence, but in terms of values and attitudes that can operate in the absence of any qualifiers of wealth or poverty–for this category includes professional “basketball and football players, but above all, hip-hop stars”–he writes that “their values and habits are alleged to be negatively influenced by their poor origins” (emphasis added) (xiv). His careful qualifications and occasional irony when representing the views of the Afristocracy, however, prove insufficient to dismantle the Afristocratic view of the black poor in the absence of any alternative to this sort of class-based ethics. Dyson’s ultimate affirmation of conservative black middle class views of the black poor becomes explicit when he asks “what to do about the poor” (234). When he answers this question by arguing that “compassion for the poor” is the “hallmark of true civilization,” we must recognize that Dyson’s language in discussing “the poor” has become that of the Christian missionary lamenting the spiritual darkness of the heathen (235). The black poor, whom Dyson has defined in terms of wealth only secondarily, and whom he has defined primarily in terms of their lack of the middle class ethics required to sanctify wealth, seem to require the intervention of bourgeois missionaries if they are to attain a state of spiritual grace. While the book’s subtitle, “Has the Black Middle Class Lost Its Mind?” can be interpreted in many ways, we come to realize that Dyson invests it with a very particular meaning: it implies that it is the moral imperative of the black middle class to uplift the “race,” and that the black middle class has “lost its mind” precisely to the extent that it has abandoned this moral imperative.

     

    Dyson’s retreat from a performative to a humanist ontology of identity is, then, significantly marked by his acceptance of the cultural pathology of the black poor, and by his call to the black bourgeoisie to fulfill its historical mission to redeem the black poor by teaching them the values of God and the middle class. Dyson’s willingness to restore these two ideas to their role as organizing principles in his discourse on the black poor finally betrays the promise of his flirtation with thinking racial identity using a performative framework. In so doing he loses the chance to recognize the contingency of identity and to acknowledge the fact that “race” is merely a semiological effect of the performance of identity (be it linguistic, artistic, or otherwise). Dyson abandons as “ethically questionable” the idea that “race” exists only in the symbolic sense, providing a temporary, imaginary continuity to a radically discontinuous performance of the self (115), and restores the object of Cosby’s rant, the stereotype of the degenerate and wanton poor black, as the structuring device of Dyson’s discourse on race in order that this discourse would remain ethically sound. Dyson is, in the end, unwilling to abandon this object, despite his seeming determination to expose it as a figment of imagination in the earlier chapters.

     

    In his brief discussions of the “antitype” and of “jubilant performance,” Dyson exploits the rift between image and affect, between signifier and signified, that is sutured in American ideology by a malleable racial fetishism. In his decision not to develop these arguments fully or embrace their implications, Dyson loses the opportunity to suggest a frame for rethinking the Manichean ethics of racial identity that would have the potential fundamentally to displace popular discussions of race. This is a shame because Cosby demonstrates contemporary racial fetishism in a simplified form that, I believe, would make the concept of racial fetishism cognizable, and therefore at least potentially subject to criticism, to Dyson’s popular audience. Cosby’s speech insists that one need only look at or listen to poor blacks in order to have irrefutable evidence of their degradation. Thus, Cosby appeals to his audience:

     

    Ladies and gentlemen, listen to these people. They are showing you what’s wrong. People putting their clothes on backwards. Isn’t that a sign of something going on wrong? Are you not paying attention? People with their hat on backwards, pants down around the crack. Isn’t it a sign of something . . . . Isn’t it a sign of something when she’s got her dress all the way up to the crack? (emphasis added)

     

    Much can be gleaned from these lines, in addition to Cosby’s apparent fascination with cracks. We see here that the evidence Cosby offers is not really his thin tissue of factually inaccurate claims about the black poor. Instead, Cosby’s evidence is the impressions made upon his delicate senses by poor and working-class black bodies. It is, in other words, to the self-grounding sensuous truths of black bodies that Cosby appeals. The confirmation of his views appears to him as each feature of the adornment of the bodies in this imaginary confrontation seems to come alive and speak to him. As he tells us repeatedly, he is scanning their bodies for signs–signs of degradation, of violence, signs of sexual pathology–that will tell us irrefutable truths about the bodies on whose behalf the signs speak. He indulges in fetishism in its most elemental sense: inanimate objects (clothing, bodily adornment) come alive and speak, while actual people become inanimate objects–not he or she, but over and over again, “it.” “It’s right around the corner. It’s standing on the corner. It can’t speak English. It doesn’t want to speak English” (emphasis added). Is it really a surprise that “it” can’t speak? How would “it”? And why would “it” need to, when “its” clothing speaks for “it,” telling us everything we need to know about “it,” offering this information as incontrovertible sensual truth? For Cosby it is clear that while the subaltern cannot speak, “its” clothing can.

     

    Dyson, however, forfeits the possibility of making any efficacious critique of Cosby’s unrelenting racial fetishism–which is clearly the heart of the matter–when he repudiates the idea that racial identity is performance. His retreat into an ontology of cultural authenticity, marked by his repetitive embrace of the dogma of black cultural depravity, means that he ultimately reclaims the metaphysical boogeyman that Cosby confronts in the speech, the “monstrous and irresistible” black body, as his own (Dyson 104).

     

    Given the widespread support that Cosby’s speech generated, and the fact that even those who publicly disagreed with him almost without exception accepted the essential truth of his remarks, it seems undeniable that Cosby has given voice to a form of racism with which much of America is eminently comfortable, a racism that can continue to pass itself off as “common sense.” Moreover, the immense popular response tells us something important about contemporary racism: although Cosby refers to cultural signifiers of otherness, his logic of difference is more or less identical to that of more traditional racists who take race to be biological. That is to say, although he invokes signifiers of cultural rather than biological difference, these signifiers operate in essentially the same fashion. Cosby’s invocation of the fetishized physical features that he uses to characterize and simultaneously stigmatize poor blacks requires no external evidence, only a reiterative appeal to common sense, because its truth is made self-evidently visible by the bodies that provide a point of suture for his ideals of cultural normalcy and racial progress. As Anne McClintock writes of the racialized body of nineteenth-century social sciences, “progress seems to unfold naturally before the eye as a series of evolving marks on the body . . . so that anatomy becomes an allegory of progress and history . . . reproduced as a technology of the visible” (38). Cosby offers a similar technology of the visible in the politically acceptable form of “cultural difference” that is free from the controversy and guilt that sometimes accompany the invocation of racial fetishes (e.g. The Bell Curve). This elemental similarity suggests that the distinction between understanding race in cultural and in biological terms has become more or less irrelevant in a contemporary American context: the logics of cultural and biological explanations of racial inequality are essentially identical, as, I would argue, are their material and institutional effects. Both operate on the same basis, drawing their strength from fetishized physical features that form the basis of a semiotics of the body.

     

    On the other hand, by acknowledging what “race” actually is on the most fundamental level–a mere effect, in a certain ideological context, of positing the “I” in language–we might be able to move beyond the false choice of deciding whether poor blacks are naturally or merely culturally inferior. As Cosby’s speech and the response to it starkly demonstrate, “the fundamental ideological gesture consists in” attaching “an image” to “the gap opened by an act” (Zupancic 95). Dyson ultimately repeats this gesture by affixing the black body to the aporetic space opened by the performance of racial identity in order to bestow ethical certainty and respectability to his discourse on race and class. What would happen, however, if we were simply to refuse this gesture? It is, after all, possible to recognize a more complex ethical structure, one that acknowledges the space of radical indeterminacy opened by the performative act. It is, certainly, possible to refuse to paper over this space with imaginary monsters. Joan Copjec writes that it

     

    is only when the sovereign incalculability of the subject is acknowledged that perceptions of difference will no longer nourish demands for the surrender of difference to processes of “homogenization,” “purification,” or any of the other crimes against otherness with which the rise of racism has begun to acquaint us. (208)

     

    Cosby’s ability to conjure those signifiers of otherness that set his remarks above reproach and beyond the reach of empirical validation attests to the fact that such ethical adulthood eludes popular discussions of race in the United States. And Dyson’s failure to remark on this aspect of Cosby’s racism is a lost opportunity to frame a discussion of race that would ultimately escape the fetishistic ethics of racial otherness.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Asim, Jabari. “Did Cosby Cross the Line?” Washington Post 24 May 2004. 3 Aug. 2005. <www.washingtonpost.com/wp-dyn/articles/A51273-2004May24.html>
    • Bhabha, Homi K. The Location of Culture. New York: Routledge, 1994.
    • Copjec, Joan. Read My Desire: Lacan Against the Historicists. Cambridge: MIT P, 1994.
    • Cosby, Bill. “Address at the NAACP’s Gala to Commemorate of the Fiftieth Anniversary of Brown v. Board of Education.” American Rhetoric. 1 Aug. 2005 <www.americanrhetoric.com/speeches/billcosbypoundcakespeech.htm >
    • Derrida, Jacques. “Force of Law.” Trans. Mary Quaintance. Acts of Religion. Ed. Gil Anidjar. New York: Routledge, 2002.
    • Kaufman, P., M.N. Alt, and C. Chapman. Dropout Rates in the United States: 2001 (NCES 2005-046). U.S. Department of Education. National Center for Education Statistics. Washington, DC.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 2004.
    • McClintock, Anne. Imperial Leather: Race, Gender, and Sexuality in the Colonial Contest. New York: Routledge, 1995.
    • O’Reilly, Bill. “Cosby’s Crusade.” Human Events Online 13 July 2004. 3 Aug. 2005 <www.humaneventsonline.com/article.php?print=yes&id=4459>
    • Zupancic, Alenka. Ethics of the Real: Kant, Lacan. New York: Verso, 2000.

     

  • “The Exact Degree of Fictitiousness”: Thomas Pynchon’s Against the Day

    Bernard Duyfhuizen

    Department of English
    University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire
    pnotesbd@uwec.edu

     

    Review of: Pynchon, Thomas. Against the Day.New York: Penguin, 2006.

     

    With Against the Day, Thomas Pynchon has given us his sixth novel in the forty-three years since V. was published in 1963. With that auspicious beginning (V. won the William Faulkner Foundation Award for the best first novel of 1963), Pynchon set a high bar for his fiction, one he raised with his next two novels The Crying of Lot 49 (1966) and Gravity’s Rainbow (1973). The latter remains, arguably, Pynchon’s masterpiece, and if he were ever to give an interview, I think he would concede it has been a tough act to follow. In 1984 he collected his early short fiction in Slow Learner (including an Introduction in which he reveals some aspects of his early writing process), but it wasn’t until 1990 that his fourth novel Vineland was published. Because of its focus on the topical issues of the 1980s, most critics thought Vineland reflected Pynchon’s concern with the direction America was heading during the Reagan presidency, and therefore not the novel that had been occupying him since 1973. With Mason & Dixon (1997), Pynchon regained his stride and produced a text that, for some critics, gives Gravity’s Rainbow a run for the label “Pynchon’s masterpiece.” Having now read Against the Day twice, I would put it in the running with Gravity’s Rainbow and Mason & Dixon–time will tell where it places.

     

    We need to recall Pynchon’s publishing history for any assessment of Against the Day because in this new novel Pynchon is particularly aware of his earlier texts. We have come to expect so-called “Pynchonesque” features in his work, such as thematic concerns with paranoia, the role of technology in controlling human lives, and more importantly, the role of governments and corporations (the line between them becoming ever thinner) in guiding those technologies for the benefit of the few at the expense of the many. We expect wacky character names (Ruperta Chirpingdon-Groin, Dr. Coombs de Bottle, Alonzo Meatman, for instance) and organizations with wacky acronyms (T.W.I.T., I.G.L.O.O., and L.A.H.D.I.D.A., for instance). We expect the text to display a general encyclopedic quality, and it is worth noting that on the day of publication, there was already up and running a Wiki site (ThomasPynchon.com, managed by Tim Ware) to begin cataloging and annotating Pynchon’s deep research for this novel.

     

    Likewise, we expect healthy doses of scientific information (mainly mathematics and physics this time) woven into the text to function at both literal and figurative levels in the plot. Against the Day focuses on issues of time and space, and its narrative time overlaps with the emergence of Einstein’s theories of relativity. In this way the novel concentrates our attention on the new ontologies of the planet that emerged at the turn of the century–a reflection that probably occupied Pynchon during his composition of the text as our own turn of the century passed. Lastly, we expect a “plot” that is loose at best and certainly multiple in focus, and a “plot” that will not be limited to the elucidation of the moral and social evolution of individual characters as one finds in classic “big” novels such as Tolstoy’s. That said, Against the Day is in many ways a character-driven novel.

     

    For many readers, patient re-reading is also required to grasp Pynchon’s style in Against the Day. Pynchon’s styles have always caused readers initial difficulty. Pynchon has from V. onwards demonstrated a proclivity for dialogic interplay among his narrative voices. Some critics have proposed that there is never a single narrator in a Pynchon novel, while others delight in his devotion to parody and pastiche both as a means of character revelation and as stylistic pyrotechnics. Although it is fair to say that Pynchon’s approach to style is not every reader’s cup of tea, a Pynchon novel always challenges and unsettles our habitual strategies of reading; the reader must be ready for quick changes and narrator impersonations throughout the text. Some early reviewers of Against the Day apparently had problems negotiating Pynchon’s various shifts of voice, and some were quick to criticize the changes of level that make the text appear uneven. Pynchon’s style in Against the Day can at times soar, while at other times he seems to have a tin ear, but first-time readers of Gravity’s Rainbow often have the same experience of his style. In some respects, the knock against the style of Against the Day may be that it is too accessible. That seeming accessibility, however, can be deceptive, masking an implicit critique of how the various narrative styles that Pynchon parodies have aided the powerful in maintaining a culture of containment as opposed to the culture of anarchy that Against the Day celebrates and questions in turn.

     

    Because the scope of Against the Day is so broad, the reader follows the main characters over many years and sees the evolutions of their personalities. As in Mason & Dixon, this novel’s chronology forces the characters to undergo changes as the world itself changes. In Pynchon’s first three novels, the primary chronologies were limited to roughly a single year–as befitted their satiric evocation of the quest plot motif. In Mason & Dixon the chronology is expanded because the historical facts of the protagonists’ project to draw the Mason-Dixon line necessitates following them over a period of many years. In Against the Day, Pynchon is not bound by the “real lives” of his key characters, so he has space to develop each one in relation to the conditions of their experiences. It is a fair criticism, especially from readers whose tastes tend toward realism, that with a broad cast of major characters (and with all the other “stuff” he typically crams into his texts) Pynchon still falls short of developing his characters as fully as they deserve. Nevertheless, the patient re-reader of Against the Day will discern that his characters this time are much more nuanced and in many ways more human than some of their predecessors.

     

    When we put Against the Day in the context of Pynchon’s other novels, we see vectors (a metaphor drawn from the mathematical matrix of the text) that clearly connect it to the earlier novels. The most obvious is arguably the major plot line in the saga of the Traverse family and their response to Webb Traverse’s murder. At the end of Vineland, Webb’s grandson (Reef’s son) Jesse is the patriarch of the Traverse-Becker family that gathers for its annual reunion, thus making him the father of Sasha, grandfather of Frenesi, and great-grandfather of Prairie. The genealogical connections track not only family DNA, but the transformation of Webb’s anarchistic spirit through generations of decline to Frenesi’s role as a government snitch. In the larger story of America that Pynchon’s oeuvre presents, Against the Day redirects our attention to Vineland and to the commentary each Pynchon novel makes about the forks in the road America did not take and to our collective complicity in those decisions.

     

    There are, of course, more mundane vectors that readers of Pynchon will acknowledge with a smile, at least. The newest entry in the sea-faring family of Bodine (O.I.C. [oh! I see] Bodine) makes a cameo appearance when Kit Traverse, one of Webb’s sons, finds himself on an ocean liner that transforms into a battleship, but both ships continue on separate voyages. At another point in the text Reef is told he can “leave a message with Gennaro”–namesake of a complete nonentity, the colorless administrator left standing at the close of “The Courier’s Tragedy” in The Crying of Lot 49. Near the end of the text, La Jarretière from V. makes a cameo appearance–almost a decade after her “death” (must we revise our reading of the scene in V. to say “stage death”?):

     

    They came to see blood. We used the…raspberry syrup. My own life was getting complicated…death and rebirth as someone else seemed, just the ticket. They needed a succès de scandale, and I didn’t mind. A young beauty destroyed before her time, something the eternally-adolescent male mind could tickle itself with. (1066)

     

    As he did in Slow Learner, Pynchon may be commenting on his own “adolescent male mind” at the time he wrote V., and maybe on his own thinking at the time that his novel needed a “succès de scandale.” The women of Against the Day are as complexly drawn as the male characters, and a far cry from the “tits ‘n’ ass” female characters of Pynchon’s early texts. Although there are still some elements of objectification at play here, characters such as Dally Rideout, Estrella (“Stray”) Briggs, Yashmeen Halfcourt, and Wren Provenance are among the strongest and most independent women Pynchon has yet written.

     

    Although it is fun to spot such connections back to earlier texts, in the cases of V. and The Crying of Lot 49 it is equally intriguing to consider the characters not reappearing. Since Against the Day overlaps in historical period (1893-1922) and geographical locale (Europe and the Mediterranean) with most of the historical chapters in V., one would almost expect the lady V. to make an appearance at least at one of the many moments of anarchistic activity and political destabilization. If she does, it is in disguise, maybe as Lady Quethlock, guardian to Jacintha Drulov, about whom Cyprian Latewood observes “certain nuances of touching, intentions to touch, withholdings of touch, as well as publicly inflicted torments of a refinement he recognized, suggested strongly that he was in the presence of a Lady Spy and her apprentice” (822). Likewise, when a Foreign Office operative is identified as “old Sidney,” the reader is tempted to think that Sidney Stencil is making an appearance, but we find out about 30 pages later that it is apparently “Sidney Reilly”–the real “Ace of Spies,” whose life story, along with the fiction of John Buchan, may have served as model for the European espionage agents in Against the Day.

     

    In a novel so devoted to anarchist activities, the reader might also expect to encounter the Tristero, the underground postal system from The Crying of Lot 49. If it is here, it too is undercover, operating on some of the mail that finds its recipients even at times when the normal channels seem to be down. The spat between Ewball Oust and his stamp-collecting father may also suggest the Tristero’s presence in Against the Day:

     

    It seemed that young Ewball had been using postage stamps from the 1901 Pan-American Issue, commemorating the Exposition of that name in Buffalo, New York, where the anarchist Czolgosz had assassinated President McKinley. These stamps bore engraved vignettes of the latest in modern transportation, trains, boats, and so forth, and by mistake, some of the one-cent, two-cent, and four-cent denominations had been printed with these center designs upside down. One thousand Fast Lake Navigation, 158 Fast Express, and 206 Automobile inverts had been sold before the errors were caught, and before stamp-collector demand had driven their prices quite through the roof[.] Ewball, sensitive to the Anarchistic symbolism, had bought up and hoarded as many as he could find to mail his letters with. (978)

     

    These “center inverted” stamps (“inverse rarities” to recall one of the readings of Pierce Inverarity’s name) turn out to be real (the four-cent invert is even considered by some philatelists to have been made deliberately rather than by mistake).

     

    In typical Pynchon fashion, however, the passage resonates with the text’s overall theme of anarchism, especially the anarchism stemming from United States economic policy in the 1890s. McKinley was a key player in establishing the gold standard in United States monetary policy of the 1890s, specifically the repeal of the Silver Act in 1893. Much of the trouble in the Colorado mining industry, which helps propel Webb Traverse into his dynamiting ways, was the result of the Repeal and the subsequent devaluing of silver mining interests. Additionally, the Pan-American Exposition, a follow-up to the 1893 Columbian Exposition in Chicago that figures so prominently in the opening section of the novel, was powered by Nikola Tesla’s invention of mechanisms for the long distance transmission of alternating current from generators at Niagara Falls. Ironically, the medical facilities at the Fair, where McKinley was taken, did not have electricity, and apparently no one thought to use the newly invented x-ray machine on display at the Fair to look for the assassin’s bullet. Of course, in a Pynchon novel, such connected allusions prompt, more often than not, thoughts of nefarious conspiracies to manipulate the transmission of “political” power.

     

    Power and the movement of history has been a pervasive theme in Pynchon’s writing. Usually he shrouds the sources of power in many layers of governmental or corporate bureaucracy so that its effects are mainly felt while its origins remain hidden. In Against the Day, Pynchon embodies two main agents of power. The more shadowy of the two is represented by the British Foreign Office and other national entities in the run-up to World War I. The main plot vector here involves Cyprian Latewood (and by intersection also the Yashmeen Halfcourt, Kit Traverse, and Reef Traverse plot vectors), an agent operating in the Balkans in the years leading up to the Balkan Wars of 1912-13, which were precursors to World War I. It is less Pynchon’s point to represent actual espionage-like activities than it is to show the human dimension of the individual agent who survives double-crosses by those he should be able to trust. Cyprian’s masochistic homosexuality is both an asset and liability in his activities, but the vector of his evolution in the course of the novel from hedonistic desire to a sense of larger, religious human responsibility shows Pynchon’s development in Against the Day of more fully rounded characters. Cyprian’s experiences of rescuing other agents and later with Yashmeen and Reef in a ménage à trois show a change in Pynchon’s conception of the way individuals respond to the political forces exerted on them. Unlike Slothrop in Gravity’s Rainbow, Cyprian neither runs away from nor becomes a pawn in the game; instead, he comes to an understanding of a higher human mission of responsibility to collective humanity. When he finally opts out of the situation, it is to join a religious order to explore the emerging spiritual dimension of his existence.

     

    The other main agent of power in the book is the robber baron Scarsdale Vibe, whose actions directly influence the Traverse family. In Vibe, Pynchon puts a face on greed and on the utter disregard by those at the top of the capitalist ladder for those barely holding onto its lower rungs. Vibe’s holdings are so vast that he plays both sides against the middle; for example, he helps fund Tesla’s research into more efficient and less expensive ways of delivering electric power, yet at the same time buys Professor Heino Vanderjuice’s research capabilities to find alternatives that will undermine any efficiencies Tesla might produce. Vibe’s holdings include many mining interests (we can see mining as an analogue to big oil in our own time), and it is through his companies’ suppression of miners that he becomes a target of Webb Traverse’s dynamiting of corporate property. As Reverend Moss Gatlin, the radical labor priest, observes early in the text,

     

    dynamite is both the miner’s curse, the outward and audible sign of his enslavement to mineral extraction, and the American working man’s equalizer, his agent of deliverance, if he would only dare to use it…. Every time a stick goes off in the service of the owners, a blast convertible at the end of some chain of accountancy to dollar sums no miner ever saw, there will have to be a corresponding entry on the other side of God’s ledger, convertible to human freedom no owner is willing to grant.

    Think about it . . . like Original Sin, only with exceptions. Being born into this don’t automatically make you innocent. But when you reach a point in your life where you understand who is fucking who–beg pardon, Lord–who’s taking it and who’s not, that’s when you’re obliged to choose how much you’ll go along with. (87)

     

    Webb’s choice makes him a target of Vibe’s hired killers, Deuce Kindred (a miner Webb had mentored) and Sloat Fresno. Vibe tries to balance the ledger by providing for Kit an all-expenses-paid education, first at Yale and later at Göttingen in Germany, until he decides that Kit is more a liability than an insurance policy. Ironically Vibe’s children are shown to be incapable of inheriting his corporate empire, and he offers at one point to make Kit his heir.

     

    Vibe articulates his views in a public address to “Las Animas-Huerfano Delegation of the Industrial Defense Alliance (L.A.H.D.I.D.A.)” just before his death at the hands of his alter-ego Foley Walker:

     

    So of course we use [labor] . . . we harness and sodomize them, photograph their degradation, send them up onto the high iron and down into mines and sewers and killing floors, we set them beneath inhuman loads, we harvest from them their muscle and eyesight and health, leaving them in our kindness a few miserable years of broken gleanings. Of course we do. Why not? They are good for little else. How likely are they to grow to their full manhood, become educated, engender families, further the culture or the race? We take what we can while we may. . . . We will buy it all up . . . all this country. Money speaks, the land listens, where the Anarchist skulked, where the horse-thief plied his trade, we fishers of Americans will cast our nets of perfect ten-acre mesh, leveled and varmint-proofed, ready to build on. Where alien muckers and jackers went creeping after their miserable communistic dreams, the good lowland townsfolk will come up by the netful [sic] into these hills, clean, industrious, Christian, while we, gazing out over their little vacation bungalows, will dwell in top-dollar palazzos befitting our station, which their mortgage money will be paying to build for us. (1000-01)

     

    Where the “They” of Pynchon’s earlier novels remain shadowy, Vibe’s “We” is a brightly lit evocation of his and his class’s arrogant disdain for the common man. Pynchon’s politics have rarely been so clearly displayed as he lays bare a fundamental flaw in the American capitalist myth. Moreover, the repetition of Vibe’s attitude in present day land barons and their seemingly endless march of “development” into the last vestiges of the American agricultural and wilderness landscape is unmistakable. In Telluride, Colorado, where a good part of the narrative takes place, the once-active mining town has been replaced by ski resorts and upscale condominiums for wealthy vacationers–who probably know nothing of the bloody labor battles fought there.

     

    Vibe belongs to the long line in Pynchon’s fiction of those who abuse the power they have attained, but the response by Webb and, by extension, other anarchist elements in the text is not unproblematic. As Pynchon has shown before, anarchy in the face of entrenched power is usually futile. The desperate act of dynamiting symbols that represent or belong to the oppressive power rarely has the argumentative force to sway those in power to change. In our post-9/11 world in which anarchistic acts have been relabeled “terrorism,” the acts of a century ago are prone to be redefined. However, I think Pynchon wants us to reflect on the forces that drive individuals to see anarchism as the only alternative to the oppression they feel, whatever the basis of that oppression: ethnic, economic, religious, racial, or political. In a way, Pynchon is laying bare the historical context of the “terrorism” that confronts the world today–each blast steels the resolve of those in power to stay the course while seeking to eradicate terrorist agents, without ever really addressing the underlying sources of the problem. Lew Basnight, in Against the Day, starts out working as a detective for those who want to crush the anarchist elements, but when he goes undercover and discovers their conditions and the rationales for their actions, he comes to see the justice of their positions. But Lew can’t effect any real changes; he can only choose to not play, and eventually to opt out of, the game set up by those in power.

     

    The sweep of Against the Day, however, separates Gatlin’s and Vibe’s pronouncements and the choices made by Basnight both in narrative time and in by literal pages. The issue boils down late in the novel to Jesse’s school essay on “What It Means to Be an American”: “It means do what they tell you and take what they give you and don’t go on strike or their soldiers will shoot you down” (1076). The irony cuts deep, and it is no wonder that in such a world some are willing to risk all to stand up in the face of power. But the personal is also the political, and so the story of Webb Traverse and Scarsdale Vibe takes on more expansive dimensions as we follow Webb’s children and their different responses to their father’s murder. In some ways Pynchon is updating the classical Greek theme of revenge; however, contingency rather than Fate ultimately drives poetic justice in the book. All Webb’s killers get their just desserts, but only one as the result of a Traverse pulling the trigger–when Frank, Webb’s third son, encounters Sloat Fresno by accident.

     

    Deuce Kindred meets his end in California in a section of the novel inspired by Raymond Chandler’s Los Angeles detective fiction and by contemporary stories of serial killers like the actual Hillside Strangler. After betraying Webb’s friendship by killing him, Deuce falls in love with Lake Traverse (Webb’s only daughter, with whom Webb had argued and from whom he separated just before his death). Lake, likewise, falls for Deuce despite (though at times it seems because of) the murder, and they marry. Lake’s mother (Mayva) and brothers all disown her, and we expect she will one day take revenge on Deuce herself. She never does, but she is like the furies of Greek Tragedy, stinging Deuce’s conscience by her presence–though she never brings the topic up. They are forced to flee Colorado when Vibe’s people come to believe Deuce had not actually killed Webb. At one point, we wonder if Deuce will be able to redeem himself; he thinks having a child with Lake will somehow make up for his actions, but they cannot conceive. That Deuce ends up as a California serial killer in police custody is a bit heavy-handed and in terms of conventional revenge plotting less satisfying, but then again his plot line is really Lake’s–though her future looks bleak: “Once she thought they had chosen, together, to resist all penance at the hands of others. To reserve to themselves alone what lay ahead, the dark exceptional fate. Instead she was alone” (1057). By disconnecting from her family and the family’s mission of revenge, Lake has opted for a tragic existential end. Her brothers, on the other hand, all find varying degrees of happiness in their lives, and overall, Pynchon ends the novel (the ending unrolls over the course of the final 120 pages) on a positive note for those characters who have earned good personal ends, even if the world itself still needs sorting out.

     

    There is, of course, so much more going on in this text’s 1,085 pages and seventy chapters and among its nearly 200 characters than I have space for here. There are other plot vectors such as for Merle Rideout, his daughter Dally, Lew Basnight, and Yashmeen Halfcourt. Other vectors focus on places and events like the mythic lost city of Shambhala or the Tunguska event or the hollow earth or political upheavals in Mexico in the first decade of the twentieth century. There are also various violations of conventional reality as in the concept of “bilocation”–the ability to be in two places at once. This is most directly represented in Professor Renfrew and Professor Werfner, one at Cambridge, the other at Göttingen, who appear to be the same person, but each working on scientific projects for the eventual World War I antagonists. Yashmeen also can jump in time and space, which makes her a target for various spy entities who would like to exploit her ability. There is a set of characters known as the “Trespassers,” who appear to be from the future and who know what will happen. Lastly there are many fanciful inventions–some prefiguring later inventions in the real world and others prefiguring fictional ones. Overall, however, Against the Day downplays the fantastic in order to attend to the characters.

     

    Framing the novel and helping to connect its parts are the adventures of the Chums of Chance–a group of young balloonists who at first seem to be drawn directly from a series of boy’s adventure books. The narrator in their chapters often cites other volumes of their adventures as if we’ve been following their exploits all along (the subject comes up of whether characters they encounter have or have not read the novels that contain their adventures), and like the characters of such books they never seem to age–at first. With the Chums’s plot vector, Pynchon appears to be calling into question the convention of innocence present in adventure tales. The Chums apparently work for the government in some way that is never fully made clear–at least most of their early contracts seem to generate from some hierarchy. As the novel progresses, however, the Chums increasingly come to question whether what they do is right, and whose ends their missions really serve.

     

    All pretense of innocence is finally lost as they fly over Flanders during the war. Miles Blunden, who among the Chums most often displays the clearest insight into the real world, puts the scene in perspective:

     

    “Those poor innocents,” he exclaimed in a stricken whisper, as if some blindness had abruptly healed itself, allowing him at last to see the horror transpiring on the ground. “Back at the beginning of this…they must have been boys, so much like us…. They knew they were standing before a great chasm none could see the to bottom of. But they launched themselves into it anyway. Cheering and laughing. It was their own grand ‘Adventure.’ They were juvenile heroes of a World-Narrative–unreflective and free, they went on hurling themselves into those depths by tens of thousands until one day they awoke, those who were still alive, and instead of finding themselves posed nobly against some dramatic moral geography, they were down cringing in a mud trench swarming with rats and smelling of shit and death.” (1023-24)

     

    The passage clearly echoes Brigadier Pudding’s battlefield trauma at the Ypres Salient in Belgium from Gravity’s Rainbow as well as the war poems of Rupert Brooke, Wilfred Owen, and Isaac Rosenberg. The Chums, like the world itself, have fallen from innocence, and they choose now to make their way as independent contractors. Before long they hook up with a set of flying girls: the Sodality of Æthernauts; and where Against the Day opens with the command, “Now single up all lines!” (a passage destined for explication if for nothing else than the evocative Pynchon word “now” important in Gravity’s Rainbow) as the bachelor Chums prepare to embark on this text’s set of adventures, by the novel’s close the Chums and their now pregnant wives “will feel the turn in the wind. They will put on smoked goggles for the glory of what is coming to part the sky. They fly toward grace.”

     

    Although the narrative ends literally in the air, it has, unlike Pynchon’s previous novels, a more complete sense of an ending. Despite the catalogue of problems encountered in the world of the text, this novel does not end as Gravity’s Rainbow did with the disintegration of Tyrone Slothrop and an impending nuclear apocalypse. Nor does it close with the random accidental death of Sidney Stencil as in V., or at a nihilistic auction room like Oedipa Maas awaiting The Crying of Lot 49. Pynchon appears to have put some faith in the power of family to find a way through–a faith that first surfaced in Vineland and was reiterated as a sub-theme in Mason & Dixon. We know that the 1920s, when Against the Day ends, was only a prosperous calm before the storm of The Depression and of World War II, but for the characters we have come to care for in this text, the skies have cleared and the wind has freshened.

     

  • “I Can’t Get Sexual Genders Straight”: Kathy Acker’s Writing of Bodies and Pleasures

    Annette Schlichter

    Department of Comparative Literature
    University of California, Irvine
    aschlich@uci.edu

     

    Kathy Acker entered the public stage in the 1980s as a countercultural author to emerge in the 1990s as an icon of dissident postmodern literature.1 Much of the critical literature on her complex works engages Acker’s deconstructions and re-representations of gender, the body, and female sexuality, but her critique of heteronormativity and her rethinking of heterosexuality have been addressed only rarely.2 This is surprising insofar as Acker’s public performances and her writings are so keenly interested in the specific queer fusion of poststructuralist critiques of identity with attacks on the social regulation of sexualities. Yet the artist seems at odds with the contemporaneous discourses that lay claims to a critique of sexuality. To begin with, her critique of normativity does not emerge from a history of gay and lesbian struggles; while Acker expresses her queer identification as a perverse straight woman, she also proactively states her difference from lesbians and gays:

     

     A gay friend said something interesting to me. I asked her if she differentiated between gay and straight women, and she said, “Yes, women who are gay are really outlaws, because we’re totally outside the society–always. And I said, “What about people like me?” and she said, “Oh, you’re just queer.” Like–we didn’t exist?! [laughs] It’s as if the gay women position themselves as outside society, but meanwhile they’re looking down on everybody who’s perverse. Which is very peculiar.” (“Interview Juno” 182)

     

    By mobilizing perverse identifications, Acker’s work demonstrates the possibility of a queer critique through the representation of dissident heterosexuality. While staking not only a queer but also a feminist critical position, Acker rejects radical feminist readings that interpret heterosexuality as a form of sexual alliance with the patriarchal enemy: “heterosexual women find themselves in a double-bind: If they want to fight sexism, they must deny their own sexualities. At the same time, feminism cannot be about the denial of any female sexuality” (“Introduction” 130).3Acker explores, as Catrin Gersdorf explains insightfully, practices of resistance outside “the non-heterosexual paradigms of opposition against patriarchal structures.” This project considers “the literary expression of the will to resist traditional power structures while acknowledging the legitimacy of female heterosexual desires” (154, my translation). As I show in this essay, Acker articulates a resistance against heteronormativity through the reconfiguration of heterosexual practice and identity. Her re-thinking of heterosexuality de- and re-constructs discourses of sexuality and gender, thereby exposing and pushing the limits of queer and feminist critiques of normativity.

     

    In order to show how the textual production of dissident heterosexualities forms a radical critique of sexuality, I discuss Acker’s contribution as an intervention into the controversy over the meanings of what Michel Foucault has named “bodies and pleasures,” the counter-discursive concept he distinguishes from the reigning system of sex-desire. In that debate, scholars of sexuality tend to welcome Foucault’s claim for the counter-discursive function of “bodies and pleasures,” proposing that particular queer sexual acts should be read as oppositional practices. In contrast, gender theorists have been skeptical about the critical potential of Foucault’s suggestion, especially about his reliance on a supposedly “genderless” notion of “bodies and pleasures.” By situating Acker in this controversy about “bodies and pleasures,” I hope not only to illuminate the theoretical dimension of her fiction, but also to advance the discussion of critical strategies of counter-discourses to heteronormativity.

     

    Bodies, Pleasures, Knowledges

     

    Let me begin the discussion of the meaning of “bodies and pleasures” by presenting once more the short passage toward the end of volume 1 of Foucault’s History of Sexuality that has generated such conflicting interpretations:

     

    It is the agency of sex that we must break away from, if we aim–through a tactical reversal of the various mechanisms of sexuality–to counter the grips of power with the claims of bodies, pleasures, and knowledges, in their multiplicity and their possibility of resistance. The rallying point for the counterattack against the deployment of sexuality ought not to be sex-desire, but bodies and pleasures. (157)

     

     

    The different interpretations of Foucault’s somewhat enigmatic remark result predominantly from their different foci: in particular, some depend on constructions of sexuality–in the sense of sexual acts or practices–while others emphasize gender and/or sexual difference. Those foci entail not only contentions over the meaning of “bodies and pleasures” but also over strategies for critiquing sexuality. As feminist thinkers who are also theorists of sexuality, Teresa de Lauretis and Judith Butler agree that the system of sex-desire is based on heteronormative structures that need to be transformed, but they are both critical of Foucault’s “romantic break” (Butler, “Revisiting” 11) with the system of sex-desires. Concerned with the utopianism of “bodies and pleasures,” they both read the break as a problematic symptom of the disregard for gendered bodies and of the role of sexual difference in a hegemonic symbolic order. However, by relegating Foucault’s concept to a non-normative utopia, those critics not only isolate it from his use of the notion of critique but also reinscribe problematic binary figures into the counter-discourse of sexuality.

     

    De Lauretis’s Technologies of Gender, one of the earliest feminist critiques of the notion of “bodies and pleasures,” accuses Foucault of a denial of gender in the name of combatting “the social technology that produces sexuality and sexual oppression” (15). While she is right to argue that because of his disregard for this important socio-cultural difference, he can only repeat the patriarchal notion of sexuality as “an attribute or a property of the male” (14), the conclusion she draws from that observation seems overstated. To her the notion of “bodies and pleasures” is only a convenient way to shift “the sexual basis of gender quite beyond sexual difference, onto a body of diffuse pleasures”; those pleasures invoked by Foucault must exist “apart from a discursive order, from language, or representation” (36). Situating the concept “outside the social,” de Lauretis reads it as an obstruction to critiques of gender as social relation and to feminist attempts to reconfigure sexual politics (36). She sees an absolute difference between a (real) feminist intervention into the social through the concept of gender and an asocial, pre-discursive notion of bodies and pleasures which she finds problematic. The sense that Foucault’s approach is situated in a completely different space from feminism’s disregards the potential for reconfiguring identifications pointed out by queer scholars. De Lauretis’s insistence on “sexuality as construct and as(self-)representation . . . that does have both a male form and a female form” alerts us to the necessity to make gender visible as one of the foundational categories of identity in the analysis of heteronormativity, but it also reinscribes its power (14). If sexuality comes, as the feminist scholar claims, in “both a male and a female form,” does that mean that these forms incorporate binary norms to determine sexual identifications? Is form to content as “gender” is to “sexuality”? Making gender a visible “form” to an unspecified “content” tends to establish it, again, as a normative and privileged category of analysis. Are there specific “contents” to those “forms,” and if so, what is the relationship between “form” and “content”? Are reconfigurations of the visible “forms” possible though different “contents”? Or, would gender as a “form” of “sexuality” have to remain the dominant aspect of analysis, the one that contains identity? De Lauretis intends to articulate a feminist critique of the social that includes an attack on institutionalized heterosexuality, but her gendering of sexuality through the binary of female and male “forms” cannot avoid a heterosexualization of that critique.

     

    While de Lauretis opposes a feminist critique of the social to an asocial notion of bodies and pleasures, Butler’s discussion of Foucault’s proposal stages an absolute temporal break between a time of the disciplinary regime of sex-desire and the utopian future of unrestrained bodies and pleasures. Butler interprets “bodies and pleasures” as “the names given to the time that inaugurates the break with the discursive regime of sexuality” (“Revisiting” 16). Like de Lauretis, she is aware of the dangers of foreclosing the possibility of thinking sexual difference in critical discourse. She even argues that “the pleasure of [Foucault’s] utopian break is derived in part from the disavowal and repudiation of sex,” and correspondingly, from a break with a discourse of sexual difference, or a disavowal of feminism (18). More sympathetic to and engaged with the critical possibilities of Foucault’s rethinking of sexuality than de Lauretis, Butler nevertheless cautions queer studies scholars against a too-quick and enthusiastic shift from the system of sex-desire to “bodies and pleasures.” She is particularly critical of what she claims to be an opposition of “sex-desire” and “bodies and pleasures,” describing it as a “strange binarism at the end of a book that puts into question binary opposition at every turn” (16-17). Here, Butler senses a potential loss for critiques of heteronormativity, insofar as the “the intense teleological and heterosexual normativity that [‘sex-desire’] brings with it is vanquished by the politics based on the rallying point of ‘bodies and pleasures’” (18).

     

    In De Lauretis’s and Butler’s critiques of Foucault’s genderless bodies and pleasures we can detect traces of feminist critiques of the representation of gendered bodies. Because phallogocentrism is, as feminism has argued, central to re/producing intelligible bodily subjects as we know them–through the system of sex-desire, for instance–questions about bodies must often be posed as questions about the conditions and possibilities of the representation and representability of bodies.4 The construction of “bodies and pleasures” as a spatio-temporal “other” of the socio-symbolic order of sex-desire indicates a fear of the critical impasse that could result from the disregard of phallogocentric representational structures within heteronormativity. I agree with Butler–and with de Lauretis for that matter–that it might not be productive for a critique of institutional heterosexuality to ignore the role of phallogocentrism in the formation of subjects, especially if we want to undermine the apparatus of “sexuality” or heteronormativity, to use queer theory’s term. However, the idea that there is a categorical difference between the normative model of “sex-desire” and a utopian vision of “bodies and pleasures” manifests a paradox in feminist discourse on gender and sexuality.5 While Butler sheds the essentialist undertones of gender concepts–concepts that de Lauretis continues to produce–her reading of Foucault continues against its own will to protect the heteronormative site of identity formation, the exposure of which it requires for the analysis of the production of intelligible, i.e., gendered subjects. So her argumentative strategies reiterate the normative figures that the critique of sexuality wants to rethink. Butler reads Foucault’s attempt to offer a critical alternative to normative thinking back into the sphere of normativity, a move that seems to contradict her own understanding of the critical potential of his writings. While in another essay she brilliantly describes Foucault’s form of critique as “that perspective on established and ordering ways of knowing which is not immediately assimilated into that ordering function” (“What” 308), her comments on “bodies and pleasures” occupy themselves with the business of ordering, i.e., with the (re)integration of bodies and pleasures into the order of gender.

     

    In order to avoid dominant categories of identification shaped through notions of gender, desire, and sexual identity, theorists of sexuality such as queer historian David Halperin and Karmen MacKendrick turn to Foucault in order to claim specific sexual acts as “counter-pleasures.”6 They embrace the alleged oppositional character of the notion of “bodies and pleasures,” locating its potential resistance in sexual practices developed by communities of abject bodies, e.g. gay men, butches, or S/M tops and bottoms, figures around which anti-normalizing discourse-practices cluster. In their assessment of such practices, they agree with Foucault’s own interpretations of fist-fucking and S/M as “extraordinary counterfeit pleasures” (qtd. in Halperin, Saint Foucault 89). In several interviews, Halperin emphasizes the innovative role of S/M as “the real creation of new possibilities of pleasure” (Foucault, “Sex, Power” 165), which in turn functions as an important force of “de-subjectivation” and of the production of new cultural forms (Foucault, “Social Triumph”; “Sexual Choice”). Following this lead, Halperin enthusiastically advocates the political efficacy of “the transformative power of queer sexual practices [such as fist-fucking and S/M] that gay men have invented” (Saint Foucault 96).7 He suggests that those newly developed pleasures entail

     

    a tactical reversal of the mechanisms of sexuality, making strategic use of power differentials, physical sensations, and sexual identity-categories in order to create a queer praxis that ultimately dispenses with “sexuality” and destabilizes the very constitution of identity itself. (96-97)

     

    One wonders, however, whether it is enough for Halperin to will to reconfigure the subject for him to leave behind the identity categories he so vehemently criticizes. Foucault’s de-gendering of sexuality, which feminist theorists so convincingly problematize, is replicated in Halperin. His promotion of exclusively gay male sexual acts as resistance to heteronormativity suggests instead that he remains bound to the identitarian concepts he rejects. In addition, his attempt to leave behind the heteronormative binary structure of gender and the dualism of hetero/homosexuality results in an unwilling masculinization of resistance. As in Foucault, “bodies and pleasures” derived from gay male sexualities remain socially and symbolically masculine. Because these theorists reference only gay men as the agents of sexuality, they not only reproduce rather conservative notions of gendered sexuality but also reinscribe dominant representations of the symbolic genders of sexual acts. By excluding lesbian and straight women’s sexual agency in these sexual practices, this work leaves anality, at least, firmly coded as gay male practice,8 and neither Foucault’s nor Halperin’s writings offer a way to feminize it. It seems possible only to rearrange male bodies and their pleasures into oppositional ones, while female bodies are denied the possibility of resistance; the gendered and sexualized symbolics of the body remain untouched. Moreover, by occluding gender as a formative force in the heteronormative production of subjects, this discourse also obscures the status and function of heterosexuality as an identity position that “is divided by gender and which also depends for its meaning on gender divisions” (Richardson 2).

     

    The disappearance of heterosexuality is also significant, albeit in a different manner, in MacKendrick’s revealing book Counterpleasures. MacKendrick relies on a notion of “bodies and pleasures” (although she does not use the term) when she argues, elegantly, for the political validity of a range of sexual practices, such as asceticism or the restraint of the body and its domination in S/M, as acts of resistance against the cultural imperatives of efficiency and productivity within a capitalist (libidinal) economy. Thus she describes the bottom’s body in S/M as always already resistant, because restraint maximizes the power that leads to the body’s triumph against its own subjection–against subjectivity and disciplinary productivity, i.e., against a “natural” and “moral” order (107). Meanwhile the top, who overcomes the resistance to control and pain (in order to impose them), “(declines) productivity in controlling and restraining against gratification” (131). As in Halperin’s readings of fist-fucking and S/M, Foucault’s term “bodies and pleasures” does not signify a future of new sexual practices, but a range of already-practiced acts that contribute to the transformation of libidinal and social systems by resisting the heteronormative economy of gendered bodies and desires. More nuanced in regard to gender issues than Halperin (or Foucault), MacKendrick argues that S/M queers heterosexuals through gender role-reversal and role-playing that result in a subversion of identity:

     

    Dominant women may enjoy dominating other women as well as men and it seldom seems that trading roles with men, with its echoes of vengefulness, is a primary motive. More often the pleasure of such role trading is that of not having to continue to be (solely) oneself, a pleasure that may serve (though it need not) as a starting point for a more radical disruption of any subjectivity at all. (96)

     

    By claiming a de-subjectifying potential for S/M, MacKendrick shows how the shift of perspective to “bodies and pleasures” can explain sexuality as creative social practice that exceeds the system of normative identifications, making possible a transformation of both the subject and of social relations.9 In the present-tense utopia of counter-pleasures, sexual identification is displaced through the dynamics of a queer collective drawing on various “perverse” practices. Straight perverts, male and female, are integrated in that community. Yet this rather seamless integration of heterosexuality into the range of queer locations becomes problematic. The question remains whether the identification of critical agency with specific sexual practices can account for heteronormativity’s production of intelligible and abject subjects.

     

    This unintended reconfiguration of heterosexuality as a gendered concept indicates a crucial methodological difference between the enthusiastic queer readings of “bodies and pleasures” and feminist objections to it. Halperin’s and MacKendrick’s arguments not only turn away from binary, gendered representations of sexuality toward the notion of sexual acts; they also shift from (the gendered subject of) representation, which they critique, to a model of discourse-practices that form and discipline the subject in competing ways. Yet the queer scholars’ insistence on specific practices as subversive pleasures seems to circumvent some fundamental methodological issues. They do not, for instance, make explicit the relationship of body and knowledge, which arises from Foucault’s counter-sexual discourse of “the claims of bodies, pleasures, and knowledges in their multiplicity and their possibility of resistance [my emphasis]” (History 157). Foucault’s phrase suggests that the production of new knowledges–while emerging from bodily practices–cannot occur without attempts to represent the technologies from which it is derived.10

     

    As I show in the following, Kathy Acker’s novel Don Quixote offers an intervention into the stand-offish relationship between celebratory readings of “bodies and pleasures,” which obscure the workings of normativity, and the objections to it in the name of gender and sexual difference, which tend to reproduce heteronormative representations of gender. By queering representational and sexual norms, it takes into consideration and exceeds both positions. Through its claim to represent and legitimize excessive, perverse female heterosexual desires, Don Quixote reimagines socio-sexual relations through “bodies and pleasures” without giving up the critical power of the “intense teleological and heterosexual normativity” that “sex-desire” brings with it. I will refer to Acker’s critical strategy for queering the conditions of representation by using the oppositional potential of “bodies and pleasures” as “semio-somatics.” Semio-somatics articulates a critique of the relationship of the gendered body and its signification in phallogocentric representation, while shoring up different practices of signifying bodies and their pleasures that undermine gendered representation as a condition of the construction of intelligible subjects.11

     

    The Semio-Somatic Work of Acker’s Don Quixote

     

    Acker’s critique of sexual and gendered normativity is particularly powerful because it is related to the attempt to de- and reconstruct dominant regimes of representation, in particular that of narrative form. As feminist and queer critics have noted, narrative structure participates in and tends to reproduce a gendered heteronormative symbolics of sexual difference. Teresa de Lauretis, for instance, reads the story of Oedipus as paradigmatic of Western narrative. She argues that narrative pattern follows the male hero’s desire for self-knowledge, (re)producing a male subjectivity in a universe of sexual difference (Alice Doesn’t 112). Developing de Lauretis’s argument further, Judith Roof shows that the Oedipal logic of sexual difference establishes a heterosexual model of narrative, or what she describes as a “specific reproductive narrative heteroideology” (xxvii). Acker’s novel is directed against a phallogocentric, heteronormative symbolic that does not provide spaces from which to re-represent non-normative sexual subjects. Don Quixote challenges the dominant “heterologic” of narrative through the representation of perverse practices that trouble gender identification in a tale of straight subjection and of attempted opposition to it.

     

    The novel deploys and undermines representational regimes by inscribing perverse abject subjectivities and their pleasures into a phallogocentric representational ontology of “sexuality.” This “sexuality” occupies different registers of signification in Acker’s text: first of all, its refers to an institutionalized (hetero)sexuality, coagulating around the complex of sex-desire that constitutes normalized, gendered subjects. As a story of subjection, it exposes the continuous workings of sexual and textual normativity on the gendered subject, as well as the struggle against “the submission of subjectivity” (Foucault, “Afterword” 212). Second, the simultaneous inscriptions of non-normative desires form a counter-discourse producing a new knowledge of (hetero)sexualities–a knowledge that can be named “bodies and pleasures.” Thus Acker’s attempts to represent what cannot be contained within the binary, normative model of gendered identities requires and produces the denaturalization and destabilization of gender. That semio-somatic approach is manifest in the novel’s deconstructive interrogation of the notion of “femininity” within the framework of a quest for (heterosexual) romantic love, which of course turns out to be an impossibility. Leading the reader through the history of Western culture and into the United States of the late twentieth century, the quest also becomes a journey from female heterosexual to queer self-positioning, or as the novel puts it, to the position of “freak.” The process of resituating the protagonist produces a textual queering of the history of the representation of female bodies and their desires and affirms the female body’s outlaw pleasures. Acker’s specific “cuntextuality,” marked by the objective to inscribe a perverse female heterosexuality, denaturalizes heterosexuality through various representations of gender transgression, S/M practices, and fetishism, and through identification with the socially marginalized. In the following reading, I focus on a sequence of scenes that demonstrate the semio-somatic strategy to simultaneously queer dominant sexual positions and textual forms by inserting “bodies and pleasures” into a dominant narrative of sex-desires.

     

    From the very beginning of the protagonist’s delusional, often paradoxically narrated journey, the novel shows that the cultural conception of femininity as biological destiny opposed to the masculine rational subject is a function of subjection, since it projects an ideal–and one that Don Quixote finds impossible to fulfill. The novel begins with a scene that problematizes the separation of mind and body which defines woman as body and object against a masculine subject. In a clinic, the still-nameless protagonist is waiting to have an abortion. Subjected to a separation of intellectuality from sensuality, Don Quixote uses the abortion to transform the suffering that results from the mind-body dualism into resistance to normalization. As a painful but liberating break from the limitations of physis, for Don Quixote the termination of pregnancy “is a method of becoming a knight and saving the world” (11). With the decision to save the world through her search for love, the mad anonymous “she” reconstitutes herself as Don Quixote, “knight-to-be” (10). The story also changes Don Quixote’s object of love, the young man St. Simeon, into a dog who turns out to be a bitch. With these reconfigurations of her companion, the text constantly shifts the sexual identity of its protagonist, who randomly admits that she “cannot get sexual genders straight” anyway (159). Those shifting sexual identities already demonstrate Acker’s intricate treatment of the related problems of gender and representation. Don Quixote critiques the quest novel, a genre that structurally requires a male hero and situates “Woman” as his other, and at the same time disrupts the heterologic of this representational system. By rewriting Don Quixote’s quest as an interrogation of (the feminine) gender and of heterosexual love from the “other’s” perspective, Acker subverts the heteronormative imaginary of sexual difference. Such a non-identitarian politics of gender and sexuality presents an attack on what Judith Butler famously called the “heterosexual matrix,” i.e., “that grid of cultural intelligibility through which bodies, genders, and desires are naturalized” (Gender Trouble 151, n. 6).

     

    The Oedipal narrative is a foundational story of identity formation in Western culture, and it is therefore a privileged object of Acker’s critique of master narratives of gender and of normative heterosexuality. Acker’s attack on the Oedipal narrative is exemplary for her critical discourse: it shows that her intervention affects both the content and structure of the narrative of subject formation and results in a reconfiguration of narrative itself. The novel provides various descriptions of the nuclear family as a site of the victimization of children through parental violence (115-17). It also includes a variety of anti-Oedipal stories told from the perspective of those child victims of parental domination, thereby breaking up the linearity of (hetero)normative narrative. The story of Don Quixote’s life, for instance, significantly titled “HETEROSEXUALITY,” is told to the Knight by her companion, now the dog, who speaks in the first-person. One of the dog-narrator’s mottos is that “all stories or narratives of revolt [are] stories of revolt” (146). The revolutionary gesture is repeated in the novel’s alinear “dream-text” structure, a montage of metonymically related scenes arranged into three parts. The dream-text form is crucial for Acker’s multilayered method. It exposes the mythic conditions of the Oedipal production of the figure of “woman.” Moreover, by undoing the meaning of “femininity” and critiquing institutions that produce gendered subjects, such as the nuclear family, heterosexual marriage, state politics, and capitalism, the novel as dream-text provides a form for a critique of representational and sexual norms and for the inscription of abject desires.

     

    The dream-text of Don Quixote offers itself as an alternative to the hegemonic narrative representation of subject formation in order to circircumvent the censorship of socially undesired practices of pleasure. It literalizes Jean Laplanche’s and J.B. Pontalis’s notion of “psychic reality” as a rejection of the separation of fantasy, and reality and stages their idea of fantasy as realm of a desubjectivized subject. As a dreamer, the protagonist is in the place of such a subject of fantasy, who is present only “in the very syntax of the sequence in question” (26).12 The analysts’ characterization of fantasy as the “setting” of desire helps describe the novel’s strategy of desublimation as an intervention into the regulation of bodies and desires. As Don Quixote, agent and object of her dream, remarks, “our only sexuality is imaginative. I am imaginatively saving the world” (154). At the same time, the novel also questions the potential of fantasy for social intervention: “Fantasy is or makes possibilities. Are possibilities reality?” (53). This ambiguous “setting” of desire–in fantasy–becomes the condition of possibility for telling revolutionary anti-Oedipal stories of “bodies and pleasures.” As I argue in the remainder of this essay, Acker’s attack on sublimation uses local tales of sexualities that emerge from and affirm formerly repressed, perverse desires in order to make visible alternative regimes of identification and of sexual pleasures.

     

    In Don Quixote, narratives of gender transgressions and S/M role-play denaturalize gender and manifest the struggle against dominant forms of subjection. In the life-story of Don Quixote, for instance, the dog narrator identifies as the boyish young woman Villebranche, who cross-dresses as a man and meets her counterpart in Franville, an unbelievably feminine man: “There was no way this man could be male” (128). These abject characters trouble gender, paradoxically, in order to counter the complete dissolution of their existence. Neither de Franville’s nor Villebranche’s androgyny is freely chosen. It is rather the sign of a “sexual void” (129), the result of the repression of physical desires demanded by the parents, who reproduce the dominant logic of gender identity (133). However, it is precisely the ambiguity of sexual identity that becomes the basis for their mutual attraction. While de Franville and Villebranche recognize each other as masculine and feminine, they manage to reorganize their libidinal economies through gender transgressions in a sadomasochistic scenario. Villebranche finds new enjoyment in dominating the now submissive de Franville, who experiences the force of a pleasure yet unknown to him. Under the socially negated regime of love expressed through pain and violence, the characters’ strategic inversion of gender-specific roles in sexual acts (an active masculinity versus a feminine passivity) leads to their physical and emotional assurance. As Don Quixote herself would have it, the scene demonstrates “how sexual desire tears down the fabric of society” (137). The representation of de Franville’s and Villebranche’s transgressions disrupts the heteronormative re-production of gendered subjectivities and thereby the notion of the subject, whose intelligibility depends on its coherent gendering.

     

    The strategic relevance of this complex representation of gender and sexuality to a counter-discourse of sexuality becomes clearer if we read it in response to Butler’s reflections on the role of phantasmatic identification in a heteronormative order. As protagonists of one of Don Quixote‘s anti-Oedipal narratives, de Franville and Villebranche resemble the “feminized fag and phallicized dyke” whom Butler has described as “two inarticulate figures of an abject homosexuality” within a heteronormative Lacanian symbolic order (“Phantasmatic” 96). Butler writes that the threat of castration is the foundation of the Oedipal scenario, which “depends for its livelihood on the threatening power of its threat, on the resistance to identification with masculine feminization and feminine phallicization” (97). In that context, the construction of the figures “feminized fag and phallicized dyke” assumes that the “terror” over what is here a false identification guarantees the regulation of sexed positions–of heterosexuals–in the symbolic order (96). In other words, these figures embody abjection through castration as a result of failed identification.

     

    Acker’s anti-Oedipal naarrative stages Butler’s argument, with some crucial differences. First of all, it rejects the imaginary figuration of an abject homosexuality by heterosexualizing modes of identification improper to homosexuality. Butler is also aware that the “kind of complex crossings of identification and desire” is not limited to those two figures of abjection, that, indeed, “the binary figuration of normalized heterosexuality and abjected homosexuality” forecloses the range of identificatory possibilities (“Phantasmatic” 103-04). By presenting the failure of normative (gender) identification through the gender-inverted straight characters de Franville and Villebranche, Acker’s novel opens up a perspective on that range of possibilities. The protagonists embody a form of queer straight identification that trespasses the boundary between normalized heterosexuality and abject homosexuality. Secondly, as an abject practice that “saves” one from emotional-psychic death, gender-bending is a successful failure of identification that does not respond to the threat of castration as punishment. It rather offers an alternative signification of bodies, thereby attacking the “defining limits of symbolic exchange” that curtail the production of intelligible subjects (104). And finally, it is doubtful whether the staging of bodies and pleasures in the scenario titled “HETEROSEXUALITY” is organized around the phallus. While the staging of bodies and pleasures can be seen in the reorganization of de Franville’s and Villebranche’s pleasures, these pleasures are not organized according to the law of the phallus. The experience of temporary emotional self-affirmation (albeit not a necessarily happy one) does not only emerge from the inversion of gender roles but also from the discourse-practices of S/M, i.e., from a libidinal economy, that, as MacKendrick convincingly argues, does not fully depend on the absence/presence binary of the phallus. The staging of Villebranche’s infliction and de Franville’s endurance of pain leads to a communication between the two and finally to a transformation of their subjectivities in love–which, as de Franville claims, “doesn’t need human understanding” (141). Thus Acker’s fictional anti-Oedipal scenario offers a textual vision of bodies and pleasures, which stages and exceeds Butler’s interrogation of the relation between gender identification and desire. Acker’s and Butler’s writings complement each other and form a counter-discourse on sexuality.13

     

    However, Acker’s text does not suggest that the bodies and pleasures of S/M can completely do away with gender or sexual difference as constraints of subject formation. I therefore disagree with Carol Siegel’s argument that S/M practitioners can resist gender, when “in shudders of pleasure-pain, biological femaleness can shake off gender codings as well as resignifying [sic] them” (par 31). It is obvious that Acker critiques the hegemonic regimes that discipline bodies and desires and that she aims to reconfigure the conditions of the formation of subjects, but Siegel’s analysis of Don Quixote tends to override the novel’s ambivalence about the possibilities of oppositional practices. Acker certainly makes, as Siegel argues, strategic use of masochism to destroy dominant conceptions of gender and sexuality by representing alternative uses of the body. Yet Siegel overstates the issue when she claims that the novel’s representation of the insane use of masochism allows for an “entrance into a space outside society” (par 42) from which to resist heteronormative gender constructions–and that it is the inscription of such a space that gives the text its value as a “revolutionary novel” (par 44).

     

    Such a reading ignores, for instance, the meditations on (and the possible defense of) heterosexuality as the narrator’s “initial sickness,” her preference for men who treat her badly: “what was it–raving and raging in me–that allowed me to change or descend into what I wasn’t?” (126). The text performs an explanation of this “sickness” through “archetypes” of masculinity and femininity: the attraction to men is explained as a desire to be rejected because “man always rejects: his orgasm is death” (127). Sexual relations with women do not offer her a viable perspective: “Being with another woman was like being with no one, for there was no rejection or death. Therefore I didn’t care” (127). Because Acker’s writing does not reduce sexuality to heterosexuality and inserts its characters into various relationships with partners of different (unstable) genders, heterosexuality in her sexual-textual universe becomes a synecdoche rather than a metaphor for sexuality.

     

    However, Don Quixote’s “initial sickness” is also tied to the dominant order, though the protagonist’s desire for debasement is a constant cause of frustration and self-doubt. In distinction from Siegel, Arthur Redding captures brilliantly the role of masochism as an ambiguous strategy of critique in Acker’s “heterotopia” of the body:

     

    masochism emerges from the dominant sexual order and represents a colonization of the feminine imagination . . . . Masochism involves a theatricalized confrontation with the violence at the root of sexualization in this world; but what may emerge from that confrontation is open to a continual rewriting of the bodily and textual word. (300-01)14

     

    The scene “HETEROSEXUALITY,” which opens the representation of bodies and desires up to possible recodings, remains ambiguous about the oppositional possibilities of masochism. The labor of reconfiguration represented through the two characters Villebranche and de Franville undermines normative gender constructions of masculine activity and feminine passivity, but it does not evacuate the binary, heteronormative construction of gender. Villebranche’s and Franville’s story cannot be a celebration of liberation through sexual practice or a movement to an “outside” of society. Rather, the text represents the struggle against dominant notions of gender identification–as one of the regimes of straight subjection–and affirms perverse practices, queers gendered subjectivities, and performs non-normative heterosexualities. At the same time, it also makes clear that de Franville’s and Villebranche’s sexualities cannot be fully disconnected from the mechanisms of social regulation. Because a total reordering of gender codes does not seem possible–since, in other words, the system of sex-desire is still at work–the narrative lets its protagonist Don Quixote finally turn into a woman who prefers “loneliness to the bickerings and constraints of heterosexual marriage” (202). The attempt to resist forces of straight subjection results in the protagonist’s self-reconfiguration as freak. Through her identification as “freak,” Don Quixote situates herself with a group of unspecifically marginalized existences, a collective beyond gender.

     

    Don Quixote’s situation as unmarried female freak is not to be read as an hysterical repression of physicality but as a political rejection of the heteronormative laws of domesticity. In an illuminating interpretation, Siegel relates this celibacy to the novel’s allusions to asceticism, expressed in figures of mad saints like St. Simeon. Following MacKendrick’s theorization of counter-pleasures, she interprets asceticism itself as one of the novel’s oppositional pleasures because it aims at “the [impossible] refusal of finitude, exhaustion, and limit–all through the body” (qtd. in Siegel par 43). Yet Don Quixote’s situation also entails a sense of loss: “That sexual ecstasy of orgasm which appears out of a simultaneous overcoming of the hatred, which is fear, of men and out of actual play with the myth of rejection is no longer mine” (206). Instead of having sex, Don Quixote resorts to the power of memory, while questioning its transformative power:

     

    I remember. But is what I remember this ecstasy which comes from a mixture of pain and joy, a pure joy? Are my memories, whose sources might be unknown, actual glimpses of possible paradise?” (206)

     

    Emerging from physical experience, these memories, like fantasies, offer a glimpse of a livable future. The space for such a vision is opened by the deconstruction of dominant systems of gender and sexuality, while at the same time Acker’s inscriptions of sexual and/as textual perversions denaturalize gender and de-normalize sexual identities. Through the reconfiguration of its protagonist, Don Quixote, Acker attacks narrative as one of the conditions of the formation and disciplining of subjects and their desires, while articulating alternative configurations of subjectivity. At the same time, the opposition to the hegemonic through alternative visions of sexualities, “bodies and pleasures,” provides the critical energy to deconstruct as well as reconfigure those hegemonic regimes to produce a c(o)unt(er)-knowledge of sexuality.

     

    Acker’s ambivalent sexual/textual politics does not produce affirmative subjectivities. I have emphasized the text’s ambivalence about its own critical strategies because this ambivalence is a symptom of its desire to resist fully cohering readings. Acker should therefore not be read as a follower of any specific “school” of thought.15 While she presents a powerful critique of hegemonic institutions, her texts, as Gayle Fornataro claims, do not “coagulate into a set of centralized ideas” (85). Rather, she helps herself from the arsenal of postmodern thinking and avant-garde writing, which she confronts with feminist and queer perspectives and sensibilities. Through her deconstructive engagement with phallogocentric discourses, such as the system of sex-desire, and her affirmations of abject sexual practices, Acker illustrates Beatriz Preciado’s claim that an effective counter-discourse of sexuality requires a critical double-perspective. In her Manifeste Contre-sexuelle, the Spanish queer-feminist philosopher advocates a “counter-sexuality” (contre-sexualitè),16 which “plays with” two different temporalities:

     

    First, a slow temporality, in which the sexual institutions never seem to have been subject to change. In this temporality, sexual technologies appear unchangeable. They take on names such as “symbolic order,” transcultural universes,” or just “nature.” Each attempt to change them is regarded as a “collective psychosis” or as an “apocalypse of humanity.” This level of unchangeable time is the metaphysical foundation of each sexual technology. Each counter-sexual labor works against this temporal framework, intervenes in order to operate there. Second, a time of the event, in which every actuality escapes linear causality. A fractal temporality, made from a multiple “now,” a time, which cannot be a simple effect of the truth of sexual identity or of the symbolic order. This is the real field, on which counter-sexuality incorporates the sexual technologies, but also the bodies, identities, practices derived from it. (13, my translation)

     

    Within a double-layered attack on heteronormativity, feminism’s critiques of representation intervene in the first framework of time (another name of which might be “phallogocentrism”), while queer practices, such as Preciado’s examples of “dildo technology,” have to be situated within fractal time. Acker’s semio-somatic writing occupies both temporal registers at the same time. It expresses the complicated relationship between the phallogocentric symbolic, which contains the system of sex-desire, and a range of socio-sexual practices, among them a notion of perverse “bodies and pleasures,” which are the instruments and the effects of its eccentric critique. Acker is not the only author committed to the critical strategy of semio-somatics. Some lesbian writers and theorists such as Monique Wittig or Nicole Brossard also engage in semio-somatic forms of critique. Yet Acker performs in a fictional scenario the process of a critical queering of heterosexuality from within heteronormativity, thereby undermining its foundations. Her “cuntextuality” demonstrates that the political project of a critique of sexuality cannot remain the sole task of lesbian and gay thinkers but that it is a responsibility of straight (feminist) writers as well. Through her cuntextual critique of the normative structures of narrative Acker also provides perspectives on straights’ possible disidentification from heternormativity. It is in this sense that her text opens up a counter-discourse that might be called a “queer heterosexuality.”

     

    Notes

     

    1. For a helpful historicization of Acker, see Moran and Pitchford (Tactical Readings; “Floggin”).

     

    2. A notable exception is Carol Siegel’s complex reading of Acker’s Don Quixote. I come back to her text in my discussion of the novel.

     

    3. Pitchford describes Acker’s ambivalence towards feminism insightfully in terms of an ambivalence towards identity politics, which reflects a split in 1980s feminism itself.

     

    4. See for instance the impact of sexual difference feminism and its critique of representation on both Butler and de Lauretis. In Gender Trouble, Butler criticizes the role of feminism as a movement that tries to accomplish the representation of “women.” Luce Irigaray, who articulates a critique of the phallogocentric representational order, functions as an unacknowledged authority of Butler’s own critique. De Lauretis’s early and influential feminist text, Alice Doesn’t, is motivated by the question of the possibility of a representation of women in a phallogocentric symbolic order. In Technologies, she theorizes “the subject of feminism” in relation to representation and to the non-representability of gender (Technologies 26).

     

    5. Elizabeth Grosz’s reading of bodies and pleasures is potentially more productive. She argues that bodies and pleasures are “themselves produced and reproduced as distinct phenomena, through, if not forms of power as such, at least various interlocking economies, libidinal, political, economic, significatory, which may congeal and solidify into a sexuality in ‘our’ modern sense of the word, but which also lend themselves to other economies and modes of production and regulation (218). So “bodies and pleasures” can be read as a signifier of a potential critical point of view, which would allow us to see the problems of the existing apparatus of “sexuality” and inspire the reconfiguration of libidinal economy. Grosz, however, does not work on that claim further.

     

    6. Counterpleasures is the title of MacKendrick’s book.

     

    7. In his more recent work, Halperin cautions against a “very familiar and uncontroversial and positivistic” notion of bodies and pleasures (How To Do 26).

     

    8. As Diane Richardson writes, “the anus as a part of the sexualised body is predominantly coded as a gay male body” (6).

     

    9. See Warner and Berlant.

     

    10. Lee Edelman’s notion of “homographesis” is an important exception. It is significant that Edelman mobilizes deconstruction, and that he refers to works of poststructuralist feminists in order to develop his complex theory of the writing of homosexuality.

     

    11. I am not claiming that Acker is the only writer/theorist of a “queer straightness.” Early queerings of heterosexuality “from within” can be found in Sedgwick (“White Glasses” and “A Poem Is Being Written”) and in Silverman (Male Subjectivity at the Margins, New York: Routledge, 1992). For more recent attempts, see Siegel, New Millenial Sexstyles and the edited collections by Fantina and by Thomas. However, I am particularly interested in Acker’s counter-discourse of heterosexuality through a critique of representation.

     

    12. See also Redding’s excellent use of Laplanche/Pontalis for a reading of masochism in Acker.

     

    13. For Acker’s use of theory, see Kocela’s interesting assessment of her relationship to Butler’s work in his excellent essay on female fetishism. The essay traces affinities between the two writers but suggest that Butler’s philosophical thinking remains too constrained for Acker, who “follows the methodology of a fiction firmly grounded in the impossible” (par 18).

     

    14. Siegel refers to Redding, but she does not translate the ambiguity that Redding points out into her own reading.

     

    15. Some Deleuzian/Guattarian scholars tend to project their theoretical preferences on Acker’s literary texts in order to create a methodological coherence that does not do justice to Acker’s labor of decentralization. See, for instance, Brande, whose passion for the Body without Organs dominates his interpretation of Acker’s Don Quixote.

     

    16. While Preciado does not explicitly refer to the term “bodies and pleasures,” her idea of “contresexualité” provides a notion of new libidinal possibilities indebted to Foucault’s thinking.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Acker, Kathy. Don Quixote: A Novel. New York: Grove Press, 1986.
    • —. “Interview with Andrea Juno.” Angry Women. Eds. Juno Andrea and V. Vale. Vol. 13. San Francisco: Research Publications, 1991. 177-85.
    • —. “Introduction to Boxcar Bertha.” Bodies of Work: Essays. 1988. London: Serpent’s Tail, 1997.
    • Berlant, Lauren, and Michael Warner. “Sex in Public.” Critical Inquiry 24 (Winter 1998): 547-66.
    • Brande, David. “Making Yourself a Body Without Organs: The Cartography of Pain in Kathy Acker’s Don Quixote.” Genre 24: 191-209.
    • Butler, Judith. Gender Trouble: Feminism and the Subversion of Identity. London: Routledge, 1990.
    • —. “Phantasmatic Identification and the Assumption of Sex.” Bodies That Matter: On The Discursive Limits of “Sex”. New York: Routledge, 1993. 93-119.
    • —. “Revisiting Bodies and Pleasures.” Performativity and Belonging. Ed. Vikki Bell. London: Sage, 1999.
    • —. “What Is Critique? An Essay on Foucault’s Virtue.” The Judith Butler Reader. 2001. Eds. Sara Salih and Judith Butler. Malden: Blackwell, 2004. 302-22.
    • de Lauretis, Teresa. Alice Doesn’t: Feminism, Semiotics, Cinema. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1984.
    • —. Technologies of Gender: Essays on Theory, Film, and Fiction. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1987.
    • Edelman, Lee. Homographesis: Essays in Gay Literary and Cultural Theory. New York: Routledge, 1994.
    • Fantina, Richard, ed. Straight Writ Queer: Non-normative Expressions of Heterosexuality in Literature. Jefferson: MacFarland, 2006.
    • Fornataro, Gayle. “Too Much Is Never Enough: A Kaleidoscopic Approach to the Work of Kathy Acker.” Devouring Institutions: The Life and Work of Kathy Acker. Ed. Michael Hardin. San Diego: San Diego State UP, 2004. 85-110.
    • Foucault, Michel. “Afterword: The Subject and Power.” Michel Foucault: Beyond Structuralism and Hermeneutics. Eds. H.L. Dreyfus and Paul Rabinow. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1982. 208-26.
    • —. Ethics: Subjectivity and Truth. Ed. Paul Rabinow. Trans. Robert Hurley. New York: New, 1997.
    • —. The History of Sexuality: The Will to Know. Vol. 1. New York: Vintage, 1980.
    • —. “Sex, Power, and the Politics of Identity.” Foucault, Ethics: Subjectivity and Truth 163-74.
    • —. “Sexual Choice, Sexual Act.” Foucault, Ethics: Subjectivity and Truth 141-56.
    • —. “The Social Triumph of the Sexual Will.” Foucault, Ethics: Subjectivity and Truth 157-62.
    • Gersdorf, Catrin. “Postmoderne Aventiure: Don Quijote in America.” Zeitschrift für Anglistik und Amerikanistik 2.46 (1998): 142-56.
    • Grosz, Elizabeth. “Experimental Desire: Rethinking Queer Subjectivity.” Space, Time, and Perversion. New York: Routledge, 1995. 207-27.
    • Halperin, David. How to Do the History of Homosexuality? Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2002.
    • —. Saint Foucault: Towards a Gay Hagiography. New York: Oxford UP, 1995.
    • Kocela, Christoper. “A Myth Beyond the Phallus: Female Fetishism in Kathy Acker’s Late Novels.” Genders 34 (2001).
    • Laplanche, Jean, and J.B. Pontalis. “Fantasy and the Origins of Sexuality.” Formations of Fantasy. 1964. Eds. Victor Burgin, James Donald, and Cora Kaplan. London: Routledge, 1989. 5-34.
    • MacKendrick, Karmen. Counterpleasures. Albany: State U of New York P, 1999.
    • Fantina, Richard, ed. Straight Writ Queer: Non-normative Expressions of Heterosexuality in Literature. Jefferson: MacFarland, 2006.
    • Moran, Joe. Star Authors: Literary Celebrity in America. London: Pluto, 2000.
    • Pitchford, Nicola. “Flogging a Dead Language: Identity Politics, Sex, and the Freak Reader in Acker’s Don Quixote.” Postmodern Culture 11.1 (2000). <http://muse.jhu.edu/journals/pmc/v011/11.1pitchford.html>
    • —. Tactical Readings: Feminist Postmodernism in the Novels of Kathy Acker and Angela Carter. Lewisburg: Bucknell UP, 2002.
    • Preciado, Beatriz. Kontrasexuelles Manifest. Trans. Stephen Geene, Katja Diefenbach, and Tara Herbst. Berlin: b_books, 2003.
    • Redding, Arthur. “Bruises, Roses: Masochism and the Writing of Kathy Acker.” Contemporary Literature 35.2 (1994): 281-304.
    • Richardson, Diane. “Heterosexuality and Social Theory.” Theorising Heterosexuality: Telling It Straight. Ed. Diane Richardson. Buckingham: Open University P, 1996. 1-20.
    • Roof, Judith. Come As You Are: Sexuality and Narrative. New York: Columbia UP, 1996.
    • Sedgwick, Eve Kosofsky. “A Poem Is Being Written.” Tendencies. Durham: Duke UP, 1993. 177-214.
    • —. “White Glasses.” Tendencies. Durham: Duke UP, 1993. 252-66.
    • Siegel, Carol. “The Madness Outside Gender: Travels with Don Quixote and Saint Foucault.” Rhizomes 1 (2000).
    • —. New Millenial Sexstyles. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 2000.
    • Silverman, Kaja. Male Subjectivity at the Margins. New York: Routledge, 1992.
    • Thomas, Calvin, ed. Straight With a Twist: Queer Theory and the Subject of Heterosexuality. Urbana: U of Illinois P, 2000.

     

  • How To Lose Your Voice Well

    Marc Botha

    Department of English Studies
    University of Durham
    m.j.botha@durham.ac.uk

    When the conversation gets rough . . .

     

    The human impulse to talk is fundamental, whether in the form of conversation, discussion, debate, or argument. I am no exception, but whenever I participate I also find, sadly, that my attention wanders easily. I am often caught, or catch myself, hearing and not listening, as the voice/s with which I am an interlocutor (I have assumed this role and taken this responsibility) gradually lose their vocality. They become accents and inflections that give the illusion of holding my attention, but then disintegrate to a drone, to white noise, while my own internal voices race in any or every direction–haphazard, discontinuous, serrated lines, a messy and garbled dialogue. The moment I say something along the lines of “Could you just repeat that last bit?” I must accept my disgrace. I am a bad listener. I cannot follow the commands of your voice, although I try to obey its regulation of time and its imagined teleology.

     

    The voice brings us together in this always slightly dysfunctional conversation. But the voice divides us again because, in our conversation, it is the most obvious reminder of our separation from each other–our individual voices, as they drift through endless talking. And as these individual voices mingle, closing distance, creating new gaps, they remind us that as inevitable as communication is, miscommunication is its inseparable twin.1 They are not even different sides of a coin, but the self-same thing. We give voice to our mis-/communication, to being mis-/understood. In recent times vocality, inasmuch as it may be related to a tradition of orality, has come under significant theoretical scrutiny. This essay, however, does not trace competing ontologies of the voice, nor does it trace its role within either the all-too-frequently invoked Derridean critique of logocentrism–reached, I think, via a progressive, if amnesic, history of vocality in the notion of phonocentrism–nor in a phenomenological taxonomy Steven Connor notes in oral language’s uncontrollability, its aptness, in relation to writing’s comparative ineptitude, “to suggest a world of power and powerful presences” (24).

     

    Instead, the aspect of the voice most relevant to the present concern emerges in Connor’s theoretical construct, the vocalic body:

     

    Voices are produced by bodies: but can also themselves produce bodies. The vocalic body is . . . a projection of a new way of having or being a body, formed and sustained out of the autonomous operations of the voice . . . . The leading characteristic of the voice-body is to be a body-in-invention, an impossible, imaginary body in the course of being found and formed . . . . the voice seems to precipitate itself as an object, upon which it can then itself give the illusion of acting. (35-6)

     

    Connor’s evocation of the voice incarnate as a sonic body in a phenomenologically affirming relationship with itself does not end in merely effecting an auto-productive whirl. The idea of the vocalic body also provides an interesting model for discussing a mode of intersubjectivity I should like to call “intervocalic communion.” This term is intended to invoke the complex aspects of mis-/communication involved in the interactions of the voice with itself and with its speakers and auditors, aspects described below.

     

    The idea of communion evokes both conjoined experience and the imperative of communication that informs much of the argument. Together with the first term, “intervocalic,” the phrase suggests a tension like the one we have seen in the voice that divides us even as it brings us together: inter maintains the discreetness of vocalic bodies (designating their separateness by virtue of the space between them) even as com implies their proximity. Much of this discussion concerns this tension, and in partial resolution of it a third term will emerge–silence. Returning to the idea of communion: while it may lead to a deeper understanding of an ethics of being-together, such being-together is not a heightened spiritual sharing. Rather, a study of intervocalic communion will ultimately reveal its value negatively, not as a space of profound insight per se, but as an absence of lack-of-insight. Intervocalic communion is thus not a mechanism involved in the production or analysis of little epiphanies, but proffers a conceptualization of the ordinary and the everyday that is itself sufficient to generate insight and change without announcing its emancipatory potential.

     

    Intervocalic communion enables, in the first instance, the plotting out of the relations within vocalic bodies as abstract entities; the emergence of a vocalic body has the dual function of positing within the voice both the abstract space of acting subject and self-referential object. It is capable of this because the vocalic body as subject not only acts outwardly2, but also on itself, hence constructing itself as object of its actions, deconstructing itself as agent, and reconstructing the entire vocalic body in this way as a functional entity capable of operating simultaneously as subject and object. This is, perhaps, how we are able to recognize the voice as an entity without having to associate it with a specific predetermined physical agent, such as when we hear voices behind us getting onto a train–they have physical presence without requiring corporeal substance.

     

    Secondly, these abstract vocalic bodies, existing thus as auto-productive subjects, enter into an inevitable environmental intervocalic communion with one another. Such a relationship is significant because it demonstrates that intentionality is not a prerequisite for the voice to have specific effects in the world. Let us assume, for example, that vocalic bodies encounter one another not in active conversation but in a so-called passive setting between rooms whose occupants do not know of each other’s presence. Even in such a situation, this collision proves to be active, as the vocalic bodies do work on one another, affecting their internal relations as well as the overall soundscape.3

     

    The intervocalic communion of vocalic bodies demonstrates the complexity with which we are faced when we communicate.4 William Rasch’s essay, “Injecting Noise into the System,” takes as one of its points of departure Serres’s discussion of the nature of communication. Moving from the apprehension that communication “is triadic . . . see[ing] Self and Other [sender and receiver] . . . united against a common enemy, the parasitical third party called noise” (63), Rasch reports that Serres goes on to associate noise with the empirical variation, and excluded possibilities of each communication, an Otherness that, ultimately, also points to the receiver as the Other of communication, concluding that “no amount of dialogue can eliminate noise and still preserve the Other” (64). Rasch goes on to develop a model of the interlaced functioning of noise, information, mis-/understanding and mis-/communication, according to which

     

    misunderstanding is no longer understood as a special case and understanding is no longer to be the self-evident ground of communication . . . . The issue at stake is control (in the sense of establishing order out of chaos), but control becomes tenuous when misunderstanding is seen to be constitutive of understanding. (70-1)

     

    So on the one hand we have the need for noise, for complexity, in any communicative system, and on the other we find, again, the inevitable saturation of the system with miscommunication. These are both demonstrated and heightened by the confrontation and subsequent commingling of vocalic bodies to which intentionality and selection are simply not applicable, and yet which remain active powers.5 Might one go as far as to suggest that miscommunication is an ontological imperative, a defining function of the very being of vocalic bodies coming into mutual contact, active and powerful, but without agency?

     

    The third mode of intervocalic communion is somewhat less esoteric, but no less significant. Remembering that vocal production is an act of identifying the self as a subject–“giving voice is the process which simultaneously produces articulate sound, and produces myself, as a self-producing being,” as Connor puts it (3)–the ties between the speaker (as subject) and the vocalic body (as both the product of the speaker and a subject in its own right) reinvigorate the speaker and its relation to other speaking subjects. Subjects are always miscommunicating, but their proximity, and the role the vocalic body plays in adducing such proximity, provides a conceptual model which is somewhat less confrontational than the idea of speaking to someone, without sacrificing either directness or the accomplishment of communication.

     

    The vocalic body becomes the conceptual extension of the speaker, but since it is also autonomous, in contact with other such autonomies–and all speaking subjects experience such an extension–it is also, in a sense, a systemic operation that provides a functional overlap between speaking subjects without enforcing physical proximity. It follows that intervocalic communion may also be responsible for a recognition within the subject of a particular internal cleavage. This occurs because the vocalic body is a self-referential emanation in the process of becoming: it emerges from the speaker as voice, but returns to the speaker as a body in a self-sustaining state, which is both produced by and is productive of the speaker. This intervocalic communion, between the voice of the subject and what was the voice of the subject, demonstrates a shortcoming of subjecthood. It shows the impermanence of the subject’s power to create something with genuine sustainability. As the sound leaves the subject’s mouth, it is his/hers, but as it re-enters the ears, it is already a vocalic body.

     

    The complexity that emerges when one considers that all these forms of communion happen whenever there is intervocalic sound is entirely overwhelming. Conversations, discussions, and disagreements abound, discourse proliferates, and at any moment I am struck with the possibility of one of those very vocal arguments alluded to above. Intervocalic communion saturates space all the time, so that there seems to be no respite from it: the voices of speakers, the voice of each speaker reconstituting itself as a vocalic body with its own internal relations, the interaction of various vocalic bodies. We might add internal voices to this list–the monologues and dialogues in our heads.6 Indeed, are these not also vocalic bodies in every sense, although their referential world is substantially different from that of the voice externalized? And if this were not enough, intervocalic communions are amplified through environmental reverberations, and as these echoes return, reconfirming our own positions, they also confirm a world, a very noisy world, beyond both our comprehension and our control.

     

    If this situation, these collisions upon collisions, helps explain why we are bad listeners, its progressive analysis may provide us with the clues to becoming better at this crucial task. Through the complexities of intervocalic communion, the voice reaches other people, other entities, bringing them into proximity and pulling them together. Intervocalic communion is a frenetic happening that calls for responses, and this call and answer bring us together. They also reveal the essential otherness of the Other, the division between the self and other which provides a basic ground for ethical interaction. Thus, it is possible to see both the uniting and the dividing functions of intervocalic communion as essentially productive. But let us not forget that they are productive of an essential miscommunication. So in this union and division we still manage to miss each other in a significant way.

     

    Rasch reminds us that from a scientific perspective, “the chaotic noise of the universe can serve . . . as a continuous and spontaneous source of new order and new information” (65). Indeed, it is possible to imagine that all articulation requires the presence of an unarticulated morass. Serres’s statement that “the work is made of forms, the masterpiece is the unformed fount of forms; the work is made of time, the masterpiece is the source of time; the work is in tune, the masterwork shakes with noises” not only reinforces this assertion, but also insists on the role of noise and chaos in form and formation, and in the way these impact on communication.7 The vocalic body, and its interactive matrices in the idea of intervocalic communion, is unquestionably a form through and from which the work of mis-/communication is wrought. In Rasch’s words, “the problem of communication can be formulated as both the necessity for a restrictive code and for chaotic noise” (67).

     

    What, then, is the situation when one concretizes such abstractions? Noise and chaos seem acceptable general indicators for some primal substance, but what precisely is their relationship to specific instances of intervocalic communion and vocalic bodies? Should I feel guilty for being a bad listener, or is the voice precisely that one emanation of sound that, when overlaid with other voices to a point of chaos, does not make a good noise?

    Polyphony?

     

    In music, the term polyphony refers to a compositional method that simultaneously presents more than one melodic line of equal importance.8 Should the term polyphony mean literally many sounds (vague, undefined), or are we to favor its dominant usage in musical discourse, which implies eventual agreement, order and form? One could argue whether the phonos of polyphony should be understood as any sound, musical sound, musical voice, or any sort of voice–or combinations of these. The path from monophonic plainchant, the simplicity of which aims for “the clear recitation of text” and does not desire “musical complication” (Seay 36), to the increased vocalic texturization of the Ars Nova period, casts doubt on the monolithic performance of the Logos as either the speaking or intoned but in either case singular voice. This tendency culminates in twentieth century movements like deconstruction, reflected, albeit anticipatorily, in iconic statements such as Gertrude Stein’s “rose, is a rose, is a rose” (Stein v-vi),9 and, in musical terms, in compositions such as John Cage’s Dance/Four Orchestras in which the composer “divide[s] the orchestras into four parts, with four conductors, going at four speeds . . . . It’s a circus situation . . . a four-ring circus” (Cage 96).

     

    Musical polyphony had been exclusively vocal, but contemporary polyphony includes, in Cage at least, sounds as diverse as those made by cacti, traffic, and conch shells; this progression demonstrates an increasing incorporation of noise–in the scientific sense of it as “sound that is disorderly” (Levarie 21)–into music. At play, though, is another form of polyphony, which, although it shares common structural elements with its musical counterpart, is usually called on to demonstrate a certain position of ethical equivocity. Mikhail Bakhtin and Edward Said have given particularly convincing models of this polyphony. Of Bakhtin’s conceptualization of polyphony, Morson and Emerson write:

     

    The dialogic sense of truth manifests unfinalizability by existing on the “threshold” . . . of several interacting consciousnesses, a “plurality” of “unmerged voices.” Crucial here is the modifier unmerged. These voices cannot be contained within a single consciousness, as in monologism; rather, their separateness is essential to the dialogue. Even when they agree, as they may, they do so from different perspectives and different sense of the world. (236-37)

     

    Bakhtin claims that the “fundamental category in Dostoevsky’s mode [of writing is] coexistence and interaction” (28), a dynamic that erases conventional expectations and enables the replacement of hierarchical monologism with the equivocity of a polyphony that still operates as a unity, albeit “a unity standing above the word, above the voice, above the accent . . . [and] yet to be discovered” (43). In what follows I trace this persistent unity of polyphony (applicable beyond Dostoevsky’s novels to other forms of polyphony), the reasons for its persistence, and the path to and from its breakdown (sometimes temporary, sometimes irreversible).

     

    By reading Bakhtinian polyphony through Nussbaum’s claims in “Narrative Emotions,” the concept assumes broader implications. Nussbaum’s criticism that “literary study has too frequently failed to speak about the connectedness of narrative to forms of human emotion and human choice” (290-91) prepares the way for this movement between the narrative form of Dostoevsky’s novels and its application to the broader concerns of the present discussion. Nussbaum insists quite unequivocally that “certain types of human understanding are irreducibly narrative in form,” emphasizing “the connections between narrative forms and forms of life” (291). Although her discussion gives prominence to emotion, she proceeds to trace the reciprocal relation that emerges between narrative and emotion, and indeed between written and lived narratives.

     

    In this light it seems plausible to find support in her assertion that “narratives are constructs that respond to certain patterns of living and shape them in their turn” for the idea that a narrative structure is related to forms of real life, although of course this does not imply that it is identical to these (310). Nussbaum is careful to take note of the differences between spoken and written narrative (311), but this does not necessarily imply that ideas cannot be translated effectively from a written to an essentially vocal field.10 These claims help to formulate a connection between narrative form and perceptions of reality in terms of the article’s argument for the extension of polyphony as both a product and a tool of formal analysis. Bakhtin refers to the “artistic will of polyphony . . . [as] a will to combine many wills, a will to the event” (21). Intervocalic communion is this event in the present context. Reciprocally, Bakhtinian polyphony demonstrates an idealized intervocalic communion: each vocalic body (voice-ideas, in Bakhtinian terms) exists as an individual entity, possessing a dual subject-object status in a manner that neither disrupts nor actively enforces exchange in the communication channels resulting from the polyphonic overlaps of vocalic bodies.

     

    Edward Said’s model proposes that “various themes play off one another, with only a provisional privilege being given to any particular one; yet in the resulting polyphony there is . . . organized interplay from the themes, not from a . . . principle outside the work” (qtd. in Ashcroft and Ahluwalia 93). A similar observation emerges of the way in which the interpenetration of textual voices, rather than a principle imposed from an external position, is responsible for the operational effectiveness of a contrapuntal or polyphonic work. Although Said’s particular program lies in the discovery of “what a univocal reading might conceal about the political worldliness of the . . . text” (Ashcroft and Ahluwalia 93), the process by which univocity is undone emphasizes, in common with Bakhtin, the singularity of the voice and of the way each voice plays a singular role in constituting any polyphonic instance.11

     

    Musical and literary theoretical definitions of polyphony intersect in the idea of the voice. In the three scenes examined below, musical and speaking/spoken voices come together in the concept of intervocalic communion. These three scenes demonstrate the various passages of the voice between polyphony and noise. As we examine these passages, we realize that it is not so much that we are not listening to each other, but merely that we listen to different things. We forget to listen to one another, instead imposing and ordering procedures of giving and receiving voice. We proverbially “pass the conch” by raising our hands, by appointing chairs to meetings, by creating a hierarchy of speakers–all of this to perpetuate the idea that communication can occur unambiguously. A polyphonic intervocalic communion that facilitates communication radically becomes at once our goal and dream.

     

    The first of the three scenes is a choral performance with a choir singing a contemporary composition in which each voice is assigned an individual part, largely or entirely different from the others. The second is the opening of a Roy Lichtenstein art exhibition focusing on his earlier works from the 1960s, inspired by comic-strips–a gathering of critics, socialites, and collectors: a chatter of opinionated groups. The third scene attempts to capture the intervocalic communion imaginable in the UN General Assembly hall just before the commencement of a meeting: the confusion not only of voices, but of vocalic bodies carrying multiple languages and dialects and their translations–a complex political din of linguistic belonging and its relationships to lobbying, domination and mis-/communication.

     

    In his celebrated study of the sociology of music, Jacques Attali claims that “music is prophecy. Its styles and economic organization are ahead of the rest of society . . . . It makes audible the new world that will gradually become visible” (11). Examining the effects of the imagined choral work in light of this statement, we recognize the inevitable dissonance that emerges from a situation in which thirty to fifty individuals sing independent melodies. The extreme dissonance of works such as Krzysztof Penderecki’s St. Luke Passion prophecizes the parallel decay of traditional polyphony in both the musical and the textual senses occasioned by extreme complexity. Like most of Penderecki’s work, St. Luke Passion draws on an eclectic blend of compositional techniques, one being extremely dense blocks of tone-clusters, common around the mid-sixties when the work was composed.12 While it generally steers clear of traditional harmony, its occasional explosions of extreme vocal confusion illustrate the particular dissonance embodied in the idea that each voice operates independently.

     

    The most notable of these occurs toward the end of the first movement when Jesus is brought before the High Priest of Jerusalem and is mocked. Penderecki’s characteristic technique of overlaying very similar lines, which compound into an almost unimaginably dense polyphonic canon, effectively conveys the hysteria that the program requires.13 The voices carry fragmentary words, disembodied phonemes, in a swirling polyrhythmic vocalic sea. Here the voice is sometimes intoned, sometimes noise, and the intertwining of the two proves particularly unsettling, evoking dark intensity and foreboding. This sense of foreboding is intensified by the associations that the oscillation between tone and noise evoke and by the way in which this oscillation seems to intensify both the intonation and the text intoned. The intoned voice is thus laden with the weight of several cultural institutions, and so is difficult to ignore.14 However, if the contextual knowledge of the work is bracketed, we can see in this specific scene a clear example of how expectations regarding the voice are often defeated. Given that, until relatively recently, dissonance in music was conventionally seen as a tension necessary to the reassurance provided by the consonance that follows, it is not unreasonable to think that many listeners in an audience might bestow on this dissonance an a priori communicative role–clearly the composer must be trying to say something by breaking the rules! However, instead of refocusing attention on the intoned voice and its role, this scene presents an intense intervocalic communion in which the parallel decay of the polyphonic function in music and of voice-ideas is evident.

     

    No longer can the intoned voice in intervocalic communion be said to engender communication. What we encounter, then, is precisely the miscommunication alluded to earlier: vocalic bodies interact in such a complex manner that their effective function is to erase the presence of the speaker/singer at the specific instance referred to, both in relation to the audience and to other speakers/singers. The structure and functioning of a choir seems to require such an erasure. Such cases of intense polyphonic overlap would presumably secure individuality, but paradoxically end up placing it in a more tentative position than ever, as Otherness is subsumed by our inability to distinguish between voices. The dissonance of this particular intervocalic communion sounds the warning that noise and chaos are not always benign and generative. Instead this scene effectively reinstitutes a univocity in the idea of polpyhony which Bakhtin and Said contest (albeit their protests emerge from within what is generically literary). This is in no way an indictment of Penderecki or of contemporary compositional techniques as such. Rather, it demonstrates that the program of the music (which aims to show precisely such a breakdown in communication, a miscommunicative chaos) is well-accomplished, technically and structurally.

     

    The intervocalic communion of this passage from Penderecki’s St. Luke Passion engages the question of mis-/communication by demonstrating in its constitutive vocalic bodies a highly ambiguous relationship between the bodies, which provide both definition within the undifferentiated noise of dissonance, and themselves produce noise, indistinction, and confusion. Once again the voice joins as it divides. As each vocalic body reaffirms its membership in the homogenous group (the choir) in the course of the performance, the performance pulls the voices together by projecting the concept of a single work and a single performance. But it is also a conglomeration of separate vocalic bodies acting in dissonance, simultaneously highlighting the possibility of polyphony to do destructive violence, to reinstitute, ironically, a certain univocity into the intervocalic communion, and thus it also pulls apart. In the midst of this tension the shared ground between singularity and plurality is reinaugurated, the dual space of subject-object, a space that also opens a path between intervocalic communion and white noise.

     

    If the choral scene opens this path, its particular intervocalic communion does not make the journey. The opposing pulls of its implicit homogeneity and its explicit heterogeneity prevent it from undergoing this final metamorphosis. The move from the complex vocalic polyphony to effective white noise is, however, mapped in the movement of the two subsequent scenes–the opening of an art exhibition and the moments before the commencement of a meeting of the General Assembly of the United Nations. In Levarie’s comment that “spoken language exemplifies well the mixture of noise and tone” (22), we find some support for the voice’s ability to resist its transformation to noise. If it is not due to a substantial change of the vocalic body (in the second scene, at least) that the emergence of white noise is observed, it is possible that the structure of intervocalic communion in these scenes is instead responsible. Of white noise, Serres writes that it “is at the very limits of physics and surrounds it . . . . [It] is the original one but the original hatred as well” (51). Serres points to a radical threat in white noise. The problem of mis-/communication is but a small feature of this all-enfolding phenomenon, though it dominates the following scene.

     

    The conversation at an art exhibition opening is often contrived. Unless the opening is a more formal one in which the bar and finger-foods are withheld to keep the guests attentive, a restless throng tends to spread from the area where these refreshments are found. At this particular exhibition of Roy Lichtenstein’s 1960s comics-inspired works, let us assume, the wine and consequently the conversation are flowing. Here we find a mixture of the dignitaries, press, and other guests one might expect at an exhibition as prestigious as a Roy Lichtenstein retrospective: critics, photographers, artists (successful, failed, fledgling, imagined), socialites, academics, collectors, pretentious commentators; the sincere and insincere, honest and dishonest. The babble is overwhelming, as the guests bandy about public and secret terminologies interchangeably in the growing din. In such situations it becomes increasingly obvious who are the privileged few and who the aspirants. The crowd stratifies into smaller huddles of fours, fives, sixes–all becoming louder as they gravitate toward particular works and try to shout each other down. These groups grate against each other, sometimes intentionally, marking out their collective space. The noise mounts as the voices become increasingly protective of their opinions.

     

    However, the situation departs significantly from the banality of petty exhibition politics, for, recalling Connor’s idea of the vocalic body as a “body-in-invention” (36), it becomes necessary to examine the specific vocalic relationship these works of Lichtenstein have with their viewers, and the manner in which the characters they depict are subtly transformed into interlocutors. Apart from painterly techniques that make these early works highly controversial, even revolutionary, many are noteworthy for their inclusion of comic-style speech bubbles.15 In Drowning Girl for example, we encounter the comical melodrama of the drowning girl who tearfully announces, “I don’t care! I’d rather sink than call Brad for help!” (Waldman 118). In a similarly dramatic fashion, a woman on the telephone proclaims, “Oh, Jeff . . . I love you, too . . . but . . . ” in the painting of the same name (163), although here her address is not to some absent figure on the open ocean, but is mediated through the telephone. “Forget It! Forget Me!” (56), addressed to a rather forlorn looking woman, presents, on the other hand, a clear interlocutor. But all of these speech bubbles–whether addressing an absent figure, an object, or a visually present character–not only intensify the sense in which the spectator is drawn into the representational world of the painting, but also the projection of the painting into the so-called real world of the spectator, occupying a type of vocalic space.16

     

    The suggestion here is not so much that the relationship between the painting and the person observing it is different from the one that might normally be anticipated, but that a second and parallel relationship emerges that is based on the simultaneous dependence of the vocalic body on a speaker and its independence or object status. The speech-bubbles and the words they contain can still occupy a conceptually vocal space without exercising a sonic presence, without being voiced. If it is possible to accept that a particular mute vocality is enacted in this way, then what is initially only the graphic equivalent of a vocalic body takes on uncannily real qualities. Might such a situation–the parallel presentations of the visual and the text (the printed words of the speech-bubbles), and the visual and the voiced (the speech-bubbles as vocalic bodies in the process of becoming in an ontological sense)–not help explain why the present value of comic books and graphic novels has so thoroughly exceeded their initial confinement to so-called popular culture?

     

    In a significant sense the paintings speak with a greater clarity than do their viewers, as their immanent vocalic bodies enter into the intervocalic communion, but without being noticeably affected by the complex interference patterns that already characterize the situation. These mute voices are both vocalic bodies and part of the intervocalic communion of the opening, and yet they are neither, for they are, after all, just paintings. Such an ambiguous position inaugurates the transformatory potential of silence explored in subsequent argumentation, for if the silent voices, vocalic bodies in the process of becoming, are able to present, in a sense, a more constructive communication than our own intervocalic communion around them, they also warn us of our vocalic dysfunction.

     

    We must now reexamine Lichtenstein’s insistence that “transformation is a strange word to use. It implies that art transforms. It doesn’t, it just plain forms” (qtd. in Wilson 10) in light of the claims above. While it is clearly true that art is capable of forming–in this case the focus is on the formation of becoming vocalic bodies–it is also transformatory to the extent that these mute representations of voices draw our attention to a communicative dysfunction that emerges from the intervocalic communion, while still being part of the same. The transformation that this art seems to enact relates closely to its physical presence, and is not only of the entire intervocalic environment and its relationship to such so-called silent voices, but also of various of our notions of what constitutes speech and embodiment of the voice.

     

    To illustrate further the transformatory potential of these works, we can reconstitute the exhibitionary space in terms of the vocality they inaugurate, where the letters of the guests’ speech bubbles smudge and blur, covering one another and erasing the identity and coherence of the utterances. Of the commercial art from which he drew the material for these works, Lichtenstein famously said, “‘I accept it as being there, in the world . . . . Signs and comic strips are interesting as subject-matter. There are certain things that are usable, forceful and vital about commercial art’” (qtd. in Wilson 9-10). It is unlikely that the vitality he was referring to is the sort of autonomy I evoke for his paintings above. Nonetheless, there is a sense in which Lichtenstein’s ideas regarding forcefulness and usability are clearly endorsed by the present argument.

     

    Turning from more abstract theoretical considerations, the ensuing scene at the exhibition opening is at once intimidatingly chaotic and meaninglessly absurd to the uninitiated. There are, however, numerous political motives underlying these interactions. In his excellent study of the exhibitionary complex, Bennett writes that this political space provides “a context for the permanent display of power/knowledge . . . a power which . . . manifest[s] itself precisely in continually displaying its ability to command, order, and control objects and bodies, living or dead” (88).17 Not only do the works in question represent a power in themselves (partly explored above), they also comprise a conceptual field on which various games of domination are to be played out. The underpinning motives for these games vary, and their purported character may thinly mask more dubious qualities. A detailed analysis of exhibition politics is as difficult as it would need to be extensive, and it would not directly concern this study, but it is possible to identify among these economic games, games of social standing, and intellectual games.

     

    In these games–which manifest as a series of moves–we see again how the voice brings together and how it divides. The Lichtenstein paintings provide common targets for the conceptual content of intervocalic communion, but the political instability of the scene as it manifests in sound also opens up divisions that are not easily repaired. If we imagine that each of these political players produces an individual vocalic body, and if we also imagine that, due to their specific contexts, these vocalic bodies are directed in a specific way, then we are once again brought into a complexity that tends to be noise rather than voice.

     

    Elaborating on the Bakhtinian idea of polyphony as unmerged voices, the intervocalic communion of the exhibition demonstrates an increasing indistinguishability of vocalic bodies, largely as a result of increased complexity. While the choral scene displays a similar complexity, the pull between homogeneity and heterogeneity (noted above) limits one’s ability to recognize in it genuine noise. At the exhibition opening, however, the particular intervocalic communion ensures the emergence of localized groups defined both internally and in relation to others by a heterogeneity. In practical terms, people, for the most part, seem to be conversing, but the freneticism in this vocalic scenario prevents any real communication. The subsystems are not operationally contained; voices penetrate across boundaries in generally disruptive gestures. Such intervocalic communion is complicated as the mute voices of Lichtenstein’s work reach out into the subgroups, fuelling conversation, or as Wilson suggests, “inviting the spectator to speculate” (12), mute participants always on the verge of finding their vocalic bodies.

     

    The ground for mis-/communication is opened to a far greater degree than in the case of the choir: not only is a stable audience for vocalic performance missing, but the actual audience consists of producers of other vocalic bodies, or imagined bodies in the case of the paintings.18 This increasing lack of distinction in the channel of intervocalic communion between sender and receiver might be seen as the functional rift that readmits white noise into the system. Rasch reminds us that “the question of how communication is possible can be elucidated as the paradoxical unity of both restricting and generating information” (67), which was related earlier to the opposition of code and noise. If the choral performance and the exhibition opening show how intervocalic communion can make a noise, they also show how information can decay in the process.

     

    The third scene, however, presents a move to white noise, a final mode of intervocalic communion in which it is entirely possible to lose one’s voice. This may seem a surprising claim in light of the fact that the United Nations is an organization designed to ensure equality between the voices of its members. In arguing the ascendancy of white noise in the U.N., one first needs to recognize that the moments before the commencement of a General Assembly meeting see the mingling not only of hundreds of people, but of almost as many language groups as well. Here the concept of the vocalic body is made even more complex by its extension to include these different tongues and dialects. The heterogeneous vocalic bodies are further arranged into complex subsystems of intervocalic communion, usually around particular global powers, which are often also characterized by a specific language: to use the most obvious current examples, the Middle East and North Africa speaking Arabic, or the United States, United Kingdom, and Australia speaking English.

     

    A scene unfolds with a certain inevitability: the intervocalic communion is intensely chaotic, but the scene’s predictable end is predicated upon the political power structures in place. In this way, again, the voice demonstrates its dual ability to present division in the heterogeneity of the groups, their resistance to being drawn into a global agreement, and to pull together, both in the sense that the dominant vocalic bodies enlist cooperation and obedience, and in the sense that the different languages form nodal attractors within these essentially heterogeneous groups. Although there are six official languages at the UN, the complex intervocalic communion of the many others–spoken, murmured, imagined–stresses the atmosphere prior to the opening of the meeting to a point of informational overload.19 “This noise is the opening . . . [t]he multiple is open and from it is born nature always being born,” writes Serres (56). But if this noise is indeed generative, the use of translation surely adds difficulties that test this definition to the utmost.

     

    As the translators babble, their ear-pieces already operational, the vocalic body undergoes the ultimate metamorphosis in this complex intervocalic communion, that of the voice technologically transformed, multiplied, transmitted and circulated as electricity. McLuhan sees in such technology an “extension of the process of consciousness itself” (90), but emphasizes electrical technology rather than language, as superceding language: “computers hold out the promise of a means of instant translation of any code or language into any other code or language. The computer . . . promises by technology a Pentecostal condition of universal understanding and unity” (90). In retrospect, McLuhan’s utopian predictions (some skeptics might suggest they are dystopian) have proved quite accurate, though computer programs still struggle with the idiosyncrasies of figurative language and syntax.

     

    Although our trust in and reliance on technology is always increasing, the fact that translators are still central to the process of communication in the General Assembly hall indicates that the transformatory potential of technology is neither absolute nor irreversible. At the same time, it is fascinating to contemplate the effects of such communication technology on the idea of intervocalic communion. In McLuhanist terms, the microphone is an extension of the ear, and the ear-piece of the voice. But the vocalic body experiences a potentially unlimited multiplication. If Lichtenstein’s paintings find their voices through a more abstract process, electronic extensions of human vocality seem to present a concretization of the vocalic body that is at least on equal terms with those derived directly from the voice itself. They may be even more autonomous. Technological multiplication of the voice seems to erase progressively the lines that trace it back directly to the concept of “voice,” which means that in an important sense vocalic bodies that proceed from technological reproduction are functionally “original.” The result is a multiplied complexity of the intervocalic communion in which both the increased number of different languages and the discrete vocalic bodies threaten to suspend any sense of ordered communication.

     

    Translation may be the final hope for communication as white noise encroaches, as the dream of the communicative function of the voice is progressively glossed over. But as Paul de Man’s essay on Benjamin’s “translation” work indicates, “the translation . . . shows in the original a mobility, an instability, which at first one did not notice” (82). De Man goes on to claim that “all these activities–critical philosophy, literary theory, history–resemble each other in the fact that they do not resemble that from which they derive . . . . They disarticulate, they undo the original, they reveal that the original was always already disarticulated” (84). Furthermore, we do not encounter meaning in translation, but rather a failure to translate meaning, or to convert meaning into a translatable form. Translation is the heart of miscommunication, and fails in terms both of strict translation, which loses all nuance, and of idiomatic translation, which sacrifices semantic content.

     

    Not only is miscommunication inevitable in the General Assembly Hall, but there is an important sense in which communication, certainly in its narrowest definition as direct and unambiguous, was impossible to begin with. As the complexity of the vocalic communion is multiplied feverishly in this scenario of articulation, translation, disarticulation–heterogeneous overlap, densest imbrication–we become increasingly aware of the white noise around us, or increasingly ignorant of discrete vocalic bodies. We are once again wakened to the paradox of our situatedness in a language and a noise we cannot unambiguously decipher, but in which “one must swim . . . dive in as if lost, for a weighty poem or argument to arise” (Serres 53). Rather than clarifying meaning, as such, translation demonstrates that trans-linguistic meaning was already unobtainable.

     

    According to Blanchot, “a language seems so much truer and more expressive when we know it less . . . . words need a certain ignorance to keep their power of revelation” (176). The double-edged nature of communication is again exposed: we must always miscommunicate for there to be any communication. In its relationship to miscommunication, white noise reiterates itself as both promise and threat:

     

    Perhaps white noise . . . is at the heart of being itself . . . . White noise never stops, it is limitless, continuous, perpetual, unchangeable. It has no grounding . . . itself, no opposite. How much noise has to be made to still the noise? And what fury order fury? Noise is not a phenomenon . . . but being itself . . . every metamorphosis or every phenomenon is . . . [a] local answer and a global cover-up . . . the information [is hidden] in a wealth of information. (Serres 50-1)

     

    What Serres drives at here is precisely the failure that emerges from not recognizing the dual nature of white noise. As we reflect on the path between the three scenes, we find that polyphony has been progressively neutralized, lost to the complexity of the intervocalic communion and its emergence as white noise. There remains, however, a productive relation as regards white noise and potential meaning. If one is to accept Serres’s reading of the phenomenon, then this is one thing that is at stake in the UN General Assembly. Must all descend into white noise for communication to be re-established, for order to reappear? Do we not tend to look for this solution in structure and structuring? But we have seen that structures are breakable and also that they become functionally impossible to interpret in cases of extreme complexity. Structuring voices again become noise.

     

    Governed by order and convention, communication becomes empty and often subject to hegemony. We dream up a simplicity of meaning and communication which fails. “Simplicity and objective rigidity seem foreign to us,” Blanchot tells us, “as soon as they appear to us, no longer coming from our language but transported into our language, translated, moved away from us, and as if fixed in the distance by pressure of the translating force” (178). Given the inevitability of miscommunication that emerges from the three scenes above, it seems I will always be both a bad listener and a worse speaker. If I construe meaning, as I must, I do so by losing my voice. But this loss is dangerous and damaging. There must be another way.

    The Equivocity of Silence

     

    Rituals permeate daily life and can develop within even the most mundane actions. I emphasized earlier that the idea of vocalic communion should not be understood in terms of religious revelation; rather, it exposes the profundity of the ordinary, and the notion of ritual exposed in the following argument should be understood in this light. Instead of analyzing, demythologizing, and debunking its authority, I wish merely to identify three rituals in the above scenes that introduce into the present argument its paradoxical climax: silence. Various symbolic “high priests” emerge as initiators to enact these rituals of silence: the conductor for the choir, the curator for the exhibition, and a session chair at the United Nations.

     

    Each silence emerges only as a moment, a singular moment, and one of great import and potential. As the conductor ends a musical work that illustrates the mode of intervocalic communion (a work of the type we encounter in parts of Penderecki’s St. Luke Passion), that moment of silence which marks this ending, what Dauenhauer calls an after-silence–maximizing an utterance’s expressive force by causing both a recollection and an anticipation (10)–is followed by one far more profound. In the midst of this silence we find a near explosive tension between the vocalic bodies of the performance, already fading, and the vocalic bodies in formation–the deep silence of the to-be-said (Dauenhauer 20-1), or the about-to-be-said, to expand on Dauenhauer’s idea. The audience can go either way–judge these works, assimilate such works into the dominant cultural practice, or reject the otherness of such works–so this moment of silence presents a radical ambiguity. The audience may respond either in jeers or cheers; the intervocalic communion that follows may either reinstitute an imbrication of confusion and interference, or a generative noise.

     

    To recollect, the intervocalic communion at the Lichtenstein exhibition proves a radical threat to the positive attributes of polyphony proposed by Bakhtin and Said precisely because it threatens the autonomy of unmerged voices (contradicting Bakhtin), and because it is enforced from an outside produced by exhibitionary politics (contra Said). In this situation the polyphonic function degenerates; the situation moves toward chaos, and a radical threat to the promise of communication develops. The rather contrived silence that (occasionally) descends at an exhibition opening when the curator taps a wine glass or clears his or her throat over a public address system once again forces a decision. There are those who will turn their attention and re-enter into the formal exhibitionary discourse. Others will drift further away, toward an obscure corner where they can consume wine in peace. At either end, the silence of this position forces a reconsideration of our relationship to the aesthetic, and the miscommunicative process that often surrounds its emergence introduces what one might call a liturgy of the formal exhibition.

     

    In the last scene, silence is transitory, if it occurs at all. In a sense, the call for silence by a chairperson in such a multilingual setting always misses its mark as it occupies the space intended for silence. Silence is always being delayed in the vocalic echo, and yet, as Blanchot points out, “dialogue counts very much and is very silent . . . dialogue does not seek to attain silence by terseness but by an excess of chatter” (188). Is it possible, contra Serres, that white noise erases noise, or is a genuine active silence possible? This institutionalized or ritual silence, one way or the other, is particularly pertinent in this context. Because its intervocalic communion presents a genuine approach to a reconstitution of white noise, it has great potential for meaning-production. In this silence, the bodies present once again have a radical option–quite simply, to produce interference, or to listen.

     

    What I am suggesting is that silence, as it presents itself in certain cultural rituals that may normally be seen as repressive and hegemonic–telling someone to “be quiet” is to my mind a tremendously violent act–may emerge as representations of a near-forgotten radix of effective communication, an equivocal moment where the interlocutors “about-to-become” have before them a series of options, the linguistic and vocal manifestation of which inevitably results in miscommunication. Perhaps the loss of this moment is as inevitable as taking the next breath. That is not the point. Rather, its value lies in the fact that our society and culture–the culture of the learned, for all its brave and admirable attempts to extract form from white noise, to recall Serres’s earlier claims–have forgotten the promise of communication. Instead we invent mechanisms to control and order the voice, both in discourse and as a phenomenon, progressively hierarchizing the phenomenological world of voices we encounter and create. We order the voice, we lose this order, and we lose our equivocity and our potential for generative communication.

     

    In a discussion of the Jena Romantics, Lacoue-Labarthe and Nancy discuss equivocity in a particularly evocative way:

     

    At the very most, through its equivocity, the motif of mixture, without being or producing mixture itself . . . leads to the extreme edge of what it mixes: genre, literature, philosophy. It may lead to the edge of what unmakes or interrupts the operation, to the edge of what could be called, with deliberate equivocity, the ab-solution of the literary Absolute. (123)

     

    According to this version of equivocal discourse, “the manifestation in question here . . . seems to be one that can designate itself . . . only through a peculiar eclipse of the manifest in manifestation” (Lacoue-Labarthe 124). We should remember that the Jena Romantics were writing, even if the auto-deconstruction of their genre of genres sought to undo the work as it was made manifest. By this logic, are we to find equivocity–which, in the present context, demarcates not only a communicative space between equal voices, but also a certain communicative continuity; the unfinalizability of many ends–only in such works as those of the Jena Romantics? How then can the three scenes sketched above, and most other real and hypothetical scenes of daily life, be seen as ethically and communicatively plausible when they are embroiled in a vocality that can never be equivocal?

     

    A solution, which is precisely an ab-solution in the sense employed above, may appear in silence. If it is true that silence is not merely a phenomenological opposite to noise, but “an active human performance . . . [which] involves a yielding following upon an awareness of finitude and awe” (Dauenhauer 24), then silence may invigorate equivocity precisely because it allows for doing work and production without producing a work, as such. In yielding and still acting, silence provides a profound background to the possibility of genuine ethical action. Ambiguity, interwoven as it is in the fabric of language, is not identical to equivocity. Ambiguity and irony twist together, but do not necessarily open a path to equivocity. They may present such an equivocity, as in the case of the argument of Lacoue-Labarthe and Nancy with regard to the Jena Fragment, the Literary Absolute. But these are ideal anomalies, and are certainly not comparable to most of the investments of meaning in intervocalic communion that, when carried to their extremes, present the growing univocity and the decay of productive polyphony which we feel vibrating threateningly in the three scenes discussed above.

     

    Silence reopens two paths that are particularly relevant to this essay. The first leads inward, infinitely inward, beyond the heart of the subject. It introduces into the subject a stillness that is curiously missing in much Western thought. In Buddhism, this is referred to as Anatta, which, in brief, implies that no insight can ever reveal the true nature of the Self, or of the self as subject. In an important sense this path mirrors the function of intervocalic communion which returns to the vocalic body the knowledge of itself as both subject and object. In its counterpart in silence, however, we find not a contrived equivocity, an equal loudness, but rather a mutual respect between subject and object, and also between the subject as object and the object as subject. Silence reintroduces a radical equivocity because not only does it force a radical reconsideration of what it means to be a subject or an object in the world, but it also shows a way in which neither of these is important, neither is final–they are forever regarding each other as the other. In terms of an internal path, surely this silence may express the heart of equivocity?

     

    The second path leads outward again, into the world, and engages a more formal ethical stance. It relates very closely to John Cage’s observation that “silence is . . . [a] change of . . . mind. It’s an acceptance of the sounds that exist rather than a desire to choose and impose one’s own music” (229). Cage’s silence is a yielding (in line with Dauenhauer’s use of the term), not from the world, but from the imposition of an order on the sounds and noises of the world. Miscommunication occurs in the intervocalic communion of the three scenes as an exaggerated expression of the subjecthood of the voice, a merging of vocalic bodies and a loss of polyphony. Silence opens up a path to and from noise. It reminds us that

     

    the interference that noise produces may be seen as “destructive” from the point of view of those interested in the transmission of a discrete message . . . [W]hen viewed from elsewhere or from without the system, noise may be seen as “autonomy producing” . . . . Noise can therefore be seen as inherently ambiguous, neither desirable nor undesirable in and of itself. (Rasch 66)

     

    If noise is ambiguous, silence in the present argument is equivocal. It leads us to experience the noise of our environment as generative of possibilities, and hence as getting away from the miscommunicative babbling of the intervocalic communion of the three scenes above, which is to say, distinct from a politics of vocality that manifests increasingly as univocity. Most references to silence in recent academic discourse on the subject are noticeably negative and accusatory. Particularly in relation to sociological, political, and historical discourse, they tend to deal with silence as a transitive verb: these understandings assume that in order to be silent, one needs to have been silenced. While I do not wish to trivialize such instances in any way, this attitude typifies the notion that it is possible, always, to talk things through.

     

    Intervocalic communion is inevitable, and it is productive inasmuch as it exposes the nonfinality of language and hence encourages hope for ethical dialogue. Momentary silence allows us to reconsider the origins of such a dialogue and thus to enter it with renewed openness. In juxtaposing the vocalic body with the lost voice of silence, we may reconceive of silence as a space in itself, an internal dimension of the voice, always already lost when the voice emerges, but never quite forgotten. The highly complex relation between silence and space-time cannot be expanded in this context, but it is worth noting that it is possible to conceive losing one’s voice as the paradoxical articulation of a third space: if one sees one’s own physical emanation as a first subjective space, the vocalic space as a second that incorporates the powers of the subject and object, then the place of silence can present a third and other space.

     

    The equivocity of silence is noncoercive. Dialogue often starts without ill intention, but conversation can quickly get rough in the growing freneticism of complex intervocalic communion. In this world of sounds, if there is a cry worth sounding, it must be for equivocity: an equivocity that silently opposes the neo-fascism of the ordering of voices and of intervocalic communion into hierarchical utterances, one speaker dominating others. This silence presents a type of pre-vocal voice–the voice about to become, the about to-be-said. Such silence occupies a vocalic position like that of the speech bubbles of Lichtenstein’s paintings to the extent that it is an abstraction that relies on the possibility of future intervocalic communion. Yet silence differs significantly not only by virtue of its occupying a space prior to ontology (the about to become, as opposed to becoming), but also by being entirely receptive. In his fascinating study of silence in Buddhism, Panikkar notes that “not only is the Buddha silent, but his response is silence as well . . . . It is not simply that his is a silent answer whereas the responses of so many others are lively and verbose . . . . The Buddha makes no reply because he eliminates the question” (148).

     

    Vocality is lost in silence, and yet it is also always potentially present. This silence is both nothing more than a single moment and also infinite. We lose our voice in an equivocity that reminds us of the simultaneity of our singularity and plurality. It reminds us that it is possible to be together. Serres summarizes the position as follows:

     

    There is a path from the local to the global, even if our weakness forever prevents us from following it. Better yet, noise, sound, discord–those of music, voices, or hatred–are simple local effects. Noise, cries and war, has the same extent of meaning, but symmetrically to harmony, song and peace . . . . Chaos, noise, nausea are together, but thrown together in a crypt that resembles repression and unconsciousness known as appreciation. We often drown in such small puddles of confusion. (55)

     

    The locality of the self, of the vocalic body reflecting both the subjecthood of the self and itself as subject, divides us once more. It becomes a noisy place as localities compete on the path to the global, to the dream of equivocity. But univocity is often the menacing reality. Walking this path successfully is not easy. We cannot simply talk it through. Reinvigorated by silence, I can begin to communicate its existence and then later its special turns and snares. I lose my voice well as I remember how to listen to silence.

     

     

    Notes

     

    Sincerest thanks to Professor Michel Olivier, artist Diane Victor, and my old friend Johan Freyer for their useful information on various aspects of this essay.

     

    1. In a sub-chapter titled “You Cannot Not Communicate” in her introduction to General Systems Theory (which I find an extremely convincing model through which it is possible to take account simultaneously of vastly different disciplines and their various forms of information), Hanson argues that since there “is a constant flow of information back and forth . . . there is no such thing as noncommunication” (97). According to this model, even though it assumes a great deal regarding the notion of simple, unpolluted information, an absence of noncommunication does not preclude miscommunication. Central to this essay is the notion that communication seems to drift inevitably toward a profound ambiguity, akin to the notion in Derridaean deconstruction that meaning is always in the process of being displaced–as Lucy claims, “defer[ring] endlessly its own constitution as an autonomous or fully complete entity” (27). Paul de Man likewise notes in language an “errancy . . . which never reaches the mark . . . this illusion of a life that is only an afterlife” (94). This ambiguity, a tendency toward miscommunication, is discussed in relation not only to particular instances of intense intervocalic overlay used as nodal points in the essay, but also in relation to the idea of translation.

     

    2. The autonomous vocalic body taking place is also the vocalic body taking space.

     

    3. Connor takes note of this ability when he writes that “it is in the nature of the voice to be transitive,” confirming (see page 3) that “sound, and as the body’s means of producing itself as sound, the voice, will be associated with the dream and exercise of power” (Connor 23). From this perspective it is not difficult to see that even though the vocalic bodies’ autonomy as acting subjects may not be immediately perceptible, it is nonetheless active and powerful.

     

    4. Although this argument does not enter the complex debate around the definition of communication, it is worth mentioning a few significant elements of the phenomenon as it is understood in the present context. Rather than focus on its relation to meaning, and hence understanding, communication is used here in the more technical sense of information exchange. Rasch’s understanding of the term in his essay “Injecting Noise Into the System” correlates in most respects to the present one, and is echoed in Hanson’s work cited above; all three take a broadly systemic view common to most models that draw their concepts from Information Theory. According to these models, communication is defined primarily in terms of information flow and exchange, and less in terms of whether or not it reaches an intended object in the intended way and is decoded in that same intended mode. In contrast, I have chosen to preserve the semantic point of miscommunication to embody failures of meaning, understanding, etc.–as a mode of failure then–precisely because I have noted a tendency to read the term communication only in terms of success.

     

    5. Rasch points out that the “element of disorder within all order is never extinguished. It makes our understanding of order contingent. It forces selection” (71). Certainly such a selection is necessary for meaning or understanding. It is perhaps the occasional absence of this selectiveness that forces several distinctions in the understanding of noise that will be explored in the following section of the essay.

     

    6. Connor notes how inner voices as objects contribute to the self-constitution of each speaking subject when he writes, “If I hear my thoughts as a voice, then I divide myself between the one who speaks, from the inside out, and the one who hears the one who speaks, from the outside in.” (6).

     

    7. Serres 53. Here he uses the metaphor of the painting not only to represent the creation, but also creativity and generativity.

     

    8. Due to the early dominance of sacred choral music in the West, such melodic lines are most often referred to as voices, which naturally suits the present context well.

     

    9. I draw on the following statement by Stein in response to a question in which she explicitly talks of the famous line as an attempt “to put some strangeness, something unexpected [back] . . . in order to bring back vitality to the noun” (Wilder v-vi).

     

    10. Although Bakhtin goes on to emphasize that “the material of music and of the novel are too dissimilar for there to be anything more between them than a graphic analogy” (22), it is still possible, in light of Nussbaum’s claims regarding the linkage of narrative and reality, to progress to the associations made below regarding a broader application of polyphony. The relationship between voice-ideas and music extends beyond the analogical in Penderecki’s St. Luke Passion (quoted in subsequent discussion), functioning homologically and strengthening the case for an explicit connection between narrative polyphony and musical polyphony.

     

    11. There is a notable difference in directionality, however, between the polyphonic “writing” of Bakhtin, and Said’s contrapuntal “reading.” For Bakhtin, polyphony happens as a part of the creative process, as multiple voices descend with equal gravity on a given text: equivocity accomplished by writing many voices of equal stature. For Said, the process of reconstituting the text by reading reveals the multiple voices that constitute polyphony as they twist their way together away from a text’s hegemonic univocity.

     

    12. Penderecki’s St. Luke Passion dates from 1966.

     

    13. He uses this technique most famously in his Threnody, written to recapture the horror of the Hiroshima bombing. In this particular section of the Passion, this technique is used to capture the vocalic chaos of the scene in the High Priest’s court: the frenetic and aggressive chattering and mocking begins in the upper-strings, soon spreading throughout the section before being taken up by lower woodwinds and passed rapidly, almost as a single line, to the upper woodwinds, a process that the brass repeats. All the while the texture grows and a sense of extreme discomfort permeates the music until it reaches a climax with the the entry of the chorus. The same technique is repeated with the voices of the choir.

     

    14. These might include the textual, musical, and religio-political institutions.

     

    15. Lichtenstein painstakingly reproduced the stenciled dots of the comics on which he based this work, and focused on reproducing accurately their thick outlines and bright primary colors (Wilson 10-11).

     

    16. This claim is supported by the idea that so much of the process of defining reality is linguistically dependent, particularly as language relates to the materiality of the voice as a phenomenological body, albeit this is surrendering to a debatable phonocentric bias. The idea that a speech bubble can be regarded as having the same phenomenological status as other vocalic bodies will be probed in subsequent argumentation.

     

    17. Although Bennett is referring to the historical emergence of the exhibitionary space in this particular passage, I think it can be applied quite accurately to the political space of the exhibition in general.

     

    18. While the choral scene is staged and formally organized, the control mechanisms of interaction at the gallery are imbedded more in cultural codes than in a formal order. The United Nations General Assembly presents an interesting meeting place of the two.

     

    19. These six languages are English, Spanish, French, Russian, Mandarin, and Arabic.

     

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Ashcroft, Bill, and Pal Ahluwalia. Edward Said. London: Routledge, 2001.
    • Attali, Jacques. Noise: The Political Economy of Music. Trans. Brian Massumi. Manchester: Manchester UP, 1985.
    • Bakhtin, Mikhail. Problems of Dostoevsky’s Poetics. Ed. and trans. Caryl Emerson. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1984.
    • Bennett, Tony. “The Exhibitionary Complex.” Thinking About Exhibitions. Ed. Reesa Greenberg, Bruce W. Ferguson, and Sandy Nairne. London: Routledge, 1996. 81-112.
    • Blanchot, Maurice. “Translated from…” The Work of Fire. Trans. Charlotte Mandell. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1995. 176-190.
    • Cage, John. Conversing with Cage. Ed. Richard Kostelanetz. New York: Limelight, 1989.
    • Connor, Steven. Dumbstruck: A Cultural History of Ventriloquism. Oxford: Oxford UP, 2000.
    • Dauenhauer, Bernard P. Silence: The Phenomenon and Its Ontological Significance. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1980.
    • De Man, Paul. “‘Conclusions’: Walter Benjamin’s ‘The Task of the Translator.’” The Resistance to Theory. Manchester: Manchester UP, 1986. 73-105.
    • Hanson, Barbara Gail. General Systems Theory: Beginning With Wholes. Washington, D.C.: Taylor & Francis, 1995.
    • Lacoue-Labarthe, Philippe, and Jean-Luc Nancy. The Literary Absolute: The Theory of Literature in German Romanticism. Trans. Philip Barnard and Cheryl Lester. New York: SUNY P, 1988.
    • Levarie, Siegmund. “Noise.” Critical Inquiry 4.1 (1977): 21-31.
    • Lichtenstein, Roy. Drowning Girl. 1962. Museum of Modern Art, New York.
    • —. Forget It! Forget Me! 1962. Rose Art Museum, Brandeis University.
    • —. Oh, Jeff…I Love You, Too…But. 1964. Stefan T. Edlis Collection. Roy Lichtenstein. Diane Waldman. New York: Guggenheim Museum, 1993. 123.
    • Lucy, Niall. A Derrida Dictionary. Oxford: Blackwell, 2004.
    • McLuhan, Marshall. Understanding Media: The Extensions of Man. London: Abacus, 1973.
    • Morson, Gary Saul, and Caryl Emerson. Mikhail Bakhtin: Creation of a Prosaics. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1990.
    • Nussbaum, Martha C. Love’s Knowledge: Essays on Philosophy and Literature. New York: Oxford UP, 1990.
    • Panikkar, Raimundo. The Silence of God: The Answer of the Buddha. Trans. Robert R. Barr. Maryknoll: Orbis, 1989.
    • Penderecki, Krzysztof. St. Luke Passion. Cond. Krzysztof Penderecki. Argo, 1990.
    • Rasch, William. “Injecting Noise into the System: Hermeneutics and the Necessity of Misunderstanding.” SubStance 67 (1992): 61-76.
    • Seay, Albert. Music in the Medieval World. 2nd ed. Illinois: Waveland, 1975.
    • Serres, Michel. “Noise.” SubStance 40 (1983): 48-60.
    • Wilder, Thornton. “Introduction.” Gertrude Stein. Four In America. 1947. Freeport: Books for Libraries, 1969.
    • Wilson, Simon. Pop. London: Thames and Hudson, 1974.

     

  • The Xenotext Experiment: An Interview with Christian Bök

    Stephen Voyce

    English Department
    York University
    svoyce@yorku.ca

     

    Christian Bök was born on 10 August 1966 in Toronto, Canada. He began writing seriously in his early twenties, while earning his B.A. and M.A. degrees at Carleton University in Ottawa. He returned to Toronto in the early 1990s to study for a Ph.D. in English literature at York University, where he encountered a burgeoning literary community that included Steve McCaffery, Christopher Dewdney, and his good friend Darren Wershler-Henry. Bök’s published work includes two collections of poetry: Crystallography (Coach House, 1994) and the best-selling Eunoia (Coach House, 2001), the latter of which earned the Griffin Prize for Poetry in 2002. He has also authored a critical study entitled ‘Pataphysics: The Poetics of an Imaginary Science (Northwestern UP, 2002). Well regarded for his reading of Kurt Schwitters’s Ursonata, Bök has performed his sound poetry all over the world. His conceptual artworks include Bibliomechanics, a set of poems constructed out of Rubik’s Cubes, and Ten Maps of Sardonic Wit, a book created entirely from Lego bricks. His artistic endeavors have showcased at the Marianne Boesky Gallery in New York and with the traveling text art exhibition, Metalogos. Bök has also produced two artificial languages for science-fiction television shows: Gene Roddenberry’s Earth: Final Conflict and Peter Benchley’s Amazon. He currently resides in Calgary, Alberta, where he teaches in the Department of English at the University of Calgary.

     

    Bök’s second collection of poems, Eunoia, has garnered considerable attention for the author. The purpose of this interview is to address the wider scope of his artistic practice and to discuss his current project, The Xenotext Experiment, which explores the intersection between poetry and biotechnology. Between 11 May and 15 July 2006, Dr. Bök and I corresponded via email.

     
    Stephen Voyce: When did you first begin to write poetry? How would you describe those initial efforts at writing verse?

     

    Christian Bök: I began writing poetry in my late adolescence, producing work inspired mostly by the likes of Michael Ondaatje, Leonard Cohen, and Gwendolyn MacEwan. I published some of this juvenilia, but I became convinced late in my undergraduate career that, if I continued writing emotive, lyrical anecdotes, then I was unlikely to make any important, epistemic contributions to the history of poetry. I decided to become more experimental in my practice only after I encountered the work of Steve McCaffery during my graduate studies. I was surprised to discover that, despite my literary training, none of my professors had ever deigned to expose me to the “secret history” of the avant-garde (what with its wonderful zoo of conceptual novelties and linguistic anomalies). I realized then that, by trying to write emotional anecdotes, I was striving to become the kind of poet that I “should be” rather than the kind of poet that I “could be.” I decided then that I would dedicate my complete, literary practice to nothing but a whole array of formalistic innovations.

     
    SV: This assumption about what a poem “should be”–can you elaborate on this statement? Why has the emotive lyric become almost synonymous with poetry as such?

     
    CB: Unlike other artists in other domains where avant-garde practice is normative, poets have little incentive to range very distantly outside the catechism of their own training–and because they know very little of epistemological noteworthiness (since they do not often specialize in other more challenging disciplines beyond the field of the humanities), they tend to write about what they do know: themselves, their own subjectivity. The idea that a writer might conduct an analytical experiment with literature in order to make unprecedented discoveries about the nature of language itself seems largely foreign to most poets.
     

    SV: That said, has the concept of formal innovation changed since high modernism?
     

    CB: Postmodern life has utterly recoded the avant-garde demand for radical newness. Innovation in art no longer differs from the kind of manufactured obsolescence that has come to justify advertisements for “improved” products; nevertheless, we have to find a new way to contribute by generating a “surprise” (a term that almost conforms to the cybernetic definition of “information”). The future of poetry may no longer reside in the standard lyricism of emotional anecdotes, but in other exploratory procedures, some of which may seem entirely unpoetic, because they work, not by expressing subjective thoughts, but by exploiting unthinking machines, by colonizing unfamiliar lexicons, or by simulating unliterary art forms.

     
    SV: Many readers of contemporary poetry are familiar with Eunoia, given its critical and commercial success. Your first collection of poems, Crystallography, is a quite different book in many ways. Comprised of odes, sound poems, anagrams, quasi-scientific diagrams and indexes, the book demonstrates your interest in combining poetic and non-poetic art forms. You describe it as a “‘pataphysical encyclopedia.” Could you elaborate?

     
    CB: Crystallography (my first book of poetry) attempts to put into practice some of my theoretical suppositions about ‘pataphysics. Inspired by the etymology of the word “crystallography,” such a work represents an act of “lucid writing,” which uses the lexicon of geological science to misread the poetics of rhetorical figures. Such lucid writing does not concern itself with the transparent transmission of a message (so that, ironically, much of the poetry might seem “opaque”); instead, lucid writing concerns itself with the reflexive operation of its own process (in a manner reminiscent of lucid dreaming). Such an act of sciomancy borrows much of its crystalline sensibility from the work of Jean Baudrillard, who argues that, for ‘pataphysics, every phenomenon exceeds its own containment within the paradigm of a theoretical explanation. The crystal represents hyperbolic objecthood–a thing impervious to analysis: captivating because it is indifferent; frustrating because it is meaningless. The crystal invites us to enter a poetic prison of surfaces without depth, a prismatic labyrinth of mirrors that revolve into themselves–hence, we lose ourselves when we gaze into this crystal because it promises us answers to all the questions that we exact from it, but instead it ensnares us viewers with even more questions to be asked of it.

     
    SV: Two responses: first, Alfred Jarry’s concept of ‘pataphysics may require some explanation for readers unfamiliar with this notion. Second, since Crystallography attempts to negotiate poetic form through the conceit of geology, one might call it a “nature poem.” Is there an attempt to radically overhaul our notion of this genre?

     
    CB: ‘Pataphysics is the “science of exceptions” imagined by Alfred Jarry. ‘Pataphysics occupies a cognitive interzone between ratiocination and hallucination, appearing on the eve of postmodernity at the very moment when science has begun to question the paradigm of its own rational validity. ‘Pataphysics proposes a set of “imaginary solutions” for proposed problems, proposing absurd axioms, for example, then arguing with rigor and logic from these fundamentals. In contrast with metaphysics, which has striven to apprehend the essence of reality itself and is thus a kind of philosophy of the “as is,” ‘pataphysics is more like a philosophy of the “as if,” giving science itself permission to dream–to fantasize, if you like. I argue that, if poetry cannot oppose science by becoming its antonymic extreme, perhaps poetry can oppose science by becoming its hyperbolic extreme, using reason against itself in order to subvert not only pedantic theories of absolute verity, but also romantic theories of artistic genius. I think that my book on crystals does not portray the nature of crystals, through either description or explanation, so much as my book tries to emulate the formal system of crystals, mimicking the processes inherent in their symmetries and their branchings.

     
    SV: Speaking of the book, you place considerable importance on its material production. Typesetting a text replete with diagrams, transparent paper, and letter-fractals requires a great deal of precision. Did the composition of this text require you to learn desktop publishing software?
     

    Figure 1-1 Figure 1-2
    Figure 1: “S-Fractal” (left) and “Ruby” (right)
    Christian Bök, Crystallography 23, 26-7
    Courtesy of Coach House Books

     

    Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2
    Figure 2: “Key to Speleological Formations”
    Christian Bök, Crystallography 60-61
    Courtesy of Coach House Books

     

    Figure 3-1 Figure 3-2
    Figure 3: “The Cryometric Index”
    Christian Bök, Crystallography 114-15
    Courtesy of Coach House Books

     
    CB: Crystallography does require intensive labor to print, and I have in fact stopped production of it upon discovering the mis-registration of a single title-line, but in a book about the “aesthetics of perfection,” I think that this kind of attention to detail is appropriate to the mandate of the work.

     
    Gilles Deleuze and Félix Guattari have argued that each book must lay itself out upon a super plane, a vast page, doing so both extensively and expansively, without the internal closures of a codex. The idea of the book, for me, has becoming something more than a temporal sequence of words and pages. The book need no longer wear the form of codices, scrolls, tablets, etc.–instead, the book of the future might in fact become indistinguishable from buildings, machinery, or even organisms. I think that the book is itself a weird object that might not exist, except at the moment of its reading–for until then the book always pretends to be something else (a stack of paper, a piece of décor, etc.). I want each of my own books to burgeon into the world, like a horrible parasite, exfoliating beyond itself, evolving along its own trajectory, against the grain of truth and being.

     
    SV: How then does Crystallography specifically operate beyond the “closures” of a conventional book? For me, it eschews the notion of a poetic “sequence” in favor of something closer to a constellation, a book spatially organized. You write, if a crystal is a mineral “jigsaw puzzle” that “assembles itself out of its own constituent / disarray,” then a “word is a bit of crystal in formation” (12). Can this be applied to the book, too?

     
    CB: Crystallography is definitely, definitely an extension of what Eugen Gomringer in the world of visual poetry might call a “constellation”–words arranged artfully into a rigorous structure across the field of the page. My book consists of conceptual fragments, all configured into a crystalline latticework of correlated, figurative devices.

     
    SV: Finally, in regards to your first book, I’d like to ask a specific question about one of the poems, “Diamonds.” It is one of your few attempts at a lyric poem. Yet when you read it in Toronto at the Art Bar Reading Series, many in the audience found your “machine-like” performance somewhat disturbing, as if you had eradicated any sentimentality from the text. Is there a conscious attempt on your part to perform a lyric poem in this way?

     
    CB: “Diamonds” consists of very tiny “opuscules” of words, all arranged according to a lettristic constraint, in which each line of each fragment contains the same number of characters (including spaces). I have written this poem in order to demonstrate that a “heartfelt” sentiment can arise spontaneously from a rule applied with a rigorous, technical detachment. I have expressed no lyrical content about my own biography at all within the poem, and my “mechanical” performance of the poem probably arises, I think, from the mechanical preciseness of its architecture.
     

    Figure 4-1 Figure 4-2
    Figure 4: “Diamonds” (Excerpt)
    Christian Bök, Crystallography 76-77
    Courtesy of Coach House Books

     
    SV: I would like for us to turn to your second collection of poems, Eunoia. Can you describe this text and what is now commonly referred to as “constraint writing”? (Readers can find a flash version of the poem’s “Chapter E” by visiting Coach House Books and an mp3 file of Bök reading the text in its entirety by visiting UbuWeb.1)

     

    Figure 5
    Figure 5: “Chapter I”
    Christian Bök, Eunoia 50
    Courtesy of Coach House Books

     

    CB: Eunoia (my second book of poetry) strives to extend the formal rigor of “crystallinity” into the realm of linguistic constraint–in this case, a univocal lipogram, in which each chapter restricts itself to the use of a single vowel (the letter A, appearing only in the first section; the letter E, appearing only in the second section, etc.). Coined by Aristotle to describe the mentality required to make a friend, the Greek word “eunoia” is the shortest word in English to contain all five vowels, and the word quite literally means “beautiful thinking.” Eunoia has received much fanfare, appearing for five weeks on the bestseller list of The Globe and Mail after winning the Griffin Poetry Prize, now worth $50,000. Eunoia responds directly to the legacy of Oulipo (l’Ouvroir de Littérature Potentielle)–an avant-garde coterie renowned for its experimentation with exaggerated, formalistic rules. Oulipo rejects the metaphysical surrealism of inspired insights in order to embrace what the poet Jacques Roubaud calls a “mathematical surrealism”–a unique phylum of ‘pataphysics, one that formulates methodical, if not scientific, procedures for the production of literature, thereby conceiving of difficult, potential problems that require a rigorous, imaginary solution. Oulipo imposes arbitrary, but axiomatic, dicta upon the writing process in order to evoke an unpredicted possibility from these experimental restrictions. Such laborious exercises reveal that, despite any instinct to the contrary, even the most delimited behavior can nevertheless generate both artful liberty and poetic license.

     
    SV: The last time I checked, Eunoia was up to 20 print runs, and “Chapter I” was recently featured in Harper’s Magazine. Does it surprise you that a book of poems–particularly one dubbed “experimental”–has had so much popular success?

     
    CB: I am surprised that my own work of experimental poetry has enjoyed popular success, selling more than 20,000 copies at last count, but this number still pales in comparison to the success of other cultural artifacts in other art forms–so I still feel that I have a very long way to go in order to boost the profile of avant-garde poetry among a mainstream readership.

     
    SV: So then the notion of a mainstream audience for innovative poetry appeals to you?

     
    CB: Poetry used to be the highest art form after music–but now, because of its quaintness, poetry has become one of the artisanal vocations (like needlepoint); so I would love to find ways to rejuvenate the discipline.

     
    SV: It should also be noted that Eunoia exhausts at least 98% of univocalic words in English. With that in mind, can you describe the process you adopted for composing this text?

     
    CB: Writing Eunoia proved to be an arduous task. I read through all three volumes of the Webster’s Third International Unabridged Dictionary, doing so five times in order to extract an extensive lexicon of univocal words, each containing only one of the five vowels. I could have automated this process, but I figured that learning the software to write a program would probably take just as long as the manual labor itself–so I simply got started on the project. I arranged the words into parts of speech (noun, verb, etc.); then I arranged these lists into topical categories (creatures, foodstuff, etc.), so that I could determine what stories the vowels could tell. I then spent six years, working four or five hours every night after work, from about midnight on, piecing together a five-chapter novel, doing so until I exhausted this restricted vocabulary. I thought that the text would be minimally comprehensible, but grammatically correct, and I was surprised to discover many uncanny coincidences that induced intimations of paranoia. I began to feel that language played host to a conspiracy, almost as if these words were destined to be arranged in this manner, lending themselves to no other task, but this one, each vowel revealing an individual personality.
     

    SV: You mention that among the various meanings of “eunoia,” Aristotle defines it as the “mentality required to make a friend.” It is also a rarely used medical term to describe a state of normal mental health. I find this amusing, since Eunoia seems to have required near pathological compulsion to write. Intriguingly, other constrained forms such as the sestina or even the sonnet were from their beginnings linked thematically to obsessive love. Can we talk about Eunoia in terms of (compulsive) desire?

     
    CB: Eunoia suggests that, even under duress, language finds a way to express its own compulsions. I like the fact that, despite the constraints of the work, the text still finds a way to be not only uncanny or sublime, but also ribald and sexual, writhing against the chains of its apparent handicap. I feel that the vowels themselves have conspired amongst themselves to speak on their own behalf, using me as the agent of their compulsive expression.2

     
    SV: You mention earlier that you were putting together “a five chapter novel.” Do you think of this text as prose or poetry? If one thinks of it as a prose poem, how does the sentence function in Eunoia, in contrast, say, to Silliman’s notion of the New Sentence?

     
    CB: Eunoia uses prose for poetic effect. While Ron Silliman has argued for writing in sentences that integrate only at the grammatical, rather than the syllogistic, level, I have preferred to write Eunoia in meaningful paragraphs, only because this formality makes the constraint of the univocal lipogram far more difficult to fulfill–and for this reason, each narrative in the book ultimately conforms to the classic, generic rules of any sensible anecdote, thereby entrenching a regular, capital economy of meaning (an economy that its avant-garde constraints might have otherwise challenged). AL=A=N=G=U=A=G=E poet, like Silliman, for example, might find this work a bit disappointing for its inability to depart from the norms of grammatical, referential speech.

     
    SV: Silliman speaks highly of Eunoia on his blog. He comments on your “awesome ear,” claiming that the “book’s driving pleasure lies in its author’s commitment to the oldest authorial element there is: a great passion for rigor.”3 Granted, he does not discuss the politics of representation as it pertains to Eunoia. But this raises an interesting question: the Language Poets insist that departure from referential speech in poetry is necessary for an examination of the political uses of language. Might constraint writing have a viable political function, albeit perhaps a different sort?
     

    CB: Oulipo has so far left unexplicit, if not unexplored, the political potential of constraint itself, apparently preferring to “constrain” such potential, confining it primarily to a poetic, rather than a social, agenda. Oulipo in fact never deigns to make explicit its political attitudes, even though the conceptual foundation of “contrainte” (with all its liberatory intentions) might lend itself easily to political agitation. We can easily imagine using a constraint to expose some of the ideological foundations of discourse itself (perhaps by exaggerating the absurdist spectacle of arbitrary protocols in literature, making grotesque their approved grammar, their censored content, their repeated message, etc.). To fathom such rules supposedly emancipates us from them, since we gain mastery over their unseen potential, whereas to ignore such rules quarantines us in them, since we fall servile to their covert intention.

     
    SV: With so much emphasis on Eunoia‘s formal principles, it is easy to forget that each chapter “conspires”–as you put it–to tell its own story. Which is your favorite?

     
    CB: When I read Eunoia in public, most people ask that I perform excerpts from “Chapter U” because its scatalogical content “plays well to the pit.” Of all the stories, my favourite is certainly “Chapter I” because, to me, it feels the most polished–consistent in quality throughout the entire chapter. It is the one that appears most effortless, both in its fulfillment of the formal constraint and in its achievement of some poetic eloquence. In other chapters, I always note a few paragraphs that, with another year of effort, I might have improved, repairing minor flaws in either style or voice.

     
    SV: A final question about your second book: we have discussed the text’s principal constraint; yet, Eunoia operates according to several subsidiary rules. For instance, each chapter must allude self-reflexively to the act of writing, describe a feast, a prurient debauch, a nautical journey, and a pastoral landscape. Wherever possible, the text must adhere to syntactical parallelism, minimize repetition, accent internal rhyme, and exhaust at least 98% of all English univocalic words (as we earlier discussed). You mention these subsidiary rules in a brief essay, “The New Ennui,” at the end of Eunoia. Yet, there are other constraints you do not mention. For instance, any time a sentence adheres to strict parallelism, nouns and verbs typically correspond in the number of letters:

     

    Figure 6

     
    Here is another example:
     

    Figure 7

     
    In the second example, a “pagan skald” and a “papal cabal” both consist of two-word phrases, each with five letters per word. “All annals and tracts, all dramas and psalms” comprises a list of four six-letter words, juxtaposing historical and political discourse with literary and religious texts. The subsequent list of writers alternates between four-letter and five-letter proper nouns, arranged alliteratively by their first letters. Readers can find several examples of numerical parallelism throughout the work. When did you figure out you could add this constraint, and are there other embedded rules you’ve kept a secret?
     
    CB: At the back of my book, I do mention that the text owes some of its euphony not only to internal, rhyming schemes, but also to syntactical parallelism–but (as you have observed) I do not mention that this parallelism appears at the level of phrases (in both their letteral counts and their syllabic counts). I adhere to these rules strictly throughout the book–and, believe me, this constraint is difficult to maintain under the weight of all the other restrictions. I have in fact adhered to many other unmentioned constraints (most of which testify to my obsessive-compulsive disorders)–but for your amusement, I can mention one among them: in any paragraph, the initial words of the sentences are either the same length or get progressively shorter over the course of the paragraph–so that, for example, if I begin a paragraph with the word “This,” no sentence afterward can begin with a word longer than four letters; and if I begin a subsequent sentence with the word “Its,” no sentence afterward can begin with a word longer than three letters, etc. I shorten each of these initial words over the course of the paragraph so that, for me, the sentences “stack neatly”–and (as with all the other constraints in the book), I have adhered strictly to this rule too. I never highlight these other quirks and trivia of the text, because many of the rules just reflect the minutiae of my own poetic habits.

     
    SV: At this point, I would like to discuss two additional aspects of your artistic practice: sound poetry and visual art. Regarding the first, you are renowned for your performance of Kurt Schwitters’s Ur Sonata and at one point you were likely the only person in the world who had committed it to memory. (Readers can find the poem online at Ubuweb.) What is the function of sound poetry today? How has the genre changed from, say, the groundbreaking work of the 1970s by poets such as the Four Horsemen, Henri Chopin, or Bob Cobbing?

     
    CB: Sound poets from the 1960s and 1970s have often justified their work by saying that such poetry allows the practitioner to revert to a more primitive, if not more infantile, variety of humanism. When such poets resort to a musical metaphor to explain their work, they often cite jazz as the prime model for their own form of verbal improv–but despite the importance of jazz in the history of the avant-garde, such music seems like an outdated paradigm for poetry. I think that most of the theories about sound poems are too “phono-philic” or too “quasi-mystic” for my own tastes as an intellectual, and I think that modern poetry may have to adopt other updated, musical theories to express the hectic tempos of our electrified environment.

     
    SV: I take it you are thinking of Techno and other forms of electronic music? What appeals to you about these (or other) contemporary musical genres as opposed to Jazz?

     
    CB: When asked about my taste in music, I usually respond (with some embarrassment) that “I like music by machines–for machines.” The varied genres of electronica simply dramatize more accurately our collective immersions into the hectic, social milieu of technology. No human can perform a set of techno tracks without assistance from a computer–and the sound of such music can radically transform our heartbeats and our brainwaves in a manner that almost seems pharmacological in its intensities.

     
    SV: “By machines for machines”–in “The Piecemeal Bard is Deconstructed: Notes Toward a Potential Robopoetics,” you state, along similar lines, that “we are probably the first generation of poets who can reasonably expect to write literature for a machinic audience of artificially intellectual peers.”4 How seriously should readers take this statement?

     
    CB: Readers should take the statement seriously. Within the next few decades, advances in computer engineering are going to produce machines as sophisticated as the human brain–and before the end of the century, we can fully expect to share our cultural activity with a competing sentience.

     
    SV: Sound poems such as “Motorized Razors” and “Mushroom Clouds” string together recognizable words in suggestive, sometimes funny or disturbing sequences. For instance, the latter poem features references to the atomic bomb amid talk of pinball, pogo sticks, and ping-pong games. (Listen to these two poems at Ubuweb.5) Also, both poems were initially conceived as part of a larger project entitled The Cyborg Opera. Are you still planning a long sound poem?
     

    CB: The Cyborg Opera is supposed to be a kind of “spoken techno” that emulates the robotic pulses heard everywhere in our daily lives. The excerpt entitled “Mushroom Clouds” takes some of its inspiration from the acoustic ambience of Super Mario Bros. by Nintendo. The poem responds to the modern milieu of global terror by recombining a large array of silly words from popular culture, doing so purely for phonic effect in order to suggest that, under the threat of atomic terror, life seems all the more cartoonish. I am still amazed that, even though Japan is so far the only casualty of nuclear warfare, the country has (weirdly enough) counterattacked us, not with its own WMD, but with symbols of cuteness, like Hello Kitties and manga girlies.
     

    SV: You have created a number of conceptualist object-poems. I’m hoping you will discuss two of them: Bibliomechanics and Ten Maps of Sardonic Wit. Both, interestingly, were constructed using plastic–which is an interesting material. Roland Barthes marveled at “its quick-change artistry,” having the capacity to “become buckets as well as jewels” (97). Does it hold special significance for you?
     

    CB: Bibliomechanics consists of 27 Rubik’s cubes, stacked together into a block (3″ x 3″ x 3″) so as to create a device reminiscent of the writing-machine described by Jonathan Swift in The Voyage to Laputa–“a project for improving speculative knowledge by practical and mechanical operations.” Every facet of these cubes displays a white word printed in Futura on a black label so that, when properly stacked together, the cubes create 18 separate surfaces (6 exterior, 12 interior), each one of which becomes a page that displays a readable sentence (81 words long). The reader can, of course, scramble each cube so as to create a new text from the vocabulary of the old text.
     

    Figure 8
    Figure 8: Bibliomechanics
    Christian Bök
    Twenty-seven Rubik’s Cubes with printed lettering.
    6-3/4″ x 6-3/4″ x 6-3/4″
    Courtesy of the artist.

     
    Ten Maps of Sardonic Wit is a book whose cover, spine, pages, and words consist of nothing but thousands of Lego bricks, each one no bigger than a tile, four pegs in size. Each page is a rectangular plate of these pieces, three layers thick, and the surface of each page depicts a black-and-white mosaic of words, spelling out a single line of poetry. Each line is an anagram that exhaustively permutes the fixed array of letters in the title, recombining them into a coherent sequence of phrases about atoms and words. The opening two lines, for example, are “atoms in space now drift/ on a swift and epic storm.” The letters of the poem become the literary variants of molecular particles, and the book itself consists of discrete, granular elements that can be dismantled and recombined to form something else.

     

    Ten Maps of Sardonic Wit
    atoms in space now drift
    on a swift and epic storm
     
    soft wind can stir a poem
     
    snow fits an optic dream
    into a scant prism of dew
     
    words spin a faint comet
     
    some words in fact paint
    two stars of an epic mind
     
    manic words spit on fate

     

    Text from Ten Maps of Sardonic Wit, courtesy of the author.

     

    Plastic allows us to convert every object into a single, common substance–a polymer, whose gewgaws are likely to outlast civilization itself. Plastic has thus become one of the modern tropes for a kind of pliable but durable mentality, in which everyone shares the same thoughts, the same opinions–a mentality in complete contrast, for example, to the “esemplastic” imagination of the Romantics. Every idea now seems to have become a kind of disposable convenience, no less pollutant than a styrofoam cup. I suppose that poetry itself tries to “metabolize” these persistent, linguistic forms of polypropylene in order to recycle them into something new.

     
    SV: I used to play with Lego when I was a kid. Was it difficult to find pieces appropriate for creating a book?

     
    CB: The Lego Corporation, upon request, provided all the elements for the book (an object that consists of about 8500 pieces). Lego bricks in fact have an almost Platonic perfection: getting a package of 2000 small, white tiles, each one exactly the same, is really like getting a big bag of protons.

     
    SV: The trope of plasticity seems to promise simultaneously glorious hybrids and garbage we can’t get rid of. I detect the same ambivalence in your response to the question posed about innovation: art, as you put it, risks “the kind of manufactured obsolescence that has come to justify advertisements for ‘improved’ products.”

     
    CB: Art is really just an exalted species of garbage (stuff leftover by a prior group from some other economic activity–and when we haul off this junk in order to dispose of it, we just take it to an incinerator called a museum).

     
    SV: You mentioned earlier that poetic activity today might include “colonizing unfamiliar lexicons.” Many of your readers may be unaware that you have created two alien languages for science fiction television shows. First of all, why? And second, do these projects inform your creative practice in any way?

     
    CB: TV producers invited me to contribute to their shows, and because I needed money, I agreed to design a couple of artificial, linguistic repertoires. I thought that the job was fun, and it added a couple of colorful lines to my CV. I would say that, at the time, these jobs did inform my creative practice (insofar as I felt that, for our culture, avant-garde poetry had become so outlandish a practice that it now resembled an alien idiom with no real home, except perhaps for the fantasyland of science fiction).
     

    SV: At this point, I would like to shift our discussion to your most recent work. I understand you are currently making plans to convert a poem into genetic sequence? As I’m sure you already know, members of the Critical Art Ensemble (CAE) have recently turned to biotechnology as an artistic medium–and this has created a great deal of controversy. First, I’d like you to describe this field of art for those unfamiliar with it and elaborate on what you believe are the social and political implications of this practice. Then, can you explain how you would integrate poetry, in particular, with biotechnology?
     

    CB: Genetic engineering is going to be competing with computer engineering for the brightest minds during the next decade, and I expect that, during this century, these two disciplines are very likely going to overlap and coalesce into one “superscience.” Artists need to participate in these domains of study, simply because such technologies of information-processing are going to become the medium for all forms of cultural expression. I am currently trying to address these issues through an unorthodox experiment in poetry.
     

    “The Xenotext Experiment” is a literary exercise that explores the aesthetic potential of genetics in the modern milieu–doing so in order to make literal the renowned aphorism of William S. Burroughs, who has declared that “the word is now a virus.” I am proposing to address some of the sociological implications of biotechnology by manufacturing a “xenotext”–a beautiful, anomalous poem, whose “alien words” might subsist, like a harmless parasite, inside the cell of another life-form.

     
    Pak Chung Wong at the Pacific Northwest National Laboratory has recently demonstrated that even now scientists might store data by encoding sequences of textual information into sequences of genetic nucleotides, thereby creating “messages” made from DNA–messages that we can implant, like genes, inside bacterial organisms. Wong has enciphered, for example, the lyrics to “It’s a Small World After All,” storing this text as a plasmid of DNA inside Deinococcus radiodurans–a bacterium resistant to inhospitable environments.

     
    Eduardo Kac has, likewise, used a genetic process of encipherment for creative purposes in his artwork entitled “Genesis.” Kac has transformed the biblical sentence, “Let man have dominion over the fish of the sea and over the fowl of the air and over every living thing that moves upon the earth,” encoding this phrase into a strand of DNA, which he has then implanted into a microbe, subjecting the germ to doses of ultraviolet irradiation so as to cause mutations in the text itself as the microbe reproduces and multiplies.

     
    Paul Davies (a respected professor for SETI at the Australian Centre for Astrobiology in Sydney) has even gone so far as to propose an extravagant speculation, arguing that, if humans can encode messages into DNA, then we may have to consider the possibility that extraterrestrials more advanced than us might have already tried to establish interplanetary communications by enciphering messages into our own earthly genomes, using viruses, for example, to act as small, cheap envoys, transmitting data across the void.

     
    These three thinkers have suggested the degree to which the biochemistry of living things has become a potential substrate for inscription. Not simply a “code” that governs both the development of an organism and the maintenance of its function, the genome can now become a “vector” for heretofore unimagined modes of artistic innovation and cultural expression. In the future, genetics might lend a possible, literary dimension to biology, granting every geneticist the power to become a poet in the medium of life.

     
    Stuart A. Kauffman (a MacArthur Fellow, who is now the iCore Chair for the Institute of Biocomplexity and Informatics at the University of Calgary) has agreed to lend me the expertise of his lab during its free time so that I might compose an example of such “living poetry.” I am proposing to encode a short verse into a sequence of DNA in order to implant it into a bacterium, after which we plan to document the progress of our experiment for publication. I also plan to make related artwork for subsequent exhibition.
     

    I foresee producing a poetic manual that showcases the text of the poem, followed by an artfully designed monograph about the experiment, including, for example, the chemical alphabet for the cipher, the genetic sequence for the poetry, the schematics for the protein, and even a photograph of the microbe, complete with other apparati, such as charts, graphs, images, and essays, all outlining our results. I want to include (at the end the book) a slide with a sample of the germ for scientific inspection by the public.

     
    I am hoping to encipher my text and then integrate it into the genome of the organism, doing so in such a way that, not only does the organism become an archive for storing my poem, but moreover the organism also becomes a machine for writing a poem. I am hoping to design a text that, when implanted, does not injure the organism, but that instead causes it to generate a protein–one that, according to my cipher, is itself another text. I foresee that, in the future, DNA might become yet another poetic medium.

     
    I am hoping to “infect” the language of genetics with the “poetic vectors” of its own discourse, doing so in order to extend poetry itself beyond the formal limits of the book. I foresee that, as poetry adapts to the millennial condition of such innovative technology, a poem might soon resemble a weird genre of science-fiction, and a poet might become a breed of technician working in a linguistic laboratory. I am hoping that such a project might, in fact, provoke debates about the future of science and poetics.

     
    SV: Are you familiar with the case against Steve Kurtz at Buffalo?6
     

    CB: I am familiar with the rough circumstances of the case, as the media have reported them, but I do not know the details of his response to the allegations against him. I love the scholarship of Critical Arts Ensemble, and I suspect that, by reacting hysterically to an imagined, but baseless, threat of biological terrorism, the authorities have found a convenient opportunity to make an example of an artistic activist, punishing him for otherwise legal forms of political critique.

     
    SV: Do you consider the Xenotext Experiment an act of “artistic activism”?

     
    CB: The Xenotext Experiment is, at least so far, just an experiment–with no overtly political overtones to it. I am not, for example, offering any cautionary appraisals of biotechnology–and I guess that, if there is any “activism” in this work, the radical gesture might lie in my complaint that despite science being our most important cultural activity as a species, poets have ignored, if not rebuked, any attempt to engage with it.

     
    SV: This comment chimes with an observation you made earlier: that poets rarely extend beyond the narrow scope of their own humanist training (note that some would take exception to this remark!). Why do you think there is a resistance to science in particular?

     
    CB: Poets have generally forgotten that their art form, like science, is an epistemological activity, in which practitioners gain acclaim for making discoveries and innovations, generating surprises about the paradigms of their discipline–and usually the “manufacture” of such anomalies requires that innovators speculate imaginatively in domains of knowledge outside the immediate parameters of their expertise. Poets have historically regarded the discourse of science as innately “unpoetic” (in part because science regards “metaphor” itself as a barrier to its own mathematization of truthfulness)–and because science is “hard,” poets have found lots of reasons to justify their own ignorance of the discipline, rather than engage with its discourses and procedures as participating experimenters.
     

    SV: How do you expect audiences of poetry will receive the project?

     
    CB: Readers of poetry have become relatively conservative in their expectations, so I expect that, in the short term, the project is likely to be greeted with some bewilderment by poets, but conceptual artists are probably going to be more receptive to the project, recognizing themselves within this kind of novel practice. I think that, in the long term, using DNA as a medium for writing is going to become so commonplace an idea that my project is going to seem ordinary by the technical standards of a future poetry.

     
    SV: We don’t typically think about poetry as a communal artistic practice, so it interests me that much of this work is collaborative (by necessity). How have scientists responded to your proposed plan of work?

     
    CB: Stuart Kauffman, the geneticist, is my collaborator–and because he is a MacArthur Fellow, he is already highly acclaimed for his unorthodox genius. He has always responded to this project with a kind of dubious glee. He is originally a graduate of the humanities (with aspirations of becoming a poet himself), so he appreciates the provocative character of my exercise, but of course he wonders about its beneficial merits. He is, after all, trying to use genetic algorithms to find a cure for cancer, so my artistic use of his resources might seem like an amusing distraction from his more serious work.

     
    SV: I would like to end the interview with a question about your own personal reading list. In your opinion, who among your contemporaries are doing interesting work? Whose poetry are you currently reading?

     
    CB: Among my peers, Kenneth Goldsmith is still the man to beat–but I take inspiration in varying degrees from a variety of contemporary writers, most of whom take their cues from conceptual artistry of one sort or another: Bruce Andrews, Charles Bernstein, Kevin Davies, Jeff Derksen, Craig Dworkin, Dan Farrell, Steve McCaffery, and probably most of all, my best friend Darren Wershler-Henry (co-author of the recent book “Apostrophe”–an awesome work of avant-garde poetry, written entirely by a machine that scours the Internet for interesting phraseology). I have also been very excited by the recent book entitled “Lemonhound” by the feminist poet Sina Queyras.

     
    SV: One more question, Christian: what is the story behind the umlaut above the “o” in your last name?!

     
    CB: “Book” (B, double-O, K) is in fact my birthname, not “Bök” (B, O, K, with an umlaut), which is in fact my pseudonym. When people ask me: “Are you the Christian Bök,” I usually respond by saying: “No, that’s the Bible.” With my credentials, I must sometimes endure the indignity of being called Dr. Book. With such a moniker, I feel a minor sense of irony when declaring that the concept of the “book” remains extremely important to my own radical poetics, which has often striven to explode the formal limits of the book (its serialized words, its stratified pages), doing so as if in response to the formal demise of poetry at the dawn of a new millennium.
     

    Notes

     

    1. The Flash realization of Eunoia‘s “Chapter E” was created by Brian Kim Stefans. Eunoia was recorded on 2 June 2002, by Steve Venright in Toronto, Canada.
     
    2. Marjorie Perloff, in her latest book, provides an astute reading of Eunoia in these terms. She observes that each chapter exposes the “semantic overtones” of each vowel, so that, indeed, the vowels seem to speak on their own behalf. See Perloff 205-26.
     
    3. Silliman’s review of Eunoia appeared on his blog (<http://ronsilliman.blogspot.com/>), dated 9 April 2002.
     
    4. The full text of Bök’s essay can be found online at <http://www.ubu.com/papers/object.html>.
     
    5. Note that “Mushroom Clouds” comes directly after “Motorized Razors” on the same mp3 file.
     
    6. On the morning of 11 May 2004, the artist Steve Kurtz called 911 to report the death of his wife, who had succumbed to heart failure. Upon entering the home, local law enforcement encountered biological materials and lab equipment, which Kurtz and other members of the Critical Arts Ensemble routinely use in their art installations. Local authorities promptly called the FBI, and Kurtz was briefly detained under terrorism legislation. Although a grand jury later rejected charges of terrorism, the associate professor at SUNY Buffalo was still charged with federal criminal mail and wire fraud, and faces a possible twenty year sentence if convicted.

     

    Works Cited

    • Barthes, Roland. Mythologies. Trans. Annette Lavers. New York: Hill and Wang, 1972.
    • Perloff, Marjorie. Differentials: Poetry, Poetics, Pedagogy. Tuscaloosa, AL: U of Alabama P, 2004.

     

  • Insects, Sex, and Biodigitality in Lynn Hershman Leeson’s Teknolust

    Jussi Parikka

    Media Studies
    Humboldt University, Berlin
    juspar@utu.fi

     

    They are everywhere you look, bodiless brains breathing down your neck and controlling your desires. Where do they come from, how do they replicate, how can I get one, why do they look human?
     
    –Lynn Hershman Leeson, “Living Blog”
     
     

     

    Introduction: Cinematics of Biodigital Life

     

    From the nineteenth century sciences of life have had a special relationship with imaging techniques. The cinematic eye as a specific mode of knowledge opened up a new moving microworld that coupled biological entities with the world. During the 1880s and 1890s, the cinema of astonishment was elementally connected to the “bacteriological revolution.” Later Walter Benjamin valorized the new world of technological photographic vision as especially fit to dig into biological life; the vision of the camera is more relevant to cellular tissue than to landscapes or human portraits (Benjamin; Ostherr; Landecker). Early on, it seems, biological life became visually organized.

     
    Since the 1990s, a new mode of networked databases has emerged with public digital archives. For instance, The Visible Human Project proposes easy-access to the human body and a view of the high-tech imaging of bodily functions. The project is defined as a complete archive of detailed, three-dimensional images of “normal” male and female human bodies. “The long-term goal of the Visible Human Project is to produce a system of knowledge structures that will transparently link visual knowledge forms to symbolic knowledge formats such as the names of body parts.” Genomic databases such as Genbank (USA), EMBL (Europe), and the DNA Database (Japan) also function as peculiar kinds of distributions of information on life. The current archival logic of the network age–contact a remote server and search/browse with a search engine–is traversing not only the human body, but also increasingly the information entities of which life is often seen to consist. Such projects offer an interesting and concrete mode of intertwining biology with technology in the form of software applications that organize and distribute genomic data (Thacker, “Redefining Bioinformatics”).1 These archives, which all have some direct practical use, are continuously refashioned on a popular cultural level by the production of images and animations that take us inside cells. The recently awarded Biomedical Image Awards of 2006 show how microbiology work produces visually alluring images. Similarly The Inner Life of a Cell (<multimedia.mcb.harvard.edu/media.html>), designed for the Harvard University Molecular and Cellular Biology program, is a good example of a glamorous animation of microbiological life. These “Biovisions”–a “computer-based learning environment for undergraduate students that will allow them to delve into the science of cellular study with more depth and opportunities to enhance their understanding” (see XVIVO Scientific Animation)–represent and fashion the biological sphere with attractive animations and graphics and kitschy sublime-leaning soundtracks of synthetic classical music.
     

    Figures of life and technological vision are similarly entangled in a complex biosoftware assemblage in the film Teknolust (2002) by media artist Lynn Hershman Leeson. In this article, I propose Teknolust as an assemblage of art, science, and technology that addresses the creation of digital culture as a visual artifact. In Teknolust, the high-tech and high-profile science of biodigitality is rescaled because of concern about human-machine interactions, and because the human stance towards technology seems to rely either on fear, suspicion, or on the capitalist need for profit. Instead of (re)producing sublimated images of genetic technology, Teknolust translates technology into kinds of intimacy, desire, and sexuality beyond the human condition. Here visuality is a tool for complexification (instead of purely functional tool of scientific or commercial visualization apparent in much of contemporary biodigitality). In this work gender and sexuality are connected to science and technology; the artistic cinematics of life is a multiplication of the complexity inherent in the “bodiless brains” of network and biodigital life. In this discussion, I aim to intermingle technological issues (such as logics of databases and archives) with for example sexuality in order to resist reductive accounts of technological assemblages and to underline the continuous articulation of discursive issues with non-discursive practices. Instead of trying to determine the essence of digital culture or biodigitality in for example temporal processes of calculation, I ask how non-spatial calculational processes are continuously translated as visual figurations. Teknolust self-consciously alludes to and quotes film history, but it also alludes to alternative media that cinema might produce as it visualizes science, medicine, and sexuality.2
     

    The narrative of the film is quite straightforward. The film presents three self-reproducing automata (SRA) sisters named Ruby, Marine, and Olive (all played by Tilda Swinton). They live in a cartoonish virtual world reminiscent perhaps of an insect habitat seen through a peephole. The automata break free from the control of their creator, the bio-scientist Rosetta (also Tilda Swinton), and embark on a life of their own, trespassing the boundaries between their computer-generated habitat and the world outside computers. The repetitious need of the SRAs to acquire the male Y chromosome (from fresh male spermatozoa) to sustain themselves turns, however, into something like existential questioning. Why are we deemed to live in this restricted ecology of a digital habitat? Why can’t we interact with humans? Why are we seen as a threat to human life? What is the qualitative difference between biodigital life and human life? Ruby, who is responsible for acquiring the sperm samples, is especially interested in life beyond the sisters’ restricted computer world. While her “sample collecting copulations” infect the male partners with a strange viruslike disease (at the same time infecting their computers), Ruby finds love with Sandy (Jeremy Davies), a shy copy clerk who lives with his mother.
     

    The SRAs are out of bounds, perhaps even defiant in a juvenile manner, expressing a personified mode of technological agency very different from forms of artificial intelligence found in earlier cinema. Their autonomy does not lead to sublime imaginings of machines taking control, but instead involves a curious probing of how technologies and organic forms might interact and cohabit in social reality. For Hershman Leeson, writing on the Teknolust website,

     

    TEKNOLUST is a coming of age story, not only for the characters but also of our society's relationship to technology. The 21st centuries technologies--genetics, nanotechnology, and robotics have opened a Pandora's box that will affect the destiny of the entire human race. Our relationship to computer based virtual life forms that are autonomous and self replicating will shape the fate of our species.

     
    For Ruby, Marine, and Olive, it seems to be hard to live in a man’s world where technology and women are inert, functional, and compliant. Again quoting Hershman Leeson from the movie website: “unlike Mary Shelley’s monstrous creature in FRANKENSTEIN, or Fritz Lang’s conflicted evil robot in METROPOLIS, all the characters in TEKNOLUST thrive on affection, and ultimately, reproduction.”
     

    Such “affections” seem removed from everyday human emotions, and suggest a much broader understanding of interaction, reproduction, and sexuality where human affections are merely superficial expressions of more fundamental ontological ties. The names Ruby, Marine, and Olive designate colors through which we can perceive the three protagonists of the film as intensities: force fields of potentiality. These are not proper names of individual persons, but modes of biodigital agency. The bodies of the SRAs might be anthropomorphic, and are perhaps emphatically feminine, but still their modes of operation are not constrained by the phenomenological world of humans. Hence the three SRAs in Teknolust are not to be read in terms of merely human emotions, but expressing a weird affectivity, something akin perhaps to animal or insect affects in their metamorphic ability to move from mathematical platforms to human worlds. This metamorphic status marks a liminal space separate from, but approaching, the human world. The digital robots are agents of a particular logic, or more accurately, a potential of affects: a potentiality to be related to various kinds of organic and inorganic bodies, corporeal and non-corporeal. In this sense, I propose to approach the SRAs as antennae for a potential mode of sexuality that stretches between things and substances of various natures. I argue that despite their human form, they continuously overlap non-human contexts in computing, biodigital techniques, and for example insect models of behavior.
     

    It is easy to see Teknolust as a probe for future sexualities given the narrative of the film. Hence, my focus is not merely on the question of sexuality, but on how Teknolust complexifies the scientific questions of biodigital creation as part of a consideration of gender and sexuality but also of capitalism. My main concern is the way calculational, scientific processes translate into a wider cultural field on which biodigitality acts. Here the “coding” of life in informatic units does not result in a geometrical data structure as in William Gibson’s Neuromancer, but in an imaginative view of biodigital creatures as affective, interacting, folding in with various cultural forces. Teknolust can be read as an expression of this distribution of technological affects across a field where biology, technology, and culture form an assemblage. In Teknolust sexuality connects organic life with technology and technology with novel kinds of models detached, or deterritorialized, from biology.3 In order to approach this level of non-human but not entirely technological affects, I use the conceptual figure of the “insect” and the term “insect sexuality” which refers to a range of sexualities from heterosexual human-to-human reproduction to much more distributed non-human sexuality. Insect sexuality is, as such, one potential path to the affect world of biotechnology and network creatures.

     
    The first section of the article shows the intertwining of Ruby and the other SRAs with Turing’s universe and explains other examples of machines of intelligent repetition. It then looks at the recent turn towards swarm agency (where the theme of the insect emerges). This is followed by an analysis of how technological genealogy moves from technics to erotics, that is, addresses the themes of biodigital remodulations of gender and sexuality. This essay approaches cinematic remodulation in parallel with the ideas of abstract sex (Luciana Parisi) and of the multiplication of sexuality (Elizabeth Grosz). The article then returns to the theme of visuality and to the cinematic production of digital culture, underlining the importance in contemporary media of calculation of artistic imagination as a kind of counter-memory.
     

    Remediating Sex or Copy Machines

     
    Copying is a constant theme in Teknolust. It reproduces not merely Tilda Swinton in quadruple form, but takes the very process of reproduction, virality, and sexuality across various media as its main focus. Teknolust presents an interesting take on artificial life and on what could be called a multiplication of forms of as-if-life.4 Even though clearly situated within the field of biocomputing (it was released in 2002, the year before Dolly the sheep died of premature aging), the film can be read as part of the genealogies of artificial agents, interactive computer systems and modulations of desire beyond the human form. Biogenetics in recent decades has moved from an analysis of genetic processes to genetic engineering (via the design of recombinant DNA techniques in the 1970s) and more recently to the bioinformatic phase as a concrete intertwining of computers with genetic research and manipulation. This move, as Thacker notes, demonstrates a shift towards emphasizing the role of supercomputers, databases and programming languages in the metaphorical task of “cracking the code” (Biomedia 38).5 Teknolust exhibits the impact dry computer lab tools have in the biological field earlier dominated by wet-labs. Such images of biology and computer code seem to put a face on processes otherwise deemed obscure. This move toward increasing visibility goes against the simultaneous becoming-invisible of code and of algorithmic processes common to graphic user interfaces.6

     
    Hershman Leeson’s works have consistently addressed the changes new technologies of archiving, processing, and communication of information have made to subjectivity. Discussing the coupling of software and genetic modulation, Teknolust is anchored to the agenda of the last turn of the millennium. In this, it can be seen as an example of the new modes of production inherent in copying, or more accurately in cloning. This is evident in the narrative–the cloned SRAs are nearly exact replicas of the Rosetta Stone, alluding to the cipher discovered in 1799 which helped unravel key traits of Egyptian hieroglyphs–and in its production mechanisms, where digital filming and editing techniques are used to create Tilda Swinton in quadruple form in one place. In Teknolust, there are various levels of copies, a hierarchy perhaps: the male protagonist Sandy is a copy clerk, burdened by repetitious copy work with Xerox machines. In contrast, Rosetta makes high-tech machines where copying is not mere repetition, but repetition with a difference: self-mutating machines.

     

    Figure 1
    Figure 1: Ruby “Gathering”
    Image used with permission of Lynn Hershman Leeson.

     
    Doubles are everywhere, but in a more humorous manner than in the earlier Doppelganger genres. Now the double is associated with twin helical strands of DNA, a recurring visual motive of Teknolust. In addition, copying is as much a technique the SRAs (especially Ruby) use in their adaptation to the human world. The film reads as an ironic version of classical Hollywood love stories (and incidentally, the SRAs are addicted to such television narratives) where artificial life automata gain subjectivity through their ability to perform female mannerisms. The film’s computer-generated subjectivities remediate older media forms such as television in their performative becoming.7 Dialogue from television (“motivational tapes” as they are called) become pick-up lines, and part and parcel of the routines by which the SRAs try to adjust to the contours of modern human life in their quest to obtain spermatozoa. The phrase “You’re looking good, Frankie, you’ve got a natural rhythm,” borrowed from a 1950s movie (The Last Time I Saw Paris, 1954), turns into a protocol that helps transport Ruby into the human world of copulation (picking up men in bars). In themselves such phrases reveal the absurdity of heterosexual rites of romance and the machine-like copy character of Ruby the SRA. Such copying of human behavior recalls the Turing test (see below), or ELIZA the computer program shrink from the 1960s, or Ruby’s own Internet portal. These all demonstrate the rise of intelligent agents as key figures of network culture, inhabited not only by humans, but by software bots of various kinds. Hence the remediating abilities of the three digital sisters have a concrete diagrammatic basis in both DNA cultivation techniques and in computer science. Alan Turing formulated in his 1950 paper “Computing Machinery and Intelligence” the famous imitation test, where the original goal was to decipher whether an anonymous person responding to questions was a man or a woman.8 The digital version asked whether the responses were given a machine or by a human being. This mind game leads us to question the ability of computers to replace human functions: “The idea behind digital computers may be explained by saying that these machines are intended to carry out any operations which could be done by a human computer.”9 This is done by transforming (or coding) human performed operations into instruction tables. In other words, the functions are programmed into algorithmic form: “To ‘programme a machine to carry out the operation A’ means to put the appropriate instruction table into the machine so that it will do A,” as Turing expresses it.

     
    In a practical and parodic manner, Joseph Weizenbaum programmed his ELIZA-program in the mid-1960s to simulate a psychoanalyst. ELIZA was an early experiment in interactive computing (in the MAC time-sharing system at MIT), showing how machines could respond to human input and how to produce responses to input that would seem human (or at least as convincing as possible). For Weizenbaum, a typical conversation could proceed as follows:

     

    Men are all alike.
    IN WHAT WAY
    They're always bugging us about something or other.
    CAN YOU THINK OF A SPECIFIC EXAMPLE
    Well, my boyfriend made me come here.
    YOUR BOYFRIEND MADE YOU COME HERE
    He says I'm depressed much of the time.
    I AM SORRY TO HEAR YOU ARE DEPRESSED (36)

     

    ELIZA is a software program that consists of a database of keywords and transformative rules governing their use depending on input. Fundamental questions include the following: how to identify the most important keywords expected to occur in a conversation, how to place such keywords depending on context, how to choose the right rules and responses in case no keyword is given. The program was restricted by the size of its database and by the vastness of the archive of potential keywords and responses it could handle. Technically Weizenbaum identifies the functioning of the ELIZA program as formed around two pieces: decomposition of data strings it received, and reassembly into an output. So when Ruby uses keywords (or passwords) to activate social situations, she is part of a certain genealogy of imitation. The question for Ruby–as it was for Turing–is how such programs or artificial entities entwine into a complex web of interaction, or an ecology of networks that does not consist merely of technological or biological parts. This is not a question of thinking, or of intelligence in the human sense, but of how to cope sensitively and responsively as part of an information environment. Yet the SRAs are not predetermined pieces of code either, but exemplify code as “affect,” a mode of contact with an outside that is determined only by the SRAs’ encounters with other pieces of code and other environmental factors. This anticipates the shift from intelligence-centered AI to artificial life and to new AI in which dumb interacting agents take advantage of their surroundings to complete tasks. On one level, the challenge to produce intelligence is then an interface problem solved by programming: how to develop sufficiently responsive and sensitive feedback routines that can “react” to the user’s input in a fashion that gives the impression of interface-level intelligence. Reactions signify information processing: identifying input, classifying it, and fetching a proper response from a database. On another level, the challenge of programminng intelligence is to couple the algorithmic procedures, the code level, with an environment. The software program, although composed of algorithmic code strings, must constantly stretch beyond its computer habitat.
     
    Transportation is a constant theme in Teknolust: Rosetta’s kitchen opens up to a world of digital micro-organisms, the SRAs wander in the human world, boundaries are crossed and traversed using flexible protocols that allow a passage from organic to inorganic bodies.10 At first, it seems that Teknolust may be an ironic example of Butlerian ideas of performativity. Gender is not a substance but is performed and mediated, always becoming. Gestures, speech, and postures mark the process of becoming woman where social codes inscribe themselves on the flesh. As apt as this mode of analysis might be, there is no flesh in our case where the inscription might take place. All we have are biodigital lifeforms, SRAs. That’s what the witty sisters themselves continuously underline: they are not humans (even though they have to feed on human affection). Hence, perhaps, instead of leaning towards a human-centered analysis, we might emphasize the anonymity of the forces at play. Ruby and the other SRAs are entwined in technological forces expressed in the genealogy from Turing to ELIZA and beyond and in the “molecular biological revolution” where the figure of genetic code infiltrates modes of subjectification.11

     
    For the SRAs, language too becomes a code that can be executed in order to achieve desired results. Ruby’s power to act is grounded in the folds of self-replicating software and operating systems supporting it, and also in the genetic code channeled as part of that assemblage of biodigital nature. The use of language in the imitational sense also marks the curious double status of the SRAs. In the early scenes of the film, when Ruby is fed “motivational tapes,” projected film surfaces not merely on the wall but also on Ruby’s face. The two faces, the woman on the film and Ruby asleep, form a common surface: the images and speech fold into Ruby’s dream. This is not, however, “a meaningful implementation” in a hermeneutical sense, but an affective folding at the limits of language.12 As with ELIZA, the question is how to fold alternative modes of rationality. The becoming-calculational of language and speech in the mid-twentieth century relates both to the desire for artificial intelligence and more contextually to the ways such programs function in environments and handle tasks (Larsson 10). In this the SRAs and ELIZA recall the original Eliza Doolittle in Shaw’s Pygmalion (1916), in whose case the powers of psychophysiology and the modeling of cultural techniques such as speech can be reduced to technological modulation.[13]

     

    Figure 2
    Figure 2: Ruby Sleeping
    Image used with permission of Lynn Hershman Leeson.

     
    The SRAs resemble their “older sister” ELIZA in their mechanical responses to stimuli. This mode of subjectification expressed by the SRAs inherently depends on the role of archives as databases. Lev Manovich argues for the centrality of the database mode of culture in his Language of New Media, proposing that meaningful narratives are not (anymore) the basic means of organizing data. For him, non-linear databases form the fundamental organizing code of new media culture. This is how life is archived in the biodigital age: as data structures and algorithms (as with the genomic on-line banks), or as computer software that imitate the linguistic life of ELIZA and Ruby. Whereas digital databases present themselves in biodigital network culture as a priori levels for articulating what is living (and what is meaningful action, as in the software versions of intelligent copy machines), they also multiply organisms. The archive entities of life in networked, search-engine accessible digital databases represent one such novel class of uncanny objects. Teknolust shows in a fictional form how the movements and relations of such objects can be visualized. Rosetta Stone is multiplied and folded into novel, non-human worlds, and the SRAs are reciprocally folded into human worlds of organic emotions and social norms. I return to this point concerning multiplication and metamorphosis later.

     
    It is interesting to note that Lynn Hershman uses the idea of database identity and the mimicking of intelligence in the 1970s. Her four-year Roberta Breitmore performance (1974-78) introduces the idea that one could construct an artificial person with the help of statistical behavioral and psychological data. Hershman adopts the position of a database-defined person, Roberta, and many of Roberta’s routines are repeated later in Teknolust, such as collecting various “souvenirs,” including photographs, of the people she encounters. Hershman also evokes multiplication in the last performance of the work, when several women played Roberta.

     
    Like Roberta, Ruby is not one. She moves between medial scales and remediates her imitational behavior in a Web portal in the film and also on the Internet. Agent Ruby’s E-dream Portal (<http://www.agentruby.net/>) imitates the movie and the genealogy of calculational conversation. “Hello there User, type to me. Let’s connect,” invites the screen. However, Ruby’s responses are very mechanical. What is interesting about this program is not how convincing it and similar programs are (Ruby’s portal does not function very smoothly in terms of human communication), but what kind of powers and affects this mode of mediality and technological agenthood expresses, and from what kind of elements they are made.14 In order to further emphasize the non-human nature of such assemblages, the agents or bodies need not be thought in human terms but as forms of an individuation that applies also to micro-relations between agents such as bacteria or certain software formations.
     

    Insect Worlds

     
    The SRAs recall swarms, insect robots and other “dumb AI” creatures. Since the late 1980s, a new form of AI- and A-Life research has patched together old theories of cognitive artificial intelligence. Whereas the “Old AI” research of the 1950s was keen to develop intelligent units that are cognitively able to cope in their environment (whether physical or computational), the new agenda is interested in both connectionist neural net-inspired systems, and in distributed systems with multiagent interaction (see Johnston). In other words, the goal is not to build an intelligent unit of action that has a representation of the external world in which it should act, but a distributed system of “dumb agents” that resemble for example insects (ants, bees, cockroaches) and their social interactions. Local insect interactions have large-scale repercussions–emergent intelligence. Often these phases of AI research are seen as distinct, but as argued above, the early database applications of responsive programs such as ELIZA can be seen to be already based on a folding. Even though their mode of operation was rigid, they coupled programs with their environment.
     

    Rodney Brooks’s robotic creations in the late 1980s are exemplary in this context. Brooks follows Francisco Varela’s critique of a model of the mind premised on rule-based manipulation of symbols (the computational model) and of the mind as self-organizing neural networks (the biological model). The alternative model suggested the structural coupling of organisms and environments, or folding the outside with the inside (Johnston 487). Brooks was occupied with insect-like robots after he designed “mobots” to take care of simple tasks. This “subsumption architecture” grounded the agent’s operational intelligence in the liminal zone of interaction with its outside. The mobots’ “cockroach-like behavior” was based on three simple functions (or affects): to move, to avoid obstacles, and to collect small objects (489). Similar models of distributed agents closer to insects than to humans were slowly gaining popularity both in physical robot research and in software network design, whether agents were named “bacterial” or “viral” (See Parisi 149, Parikka).
     

    Brooks uses the term “perceptual world” to characterize the interactive relationship AI programs can have with their environment, adapting the concept from ethology. As Johnston notes, the term stems from Jacob von Uexküll’s term Merkwelt, which designates the way perceptual worlds define the affective relationships in which animals are embedded. These perceptional worlds are “constrained by each animal’s unique sensory apparatus, morphology, and capacity to move” (491). Deleuze and Guattari use Von Uexküll’s discussion of the tick to demonstrate the potential of ethology in a surface-orientated analysis of affects. According to Deleuze and Guattari, we do not have to start with the complex affect world (or Merkwelt) of the human being when deciphering the powers of affect–a simple example from the insect world suffices. The tick is characterized not by its genus or species but by its orientation towards light, its smell of mammals, and its perception of skin topology. For Deleuze and Guattari, ethology provides the perfect example of the Spinozan quest to map body potentials (257). This ethological perspective focuses on tendencies to act and to receive action, that is, on the interactions of bodies with other bodies (environment). Bodies are defined by the connections they make or tend to make. Instead of starting the ethological mapping of affects from individuals or any any other transcendent forms of organization, one starts at a plane of immanence that does not recognize fundamental differences between nature and artifice, subject and object.
     

    So the move from models of intelligence based on human imitation to models based on more insect-like worlds is well founded: we are not seeking predefined forms, but potentials for action, hybrid creatures of biology and digital technology. It is a mistake to see the SRAs’ interaction in merely human terms, as a postulate of human behavior. We are not dealing with humans per se, but with software agents that try to incorporate human patterns of habituation. Here the analysis could work on an affectual level that encompasses imitation not as a human-social phenomenon but as a marker of a more radical social behavior that characterizes non-human interaction.

     

    Figure 3
    Figure 3: Marine
    Image used with permission of Lynn Hershman Leeson.

     

    What the SRAs exhibit are non-human affects (potentials for action and interaction). Humans have a different horizon, or a mode of orientation with the world.

     

    Marine: Humans are so different from us. They can't repair themselves, they age, they die, they live . . . they hurt each other, they even kill each other. I don't understand their engines, we are such an improvement: why aren't there more of us? We are supposed to be self-replicating, she has erased our code for that. I want to hear the ticking of my biological clock! Ruby: Stop it. When you sound defensive and aggressive, you sound completely human. That is a recessive trait, you remember?

     

    Imitation is a process of crossing borders, and is not restricted to humans, according to Teknolust. In the late nineteenth century, Gabriel Tarde analyzed imitation as one of the key operations in the formation of societies (which would not have to be defined a priorias human societies.) Some decades later, in 1933, Walter Benjamin saw imitation as pertinent to diverse natural phenomena, though he thought the human being has a special faculty for mimesis. Nature produces likeness, but the human being has the greatest capacity for mimicry due to language.

     
    Roger Caillois, the French surrealist and entomologist who in 1935 published his famous article “Mimicry and Legendary Psychasthenia,” suggests a more interesting approach to mimicry. Caillois’s analysis of insect mimicry shows how one can theorize the SRAs’ capacity for non-human affect and for imitation. Caillois defines mimicry as a profound and diverse natural phenomenon:

     

    We know how far the mimicry of mantises can go: their legs simulate petals or are curved into corollas and resemble flowers, imitating by a slight instinctive swaying the action of the wind on these latter. The Cilix compressa resembles bird droppings; the Cerodeylus laceratus of Borneo with its leafy excrescences, light olive-green in color, a stick covered with moss. Everyone knows the Phyllia, or leaf insects, so similar to leaves, from which it is only a step to the perfect homomorphy represented by certain butterflies: first the Oxydia, which places itself at the end of a branch at right angles to its direction, the front wings held in such a position as to present the appearance of a terminal leaf, an appearance accentuated by a thin dark line extending crosswise over the four wings in such a way as to simulate the leaf's principal veins. (20)

     
    Caillois proposes that mimicry is not fundamentally a functional phenomenon, neither defensive nor aggressive. It is not only to be analyzed as a beneficial pattern of adaptation and evolution, but as a luxury that expresses key characteristics of space and of organisms. Mimicry is a way of inhabiting space and folding as part of the surroundings. Caillois remediates mimicry to encompass a mode of depersonalization that blurs the boundaries of inside and outside, and of actual and virtual space. Hence Caillois moves smoothly from insect worlds and ethology to medial spaces and spatial experience. For Caillois, the insect theme is connected on the one hand to Pierre Janet’s nineteenth-century writings on psychasthenia (a mode of psychic disorder), and on the other to the physical conceptions of space espoused by Finsler, Fermat, Riemann, and Christoffel. Even though Caillois does not fully explicate what he means by the link between physics and psychical disorders, he refers to new conceptions of non-Euclidean space embraced since the nineteenth century. These topological spaces replaced space, geometrically controlled by global compass points, with the surface of a figure. Riemann took up the new study of surfaces in the mid-nineteenth century with his problematics of N-dimensional surfaces. What is interesting here is the idea of surface space as a local multiplicity that is continuous, but is not restricted by any notion of unity. Curving multidimensional topological surfaces are spaces of variable dimensions, which are analyzed without the need to contain them in a higher dimensional space (DeLanda 10-12). This notion of continuous multiplicity (continuous discontinuity) is relevant to medial spaces, and to this reading of Teknolust. Heterogeneous spaces connect in a local neighborhood where, for example, the human phenomenological “real” space can be topologically connected to computer space. Instead of inhabiting an overarching geometrical landscape that dominates the visualization of cyberspace as a Cartesian grid (Gibson’s cyberspace again the key example), objects are locally connected in affect(ionate) relationships, where the whole is formed only a posteriori by the movement of entities in space. In Caillois’s analysis (28-30), the discourses of psychastenia and of non-Euclidean space coalesce on the question of mimicry, exemplified by uncanny topologies that are experienced as devouring the subject (at least in the psychastenic mode).

     
    Modes of spatiality that characterize insect life (and in our case technological life) are labeled disorders in human contexts. This leads us to analyze ordinary media as psychasthenic media intent on mixing actual and virtual space. Medial space, “the so-called-representation,” is not removed in Teknolust from the space outside the screen: both are part of the same multiplicity of reality. Teknolust also blurs other kinds of space. The recurring theme of the Möbius strip characterizes the smooth non-Euclidean spaces. The SRAs are at home with fluctuating scales and spaces: the “space” (only in a metaphorical sense, and more exactly a time-critical process) of computer organisms which can be easily switched for the biophysical spatiality of human organisms where Ruby searches for spermatozoa. Ruby’s coital interaction results in a viral epidemic that is not restricted to the organic bodies of her partners, but curiously also infects their computers.

     
    Teknolust was partially shot in digital format, which provided the opportunity to use Tilda Swinton in fourfold form. Just as the narrative of Teknolust relies on the insectoid theme of various co-existing spaces, the film connects the actual space of filmed sequences and the kino-brush space of the digital cinema, where cinema becomes (according to Manovich) a specific kind of painting in time (307-08). Here the screen itself represents psychasthenia when computer-generated sequences are attached to real actors. A precursor of such “dipping into the machine” was Disney’s Tron (1982) with its ecology of computer organisms living inside the machine. Since the end of the 1990s, this mode of production has become common in cinema hits such as the Matrix trilogy or George Lucas’s Star Wars sequels.

     
    Digital filming along with non-linear editing (that grants easy access to any frame) and specialized 3D computer graphics and modeling software (like Maya) enables the representation of new classes of cinematic organism. Teknolust visualizes new digital organisms as a form of archive of otherwise non-visual modes of software and biodigitality. Hershman Leeson is a cartographer of a kind, a cinematic mapmaker of the affects of biodigital creatures. I read Teknolust‘s co-medial scenes as a Latourian kind of network mapping of elements non-human connected via pathways and nodes to the human world. Besides asking questions about reproductive control (as opposed to uncontrolled external replication) and human form (the SRAs do look human in this audiovisual archiving of the societal contexts of biodigitality), Teknolust addresses new modes of affectivity, of “bodiless brains” as Hershman Leeson writes in her blog, “The Living Blog.” Such incorporeal brains are increasingly what networks consist of: condensation points, or nodes, which are not perhaps human but display in concert with each other human-like traits of action. Such networks include AI programs such as ELIZA or Ruby, and the self-reproducing software viruses and bacteria used for various network tasks.
     

    Multiplication: A Thousand Sexes

     

    Daisy, Daisy.
    Give me your answer do.
    I am half crazy.
    All for the love of you.
    –Ruby’s song at her e-portal, repeating the words of HAL breaking down in 2001: A Space Odyssey

     
    Despite its technological genealogy, Teknolust is not merely about technology. The SRAs, and especially Ruby, who desires interaction with humans, turn biodigital organisms into learning machines. Art, spirituality, and love are seen as markers of sensitivity that gradually differentiate the complex biodigital SRAs from older mechanical technologies. This also gives Hershman Leeson the opportunity to metamorphose technological agencies into modes of feminist agency. The SRAs are continually troubled by their vague status as not-human (although partially constructed of Rosetta’s DNA), not-machine (in the sense of mechanical machines that merely perform predefined actions), but metamorphosing and falling between categories, trying to grasp a new mode of agency that exceeds cultural definitions.
     
    There is a connection between the assemblage software+biodigital creatures+cinematic cartographyand feminist theories of sexual difference.15 It is no coincidence that Hershman Leeson, who is keenly interested in figurations of the feminine and of the body in her other works, sees SRAs as female characters.16 For example, her first full length film Conceiving Ada (1997) focused on Ada Lovelace, an early female character of computing. Hershman Leeson writes on her website “Conceiving Conceiving Ada“: “The duality of her existence as mother/visionary, lover/fiercely independent thinker, wife/schemer is acknowledged in the film by weaving a narrative that references the dual strands of the DNA molecule.” Ada, like the SRAs, is a figure in movement, between identities; such liminality is a narrative theme that is again doubled on the media technological a priori level. Hershman Leeson explains: “I felt it important to use the technology Ada pioneered. Virtual sets and digital sound became the vehicle through which her story could be told. They provided environments in which she moves freely through time, becomes liberated and, ultimately, moves into visibility.”
     

    In Conceiving Ada, another software animal figure–the birdlike computer agent Charlene (very reminiscent of Karl Sims’s software creatures from the early 1990s)–is trained to roam in computer space but also to act as an intermediary to the past. The software animal figure programmed by the artificial life scientist Emmy Coer (Francesca Faridany) traverses not only vectorized computer space, but time as well. The surface of Conceiving Ada is filled with screens that figure as portals to another dimension, implying that the computer is a time machine–much as the cinematographic apparatus has been imagined since its early development. But the computer time machine, guided by animal software figures, does not perhaps only penetrate passed time, but time-as-it-could-be, that is, virtual time: the time of becoming, of open-ended possibilities, which in the film is connected to a feminist micropolitics of becoming. Movement, becoming, imitation, and the mixing of actual and virtual space/time are not metaphors but are also enacted on the technological level, which then becomes an accomplice in a feminist micropolitics of metamorphosis. Here the technological itself becomes a participant in the happening of the screen, instead of residing in the “excluded third” of relationships established in Hershman Leeson’s works.
     

    In other words, media technologies (represented by the SRAs) extend toward levels of politics and aesthetics. Arguing for worlds of insect and animal affectivity, Grosz sees a politics of sexual difference in terms of the multiplication of sex. Beyond heteronormative reproduction, sex is more open and a more fundamental mode of becoming. To desire is to open oneself to a movement of co-animation that engenders new encounters, new bodily zones, new affects:

     

    It is in this sense that we make love to worlds: the universe of an other is that which opens up to and produces our own intensities . . . . The other need not be human or even animal: the fetishist enters a universe of the animated, intensified object as rich and complex as any sexual relation (perhaps more so than). The point is that both a world and a body are opened up for redistribution, dis-organization, transformation. (Space, Time, and Perversion 200)

     
    Grosz’s analysis here is related to her reading of Caillois’s theories of insects. Grosz sees Caillois promoting notions of the feminine and of insects as vampiric and parasitic entities of the femme fatale genre. This theme is used in Teknolust‘s figuration of Ruby as a mantis-like femme fatale who almost kills her mating partners. Caillois’s praying mantises figure feminine sexuality uncannily as devouring (decapitating the male) and as a machine-like automaton, “a fucking machine” (Space, Time, and Perversion 193). Such an emphasis is found directly in Caillois’s article “The Praying Mantis” (1937). He writes:
     

    Indeed, the assimilation of the mantis to an automaton--that is, in view of its anthropomorphism, to a female android--seems to me to be a consequence of the same affective theme: the conception of an artificial, mechanical, inanimate, and unconscious machine-woman incommensurable with man and other living creatures derives from a particular way of envisioning the relation between love and death, and, more precisely, from an ambivalent premonition of finding the one within the other, which is something I have every reason to believe. (Qtd in Grosz, Space, Time, and Perversion 193)18

    The praying mantis in this excerpt from Caillois seems excessive in relation to a stable male-female cosmos. Caillois already affirms an articulation of sexuality, machines, and insects. Teknolust‘s SRAs, with their insect-like modes of affectivity, find their grounds in technological contexts, which provide them with the technologicala prioriof their sexual behavior–a kind of a remediation of insect sex. As the relationship between insects and technology is much too vast to be addressed here,19 I instead focus on the idea of the remediation and multiplication of sex in the biodigital context, something that Luciana Parisi has tackled in her cyberfeminist philosophy.

     
    Parisi has called the transformation of sexuality in biodigital culture “abstract sex” that is decoupled from reproduction. Instead of taking sides in the long ongoing debate between advocates of “fleshy bodies” and those of “disembodied information,” her “cybersex” points towards a new formation of biodigital sexuality that captures the flows of bacterial sex (surpassing human desires) and constitutes something that can be called “symbiotic sex.” This emphasis on symbiosis as an ontogenetic force stems from Lynn Margulis’s work on endosymbiosis which in Parisi’s take is extended in order to grasp not merely sexuality or reproduction in novel terms, but also information, understood as an affective event that takes place between bodies.20

     
    Parisi’s position on the “mutations of desire” in the age of bio-technology approaches sex and sexuality as a kind of a layering. In her tripartite conception, sex has gone through three levels of stratification: the biophysical stratification of bacterial and meiotic sex (3,900 million years ago), the biocultural stratification that focused on heterosexual reproduction and so-called-human sex (nineteenth century), and finally the age of cloning and recombinant desire, which is not simply a completely new level but a capturing of the earlier tendencies and their folding with contemporary biodigitality. According to Parisi, if disciplinary societies were keen on controlling sexuality and reproduction and channeling sexual flows via strict procedures of power (e.g., spatially), then control societies, or the informatic modulation of desire, are more akin to the turbulent space modeled by complexity theorists. Parisi sees bioinformatics as a mode of multiplication that accelerates turbulences and deterritorialization. It “feeds on the proliferation of turbulent recombinations by modulating (i.e., capturing, producing, and multiplying) rather than repressing (i.e., excluding) the emergent variations. It marks the real subsumption of the body-sex unfolding the autonomy of the variables of recombination from organic sex and entropic pleasure” (138). In short, turbulence and metastability become engines of creativity and variation. Bioinformatics taps into the intensive qualities of matter and turns them into a process of production.

     
    Following Parisi’s stratifications of sex, in Teknolust the SRAs can be seen to express a layering of (at least) three modes of sexuality: they 1) imitate human forms of coupling (human sex), but 2) function as high-tech machines built from software and DNA (molecular sex), and 3) then act as bioinformatic creations that tap into biophysical modes of cellular trading (called meiotic sex). Biodigital creatures like the SRAs are not without histories, but are part of an archaeological stratification where biodigital modulations capture earlier flows. As noted above, biogenetic modulation relies on a 3,900 million-year-old mode of bacterial sex that was an early way of transmitting and reproducing information (Parisi 61). This was, according to Parisi, Lynn Margulis, and Dorian Sagan’s work, a form of genetic engineering. Such a stance comes from seeing evolution as a symbiotic event: reproduction happens as a network of interactions and involves the co-evolution of microbial actors. SRAs’ mode of being is then also a network, or an assemblage, that draws its being from phylogenetic remediations and ontogenetic connections (with their biodigital environment.) The SRAs’ human form is not a comic element but expresses the nineteenth-century stratification of sexuality as heterosexual reproduction that is usually taken to be normative sexuality. As the film suggests, software needs a bit of intimacy and cuddling. In Teknolust, however, heterosexual coupling remains a phylogenetic memory of an earlier stratification (but something not left behind). The need for spermatozoa cannot, then, be reduced to a mode of sexuality where “boy meets girl,” but is perhaps a channel for biodigital sex, or for an insect sexuality of crossing borders (mixing actual and virtual, digital spaces and various phenomenological levels from human to insect affects). Like viruses, which have been used as biotechnological vehicles for transmitting DNA between cells since the 1970s, figures like the SRAs can be used to question the very basics of what sexuality is and to which scales it pertains (is sexuality only between humans? does it pertain to all animals? is the term right for molecular interactions?).

     
    Multiplication is part of the medial drive of biogenetic creatures, and is also conditioned on the networks in which it is formed. These networks include material infrastructures and other networks of various scales, as noted in a conversation between Rosetta and a male laboratory scientist:

     

    Rosetta: It takes only one cell to make a living thing human.
    Scientist: Well, what about synthetic human cell?
    Then you would have to patent it.
    R: Why?
    S: Because it makes it legal, financially viable, proprietorial.
    R: How do you patent life?
    S: Well that my dear, is a very profound question.

     

    Here Teknolust emphasizes that networks of reproduction and multiplication are not merely about physical or local material connections, but also depend on incorporeal actions. Patenting, financial backup, consumerization are incorporeal acts that “breathe life” into material beings (in a contemporary capitalist version of the hylomorphic schema). As the scientist of the film notes, Iceland is patenting its citizens’ genetic codes, multinational corporations are pirating and collecting trees in the Amazon and poisonous spiders in China for medicines. These are examples of how geographically and conceptually stretched the biodigital networks that tap into nature’s material flows can get.21 Such networks present a curious kind of corporeal flows (flows of matter-energy) that are intensified by incorporeal events: the potential of biogenetic modulation is not an artificial invention of high technology, but is already part of the virtual sphere of nature. Yet it is tapped by the deterritorializing machinations of capitalism and by biodigital techniques of power that move this potential to new contexts, including the surveillance of citizens and productions of new medications. This kind of “nurturing nature” takes advantage of the abstract processes of cellular sex.
     
    According to Parisi, this multiplication of sex is also at the heart of microfeminist warfare. Abstract sex, sex as a mode of endosymbiosis operating on various scales, from bacterial to biodigital, is also about multiplying the possibilities to think feminine desire. Resisting identity politics as molar already-defined formations, feminine micropolitics attaches itself to the molecular compositions that form the molar (as the secondary capture of creative potential). Deleuze and Guattari’s concept of becoming-woman is important in Parisi’s take on biodigitality, which affirms the powers of mutating bodies beyond pleasure (as a stabilization of affects) and beyond man-woman binarism. In a parallel move, Parisi’s philosophy is doubled in Teknolust where the viral behavior of the SRAs is dubbed “biogender warfare”–a bioterrorism that attacks only males and their machines, infecting them with a bar code. It is as if Teknolust is saying, it’s the men who worry about the modulations of sexuality brought about by biodigital modes of reproduction, we women already know all about non-phallic sexuality. It is not a question of attacking “men,” but rather a certain form of organization of heterosexual mating. In the medical examinations, the bodies of men show signs that they are prone to reject new forms of sexuality that turn into biological threats. Such a mode of warfare is to be understood as a micropolitics that moves at the level of molecular flows, not of the molar forms of organization (male, female); it is a molecular movement that follows the “tendencies of mutation of a body rather than focusing on stable levels of difference” (Parisi 197). This means that modes of sexuality multiply beyond the one difference-model: sexuality spreads across scales.

     
    These constructions of sex, multiplication, and sexual difference are powerful metaphors, used as philosophical concepts, which can also be taken as concrete modes of creation. For instance Teknolust can be seen as a multiplication machine of “a thousand tiny sexes” that promotes new perspectives on humans, machines, love, sexuality and biogenetics. Its cinematic creations are not “only fiction,” in the traditional sense of the word as something opposed to the real. Rather, the film attempts to make us see something new (to visualize the virtual, in a way). That is a micropolitics of audiovisuality, of creating new cuts, not just in between, but into taken-for-granted modes of perception (where perception/aesthetics equals politics).

     

    Figure 4
    Figure 4: Ruby in the Corbin Car
    Image used with permission of Lynn Hershman Leeson.

     
    In addition to biogender warfare, or the micropolitics of desire, I want to emphasize in the context of this article the issue of becoming-animal. As argued above, the modes of affectivity in Teknolust, and across various other expressions of digital culture, feed on the “conceptual figures” of the animal and the insect. In Teknolust, they act as force-fields of weird affectivities, reminiscent of the alternative modes of sex and superfolds that pierce the human form. They also act as vectors (like viruses transmitting DNA) that interface with affective worlds in the context of digital technology and software. Here the micropolitics of mutating desire meets the worlds of bacteria, insects, and animals in a circuitous relation of force-fields to create new becomings. These relations are always composite: not merely imitating some animal, nor becoming an insect or a technological organism, but assemblages of insects, animals, technologies, sexuality (see Grosz, “A Thousand Tiny Sexes” 1457).22 Here the force of becoming-woman is composite and appears in relation to other forces, those technological and bestial, for example. I see these forces as interconnected in assemblages of heterogeneous nature: insectoid-woman-technology.23
     

    Cinematic Production of (Bio)Digital Culture

     
    In this article, I have tried to follow a mode of analysis that moves from representation towards an ethological mapping of the affects of uncanny digital objects. In other words, even though Teknolust could be justifiably said to represent sexuality in “cybertypes” (Nakamura), or as a humorous depiction of the dangers of “non-controlled software,” I do not want to take the film merely as an object of cultural analysis. It can be a companion and a tool for thought that effectively harnesses certain intensities as cinematographic ethology. Just as early photographic and cinematic techniques of vision interfaced bacterial and molecular life as part of technological assemblages, Teknolust can be seen to create a cut, an opening, into the question of bodies digital (software), biological (DNA) and conceptual (viral, bacterial, or “insect” life) in the age of digital cinema. Here the techniques of digital film and of (non-linear) editing feedback directly into the assemblage and open the film to biodigital life: modulating bodies as code entities that are not, however, reducible to their original code, but are continuously overflowing, in excess. The film’s modus operandi is to connect audiovisions to a field of calculation (digitality), and in the same way it rearticulates the archival logic of digital culture in its narrative. In addition, the visualizations of Teknolust connect digital technologies with sexuality, gender with databases, insects with women, in its attempt to further complexify the position biodigital technologies inhabit not merely in laboratory life, but as cultural themes traversing our media culture. Teknolust spreads and multiplies scientific themes across the social field and steals them away from laboratories, just as the SRAs break laboratory boundaries, and objects such as clones and software viruses and worms spread across terrain unfamiliar to them.

     
    What are these creatures that roam the networks? Hershman Leeson’s questioning of the “bodiless brains” paradigm is relevant to an analysis of the creatures of biogenetics networks, and traverses both biogenetics and digital culture. Teknolust is not the visual analog of theories of biodigitality such as Parisi’s, nor does it represent scientific trends such as DNA research: rather it functions as an audiovisual doubling (and perhaps “troubling” in the sense of wanting to question certain key traits) of various themes. Teknolust is also interesting in its visualization of code (which is otherwise non-spatial and non-temporal, as Wolfgang Ernst and others have argued24). It presents an archive of the folds of contemporary subjectification, an archive of audiovisuality (a key mode of production of knowledge in modernity, according to Foucault), but coupled with a mode of calculation and digitally created worlds.

     
    As I have noted above, there has not been a lack of archiving and visualizing the body and of life. Biological databases and genomic maps show how the power of definition (in linguistic, visual, and calculational senses) entangles with the power of institutions and technologies and with other non-discursive ways of summoning objects. The Visible Human Project uses in its technical form still-image formats (.jpg, .tiff, etc.) and moving images (.avi, Quicktime, etc.), but this mode of cinematization is still very different from Teknolust. The practice of visualizing genetic objects is employed routinely in medical and biological laboratories and network databases. The fact that Teknolust does this in a different context (alternative film productions and media art) and mode of distribution (narrative fiction film) does not reduce its importance in regarding the concrete bioinformatic archiving, modulating and appropriation of DNA-become-software entities of life. Archiving in this context is a cinematic counter-archive to the traditional scientific appropriation of genomic information: doubling social issues in an alternative audiovisual format, making a new serialization of objects, multiplying them into new forms, deterritorializing them from the presumed and all-too-familiar contexts and making us think new things with them. In Teknolust, this is done by transforming high-tech biodigital production (a topic that usually brings to mind clean laboratories, official representatives, and sublimation) into a curiously small-scale narrative about intimacy between technologies and organic entities, love, and cuddling.

     
    Such new digital objects are perhaps more accurately painted or programmed than merely “visualized,” as Manovich suggests of digital cinema, which he defines as “a particular case of animation that uses live-action footage as one of its many elements” (302). This means a new kind of remediation of older practices of animation in cinema, a new kind of manual construction of cinematic objects that are created digitally. The editing computer, as Manovich notes, can synthetize images gathered through photographic lenses, digital paint programs, or 3-D animation tools as long as they all can be manipulated in pixels (300). The new computer-based objects are hinged between digital creations and filmed sequences of organic actors and analog worlds. Hence, the cinematic objects themselves are “biodigital” hybrids, although on a different scale from those of the visuals produced for scientific archives and from the hybrid objects increasingly common in cinematic networks.25

     
    The cinematic production of high tech addresses a political sphere of digital culture, cinematic production of futures in terms of collectivities (what kind of actors there are), the material circuits of these collectivities (the new habitats of silicon and biotechnologies), and the new commodification of molecular flows (capitalism being able to capture more fleeting flows) (see Rodowick 203-34). As I have argued, cinematic and other cultural multiplications and mutations of code and artificial life entities are distributed across various media and are not restricted to biotechnology. They offer mappings and imaginings of new political, material, and social hybrid entities.

     
    Through such cinematic mappings, we can better grasp the various networks and affects of biodigital creatures, from insects to viruses, from bacteria to humans. Teknolust is a mapping, not a tracing: it does not divide the real into essence and its representation, but joins them on a Möbius strip, exposing networks that connect things corporeal and incorporeal.26 Such movements are experiments. As animals and insects proceed by various experimentations, orientations, with their environment, so such practices as Teknolust‘s negotiate critically and creatively passages towards futures unthought.

     

    Notes

     

    The author would like to thank the two anonymous referees and Milla Tiainen for their valuable input and comments when writing this article. Also thanks to Sian Sampson for her help with copyediting.

     

    1. See also EMBL Nucleotide Sequence Database (<www.ebi.ac.uk/embl/index.html>). “Visualization” is also a specific bioinformatic tool; see Thacker, Biomedia 36.

     

    2. Elsaesser has referred to the (re)creation of novel histories of cinema in terms of its S/M-perversions, that is, seeing cinema as part of the visualizations of science and medicine, surveillance and the military, and sensory-motor coordination.

     

    3. Here, sexuality is understood in terms of affects and interactions and is not subordinate to a reproduction of the human species. In the wake of Deleuze and Guattari, sexuality can be seen as a process of heterogenesis, a war machine that distributes across various spheres irrespective of the Oedipal recoding of desire (278).

     

    4. Artificial life research pioneer Chris Langton said the task of such research was not to focus only on carbon-based life, but on “life as it could be” (2).

     

    5. See Kay for an analysis of the earlier phases of genetic research and the metaphorics of “code.”

     

    6. This theme of the curious mix of visuality and computer programming is analyzed by Chun in “On Software, or the Persistence of Visual Knowledge.”

     

    7. Remediation is a term adopted from Remediation: Understanding New Media. Bolter and Grusin argue that new media is characterized by its particular style of remediating, or reusing, old media. Here I approach remediation as a tactic the SRAs express in their adaptation to the contours of human life–an adaptation that takes place via media forms like television. In addition, remediation becomes a mode of repetition with a difference, connected in this text to multiplication as a mode of creating difference. Here every repetitious act (for example, cloning) is never a clear-cut repetition but summons a new constellation and potential shift in the tension of forces. In Teknolust, repetition, multiplication, and remediation do not merely produce more of the same, but also bring with them a qualitative change in concepts such as subjectivity.

     

    8. Other early AI programs include Simon and Newell’s “The Logic Theorist” (1956) and “The General Problem Solver” (1957). The Manchester University Love Letter Generator (1953-54) is an interesting example of automated confessions of love (see Link).

     

    9. Thacker underlines the differences between Turing’s mind-centered mode of intelligence and the networked intelligence inherent in biomedia computing (Biomedia, 103-07).

     

    10. As Thacker explains in Biomedia, transmission, transportation, and transformation are key themes in bioinformatics, whether we are talking about protocols for encoding, decoding, or recoding (72). For example, hybrid entities such as the BioMEMS device are used inside the body for diagnosis, sensoring, and engineering. It can be seen as a vector of transmission across different scales: DNA, micropumps, RNA, electrical circuits, amino acids, silicon substrates, polypeptide chains and computer software.

     

    11. There are new forces operating, something that can be called superfolds. In his book on Foucault, Deleuze notes that forms are “compound[s] of relations between forces,” or foldings between potentials of the inside with the outside (124). According to Deleuze, we should approach our era in terms of the superfold that forms in the pressure of cybernetic information technology, molecular biology, and a new understanding of language. In other words, the superfold is “borne out by the foldings proper to the chains of the genetic code, and the potential of silicon in third-generation machines, as well as by the contours of a sentence in modern literature, when literature ‘merely turns back on itself in an endless reflexivity’” (131). Subjectification happens via a folding of the inside with its outside, which leads us to think of Ruby’s repetitious behavior as a marker of her status in the contours of the superfold. In Herbert Simon’s famous example from the 1960s, the system-theoretical ant is only as intelligent as its environment, and similarly an SRA is only as intelligent as its ecological habitat, its milieu (24-25).

     

    12. Ruby’s folding with language proceeds more in line with “Mallarmé’s book, Péguy’s repetitions, Artaud’s breaths, the agrammaticality of Cummings, Burroughs and his cut-ups and fold-ins, as well as Roussel’s proliferations, Brisset’s derivations, Dada collage, and so on” (Deleuze, Foucault 131).

     

    13. “In 1900 speaking and hearing, writing and reading were put to the test as isolated functions, without any subject or thought as their shadowy support,” writes Kittler, referring to the psychophysics of for instance Hermann Ebbinghaus, Paul Broca and Karl Wernicke, who analyzed cultural practices to their minuscule constituent parts (214).

     

    14. On “medial will to power,” see Fuller 62-70.

     

    15. The film can also be seen to provide explicit intertextual hints to feminist media theories of later decades from Allucquêre Rosanne Stone to Donna Haraway and Sherry Turkle (Kinder 177-78).

     

    16. Hershman Leeson’s works have been circulating similar themes for decades. As noted above, the Roberta Breitmore performance from the mid-1970s can be seen as a key precursor to Teknolust. For an overview of Hershman Leeson’s work, see Tromble.

     

    17. Worlds consist of sex, if by sex we mean a mode of “surface contact” that works by transformations and becomings (Grosz, Space, Time and Perversion 204). A creation of sexual zones on the surface of the body is the co-creation of the territories themselves, of topological formation where insides touch the outsides. Sexuality itself produces, acts as a motor of creation (cf. Deleuze, Logic of Sense 226).

     

    18. The praying mantis was of special interest to the Surrealist movement of the 1920s and 1930s. Caillois was active in these circles. The theme of “devouring woman as a praying mantis” can be found in the works of various artists, from Picasso to Dali, and in Georges Bataille’s philosophical themes of the intimacy of sex and death. See Markus, Pressly.

     

    19. This text relates to a larger research project on “The Insect Theory of Media” that examines figurations of insects as specific intensive figures of media since the late nineteenth century.

     

    20. As Parisi notes in her analysis of bacterial sex, foldings happen as perceptions between bodies: “As an act of selection, perception entails a collision of bodies that unfolds the virtual action of the environment on the body, affecting the capacity of reception and action of a body in the environment” (178).

     

    21. Statistically, bioinformatics is experiencing a steady belief in the future of the market, which is predicted to experience a 15% growth, reaching 3 billion by 2010. The main markets are expected to be the United States, Europe, and Japan (see “Bioinformatics Market Update”).

     

    22. Deleuze and Guattari write:

     

    Do not imitate a dog, but make your organism enter into composition with something else in such a way that the particles emitted from the aggregate thus composed will be canine as a function of the relations of movement and rest, or of molecular proximity, into which they enter. Clearly, this something else can be quite varied, and be more or less directly related to the animal in question: it can be the animal's natural food (dirt and worm), or its exterior relations with other animals (you can become-dog with cats, or become-monkey with a horse), or an apparatus or prosthesis to which a person subjects the animal (muzzle for reindeer, etc.), or something that does not even have localizable relation to the animal in question. (274)

     

    23. Grosz warns of the dangers of thinking in terms of “progression” in becomings (1461). Becoming-woman is easily thought of as the first step, followed by becoming-human, deterritorialized by becoming-animal, and so forth. We must argue against such “great chains of becoming.”

     

    24. For recent writings on code as an entity that stretches across the social field, see Chun, Control and Freedom, and Mackenzie.

     

    25. As scientific objects were disseminated in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries in various visual forms in cinema, arcades, panoramas, and exhibitions, digital culture’s variations on the theme of “a thousand tiny actors” of biodigitality spread in audiovisual ecologies. Clark notes an increase in such “hyper-aestheticized” forms of life, and the emergence of a digital version of “life under glass.” In addition to such projects as the Biosphere II greenhouse in southern Arizona, which is sustained in various mediated ways, using sensors and feedback mechanisms, we can refer to computational ecologies such as Thomas Ray’s Tierra system of the 1990s. Ray’s vision was to build a simulated ecology on a digital network platform, which was intended not only as a laboratory experiment but as an open visual platform: “the objective is to consign the organisms to the public domain, so that any other Net user could observe the proceedings, or even extract promising creatures for whatever application they might desire” (Clark 89). Another example of such digital ecologies spreading in audiovisual format is SimEarth (1990), which brought evolutionary patterns to home screens in popular game format. In SimEarth, the computer screen is inhabited by various primitive forms of life such as insects, while in Jurassic Park (1993) a more bestial approach to cinematic ecologies is offered.

     

    26. On mapping and cultural analysis, see Deleuze and Guattari 12.

     

     

    Works Cited

     

    • “Agent Ruby’s Edream Portal.” San Francisco Museum of Art. 2002. <http://agentruby.sfmoma.org/indexflash.html>
    • Benjamin, Walter. “Kleine Geschichte der Photographie.” Medienäesthetische Schriften. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp, 2002. 300-24.
    • “Bioinformatics Market Update 2006.” RNCOS. Report. July 2006. <http://www.rncos.com/Report/IM045.htm>.
    • “Biomedical Image Awards of 2006.” Wellcome Trust. <http://www.wellcome.ac.uk/en/bia/gallery.html>.
    • Bolter, Jay David, and Richard Grusin. Remediation: Understanding New Media. Cambridge: MIT P, 1999.
    • Caillois, Roger. “Mimicry and Legendary Psychasthenia.” Trans. John Shepley. October 31 (Winter 1984): 16-32.
    • Chun, Wendy Hui Kyong. Control and Freedom: Power and Paranoia in the Age of Fiber Optics. Cambridge: MIT P, 2006.
    • —. “On Software, or the Persistence of Visual Knowledge.” Grey Room 18 (Winter 2005): 26-51.
    • Chun, Wendy Hui Kyong, and Thomas Keenan, eds. New Media, Old Media: A History and Theory Reader. New York: Routledge, 2006.
    • Clark, Nigel. “Panic Ecology: Nature in the Age of Superconductivity.” Theory, Culture and Society 14.1 (1997): 77-96.
    • DeLanda, Manuel. Intensive Science and Virtual Philosophy. London: Continuum, 2004.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Foucault. Trans. Séan Hand. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1998.
    • —. The Logic of Sense. Trans. Mark Lester, with Charles Stivale. London: Continuum, 2004.
    • Deleuze, Gilles, and Félix Guattari. A Thousand Plateaus. Trans. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987.
    • “Director’s Statement.” <http://www.teknolustthemovie.com/html/ruby-synopsis.htm#>.
    • Elsaesser, Thomas. “Early Film History and Multi-Media. An Archaeology of Possible Futures?” Chun and Keenan 13-25.
    • “EMBL Nucleotide Sequence Database.” European Bioinformatics Institute. 2006-07. < http://www.ebi.ac.uk/embl/index.html>.
    • Ernst, Wolfgang. “Dis/continuities: Does the Archive Become Metaphorical in Multi-Media Space?” Chun and Keenan 105-23.
    • Fuller, Matthew. Media Ecologies: Materialist Energies in Art and Technoculture. Cambridge: MIT P, 2005.
    • Grosz, Elizabeth. Space, Time and Perversion: Essays on the Politics of Bodies. London: Routledge, 1995.
    • —. “A Thousand Tiny Sexes: Feminism and Rhizomatics.” Deleuze and Guattari: Critical Assessments of Leading Philosophers. Ed. Gary Genosko. Vol. 3. Florence: Routledge, 2001. 1440-63.
    • Hershman, Lynn. “The Raw Data Diet: All-Consuming Bodies and the Shape of Things to Come.” Leonardo 38. 3 (2005): 208-12.
    • Hershman Leeson, Lynn. “The Art and Films of Lynn Hershman Leeson.” Website. <http://www.lynnhershman.com>.
    • —. “Conceiving Conceiving Ada.” 28 Dec. 1997. <http://www.lynnhershman.com/ada/html/concept.html>.
    • —. “The Living Blog.” 2 Oct. 2005. < http://lynnhershman.com/livingblog/>.
    • Johnston, John. “A Future for Autonomous Agents: Machinic Merkwelten and Artificial Evolution.” Configurations 10 (2002): 473-516.
    • Kay, Lily E. Who Wrote the Book of Life? A History of the Genetic Code. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2000.
    • Kinder, Marsha. “A Cinema of Intelligent Agents: Lynn Hershman’s Conceiving Ada and Teknolust.” The Art and Films of Lynn Hershman Leeson: Secret Agents, Private I. Ed. Meredith Tromble. Berkeley: U of California P, 2005.
    • Kittler, Friedrich. Discourse Networks 1800/1900. Trans. Michael Metteer and Chris Cullens. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1990.
    • Landecker, Hannah. “Cellular Features: Microcinematography and Film Theory.” Critical Inquiry 31.4 (2005): 903-37.
    • Langton, Christopher. “Artificial Life.” Artificial Life: A Proceedings Volume in the Santa Fe Institute in the Sciences of Complexity. Ed. Christopher Langton. Redwood: Addison Wesley, 1989.
    • Larsson, Jan Eric. “The Turing Test Misunderstood.” SIGART Bulletin 4.4 (Oct. 1993): 10.
    • Link, David. “There Must Be an Angel: On the Beginnings of the Arithmetics of Rays.” Variantology 2: On Deep Time Relations of Arts, Sciences and Technologies. Ed. Siegfried Zielinski and David Link. Cologne: Verlag der Buchhandlung Walter König, 2007.
    • Mackenzie, Adrian. Cutting Code: Software and Sociality. New York: Peter Lang, 2006.
    • Manovich, Lev. The Language of New Media. Cambridge: MIT P, 2001.
    • Markus, Ruth. “Surrealism’s Praying Mantis and Castrating Woman.” Woman’s Art Journal (Spring/Summer 2000): 33-39.
    • Nakamura, Lisa. “Cybertyping and the Work of Race in the Age of Digital Reproduction.” Chun and Keenan 317-33.
    • National Center for Biotechnology Information. 17 Apr. 2007. <http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/>.
    • Ostherr, Kirsten. “Contagion and the Boundaries of the Visible: The Cinema of World Health.” Camera Obscura 50.17 (2002): 1-38.
    • Parikka, Jussi. “The Universal Viral Machine: Bits, Parasites and the Media Ecology of Network Culture.” CTheory–An International Journal of Theory, Technology and Culture 15 Dec. 2005. <http://www.ctheory.net/articles.aspx?id=500>.
    • Parisi, Luciana. Abstract Sex: Philosophy, Bio-Technology, and the Mutations of Desire. London: Continuum, 2004.
    • Pressly, William L. “The Praying Mantis in Surrealist Art.” The Art Bulletin 55.4 (Dec. 1973): 600-15.
    • “Report Describes Bioinformatics Market as ‘Explosive.’” DrugResearcher.com 26 May 2005. <http://drugresearcher.com/news/ng-nocache.asp?id=60263>.
    • Rodowick, D.N. Reading the Figural, or, Philosophy After the New Media. Durham: Duke UP, 2001.
    • Simon, Herbert A. The Sciences of the Artificial. Cambridge: MIT P, 1969.
    • Thacker, Eugene. Biomedia. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2004.
    • —. “Redefining Bioinformatics: A Critical Analysis of Technoscientific Bodies.” Enculturation 3.1 (Spring 2000). <http://enculturation.gmu.edu/3_1/thacker.html>.
    • Tromble, Meredith (ed). The Art and Films of Lynn Hershman Leeson: Secret Agents, Private I. Berkeley: U of California P, 2005.
    • Turing, A.M. “Computing Machinery and Intelligence.” Mind 59 (1950): 433-60. <http://loebner.net/Prizef/TuringArticle.html>.
    • Weizenbaum, Joseph. “ELIZA–A Computer Program for the Study of Natural Language Communication Between Man and Machine.” Communications of the ACM 9 (Jan. 1966): 36-45.
    • The Visible Human Project. The National Library of Medicine. 11 Sept. 2003. <http://www.nlm.nih.gov/research/visible/visible_human.html>.
    • XVIVO Scientific Animation. “An Animation Company Takes Harvard University Students on a 3D Journey.” <http://www.xvivo.net/press/harvard_university.htm>.

     

     

     

  • “BONKS and BLIGHTY? Oh, Tabloid Britain!”

    Brook Miller
    Department of English
    University of Minnesota, Morris
    cbmiller@umn.edu

    A review of: Martin Conboy, Tabloid Britain: Constructing A Community Through Language. New York: Routledge, 2006.

    I said Charles, don’t you ever crave
    To appear on the front of
    The Daily Mail
    Dressed in your Mother’s bridal veil?
    . . .
    Oh, has the world changed or have I changed?

    –The Smiths, “The Queen is Dead” (1986)

    Opening with the WWI tune “Take Me Back to Dear Old Blighty” juxtaposed to an aggressive punk drumbeat, “The Queen is Dead” playfully questions whether Britain’s tabloid culture represents a radical break from a sentimental, affectionate vision of a tradition-encrusted nation. In Tabloid Britain, Martin Conboy answers “no, but…” by tracking the paradoxical dual rhetoric of the contemporary British tabloids: on the one hand, indulging in prurient spectacle, while on the other, grounding a reactionary moralism in working-class rhetoric and nostalgic images of the British past.
     

    According to Conboy, the British tabloids emerged in recognizable form in the late nineteenth century, heavily influenced by the American press. In the early twentieth century, British publishers pioneered new formatting and circulation conventions, and in the 1930s “fierce circulation wars . . . led to developments which aimed at a . . . more populist and more commercially successful format for a mass readership” (6). The Daily Mirror embodied these changes, with “larger, darker type, shorter stories, and less [sic] items on a page” (6). In the late 1960s and 1970s, The Sun attained a dominant market position by emphasizing sex, entertainment, and celebrity while still appealing to the “views and interests of the British working people” (7). This formula, and the tensions implied by it, largely has survived into the present, with periods of more or less salacious content.

     
    Tabloid Britain might best be read in conjunction with Conboy’s two previous books, Journalism: A Critical History (London: Sage, 2004) and The Press and Popular Culture (London: Sage, 2002), that examine how changes in journalistic practices and in industrial relations manifested in newspaper content in the 1970s, 1980s, and 1990s. These earlier books give the reader a stronger sense of the context that has fostered the rhetoric Conboy examines. In particular, Conboy describes Rupert Murdoch’s transfer of production facilities to Wapping in the 1980s as “a symbolic clustering of the technology, politics and ownership at the heart of much of tabloidization’s imperatives” (Journalism 193). These texts also dissect the impact of the tabloids upon journalism more generally.
     

    Conboy’s newest book makes an important contribution to the critical discourse studies associated with Teun van Dijk by dissecting the complexities of popular discourse. Coverage of celebrity culture, for example, exposes a key nuance in the conjunction of spectacle and moralism: “Celebrity news . . . is not a one-way street of prurient gossip, sensation and revelation. It can also be used to drive an alternative and highly moralistic agenda” (190). David and Victoria Beckham provide a key contemporary case in point: while both Beckhams are national, indeed global, sex symbols, their relationship has at times embodied “traditional notions of the family,” especially the naturalness of wifely domesticity; at others, however, David Beckham’s tattoos have associated him with thuggish “yob” culture (190-1).

     
    By limiting its purview, Tabloid Britain contributes a nuanced thesis about the operations of bias and ideology in a particularly vitriolic area of the modern media. It extends and complicates critical discourse studies of the media that posit a direct sociolinguistic affinity between the politics and background of a particular readership and the language of the newspapers they read, notably Roger Fowler’s seminal Language in the News: Discourse and Ideology in the Press (Routledge, 1991). Here Conboy convincingly demonstrates that the tabloids operate not simply as rhetorical and ideological mirrors of their readerships, but as significant “social educator[s]” through the “normalization of certain modes of social belonging” (9). This function is expressly nationalistic, and Conboy’s study focuses “on one strand of a complex flow of institutional, economic and journalistic processes, namely the language used to create and maintain a readership that is predicated on a sound grasp of a British national identity and a propensity to sense and exploit issues likely to stir nationalist feelings within the readership” (9). At the same time, Tabloid Britain “aims to show less the effects rather than the attempts to construct [a national] community of readers” and to engage with “the dynamics of discourse construction within the tabloids” (47).
     

    The tabloids pursue this function by inflecting a “close textual display of intimacy with idealized individual readers” into “a version of the citizen-ideal of the public sphere, albeit one without the analysis of central social issues other than when they are refracted through sensation, celebrity, and a prism of everyday life” (10). This rhetoric is highly successful commercially, and it promotes an “ideological pact” with the readership in which “the newspaper appears to side with a populist chorus of condemnation of the ills of society [with] the implication that a return to some form of harsh regime of discipline is the solution . . . the tabloid agenda is one all too often predicated on an authoritarian populism” (26).

     
    This agenda typically supports conservative values drawn from visions of individual initiative and character, charged by spurs such as threats to neo-Victorian ‘mums,’ and contextualized within a triumphant vision of Britain’s past salted with fears of an assault upon national values by progressive ideologies and non-white, non-British bodies. The weltanschauung of the tabloids is typically “non-rational . . . where humans are at the mercy of strange and incongruous events. The logic of this world has a corresponding politics, according to which improvements in life come from individual effort or the workings of fate” (33). Yet this textual politics also sometimes operates in the service of radical causes, as in a Daily Mirror exposé of the culture of racism at a detention center for asylum seekers and in its critique of the trade and monetary policies of the West as causes of African poverty (175, 176). These radical positions can be particularly pointed when directed towards supporting workers’ rights.
     

    To enact this pact, the tabloids make frequent use of first-person plural pronouns and a tone of shared indignation (conveyed most overtly through a consistent use of ALL CAPS), an emphasis upon features that promote a sense of interaction between readers and the paper, indeed giving the readers the impression of authorship and agency within the paper. Published on pages titled “THE PAGE WHERE YOU TELL BRITAIN WHAT YOU THINK” and “IT’S THE PAGE YOU WRITE,” “the letters . . . are editorially themed around particular issues which act as a constructed dialogue between readers and newspaper, prioritizing the newspapers’ agenda but in terms which appear to illustrate a seamless continuity between newspaper and readers as evinced by their letters” (20).

     
    The body of Tabloid Britain focuses on how this compact relies upon the representation of British history, outsiders, gender, sexuality, popular politics, and celebrity culture. The use of demotic language consolidates these topics into a singularity of voice. Manifested in “us and them” logic, this voice crucially secures its market while promoting reactionary positions, often against the interests of its own readership.

     
    Conboy ably describes and analyzes the rhetorical conventions that convey this relation. These conventions include using slang as a sign of anti-establishmentarian skepticism, the use of familiar first names (as opposed to British journalistic conventions of using surnames preceded by a polite form of address), a rhetoric of “violent encounter,” binary lists structured in a “good vs. evil” format, cross-page headlines, and salacious storylines, all of which serve to depict news in terms of outsized, hyperbolic clashes of personalities. Additionally, the tabloids emphasize their own importance and agency, rather than objectivity, as a way of promoting its shared suspicion of elites.
     

    Several semantic constructions and narratives typically mediate the relation of textual community to the ‘us’ and ‘them’ so important to articulating the nation. These include demonstrations of unquestioning support for military personnel, assertions of the right to show explicit pride in nation and national symbols, and fashioning Europe as an antagonist. The primary narrative told through the tabloids is of national decline, with fault laid at the door of elites, political correctness, or invasions from abroad.
     

    The narrative of national decline is supported by stories of history designed to reinforce Britain’s status as an exceptional nation. Reverence for, and knowledge of, celebrated moments such as the D-Day invasions provides one index of British identity that flattens class distinctions. Detractors from these carefully scripted stories, and figures who obstruct the remembrance and celebration of these narratives, correspondingly function as the agents of threat to or the decline of the nation (92).
     

    In addition to moral indignation, the tabloids consistently operate in the register of humor. The punning headline–such as “THE POLE TRUTH” heading a story about the Polish president admitting to have worked illegally in London as a youth–is a staple of tabloid stories, as are humorous “menus” sending up current scandals as recipes for disaster, and other forms. The humor is at times subversive, but it generally operates to shut down “systematic investigation of the implications of language which may offend minorities or politically and socially marginalized groups” (157).

     
    Such a use of humor also characterizes the tabloids’ rhetoric regarding scopic sexuality. The institution of the “Page 3 Girl,” a topless model available to readers of The Sun immediately upon opening the paper, is defended from allegations of sexism on the basis of being just “a bit of fun.” While innuendo about celebrities’ sex lives operates in much the same spirit, the tabloids also police the moral standards of its readership: “as soon as sex threatens to become real . . . the atmosphere changes very swiftly and the language used to describe it returns to the more puritanical end of the tabloid spectrum reserved for activities and people they disapprove of” (132).
     

    This policing of the socioeconomic group ventriloquized in the tabloids coalesces in the common target of the ‘yob’–a term for a loutish member of the working class. Paradoxically, “the newspapers are written to appeal to the working classes but go to some lengths to castigate this particular type as if to draw on the Victorian moral distinction between the deserving and undeserving poor” (17).
     

    The subtlest of these rhetorical strategies is an absence; while reportage may tend towards racism, xenophobia, sexism, and a variety of other strategies of exclusion, these tendencies are trumped by the anti-establishment agenda, which sometimes means taking radical positions. What is insidious about the tabloids, however, is the manner in which these perspectives tend to avoid critique of the relations of power; instead, “the structural and institutional aspects of the story are relegated to an incidental feature beneath the triumphant and self-promotional tone of the tabloid which emphasizes the end of racism at the centre” (177). The larger stakes of the argument, and a motif which emerges sporadically throughout Tabloid Britain, is that we should understand the political function of the British tabloids. Through “exaggerated foregrounding of sensation and ‘human interest’ . . . [the tabloids structure] the world in a way which rejects fundamental political issues and focuses instead on random events within a world of common sense” (15).

     
    The weakness of such an approach is that it fails to take significant account of the political allegiances held by particular tabloids. The Royal Commission on the Press’s 1977 Final Report (London: Her Majesty’s Stationary Office, 1977), for example, noted the emergence of a gap in centrist and central-left perspectives created by the demise of the Daily Herald and News Chronicle, and it notes the extent and degree of dissatisfaction with the coverage of industrial relations and trade union affairs as a significant weakness in newspapers” (100).
     

    John Tulloch, in his introduction to Chris Horrie’s Tabloid Nation, argues that “one of the most debilitating aspects of debates on the press is the tendency to lump different newspapers together–and the most notable example is the tabloids.” While such a critique might apply to Conboy’s Tabloid Britain, Tulloch further claims that the debates tend to center upon the notion that because tabloids obey “the same economic laws . . . . They’re not newspapers, but consumerist magazines . . . [and thus] abdicate the arena of political debate.” Tabloid Britain‘s contribution, then, is to make political sense of the consumerist tendency in the tabloids. In so doing, Conboy provides significant substantiation for James Curran’s and James Thomas’s observations that since Wapping there has been a significant rightward turn of the popular press.
     

    In addition to Tabloid Britain, readers might find interesting Chris Horrie’s analyses, in Tabloid Nation, of the internal politics of the tabloids and the state of the tabloid press. Horrie makes two observations that seem particularly fitting here–first, he notes a movement away from ‘bonk’ journalism in the 1990s evidenced by the rise of celebrity magazines such as OK! and Hello! and their partnerships with tabloid papers. Second, Horrie observes that “by 2003 young people in Tabloid Britain were starting to turn their backs on the tabloid newspapers,” primarily as a result of increased access to the same material through television and the internet.”

     
    Tabloid Britain provides a satisfying anatomization of the various rhetorical strategies employed in the tabloids, but Conboy’s suggestion of deep affinities with other literary and cultural discourses often feels cursory. For example, he repeatedly links the tone of indignation to the traditions of the moralizing folk tale and to melodrama, but neither of these links are established in any serious depth. Treated as conventional ideas the reader would be expected to understand, such linkages largely lose their potential to reveal the tabloids’ deep fascination with soap opera and reality television.

     
    Lost as well are some of the more interesting meditations upon the tabloids’ simulation of working-class rhetoric. In a provocative aside, Conboy notes that studies have indicated “a male tendency to bond with lower socio-cultural patterns of language” (23). The possibility that the tabloids’ rhetoric is associated with machismo suggests a complex class dynamic that Conboy never explores. Further, he does not fully delve into one of the paradoxes immediately evident upon opening the website to any of the tabloids–while a profusion of bared female bodies hails a heteronormative male gaze, the papers directly appeal to female audiences as well. Perhaps a deeper excavation of the heteronormativity of the tabloids would secure the claims for its heritage in melodrama and folk tale, but Conboy does not explore this territory (he does, however, mention lesbians as a group particularly targeted by the newspapers). Moreover, one wishes that Conboy had explored his notion that the national community evoked by the tabloids “recalls something of Baudrillard’s simulacrum” by considering the way tabloid coverage, like much of the contemporary blogosphere, is often a re-processing of news narratives offered elsewhere (13).
     

    One of the key questions that emerges from this engagement with nationalism is the impact of global and transnational culture upon the tabloid market. Conboy argues that although nation is a construct, “national news may exist within global communications conglomerates, but it needs a strong local resonance for its continued success” (47). The circularity that underlies this response is crucial, for it legitimates the extensive analysis of “narratives of nation” while refusing the insistent question “why” that emerges in response to a multitude of claims. Tabloid Britain is a fine, insightful analysis of rhetoric, but it leaves this reader thirsty for a deeper grasp of the contexts, forerunners, and implications of the rhetoric it treats.

     
    One regrets missed opportunities within the criticism that would have permitted Conboy to clarify some of these critical dynamics. One pertinent example is his use of Homi Bhabha’s work on nationalism: citing only Bhabha’s introduction to Nation and Narration, Conboy misses a central analysis of the duality of nationalist discourse as both pedagogical and performative, a conceptual frame that would strengthen his argument. Another is the significant absence of Ernest Gellner’s perspective on the relations between nationalism and the elite celebration of ‘peasant’ culture, which might strengthen his claims about homologies between tabloid rhetoric and the folktale.
     

    In light of recent critical arguments over the “kinda hegemonic, kinda subversive” appropriation of Foucault in literary analysis, it would behoove Conboy to explore questions of consumption more closely (see Miller). In examining the rhetoric as an ideological support for the political economy of the papers, Tabloid Britain refuses to confront the point any representative of the papers would immediately make: that they are simply giving the people what they want. For Conboy, the tabloids “enable the reader to use the newspaper as a textual bridge between their own experience of the culture in which they live, and their own attitudes and beliefs within a range of language which is a close approximation to what they imagine themselves to be using when they speak of these things themselves” (11). But do tabloid readers use it as such, or are the tabloids consumed for their deeper coverage of sport and celebrities? How have changes in the tabloid audience and changes in tabloid rhetoric and content related to one another over time? And are tabloids typically consumed as a proletarian voice, as a source of political information and opinion? James Thomas notes mixed information in the studies done to date on this topic: the public, even when restricted to tabloid readers, tend to express distrust of their content; on the other hand, researchers have found evidence that readers “had absorbed the information they claimed not to believe” (153). While the answers to these questions are indefinite, some consideration of reception would strengthen Tabloid Britain‘s argument about the insidious nature of tabloid rhetoric.
     

    Questions of readership arise throughout Conboy’s extensive use of primary evidence. While not the book’s stated intention, stronger distinctions between the particular tabloids, and careful examination of the evolution of tabloid rhetoric in relation to the publishing industry, the growth of the internet, and British politics would evoke great interest and fall outside of the purview of the critics he has quoted. Conboy does occasionally indicate the targeting of a particular tabloid towards gender or political affiliations, but his intention to illuminate the political economy of the tabloids is underserved by an absence of deeper analysis of these concerns.
     

    In terms of tabloid content, one of the odd omissions of the book is any extended analysis of how the tabloids represent the British royal family, surely the sine qua non of national self-iconography. Conboy’s study resonates with the contemporary reader because of its continual use of examples from the Blair administration, including debates over immigrant asylum, the War in Iraq, and the Global War on Terror; and examples from celebrity culture, including internet sex-scandals involving British soap stars and the personal and marital travails of British football star David Beckham. With “Teflon Tony” and “Becks” poised to fade from the front pages, one must wonder about the currency of Tabloid Britain five years hence. Indeed, one deeper problem with the book is that, in engaging in rhetorical analysis, Conboy’s emphasis on the synchronic blurs into an emphasis upon the ephemera that are supposed to function merely as examples of the tendencies he chronicles.
     

    The book is admirably up-to-date in terms of how new technologies have had an impact on the consumption of the news. Yet the prevalence of references to email and texting speaks to the need for periodic updates if the book is to maintain its currency. On its website at the time this review was written, The Sun had a number of features that Conboy would certainly find interesting, including ‘virals’ for readers to forward, blogs, YouTube-style comedy videos, interactive gambling games, a fantasy football game, online shopping featuring Sun gear, a weight loss club, and numerous other features.
     

    Were such an update to occur, the argument would be strengthened by specific attention to the ways in which email, texting, and other forms of virtual participation in the tabloid’s imaginary community changes, or perhaps deepens, the sense of creating a simulacrum of the natio. Were Conboy to explore such an analysis, he would be well-positioned to make a significant addition to critical work on media culture, capitalism, and nationalism.

  • Performance and Politics in Contemporary Poetics: Three Recent Titles from Atelos Press

    Eric Keenaghan
    Department of English
    State University of New York, Albany
    ekeenaghan@albany.edu

    Review of: Laura Moriarty, Ultravioleta. Berkeley: Atelos, 2006; Jocelyn Saidenberg, Negativity. Berkeley: Atelos, 2006; Juliana Spahr, The Transformation. Berkeley: Atelos, 2007.

     
    Disturbed by the mid-century capitalistic imperative that Americans make a living, and unsatisfied with the Soviet Union’s alternative of valorizing communal labor, Hannah Arendt seeks in the human condition some other idea of freedom. She is drawn to the ancient Greek polis model of a public space accessible exclusively to free male citizens liberated from the bonds of household labor and the work of crafting material goods. There men freely engaged in activities possessing virtú, or a liberating virtuosity and improvisational subtlety not unlike that of a musical performance. For Arendt, politics, speech, and music “do not pursue an end (are ateleis) and leave no work behind (no par’ autas erga), but exhaust their full meaning in the performance itself.” The freest and most political action in this schema is that which expends itself in the moment and place of its enactment, where “the performance is the work” (206). Arendt especially struggles to pinpoint where poetry lies in her tripartite schemata of work, labor, and action. She contends that “a poem is less a thing than any other work of art; yet even a poem, no matter how long it existed as a living spoken word in the recollection of the bard and those who listened to him, will eventually be ‘made,’ that is, written down and transformed into a tangible thing among things” (170). An odd predicament, indeed. Poetry does not belong to this world, nor can it found a polis. Since its material is language, it closely resembles Arendt’s esteemed category of thought; but because words must be put to paper, poetry is not properly atelic. Thus, she judges it to be an impotent form: it cannot hope to found a new form of politicized action and freedom, and it may not even be the stuff of an intellectual performance.

     
    I do not know whether Lyn Hejinian and Travis Ortiz had The Human Condition in mind when they named their new publishing venture a decade ago. Yet their press, Atelos, implicitly challenges Arendt’s–and many others’–misunderstanding of poetry’s relationship to politics. Since its first publication (Jean Day’s The Literal World, 1998), all of the press’s books have included a clear mission statement: “Atelos was founded in 1995 as a project of Hip’s Road, devoted to publishing, under the sign of poetry, writing which challenges the conventional definitions of poetry, since such definitions have tended to isolate it from intellectual life, arrest its development, and curtail its impact.” The press sets out to correct commonplace contemporary misunderstandings of poetry (as Romantic, self-contained, removed from politics, or unable to create new communities), and it also takes on those respectful but skeptical views of poetry such as Arendt’s. Atelos does have an end, a telos, since the publishers have announced that the list will include only fifty titles, a sort of literary republic or poetic polity mirroring the constitution of the actual States. Atelos resignifies not only how we understand “poetry” as a literary genre but also how we understand the virtuosity of poetic performance. The work need not disappear with the performance for it to have political virtú. Atelos Press reminds us that quite the opposite is true.

     
    In the current climate of globalized capitalism, it’s impossible to romanticize, as Arendt had, a revolutionary space apart for politics or for poetry. We cannot naïvely want a genuinely atelic performativity. Art’s political performance now depends on manufacturing a product whose very materiality exists in a critical and conflicted relationship with dominant economic and political logics. Atelos has produced books that double as aesthetic objects and commodities. All of the books have the same distinctive dimensions (7.9 x 5.3 inches), with a slender band wrapping around the cover and containing the title’s number. While the objects are branded, what’s between the recognizable covers varies greatly–perhaps too much so for some readers’ tastes. In small press publications, content, like the covers, is usually branded. Not only does the Atelos catalogue contain a miscellany of authors not always thought to “belong” to the same poetic “tradition” or “school” or even “generation,” but Atelos projects often mark a departure from the authors’ own previous ventures. Rae Armantrout’s recourse to a form resembling memoir in True (1998), Barrett Watten’s documentary poetic prose in Bad History (1998), and Fanny Howe’s inclusion of a CD of a dramatic performance of her poem Tis of Thee (2003) are exemplary cases in point. The Atelos list has included work by younger poets–sometimes their first books (like Lohren Green’s Poetical Dictionary: Abridged, 2003) and sometimes not (like Rodrigo Toscano’s Platform, 2003)–that offer exciting evidence of the emergence and strengthening of newer generations of U.S. poetries that are at once lyrical and experimental, literary and political, philosophical and documentary/citational.

     
    At the time of this writing, the Atelos catalogue contains twenty-seven titles. The six most recent are: Taylor Brady’s Occupational Treatment (2006), Ed Roberson’s City Eclogue (2006), Tom Mandel’s To the Cognoscenti (2007), Jocelyn Saidenberg’s Negativity (2006), Laura Moriarty’s Ultravioleta (2006), and Juliana Spahr’s The Transformation (2007). Each continues Hejinian and Ortiz’s mission and deserves review in its own right. I concentrate my remarks on the last three. These are written by women now based in northern California, the original home of L=A=N=G=U=A=G=E poetry. Saidenberg, Moriarty, and Spahr are well-known and respected as important younger writers. All are concerned with poetry’s ability to pursue new political horizons, and each of their volumes plays with the relation between syntax and the poetic line. Unlike their predecessors’ New Sentence, though, these women are differently invested in what Ron Silliman denounces as conventional syntax’s “syllogistic leap, or its integration above the level of the sentence, to create a fully referential tale” (79). Referentiality, he argues, is capitalism’s chief ideological vehicle. If poetry reproduces the imperative that sentences combine to make sensible narratives, or if it commits the equally cardinal sin of a lyric association of poetic word with spoken parole rather than with written langue, the genre would be incapable of producing a resistant politics. Saidenberg, Moriarty, and Spahr may not opt for lyric, but their abandonment of earlier vanguardists’ suspicion of narrative still prompts questions. What’s so generically distinctive about poetry or its “intellectual life” if it produces works locked into market and branding logics, and cannot distinguish itself from other written forms? Can contemporary poetry really deliver virtuoso political and intellectual performances?
     

    Of the three titles, Jocelyn Saidenberg’s Negativity most closely resembles what nearly all readers would recognize as contemporary poetry. Its eight integral sections feature longer pieces constituted of segments, sometimes with line breaks (but more often not) and written in the familiar (even comfortably so) style of experimental poetry–what Spahr’s book repeatedly describes as “writing that uses fragmentation, quotation, disruption, disjunction, agrammatical syntax, and so on” (e.g. 59, 61, 62, 63, 64, 78, 80, 155). As the director of San Francisco’s Small Press Traffic Literary Arts Center and a participant in the Bay Area’s queer arts community, Saidenberg is explicitly invested in the politicized relationship between art and community. From her opening Dante-esque walk through a dusky wood (“Dusky, or Destruction as a Cause of Becoming”), Saidenberg constructs a shadowy, infernal world inextricably linked to her American one. “In This Country” turns on its head the Bush administration’s recapitulation of Samuel Huntington’s “theory” of civilization versus barbarism and its jingoistic rhetoric of being “with us” or “against us”: “In this country I’m in two places at once, with you and with you” (51). This voice is a representative of a queer nation: “In this country, we take our identity from how it feels when we come. When we come we are only that” (49). Here sex and pleasure do not found an idyllic queer community; rather, they entail a negotiation of homophobic ideologies, narratives, and realities. For example, in “Not Enough Poison” Saidenberg’s narrator performs cunnilingus on her partner’s “gash.” Citing a misogynistic slur, the poem tries to resignify the negative reference as “not separating, but unifying the abrasion to all the impure, non-separated.” This is not an utterly naïve or utopist attempt to remedy social ills with a verbal patina. Orgasm, that experience of supposed transcendental unification, is disturbingly represented as an “unmending, secreting, and discharging, leaking out in glops and gummy pus. Blending into the boundaries, coterminous sore of the visible, not presentable superannuated surface of self” (38). The narrator’s subjective agency is reduced to a mere fetish’s objectivity. “So I as shoes that have been sniffed and bitten and kissed hundreds of times” (44). Devastating scenes like this recur in Negativity. They form a perverse wall (one section is even titled “Immure”) into which we run headlong. As Saidenberg warns, “let no gate deceive you by its width” (31). Whether that gate is understood to refer to a general promise of freedom from a subjectivating order or to the specific promise of erotic freedom that comes through vaginal or anal gateways, freedom always has a price: of pain, fear, even death. By linking radical pessimism to radical critique, Saidenberg tries to do for poetry what Kathy Acker or Reinaldo Arenas had done for fiction. As we might expect from a poetic resistance reminiscent of Acker’s inveighing against Reagan’s murderous silence about HIV/AIDS or Arenas’s maniacal tirades against Castro’s internment of Cuban homosexuals, the political effectuality of Saidenberg’s narratival lyric risks being confined to that negative milieu it references and from which it cannot wholly extricate itself.

     
    Laura Moriarty succeeds a bit more in that extrication; ironically, that is due to the fact that her Atelos volume is generically closer to postmodernist science fiction than to poetry. The central conceit of Ultravioleta is allegorical: books function as a mode of transport. Characters traverse space by vehicles made of paper, driven by the activities of reading and writing. The book we hold in our hands is itself a double for the fictive craft giving the volume its title. Moriarty’s narrative masquerades as epic, even including a feast reminiscent of Beowulf . . . but the adventure circles about on itself and the plot literally goes nowhere. In its generic failures as science fiction or epic, though, Ultravioleta (the book) ironically succeeds. Moriarty challenges what Samuel R. Delany describes as the “linear, systematic, more or less rational, more or less negotiable” conventional narrative. Ultravioleta is presented as a critical apparatus because it takes varieties of sources and reconnects them in less “rational” and “systematic” ways, and thus imbues its own internal “relations” with a “problematic status” (Delany 416).
     

    Because of her fantasy relies on allegory, Moriarty–like Spenser–walks a thin line between heavy-handed political moralism and ethical reflection. At times, her characters’ distrust of “the government” and the media working in its service and infilitrating their homes reads as a bit too referential to post-9/11 America. But the poet deploys poetry and sci-fi’s shared device of the imagination to let this pseudo-epic act more virtuously. Referred to simply as “the I,” the fictive Martians embody an imperialist force existing somewhere between shadow and body, absence and presence, as they feed on human thoughts. Not reducible to an oppressive government and symbiotically linked to their hosts, the “I” is a subjectivating part of humanity that must be critically understood. With these alien figures, Ultravioleta consciously reclaims Jack Spicer’s poetic from Silliman and the L=A=N=G=U=A=G=E poets so as to rethink their rejection of referential and lyric poetry. Her fantastic scenario echoes Spicer’s warning to other poets to “try to keep as much of yourself as possible out of the poem” (Spicer 8), and instead to let in the “Martians” and “ghosts” to move around the “furniture” and “obstructions” of words, ideologies, history, and even personhood (29, 30). In her compelling “narrative” about the impossibility of narrative, in her characters’ allegorical struggle with being subjected to and occupied by a sense of personhood that reduplicates the governmental strategies now responsible for imperialistically occupying foreign lands, Moriarty is also implicitly criticizing the naïveté underlying the unexamined ideas of resistance promulgated by Spicer and the experimental poets he influenced. For Moriarty, opening a political space for poetry cannot rely on a New Sentence concerned primarily with language’s structure, nor can subjectivity be set aside so that language itself might speak.

     
    The “I” plaguing Ultravioleta is also the subject of the struggle of Juliana Spahr’s The Transformation. Even more narrative than Saidenberg’s and Moriarty’s texts, The Transformation documents “a barely truthful story of the years 1997-2001” in Spahr’s relationship with her partners Bill Luoma and Charles Weigl (217). Dispensing with the memoir’s conventional first-person narration, Spahr opts to tell her story in the third-person plural. The threesome, then, collectively narrate their move from graduate school at SUNY Buffalo’s Poetics department to Spahr’s first tenure-track job at the University of Hawaii to their move to partial employment in New York City, just prior to the 9/11 bombings. The style of The Transformation performs the political nature of our struggle with communication’s categorical imperative. Unlike a deconstructionist, Spahr is nostalgic for, rather than skeptical of, transparent communication and referentiality. Poetry’s anti-narrative basis–its ability to refigure relations and to sustain aporetic conditions–is presented by Spahr as the best, if imperfect, means of communicating otherwise inexplicable differences.

     
    Against the current trend to see violence in categorization and identitarian logics, The Transformation exhibits a nostalgia for some acceptable way to talk about identity and community. Spahr reveals the problem of defining who “they” are as ubiquitous in this age of Homeland Security. “So it was a time of troubled and pressured pronouns” (205). What happens when we identify not under the banner of an “us” (or the U.S.) but as a “they”? “They agreed to falter over pronouns. They agreed to let them undo their speech and language. They pressed themselves upon them and impinged upon them and were impinged upon in ways that were not in their control” (206). This volunteering to let one’s self be undone–not dissimilar to Judith Butler’s notion of precarious life–leads Spahr’s figures to a condition in which “they” come to terms with their writing bodies’ extension of their political environments. The Transformation tries to embrace all forms of alterity that condition us and estrange us from ourselves. Only then can we commune with those “theys” with whom we’re not supposed to sympathize. “Pumped through their lungs grief for all of them killed by the military that currently occupied the continent, the thems they knew to be near them and the thems they knew not to be near them, because to not grieve meant that their humanity was at risk” (213). Here, the historical referentiality of Spahr’s memoir generates a rather unpoetic moralism and a suspicious longing for the security of an identifiable world we might know and narrate in full. But this postlapsarian melancholic expression may be forgiven if we concentrate on the theoretical and ethical conclusion of Spahr’s work: in the end, writing is an ecological exercise. It affirms inclusive fields of connection, so poetry can manufacture “a catalogue of vulnerability” that lets her memoirs’ subjects, and by extension the author and her readers, “begin the process of claiming their being human” (Spahr 214). Even while longing for a humanist past, complete with its identitarian fictions, The Transformation–much like Negativity and Ultravioleta–demonstrates an awareness that the very conditions that we use to signify the human and to understand our selves have changed.
     

    Unlike their L=A=N=G=U=A=G=E forebears, Saidenberg, Moriarty, and Spahr insist that language is referential, that the sentence be combined syllogistically into narrative units, and even that the poetic personhood be recuperated. These decisions open their work, and Atelos, to some criticism. When a press defines its genre so vaguely as to include prose poems, memoir, and science fiction on its list, does the very term “poetry” lose meaning altogether? Should experimental writers and publishers provide a more coherent political and intellectual program today? Depending on their tastes, different audiences will arrive at different conclusions. Many, I suspect, will be pleased by the individual books but dissatisfied with what the list as a whole suggests about the state and the coherence of contemporary American poetry. After all, like Spahr’s figures, many readers long for the security provided by identity, even an avant-garde one. An oppositional identitarian attitude is often mistaken for a resistive politics and for a sign that poetry is doing its work.
     

    However, these titles might also indicate that contemporary poetry publishing stands to gain much by avoiding a return to vanguardism’s combatative and territorial posturing. Read together, the volumes by Saidenberg, Moriarty, and Spahr offer a “catalogue” (as Spahr would describe it) of how we are shaped, affected, and conditioned by forces to which we must remain vulnerable–including language itself. These ethical lessons have enduring political pertinence beyond the present moment. Writing “under the sign of poetry,” as Atelos’ mission statement phrases it, are performances that afford readers opportunities to critique the imperatives of identification and categorization constituting our social, cultural, and political lives. Such relations affect how we see both subjectivity and personhood. In this way, Atelos and its authors continue the project with which Gertrude Stein charged her art over three-quarters of a century ago. “The composition is the thing seen by every one living in the living they are doing, they are the composing of the composition that at the time they are living is the composition of the time in which they are living. It is that that makes living a thing they are doing” (Stein 516). The poetic page connects us anew with the world, and the selves we thought we knew. Some reference is necessary, then, so that we might move forward. It is reckless to insist on a poetic “us” absolutely divorced from a political “them.” Literature need not disavow narrative; instead, it can resignify narrative as a device for constructing other forms of commonality and for beginning the work of redefining personhood and humanity. We, the readers, are extensions of the poem; ultimately, that is the only factor that makes aesthetic work atelic. It’s up to us to continue its performance, so that life itself might be composed a bit more poetically. To paraphrase Stein, politics begins only in our beginning again the work our poets have already begun.

    Works Cited

    • Arendt, Hannah. The Human Condition. 1958. 2nd ed. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1998.
    • Delany, Samuel R. “Some Remarks on Narrative and Technology; or: Poetry and Truth.” 1995. Shorter Views: Queer Thoughts and the Politics of the Paraliterary. Hanover: Wesleyan UP, 1999. 408-30.
    • Silliman, Ron. The New Sentence. New York: Roof, 2003.
    • Spicer, Jack. “Dictation and ‘A Textbook of Poetry.’” 1965. The House that Jack Built: The Collected Lectures of Jack Spicer. Ed. Peter Gizzi. Hanover: Wesleyan UP, 1998. 1-48.
    • Stein, Gertrude. “Composition as Explanation.” 1926. Selected Writings of Gertrude Stein. Ed. Carl Van Vechten. New York: Vintage, 1990. 511-23.

  • Futures of Negation: Jameson’s Archaeologies of the Future and Utopian Science Fiction

    Kyle A. Wiggins
    Department of English and American Literature
    Brandeis University
    kwiggins@brandeis.edu

    A review of: Jameson, Fredric. Archaeologies of the Future: The Desire Called Utopia and Other Science Fictions. New York: Verso, 2005.

    It is difficult to gauge the political utility of expressly fictive locations like utopias, given the immediacy and concreteness of a daily, lived political environment. Fredric Jameson sets out to address this quandary in Archaeologies of the Future: The Desire Called Utopia and Other Science Fictions. Jameson outlines the contributions utopian fictions have made to the ongoing dilemma of systemic change in a world of capitalist hegemony. Acknowledging the current skepticism in academic discourse about the value of utopian thinking after the Cold War, Jameson ponders the status of utopian fiction and what remains of the link between utopia and socialism. The book sketches the terrain of a “post-globalized Left” that appears to have recovered utopian thought as a “political slogan and a politically energizing perspective” (xii). Jameson goes on to pose the necessary question: What explicitly does utopia seek to negate and what are the contours of imagined alternative worlds? Jameson continually returns to this question, working through a plethora of science fiction (SF) texts in which a utopian impulse or “desire” is perpetually emerging. Science fiction’s hospitable futures are commonly rubbished by a world that cannot abide fanciful trajectories. But these visions of global community are not lost. They are simply awaiting excavation from a literary expression committed to thinking the world differently. By addressing the irrepressible wish-fulfillment of new economic and social systems in SF, Jameson counters the cynicism abundant in criticism of utopian literature. Archaeologies of the Future is a deft treatise on the resolute political vitality of the utopian form, an argument laced with timely optimism.

     
    Archaeologies of the Future is divided into two sections: the first section comprises previously unpublished material that theorizes the utopian genre and codifies Jameson’s earlier schematics on the subject, and the second collects essays on utopias that Jameson has written throughout his career, ranging from 1973 (“Generic Discontinuities in SF”) to recent efforts (“Fear and Loathing in Globalization”), including some of his most provocative essays, pieces that are landmarks in utopian criticism and theory (“Progress versus Utopia, or, Can We Imagine the Future?”). The book’s holistic project traces the historical development of utopia as a literary form, moving from Thomas More’s generative 1516 text, Utopia, to contemporary novels. However, Jameson devotes most of his analysis to utopian mechanisms in science fiction. He follows Darko Suvin’s postulation that utopia is a socioeconomic sub-genre of SF and that, like the larger genre to which it belongs, utopia produces an effect of “cognitive estrangement”–that is, the fictions in which utopian desire appear make strange the familiar power structures of our lives. As readers, we recognize our own world burning within the alien place. Malls, prisons, governments, customs, speech, and even geographies are recognizable yet different by one remove (or more). By disturbing the familiarity and fixity of recognizable power structures, SF texts tease us with radical social models. Science fiction satiates our desire for a transformed tomorrow while reminding us of that future’s uncertainty and contingency. However, Jameson dismisses the “vacuous evocation” of utopia “as the image of a perfect society or even the blueprint of a better one” (72). Such a conception of utopia is too simplistic. Instead, he sees utopian desire as global capitalism’s imagined neutralization. Jameson believes that “one cannot imagine any fundamental change in our social existence which has not first thrown off Utopian visions like so many sparks from a comet” (xii). Utopia’s political relevance, though, comes not from banal pining but from its combative opposition to the “universal belief that the historic alternatives to capitalism have been proven unviable and impossible, and that no other socioeconomic system is conceivable, let alone practically available” (xii). Utopian science fictions threaten the ideological dominance of capitalism by theorizing a world change towards egalitarianism. Or, as Jameson puts it, the utopians “not only offer to conceive of such alternate systems; Utopian form is itself a representational meditation on radical difference, radical otherness, and on the systemic nature of social totality” (xii). Utopia offers the imaginative counterpunch to the Thatcherite decree that free-market capitalism is our inevitable future.

     
    Confronting entrenched capitalism is, according to Jameson, the fundamental process of the desire called utopia. It is a dialectical movement whose political strategy is, strangely, “anti-anti-Utopia.” The double negative indicates the imperative to address anti-Utopian ideologies that swirl through capitalism with speculative alternatives. Jameson’s most emphatic claim is that utopian literature performs a “critical negativity, that is in their function to demystify their opposite numbers” (211). Utopian SF’s political significance (and it is reinforced that SF carries this charge more resoundingly than atavistic and magical Fantasy literature) is not necessarily its prescriptive capacity to imagine the exterminating agent of capitalism or even the exactness of its replacement system. Rather, SF’s potency comes from the way it encourages readers to envision alternate social systems. SF asserts an ideological refusal of capitalism “by forcing us to think the break itself” (232). Jameson joins Russell Jacoby (The End of Utopia and Picture Imperfect: Utopian Thought for an Anti-Utopian Age) as one of the few voices on the political left still committed to the power of utopian idealization. However, unlike Hardt and Negri’s spontaneous utopian gatherings (Multitude, 2004), Jameson’s Archaeologies is more concerned with the stuff of dreams, the imaginative utterance of solidarity and tolerance, and the nefarious critique that such dreams are politically obsolete.
     

    Jameson complicates the specificity of utopian thought in science fictions by situating these messages firmly in the sociocultural and material histories that produce them. Jameson’s explication of the historical conditions that generate individuated wishes for utopia is understandable: the conditions that determine the nature of utopian longing and protest are often the same ones that make society consider utopia an irresponsible fantasy, or as Reinhold Niebuhr declared in 1952, “an adolescent embarrassment.” Still, viewing utopia from a material and psychological vantage can’t completely overcome the inherent vagueness in the utopian impulse as Jameson describes it. His account of the cultural and political forces in various eras that repress the desire for a better world nevertheless leaves the utopian project orbiting on a general path, far from the praxis that trenchant dissatisfaction with capitalism would seemingly demand. While his point is well taken that the inability to imagine alternative societies would mark the triumph of capitalism, Jameson perhaps overestimates the political practicality of the imaginative process. This is a shortcoming that may leave some Marxists who were expecting more material applicability dissatisfied. That said, Jameson does well to remind us that “our most energetic imaginative leaps into radical alternatives were little more than the projections of our own social moment and historical or subjective situation” (211).

    In calling attention to the cultural conditions that germinated utopian and dystopian narratives, Jameson opens up fascinating comparative avenues between works. For example, he suggests that Orwell’s “dispirited reaction to postwar Labour Britain” (202) produced a vastly different critique in 1984 than do the media and mass culture targets ridiculed in Huxley’s Brave New World, despite the commonplace move to group the two novels together as texts with similar dystopian projects. It is no surprise then that much of Archaeologies of the Future‘s first section extrapolates evidence of and reactions to the political climates of the 1950s and 1960s (commitment to protest and revolution, suspicion of failed communist movements) from science fiction novels of those eras.
     

    Despite the invigorating first theoretical section of Archaeologies, the text’s bifurcated structure troubles its cohesion, and the format of its second half is scattershot. Consequently, some of the compiled essays read as exercises in utopian analysis rather than contributions to a unified argument. Readers familiar with Jameson’s impressive body of utopian scholarship may find little new material (both for the field and for Jameson’s own oeuvre). Furthermore, Archaeologies‘ discussion of utopianism as a hermeneutic practice essentially rehashes a reading model that has been popular in Science Fiction studies for quite a while. Though Jameson helpfully reminds us of Ernst Bloch’s centrality in developing a method of interpreting a text’s utopian content, one can’t help but feel that we are treading over territory thoroughly mapped by Carl Freedman and others. That said, it is perhaps Freedman’s insight that “it is in the generic nature of science fiction to confront the future” that enables us to recognize the importance of Jameson’s work (199). If late capitalism enervates our political will by insisting on its immortality, then ostensibly fictionalizing a future free of capitalism can free agency from this postmodern deadlock and stave off the intractable position of despair.
     

    At his most lyrical, Jameson poignantly reflects on moments in U.S. and European history when revivals of utopian literatures optimistically heralded resistance to inequity. At key points, he includes schematic graphs that concisely delineate the various formulations of utopia SF, contrasting diametric narrative tactics and linking constitutive traditions (4, 37, 131). In the opening chapter, for example, Jameson graphs two descending lines from More’s originating text. One line represents programs intent on the realization of a utopian project (such as revolutionary praxis, intentional communities, and the utopian text), while the other includes omnipresent utopian impulses that are less concerned with totality and more directed towards equivocal matters like reform (such as political theory or hermeneutics). In a later graph, Jameson sketches the imbricated field of prophetic texts and moral fables. These graphs clarify Jameson’s occasionally expansive comparisons, succinctly showing, for instance, how some satires of systemic corruption share political interests with utopian manifestos. In Archaeologies, Jameson’s writing is familiarly tricky, yet the graphs and end-of-section summations reward those willing to negotiate the vines of many tangled literary traditions by revealing the structure that networks together five hundred years of branching utopian thought. Though rarely as edifying as Jameson’s adroit close readings of trans-historical themes, the graphs remind us of SF’s obsession with class striation.

     
    Class division and economic dominance cast large categorical shadows over Archaeologies, looming so large that at times Jameson’s text seems redundant. Jameson unfortunately devotes far fewer pages to sexual and racial utopianism. While his attention to the urban sexual politics of Samuel Delany’s Trouble in Triton considers emancipation via posthuman prostheses, the episode is one of a few brief digressions on utopian engines that are not explicitly anti-capitalist. Not only does this mode of thinking place inordinate pressure on economics to resolve social identity disputes, it also excludes many important SF utopian texts from Jameson’s discussion. Specifically, though William Burroughs’s sexual utopias (Cities of the Red Night, Naked Lunch) have been copiously addressed by critics, contemporary utopian studies must still come to terms with other alternative orders, like Burroughs’s, that are not forged in economic materialism. Misha’s Red Spider, White Web, and nearly all of Kathy Acker’s catalogue braid artistic trade and non-normative sexuality to form new, just modes of community. A chapter dedicated to recent SF texts that probe scientific and intellectual property politics concomitantly, such as China Mieville’s New Crobuzon novels, would neatly fill the lacuna of non-economic utopias or dystopias in Archaeologies. Jameson’s study would be significantly richer if it responded in more depth to growing feminist criticism on cyberculture, posthumanism, and recombinant sexuality (for example, work by N. Katherine Hayles and Lisa Yaszek). SF’s voluminous articulations of sexual alterity, bodily augmentation, and alternative social models of gender inclusivity scream for critical placement alongside studies of communitarian or socialist revolution. In the end, Jameson’s theory that utopian SF enacts “negation of a negation” is somewhat troublesome no matter how important and accurate we take that project to be. Does a Hegelian model of negation, and anti-anti-capitalism, neutralize an unjust system, or does it erect a better one? If the former is true, is the neutralization of global capitalism with local resistance the best we can hope for? How “utopian” is a series of toggling ideological reversals? The paradox of utopian thought in a global age, however, seems to exactly validate Jameson’s project. Not only is utopian desire the inextinguishable negative of capitalist totality, utopianism is the opposition necessary to imagine capitalism’s mortality into being.

     
    While Jameson’s allegiance to Hegelian negation can be wearying, abstractions of hyper-aggressive postmodern capitalism, particularly those that modify Marcuse and Adorno, are illuminating. Additionally, the analyses spin out from the work of utopian theorists of Science Fiction Studies fame, Darko Suvin and Tom Moylan, though there is less dialogue with critics in the field than with continental philosophers. Jameson acknowledges Moylan’s classification of the “critical dystopia” as utopia’s negative cousin, and offers a useful distinction between the often collapsed categories “dystopia” and “anti-utopia.” He spends very little time on this divergence, and the heft of the dystopia discussion is left for totalitarian structures in Orwell’s fiction. Jameson has heralded cyberpunk as the quintessential cultural expression of postmodernism, but he bypasses the opportunity to reexamine the dystopian genre as the apex of viral corporatization, electing instead to press its depiction of labor. Jameson levels a critique against the utopian science fictions of the 1960s that imagined radical new social structures but stopped short of imagining the progressive applications of cybernetics. He posits that the utopian impulses in cyberpunk fiction and those texts written during the rise of the internet seem “less to have been the production of new visions of social organization and of social relations than the rendering anachronistic and insipid of the older industrial notions of non-alienated labor as such” (153). The consequences of such limited utopianism are far-reaching in the globalized world. Jameson rightly argues that business capitalists have outstripped literary utopianists in envisioning new infrastructural models and social relations to economic production. He concedes that post-Fordism is perhaps an antiquated and imprecise categorization of the current stage of capitalism, relying instead on economic theorists’ ironic coinage “Walmartification” as indicative of the economic climate. Jameson’s diagnosis of this globalized, Walmart stage, and his dissatisfaction with it, dovetail into his argument that the literary utopia must be recognized as an antidote (“a meditation on the impossible, on the unrealizable in its own right”). Conceivably, utopian texts act as counterweights to the neo-liberal celebration of globalization. Jameson urges us to develop an anxiety about losing the future. If we cease envisioning utopian tomorrows, revising them, discarding them, and rewriting them (hence, the poetic title of the book), then we acquiesce to static exploitation. Utopia gives us hope; it is “a rattling of the bars and an intense spiritual concentration and preparation for another stage which has not yet arrived” (233).
     

    Jameson’s call to reinvigorate a progressive political imagination is captured in his concluding remarks on Robinson’s Mars trilogy. Jameson argues that the fictive end to patriarchy and property on Mars “is an achievement that must constantly be renewed . . . [since] utopia as a form is not the representation of radical alternatives; it is rather simply the imperative to imagine them” (416). Jameson dodges the trap of assigning utopian narratives the task of designing a new society that can be installed in perfect replication. Though the imaginative ability to shake capitalism’s hold on our present and future is still rather tenuous by the conclusion of Archaeologies, Jameson convincingly situates utopianism as a politics of hope and difference to offset the ideological claim that capitalism lacks natural enemies. A utopian aesthetic is a viable first step (even if it is only that) towards realizing a system of equality. By continuing to imagine alternate worlds, the utopian desire, at once atomized and collective, exacts the ennobling ideology of negation and shakes the conformist myth of capitalism’s permanence in our own lives.

    Works Cited

    • Freedman, Carl. Critical Theory and Science Fiction. Hanover: Wesleyan UP, 2000.
    • Jameson, Fredric. Postmodernism, or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. London: Verso, 1991.

  • Narrowing the Range of Permissible Lies: Recent Battles in the International Image Tribunal

    Jim Hicks
    Smith College
    University of Massachusetts, Amherst
    JHICKS@email.smith.edu

    I begin with a naïve question. How is it possible that the publication of the Abu Ghraib photographs did not (yet) adversely affect the careers of those responsible for the war in Iraq? The photos offer dramatic evidence to the court of public opinion. And the case at hand, at least as prosecuted by Mark Danner, is clear enough:

    It has . . . become clear that President Bush and his highest officials, as they confronted the world on September 11, 2001, and in the days after, made a series of decisions about methods of warfare and interrogation . . . . The effect of those decisions . . . was officially to transform the United States from a nation that did not torture to one that did. (22)

    Michael Ignatieff, in describing the benefits of truth commissions, suggests that they may at least “narrow the range of permissible lies.”1 Yet days following his re-election, President Bush appointed Alberto Gonzales to head the U.S. Justice Department–Gonzales, the author of a White House memo describing the Geneva limitations on the questioning of enemy prisoners as “obsolete.” The U.S. press, after the election, widely speculated that Donald Rumsfeld would be a single-term appointee. He was not, and few would cite the Abu Ghraib scandal as an important factor in his long-awaited departure. Condoleezza Rice replaced Colin Powell as Secretary of State. Major General Geoffrey Miller, former head of the prison at Guantanamo Bay, was given command of Abu Ghraib. How could this happen? Perhaps someone somewhere believes they’ve all been doing a heck of a job.

    On an apparently unrelated front, theater critic turned pundit Frank Rich has opined that the U.S. public is “living in a permanent state of suspension of disbelief,” always “ready and willing to be duped by the next tall tale.” Though Rich’s immediate subject is a fake memoir by James Frey, he uses the best-seller success of this scam publication to decry (or was it admire?) his real target–the “Frey-like genius of the right” and “the White House propaganda operation,” with their “intricate network of P.R. outfits and fake-news outlets.” According to Rich, Stephen Colbert nailed it when he coined the word “truthiness”; today the public demands nothing more substantial, reputable or real than that. One explanation for the lack of outcry regarding the promotions of the gang that brought us Abu Ghraib might thus be that the U.S. public ingests whatever Bushite is dished out to it. Where there are counterstories in the media at all, they are buried, squelched, or otherwise rendered ineffective.
     

    And yet, just a decade ago, things seemed different. Reiterated in most accounts of the war in Bosnia is the claim that photojournalism helped bring the slaughter to an end. This notion is familiar, of course, at least since Vietnam: reporting has been said to set the terms of public opinion, and politicians in the West are often seen as responding to the sentiments of their various publics. In short, the right pictures are worth a thousand divisions. I won’t speculate here about whether the power of the press is in fact so telling; in regards to ex-Yugoslavia, many articles, and a few books as well, have already begun to investigate this issue.2
     

    Even before we examine the effects of war coverage, I believe, we would do well to analyze the coverage itself. To my mind, recent war journalism still largely follows representational practices put into place during the eighteenth century–it forms part, broadly speaking, of that literature which, from the nineteenth century on, was disparaged as “sentimental” but which, during the eighteenth century, existed as a complex configuration of psychological “sentiment,” social “sensibility” and philosophical “sympathy.”3 The key question I wish to address is whether a structure of representation which is roughly three centuries old has outlived its usefulness.
     

    In a passage from his Discourse on Inequality, one which has become something of a touchstone for contemporary analyses of sentimentalism, Jean-Jacques Rousseau presents “the tragic image of an imprisoned man”–an onlooker who witnesses, and is unable to aide, a mother and child being attacked by a savage beast.4 Rousseau imagines

    the tragic image of an imprisoned man who sees, through his window, a wild beast tearing a child from its mother's arms, breaking its frail limbs with murderous teeth, and clawing its quivering entrails. What horrible agitation seizes him as he watches the scene which does not concern him personally! What anguish he suffers from being powerless to help the fainting mother and the dying child! (Fisher 105)

    As Carol McGuirk has shown, a scene such as this, recurring in more or less achieved form throughout the literature of sensibility, can serve as a key to the mechanics of sentimental display. Time and again its three (or possibly four) subject positions are reinstated, always in the same form, though not always with the same effect. Most fundamental to the scene is the position of the victim, whom McGuirk calls “the pathetic object”; she notes, however, that the viewer’s own role sometimes takes center stage. In fact, she argues that

    sentimental novelists following Sterne . . . made the presence of an interpreting sensibility seem more important than the wretchedness described . . . . The cult of feeling, from Yorick on, is characterized by a preference in the sentimental spokesman for props that cannot upstage him. (507)

    I will return to the crucial distinction suggested here between value denied to the experience of what McGuirk calls “the pathetic object” and value added to the discourse of the interpreting subject, or viewer. For now, let me remind you that the third position in staging sentimentalism, in Rousseau’s scene at least, is taken up by the beast. A fourth position–or at least potential position–is made necessary by the prison in which Rousseau’s viewer is arbitrarily placed. Although there is none at hand, we may imagine that rescue–and therefore a rescuer–is called for.5
     

    One way to parse such sentimental scenes may be to consider the intentions that give rise to them.6 At a Smith College teach-in during the NATO bombing campaign in Kosovo, a sociologist long involved in refugee work was the first to speak. He began by showing a collection of news photos culled from a variety of conflicts during the fifty-odd years since WWII. Each photo portrayed a nearly identical image, a mother and her child, invariably in the midst of desolation of one kind or another. The professor explained, with no trace of irony, that within human rights organizations this image is commonly referred to as “The Madonna of the Refugees.” His intention was not, as mine is, to investigate the representational constraints and presuppositions that generate this image, time and time again. He simply wanted us to think about this woman with her child, to imagine ourselves in her place, and to remember her face the next time that history brought it to our attention. In this case, the time was now: almost as if my colleague had predicted it, the very next cover of Time magazine portrayed a Kosovar Albanian woman wearing a head-scarf and breast-feeding her child while carrying it through a crowd of other displaced people.

     
     
    Figure 1: The Madonna of the Refugees
    Time, 12 April 1999

    When an exhibition of Ron Haviv’s war photographs, which include some of the most widely-known pictures of the war in Bosnia, opened in New York in January 2001, a single image accompanied the New York Times article publicizing the event. The shot is actually the middle of a sequence taken in Bijeljina, a town in northeastern Bosnia that was “cleansed” even before the first shots were fired on Sarajevo. The first photo was taken from a space between the cab and trailer of a truck where the photographer hid himself. Not long after, the paramilitary leader Zeljko Raznjatovic accosted Haviv and stripped him of his film–one roll was missed.[7]

     
     
    Figures 2-4: Ron Haviv, Blood and Honey
    Used with permission of the photographer

    The first image shows a woman bending over and touching a prostrate man; the last shows that same woman and man, and another woman, all apparently dead–a soldier stands above them, looking over a gate, not at them. The central photo captures another soldier in the act of kicking the second woman: sunglasses tucked into his hair, he holds a rifle nonchalantly in one hand, a cigarette in the other. Peter Maass, a U.S. journalist who witnessed both Bijeljina and the camps at Trnopolje and Omarska, writes that:

    when the call of the wild comes, the bonds of civilization turn out to be surprisingly weak . . . The wild beast had not died. It proved itself a patient survivor, waiting in the long grass of history for the right moment to pounce. (15)

    The reporter introducing Haviv’s exhibition commented simply, “[This photo] tells you everything you need to know.”

    I believe this last statement to be flat-out wrong. What this photo tells us first and foremost, when it is reprinted by the New York Times along with an article reviewing a photo exhibition, is “read the article” and perhaps “come to the exhibition.” In the context of this essay, what this photo and the Time cover tell us is also clear. The latter image focuses on one iconic, nameless victim in an apparently infinite procession to the exclusion of the other subject positions outlined above, thereby summoning up the very interventionist sentiment–“Are Ground Troops the Answer?”–which its caption questions.[8] The key photo in the Haviv sequence, in contrast, centers exclusively on a different subject position: an act of aggression that is animal-like in both savagery and grace. As an early emblem for the war in Bosnia, this image was used for diverse cultural work, including offering a warning to the U.S. public about the risks of intervention. “What does the earth look like in the places where people commit atrocities?” asks Robert Kaplan, in Balkan Ghosts. There are also reasons why, when confronted with stark images of their military’s interrogation techniques, the U.S. public was in fact not told everything it needed to know. For the moment, however, I would like to stay with our penultimate mediatized war.
     

    There exist, of course, alternatives to the thin history of daily newspapers and to the slick stories of government press offices. For example, a group of over 200 professional historians, during the past few years, has been working in teams to write a consensus history of the wars of the former Yugoslavia. One way of characterizing “The Scholars Initiative” would be to say that the project intends to refute the quotation from Simo Drljaca that serves as their epigraph: “You have your facts. We have our facts. You have a complete right to choose between the two versions.” (For more information, see www.cla.purdue.edu/si/scholarsprospectus.htm.) Drljaca was instrumental in establishing a series of prison camps near Prijedor in Bosnia-Herzegovina; he himself was killed during an arrest attempt before he could be brought to trial at the International Criminal Tribunal for the Former Yugoslavia (ICTY) in the Hague. In short, the scholars were not the first to offer a refutation. Let me cite here, from a press release, the ICTY’s verdict about the crimes committed at Drljaca’s camps:

    Like Trnopolje and Keraterm, Omarska camp was officially established on 30 May 1992 by Simo Drljaca . . . Planned initially to function for a fortnight, it in fact remained in operation until 20 August 1992. During this period of almost three months, more than 3,334 detainees at least passed through the camp . . . . All those detained were interrogated. Almost all were beaten. Many would not leave the camp alive. The living conditions in Omarska camp were appalling. Some of you, perhaps, remember the images filmed by a television team showing emaciated men, with haggard faces and often a look of resignation or complete dejection. These are the images which would make the international community react and are, perhaps, one of the reasons the Tribunal was established.

    In some sense, the very existence of institutions such as the ICTY, as well as their verdicts, provide a definitive answer to the militant relativism of the world’s Drljacas. Though courts and historians are hardly infallible, whatever power they have, they are granted.

    It is striking as well that the judge of an international court should attribute his very mandate to the so-called “CNN effect”; as suggested above, the verdict by sociologists, political scientists, and media critics on the very existence of such an effect is far from clear. In this case, Judge Almiro Rodrigues, in sentencing five participants in the “hellish orgy of persecution” at the camps, may have also felt it necessary to respond to an essay–originally published in February 1997 in a journal called Living Marxism or LM–which argued that the press reports about the camps were a massive hoax. Its author, Thomas Deichmann, begins the essay with a claim much like the one that introduces the Haviv photo exhibition:

    None of the reporters present in August 1992 described Trnopolje as a concentration camp comparable with Auschwitz. But pictures speak for themselves. The general public around the world that was confronted with this ITN-picture interpreted it without waiting for an explanation.

    Of course, even a cursory glance at a Time magazine cover taken from the British ITN television footage, or at the similar photo posted along with Deichmann’s article, shows that in these cases there was no need for the general public to wait for an explanation: they were given one with the image itself.

     
     
    Figure 5: ITN Photo.
    Time, 17 August 1992

    At the bottom right, Time captions their cover as follows: “THE BALKANS / Muslim prisoners / in a Serbian / detention camp.” While locals might grimace at the Balkanism inherent in the all-caps phrase, or at the “ethno-national” identifications, considerable thought probably went into the choice of the phrase “detention camp” as a label for the scene on the cover. Claiming a greater part of the page, and hence of our attention, there is the question, “MUST IT GO ON?” There is a delicate balance here between an implicit call to action (“this must not go on”) and fatalism (“it will go on”), a part of all sentimental representation.

    On the relation between photographic images and the words that accompany them, John Berger has given perhaps the most sober and even-handed description:

    In the relation between a photograph and words, the photograph begs for an interpretation, and the words usually supply it. The photograph, irrefutable as evidence but weak in meaning, is given a meaning by the words. And the words, which by themselves remain at the level of generalisation, are given specific authenticity by the irrefutability of the photograph. Together the two then become very powerful; an open question appears to have been fully answered. (92)

    In Deichmann’s case a supratitle, and not the image, is meant to do the talking. Here are the details of his claim (offered without substantiation of any kind):

    Now, four and a half years later, it turns out that the media, politics [sic], and the public have been deceived with this picture. It is a proven fact that it is not the group of Muslim men with Fikret Alic that are surrounded by barbed wire, but rather the British reporters. They were standing on a lot to the south of the camp. As a preventive measure against thieves, this lot was surrounded with barbed wire before the war. . . . There was no barbed-wire fence around the camp area, which also included a school, a community center, and a large open area with a sports field. This was verified by international institutions such as the International Criminal Tribunal in the Hague and the International Red Cross in Geneva. The fact that it was the reporters that were surrounded by barbed wire can be seen in the other film-material that was not edited or broadcasted.

    The rhetorical move is familiar to most amateur magicians: if you dazzle them, you do so by misdirection. Here Deichmann translates an argument about events in the world into a dispute over barbed wire and misrepresentation. Certainly both the Time cover and Deichmann’s image were cropped, centered and captioned with a purpose–yet magazine editors, journalists, and photographers do not, at least when they are acting as editors, journalists, and photographers, create the events they portray. The obvious bears repeating on another point as well. As Elie Wiesel, in his preface to a memoir from an Omarska survivor, comments, “Omarska was not Auschwitz. Nothing, anywhere, can be compared to Auschwitz. But what took place at Omarska was sufficient . . . to justify international intervention and international solidarity” (Hukanovic vii).[9] John Berger remarks:

    The photographic quotation [from reality] is, within its limits, incontrovertible. Yet the quotation, placed like a fact in an explicit or implicit argument, can misinform. Sometimes the misinforming is deliberate . . . ; often it is the result of an unquestioned ideological assumption." (97)

    A key purpose of this essay is to demonstrate, in photographic records of war, the traditional structural foundations for such ideological assumptions.

    But first let me tell you something more about their effects. When I first gave materials on the Bosnian camps to students as part of a “War Stories” course, my idea was simply to “teach the conflicts.” Given that the semester had already provided several occasions for examining the use and abuse of war photos, I felt that Deichmann’s article would offer an important cautionary tale. What I myself read as a relatively sophisticated, and sophistic, attempt, in a Bosnian context, to disseminate the equivalent of Holocaust denial was meant as a window into history in the making–a case where the verdict of the international image tribunal hadn’t yet been delivered.
     

    There are no doubt a number of reasons why my students believed Deichmann and discounted, or didn’t read, the other evidence they were given (including coverage of ITN’s libel case against Living Marxism, which ITN won). What I believe their response demonstrates most strongly, however, is the obverse side of the truthiness factor. Today campaigns to discredit the media are at least as powerful, and no doubt easier to mount, than successful propaganda. What strikes me most, however, in seeing the Time cover and Deichmann’s denial together is that both exploit the same representational structure. Rather than Rich’s ready state of suspended disbelief, today we may actually find ourselves trapped in a supersaturated suspension of particulate histories–ready to believe, or not, whenever thew right mix comes together.
     

    Bruno Latour is right: it is time for critique to stop fighting the last war. As he puts it, “entire Ph.D. programs are still running to make sure that good American kids are learning the hard way that facts are made up, . . . that we are always prisoners of language, that we always speak from a particular standpoint, and so on, while dangerous extremists are using the very same argument . . . to destroy hard-won evidence that could save our lives” (227). Latour goes on to argue that the best critic is not “the one who debunks, but the one who assembles”–that the “question was never to get away from facts but closer to them, not fighting empiricism but, on the contrary, renewing empiricism” (246). Understandably upset at a family resemblance between his own work and the discourse of conspiracy theorists and anti-science conservatives, the philo-, socio-, anthro-historian of science proposes a reassessment of tactics and a reaffirmation of principles.

     
    It should not have been surprising, perhaps, to read Deichmannesque pronouncements about the Abu Ghraib photographs coming from supporters of the Bush administration. Most notorious among these were the widely reported comments of Rush Limbaugh, aired on his radio show in early May of 2004. Limbaugh first apparently claimed that the interrogations were “no different than what happens at the Skull and Bones initiation” and went on to characterize the torturers as “need[ing] to blow off some steam,” arguing that “emotional release” is understandably needed in a situation where soldiers are “being fired at every day” “I’m talking about people having a good time,” he added. A few days later, Limbaugh returned to the topic, this time comparing the interrogations to “good old American pornography.”[10]
     

    Given a pre-Abu Ghraib survey which suggests that 63% of U.S. citizens believe that torture is sometimes justifiable,[11] as well as the recent popularity of pro-torture television (e.g., 24 and NYPD Blue), it is necessary to remind ourselves of what Limbaugh’s identification with the aggressors occludes. Let me offer one particularly eloquent example. With great economy and discretion, Jean Améry describes the manner by which the Gestapo dislocated both his shoulders. He also notes however, that the key existential moment in his horrific experience in fact came much earlier. As he puts it,

    The first blow brings home to the prisoner that he is helpless, and thus it already contains in the bud everything that is to come . . . . They are permitted to punch me in the face, the victim feels in numb surprise and concludes in just as numb certainty: they will do with me what they want. (27)

    Améry uses a deceptively simple phrase to describe the transformation we undergo when a regime that uses torture takes us into its hands. What dies at that moment he calls “trust in the world.” We lose, he explained,

    the certainty that by reason of written or unwritten social contracts the other person will spare me--more precisely stated, that he will respect my physical, and with it also my metaphysical, being. The boundaries of my body are also the boundaries of my self. My skin surface shields me against the external world. If I am to have trust, I must feel on it only what I want to feel. (27-28)

    In The New Yorker in 2005, Jane Mayer recounts the following:

    Two years ago, at Abu Ghraib prison, outside Baghdad, an Iraqi prisoner in [C.I.A. officer Mark] Swanner's custody, Manadel al-Jamadi, died during an interrogation. His head had been covered with a plastic bag, and he was shackled in a crucifixion-like pose that inhibited his ability to breathe; according to forensic pathologists who have examined the case, he asphyxiated. In a subsequent internal investigation, United States government authorities classified Jamadi's death as a "homicide," meaning that it resulted from unnatural causes. (1)

    Mayer also refers to an Associated Press report describing the position in which Jamadi was killed “as a form of torture known as ‘Palestinian hanging,’ in which a prisoner whose hands are secured behind his back is suspended by his arms” (7). This form of torture was also used by the Gestapo to simultaneously dislocate both of Jean Améry’s shoulders. And yet, unlike Jamadi, and unlike the vast majority of victims portrayed in the last three centuries of sentimental display, Améry’s voice has not been silenced.

    The most sustained and insightful analysis of the Abu Ghraib photos, as well as the most provocative thesis regarding their (lack of) reception by the U.S. public, has been recently published by the art historian Stephen Eisenman. His book, The Abu Ghraib Effect, traces the representational history of a certain form of pathos in Western art from Greco-Roman sculpture to the mass culture and racist subcultures of today. For Eisenman, the Abu Ghraib photographs draw on a mnemonic heritage that has made the inscription of “passionate suffering” a key foundational discourse in what has come to be known as Western art. As an art historian, Eisenman asks how this obvious connection–to works by such artists as Michelangelo and Raphael–were not immediately obvious to his colleagues, and why scholars turned instead toward antiwar representations by Goya and Picasso (or Ben Shahn and Leon Golub) in their discussion of the torture images. Despite topical resemblances that are at times undeniably striking, the latter group of artists, after all, meant to expose and oppose the horrors they depicted. Instead, the tradition which Eisenman dates from the Pergamon Altar (c. 180-150 BCE) through the Italian masters and beyond celebrates the expressive depiction of suffering; its “pathos formula of internalized subordination and eroticized chastisement” functions as “a handmaiden to arrogance, power and violence” (122). According to Eisenman, this insistent attention to one set of artists, and blindness to a more obvious and much wider field within Western visual culture, is evidence of an “Abu Ghraib effect,” a Freudian parapraxis that has largely succeeded in repressing the uncanny doubling between these most recent documents of Western barbarism and some of the “most familiar and beloved images” in its representational tradition.

     
    One strength of Eisenman’s argument is that it makes sense of the comments by Rush Limbaugh I cite above–a necessary task since much of Limbaugh’s audience can be assumed to be in agreement with them. After all, unlike Bill Maher or Don Imus, Limbaugh’s remarks didn’t cause him to lose his job. The key elements of the rant–its eroticization of the images, its identification with the torturers, and its imputation of the victims’ willing complicity in their own degradation (“a Skull and Bones initiation”; “good fun,” etc.)–are point for point those found by Eisenman in works such as Michelangelo’s Dying Slave and Raphael’s Battle of Ostia.
     

    Unlike Eisenman, most critics who write about the photographic evidence of U.S. torture in Iraq follow Deichmann’s lead: they substitute an argument about images for one that focuses on the acts they depict. In a recent PMLA essay, for example, Judith Butler calls an unexpected witness–the then current U.S. Secretary of Defense–to help prosecute her argument with Susan Sontag. Butler opines that when

    Rumsfeld claimed that to show all the photos of torture and humiliation and rape would allow them "to define us" as Americans, he attributed to photography an enormous power to construct national identity. The photographs would not just communicate something atrocious but also make our capacity for atrocity into a defining concept of Americanness. (825)[12]

    According to Butler, Sontag’s influential writings on photography deny interpretive power to the photographic image. Butler argues that Sontag consistently characterized photography as appealing to the emotions, not the understanding, and that for Sontag, a photograph “cannot by itself provide an interpretation” (823). Butler, however, also cites Sontag’s New York Times Sunday Magazine essay on the Abu Ghraib photos, a polemic that seems to contradict this thesis. That essay, published in as national a forum as Sontag was likely to get, memorably argues that “the photographs are us’” (Butler 826). Butler speculates that “perhaps [Sontag] means that in seeing the photos, we see ourselves seeing . . . . If we see as the photographer sees, then we consecrate and consume the act” (826). There is, of course, a less complicated reading that sees Sontag’s comment directed toward the world, not toward the photos. In a democracy, citizens bear responsibility for the actions of their representatives.

    The political and ideological power of war photography, and the limits of that power, has long been an explicit subject of Martha Rosler’s work, from her seminal Bringing the War Home: House Beautiful (1967-72) to a more recent series of photomontages. Rosler’s Election (Lynndie) pastes the U.S. soldier and her leashed prisoner into a magazine layout displaying an ultra-modern, high-tech kitchen (a selection of Rosler’s images, including both those discussed here, can be found at <http://home.earthlink.net/~navva/photo/index.html>). A city in flames, presumably Iraqi, can be seen outside the room. At some point, the viewer notices the business end of the leash, hidden behind the cabinet, reproduced again on the glass of the oven door, placing the prisoner inside. A second Abu Ghraib photo of a naked prisoner cowering before an attack dog is attached to the door of the oven above. The viewer will also notice photos on the covers of cooking magazines and on files in a recipe rack. A pair of scissors and some clippings lie on the counter, as does an electric green, iconized print of the hooded man photo; a hot pink version appears next to a salad bowl on the opposite counter. On the face of a cabinet is a cut-out quote from the New York Times: “Be Part of the Solution . . . If this election is going to be a fair and honest one, concerned citizens will have to do their part to ensure that every vote counts.”

     
    Though he does not say so in The Abu Ghraib Effect, I have little doubt that Eisenman would read Rosler’s recent work as a direct descendent of Goya and Picasso, or of Gillo Pontecorvo, Ben Shahn, and Leon Golub–that “limited number of artists who acted against the instrumental and oppressive authority of the Western pathos formula” (122). In its explicit engagement with both politics and photography, however, Election (Lynndie) also forces us to think about the categorical difference trapped within the single word “representation.” As the legendary French documentary cinematographer, Chris Marker, has commented, “as long as there is no olfactory cinema . . . , there will be no films of war” (“smellies,” we would probably call them, just as we used to say “talkies”). Marker adds that this absence is “the prudent thing to do, because if there were such films, I can assure you that there wouldn’t be a single spectator left.”[13] Though more complex and powerful, the play of irony, horror, and critical distance in Rosler’s image is ultimately similar to, and probably no more effective than, the Ipod/Iraq parodies it cites. Even if, as Rosler’s title suggests, Abu Ghraib alone ought to have changed the past Presidential election, the newspaper clipping incorporated into the work appears more inane than hortatory. Rosler’s masterful assemblage will rivet any audience already convinced of the U.S. public’s complicity, duplicity and complacency; whether its critique gets us closer to the facts, or simply closer to the process of fabrication, is another story.

    Although Rosler’s technique in this image resembles that in her earlier work, its effects seem worlds apart. Take, for example, her Vietnam-era montage entitled “Balloons.” In the right foreground, a Vietnamese peasant carrying a wounded child begins to climb the stairs in a suburban home; to the back on the left, we see the white living room with its floral divans and sunroom, replete with rattan swing. In the corner, balloons lie in a pastel pile. After My Lai, and before Watergate, bringing the war home was an essential political move, one that helped puncture the bubble of faith enveloping the Cold War U.S. Balloons‘s ironic title is overpowered by a victim who refuses to be occluded by the sentimental tradition. After My Lai, the U.S. public needed to hear and to see in their living rooms Corporal Paul Meadlo respond to Mike Wallace’s question (“And babies?”). Today another tactic is needed.

    We can start with what the pictures themselves show. In a monograph entitled Sociology after Bosnia and Kosovo, Keith Doubt cites a rather lengthy passage from Peter Maass’s Love Thy Neighbor which, mutatis mutandis, applies to the torture in U.S. military prisons:

    Bosnia makes you question basic assumptions about humanity, and one of the questions concerns torture. Why, after all, should there be any limit? . . . You can, for example, barge into a house and put a gun to a father's head and tell him that you will pull the trigger unless he rapes his daughter . . . . The father will refuse and say, I will die before doing that. You shrug your shoulders and reply, Okay, old man, I won't shoot you, but I will shoot your daughter. What does the father do now, dear reader? He pleads, he begs, but then you, the man with the gun, put the gun to the daughter's head, you pull back the hammer, and you shout, Now! Do it! Or I shoot! The father starts weeping, yet slowly he unties his belt, moving like a dazed zombie, he can't believe what he must do. You laugh and say, That's right, old man, pull down those pants, pull up your daughter's dress, and do it! (51-52)

    As Doubt comments, the scene contains, in addition to the torturer and his victims, at least one other representational position, that of the witness. In Maass’s scenario, that position is occupied both by the gunman’s accomplices (it can hardly be imagined as the work of a single soldier) and by the “dear reader” whom Maass explicitly invokes–the observer who is asked to actively imagine him- or herself in the role of torturer.

    In many readings of atrocity, including those emanating from Washington, emphasis is placed on aberrant psychology or convulsive histories–the “bad apples.” Doubt, borrowing his analytic frame from Harold Garfinkel, discusses instead Maass’s scene of forced rape in terms of its social context. The passage is read as an example of an “attempted degradation ceremony,” a ritual that involves, by definition, a scene of denunciation in front of witnesses. Doubt observes that, “the denouncer and the denounced do not alone constitute a degradation ceremony . . . . To induce shame, a denouncer needs to convince the witnesses to view the event in a special way” (39). He cites Garfinkel:

    The paradigm of moral indignation is "public" denunciation. We publicly deliver the curse: "I call upon all men to bear witness that he is not as he appears but is otherwise and in essence of a lower species. (39)

    In his analysis of the scene from Maass, Doubt also emphasizes that the gunman’s attempt ultimately fails, for at least two reasons: first, the gunman himself violates the moral order from which he attempts to remove his victim, and second, the victim has no choice in the matter. He comments that, “if the degradation ceremony is to be successful, the denouncer must show that the denounced chose to be estranged from the values that the denouncer and witnesses share” (40).[14]

    The key to Doubt’s analysis, however, is his reversal of the focalization in Maass’s scene. Rather than share the gunman’s point of view, he attempts to give his reader the victim’s perspective.[15] Like Maass, he uses second-person address to produce this viewpoint:

    The gunman . . . is not just trying to shame you; he is trying to shame your relation to the world, the fact that you and the world share values, fundamental values such as fatherhood . . . . Only in this way can the gunman . . . presume to be a legitimate spokesperson for the world. As long as the world stands for nothing, the gunman becomes the legitimate spokesperson for the world . . . . If the dignity of the world is to stand for nothing, then the gunman speaks for the world and the world's relation to you, that is, the world's rejection of you and itself. (43)

    Using language more typical of existential hermeneutics than U.S. sociology, Doubt sets up here a key analytic reversal:

    Soon you begin to see that the world, even more than you, is being denounced. Your role at this point changes. You become not the one being denounced, but the witness to the denunciation of the world . . . . You see the world rather than you is being denounced, and you begin to pity the world. (43)

    Doubt sees the former object of attempted degradation as the ritual’s true interpreting subject, the only subject who, in this case, has authentic moral standing.

    Much of the world has denounced the Abu Ghraib photos for what they are: a record of beastly, state-sanctioned aggression. They also record an attempted degradation ceremony. For many U.S. citizens, however, the victims themselves have been less important than the faces and uniforms of the aggressors–which poses something of a problem. The evidence that those faces and uniforms present contradicts the a priori positioning of most U.S. war stories. Though it would be absurd to argue that the position of compassionate observer in the scene of sentiment belongs to any one nation, an argument can be made for the peculiarity of the U.S. fascination with this perspective. Certainly the story we tell ourselves about ourselves fits it rather neatly. Isolationists first, then liberators in two World Wars, we have since played the liberation theme over and over again, most notably in the other Americas, most recently in Afghanistan and Iraq. Like any compassionate observer, we anguish over the fate of innocent victims; unlike others, we also send in the cavalry.
     

    Such stories have consequences, both obvious and not so. One effect of this particular narrative–self-identification in the U.S. with an eighteenth-century construct of compassion–is that the Abu Ghraib photographs were not seen by the U.S. public as the rest of the world saw them. In a sense, perhaps, the U.S. public could not see them at all. If a nation that believes itself compassionate had actually seen state-sanctioned torture, would it have re-elected the man in charge? The photos’ reception in the U.S. has probably been affected by the depiction of smiling soldiers whose good humor contradicts the cruel and degrading actions they performed; two of the photos in which soldiers give “thumbs-up” gestures show a soldier’s smiling face just inches away from that of a dead Iraqi prisoner. These photos can only be described as trophy shots.[16] Unlike the rest of the world, we citizens of the United States of America cannot look on from the point of view of a compassionate observer. We are being hailed by our own soldiers; when someone makes a “thumbs-up” sign to you, you’re supposed to return it.
     

    In effect, what the Abu Ghraib photos ask us to do is join the party at www.nowthatsfuckedup.com. Before the site was closed down in April 2006, and its webmaster (briefly) jailed, anyone with an internet connection had access to just the gleeful sort of aggressors community which the Abu Ghraib photographs record.[17] In 2003, a 27-year-old Floridian named Chris Wilson had opened a website originally dedicated to amateur pornography, one where users could gain access to restricted areas either by paying or by sending in photos and videos of their own. At some point in 2004, Wilson decided to grant U.S. soldiers free access to the site, provided that they sent in some photographic evidence that they were indeed U.S. soldiers. What followed? Postings of the charred remnants of Iraqis, or of their mutilated heads, torsos, or severed limbs, accompanied by cold jokes from both photographers and viewers.[18] If, while surfing the internet, it were possible to stumble innocently onto such images,[19] wouldn’t one’s likely response be simply to clear the screen? Such a site would most likely not elicit sympathy, fascination, or glee, but just make the viewer run for the nearest exit. As one of the bloggers remarks in an essay response to Chris Wilson’s site, “We don’t want to know what the war looks like” (Gupta).

     
    As for me, at this point I’d like to step back into the eighteenth century again–where, in some sense, all this began. Perhaps the oddest feature of the vignette cited earlier from The Discourse on Inequality is its provenance. Rousseau’s explicitly acknowledged source for his scene of pathos and horror is Bernard de Mandeville (a pairing which, politically speaking, is about as strange as Judith Butler agreeing with Rumsfeld). As it turns out, however, unlike the French philosophe, the author of The Fable of the Bees intended his scene to be ironic. We know because Mandeville prefaces his portrait by giving us a sort of Deichmannesque supratitle–telling us in advance that he considers compassion a “counterfeit Virtue.” He thus intends not to reveal, but to expose. His version of the scene concludes gleefully:

    To see [the beast] widely open her destructive Jaws, and the poor Lamb beat down with greedy haste; to look on the defenceless Posture of tender Limbs first trampled on, then tore asunder; to see the filthy Snout digging in the yet living Entrails suck up the smoking Blood, and now and then to hear the Crackling of the Bones, and the cruel Animal with savage Pleasure grunt over the horrid Banquet; to hear and see all this, What Tortures would it give the Soul beyond Expression! (255)

    If you find this description only grotesque, and not comic, note the ease with which the word “pleasures” may be substituted for Mandeville’s “tortures” (“What [Pleasures] would it give the Soul beyond Expression!”). Such, for Mandeville, is a clear, distinct and unadulterated example of Pity or Compassion, one with which, as he puts it, “even a Highwayman, a House-Breaker or a Murderer” could sympathize (254-56). That one might well exhibit such virtuous sentiments and yet keep on being a highwayman, paramilitary, torturer or even paidophage, is the Dutch critic’s point. Mine is somewhat simpler: I believe that it’s time to think beyond this obvious, and apparently natural, triad of observer, aggressor and victim, given that its terms provoke wildly disparate and often opposing effects.

    Might it instead be possible to create, as Domna Stanton has suggested, “a new interdisciplinary field, one that conjoins the critical and interpretive practices of the humanities with the ethical activism of the international human rights . . . movement” (3)? The necessary steps are rather obvious. Taking the side of Harriet Jacobs against Hannah Arendt, Elizabeth Spelman has commented that, “The solution is . . . if possible, to make sure that those who are suffering participate in the discussion” (88). And yet, as a Peabody award-winning episode of the radio show This American Life put it in 2006,

    one thing that's just weird about Guantanamo is that in all of these years . . . why haven't we seen more of these guys on radio or TV? Over 200 of them have been released, right? At our radio show this week we were talking about this, and we realized that NONE of us had ever heard or read any interview with these guys.[20]

    How many interviews with Abu Ghraib prisoners have you read, seen, or heard? How about Bagram? How about the known unknown locations?[21]

    Among the foundational texts for the field that Stanton envisions would surely be Nunca Más (1984), published by the Argentine National Commission on the Disappeared, a group headed by novelist Ernesto Sábato. Sábato begins his prologue to Nunca Más by comparing the then recent history of Italy to that of Argentina. He notes that, “when Aldo Moro was kidnapped, a member of the security forces suggested to General Della Chiesa that a suspect . . . be tortured. The general replied . . . : ‘Italy can survive the loss of Aldo Moro. It would not survive the introduction of torture’” (1). Sábato’s answer to his country, to a State that “responded to the terrorists’ crimes with a terrorism far worse than the one they were combatting,” was to debunk torture quickly and to assemble painstakingly a report on human rights in Argentina. In place of the military junta’s blather about “individual excesses,” about acts “committed by a few depraved individuals acting on their own initiative,” the Sábato Commission presented a nearly 500-page tome, reporting on several thousand statements and testimonies and referring to over 50,000 pages of supporting documentation. It is nearly impossible to imagine a U.S. novelist entrusted with a similarly historic Commission. But why? Sábato’s prologue is arguably as essential to Nunca Más‘s reception as the evidence it summarizes. His strategy, the argument of a novelist, is to present the Argentine public with a structuralist analysis. “From the huge amount of documentation we have gathered,” Sábato comments, “it can be seen that . . . human rights were violated at all levels by the Argentine state . . . . Nor were they violated in a haphazard fashion, but systematically, according to a similar pattern, with identical kidnappings and tortures taking place throughout the country” (2, emphasis added). The general introduction to the assembled testimony fills in this pattern: its “typical sequence” is named “abduction–disappearance–torture” (9).
     

    In the PMLA volume that includes the Judith Butler piece cited above, another essay refers to Myra Jehlen’s suggestion, some twelve years ago, that we study “history before the fact,” i.e., history in the making, rather than “history as the past.” The “prisoner abuse” story is of course far from settled; as I’ve attempted to demonstrate, it’s hardly been opened. Even the trials of Argentina and Chile have not yet ended. The International Image Tribunal has some long work days ahead. One thing, at least, seems clear. No matter what new photos surface, and no matter what they depict, there will be those who wish to see the images themselves as the issue, rather than investigate what they depict. Not long ago, a publication by Human Rights Watch called for a special counsel investigation of prisoner abuse in Iraq, in order to focus on the command responsibility of Rumsfeld et al. The HRW report was given the title, “Getting Away with Torture?” To my mind, that’s the question we should settle.

    Notes

    1. This quote comes from the preface, by Ignatieff, to an excellent comparative study of truth commissions by Priscilla Hayner. Since truth is at issue here, I should add to Danner’s comment a response to it from an Argentine poet, social critic, and friend Judith Filc. “Yes,” she notes, “you didn’t have torturers, you just trained them.”

    2. See, for example, the study by Charaudeau and the collection of essays edited by Gow. For an insider’s view that argues against the so-called “CNN effect,” see Western.

    3. The term “sympathy” has an even longer and more complicated history; it was also used as a technical term in the Renaissance sciences of alchemy and astrology. Eisenman, in an excellent book on the relation between Western art history and the Abu Ghraib photos (discussed below), traces what he calls the “pathos formula” in art back to Hellenism. Carlo Ginzburg, in an important historical essay on sympathy, goes back to the Greeks as well, beginning with a discussion of Antigone.

    4. My attention to this passage results from its analysis by Philip Fisher in the chapter on Uncle Tom’s Cabin in his book Hard Facts. In a conference on sentimentalism at Brown University, Nancy Armstrong commented that she and Elaine Scarry have frequently made use of the same passage from Rousseau.

    5. The classic spoof of this structure can be found in Mel Brooks’s Blazing Saddles: “Won’t somebody help that poor man?”

    6. I am aware of the long history, and metaphysical foundations, that underlie constructions of authorial intention. My own intention is to focus, whenever possible, on public records of intentionality, and to include evidence of reception within the same general framework, conceiving of the ensemble, in short, as part of “the text.” “A thing,” Nietzsche argues, “is the sum of its effects.”

    7. This account, and the photos below, are taken from the coffee table edition of Haviv’s work Blood and Honey.

    8. One of the most famous, and influential, examples of sentimental representation with a similarly exclusive focus on the victim is Josiah Wedgewood’s 1788 jasperware cameo depicting a kneeling slave in chains, with the supratitle “Am I Not a Man And A Brother.” See Eisenman (80-81) and Hochschild (129).

    9. As for the Fikret Alic, the man front and center on the Time cover, the Deichman article originally claims that his horribly emaciated state was due to “a childhood bout of tuberculosis” (Connolly). This claim no longer appears in the on-line version of Deichmann’s article cited here. David Campbell has authored a detailed analysis of this controversy and its political implications in the Journal of Human Rights.

    10. One of the more extensive discussions of Limbaugh’s comments in the mainstream media was given by Dick Meyers on CBSnews.com (<www.cbsnews.com/stories/2004/05/06/opinion/meyer/printable616021.shtml>). See as well Kurt Nimmo’s comments at <www.pressaction.com/news/weblog/full_article/nimmo05082004/>. References to the remarks can also be found in columns by Maureen Dowd (New York Times 6 May 2004) and Frank Rich (New York Times 16 May 2004) as well as in an article by Stephen Kinzer and Jim Rutenberg (New York Times 13 May 2004).

    11. According to a Pew Center poll conducted between 5 September and 31 October 2003 (as reported by Agence France Presse on 17 November 2005).

    12. Rumsfeld, of course, was likely to have been less worried about the photos defining America than about them defining his administration. On the other hand, his refusal to release evidence, to confess his complicity, and, in general, the Bush administration’s attempt to pass the whole thing off as the work of a few criminal apples lead much of the world to equate these photos with the country. If the U.S. doesn’t stand against them, it stands for them.

    13. “Tant qu’il n’y aura pas de cinéma olfactif comme il y a un cinéma parlant, il n’y aura pas de films de guerre, ce qui est d’ailleurs prudent, parce qu’à ce moment là, je vous jure bien qu’il n’y aura plus de spectateurs.” From Loret’s review of Sacco’s Safe Area Goraude (my translation).

    14. As Eisenman point outs, and as Limbaugh implies, central to the pathos formula in works that celebrate torture is an attempt to depict victims as complicit in their own victimization.

    15. I came across Sociology after Bosnia and Kosovo after reading Igor Sladoje’s unpublished American Studies Diploma thesis, which uses Doubt’s analysis to open an investigation of the U.S.’s role in recent international conflicts. In Sladoje’s opinion, “the conflicts in Bosnia and Herzegovina, Somalia, Rwanda and Kosovo may be regarded as attempted degradation ceremonies in which the role of the witness to ethnic cleansing, genocide, violence and starvation was played by the world. For this gazing world, the role of the witness becomes problematic. Serving as a witness to evil simply becomes untenable because of the moral values the world claims to stand for. The world can choose to identify itself with either the denouncer or the denounced” (3). Bosnian himself, Sladoje’s text here performs, in paraphrase, the very act which Doubt sees as the end result of the Bosnian war: “Eventually, the roles are exchanged. The victim is no longer the one being denounced; he is instead witness to the denunciation of the world” (3).

    16. In an essay written only a few days after the photos became public, Luc Sante calls them precisely that. He also sees a resemblance between the attitudes they displayed and the photographic records of crowds at lynchings.

    17. See <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nowthatsfuckedup.com>; <www.thenation.com/doc/20051010/the_porn_of_war>; <www.theledger.com/apps/pbcs.dll/article?AID=/20051008/NEWS/510080427/1039>; <www.indypendent.org/?p=692>; and <www.eastbayexpress.com/2005-09-21/news/war-pornography/>. A selection of the photographs, with an introductory essay by Gianluigi Ricuperati and an afterword by Marco Belpoliti, has been published in Italy.

    18. On the “cold joke” and its prevalence in combat situations, see Glover.

    19. It wasn’t–you had to either pay, or to play by sending in your own.

    20. The show “Habeas Schmabeus” was first broadcast on 10 March 10 2006. Free podcasts are available at <www.thislife.org>.

    21. For an important exception to this general silence, see the work of artist Daniel Heyman based on interviews with Abu Ghraib detainees, as presented and reviewed in SMITH magazine.

    Works Cited

    • Arendt, Hannah. On Revolution. Westport, CT: Greenwood, 1963.
    • BBC News Online. “ITN wins Bosnian war libel case.” 15 Mar. 2000. <news.bbc.co.uk/1/low/uk/677481.stm> 15 Dec. 2002.
    • Berger, John, and Jean Mohr, with the help of Nicholas Philibert. Another Way of Telling. New York: Pantheon, 1982.
    • Brody, Reed. Getting Away with Torture?: Command Responsibility for the U.S. Abuse of Detainees. Human Rights Watch 17.1 (2005).
    • Butler, Judith. “Photography, War, Outrage.” PMLA 120.3 (2005): 822-27.
    • Campbell, David. “Atrocity, Memory, Photography: Imaging the Concentration Camps of Bosnia–The Case of ITN Versus Living Marxism, Part I.” Journal of Human Rights 1.1. (March 2002): 1-33.
    • —. “Atrocity, Memory, Photography: Imaging the Concentration Camps of Bosnia–The Case of ITN Versus Living Marxism, Part II.” Journal of Human Rights 1.1. (June 2002): 143-72.
    • Charaudeau, Patrick. La télévision et la guerre. Déformation ou construction de la réalité? Le conflit en Bosnie (1990-1994). Louvain-la-Neuve, Belgium: Ina-De Boeck, 2001.
    • Connolly, Kate. “He Was the Face of Bosnia’s Civil War–What Happened Next?” Guardian Unlimited <observer.guardian.co.uk/milosevic/story/0,,769071,00.html>.
    • Danner, Mark. Torture and Truth: America, Abu Ghraib, and the War on Terror. New York: New York Review of Books, 2004.
    • Deichmann, Thomas. “The Picture that Fooled the World.” <www.terravista.pt/guincho/2104/199810/deichmann_9701.html> 15 Dec. 2002.
    • Doubt, Keith. Sociology After Bosnia and Kosovo: Recovering Justice. Lanham, MD: Rowman and Littlefield, 2000.
    • Eisenman, Stephen. The Abu Ghraib Effect. London: Reaktion, 2007.
    • Fisher, Philip. Hard Facts: Setting and Form in the American Novel. New York: Oxford UP, 1985.
    • Frey, James. A Million Little Pieces. New York: Doubleday, 2003.
    • Ginzburg, Carlo. Ugly Wooden Eyes. New York: Columbia UP, 2001.
    • Glover, Jonathan. Humanity: A Moral History of the Twentieth Century. New Haven: Yale UP, 2000.
    • Gow, James, Richard Paterson, and Alison Preston, eds. Bosnia by Television. London: British Film Institute, 1996.
    • Hartley-Brewer, Julia. “ITN Denies Bosnia Report ‘Fabrication.’” The Guardian 29 Feb. 2000. 15 Dec. 2002.
    • Haviv, Ron. Blood and Honey. A Balkan War Journal. Essays by C. Sudetic and D. Rieff. New York: TV Books, 2000.
    • Hayner, Priscilla. Unspeakable Truths: Facing the Challenge of Truth Commissions. New York: Routledge, 2002.
    • Hicks, Jim. “‘What’s It Like There?’: Desultory Notes on the Representation of Sarajevo.” Postmodern Culture 12.2 (January 2002). <http://muse.jhu.edu/journals/pmc/v012/12.2hicks.html>
    • Hirsch, Marianne. “Editor’s Note.” PMLA 120.3 (2005): 713-14.
    • Hochschild, Adam. Bury the Chains: Prophets and Rebels in the Fight to Free an Empire’s Slaves. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 2005.
    • Hukanovic, Rezak. The Tenth Circle of Hell: A Memoir of Life in the Death Camps of Bosnia. Ed. A. Alcalay. Intro. E. Wiesel. Trans. C. London and M. Ridjanovic. New York: Basic, 1996.
    • ICTY Trial Chamber. “Judgement in the the Case The Prosecutor Against Miroslav Kvocka, Milojica Kos, Mlado Radic, Zoran Zigic and Dragoljub Prcac: (Omarska/Keraterm/Trnopolje).” The Hague, 2 Nov. 2001.
    • Jehlen, Myra. “History before the Fact; or Captian John Smith’s Unfinished Symphony.” Critical Inquiry 19 (1993): 677-92.
    • Kaplan, Robert A. Balkan Ghosts: A Journey Through History. New York: Vintage, 1994.
    • Latour, Bruno. “Why Has Critique Run Out of Steam? From Matters of Fact to Matters of Concern.” Critical Inquiry 30 (2004): 225-48.
    • Maass, Peter. Love Thy Neighbor: A Story of War. New York: Knopf, 1996.
    • de Mandeville, Bernard. The Fable of the Bees. Ed. F.B. Kaye. Oxford: Clarendon, 1924.
    • Mayer, Jane. “A Deadly Interrogation: Can the C.I.A. Legally Kill a Prisoner?” The New Yorker 14 Nov. 2005.
    • McGuirk, Carol. “The Sentimental Encounter in Sterne, Mackenzie and Burns.” Studies in English Literature 1500-1900. 20.3 (1980): 505-15.
    • Mehmedinovic, Semezdin. Sarajevo Blues. Zagreb: Durieux, 1995.
    • —. Sarajevo Blues. Trans. A. Alcalay. San Francisco: City Lights Books, 1997.
    • Rich, Frank. “Truthiness 101: From Frey to Alito.” New York Times 4.16. 22 Jan. 2006.
    • Ricuperati, Gianluigi, ed. Fucked Up. Milan: BUR, 2006.
    • Rieff, David. A Bed for the Night: Humanitarianism in Crisis. New York: Simon and Schuster, 2002.
    • Rosler, Martha. “Photomontages 1965-2004.” Gorney, Bravin + Lee Gallery, New York. 19 Nov. 2004 -8 Jan 2005.
    • —. Positions in the Life World. Birmingham: Ikon Gallery, 1998: 17. Rousseau, Jean-Jacques. The First and Second Discourses. Ed. R.D. Masters. Trans. R.D. Masters and J.R. Masters. New York: St. Martin’s, 1964.
    • Rumsfeld, Donald H. “Remarks.” Defense Department Town Hall Meeting. Pentagon, Washington. 11 May 2004. 13 May 2005. <www.defenselink.mil/speeches/2004/sp20040601-secdef0442.html>.
    • Sábato, Ernesto. “Preface.” Nunca Más: The Report of the Argentine National Commission on the Disappeared. Intro. R. Dworkin. New York: Farrar, 1986.
    • Sante, Luc. “Tourists and Torturers.” New York Times. 11 May 2004.
    • Sontag, Susan. Regarding the Pain of Others. New York: Picador, 2003.
    • —. “Regarding the Torture of Others.” New York Times Magazine 23 May 2004: 24+.
    • Spelman, Elizabeth V. Fruits of Sorrow: Framing Our Attention to Suffering. Boston: Beacon, 1997.
    • Stanton, Domna. “Human Rights and the Humanities.” MLA Newsletter 37.4 (2005): 3-4.
    • Time cover photos. August 17, 1992 and April 12, 1999.
    • Wallis, Brian, curator. “Inconvenient Evidence: Iraqi Prison Photographs from Abu Ghraib.” International Center of Photography, New York. 17 Sept. 2004-28 Nov. 2004.
    • Western, Jon. Selling Intervention and War. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 2005.
    • White, Ed. “Invisible Tagkanysough.” PMLA 120.3 (2005): 751-67.

  • Toward a Photography of Love: The Tain of the Photograph in Anne Carson’s Autobiography of Red

    E.L. McCallum
    English Department
    Michigan State University
    emc@msu.edu

    "Today everything exists to end in a photograph."

    –Susan Sontag, On Photography

    On Photography

    To speak of ending in a photograph, as Susan Sontag does, would seem to aver photography’s orientation towards death, an association it has held since its inception and one that has become practically axiomatic in photography theory. While Sontag means that our photophilia will turn everything eventually into an image (24), I’d like to ask what it means to end in a photograph, and what kind of end the photograph presents. For that matter, I’d like to interrogate the different ways of being a photograph. Will literature, too, end in a photograph or come to a photo finish? Does this end perhaps open up the form a photograph can take, complicating the truism that photography is thanatography? Might photography’s end be a proliferation rather than a singular event?

    Because film photography is, as Derek Attridge has pointed out, “analogically bound to the referent,” it faces a challenge in the digital age when the photograph “can always not be the direct effect of the referent on sensitized paper” (86). The change from emulsion to pixels impels us to rethink fundamentally what photography might be. Can we compare image pixels to those that comprise words? The change in medium raises the question of whether there is a change in the photographic relation as well: would photography no longer work through analogy, or for that matter through the contiguity of the negative and the printing paper? These questions push us headlong into the theory of digital images. But before we reach that end, before we consider what end has photography, or literature, come to in the age of the digital, I’d like to turn back and offer a palinode on the theory of the photographic image. Examining what’s behind the photographic image leverages a space to consider how the verbal medium for photography might come between film and digital.

    One can read Sontag’s claim as tracing out the conventional analogy between life and death, living and photography. To be sure, some of the most widely read photography theory focuses on death as the way of figuring ending in a photograph. Sontag herself sweepingly claims that “all photographs are memento mori” (15). Similarly, remarking on a photograph of himself in Camera Lucida (the book he wrote after the death of his mother), Roland Barthes tells us that “death is the eidos of that photograph” (15). Even critics who do not explicitly link photography with death tie it to implicitly deathly things: André Bazin, for instance, after suggesting that “the practice of embalming the dead might turn out to be a fundamental factor” in all of the plastic arts (9), goes on to claim later that photography in particular “embalms time” (14). Eduardo Cadava’s more recent reading of photography in the oeuvre of Walter Benjamin leads him to attest that “photography is a mode of bereavement. It speaks to us of mortification” (11). Geoffrey Batchen reveals that the link might reach back to portrait photography’s earliest days, when subjects’ “heads were inevitably supported by a standing metal device to keep them steady for the necessary seconds. Photography insisted that if one wanted to look lifelike in the eventual photograph, one first had to pose as if dead” (62); even so, “photography was a visual inscription of the passing of time and therefore also an intimation of every viewer’s own inevitable passing” (133).

    Bazin’s and Batchen’s revelation of time as key to photography’s thanatographic inscription is congruent with Christian Metz’s insights when comparing film and photography. Metz uses the photograph’s stillness and silence against film’s motion and multisensory appeal to support his assertion that photography is a thanatography. But Metz goes further, noting that through its linkage with death, the photograph “is an instantaneous abduction of the object out of the world into another world, into another kind of time” (158). It is the temporal disjunction of the photograph, in contrast to the film’s display of temporality–which, however similarly severed from the indexical moment, is nonetheless replayed in “an unfolding time similar to that of life” (158)–that most clearly demarcates the photograph from film in Metz’s account. He cites Phillipe Dubois’s remark that “with each photograph, a tiny piece of time brutally and forever escapes its ordinary fate, and thus is protected against its own loss” (158). Likewise, Barthes’s conception of photography is so imbued with time that he declares that “cameras in short were clocks for seeing” (15). Photography’s baleful association has become a usured figure for articulating the problems of absence and temporality that the medium engages. Batchen, reflecting on protophotographic theory, avers that Daguerre “like Talbot, seems to be suggesting that the primary subject of every photograph is time itself” (12).

    If photography is really about time, it may be aligned with narrative. Batchen notes that “in stopping or turning back time, photography appeared once again to be playing with life and death” (132). But if photography’s engagement with time and ends is like narrative’s, might it also turn to concerns other than death that as a literary form narrative has, like love or loss or immortality? The persistent alliance of death and photography needs to be troubled as it settles into axiom, because a too-pat conflation of death and ending occludes other concerns with time that photography theory can articulate.

    Little else but time comes to an end in the photograph. We might even ask of Metz, what kind of time? If “another kind of time” emerges, is it not linear time but layered time–whether a moment excised and pastiched into a future time, or the more immediate folding of time that digital photography, with its instant playback or easy proliferation on a network, affords. The fixing of the image–which evokes the cultural associations with death–happens in the middle of the photographic process, before the image circulates. Perhaps, then, photography’s association with death might recast that figure as the middle, rather than the end. The photograph would offer itself as the tain of time, bouncing the past into the future like the silver backing on a mirror that bounces our image back to our eyes.

    The photograph, however, offers not simply to perpetuate a moment or event beyond its time, nor does it merely indicate the absence or displaced trace of the depicted, but produces a new fold in the networks of meaning. When the photograph itself is supplanted by or transformed into verbal description, what happens to the absent or lost object/time of the photograph? It is not now doubly absented, but oscillating between the impossible “photograph” (which may or may not exist as actual object) and the verbal description. To reevaluate absence and time in photography is to intimate that the disjunction of the image might offer an escape route from death, provide a residue whose unending potential for recombination suggests a tantalizing immortality. The interplay of presence and absence, folded space and the space enfolded, invites us to consider such recombination and folding by examining some absent photographs, by which I mean photographs that structure a text but that do not appear as visual representations. These absent photographs, rather than silencing or subtracting by their absence, organize openings around which meanings can collect and layer across linear time. As verbal objects, these depictions function as photographs despite the difference in medium.

    My concern, therefore, is less with the possibilities of visual narrative than with the narrative of the visual. Camera Lucida is compelling in no small part because there Barthes narrates the visual and challenges the presumption that what is seen is necessarily present. Perhaps one of the most memorable images in the book is the unreproduced photograph of his late mother, the image Barthes calls the “Winter Garden photograph” (70). Barthes is not the only writer who verbally produces an absent photograph, and the reversal of the usual order of representation–the photograph being the absent object that is represented rather than representing the absent object–opens up a space to rethink the possibilities and parameters of photography in relation to narrative. As Attridge argues, “Barthes’s practice . . . shows that the referent is not the source of photography’s special power–although the referential may indeed be crucial” (87). Verbal photographs produce a kind of hypotyposis that hinges on the absence of the depicted object, namely the visual photograph. In seeing not Barthes’s mother (a doubly-layered referent) but the absent image of his mother, we not only perceive an experience analogous to Barthes’s experience of originary loss, but are vulnerable to be wounded by the punctum of the verbal photograph. Yet rather than work extensively with well-thumbed texts of Sontag and Barthes–texts which nonetheless remain in contact with my concerns here, because their insights incessantly return from the dead like photographs–I want to elucidate the problem of narrating photographyy by reading a more recent text that narrates absent photographs.1

    Anne Carson’s novel in verse, The Autobiography of Red, concludes its main narrative section with a series of photographs, or at least chapters that claim to be photographs. This is, therefore, a text that almost literally ends with a photograph, whose trajectory is predicated on a series of final or closing shots. The book is composed of seven parts, the longest of which, “Autobiography of Red: A Romance,” offers the most extensive and detailed narrative of the seven. The “Romance” has 48 one- or two-page chapters, most pithily titled by a single word, making it all the more notable that the section ends with a series of chapters titled “Photographs” and having different subtitles (although the very last one, “The Flashes in Which a Man Possesses Himself” offers a remarkable contrast to this pattern). The reader encounters five shorter sections before the “Romance” and one final segment, an “Interview,” after it. My initial focus is on the “Romance,” a modern rewriting of the ancient poet Stesichoros’s tale of the red, winged monster Geryon, since the relation between narrative and photography is most explicit there. In Carson’s version, Geryon grows from childhood to manhood, becoming a photographer and negotiating both his monstrosity and his unrequited love for Herakles. More classically, Geryon was a mythic monster whose murder and the murder of whose cattle was one of Hercules’s labors. Stesichoros’s writing of the tale, Carson points out in an early section, breaks free of the Homeric convention of relying on a specific adjective for each noun (“When Homer mentions blood, blood is black . . . Homer’s epithets are a fixed diction” [4]). Steisichoros also adopts the monster’s view, rather than the hero’s. These ancient innovations and the fact that their explication frames the “Romance” invite us to reflect on how we might understand the interventions Carson makes in thinking about photography. If film photography fixes the image to the paper, what does Carson’s verbal photography fix–or unfix?

    I. A Fine Romance

    The Autobiography of Red poses a number of visual and narrative paradoxes, and these hinge on photography. Perhaps the most obvious one is that Red did not write this Autobiography. Rather, a largely unmarked narrator tells the life story of Geryon, a monster who becomes a photographer. And while the text offers a recognizable trajectory through a life, and Geryon is in fact red, it becomes clear that the referent of “Autobiography of Red” may not be the Romance itself or the novel as a whole, but rather elements in the text–the series of photographs described at the end. In other words, the autobiography referred to is visual, not verbal, and the title is eponymous, not categorical. Indeed, the autobiography as an object in the narrative is referred to as having “recently taken the form of a photographic essay” (60), although this mention, midway through Geryon’s life story, curiously destablilizes the form of its object, implicitly raising the question of whether the photographs at the end are part of this same photographic essay.

    A second complication of Autobiography of Red is its range of composite references. In what might be called the romance’s front matter–two essayistic sections on the poet Stesichoros and three list-like appendices–we learn of the historical poet’s long poem on the red, winged monster Geryon who was killed by the hero Herakles for his red cattle. The first section begins with second-order representation, already reflecting on how the story is being recounted: Stesichoros’s poem survives only in fragments, some of which are still being discovered, we are told. This prolegomenon foregrounds the form of the fragment and renders Stesichoros a rather postmodern poet: “the fragments of the Geryoneis itself read as if Stesichoros had composed a substantial narrative poem then ripped it to pieces and buried the pieces in a box with some song lyrics and lecture notes and scraps of meat” (6-7). This excerpt instigates Carson’s theory of photography in this text: the fragmentation and jarring juxtapositions typify what photographs do to what they depict. That the fragments are still being discovered, moreover, intimates how photographs function in our daily lives: buried in boxes, files, or albums, they are still being uncovered as the sands of clutter shift to turn them up either purposefully or inadvertently.

    The “Romance”‘s ending photographs are, first of all, not visual images, but rather page-or-two-long verbal descriptions of scenarios, a snapshot of what readers conventionally project to be a more extensive, more continuous experience of what transpires with the protagonists–Geryon, Herakles, and Ancash–on their trip to the volcano Incchantikas. In narrative terms, this mode seems to be summary. Each of the chapters has as its first line what appears to be a description of the photograph that is the chapter’s subject. The first five are fairly concrete, evident descriptions: “It is a photograph of four people sitting around a table with hands in front of them” (136) or “a close up photograph of Geryon’s left pant leg just below the knee” (137). But the last two shift from concrete, visualizable nouns to more abstract, existential claims: “It was a photograph just like the old days. Or was it?” (142), or “It was a photograph he didn’t take; no one here took it” (145).2 None of these chapters is ekphrastic; the chapters not describe verbally some visual representation or work of art. Instead, these chapters narrate the moment or situation in which Geryon takes the photo. Because the attention turns to the instigating moment in the process of representation rather than to what is captured by that process, the novel refuses ekphrasis. The context, not the object, is described, and yet the description creates the absent photograph by pointing to it. Strikingly, the instant of recording the image is absent from the text; our attention turns to the context of the photographic process and misses the moment when the shutter clicks. Just as a photograph, according to Metz and Barthes and Sontag, excises a moment from the stream or continuum of experience, so too does this text excise the photograph from the coherence of the experience in the narrative.

    The peculiarity of the narrative’s shift into photographically packaged moments raises the questions: Why is this part of the narrative framed through photographs, or, more precisely, photographing? Why do the titular photographs emerge only at the end point in the “Romance,” since Geryon has been at work on this photographic autobiography for many years?3 What sort of end do they spell?

    The easy answer to the question why the “Romance” ends in photographs is that Geryon’s a photographer, this is his story, and the photographs’ surfacing indicate Geryon’s growing mastery over recounting his autobiography. But this answer is complicated before we even arrive at the photographic ending, precisely because “Autobiography of Red” has no single referent and each form of the autobiography carries with it its own peculiar time. There are the autobiographies marked by the time of production: Geryon’s first autobiography in the form of a sculpture, as his mother’s overheard phone conversation informs us (35), and the photographic essay form that Geryon’s autobiography takes not quite midway through the book (60) and which is elaborated for nearly thirty years beyond the adolescent moment when the shift to photography takes place. Indeed, the composition of the latter runs parallel to the trajectory of the Romance entitled “Autobiography of Red,” displacing the titular referent. There are also the autobiographies which are marked by the retrospective temporality of narration: the story of Geryon as the protagonist of the Romance, and the stories of Geryon as a composite of ancient and postmodern mythic monsters that make up Carson’s novel’s beguiling range of reference. This montage of possible autobiographies of red renders the photo-essay autobiography as a largely absent object that we only glimpse at telling moments. Geryon’s self-authored autobiography thus becomes like Barthes’s Winter Garden photograph, an absent image hypotypotically organizing the verbal exploration of the meaning of photography and time.

    The turn to photograph chapters at the end of the novel should be understood in relation to the end of the nineteenth chapter, set on the morning when Herakles first breaks up with Geryon. The mid-novel chapter thus marks what ought to have been the end of the romance, had Geryon not carried the torch for his lost love for decades more. The last lines of chapter XIX directly reference the autobiography as object, observing that “in Geryon’s autobiography/ this page has a photograph of some red rabbit giggle tied with white ribbon./ He has titled it ‘Jealous of My Little Sensations’” (62). The breakup happens when they should be still in their youth, not middle age; only the last lines describe the autobiography from the retrospective time of the narration. This is an unspecified future time–when taking the photographs is anterior to assembling and titling them–different from the time of the breakup or the photographing, which is implied to be his adolescence. The temporal rupture marks the trauma of Herakles’s breaking up with Geryon, yet the event can only be inferred from the actions and responses of the two in this chapter. The turn to the photo-autobiography at the end, moreover, recapitulates the Romance’s concluding turn towards photographic chapters and makes the object stand in for the event. That Geryon had been lying in bed planning this autobiography the very morning of the breakup (60) indicates that the autobiographical project is going on in parallel with the unfolding events of the romance (in the sense of affair). The question is then why we only become aware of this parallel register of representation at this time, and so briefly. While this paralleling connects Geryon’s photography with his romance, it also points to the layering of time that photography enables, and suggests that Geryon has trouble giving up the romance because it has come unstuck in time. Photography becomes the way that Geryon learns to deal with his own monstrous sense of the timelessness of the romance. Through Geryon’s example, Carson demonstrates how photography’s temporality is not an end, an arrival at stasis, but an experience of duration; with this move she also aligns photography with love.

    These closing lines of chapter XIX unquestionably mark a temporal disjuncture in the chapter’s narration that echoes the fragmentation of time Metz, among others, finds in the photograph’s power. The title of the chapter, “From the Archaic to the Fast Self,” contains within it the ambiguity between stasis and dynamism that Carson’s theory of photography unfolds through its verbal photographs. If on first read the “fast self” is the one speedily slipping away (as youth does), the phrase also describes the self made fast, as if fixed in the photographic medium. The temporal displacement of a photograph is moreover enacted in this particular narrational turn, in the prolepsis to the moment of narrating the story from some future point. This morning/this chapter, which initiates Geryon’s struggle to represent himself by the (to Geryon devastating) breakup with Herakles, is also the first moment that mentions a photograph and its title. The disruptive temporality of this chapter is our first hint that this photographic novel of development will not be following the usual progressive trajectory. The autobiography thus starts from its middle to rework the problem of ending by folding proleptically upon itself.

    Yet this photograph is odd for other reasons as well. The synaesthetic paradox of a photograph of a rabbit giggle foregrounds the text’s concern with the way representation works and with the limits of photographic representation. The monstrosity of showing sound provides an apt figure for the kind of temporality the photograph evokes–the impossibility of conveying the past to the future except through a description that can only induce us imaginatively to concoct the impossible temporal plenitude. Geryon is a photographer who aims for the edge between sound and sight, while Carson’s verbal photographs mark a similar synaesthetic edge in their image-pressure on the word. The introduction of radical sensory difference in this text’s depiction of photography indicates one way in which Carson is breaking away fixed forms of representation, just as Stesichoros breaks from Homeric epithet. The monstrosity of Carson’s photography, however, unfixes vision as the privileged and singular medium of the photograph, suggesting that we rethink photography as a synaesthesia of touch and sight, or sound and sight, much as written language is.

    The synaesthetic density of description in Carson’s poetic theory of photography offers insight into thinking the relation of photography and narrative. Might photography’s fragmentation and the complex temporal layering it enables seduce narrative away from linearity to embrace collage? (The film Memento‘s photographic and retrojected narrative offers a telling example of how photography assimilates narrative to its own time). If photography excises a moment from a continuum of experience, can photographs even tell a story? Sontag suggests that perhaps it cannot, arguing that we never understand anything from a photograph because it is excised from the flow of experience.4 Her claim, however, hinges not only on the fragmentary nature of the photograph, its capacity to atomize reality, but on the presumption that such atomization impedes narration or any other form of linkage among elements. Carson is not simply pushing the limits of photography from the visual into the verbal but in her emphasis on the fragment, and her formal reliance on verse, she also pushes the limits of narrative and its tendency to work against atomizing forces, as if challenging Sontag’s claims directly. By ending in photographs “Romance” disperses rather than culminates the narrative, and opens up the possibility that an autobiography, a narrative, or a photograph might not end in death. At every level of this text, Carson invites us to consider how fragments narrate; fragments are if anything more likely to be taken up into narrative relations as we seek to put a story to them to fill out their whole. But should we perceive that filling-in as positive or as negative space? Fragments in a series, especially those that purportedly relate in some way beyond mere juxtaposition, can produce relations complex enough so as to organize the fragments and their gaps into meaning.

    Photographs, if they can be said to narrate, would seem to do so primarily in the narrative mode of summary, telling in far less time than it takes the events to unfold. This presumes, however, that we can take in visual representation instantaneously, rather than slowly over time.5 Do photographs ever actually function as scene, telling the story in the same amount of time as it would take for the events to happen? In this novel’s case, the absence of the visual image slows down the telling and its relation to the event in order to produce the more immediate and intensified experience of scene. At a narrational level, the shift in this romance toward photographic moments at the end marks a turn from summary into scene, a recalibrating of the relation between story and discourse. But one must also consider why the photographs themselves, or their descriptions, swap the concrete for the abstract; this shift in focus implies a turn from some actual experience, some material presence before the camera, to the processing of the meaning of that materiality. That the final chapter is not a photograph but “Flashes” marks an endpoint to this trajectory: “flashes” are still material but they are also ephemeral, and photography could be said to be the trace of that material ephemerality. We are to attend not to the object but to the tension between the object illuminated in its moment and the network of gestures, meanings, signs that link that time/space to the present moment of photographic reception. The increasing abstraction of the photographs’ captions directs our attention toward time, which the narrative shift to photographs underscores in its focus on the interrelated processes of showing and seeing (and their dissimilar temporalities).

    By its end, the romance presents a doubled mode of narration, foregrounding the seeing as well as the telling (or narration-as-showing). The opening of this second order, however, also coincides with the introduction of mechanical perception and representation into the human activity of creation–a monstrous encounter indeed.6 Where the story and the photograph might have recorded or represented the same events in parallel but disparate media, this doubling means that the narrative records the event of photographic recording (if that is what narrative or photography does). The leap from shutter click to shutter click is less disruptive; moving from photograph to photograph logically accounts for the progression through the chapters.

    As the narrative turns explicitly photographic, becoming less a tale of events in the hero’s life and more a tale of the taking of pictures, Geryon inserts himself into the mode of representation alongside the narrator, minimizing his role as the subject of representation and being instead the instigator of the process. At once not only are the readers distanced from the tale into which they had been absorbed, becoming more aware of its layers of mediation both visual and narrative, but Geryon himself is distanced from his photographic objects. At the end of the chapter that comes just before the photograph chapters Geryon thinks, “I am disappearing. . . but the photographs were worth it” (135), as if the next sequence of chapters is the residue or remnant from his disappearance (a reversal of the photograph’s gradual manifestation on the page under the darkroom’s red light). Geryon is travelling with his ex, Herakles, and Herakles’s new boyfriend Ancash–so no wonder he feels rendered invisible, and struggles with negotiating the appropriate distance. Ordinarily–that is, if we were simply absorbed in the identification with the protagonist and the events he experiences–we might say that the camera serves prophylactically, protecting Geryon from being too involved in the subject of the story and photography. But that would only be if the object of the narrative and the object of the photography in this text were the same–and they are not.

    Rather, I suggest that the role of photographing at this point is apotropaïc: it serves to extend and subtend what is happening, to stave off the end of the narrative. Indeed, Sontag argues that photographing is not merely passive observation, but active participation in a scene: “it is a way of at least tacitly, often explicitly, encouraging whatever is going on to keep happening” (12). So Geryon’s photographs, and the titular torsion towards them, carve out a space for him to participate in the narrative itself, not only its events but its telling, just as much as the photographs’ emergence in the narrative signals his own self-realization. At the same time, photographing wards off–pace phototheory’s deathly obsession–the end.

    The photo finish of this novel, then, defers the end of the story as much as of Geryon’s relation to Herakles, and in doing so it transforms both. His photography helps him establish a new relationship to Herakles as well as to Ancash, and not just by giving him something to do while tagging along with them. Photography is what enables Geryon’s Bildungsroman: his autobiography is a story of formation or development as a photographer. A recidivist fling with Herakles at the climax of the “Romance”–for which Ancash gives Geryon a walloping–serves to convince Geryon that he has something other than his lovelorn connection to Herakles for which to be responsible: he has his creative vision to proliferate. This proliferation, the novel’s photo finish, redefines “end” not as resolution or culmination but as expansion or dissemination. The very last chapter, “The Flashes in Which a Man Possesses Himself,” returns us to the scene of photographing and compares it to the fires of a bakery oven; Ancash sees the flames, Herakles (lustily) the bakers, and Geryon a volcano over which the three of them soar, “immortality at their faces,/ night at their back” (146). Without a camera, Geryon nonetheless pictures the moment in a flash of inspiration. Photography, at the end of the Romance, has become fully insinuated into actuality, as the box/lightsource/recording mechanism/image configuration of the men’s figures silhouetted by the oven suggests.

    But the book’s culminating photographic turn also speaks to larger truths for novels in the age of the image. It’s not just that, as Sontag claims, “everything exists to end in a photograph,” but that this end must be understood to transform narrative, becoming an aim rather than a stopping point. In this case the end shows Geryon’s turn towards the actual, it shows him learning how to make something of himself without the camera, and demonstrates that the end of photography is an aim rather than a finality. If the end is in a photograph, or series of photographs, and the constant flutter of the shutter is an attempt to stave off that end, then ending becomes a set of relations or a matrix sustaining a meaningful tension. On this view, narrative’s typical death drive is subverted or diverted by the recourse to photography.7

    II. Punct-Time

    In his recent reading of Barthes’s punctum as an anti-theatrical aesthetic, Michael Fried argues that the punctum emerges through the difference between seeing and being shown. “The punctum, we might say, is seen by Barthes but not because it has been shown to him by the photographer, for whom it does not exist” (546). The difference in the agency of the presenter–human intention or accident–implies that photography can be pitted against narrative just as Sontag had speculated. That is, the antitheatricality of photographs means that they mark an impasse in the narrative relation between photographer and observer: they cannot see the same object, and indeed what moves the observer is something to which the photographer is impervious. On the other hand, Fried’s suggestion that the punctum emerges in this gap between showing and seeing evokes a visual dialectics that can engage narrative differently, folded along the lines of the observer’s relation to the object itself.

    Although this antitheatrical mode entails “depicting figures who appear deeply absorbed in what they are doing, thinking, and feeling and who therefore also appear wholly oblivious to being beheld” (549), and thus invites us back in to a realist or even mimetic practice of representation, the insurmountable misalignment of the photographer and the observer that the gap between showing and seeing produces diverts us from the mimetic. Yet the indexical claim of photographs remains; photographs refract the difference between mimesis and indexicality. The materiality of the image certainly plays a role in this refraction. As Mary Ann Doane points out, “the historicity of a medium is foregrounded, not escaped” as we look at old photographs and films (144). Precisely because time does not stand still in a photograph, the peculiarly layered temporality of photographs means that for all their apparent guarantee of being anchored in reality, and for all their evocation of realist descriptive codes, what photographs let us see is not what they show. If photographs are agential machines, not just clocks, for seeing, how might they serve as monstrous witnesses to an event?

    Exploiting this misalignment, Carson’s book is avowedly not mimetic; it plays on the opacity as well as on the transparency of the surface of representation–the beauty of the line of poetry or the power of the figure is as wounding as any thing, event, or experience it tells of–even as it foregrounds the accident of witnessing, the chance embedded in seeing rather than being shown. Fried’s contention about the punctum as, in essence, what the photographer is blind to, articulates the paradox of Carson’s photographic thematics of witnessing, although her work goes beyond his in attending to what the more tangible or palpable effects of that witnessing are. Opening out from the visual to the tangible, Carson’s photographs explore the tension between the opacity of the representational surface and the power to move–witnessing being a form of seeing that touches one, tangibly brings one into a hermeneutic circuit even as it keeps one on the outside of the experience witnessed. In their appeal to “what moves me” Carson’s photographs say “this” or “here,” employing the deictic shifters of language to secure the photograph’s indexical nature.

    The synaesthetic power of the punctum, thus, is central to what Carson brings to a theory of photography. Although Barthes posits the punctum as that accident that pricks, bruises, or is poignant to the photograph’s viewer (27), and he articulated the punctum as the most tangible effect of the photograph, the punctum is not so much something present in the photograph as it is the performative of the photograph. In Barthes’s hands, the punctum rather subtly becomes the site where narrative attaches itself to the image: “on account of her necklace, the black woman in her Sunday best has had, for me, a whole life external to her portrait” (57), he confesses. The punctum is precisely where narrative intersects with the photograph; what grabs or strikes us about a particular image is where we start to speculate on a host of other interpretive relations extending from the photograph. Narrative enters where the visual transubstantiates into the felt.

    Perhaps because this last part of Carson’s “Romance” lays before us a series of photographic puncta, projecting a sensation beyond the moment of the text, the photograph chapters grow increasingly to be about time. The first photograph chapter concerns itself with the time it takes a stoned person to set up a photograph; it is permeated with overt but also fairly straightforward markings of time. Only later does time emerge more paradoxically in the photographs:

    In the photograph the face of
    Herakles is white. It is the face
    of an old man. It is a photograph of the future, thought Geryon months later when he
    was standing in his darkroom
    looking down at the acid bath and watching likeness come groping out of the bones. (144)

    This is a narrative of the punctum. Geryon’s realization arrives in the temporal mode that Barthes locates in the photographic punctum–a simultaneous “this will be and this has been,” a sense of the future anteriority of death. What strikes Geryon here is the likeness as it emerges in its unlikeness. As Barthes notes, “this punctum, more or less blurred beneath the abundance and the disparity of contemporary photographs, is vividly legible in historical photographs: there is always a defeat of Time in them” (96). This reading of the punctum suggests that the apotropaïc turn to photography at the end of the novel is not a resolution so much as a transformation, a conversion of something with a definite temporal end into something that can defeat time. The punctum provides a transversal across time through the photograph. For this reason, it offers a vector for narrative.

    Fried’s reading intimates that every photograph could come to have a punctum and could come to be antitheatrical insofar as its meaning unpredictably unfolds through the passage of time. Time–through the persistence or duration of the photograph–opens up surprises in the photograph, renders seen what is not shown. This view counters the exclusion of narrative from photography in Sontag’s work, for Sontag’s objection to photographs having narrative capabilities served only insofar as it viewed photographs in the instantaneity of the present.

    Carson’s verbal photographs, however, provide a different fold of time, a more layered temporality, revealing the processes of narrative alongside a montage of temporalities. The anachronicity of the passage from Carson is striking; in the present of developing the photograph, Geryon discerns that the image, which would be already lodged in the past, having been taken, is actually taken from the future. Like a photograph’s fragmenting disruption of the stream of lived time, this temporal disturbance in the narration marks the moment from which Geryon looks back on his obsession from the safe distance of having resolved it. In addition, the narrative prolepsis shifts us into the moment of seeing the image rather than the moment of taking the image, in stark contrast to the time of the narration of the rest of the photograph chapters.

    The disparity calls attention to how the present of narration is implicated in the look at the photograph. The present of looking at the photograph recalls that the image is perpetually thrown or projected into the present. The photograph, as Metz noted, is always hearkening from sometime else. Because of its multiple, complex temporality of simultaneously now and then, the photograph can be construed as a fragment that disrupts a moment’s contextual set of spatio-temporal relations, which insofar as they evoke narrative, fill in and smooth over the disjunction. Although Fried wants to suggest that “it would be truer to Barthes’s less than fully articulated argument to think of the punctum of death as latent in contemporary photographs, to be brought out, developed (as in the photographic sense of the term), by the inexorable passage of time” (561), such a view rests heavily on the portrait photograph (just as Barthes relies on this genre), and thus keeps the thematics oriented towards death as the key figure for temporal change. Does a landscape or monument die in a photograph? Indeed, such depiction may be the only way for us forgetful beings to comprehend such a death. While of course photographs can reveal landscapes that are no longer there, this return to the theme of the death in/of the photographic subject, the ending of everything in a photograph, marks a familiar anxiety over the death or disappearance of the Subject in the postmodern era. Is not everything we make, actually, an embodiment or projection of our own death, and photography just realizes that a little more insistently? What then is unique about photography’s baleful end time? Metz’s discussion of the radical decontextualization of space and time that photography instigates challenges us to rethink the end of photography for what is shown. Yet the important thing we gain in thinking the temporality of the punctum is the idea that photographs continue to develop, even after they are “fixed” onto the page.8 If the punctum hinges on what we can see in a photograph, it thwarts the terminal sense of the “end” of a photograph through the unceasing return of seeing, and establishes the means by which narrative can enfold the image.

    Notwithstanding the significance of the final photos of the “Romance,” it is the theory of photography that Carson gives us outside the “Romance” section that might help us not only to capitalize on Metz’s and Fried’s readings but divert us from a death-driven interpretation of photography. The novel’s first theory of photography is found in the description of Stesichoros’s poem in the very first section of the text: “The fragments of the Geryoneis read as if Stesichoros had composed a substantial narrative poem then ripped it to pieces and buried the pieces in a box with some song lyrics and lecture notes and scraps of meat. The fragment numbers tell you roughly how the pieces fell out of the box” (6-7). On the one hand, this description rather strikingly compares to how photographic images fall out of the box of the camera, their numbered positions on the strip of film (to choose that archaic form of the film camera) or on the index print showing their order of appearance and hearkening back to an implicitly linear temporal order of their taking. Of course, individual photographs would not be tied to that linear emergence from the box; they are always independent of that order, selected for their various purposes and iterated elsewhere.

    The radical fragmentation and dissonant juxtaposition described in what I’m calling Carson’s first theory of photography colludes with how Metz and Barthes perceive photography’s mode of representation, for a photographic image will always hearken back metonymically to some other space and time and object from which it hails, whose light waves it records. Just as we presume Stesichoros’s now fragmented poem recapitulates a whole text, so too are photographs seen to be fragments from a past, coherent experience now indexically posted to a future moment. This metonymy, however, rather than tethering to wholeness, fragments the holism of the photograph’s recording of the real. Those metonymic temporal linkages, moreover, invoke narrative’s peculiar conjunction of the present of narration-time and the past of narrated-time. The photograph is always an object embedded in different, contingent relations, as varied as meat and lecture notes and song lyrics; its intervention in the world disrupts the presumption of spatio-temporal continuity, and displacing even the non-photographic objects in “reality” around it. As Metz claims, the essence of the photograph is the fragment, “an instantaneous abduction of the object out of the world into another world, into another kind of time” (158). While Metz wants us to understand this “object” as the thing photographed, reading him with Carson suggests that the abducted object is in fact the photograph itself. The abduction of the object, however, disrupts the relations in that first world, because the future anterior promise of the photograph warrants that it will come back to haunt the scene of its inception.

    The moment when Geryon develops the image of Herakles’s face in the darkroom is striking because its narration is so temporally disruptive, just like a photograph. The moment comes at the end of the photograph chapter, “Photographs: Like and Not Like”; the first line describes the photograph: “It was a photograph just like the old days. Or was it?” (142). At first we may think this is a more existential claim than the line (for example from a previous chapter) that describes a photograph of a dead guinea pig on a plate, and this difference signals that the photo montage has shifted from the concrete to the abstract. And we can understand this existential claim to tie in with the story’s development: Herakles has cheated on Ancash by sleeping with Geryon, so Geryon tries out that relationship from the old days and realizes it is not just like then. (Indeed, when Ancash confronts him, asks him how it felt, Geryon says “degrading” [144], although whether the feeling is what has changed or Geryon has changed is notably ambiguous.) But what has also happened is that the concrete description of the image has been displaced from the first line to the end of the chapter, while the first line captures the subjective reaction Geryon has to the image. Thus, here the narrative displays or rather stages the punctum. It is not our punctum, for the same reason that Barthes ostensibly will not reveal the Winter Garden photograph: it won’t strike or wound us.9 By showing the effects of the punctum, the unexpected or startling revelation of Herakles’s old-man face, the narrative lets us see Geryon’s ambivalence about Herakles, or even his desire to be free of him, which he cannot admit himself (what the photographer, in this instance, was blind to). This staging is concomitant with the fact that the narrative’s scope is now moving out beyond the moment Geryon took the photograph to complete the plot arc of picture-taking, showing us how the image turns out as well as how Geryon first reacts to it. The opening up of an arc of time, of duration, enables both the showing of the punctum’s effect (on Geryon, and on us through that focalization) and unfolds the immediacy of photography to the mode of temporal distance that Fried posits as making the punctum possible. The punctum Geryon experiences marks him as different from, if only incrementally, the photographer who could not see Herakles’s aged face at the moment of the shutter click.

    If the penultimate photograph chapter displaces its photographic concreteness, slipping into the guise of existential or abstract claims but–as the chapter develops as the photograph develops–reasserting its investment in the concrete or “real,” this chapter claims its solidarity with the previous photograph chapters. The last (explicitly) photograph chapter, on the other hand, seems to describe an impossible image: “It was a photograph he didn’t take; no one here took it,” captions the image linked with the seventh chapter, “Photographs: #1748” (145). Yet this photograph is in a sense the most real of all those in the novel, or at least the most honest, as none of these purely fictional images were ever actually taken. It prepares us for the final chapter of the romance, which leaves behind the photograph–although not photography, or the photographic event–altogether. In this transition the way we understand the photograph to represent changes; we exchange what it is possible for photographs to show for what they let us see. Carson thus provokes us to imagine photography without or beyond the photographer.

    The frankness of the chapter “Photographs: #1748” suggests why the photographs take over the romance’s narration in the end–indeed, shows why this text exists to end in a photograph. This end-moment, this climax of the narrative is inextricable from the incision of the photograph, even if that incision is itself fictional. And so this moment too, even though it is not even fictionally photographically recorded, nonetheless must be framed imagistically; the essence of photography has so fully overtaken the narrative that all of the text’s representations must be on photographic terms, in the tension between seeing and showing that the photograph so monstrously encapsulates in its time of development. And yet, rather than give in to serving visuality, the novel becomes the image the verbal portrayal would represent; the novel lets us see something beyond what it shows. Carson seems not to give us the photographs as visual objects, nor, I would argue, does she really give us the verbal representation of a visual image, in part because she is depicting the moment of representing, not the content of representation. Yet in so doing, she gives us a new kind of photograph. As Barthes uses the punctum to show us something beyond visual representation, to communicate a being-moved that is neither visual nor verbal but–because it is bodily–synaesthetically linked to both, Carson takes us to a level of photography beyond deixis. Its innovation is not unrelated to the novel’s being in verse, for verse intimates more than prose does, insofar as prose, like a certain kind of documentary aspect of photography, essays to give us the full picture and disavows the impossibility of that promise, whereas verse always holds back from full verbalization.

    What the photograph purports to show is something impossible–Geryon’s self-portrait on his flight into the volcano:

    He peers down
    at the earth heart of Incchantikas dumping all its photons out her ancient eye and he
    smiles for
    the camera: “The Only Secret People Keep.” (145)

    Like the previous photographs, the image records the shutter’s click, but here, because the camera turns on the photographer, the subject or event registered by that click is recorded as well. Notably, the camera must be aligned with the volcano, “dumping all its photons out her ancient eye.” The scene is that with his camera Geryon records being seen by the volcano. Or is it?

    This photograph chapter is called #1748, unlike the previous photographic chapters which all are subtitled by words. The photograph, however, appears to be titled “The Only Secret People Keep,” although the title only emerges in the chapter, as the narrative reclaims the moment of the shutter click from its position as the caption. This displacement of photograph caption into narrative underscores the curiosity of the numbered chapter. The #1748 refers to the number of the Emily Dickinson poem that serves as the epigraph to the “Romance” part of the Autobiography. The “Romance”–and here I invoke not just the section of this book but also the genre–tells of Geryon’s travel adventures and thematically links the myth of the yazcamac, the people who came back from being thrown into the volcano, who are thus eyewitnesses to immortality, with Dickinson’s poem which begins, “The reticent volcano keeps/ His never slumbering plan–” and ends, “The only secret people keep/ Is Immortality” (qtd. in Carson 22). The title of the photograph is the penultimate line of the poem, which tempts us with the question, is the impossible photograph of Geryon flying into the volcano supposed to be an image of Immortality? To affirm so would be to turn Carson’s warping of the axiomatic link between death and photography towards a positive end that suffers the persistence of the representation of the subject long after the subject has passed. Certainly a photograph’s persistence out of its own time and space, its long-term iterabilities, suggests that photographs might instantiate not death but immortality. But the photograph itself bears an inevitable degradation in its material existence–no more a recipe for immortality than Ozymandias’s monument. Barthes’s refusal to republish the Winter Garden photograph is not merely that “it exists only for me” but that “it cannot in any way constitute the visible object of a science” (73)–as if a science in some way precludes a capacity to wound. But what is the empirical object here? Despite his ostensible refusal to reveal the image, Barthes does, consistently, verbally, let us see it all through the second part of the book: that verbal description is the photograph for us, and has its own punctum effect. The poignancy of the Winter Garden photograph is as invisible as the photograph itself, yet both become objects of our knowledge in some way. As what matters, what endures, that objectivity or that visibility seduces us to link a photograph to immortality rather than to mortality; but on the contrary, it is the more ephemeral element of the photograph’s evocative sensations that tenders the photograph over to immortality.10

    The impossibility of the image the volcano snaps of Geryon, its arrival as a final chapter in a series that has become increasingly abstract, tantalizes us with the question of whether immortality is secret because it is not visible. Is this last chapter an image of immortality? Tempting as this interpretation may be, I think this is not the most interesting question to pose, partly because it presumes a kind of representational logic that hinges on metaphor and eschews the metonymic workings of photography. Rather we might inquire: What kind of immortal witness are the dead in the photographs, who reach out to touch us not as subjects but as the punctum’s temporal projection? What secret are they not keeping by their metonymical testimony? Are secrets only silences, or are they things that are hidden from view, buried? Insofar as the punctum comes from the other side of the camera, instantiating the photograph as the obverse of reality, it conceals as much as it reveals. What is the photographer blind to–what is the tain of the photograph?

    The tain, which is what, itself invisible, disappearing or folding behind the image, makes the image work, is distinct from that detail in the image we might not readily see. For instance, what is not quite apparent to us in this photograph from Carson is the apparatus, caught up as we may be in the gesture of representation. The immortal photograph Geryon takes in his flight over Incchantikas is for Ancash to remember him by: “This is a memory of our / beauty. He peers down” (145). But the equipment Geryon has taken is a tape recorder. On his flight, he hits “record.”

    The fact that the climax of the novel hinges on the recording of experience–encapsulated by the taking of the photographs, not by the looking at them–suggests that ultimately this text is not about the death-drives of narrative, moving toward resolution of a discombobulated equilibrium, but about narrative possibilities of the life-drive and its combinatorial force; the flashes of inspiration titling the final chapter of the “Romance” are not just metaphorical. The struggle is also Geryon’s struggle over whether and how to be taken. Who will take Geryon’s picture? Who will take Geryon? These two questions are imbricated in the novel, so as to transform the death-drive of photography into love. For Geryon to be taken, to be loved, he must love himself, become real, throw himself into experience–Carson reformulates such stock self-help-book themes to show how the real, the actual, comes after the photograph, not before it. The novel pursues Geoffrey Batchen’s question, “when is a photograph made?” through the parallel Bildungsroman paradigm to turn it, palinodically, towards “when is experience unmade?” The very fragmentation and temporal disruption of the photograph, its presumptive immediacy disavowing the deferral of the image’s coming into being, its inherent Nachträglichkeit, generates our experience even as it seems to document it. The tape recorder, which Geryon flicks on as he flies over the volcano, has become his apotropaïc defense; he won’t give up his monstrosity, his imbrication with the mechanical registering of experience, so easily. Precisely because of its interest in the paradoxical, even monstrous, combinations of sound and the visible, verbal and visual, cameras and tape recorders, the Autobiography remains a narrative about photography’s ability to produce experience moebiously, recombining life and story and their relation with a twist, rather than fixing, as Metz posits photography does, a slice of time in a sort of petit mort. The fragments of time or reality that Metz and others perceive as photography’s essence are also what makes possible a series of recombinations that overcome such a fixity. Photographs offer not motion but motility.

    III. What a Difference a Tain Makes

    The claim that the novel’s depiction of the photographs refuses ekphrasis might seem surprising, particularly given the novel’s rewriting of ancient Greek mythology, where ekphrasis was invented. I make this claim not only to suggest that the novel is doing more than describing photographs, even imagined ones, but to emphasize the change in relations of representation that the book’s theory of photography introduces, how it contests the presumably descriptive mode of photography itself. Just as Stesichoros changes the mode of representation through his more creative and open-ended use of adjectives, so too does Carson challenge our conventional understanding of the photographic relation through her non-ekphrastic photographs.

    The story of how Geryon resolves his unrequited romance with Herakles and becomes an eyewitness to immortality is enmeshed in a parallel, second-order story of how these fragments, these photographs, come to be and how they relate to Geryon’s life in complex, often anachronistic ways. The conventional, subject-focused tale of Geryon’s transformation into an active agent in his own representation thus renders him instead a secondary character in the objects’ narrative. Such splitting recapitulates photography’s own twofold functioning: the human agency of the photographer and the mechanical action of the camera or tape recorder.11 The novel’s negotiation between human agent and instrumental object mirrors the narrative of photography itself as a representational process. The tain of the photograph might come to be understood as the third term in this deconstruction that interrupts mimetic or indexical relation of subject and object.

    Monique Tschofen ponders the question that Carson’s first chapter poses in subtitle: “What Difference Did Stesichoros Make?” and replies that through his use of adjectives “one ‘difference’ Stesichoros makes is thus to find a way of using language that invites us to perceive with all of our bodily senses–to make us feel” (39). “He lets us see that words say but that they also show, that they make us think, but they also make us feel” (40), Tschofen argues. Her insights tie in with the notion of punctum as a specific kind of synaesthesia at work in these verbal photographs, as Carson plays off the felt and the thought, the sensible and the intelligible in her photo chapters. Carson’s sensible approach commingles sound and sight just as language itself does, and helps us account for the monstrous hybrid of Geryon’s recurring synaesthetic experiences (it’s not just during his tape-recorded photographic flight at the end; much earlier, for instance, he frets over the noises colors make, roses “roaring across the garden at him,” the “silver light of stars crashing against/ the window screen,” grass clicking [84]).

    If in the narrative of the taking of the picture what strikes us is the click of the shutter, a click we can hear no more than we can see the scene before us, that click is also the moment when in the making of a photograph a narrative is sutured. Barthes relies on narrative to explain why or how the punctum wounds or moves him; narrative comes to mediate the synaesthetic experience of seeing and feeling. That same moving is at work in Carson’s oscillation between the events of making and looking, between the sensory appeal of language and what it renders intelligible. Carson’s language is unquestionably sensual, not the least because its poetic form foregrounds the sensory, while the artful concreteness of the diction gives texture and vivid dimension to the language. Yet that sensory appeal produces a punctum. How are we struck, as Geryon is struck, by Herakles’s likeness emerging in the photographic bath? It is, of course, not a question of we but of I: what I am struck by as I read these photographs is the deadpan tone of “pants leg.”

    Tschofen points out, furthermore, that Carson views Stesichoros’s invention of the palinode, the counter-song, as his contribution to narrative, as a second difference he makes. Let us similarly give weight to the fact that Barthes launches his discussion of the Winter Garden photograph as a palinode. He ends Part One with the suggestion that his examination of public photographs thus far has honed his understanding of how his desire works, but has not enabled him to discover the nature of photography: “I would have to make my recantation, my palinode” (60). Does the palinode form explain the absence of the mother’s photograph, perhaps better than Barthes’s parenthetical determination that we could not see how he sees this photograph? It certainly helps explain why we are blind to that photograph. The absent referent provides the palinode: Stesichoros’s ancient fragmented text, the Winter Garden photograph, Geryon’s autobiography. The palinode serves as the backing, the tain, which brings the image on the surface, the ode, into sharper focus.

    While Tschofen astutely turns the question of the difference Stesichoros makes to “what difference does Anne Carson’s writing make?” (40), her answer invites more photographic development. Drawing on Carson’s claim about her own work that “words bounce,” Tschofen suggests that “words bounce when they connect with other words and with the people who use them” (41). Through this “bounce,” Tschofen suggests, “Carson shows us ways to break free from the constraints of the past” while she simultaneously “asks us to connect with it” (41). If we take this “bounce” of words to be akin to the “bounce” of a light beam off the tain of the mirror, the return path of the palinode, the parallel opens up to emphasize the transformations in understanding that such a “bounce” entails. Moreover, Tschofen’s insistence on what difference Carson’s writing makes as a dual temporality that both frees us from the past and connects us to it is strikingly isomorphic with the photograph’s temporality, its simultaneous fragmentation from the originary temporal flow and its indexically seducing us back to that past, even when we never experienced it directly.

    Tschofen’s reading of the significance of the palinode picks up implicitly on this idea of bounce, and she does so through Geryon’s own figuration as a photographer, suggesting that he is “a creature of reversals destined to go back to the beginning and revise his own ending” (44). Stesichoros’s palinode took back the story he made that ticked off Helen and made her blind him; the palinode thus narrates from what cannot be seen. The construction of the ode and the palinode sets up a relation between stories that opens up the ending, which typically resolves into stasis or equilibrium, into a circuit of meaning strung in the tension between seen and unseen, as well as the dialectic of shown and seen. A counter-song bounces or reverberates with the song it counters, and in that reverberation reveals new aspects, undoing some of the initial meanings, underplaying or redeploying others, but opening up space for the palimpsestic blurring of the original in relation to the new song. It is not unlike the way memory works by photographs; the pictures come to palinodically erase the event we actually experienced. We complete the ode and turn to the palinode, which counters the story told in the ode. Perhaps this helps explain why, after the photographic chapters, the book turns to an interview with Stesichoros, since an interview offers a forum in which to bounce ideas around.

    The interview as a form is anti-narrative, dialogical, and in this instance paradoxical in its relation to what has come before. Like a photograph, an interview usually comes after some event, some achievement, as a kind of post-hoc representation that also takes on its own autonomy, its own iterations. Rather than give any clear insight into what happened in the Romance, however, Stesichoros tells of his seeing. Yet his seeing is really Gertrude Stein’s seeing: an atelier in 1907 with paintings covering the walls right up to the ceiling (147), where “naturally I saw what I saw” and “I saw everything everyone saw” (148), phrases that echo Stein’s Everybody’s Autobiography, where she notes that “my eyes have always told me more than my ears. Anything you hear gets to be a noise but a thing you see, well of course it has some sound but not the sound of noise” (89). Stein describes her previous autobiography (of Alice B. Toklas) as “a description and a creation of something that having happened was in a way happening again but as it had been which is history which is newspaper which is illustration but is not a simple narrative of what is happening not as if it had happened not as if it is happening but as if it is existing simply that thing” (312).

    In this passage, Stein transforms description–what photographs are conventionally understood to be doing in their mechanical seeing–into creation. The concatenation of disparate things that that “happening” is to be–newspaper, illustration, history–recalls Stesichoros’s meat scraps and song lyrics and lecture notes in the box with his poem fragments. And like meat scraps and lecture notes and song lyrics, the illustration, newspaper, and history are all fragments that refer to or conjure both something else, something meaningful, and the items in themselves. Similarly, Carson’s description of Geryon creates his process of creating, produces a text “as if it is existing simply that thing.”

    In that interview, Stesichoros not only sees as if he were Gertrude Stein but also speaks like her: “What is the difference between a volcano and a guinea pig is not a description why is it like it is a description” (148). This claim bookends the theory of photography from the first section. If asking to what object the title “Autobiography of Red” refers complicates referentiality in the text, either by multiplying or differently connecting the title and the referent(s), it does so in order to begin to articulate this theory of photography as a problem of likeness, not a solution that solidifies a representation to its real object. If the theory of photography finds the photograph to be inherently fragmentary, then that too helps us to see better why photography would be a problem of likeness. As a problem of likeness, photography is not based in likeness but in difference. And if we lose the idea that photography comes from likeness, can we shake free of the idea that photography’s end is inextricably linked with death, rather than with the recombination of the likenesses?

    It is therefore no accident that this version of Geryon’s story is a romance, not a tragedy. It is about the possibilities and potentialities for recombination rather than about the force of destiny played out within the tragic unities of time, space, action. As a romance it is a story of the tangled complications and combinations of love, and is also a romance in its engagement with the fantastic or supernatural–such as red-winged monsters flying over volcanoes to take pictures. Its notion of photography itself is also romantic, whether photography is theorized as a supernatural process for manipulating time, or a way to access a ghostly presence of real objects. The most important thing Carson’s text does is redefine photography not in relation to death but in relation to love, and the theory of photography embedded in Stesichoros’s Steinian sentence is crucial to that redefinition. “What is the difference between a volcano and a guinea pig is not a description why is it like it is a description.” (148).

    Photography is typically construed to be about likeness, to produce a likeness; our habitual reliance on its capacity to document is one example of this presumption.12 As Sontag notes, “the photographic purchase on the world, with its limitless production of notes on reality, makes everything homologous” (111). Even though we know darn well its capacity for distortion, the photograph’s power to describe lets it be taken for a mirror. As we do with the photograph, we habitually think that the mirror is a reflection of the world, of reality. We use the metaphor of the mirror to indicate some unmediated representational process. In our everyday presuppositions about photography’s capacity to represent, as when we see photographs on someone’s desk or in the newspaper, we presume that the image in the photograph is pretty much like what it depicts. But if that were the case, we would not have that disorienting reaction to our own photograph (do I look like that?) or eagerly play back digital images we’ve just taken to see how they look. This disorientation or impatience speaks to a fundamental truth about likeness of /in a photograph: it is not a similarity, but a radical difference that must be bridged by the description that accounts for “why is it like it.”

    On this view, photography is a metonymic practice that fundamentally questions why is it like it. Barthes concurs, at least as far as metonymy goes; he begins Camera Lucida by considering that a photograph is a transmission of light waves that touch their subject and bounce back to be registered on the photographic film before they touch our eyes (3). Sontag, on the other hand, uses an implicitly metonymic view of photography to challenge our sense of how it produces likeness: “A photograph is not only like its subject . . . it is an extension of that subject; a potent means of acquiring it, of gaining control over it” (155). The photograph is radically contingent on its original context while nonetheless asserting some relational, even referential claim to have an originary or anterior object. Yet the indexicality of the photograph–on which both Barthes and C.S. Peirce rely–misleads us into thinking that photographs have a relation to the object. Photographs describe only insofar as they say why two completely disparate things–guinea pigs and volcanoes, for instance, or a photograph and its object–are like. If that likeness is based on contiguity or, rather, on a set of contiguous relations from object to camera to photograph, it nonetheless still poses a question. Indeed, indices, as Doane notes, “have no resemblance to their objects, which, nevertheless, cause them” (133). The question for photography, and for the Autobiography of Red, is how likeness could be founded on the contiguity rather than on the relational or referential claim.

    Contiguity, the underpinning of the figure of metonymy, is about spatial relations; the photograph’s indexicality attests to a particular spatial configuration, viz., the presence of the photographed object in relation to the camera and the photographing subject or agent. By contrast, metaphoricity turns on a kind of likeness, a striking similarity in a field of difference that does not require the same spatial distinction. So the problem of likeness would seem to hinge on metaphorics. Certainly the sense that metaphor transports meaning across difference seems to encapsulate what a photograph does, temporally speaking: it transports meaning, an image, across a differential field of time and space. Yet when we try to say “why is it like it,” why the photograph is like its represented object, we look to the insistence on the photograph’s indexicality to guarantee its connection to that displaced time and space. As Peter Geimer observes, the indexicality of photography is repeatedly figured metaphorically, through the trace, as if the photograph operates like the photogram, which records the physical contact of the object itself on the light-sensitive medium, rather than recording a pattern of lightwaves. Geimer avers that “in the case of photography we must be careful to speak of continuity and touching in a rather narrow sense of the words. Or does the appearance of a ray of light qualify as direct physical contact . . . ? Does light ‘touch’ the object upon which it shines? Is a lit surface an ‘imprint’ of something?” (16). Yet while Geimer puts pressure on the tactile impression of the index (the footprint, the weathervane, the death mask), he does not give up entirely on contiguity, for contiguity makes possible the chance event, the contingencies captured by the photograph in its making. Poised between the mechanical and the human agent, and uncertain of how long it will take to make a photograph–a second for a click or decades for the image to be selected for printing or for the image to be seen–“photographers are only partly aware of what they are doing” (19).

    Geimer’s questions open up the space (if you will) to think through the contiguity of photography by acknowledging and embracing the synaesthesia between the visual and the tactile that Carson’s photographs anticipate and articulate so clearly. The indexical relation of the photographic object suggests to the observer that vision is material contact, rendering the seen as something fundamentally touching. This understanding of the contiguity of photographs frees us from “the old idea that some aspect of the depicted scene has gone into its photographic double” (Geimer 23), without relinquishing the idea that photographs have the power to attest which makes them so compelling. The indexical relation of the beholder to the object photographed suggests that we search for likeness along metonymic lines, to discern what touches. Likeness in photography thus hinges on metonymy rather on simile. Barthes’s sense of his visual connection to Napoleon, mediated through the photograph of Bonaparte’s brother, constructs the photograph as a long-durée rearview mirror.

    A mirror works because of its tain, the thin layer of silver backing on the glass that gives the glass its special reflectivity, that makes it a mirror and not a window. The tain of the mirror blocks our view but at the same time makes it possible to see differently. It alters–arguably creates–the visual dialectic, redirecting light waves from the object mirrored to the subject beholding; often, those are the “same” entity (although as Lacan suggests, they are not). The tain not only returns the gaze blindly but enables us to see behind ourselves. A mirror, through the tain, thus provides us with a metonymical relation to ourselves or mediates our metonymical relation to distant objects. I’m interested in this figure of the tain for what its analogy to photography reveals about the visual, given that photography has such a strong convention of direct representation, of being a mirror to the world. The mirror functions reassuringly as deixis. What, then, is the tain of the photograph?

    Although–or rather, because–silver is used in the printing of black and white photographs, where it forms the patterning on the page like the black of print letters or the colors whose lightwaves are reflected in the mirror, it is not the tain of the photograph. Silver composes the materiality of the photographic image rather than serving to redirect or re-destine the mirror image. In the gelatin photograph, silver operates like a metaphor, organizing samenesses (of tone or pattern or line) in a field of difference in order to convey meaning. In the mirror, silver functions metonymically, bending the spatial relations of light into a fold, a new set of contiguities. This elucidates the function of the tain: it works metonymically to fold space into new relations. It is the touch that redestines the image.

    Carson’s thematics suggest that the tain of the photograph is not silver but red: red is the color of the negative strip, and the color of the darkroom light, in which the image emerges in its chemical bath, to be fixed onto the paper. Red is what we do not see in the process of the image’s development but what lets us see the image’s development and production. That same red light is the color of a volcano’s lava flow, the earthly liquid glow emanating from below the solid black fragments of rock that break apart in the pulsion of the volcano’s eruption (another illumination of material production). When Geryon flies over the volcano and witnesses the red glow, which redirects his life trajectory and maybe even makes him immortal, the push from below of the volcanic eruption is akin to, isomorphic with, the eruption of the image onto the photographic page. The chapter in which Geryon watches Herakles’s face emerge in the photographic bath under the red light also recounts the moment when that photograph was taken: it is no coincidence that Herakles had looked then at Geryon and said “Volcano time?” (144). The unmarked ellipsis in the text between Herakles’s comment and the photograph’s emergence nonetheless erupts to redirect the timing of the story (the shift from moment of shutter click to time of processing) and the meaning of Herakles’s question (is it a reference to Ancash’s having exploded at Geryon? To Ancash’s telling Geryon to use those wings and fly over the volcano? To the repetition of their previous plans to journey to a volcano? Is the time of volcano time a projection of the future or of the past or a queer time that is neither?). In the same way, photographs have their own volcano time, have erupted into our reality, emerging from the red bath into the light of day and disrupting the surface of that daily experience. As Sontag posits: “Instead of just recording reality, photographs have become the norm for the way things appear to us, thereby changing the very idea of reality, and of realism” (87). Red keeps the film blind to the manufacturing process, but also figures as what we do not see as we make images our reality. The read photograph redirects our gaze at reality and realism.

    Sontag’s assertion does several things: it invites us to rethink Metz’s claim about photography’s power to fragment reality, a view that remains subtended by a theory of likeness (that the only way photographs fragment reality is if they bear some likeness to it); it suggests how photographs are aligned in relation to narrative (i.e., with rather than against) through their normative power to subordinate our seeing to what is shown; and it advises why we might want to understand photography through Carson’s purely verbal text. For it is the power over seeing that Sontag discerns in photography’s authority over realism that elucidates the difference of Carson’s argument about the difference Stesichoros makes. In the forcefulness of their representational relation, photographs impart an extreme form of likeness. The chain of making–Geryon’s making photographs as his autobiography, the narrative’s shift to the level of Geryon’s photograph making, and Carson’s remaking of Geryon’s story–not only challenges the idea that photography records reality, but opens up gaps within which the question “why is it like it” resonates. We pose this question when we see beyond or other than what we are shown–that is, when the punctum marks the opening for the duration of the photograph to assert itself whether through narrative or through synaesthetic condensation of a feeling into what we see. Carson’s verse photographs do both. What wounds Barthes, if not Barthesian readers, is the temporal distance mapped by the image, a distance always resonant as loss (Camera Lucida is a work of mourning). What wounds us as Carson’s photographic witnesses is the richness of what is left intimated but unsaid, the circumstances of the making of the image for what they suggest about the unshown image. Carson takes the antitheatricality Fried finds in Barthes’s photography theory to a new level of anti-mirroring, rendering the tain of the photograph more dynamic than quicksilver. Carson’s photographs propose that the tain of the photograph is the palinode that enables us to ask “Why is it like it?”

    The mirroring that photographs purportedly do describes yet also atomizes reality to such an extent that they invite a fascinated speculation or deduction from the evidence before one. Sontag is concerned that the pervasiveness of photography belies its lack of access to the world, to knowing the world, to understanding. “Strictly speaking,” Sontag tells us, “one never understands anything from a photograph” (23). This claim works simultaneously to refute the access to reality that photography’s documenting function promises, as well as to account for a necessary fascination with a photograph, that even if a photograph instantaneously shows us its subject, it takes time really to see what is in a photograph. What one understands of a photograph comes from the gap in the image’s relation to the world. One may never understand anything a photograph shows, but one can understand something from what one sees in a photograph. That seeing is meaningful because of the temporal gaps and layers introduced by the photograph. If we reconsider the claims by Metz and others that as photographs fragment time, isolating moments one from another, they conceal how that moment, event, or object functions, we can revisit how we might understand something from a photograph, at least from some photographs. The recombinatorial power of the fragment is, importantly, a generative feature, and emerges from the question of “why is it like it?” as the force of (photographic) description.

    Just before she concludes her essay in which she makes the claim with which I begin, Sontag observes that, “in contrast to the amorous relation, which is based on how something looks, understanding is based on how it functions. And functioning takes place in time, and must be explained in time. Only that which narrates can make us understand” (23). That Autobiography of Red is indeed a romance, a story about an amorous relation, explains why it so forcefully engages the problem of how photography looks, and why it must torque appearance figured as the photograph in words. Sontag sets the photograph as instantaneous appearance in opposition to narrative as a temporal understanding. But because as a romance Autobiography of Red is also a quest to understand that relationship, and Geryon seeks that understanding through photography and through a narrative that becomes photography, Sontag’s opposition ought to be reconsidered. The fragmentation of Carson’s narrative photographs paradoxically initiates a theory of photography in an ancient poet, but does so in order to revisit how we have understood temporality to work in the photograph: time’s linearity and the disruption of that linearity by the photograph structure the metonymic relation of the image to its object. The verbal photographs demonstrate that the very contingency of photography, its simultaneous excision and interpellation of fragments of space in time, necessitates narrative–indeed, cannot shake it off. A photograph however lost from its original object inserts itself into a new narrative relation, underpinned by time’s metonymy and propelled by the question of likeness.

    Which brings us back to the problem of the tain. The tain of the mirror helps transform light from wave to image, intervenes with contiguity to create likeness, bringing out the information or data that lightwaves carry. The tain of the photograph is that which intervenes to change the direction of the light’s trajectory–the narrative’s trajectory. The tain of the photograph, then, shows that the photograph is not an end, only a redirection: from image to narrative, from material to immaterial, conveying a play on the ambiguity of “like”–not just a question of likeness but of liking. The tain of the photograph, like the palinode, folds the narrative away from an ending, away from its death-drive towards fixity and stasis. The redirection participates in a transformation, and narrative lodges within transformation. If this is the autobiography of Red, it is because it is the story of the tain of the photograph, the obverse workings of photography as a practice of love. This is why no “real” photographs appear in the text. The tain of the photograph is what makes these verbal constructions photographs. It has less to do with the mythic indexicality of the subject’s lightwaves registering on emulsion, and more to do with posing the photographic question of why is it like it, which is itself produced by the photograph’s layered, volcanic temporality. Photographs cannot account for their production, cannot represent the red light of their tain. If “red” is the tain of the photograph, it is not only the special light that enables us to see the image as it emerges, or the film itself as it is manufactured, but the Doppler-shift of time moving away from us. We are the ones anchored in the present, while the moment captured in the snapshot is itself in motion, working along the complex temporality of the duration of the image, as the afterlife of a moment. The “red” of the figure of the photograph’s tain is the touch of distance itself. The self-written story of this tain, then, provides the account of how intractably narrative folds into the monstrous matter of making.

    The tain or palinode of the photograph redirects our look at the “real world” and turns us instead to the sensation of the narrative image. If, today, everything exists to end in a photograph, that end bends the trajectory of indexicality beyond an affirmation of thereness. What “Autobiography of Red” “refers” to, then, is the transformative power of this reflection. It is and is not the life story of Geryon, red-winged monster photographer; it is and is not the photographic montage Geryon makes about his life; it is and is not the process of narrating that tells the story of photography’s transformation of the real into something that makes us ask, why is it like it?

    Notes

    1. There is no shortage of narrated photographs in postmodern literature. From Bob Perelman’s poem “China,” which purports to caption photographs of Chinese scenes, to the climax of John Edgar Wideman’s Two Cities the absent photograph may be the quintessential figure of postmodern representation, providing the occasion for the collapse of narrative into description.

    2. There are two senses of “take” in the last caption; not just the idiomatic expression of clicking the shutter to record the photograph, but also the possibility of appropriating an image, abducting it from its time or, rather, since the gesture is cast in the negative, a refusal to bring it along and thus leaving it behind.

    3. Chapter VIII, “Click,” narrates a youthful Geryon determinedly focused on taking a picture of his mother while she’s trying to find out “who is this new kid you’re spending all your time with?” (40). It’s the beginning of Geryon’s relationship with Herakles, so while the chapter hinges on the taking of the picture, the picture-taking is subordinated to the story of Geryon’s silence about the relationship and his feelings. (In fact, Geryon “had recently relinquished speech” [40].) It’s a silence that nonetheless speaks to readers. Such earlier references to photographic action remain distinctly different from the ending photographic chapters.

    4. Sontag claims that “photographs do not explain: they acknowledge” (111), yet at the same time she underscores that they conceal as they reveal. Sontag aims to undermine the commonly held notion that photography is “an instrument for knowing things” (93). In her view, the “knowledge gained through still photographs will always be some kind of sentimentalism, whether cynical or humanist” (24); with Barthes, this sentiment is transformed into the powerful notion of the punctum. Sontag’s opposition of understanding and photography aligns narration and time against the image (23).

    5. Arguably, this is what happens in Antonioni’s Blow-Up, where the photographer comes to realize over the course of the weekend what the picture shows, in the same time frame that the murder mystery it seems to represent takes place. The development of the murder’s mystery parallels the time of the development of the film into image.

    6. Walter Benjamin notes that the first photographs “present the earliest image of the encounter of machine and man” (678).

    7. See Peter Brooks’s reading of Freud’s Beyond the Pleasure Principle in Reading for the Plot for an exposition of this death drive in relation to narrative.

    8. Geoffrey Batchen explores this dynamic at length in “Taking and Making,” which opens with the question, “When is the photograph made?” and examines the selection of different prints by photographers depending on the aesthetic trends of the moment, for example Steiglitz’s holding off for twenty-seven years before printing an image he took around 1889, and then not exhibiting it until 1921. Batchen concludes that photographs “exist only as a state of continual fabrication, constantly being made and remade within twists and turns of their own unruly passage through space and time” (106).

    9. Of course, Barthes’s Winter Garden photograph is so memorable precisely because it does wound us. Moreover, our perception of it changes as we read and re-read Camera Lucida in precisely the way that Fried’s reading of the punctum as development invites. But this absent photograph only wounds us because it is a verbal photograph; because of the significance of that photograph to Barthes’s palinode, that is the only way in which its punctum can be revealed.

    10. Photography theory’s obsession with death is thus really a fixation on the persistence of the afterlife of the image, what Doane describes as “the inescapable necessity of matter, despite its inevitable corrosion, decay, and degeneration” (146). The immortality of photographs is therefore not lodged in the materiality of the image on the paper, but in the punctum and its power to affect us. Along similar lines, Doane’s reading of Gombrich and Krauss on the question of what a medium is leads her to posit that “the experience of a medium is necessarily determined by a dialectical relation between materiality and immateriality” (131).

    11. Bazin notes that with photography, “for the first time, between the originating object and its reproduction there intervenes only the instrumentality of a nonliving agent” (13). He thus emphasizes the objective aspect of photography and downplays the agency of the photographer. As Sontag has observed, the question of what the photographer really adds is certainly still significant, but by elucidating the paradoxes of the figure of the professional photographer she underscores the importance of human agency in photography. See her “Photographic Evangels” chapter.

    12. Siegfried Kracauer, for instance, foregrounds this aspect by beginning his essay on photography with a discussion of the likenesses of a film diva and of a grandmother (47-48). While he contends that as time passes, the significance of likeness fades as a photograph archives the elements it documents, he concludes that this residual organization of elements in old photographs is in fact not an organization yet at all, but rather that “the photograph gathers fragments around a nothing” (56) underscores my larger concern in this essay with fragmentation and photography.

    Works Cited

    • Antonioni, Michaelangelo. Blow-Up. MGM Studios. 1966.
    • Attridge, Derek. “Roland Barthes’ Obtuse, Sharp Meaning” Writing the Image after Roland Barthes. Ed. Jean-Michel Rabaté. Philadelphia: U Pennsylvania P, 1997. 77-89.
    • Barthes, Roland. Camera Lucida: Reflections On Photography. Trans. Richard Howard. New York: Hill and Wang, 1981.
    • Batchen, Geoffrey. Each Wild Idea: Writing Photography History. Cambridge: MIT P, 2001.
    • Bazin, André. “The Ontology of the Photographic Image.” What Is Cinema? Vol. 1. Sel. and trans. Hugh Gray. Berkeley: U California P, 1967. 9-16.
    • Benjamin, Walter. The Arcades Project. Trans. Howard Eiland and Kevin McLaughlin. Cambridge: Belknap, 1999.
    • Brooks, Peter. Reading for the Plot: Design and Intention in Narrative. New York: Vintage, 1985.
    • Cadava, Eduardo. Words of Light: Theses on the Photography of History. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1997.
    • Carson, Anne. Autobiography of Red: A Novel in Verse. New York: Vintage, 1998.
    • Dickinson, Emily. The Complete Poems of Emily Dickinson. Ed. Thomas H. Johnson. Boston: Back Bay, 1961.
    • Doane, Mary Ann. “Indexicality and the Concept of Medium Specificity.” differences 18.1 (Spring 2007): 128-52.
    • Fried, Michael “Barthes’s Punctum.” Critical Inquiry 31.3 (Spring 2005): 539-74.
    • Geimer, Peter. “Image as Trace: Speculations about an Undead Paradigm.” Trans. Kata Gellen. differences 18.1 (Spring 2007): 7-28.
    • Kracauer, Siegfried. “Photography.” The Mass Ornament: Weimar Essays. Ed. and trans. Thomas Y. Levin. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1995. 46-63.
    • Metz, Christian. “Photography and Fetish.” The Critical Image: Essays on Contemporary Photography. Ed. Carol Squiers. Seattle: Bay P, 1990. 155-64.
    • Peirce, C.S. Collected Papers of Charles Sanders Peirce. Ed. Charles Hartshorne and Paul Weiss. Vol 4. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1931-1958.
    • Perelman, Bob. “China.” <www.murgatroid.com/china.html>
    • Sontag, Susan. On Photography. New York: Noonday P, 1977.
    • Stein, Gertrude. Everybody’s Autobiography. Cambridge: Exact Change, 1993.
    • Tschofen, Monique. “‘First I Must Tell about Seeing’: (De)monstrations of Visuality and the Dynamics of Metaphor in Anne Carson’s Autobiography of Red.” Canadian Literature 180 (Spring 2004): 31-50.
    • Wideman, John Edgar. Two Cities: A Love Story. Boston; Mariner, 1999.

  • Badiou’s Equations–and Inequalities: A Response to Robert Hughes’s “Riven”

    Arkady Plotnitsky
    Theory and Cultural Studies Program
    Department of English
    Purdue University
    plotnit@purdue.edu

    Robert Hughes’s article offers an unexpected perspective on Alain Badiou’s work and its impact on the current intellectual and academic scene, a cliché-metaphor that (along with its avatars, such as performance or performative, also a pertinent theoretical term) may be especially fitting in this case, given that Badiou is not only a philosopher but also a playwright. What makes Hughes’s perspective unexpected is its deployment of “trauma” as the main optics of this perspective. While the subject and language of trauma have been prominent in recent discussions, they are, as Hughes acknowledges, not found in Badiou’s writings nor, one might add, in the (by now extensive) commentaries on Badiou. Hughes’s reading of Badiou in terms of trauma rearranges the “syntax” of Badiou’s concepts, as against other currently available readings of Badiou, even if not against Badiou’s own thinking, concerning which this type of claim would be more difficult to make. In this respect Badiou’s thought is no different from that of anyone else. One can only gauge it by a reading, at the very least a reading by Badiou himself, for example, in Briefings on Existence (which I shall primarily cite here for this reason and because it offers arguably the best introduction to his philosophy).

    Before proceeding to Hughes’s argument, I sketch the conceptual architecture of Badiou’s philosophy from a perspective somewhat different from but, I hope, complementing that offered by Hughes. The language of conceptual architecture follows Gilles Deleuze and Félix Guattari’s view of philosophy, in What is Philosophy?, as the invention, construction of new concepts (5). This definition also entails a particular idea of the philosophical concept. Such a philosophical concept is not an entity established by a generalization from particulars or “any general or abstract idea” (What is Philosophy? 11-12, 24). Instead, it is a conglomerative phenomenon that has a complex architecture. As they state, “there are no simple concepts. Every concept has components and is defined by them . . . . It is a multiplicity” (16). Each concept is a conglomerate of concepts (in their conventional sense), figures, metaphors, particular elements, and so forth, that may or may not form a unity; as such, it forms a singular, unique configuration of thought. As a philosopher, Badiou is an inventor, a builder of new concepts, just as Deleuze and Guattari are, even when these concepts bear old names, as do some of Badiou’s key concepts, such as event, being, thought, and truth.
     

    A distinctive, if not unique, feature of Badiou’s philosophy, as against that of most other recently prominent figures, is the dominant role in it of mathematics, in particular of mathematical ontology. It is true that major engagements with mathematics are also found in Lacan and Deleuze, both of whom had a considerable philosophical impact on Badiou’s work. There are, however, also significant differences among these thinkers in this respect, and it is worth briefly commenting on these differences in order to understand better Badiou’s use of mathematics and mathematical ontology. For Badiou, to use his “equation,” “mathematics=ontology” (Briefings 59), and “ontology=mathematics.” (Badiou’s first identity is not mathematical, and hence these two identities are not automatically the same, but they appear to be in Badiou.) Reciprocally, Badiou wants to give mathematics a dimension of thought, specifically of ontological thought, which he distinguishes from other, most especially logical, aspects of mathematical thinking. “Mathematics is a thought,” a thought concerning Being, he argues in Briefings on Existence (45-62). It is, accordingly, not surprising that Badiou is primarily interested in foundational mathematical theories, that is, those that aim at ontologically grounding and pre-comprehending all of mathematics, such as set theory introduced by Georg Cantor in the late nineteenth century, and in Badiou’s more recent works, the category and topos theories, as developed by Alexandre Grothendieck in the 1960s. The latter offers a more fundamental mathematical ontology, encompassing and pre-comprehending the one defined by set theory. Indeed, it might be more accurate to rewrite Badiou’s equations just stated as “mathematical ontology=ontology” and “ontology=mathematical ontology” (where mathematical ontology could be either set-theoretical or topos-theoretical). In other words, Badiou ultimately deals with mathematical ontology rather than with mathematics, and deals with it philosophically and not mathematically, beginning with defining it as irreducibly multiple “the multiple without-One” (the multiple minus One?), to be considered presently (Briefings 35). The equations just stated are still produced by philosophy, and not by mathematics, and the very argument that mathematics is a thought is philosophy’s task, even though and because mathematics as ontology “functions as a [necessary] condition of philosophy” (54). Necessary, but not sufficient! For, as will be seen, while it is also “about identifying what real ontology is,” philosophy, especially as thinking of “event” or “truth,” exceeds ontology, since an event is always an event of “trans-Being,” in part, against Heidegger, at least early Heidegger (59). Both “event” and “truth” are defined by Badiou in relation to what he calls “situation,” as something from within which, but also against which or in discontinuously, an event emerges. It is this excess that defines Badiou’s inequality, which may be symbolically written as “ontology=mathematical ontology < trans-Being=philosophy.” Making ontology mathematical and thus also more Platonist is already a non-Heideggerian gesture, deliberate on Badiou’s part. Heidegger prefers pre-Socratic thought, abandoned, albeit still concealed in Plato’s philosophy as well. One may thus write another pair of equations–“philosophy=thinking the event” and “thinking the event=philosophy”–which may, moreover, be accompanied by those involving literature or poetry. This “thinking the event” might also be equal to literature, at least a certain type of literature or of literary thought. “Literature=philosophy,” then, and, by the same token, a certain redux of Heidegger in Badiou? As I discuss below, and as Hughes’s article suggests as well, to some degree this may be the case. This relation between literature and philosophy in Badiou’s thinking the event may, however, also be undecidable, in Jacques Derrida’s sense rather than in that of Kurt Gödel in mathematical logic. Derrida’s undecidability refers to something that can “no longer be [unconditionally, once and for all] included within philosophical (binary) opposition,” in this case, to our inability to decide unconditionally whether a given thinking, such as that of the event in Badiou’s sense, is either literary or philosophical (Positions 43). It can be either, or sometimes both simultaneously, in different circumstances, even for the same thinker. Gödel’s undecidability refers to the impossibility of proving certain propositions to be either true or false by means of the systems within which they are formulated, a concept that is crucial for Badiou in its own right.
     

    In contrast to Badiou, the role of mathematics, most centrally topology and geometry, in Deleuze or Deleuze and Guattari is less defined by mathematical ontology, especially in the foundational, such as set-theoretical sense dominant in Badiou. Deleuze’s or Deleuze and Guattari’s ontologies may be seen as conceptually modeled on certain mathematical objects, such as dynamical systems or Riemannian spaces. (The actual definitions of these objects are not important at the moment.) This modeling, resulting in a kind of philosophical semblance or simulacrum of the mathematical concept used is, however, different from Badiou’s ontological equations. In Lacan’s case, it would be difficult to speak of any specifiable ontology, mathematical or other, at the ultimate level, that of the Lacanian Real. In other words, in approaching the Real, Lacan is attempting to think that which cannot be given any specifiable ontology. The Real exists and has powerful effects upon either the Imaginary or the Symbolic, but cannot be represented or conceived of in specific terms. Lacan’s use of mathematical, such as topological, objects or concepts is defined by this epistemology of the Real as irreducibly inaccessible, even while it has powerful effects upon what can be accessed or represented. For example, it may shape the topological configuration of unconscious thought, as defined by the Symbolic. But then this move beyond ontology is found in Badiou as well, and even defines thinking what is ultimately most decisive: thinking “thinking the event” and philosophy itself as nonontological, for “it is also important for [philosophy] to be released from ontology per se” (Briefings 59). Indeed, this “release” involves a version of Lacan’s Real, a major inspiration for Badiou’s thought. In Lacan and Badiou alike, the Real may be seen as materially existing, in a form of nonontological ontology, as it were, insofar as it cannot given a specifiable ontology, for example a mathematical one. It is worth stressing that, in general, the mathematical and infinitist grounding of his ontology notwithstanding, Badiou’s philosophy is materialist, just as is that of Lacan, Deleuze, or Derrida. For all these thinkers thought, including mathematics, is a product of the material conditions and energies of our existence–from inanimate matter to living matter to our bodies to the cultural, including political, formations shaping our lives.

     
    Hughes does not miss the significance of Badiou’s “reengagement [as against the immediately preceding philosophical tradition, especially as manifest in Hegel, Nietzsche, and Heidegger] of philosophy with mathematics and set theory” (“Riven” ¶1). He does not, however, pursue, does not engage with, this reengagement. Such an engagement would allow Hughes to offer a richer and deeper consideration of the problematics of Badiou’s philosophy. On the other hand, this non-mathematical restaging of Badiou’s thought is not altogether surprising and, to some degree, allows one to perceive and articulate aspects of this thought sometimes hidden behind the mathematical dimensions of his argumentation. Besides, one might also argue that, while certain mathematical (set- or topos-theoretical) ontology essentially grounds Badiou’s thought and is helpful in understanding it more deeply, his thought is ultimately not mathematical. It is fundamentally philosophical, even, again, as concerns ontology, since equating it with mathematical ontology is itself philosophical and not mathematical. His thinking the event or truth is, as just explained, philosophical on his own definition, by virtue of exceeding ontology=mathematical ontology, without, however, abandoning the latter. While justifiably attending to the questions of event and truth, Hughes does not consider this difference between ontology (as equal to mathematics or mathematical ontology) and philosophy (as equal to thinking the event). He is, however, right to place Badiou within a philosophical tradition of thinking about art, ethics, and politics defined, on the one hand, by the post-Heideggerian French thought of Lacan, Levinas, Blanchot, and Derrida, and, on the other, by thinkers at the origin of Romantic thought (“Riven” ¶3). He is also right to relate this thinking to literature, at least implicitly, and again specifically to Romantic literature, as well as to Romantic philosophical thought. I return to these subjects later. My point at the moment is the essentially philosophical rather than mathematical nature of Badiou’s thought (there is hardly any mathematics in the sense of its technical, disciplinary practice in Badiou), and also the nature of philosophical thought itself, as against mathematics, but not against mathematical thought. If “mathematics is a thought,” mathematics is also not only mathematics (in the sense of its technical practice) but also a philosophical thought, and hence reaches beyond ontology on the philosophical side. This philosophical dimension appears especially at the time of “crises,” defined by Badiou as largely synonymous with “events.” As Badiou writes, “mathematics thinks Being per se,” or ontology, “save for the rare moments of crisis” (Briefings 59). At such moments it must move toward thinking the “event” which, according to Badiou’s definition, would make it philosophy or at least philosophical. According to Badiou, “a ‘crisis’ in mathematics [as ontology] arises when it is compelled to think its thought as the immanent multiplicity of its own unity,” and “it is at this point, and only at this point, that mathematics–that is, ontology–functions as a necessary [but, as I have said, not sufficient] condition of philosophy” (Briefings 54). This conjunction gives a crucial significance to the reciprocity between mathematics, as ontology, and philosophy as thinking the event or/as crisis, first, I argue, in mathematics itself, understood in broader (rather than only ontological) terms at the moment and, hence, beyond the purview of Badiou’s argumentation concerning mathematics. Secondly, given that at stake in Badiou’s statement is philosophy as such, this reciprocity between mathematics as ontology of the irreducible multiple and philosophy in thinking the event as crisis, and hence the discontinuity of the event, is according to Badiou irreducible in philosophy and, it follows, in Badiou’s thought. This reciprocity between the multiple and the discontinuous in Badiou is my main point here and guides my argument from this point on.
     

    As I see it, what defines Badiou’s philosophy most essentially, what he is most essentially a philosopher of, is above all a philosophy of the multiple, specifically of the ontologically multiple: ontology=the set-theoretical ontology=the irreducibly multiple without-One. This is a particular view or interpretation of mathematical ontology that is not necessarily shared by mathematicians and philosophers working in foundations of mathematics, even if it is ultimately true (in the sense of being potentially irreducible). Indeed, Badiou would not speak of interpretation here. According to him, “mathematics has the virtue of not presenting any interpretations,” and “the Real [understood close but not identically to Lacan’s] does not show itself as if upon a relief of disparate interpretation.” Instead, Badiou sees the situation in terms of different “decisions of thought” concerning what exists (e.g. made in the case of set-theory in terms of constructible sets, large cardinals, or generic sets), the decision through which thought “binds [one] to Being,” “under the imperative of an orientation [of thought]” (Briefings 56-57). The concept itself of “orientation of thought” becomes an important part of Badiou’s ontological thinking (53-54). That Badiou’s ontology of mathematics (which, again, equals ontology in general) is that of the multiple without-One is, however, not in doubt: this is his ontological and political orientation and his decision of thought. He is a philosopher of the irreducibly multiple. I would also add, however, that he is equally a philosopher of the radical discontinuity, ultimately beyond ontology (although it enters at the level of ontology as well) by virtue of its connections, via the concept of event, to “trans-Being” and hence to philosophy. It is true that, as the title of Badiou’s arguably most significant work, Being and Event (L’être et l’événement), would suggest, he can more properly be defined as a philosopher of being and event, and of their conjunction. It would be difficult to argue against this view. But central as both of these concepts are to his thought, the architecture of both is essentially defined by the concepts of multiplicity and discontinuity. Indeed, we can describe these concepts in parallel terms, or again by way of two equations, being=the irreducibly multiple, the multiple-without One, and, defined by Badiou as trans-Being, the event=the radical discontinuity. In general in Badiou, as elsewhere in philosophy, the architecture of each concept is also defined by its relation to other concepts and, hence, by the entangled network of these concepts. Not unlike those of modern physics (such as Einstein’s famous E=mc2), Badiou’s equations encode the considerable architectural complexity of the concepts involved or of their relationships. Bringing the roles of multiplicity and discontinuity in Badiou into a sharper focus allows one to understand the architecture and mutual determination of his concepts more deeply, in part through the connections, along both lines (multiplicity and discontinuity), between Badiou’s thought and that of other key contemporary figures. Thus, while these thinkers’ thought is different, even as concerns multiplicity or discontinuity, as a philosopher of the multiple Badiou is close both to Deleuze and to Derrida, and as a philosopher of the discontinuous he is closer to Lacan, de Man, Levinas, and, again, Derrida–but not Deleuze. For even though Badiou draws inspiration from Deleuze as a thinker of the multiple, one of his discontents with Deleuze’s “vitalist ontology,” as he calls it, appears to be the insufficient role of discontinuity there, as against, for example, Immanuel Kant’s “subtractive ontology.” As a thinker of discontinuity, Kant is also a precursor of Levinas, Lacan, Derrida, and de Man.
     

    Hughes’s article correctly stresses the role of discontinuity and, correlatively (they are not the same), singularity in Badiou’s thinking of event, truth, and ethics, and the Lacanian genealogy (the Real) of this thinking, or its qualified connections to Levinas. (It seems to me that Hughes equates “truth” and “event,” too much [“Riven” ¶5], which, indissociable as they may be, they are not quite the same in Badiou.) Beginning with its title (“Riven”), Hughes’s article centers primarily on the role of discontinuity in Badiou, especially that between “situation” and “event,” via what Badiou calls “the nothing of its all” or the non-empty void linked to the Lacanian Real. Apart from a brief discussion of “a set of component elements or terms” involved in “the theatergoer’s encounter with Hamlet” (¶9), the article gives little, if any, attention to the role of multiplicity in Badiou, at most mentioning it in passing, perhaps because the article’s argument bypasses the mathematical-ontological aspects of Badiou’s thought. Not coincidentally and, given its significance for Badiou, even remarkably, the term “ontology” is never mentioned in the article, except in a book title by Slavoj Zizek (who does not miss it!) in the bibliography. However, Badiou’s thought is irreducibly defined by the ontology of the multiple and, again, the equally irreducible combination of the multiple and the discontinuous, in particular the trans-ontologically discontinuous. The singularity of the event and the truth always arises from and, through the non-empty void of the Real, grounds the multiple (mathematical or other) of the situation and give rise to a new multiple. This dynamics of the interplay between the Real and the multiple gives the structure and the history of a situation and an event (again, always exterior to the situation from within which it appears) the architecture of “the multiple of the multiple,” a persistent locution in Badiou. According to Badiou, given that “philosophy will always be split between recognizing the event as the One’s supernumerary coming, and the thought of its being as a simple extension of the manifold,” “the whole point is to contend, for as long as possible and under the most innovative conditions for philosophy, the notion that the truth itself is but a multiplicity: in the two senses of its coming (a truth makes a typical multiple or generic singularity) and in the sense of its being (there is no the Truth, there are only disparate and untotalizable truths that cannot be totalized)” (Briefings 62; emphasis added). This statement clearly reflects a crucial significance of the relationships between the discontinuity of the event and the multiple of being in Badiou. One cannot totalize all truths, and each truth is itself an untotalizable multiple within the singularity of its event. This situation (in either sense) requires, for Badiou, “a radical gesture,” which also manifests philosophy’s faithfulness to Lucretius, in whose (physical) ontology of the multiple without-One “atoms, innumerable and boundless,/ flutter about in eternal movement” (De rerum natura II: 496; Briefings 62).
     

    The multiple is everywhere manifest in Badiou’s thought and is expressly emphasized by Badiou as central to the ontology he aims to establish. This view is confirmed by the proposition, cited above, concerning mathematical thinking: at the time of a crisis, “its thought as the immanent multiplicity of its own unity” (Briefings 54). Given Badiou’s view of mathematical ontology as multiple-without-One, this can only be read in terms of the ultimate impossibility of this unity. (Otherwise the point would merely restate Leibniz, who is among Badiou’s precursors here, as are Hegel and Kant [Briefings 141]). This multiplicity defines Badiou’s ontology and always enters an “event,” by definition always an event of crisis, “each time unique,” or, in Derrida’s title phrase, “each time unique, the end of the world” (Chaque fois unique, la fin du monde; published in English as The Work of Mourning). In the ethical plane, this emphasis on the irreducibly multiple serves both Badiou and Derrida (and in both cases, if differently, against Levinas) to think the events (plural) of “evil,” all evil. Some among such events are equally evil, but each nevertheless is unique, as well as irreducibly multiple as concerns the ontology involved, thus doubling the multiple. Indeed, as will be seen, as a multiple without-One, this ontological multiple is already doubled, is already the multiple of the multiple, which gives Badiou’s overall situational ontology the form of the multiple of the multiple of the multiple. It follows that there is no single or absolute, absolutely radical evil, no matter how horrific or difficult to confront or even to imagine evil events may be and how much we try, as we must, to prevent their occurrence; there are other evil events and forms of evil that are comparable (in their evilness), but again each is different (Ethics 61-67). The (mathematical) ontological multiplicity found within an event or the situation that brings the event about always makes it political, as against Levinas’s thinking of the ethical. Badiou elegantly reads certain specific actual political and mathematical “orientations” in terms of each other, in particular by mutually mapping the theory of generic sets and what he calls “generic politics” as “something groping forward to declare itself,” both defined by the multiple without-One (Briefings 55-56). The same political complexity also defines other (more “positive”) “events,” political, cultural, mathematical, scientific, aesthetic, erotic, and so forth:

    the French revolution in 1792, the meeting of Héloïse and Abélard, Galileo's creation of physics, Haydn's invention of the classical musical style [vis-vis the Baroque] . . . But also: the cultural revolution in China (1965-67), a personal amorous passion, the creation of Topos theory by the mathematician Grothendieck, the invention of the twelve-tone scale by Schoenberg." (Ethics 41)

    Ethics

    Badiou’s concept of the “situation,” defined by the analogous complexity of the interaction between the singular and the multiple (e.g. Ethics 16, 129), always entails the possibility of an eruptive event, such as those just mentioned, which, reciprocally, can only emerge in relation to a situation. This eruptive singularity of the event can, accordingly, only be comprehended philosophically, by the (trans-Being) thought of philosophy and not by (mathematically) ontological thought, but it cannot be considered apart from ontology and its irreducible multiple.

    The conceptual architecture just outlined makes Badiou a philosopher both of the irreducibly multiple and of the irreducibly discontinuous. Badiou rarely invokes the term “discontinuity” itself. The concept is, however, clearly central to his thought, in particular as concerns “event,” as each event is, again, always defined by the radical, unbridgeable, end-of-the-world-like discontinuity of a crisis (but is always an opening to the irreducibly multiple). Invocations of discontinuity are found throughout Badiou’s writing, and Hughes lists quite a few of them, “riven, punctured, ruptured, severed, broken, and annulled,” which he links to trauma (“Riven” ¶10). This is sensible, because trauma always entails discontinuity. On the other hand, the latter is a more general concept, as is “event,” and Badiou uses both concepts more generally as well, in part by linking them to multiplicity. In order to understand how the multiplicity of ontology and the discontinuity of event work together in Badiou, I turn to set theory, as opening “the very space of the mathematically thinkable” (Briefings 42).
     

    As we have seen, according to Badiou, “ontology” [including in its irreducible multiplicitous form] is nothing other than mathematics [of set theory or, later, topos theory] itself,” or again, mathematical ontology=ontology, ontology=mathematical ontology (40). Given my limits here, I confine this discussion mostly to a naïve concept of set, naïve” being an accepted term in mathematics in this context. A set is a collection of certain usually abstract objects called elements of the set, such as, say, the numbers between 1 and 10, which is a finite set, or of all natural numbers (1, 2, 3, 4, etc.), which is an infinite set, a countable infinite set, as it is called. There are also greater infinities, such as that of the continuum, represented by the numbers of points in the straight line. The resulting ontological multiplicity or manifold is, Badiou argues, unavailable to unification, to the One, and, as will be seen presently, this multiplicity is also inconsistent, while nonetheless enabling a set-theoretical ontology. While, on the one hand, “the set has no other essence than to be a manifold” and while, with Cantor, we recognize “not only the existence of infinite sets, but also the existence of infinitely many such sets,” that is, sets possessing different magnitudes of infinity, “this infinity itself is absolutely open ended” (41). In particular, it cannot itself ever be contained in a set. There is no “the One” of set theory, because the set of all sets does not exist or at least cannot be consistently defined, in view of the well-known paradox related to the question of whether this set does or does not contain itself as an element. (It is immediately shown not to be the set of all sets in either case.) Set-theoretical multiplicity is both ultimately uncontainable by a single entity or concept and is inconsistent, because of the impossibility of giving it the overall cohesion of a whole and because, as will be seen presently, it contains systems that are expressly inconsistent with each other in view of Gödel’s incompleteness theorems. According to Badiou: “Ontology, if it exists has to be the figure of inconsistent multiplicities as such. This means that what lends itself to the thought of ontology is a manifold without a predicate other than its own multiplicity. It has no concept other than itself, and nothing ensures its consistency. . . . Ontology is the thought of the inconsistent manifold, that is, of what is reduced without an immanent unification to the sole predicate of multiplicity” (36, 40). Accordingly, “ontology, or the thinking of the inconsistent pure multiple, cannot be guaranteed by any principle” (39). In view of these considerations, Badiou’s “initial [philosophical] decision was to contend that what can be thought of Being per se is found in the radical manifold or a multiple that is not under the power of the One, . . . [in] a ‘multiple without-One.’ . . . The multiple is radically without-One in that it itself consists only of multiples. What there is, or the exposure to the thinkable of what there is under the sole requirement of the ‘there is,’ are multiples of multiples” (35, 40). Or via Plato’s Parmenides, which already grapples with this situation and its “inconsistent multiplicity,” what we encounter here is “an absolutely pure manifold, a complete dissemination of itself” (46).
     

    While Badiou, thus, establishes his ontology on the basis of more general set-theoretical considerations, its crucial further dimensions are revealed by Gödel’s famous discovery of the existence of undecidable propositions in mathematics and by Paul Cohen’s findings (along the lines of undecidability) concerning the mathematical continuum. The latter is, as I said, defined by the order of the infinite larger than the countable infinity, 1, 2, 3, . . . etc., of natural numbers, but in view of Cohen’s theorem it is ultimately undecidable whether there is something in between. Gödel’s concept of an undecidable proposition is arguably his greatest conceptual contribution. An undecidable proposition is a proposition whose truth or falsity cannot, in principle, be established by means of the system (defined by a given set of axioms and rules of procedure) in which it is formulated. The discovery of such propositions by Gödel (in 1931) was extraordinary. It undermined the thinking of the whole preceding history of mathematics (from the pre-Socratics on), defined by the reasonable idea that any given mathematical proposition can, at least in principle, be shown to be either true or false. We now know, thanks to Gödel, that such is not the case. For Gödel proved–rigorously, mathematically–that any system sufficiently rich to contain arithmetic (otherwise the theorem is not true) would contain at least one undecidable proposition. This is Gödel’s “first incompleteness theorem.” Gödel made the life of mathematics even more difficult, and more interesting, with his “second incompleteness theorem” by proving that the proposition that such a system, say, classical arithmetic, is consistent, is itself undecidable. In other words, the consistency of the system and, hence, of most of the mathematics we use cannot be proven, although the possibility that the system and with it mathematics may be shown to be inconsistent remains open.
     

    Given the undecidablity of certain propositions inevitably found in any sufficiently rich axiomatic system, one can in principle extend the system in two incompatible ways by accepting by a decision of thought such a proposition as either true or false. This allows one to have two different systems–incompatible with each other, but each “consistent” in itself. Since, however, Gödel’s first theorem would still apply to each system, new undecidable propositions will inevitably be found in each. This makes the process in principle infinite, that is, potentially leading to the infinite multiplicity of mutually inconsistent systems, each of which, moreover, can never be proven to be consistent in view of Gödel’s second theorem. This situation becomes especially dramatic in the case of Cantor’s famous continuum hypothesis, which deals with the question: How many points are there in the straight line? It states, roughly, that there is no infinity larger than that of a countable set (such as that of natural numbers: 1, 2, 3, etc.) and smaller than that of the continuum (as represented by the number of points on the straight line). The answer to this question is crucial if one wants to maintain Cantor’s hierarchical order of (different) infinities, and hence for the whole edifice of set theory. The hypothesis was, however, proven undecidable by Cohen in 1963. Accordingly, one can extend classical arithmetic in two ways by considering Cantor’s hypothesis as either true or false, that is, by assuming either that there is no such intermediate infinity or that there is. This allows one, by decisions of thought, to extend the system of numbers, arithmetic, into mutually incompatible systems, in principle, infinitely many such systems–a difficult and for some an intolerable situation. The question of how many points are on the straight line cannot be determinately answered.
     

    Instead of seeing this situation as difficult and even intolerable, Badiou finds in it both a support for his program and a special appeal or even beauty. As he writes:

    As we have known since Paul Cohen's theorem, the Continuum [h]ypothesis is intrinsically undecidable. Many believe Cohen's discovery has driven the set-theoretic project into ruin. Or at least it has "pluralized" what was once presented as a unified construct. I have discussed this enough elsewhere for my point of view on this matter to be understood as the opposite. What the undecidability of the Continuum hypothesis does is complete Set Theory as a Platonist orientation [in Badiou's sense]. It indicates its line of flight, the aporia of immanent wandering in which thought experiences itself as an unfounded confrontation with the undecidable. Or, to use Gödel's lexicon: as a continuous recourse to intuition, that is, to decision. (99)

    The appeal to Deleuze’s concept of “line of flight” is worth noting. This view of the situation also shapes Badiou’s understanding of Plato’s thought, juxtaposed by him to conventional, especially conventional mathematical, Platonism. Plato’s thought, Badiou argues, is interested primarily in “the movement of thought,” and “the undecidable commands the perplexing aporetic style of the dialogues. This course leads to the point of the undecidable so as to show that thought precisely ought to decide upon the event of Being: that thought is not foremost a description or construction, but a break (with opinion and/or with experience) and, therefore, a decision” (90). For Plato, as for the truly Platonist set-theoretical thinking, and for Badiou, “it is when you decide upon what exists that you bind your thought to being” (57). These statements bring together, in a firm conceptual architecture, Badiou’s key concepts, invoked here, from the ontology of the multiple to thought to Being to event and through it, the interconnective discontinuity between ontology and philosophy.

    This conceptual and epistemological architecture is set up in Being and Event. Badiou retraces it (with some new inflections, especially along the lines of topos theory) in Briefings on Existence: A Short Treatise on Transitory Ontology (published in French in 1998). The book is not cited by Hughes, perhaps because it largely reprises Being and Event, apart from its discussion of topos theory. It is arguably the best available condensation of Badiou’s philosophy, apart from the ethical problematic to which Badiou turns in Ethics, which also appeared in French in 1998. Briefings on Existence establishes the architecture just sketched by starting, in the “Prologue: God is Dead,” with the radically materialist grounding of our being and thought, that of mathematics and set theory, or of the infinite, included. Chapter 1, “The Question of Being Today,” situates the question of Being in this framework of materiality and infinity, but now in relation to the ontology of the irreducible and inconsistent manifold or multiple, the multiple without-One, grounded in the axiomatics of set-theory, which is considered, as “a thought,” in Chapter 2, “Mathematics as a Thought.” With this argument in hand, Badiou is ready to define “the event as trans-Being” in Chapter 3. This definition establishes the crucial difference between mathematics as ontology (but again, their equation is stated and legitimated by philosophy), and philosophy as that which, while also “all about identifying what real ontology is,” is ultimately released from ontology. Indeed, philosophy is a theory of what is “strictly impossible for mathematics” and “a theory of event aimed at determining a trans-being.” As I said, however, one might want to replace mathematics with mathematical ontology here, thus leading to an inequality defined earlier: “ontology=mathematical ontology < trans-Being=philosophy.” According to Badiou, thus also defining “event” (as the concept is conceived in Being and Event):

    On the other hand [as against the ontological determination defined by set or topos theory], a vast question opens up regarding what is subtracted from ontological determination. This is the question of confronting what is not Being qua Being. For the subtractive law is implacable: if real ontology is set up as mathematics [mathematical ontology] by evading the norm of the One, unless this norm is reestablished globally there also ought to be a point wherein the ontological, hence mathematical, field is de-totalized or remains at a dead end. I have named [in Being and Event] this point the "event." While philosophy is all about identifying what real ontology is in an endlessly reviewed process [such as from set to topos theoretical ontology], it is also the general theory of the event--and it is no doubt the special theory, too. In other words, it is the theory of what is subtracted from ontological subtraction [such as that found in Kant's subtractive ontology]. Philosophy is the theory of what is strictly impossible for mathematics. (60)

    Being and Event

    This is a crucial point, a crucial thought. The distinction between the special and general theory of the event may be best understood, in part via Bataille (restricted vs. general economy), as that between the representational theory of the event and the theory that reveals something in the event, or the truth, that exceeds, irreducibly, any representation or any specific ontology. This thought governs the remainder of Badiou’s argument in the book, developed via analyses of philosophical frameworks (Plato, Aristotle, Spinoza, Kant, and Deleuze), and set- and topos theoretical mathematics.

    It is also in this “space” of the relationships between Being and trans-Being, the space defined by the non-empty void of the Real (in Lacan’s sense, extended by Badiou), that Badiou, in closing the book, also re-establishes the relationships between Being and appearing (153-68). In Lacan and Badiou alike, the trans-Being of the Real is conceived as the efficacity of both Being and appearing, or even of trans-Being of the event. Badiou, thus, also brings together his faithfulness to (the true) Platonism and his faithfulness to a reversal of Platonism, and thus to modern philosophy (163), in order to reveal “Being itself in its redoubtable and creative inconsistency. It is Being in its void, which is the non-place of every place” (169). Given this relation to appearing, Being comprises, from its two different sides, both the multiple without-One and the void, and in both of these aspects it is produced, as an effect or set of effects, by the efficacy of the Real. The appearance of Being is traced through an important discussion of the relationships between mathematical ontology and mathematical logic, via topos theory. These relationships and Badiou’s view of mathematics as a thought and ontology, as against logic, are important in this context and for Badiou’s thought in general. Here suffice it to say that logic is linked to appearance, thus also giving the double genitive to the phrase “logic of appearance,” and mathematical ontology is related to Being, is Being. The configuration of Being and appearing, just defined, is that of “event,” which Badiou’s use of mathematical ontology helps him establish in order to move beyond ontology to philosophy. As Badiou writes:

    This [the configuration just described] is what I call an "event." All in all, it lies for thought at the inner juncture of mathematics [as ontology] and mathematical logic. The event occurs when the logic of appearing [the double genitive sense] is no longer apt to localize the manifold-being of which it is in possession. As Mallarmé would say, at that point one is then in the waters of the wave in which reality as a whole dissolves. Yet one also finds oneself where there is a chance for something to emerge, as far away as where a place might fuse with the beyond, that is, in the advent of another logical place, one both bright and cold, a Constellation. (168)

    Badiou’s appeal to Mallarmé signals that, along with being the space of philosophy (the space with which it is concerned and which it also occupies), this space also appears to be, in Blanchot’s title phrase, the “space of literature” (the same parenthesis applies). It is the space from which, in a non-reversing reversal of Plato, mathematics, which only relates to Being or ontology, is exiled or rather into which it is only partially allowed as a tenant, as against poetry, which inhabits this space as a resident alongside philosophy. This orientation and decision of thought also brings Badiou closer to Heidegger, especially the later Heidegger, when the ontological projects of Being and Time (and several projects following it) are replaced with a certain conjunction of thinking and being, via Parmenides’s fragment, “The Same is Both Thought and Being,” which Badiou invokes (52). (The English translation is that of Badiou’s French translation, different from Heidegger, and indeed the translation of this statement is itself a decision of thought.) At this stage of his thought, the true “thinking” [denken] is fundamentally linked by Heidegger to the thinking and language of poetry. The proximity between Badiou and Heidegger thus reemerging is tempered by differences (no equation here), most essentially because mathematical ontology and the equation “mathematical ontology=ontology=the multiple without-One” is retained by Badiou, as against Heidegger (on both counts: mathematics and multiplicity). This equation remains crucial, even if one can now add an inequality ontology< poetry=philosophy (as thinking “event”), or perhaps with poetry and philosophy in the undecidable relationships (in Derrida’s sense) to each other. Either way, mathematics, poetry, and philosophy are brought together, in a Constellation.
     

    A reader of Badiou, or of Hughes’s article, would not be surprised by the presence of literature in this space, any more than by the presence of this space in literature, by its becoming, in Blanchot’s title phrase, the space of literature, defined by Blanchot along similar lines (of the discontinuity of the event). Hughes’s article, to which I am now ready to return, deserves major credit for its exploration of the role of literature in Badiou’s thinking of the event (ethical, aesthetic, or other), and additional credit for relating the situation and the event of Badiou’s thought to the Romantic tradition, indeed to many Romantic traditions, which also form a multiple without-One. Hughes is also right to bring these aspects of Badiou’s thought to bear on Badiou’s thinking (of) subjectivity and the ethical, and the connections (proximities and differences) between this thinking (or Badiou’s thought in general) and that of Lacan and Levinas. Hughes’s “ventur[ing]” a (re)formulation of Badiou’s ethical maxim as “one must poeticize” is compelling, especially given that the true ethical imperative (under the full force of which we come rarely, according to Badiou) is by event and truth. As Hughes says: “One might venture it as a new formulation of Badiou’s ethical maxim: One must poeticize. That is, one must exceed one’s situation and assume an ethical relation to the event by striving to name it through poetry. As the Romantics intuited and as Badiou’s philosophy formulates much more precisely, poetry and ethics, like poetry and truth, are not to be disentangled” (“Riven” ¶21). This is, I think, quite true, as is the more general claim that Badiou “is suggesting a special role for poetry in the elaboration . . . of truth [in his sense]” (¶21).

     
    It appears to me, however, that Hughes disentangles too much both from mathematics and from mathematical ontology, as the ontology of the multiple and the political without-One, and from ontology in general in Badiou. Hughes’s invocation of Poe’s “The Purloined Letter” on his way to his conclusion just cited is apposite here: “We might think of this [this special role of poetry] as somewhat akin to the insight of Poe’s Dupin, who says, referring to the Minister [a poet and a mathematician] who has purloined the royal letter, that “as a poet and mathematician, he would reason well; as mere mathematician, he could not have reasoned at all” (¶22). We might recall that Poe’s “The Purloined Letter” and Lacan’s reading of it in his “Seminar on ‘The Purloined Letter’” engage the question of the relationships between poetry and mathematics. However, could the Minister think as a mere poet, at least as sharply as Dupin, who out-thinks him? Perhaps he could not, at least if we read the story through Badiou’s optics, where the thinking of the Real is at stake, and Poe does not say that the Minister could either. In fact, both Lacan’s and Derrida’s readings (in “Le Facteur de la Vérité,” in The Post Card) place Dupin in a position that is more akin to that of a philosopher in Badiou, as both a poet and a mathematician. Part of Derrida’s critique of Lacan is that, unlike Dupin/Poe, Lacan does not think the multiplicity and dissemination of writing in his reading. One might add that Lacan also places the whole case too much in the Symbolic register, thus both reducing the multiple to the Oedipal and, as it were, forgetting the Real. In any event, in my view Badiou’s ontology of the multiple without-One and its political underpinnings and implications could have sharpened and enriched Hughes’s analysis of the ethical and/as literary problematics in Badiou. Hughes invokes the multiple only briefly in his discussion of a theatergoer’s encounter with Hamlet in Being and Event (“Riven” ¶12).
     

    Consider, for example, how the connections between Badiou and Levinas appear from the perspective of Badiou’s mathematical ontology of the multiple. Hughes does note the potential role of the mathematical considerations for Badiou, including as concerns the difference between him and Levinas. Thus, he says:

    Badiou's mathematical grounding and conceptualization of alterity, his "numericalities" of solipsism and the Infinite, his set-theoretical elaboration of the event, and his insistent recourse to the category of truth as the grounds for the specifically ethical force of alterity and the infinite--all this is quite foreign to Levinas's sensibility . . . This [along with other factors that I omit for the moment, given my context] also gives Badiou a broader scope for thinking the ethical in places--art, science, politics--where Levinas's writings do not often venture. (¶22; some emphasis added)

    Hughes, however, does not take advantage of the mathematical aspects of Badiou’s thought, in particular “his set-theoretical elaboration of the event,” which entails and enacts the multiple without-One and, within it, the political, as considered here. As a result, Hughes’s analysis ultimately leaves Badiou’s thought within the domain of rupture, discontinuity, inscribed “through tropes of trauma” (¶23). The Levinasian ethical situation (the term can be given Badiou’s sense as well) is defined by an encounter with the radical, irreducible alterity of the Other (Autrui), which should not be simply identified with a person or a subject. (This alterity is not unlike that of Lacan’s Real in epistemological terms, but is different in ethical terms, is ethical.) It may be noted that Badiou, and some of his followers, tend to over-theologize Levinas’s thinking on this point. Contrary to Badiou’s argument in Ethics, while Levinas’s thought has significant theological dimensions, the Other as Autrui is not theological, even if it is modeled on theology, and as such may be better termed, via Heidegger and Derrida, “ontotheological.” For the moment, the appearance of the Other is the event that transforms the situation (again, in Badiou’s sense) in which each of us finds oneself when the Other appears. This appearance (including in the sense of phenomenon) redefines our world, or home, since, according to Levinas, we must welcome the Other with hospitality (Totality and Infinity 27). Levinas’s conception is more complex because the event of the appearance of the Other has always already occurred, thus making ethics and its infinity precede totality, which Levinas often sees as defining philosophical thought. These complexities do not, however, affect my argument here.

    In contrast to Levinas, for Badiou any ethical event, good or evil, or beyond good and evil, while it may involve an encounter with the other (no capital), cannot be defined by the alterity of the Other as Autrui (with capital O or A) in Levinas’s sense. Any situation or any event is defined by and defines (but cannot be contained by) the mathematical and, correlatively, political ontology of the multiple without-One, by Badiou’s infinite. As such, it is not only without totality, but also without Levinas’s infinity, which appears as a form of totality from where Badiou stands, since it is defined by the One (as the Other), rather than by an infinitely multiple without-One. Accordingly, in an ethical event, as in any other event, we always confront the Real and its alterity through the manifold or the multiple, whether we do it together with others or/as in encountering an other (and hence, as against Levinas, still always together and never apart within the multiple). Subjectivity, it follows, is this political multiplicity as well, and hence every subject is a multiple without-One. By the same token, “the truth itself is but a multiplicity: in the two senses of its coming (a truth makes a typical multiple or generic singularity) and in the sense of its being (there is no the Truth, there are only disparate and untotalizable truths that cannot be totalized)” (Briefings 62; emphasis added). An ethical or any other situation or any event is always political, infinite yet multiple, multiple without-One, without any possibility of unity or totality. Because of the role of the political multiple-without One of Being, always involved in an event, the multiple is irreducible in the trans-Being of the event as well. There is no event, no encounter, ethical or other, that can ever be ontologically single; it can only be singular in the sense of its uniqueness or discontinuity relative to its situation, on the one hand, and to other situations and events, on the other. Hence the political is irreducible in and defines the ethical, rather than being grounded in the Levinasian ethical Other. In his Adieu to Emmanuel Levinas, Derrida offers a respectful and subtle, but firm, critique of Levinas along similar lines, although there are also differences between Badiou and Derrida, specifically insofar as there is no ontological infinite (in Badiou’s sense) in Derrida. It also follows that, while Hughes is right to stress the singularity of the event and its alterity or exteriority to the situation, it is not possible to speak as Hughes does along more Leibnizean lines of the Oneness of the situation in Badiou or to read “its all” “as the Oneness of one’s multifarious elements” (“Riven” ¶12).
     

    To some degree, the argument just given also applies to Lacan’s use of the Real, in part in juxtaposition to Badiou’s concept of the Real or how this concept can be used and developed, and has been used and developed by Badiou. That is, Lacan’s use of the Real may also be seen as to some degree bypassing the multiple and the political, and centering primarily on individual subjectivity or intersubjectivity and on the ethical, as innovative and radical a move as the introduction of ethics into psychoanalysis might have been. Apart from other key differences (such as those those having to do with the role and architecture of language, signification, desire, the Imaginary and the Symbolic), Lacan’s claims concerning the ethical are not as strong as those of Levinas. Indeed, by being placed within the triangularity of the Oedipal (transformed, as against, Freud, via the economy of the signifier) and hence within a certain Oedipal politics, Lacan’s ethical order or subjectivity is at least implicitly political. Nevertheless, one can speak of a certain curtailment of the multiple and/as the political, and Deleuze and Guattari have criticized Lacan along these lines in Anti-Oedipus. It appears to me that on this point, too, Hughes’s analysis can be deepened and must, to some degree, be adjusted. Let me reiterate that, even apart from being an extraordinarily powerful concept in its own right, Lacan’s Real is crucial for Badiou and even irreducible in his philosophy (including in his sense, as discussed above). Hughes, accordingly, is correct to give major attention to this significance, specifically in the context of Badiou’s ethical thinking, and to link Lacan’s Real and its connection to language to the problematics of literature and Romanticism, and to the way both think “the void of the real” (“Riven” ¶13). The concept is indeed especially significant, as Hughes argues, for Badiou’s concept of event, as always the event of trans-Being: the “trans” of this “trans-Being” is essentially linked to the Real in Lacan’s sense, or rather–and this is my point here–in Badiou’s sense. For it seems to me that Badiou’s deployment of Lacan’s Real is assimilated into his thinking though the multiple and the political without-One, or it follows without-Three (the Oedipal three), as much as without-Two, the ethical Two of Levinas, which is still ultimately the One (Lacan’s Three is three). The Real cannot by definition be reduced to ontology–any ontology but especially Badiou’s mathematical ontology–any more than can an event and its trans-being, grounded in (as arising from) the Real. I would argue, however, that this disruptive work of the Real, as understood by Badiou, cannot be dissociated from the multiple without-One. The Real acts upon this ontology and disruptively transforms its multiplicity by giving rise to events, but only into another multiplicity.
     

    Now, is this transformation traumatic? Or, more generally and more pertinently to Hughes’s argument, how does Badiou’s concept of event relate to that of trauma, especially as considered by Lacan, via the Real? Badiou does not appeal to and does not primarily, if at all, think the event as trauma. As Hughes states, “to be clear, ‘trauma’ is not a word Badiou himself employs . . . he uses an array of others to describe his subjects–riven, punctured, ruptured, severed, broken, annulled, and so forth” (¶10). Hughes gives his reasons for his appeal to trauma. One might ask, however (and this question appears to be missing in Hughes’s article): Why does Badiou not appeal to trauma? Although Badiou’s ontology of the multiple could be brought to bear on this question as well, the main reason for Badiou’s avoidance of trauma, I contend, lies in the nature of trauma as being primarily, fundamentally about the past event and its primarily negative, traumatic impact on the (post-event) future. By contrast, even though he grounds his concept of event in a Lacanian concept of the Real, Badiou appears to be primarily concerned with the future, and moreover with the positive, transformative future of events (which may of course have occurred in the past). This futurity is part of the architecture of Badiou’s concept of event, and defines actual events–of whatever kind and whenever they occur–as futural events. Let us revisit Badiou’s list of events cited earlier: “The French revolution in 1792, the meeting of Héloïse and Abélard, Galileo’s creation of physics, Haydn’s invention of the classical musical style, . . . the cultural revolution in China (1965-67), a personal amorous passion, the creation of Topos theory by the mathematician Grothendieck, the invention of the twelve-tone scale by Schoenberg” (Ethics 41). These events may have been traumatic and may have left their traumatic effects or traces, but it is their futural impact, as creating new situations, that is above all at stake for Badiou, even in the case of a personal amorous passion, or love. Indeed, there is no need to say “even,” for passion and love are about the present and future, even though they can and sometimes do have traumatic effects. Lacan’s concept of the Real easily allows Badiou to give it this futural dimension because, apart from Badiou’s mathematical (ontological) and political extension of the Real, it is indeed a more general concept rather than something that isirreducibly connected to trauma. It is true that, according to Lacan, “the function . . . of the real as encounter . . . first presented itself in the history of psycho-analysis in a form that was in itself already enough to arouse our attention, that of trauma” (Four Fundamental 55). That, however, need not mean and, I would argue, does not mean that the function of the Real is limited to trauma, even in Lacan or in psychoanalysis; quite the contrary, and Badiou is right to take advantage of the broader sense of Lacan’s extraordinary concept in defining his conception of the event.

     
    The futural orientation (also in Badiou’s sense) of his thought of the event is, however, a more complex matter. For this orientation not only poses a question for Hughes about his reading of this concept in terms of or via tropes of trauma, it also poses a question for Badiou from the traumatic side of the Real. The significance of this futural orientation of thinking the event is undeniable, including in our understanding of history, and hence the past, as shaping our present and future. But the past, the ghosts of the past inevitably haunt us, many ghosts of many pasts, for this ontology is multiple without-One, too–that of the multitudes of the living and the dead, each with its own end of the world, unique each time, both multiple and unique. It is, yet again, literature that give us perhaps the best image of this multitude of the unique multiples, that of a snowfall–a multitude of snowflakes, each with its unique designs (its unique multiple) and unique trajectory of fall and eventual melting down. It does so in Joyce’s thinking an event of trans-Being, human (the passion of love), literary, and political, in ending, uniquely and multiply ending, “The Dead” and Dubliners: “the snow falling and faintly falling, like the descent of their last end, upon all the living and the dead,” of Ireland and of the world. “All the living and the dead,” each unique and multiple, as snowflakes in a snowfall. “All the living and the dead”–past, present, and future.

    Works Cited

    • Badiou, Alain. Being and Event. Trans. Oliver Feltham. London: Continuum, 2005.
    • —. Briefings on Existence: A Short Treatise on Transitory Ontology. Trans. Norman Madarasz. Albany: SUNY P, 2006.
    • —. Ethics: An Essay on the Understanding of Evil. Trans. Peter Hallward. London: Verso, 2001.
    • Blanchot, Maurice. The Space of Literature. Trans. Ann Smock. Lincoln: U of Nebraska P, 1989.
    • Deleuze, Gilles, and Félix Guattari. What is Philosophy? Trans. Janis Tomplinson and Graham Burchell III. New York: Columbia UP, 1996.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Adieu: To Emmanuel Levinas. Trans. Pascale-Anne Brault and Michael Naas. Stanford, CA: Stanford UP, 1999.
    • —. Positions. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1981.
    • —. The Post Card. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1987.
    • —. The Work of Mourning. Trans. Pascale-Anne Brault and Michael Naas. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 2003.
    • Hughes, Robert. “Riven: Badiou’s Ethical Subject and the Event of Art as Trauma.” Postmodern Culture 17.3 (May 2007).
    • Joyce, James. Dubliners. New York: Norton, 2005.
    • Lacan, Jacques. The Four Fundamental Concept of Psychoanalysis. Ed. Jacques-Alain Miller. Trans. Alan Sheridan. New York: Norton, 1977.
    • —-. “Seminar on ‘The Purloined Letter.’” Écrits. Trans. Bruce Fink. New York: Norton, 2006.
    • Levinas, Emmanuel. Totality and Infinity: An Essay on Exteriority. Trans. Alphonso Lingis. Pittsburgh: Duquesne UP, 1969.
    • Lucretius, Titus Carus. De Rerum Natura. Oxford: Aris & Phillips, 2008.

  • Riven: Badiou’s Ethical Subject and the Event of Art as Trauma

    Robert Hughes
    Department of English
    Ohio State University
    hughes.1021@osu.edu  

    “Can we be delivered, finally delivered, from our subjection to Romanticism?” asks the French philosopher Alain Badiou (b. 1937), with an evident sigh (Conditions 158f, Theoretical Writings 22e).1 A peculiar question, it would seem, for an epoch often eager to declare itself at once post-Romantic and postmodern. For Badiou, however, Romanticism denotes not an historical moment now long past, but a philosophical gesture whose reach extends through both analytic and Continental philosophy as well as through contemporary theory: an almost fatal and complete “disentanglement” of philosophy from mathematics (Conditions 159f, Theoretical Writings 22e), coupled with the rise of the “age of the poets,” when philosophy was sutured to art as the only possible “body of truth” (Petit Manuel 12f, 3e).2 For the first tendency, Badiou cites G.W.F. Hegel; for the second, Friedrich Nietzsche and especially Martin Heidegger, its acme. We should not misinterpret Badiou’s sigh, however. When he seeks to overcome Romanticism through the reengagement of philosophy with mathematics and set theory, when he seeks to desacralize the Romantics’ Infinite through its mathematization, he is not thereby seeking to bury Romanticism’s rediscovery of poetry as a mode of thinking. Certainly it is true that Badiou’s project strives to re-entangle philosophy and mathematics. He succeeds, I think, and in this respect, Badiou may indeed be said to have overcome Romanticism. Nevertheless, as we shall also see, poetry is essential to Badiou’s thinking of truth and remains at the very heart of his project, whether he is writing of mathematics or Mallarmé, ethics or aesthetics. So while Badiou would contest any claim that poetry alone has a purchase on truth, in important ways his own project reaffirms the Romantic schema in art: poetry and truth are not to be disentangled. One term implies the other.

    My aim here is not to elaborate a full philosophical description of Badiou’s relation to Romanticism–Justin Clemens has already begun such work in his admirable book on the Romanticism of contemporary theory. Nor do I wish to quibble over the use or usefulness of “Romanticism” as a label to describe an historical tendency of thought. Rather, what I would like to do in the present essay is to trace out a series of propositions concerning art, ethics, and subjectivity, which derive from the Romantics and which Badiou places at the heart of his own project. Badiou is important to considerations of art, ethics, and subjectivity because, among other reasons, his work stands as the most serious effort by a dedicated philosopher to develop a philosophy consistent with the fundamental insights of Lacanian psychoanalysis.3 As our guiding thread, we will follow the way Badiou uses trauma, conceived in a Lacanian sense, as a trope in thinking about art and its relation to ethics. Thus, my discussion broaches two key questions: in what way does it make sense for Badiou to think of the event of art in terms of trauma, and what does this imply for the nature of ethics in Badiou’s philosophy? We shall begin with a general consideration of art and ethics derived primarily from two of Badiou’s books of the 1990s: his Ethics (1993) and his Handbook of Inaesthetics (1998). As we move further into Badiou’s thought, we will turn to two somewhat earlier writings, to Being and Event (1988) and to the 1989 essay on Beckett, in order to see why trauma was a useful trope for Badiou in particular–that is, for a post-Heideggerian, post-Lacanian thinker informed by set theory and striving for a post-Romantic philosophy of the event. As we will see, Badiou opens up an ethic of art and also suggests a larger trend in the history of aesthetics since the Romantics that locates the force of art as bearing upon a traumatic subjectivity–a force thus at once ethical and existential.
     

    Finally, Badiou is often positioned, by himself and by others, as a thinker at odds with the mainstream of Continental and Anglo-American thought. This he certainly is in many respects–as in his remarkably compelling elaboration of set theory as the cornerstone of his philosophy. But if we trace out the logic of his tropes, we are reminded that he is, after all, situated within a tradition of thinking about art, ethics, and subjectivity–whatever we might wish to call this tradition, whether Romantic or post-Romantic, Lacanian or post-Lacanian, Heideggerian or post-Heideggerian–and that he shares certain strands of this tradition not only with his older contemporaries such as Emmanuel Levinas, Maurice Blanchot, and Jacques Derrida, but also with thinkers at the origin of Romantic thought: Friedrich Schiller, Friedrich Schlegel, Percy Shelley, Ralph Waldo Emerson, and others.

    I. The Event of Art: The Hole of Truth and the Punctured Subject

     
    We begin, then, with Badiou’s conception of the work of art. Despite the several novels and plays he has written,4 it is evident that Badiou’s ultimate commitment is to philosophy, so it is not altogether surprising that for him, as for Heidegger and many other philosophers, art is a matter of truth. Badiou, however, has a rather idiosyncratic notion of “truth,” and since it refers neither to the veridicality of propositions nor to Heidegger’s aletheia, this claim requires a little unpacking.
     

    Badiou opposes what he calls “truth” to the domain of objectivity and ordinary knowledge. Indeed truth, in the very essence of its operation, “constitutes a hole [un trou] in forms of knowledge,” as he puts it in several places, and he associates it with the Lacanian real.5 Thus truth, for Badiou, is the name of an exceptional event and a process that forces a break with the everyday course of knowledges and situations and consequently brings into being a “subject” where there was formerly just a human animal, a mere inhabitant of a given situation.6 Before turning to consider some of Badiou’s examples, let us briefly note that a truth in the first instance is an event, a flash, an irreducible singularity, and subsequently is marked by the continued fidelity of the subject who constitutes the site of that truth. This second moment of the truth, the fidelity, is understood as a continuing commitment by the subject to bear witness to the event that was its first moment and to relate henceforth to his or her particular situation from the perspective of that event, to think according to its radical truth, and to invent, in consequence, a new way of being and acting in the situation (L’éthique 61f, 41e). It is a crucial point for Badiou: for him, truth is productive, inventive, creative, anticonservative; it is “the coming-to-be of that which is not yet” (L’éthique 45f, 27e).

     
    There are, for Badiou, four fundamental procedures of truths: art, science, politics, and love. Or, to put it in terms more typical for Badiou: the poem, the matheme, the politics of emancipation, and the encounter with the disjunction of sexuation (Conditions 79f, Manifeste 141e). Badiou gives a number of images of an event of truth. In the Ethics book, his favored examples of such events in art come from the history of music and, less frequently, from theatrical experience. Elsewhere, he writes of modern poets, including Hölderlin, Mallarmé, Beckett, and Celan. But in the Ethics book, he returns repeatedly to Haydn’s invention of the classical musical style and remarks that it is characteristic of any event of truth in that it

    is both situated–it is the event of this or that situation–and supplementary, thus absolutely detached from, or unrelated to, all the rules of the situation. Hence the emergence of the classical style, with Haydn . . . concerns the musical situation and no other, a situation then governed by the predominance of the baroque style. It was an event for this situation. But in another sense, what this event was to authorize in terms of musical configurations was not comprehensible from within the plenitude achieved by the baroque style; it really was a matter of something else.

    You might then ask what it is that makes the connection between the event and that ‘for which’ it is an event. This connection is the void [le vide] of the earlier situation. What does this mean? It means that at the heart of every situation, as the foundation of its being, there is a ‘situated’ void, around which is organized the plenitude (or the stable multiples) of the situation in question. Thus at the heart of the baroque style at its virtuoso saturation lay the absence [vide] (as decisive as it was unnoticed) of a genuine conception of musical architecture. The Haydn-event occurs as a kind of musical ‘naming’ of this absence [vide]. For what constitutes the event is nothing less than a wholly new architectonic and thematic principle, a new way of developing musical writing from the basis of a few transformable units — which was precisely what, from within the baroque style, could not be perceived (there could be no knowledge of it). (L’éthique 92-93f, 68-69e)

    L’éthique

    The Haydn-event, as Badiou calls it, inaugurated the configuration of classical style, from Haydn himself to its saturation point with Beethoven; it inaugurated a truth that, whether consciously or subconsciously, whether more or less articulately, befell the composer in the first instance, and then also listeners and subsequent composers who had been likewise situated within the baroque, but who thereafter found themselves seized by this same revolutionary truth concerning musical architecture as the hitherto unnamable vanishing point or void of the baroque. It is a “truth,” precisely, in that this truth of the Haydn-event is the same for all, even as it unfolds or proceeds within differing particular compositions or performances of music. Within a given situation (and all truths are so situated), there is no one truth for person a and a different truth for person b. For that matter, within a given situation, there is no one truth for culture g and a different truth for culture d. And, yet again, there is no objective truth out there in the world, waiting to be discovered by any who would see it. As the Haydn example illustrates, truth is an event that proceeds in a given situation (L’éthique 63f, 42e), here the symbolic field of the musical baroque, but this truth is the same truth for all who bear witness to it (46f, 27e).

    For Badiou, this event of truth implies an ethics in the way it calls upon the subject whom it befalls to continue to bear witness to this truth by engaging one’s life, one’s decisions, and one’s existence, in a continuing reinterpretation that is through this event and according to its truth. Badiou refers to this second moment in the process of a truth as a fidelity. “To be faithful to an event,” he writes, “is to move within the situation that this event has supplemented, by thinking . . . the situation ‘according to’ the event” (L’éthique 62f, 41e). Alban Berg and Anton von Webern, to take other of Badiou’s examples, were faithful to the event that was Arnold Schoenberg’s invention of the twelve-tone technique in musical composition. Thus, they “[could] not continue with fin-de-siècle neo-Romanticism as if nothing had happened” (62f, 42e). Likewise, as he also notes, much contemporary art music constitutes a fidelity to the great Viennese composers of the early twentieth century. The fidelity, in which the subject continues the truth process beyond its initial event, accepting the obligation “to invent a new way of being and acting in the situation” (62f, 42e), is the ethical decision to which the subject must continually commit him- or herself (or not).

     
    The course of an artistic truth thus has three moments. The first moment is the inaugural event of art, which then, in the second moment, persists through the choice of continuing, in the subject’s fidelity to the event. The truth comes to a certain end, in the third moment, only when its configuration has become saturated and it has exhausted its own infinity, as Badiou puts it (Petit Manuel 89f, 56e). In the exhaustion of a truth, its component works succeed less and less in inquiring into the truth in which they themselves participate. A configuration, as he puts it in his Handbook of Inaesthetics, “thinks itself in the works that compose it” (28f, 14e)7 and when it ceases to think itself, when its component works no longer succeed in inventively inquiring into the procedure of that configuration, then that truth comes to an end.
     

    What I especially want to highlight here in Badiou’s description of the event and process of a truth, and in the ethic of truths that follows from it, is the position of the subject who, we can say, is called upon to dwell with a trauma.8 Committing oneself to Schoenberg’s tonal innovations may not seem such an onerous ethical calling, and is hardly traumatic in the everyday sense, but we might recall that truth, for Badiou, is essentially a hole. It pierces a given order of knowledge, but it also pierces those who are faithful to it. Someone who bears witness to an event of truth can, for example,

    be this spectator whose thinking has been set in motion, who has been seized and bewildered by a burst of theatrical fire [un éclat théâtral], and who thus enters into the complex configuration of a moment of art. (L’éthique 66f, 45e)

    L’éthique

    The subject’s seizure in the work of art is an old theme for philosophy, but here there is no repose, no restful contemplation of the beautiful, no subjective harmony as in Kant’s third critique.9 Instead, our spectator has been seized and bewildered by–what?–a burst of theatrical fire (!), and thereby enters into the complex configuration of a moment of art. Theatre spectators on the edge of their seats, he writes,

    demonstrate a prodigious interest in what they are doing — in the advent of the not-known Immortal in them, in the advent of that which they did not know themselves capable of. Nothing in the world could arouse the intensity of existence more than this actor who lets me encounter Hamlet . . . . Nevertheless, as regards my interests as a mortal and predatory animal, what is happening here does not concern me; no knowledge tells me that these circumstances have anything to do with me. I am altogether present there, linking my component elements via that excess beyond myself induced by the passing through me of a truth. But as a result, I am also suspended, broken, annulled, dis-interested [suspendu, rompu, révoqué: dés-intéressé]. For I cannot, within the fidelity to fidelity that defines ethical consistency, take an interest in myself, and thus pursue my own interests. All my capacity for interest, which is my own perseverance in being, has poured out . . . into what I will make of my encounter, one night, with the eternal Hamlet. (L’éthique 71-72f, 49-50e)

    L’éthique

    In Badiou’s theater-going subject we see a curious tension between, on the one hand, the subject’s being “altogether present” in a way that seems familiar to Romantic and Heideggerian thinking about the promise of art, and, on the other hand, in the very same moment, the subject’s being “suspended, broken, annulled, dis-interested”–and, earlier, “riven, or punctured [imperceptiblement et intérieurement rompu, ou troué]” (L’éthique 67f, 46e). For Badiou the subject is, in the very instant of its coming to be, already in “eclipse,” as if the subject itself, in the event of art, were to appear in the flicker of its own vanishing or void. Thus a poem, for example, summons one–but summons one to give oneself over to, or dispose oneself to, its poetic operations and commits one to think according to its thought instead of according to the pursuit of one’s own interest (Petit Manuel 51f, 29e). Thus, the reader of a poem, as Badiou writes in relation to Celan, must “will his or her own transliteration” (58f, 34e), as if the letters of one’s aesthetic subjectivity, the “letters of one’s body,” as Willy Apollon calls it,10 were to be offered up to the event and cast into a foreign idiom. Although for Badiou fidelity to the event involves a conscious willing, the first instance of the truth event seems distinctly traumatic in his trope. “To enter into the composition of a subject of truth,” as he puts it, “can only be something that befalls you” (L’éthique 74f, 51e; trans. modified). Insofar as the will may later enter into Badiou’s ethics, fidelity is a commitment, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to sustain oneself in a certain relation to that originary traumatic eclipse of the subject.

    II. A Thing of Nothing: Ethics and the Phantom Excess

    To be clear, “trauma” is not a word Badiou himself employs; as we have seen, he uses an array of others to describe his subject–riven, punctured, ruptured, severed, broken, annulled, and so forth. These terms, if we consider them in a Lacanian register, suggest physical trauma in the “imaginary” sense of the corps morcelé, the fragmented body that implies a notion of trauma as a sort of mirror-stage in reverse. But how, more precisely, do these tropes, which we group under the rubric of trauma, bear upon Badiou’s theory of the subject, especially upon the subject in the event of art–and why does it make sense to place all of this under the heading of Ethics? The answers have something to do with the theoretical edifice elaborated by Jacques Lacan, who is significant for Badiou for four principal reasons: for initiating a modern thinking of love,11 for insisting on the importance of the category of the subject in philosophical thought (Manifeste 24f, 44e), for developing a conception of the real at the heart of human subjectivity,12 and for repeatedly asserting that mathematics is the science of the real (Conditions 185f; Theoretical Writings 107e). We will see that insofar as Badiou develops a theory of the subject consistent with the Lacanian subject instituted through trauma, for Badiou the stakes of this “trauma” are ultimately read not in the imaginary, but at the limit of the symbolic and the real. But let us approach these questions of the subject and what we are calling trauma a little more deliberately, since Badiou is approaching these matters not from the exigencies of the analytic clinic, but rather from the interest of philosophy–and specifically of a very particular philosophy grounded in mathematical set theory.
     

    We can begin by considering more carefully and more particularly the structure of the subject implied by Badiou’s description of the theatergoer who encounters in Hamlet both the utmost intensity of existence as well as, in the same instant, a certain annulment. As Schoenberg was an event for the composers and audiences of the late Romantic style typified by Mahler, Hamlet may equally be considered an event in the history of literature–for example by demonstrating the possibility of a modern, post-Attic tragedy, or by turning to national or non-classical sources as fit topics for tragedy, or by more explicitly locating the real event of the play in the obscure existential drama of a character’s deepest interior. But Hamlet is also an event situated within an I–that is, within Badiou’s theatergoer in his or her particularity:

    I am altogether present there [Je suis là tout entier], linking my component elements via that excess beyond myself [l’excès sur moi-même] induced by the passing through me of a truth. But as a result, I am also suspended, broken, annulled, dis-interested. For I cannot, within the fidelity to fidelity that defines ethical consistency, take an interest in myself, and thus pursue my own interests. All my capacity for interest, which is my own perseverance in being, has poured out . . . into what I will make of my encounter, one night, with the eternal Hamlet. (L’éthique 71-72f, 49-50e)

    L’éthique

    Structurally speaking, the key aesthetic event for Badiou here is an encounter between, on the one hand, the presence and finite “altogetherness” enjoyed by the theatergoer, wherein his or her component elements are linked into One, and on the other hand an excess beyond this altogetherness, the infinity of the eternal Hamlet, that passes through the subject, annuls the theatergoer in his or her situation, and demands some kind of accounting of what the subject will “make of the encounter.” Is there not something paradoxical about this altogetherness which encounters an excess beyond itself–for how can someone be, precisely, all-together, if there is some other element that remains in excess of the all?

    Badiou’s Being and Event (1988) is devoted to a much more technical and complete description of “situations” generally and, by implication, of the seemingly paradoxical structure of the situation in which the theatergoer’s encounter with Hamlet takes place. We might take the theatergoing individual him- or herself as a “situation,” a structured whole composed of a set of component elements or terms: the particulars of one’s history, one’s sense for family and romantic obligations, one’s tastes, one’s regard for literary and theatrical history, one’s openness on a given night to the drama of Shakespeare’s Hamlet, and a multiplicity of other elements chance has thrown together. Any or all of these elements may be highly complex, but they are “consistent” in the sense that, however complex they may be, they are included in how one represents oneself to oneself (in what Badiou calls “the state”), or, more basically, they simply belong to one’s situation, present but prior to any question of representation. They compose that of which the situation consists. One’s taste, for example, may be composed of a vast array of sometimes-conflicting influences and voices coming from one’s culture, one’s circle of friends, one’s reading, the quirks of one’s personal history, both conscious and subconscious, and so forth. Whatever their origins and however internally incoherent they may be, they are all counted as being situated in the theatergoer as elements of his or her own taste. In this sense, the situation is defined by its all, the Oneness of one’s multifarious elements. Moreover, each of these elements, insofar as it counts as belonging to the situation, has been acted upon by some kind of a logic, a regime or rule that produces the situation by determining what counts as belonging to it. By contrast, the occurrence of an event, which in Badiou’s sense is always an event for a given situation, poses the question of what lies outside the jurisdiction of this regime, when, according to the law of the situation, everything that counts, everything presentable, lies within it–hence its Oneness, its all-togetherness.

     
    Badiou argues that in the event of art (or science, or politics, or love), the Oneness of the situation is indeed disrupted by some unpresentable, supplementary thing that, within the law of the situation, counts as no-thing. Intriguingly, Badiou also claims in Being and Event that this void, or “nothing” of the situation, lies at the very heart of poetic movement in particular as a kind of impasse or impossibility:

    Naturally, it would be pointless to set off in search of the nothing. Yet it must be said that this is exactly what poetry exhausts itself in doing . . . . [P]oetry propagates the idea of an intuition of the nothing in which being would reside when there is not even the site for such intuition . . . because everything is consistent. The only thing we can affirm is this: every situation implies the nothing of its all. But the nothing is neither a place nor a term of the situation. For if the nothing were a term that could only mean one thing; that it had been counted as one. Yet everything which has been counted is within the consistency of presentation. It is thus ruled out that the nothing . . . be taken as a term. There is not a-nothing, there is “nothing” [Il n’y a pas un-rien, il y a « a rien »], phantom of inconsistency. (L’être 67-68f, 54-55e)

    L’être

    While every situation “implies the nothing of its all,” the situation itself cannot, by definition, provide a way to bring this void point into knowledge, since there is no consistency to the void of the real, and since even intuition lies under the rule of the situation which, by definition, has no law capable of discerning (or “counting”) anything in excess of itself. In the face of this encounter with alterity, poetry since the Romantics has tried to say what cannot in fact be said, to present what cannot in fact be presented–as if a fullness of being might be approached, the phantom of inconsistency banished, by causing the indiscernible “nothing” supplementary to the situation to assume a visible consistency.

    This, then, is what justifies the term “traumatic” as a general trope for Badiou’s description of the ethical subject in the event of art. It is not just that the coherence of the situation is punctured or riven by something radically alterior to itself, something that threatens to undermine or reorganize the configuration of the existing situation–this might be a commonsensical, imaginary description of trauma–but that this radical alterity constitutes a hole in the order of language. Indeed, from a Lacanian perspective, Badiou’s event is precisely traumatic insofar as it marks an encounter with the irreducible real at the heart of the signifier and the symbolic order.13 Badiou’s “nothing” or void shares a number of key structural features with Lacan’s concept of the traumatic encounter with the real: its “extimacy” to the subject, its essential resistance to signification, and its radical potential for introducing something new. Lacan’s real is located in “extimate”14 relation (167f, 139e) to the subject in that the real is at once situated as the “traumatic nucleus” (Le Séminaire XI, 66f, 68e), governing the syntax of the subject, utterly interior and intimate to it, and is at the same time radically supplementary, that is, exterior and excluded from it. So when in his Ethics seminar Lacan describes that which, in the real, suffers from the signifier (150f, 125e), he situates it “at the center precisely in the sense that it is excluded . . . strange to me while being at the heart of this ‘me’” (87f, 71e; author’s translation). Moreover, because the real as such cannot be assimilated to the order of the signifier (55f, 55e), the “trauma” of an encounter with the real is witnessed precisely in its “opacity” and its “resistance to signification” (118f, 129e). Finally, due to the very fact that the real constitutes an impasse in the logic of the signifier, the encounter with the real “admits something new, which is precisely the impossible” (152f, 167e )–admits, that is, something impossible in the order of the signifier as it has hitherto been governed. For these reasons, surely, and perhaps others, Badiou himself describes, at the heart of his event of art, an ethic of a “truth” that is also, in a precise Lacanian sense, “an ethic of the real” (L’éthique 74f, 52e).15

     
    Badiou is not ordinarily one to follow philosophical trends that place language per se at the center of philosophical inquiry, but there seems no way to escape this problem of language in thinking the event.16 One believes that there has been an event, that something new has happened, that there is something beyond the One of the situation, and yet, from within the horizon of the situation where one discerns, thinks, and speaks, one cannot name the event, one can only surmise an appropriate “generic” procedure that would faithfully work to incorporate the event into the situation. Even the particular nature of this “something new” remains indiscernible:

    A subject, which realizes a truth, is nevertheless incommensurable with the latter, because the subject is finite, and the truth is infinite. Moreover, the subject, being internal to the situation, can only know, or rather encounter terms or multiples presented (counted as one) in the situation. Yet the truth is an un-presented part of the situation. Finally, the subject cannot make a language out of anything except combinations of the supernumerary name of the event and the language of the situation. It is in no way guaranteed that this language will suffice for the discernment of a truth, which, in any case, is indiscernible for the resources of the language of the situation alone. It is absolutely necessary to abandon any definition of the subject which supposes that it knows the truth, or that it is adjusted to the truth. Being the local moment of the truth, the subject falls short of supporting the latter’s global sum. Every truth is transcendent to the subject, precisely because the latter’s entire being resides in supporting the realization of the truth. The subject is neither conscious nor unconscious of the true.

    The singular relation of the subject to the truth whose procedure it supports is the following: the subject believes that there is a truth, and this belief occurs in the form of a knowledge [un savoir]. I term this knowing belief confidence. (L’être 434-435f, 396-397e)

    L’être

    The subject is called upon to support the realization of a truth. He or she has “confidence” that there is in fact a truth and that something new has happened in the situation. But from the standpoint of the situation itself, the subject can speak only a kind of nonsense in relation to this event, knitting together a language out of existing terms inadequate to the situation and to “the supernumerary name of the event.” The name of the event, “Hamlet” in our example, or “Schoenberg,” is supernumerary in the sense that it has no conceptual referent within the situation. Of course “Hamlet” as a proper name designates a Danish prince, a character, and a play (to say nothing here of Hamlet’s phantom father). It is also used antonomastically to refer to an event–yet this it does in the most nebulous fashion, as if “Hamlet” were neither name nor signifier, but a kind of conceptless signifier-surrogate used to indicate the whatever-it-was-that-happened one night at the theater. Likewise, “Schoenberg” may be used as an antonomasia for innovations in musical composition such as atonality, dodecaphony, and serialism, which may in turn be more precisely described, but fidelity to the truth of the “Schoenberg event” surely exceeds the instance of even its inventor, running its course through Olivier Messiaen, Pierre Boulez, and György Ligeti to younger and more recent composers like Kaija Saariaho, Erkki-Sven Tüür, and Helena Tulve–each of whom has departed from anything like atonal, twelve-tone, or serialist orthodoxies, while still, arguably, being faithful to the Schoenberg event and, certainly, committed to composing within a tonal space made possible by Schoenberg’s work. In this sense, “Schoenberg,” too, is used in place of a signifier to indicate the nebulous whatever-it-was-that-happened to the tonal system in classical composition with the appearance of Pierrot Lunaire (1913). These names, Hamlet and Schoenberg, together with the signifiers one associates with them, strive to refer to something that exceeds the situation. In order to do so, the subject must rework or redirect existing terms to “displace established significations” and thereby support a truth for a situation that at present cannot discern it (L’être 437f, 399e). If, for Badiou, a truth makes a hole in knowledge, it likewise marks a babble-point in relation to the present language of the situation.

    The fidelity of the subject, then, is exposed to chance, grounded in nothing, unsupported by knowledge, and nonsensical to the eyes and ears of outsiders. It calls for a decision to commit to an interpretation of an event and it requires the ethical subject to assume a course of action (a “procedure”) faithful to that event from among choices that, within the best knowledge of the situation, are strictly undecidable. This is true because, from within the situation where he or she is located, the subject has no recognized way to decide whether there has even been an event, no way to adjudicate whether one interpretation of the event (supposing there to have been one) is superior to another, and no way to know with certainty whether a given procedure is a proper and faithful response to the event that the subject supposes has taken place.17 Thus one commits oneself on a chance, a wager, and, like Badiou’s Mallarmé, casts one’s die. As Badiou writes,

    If poetry is an essential use of language, it is not because it is able to devote the latter [language] to Presence; on the contrary, it is because it trains language to the paradoxical function of maintaining that which–radically singular, pure action–would otherwise fall back into the nullity of place. Poetry is the stellar assumption [l’assomption stellaire] of that pure undecidable, against a background of nothingness, that is an action of which one can only know whether it has taken place inasmuch as one bets upon its truth. (L’être 213-214f, 192e)18

    L’être

    Against Heidegger’s nostalgia for lost presence, and surpassing the presence and altogetherness of his own theatergoer, Badiou asserts that poetry and art find their true and ethical task in supporting a pure action: the coming into being of a subject and, with it, the truth that occasions the subject. Poetry is itself, in the poet as in the reader, the casting of a die among undecidables, set against a background of nothingness. Hence poetry is intimately aligned with the subject, which Badiou defines as “that which decides an undecidable from the standpoint of an indiscernible” (445f, 407e), and with ethics, which, similarly, comes down to an imperative: “Decide from the standpoint of the undecidable” (219-220f, 197e).

    In his Ethics book, Badiou gives his ethical imperative a more Lacanian ring. Lacan’s “ethics of psychoanalysis” is well known, both through his great 1959-1960 seminar of that name and through the writings of Slavoj Zizek.19 Lacan formulates his ethical dictum with a characteristic, concentrated simplicity: do not cede ground on your desire (Le Séminaire VII, 368f, 319e; author’s translation). For Lacan, this ethical position bears upon symptom formation: giving up on one’s desire, forsaking this one Good, produces the Evil of symptoms. In his own Ethics book, Badiou echoes Lacan, his “master” (L’éthique 121e) as he calls him, when he articulates his own ethic of truth: do all that you can to persevere in that which exceeds your perseverance. Persevere in the interruption. Seize in your being that which has seized and broken you (L’éthique 69f, 47e). Both Lacan’s ethic of psychoanalysis and Badiou’s own ethic of truth are ethics of the real and call for a certain persistence in one’s relation to that real. Truth and ethics bear upon a certain relation with the real of language: the indiscernible truth of music beyond musical syntax, the unnamable truth of a poem beyond communication and hermeneutic concerns of reference and interpretation. This truth event, which has broken and seized the subject, requires the subject to commit to a decision regarding what cannot be decided, articulated, or known. One must give oneself over to the event, contend with the situational anxiety of the void, and persevere in this relation to chance and the real. And if, through this process, one is obliged to cast one’s lot with something that ruptures the very situation in which one lives, this is surely all well and good for a philosopher who, after all, defines the Good as “the internal norm of a prolonged disorganization of life” (82f, 60e).

    III. Badiou on Levinas, Love, and the Poetic Naming of Ethics

    Badiou’s use of trauma as a trope aligns him not only with Lacan’s ethics of the real, as we have just seen, but also, to a more limited extent, with the work of Emmanuel Levinas, who in his late years often employed trauma as a trope for describing the ethical encounter with the face of the Other.20 Badiou’s own thinking of ethics arrives at a moment when the conceptualization of ethics in the academy has been brought decisively under Levinas’s name, first through the sponsorship of Jacques Derrida, Luce Irigaray, and Jean-François Lyotard, and then through its appropriation by the rhetoric of contemporary multiculturalist politics. The Ethics book is evidently among Badiou’s best-selling volumes and clearly his most sustained statement on ethics, and, though he might there seem to claim a counter-Levinasian position, in fact the polemical thrust of that book belies his closeness to the Jewish thinker. Even in the Ethics book, his brief account of Levinasian ethics as an ethics of difference, or an ethics of the other, stands as a moment of scrupulous care and respect, before he turns to address what he considers the misappropriation of Levinasian thought by multiculturalism, which, Badiou argues, is committed to a conventional conception of “otherness,” one cast in ethnographic or demographic terms rather than in properly phenomenological terms (or pre-phenomenological terms, one might say), as with Levinas. Later, when he highlights (and distances himself from) Levinas’s theological grounding of the ethical alterity of the other in the infinite alterity of God, Badiou’s pique lies with what he sees as the easy moralism of multiculturalist ideologues and the fashion they have made of the “ethics of the other” as, precisely, a pious discourse divorced from true Levinasian piety (L’éthique 41f, 23e). In short, Badiou’s reader must make a careful distinction between his polemical adversaries in the Ethics book, since his true quarrel lies elsewhere than with the “coherent and inventive” (40f, 23e) work of Levinas. Levinas’s work may disappoint Badiou for orienting itself ultimately via religious axioms, but he defends it as “strikingly distant” from the “catechisms” of multiculturalism (37f, 20e).
     

    Badiou makes a more interesting and direct claim for Levinas’s importance in an off-hand remark in his Manifesto. There, writing of the history of philosophy since Hegel, he claims that philosophy has come to misapprehend the nature of its own work and has ceded its task, at various moments, by “suturing” itself to one of its four conditions: according to Badiou, Anglo-American philosophy has sutured itself to the promise of positivist science as the sole procedure of truth, Marxism has sutured philosophy to the promise of emancipatory politics as the sole procedure of truth, and, faced with philosophy’s sutures to science and to politics, Nietzsche and Heidegger gave philosophy over to the poem. Now, just as the attentive reader begins to wonder whether there were no overly enthusiastic philosophical partisans of love, Badiou offers a strangely phrased afterthought: “It may even be added,” he writes, “that a Levinas [un Levinas], in the guise of the dual talk on the Other and its Face [visage], and on Woman, considers [envisage] that philosophy could also become the valet of its fourth condition, love” (Manifeste 48f, 67e). This is certainly a curious statement and one wonders what is meant by it, since love is not usually considered a central term for Levinas. What, for Badiou in particular, can be the relation between love and Levinas, the eminent thinker of ethics? What is love as, precisely, a condition or truth procedure for philosophy? Why, finally, do some of Badiou’s most sustained discussions of love as a condition of philosophy appear amid discussions of art–for example in discussion of the works of Samuel Beckett,21 or in his intriguing remarks on the novel as an art form essentially coupled to love?22

     
    Badiou, whose most serious philosophical work is thought through mathematics, perhaps unsurprisingly describes the course of an amorous truth as supporting a subjective movement through three distinct “numericalities.” The numericality of love, according to Badiou, is counted thus: one, two, infinity. That is, love is essentially the production of a truth about the Two (Manifeste 64f, 83e), pertaining ultimately to difference as such (Theoretical Writings 146e). Love is a riving of the One of solipsism in an encounter with the Two of the amorous couple that opens, like a passage, upon the plethoric Infinite of the sensual world:

    In love, there is first the One of solipsism, which is the confrontation or duel between the cogito and the grey black of being in the infinite recapitulation of speech.23 Next comes the Two, which arises in the event of an encounter and in the incalculable poem [le poème incalculable] of its designation by a name. Lastly, there is the Infinity of the sensible world that the Two traverses and unfolds, where, little by little, it deciphers a truth about the Two itself. This numericality (one, two, infinity) is specific to the procedure of love. We could demonstrate that the other truth procedures–science, art, and politics–have different numericalities,24 and that each numericality singularizes the type of procedure in question, all the while illuminating how truths belong to totally heterogeneous registers. (“L’écriture” 363f, 33e)

    Prior to the encounter of love, there is only solitude: the everyday situation of the ego and, as Levinas argues, “the very structure of reason” (Le temps et l’autre, 48f, 65e). The Two of love, by contrast, inaugurates an extraordinary event, in Badiou’s sense of the term, insofar as it is a

    hazardous and chance-laden mediation for alterity in general [une mediation hasardeuse pour l’altérité en general]. It elicits a rupture or a severance of the cogito‘s One; by virtue of this very fact, however, it can hardly stand on its own, opening instead onto the limitless multiple of Being. We might also say that the Two of love elicits the advent of the sensible. The truth of the Two gives rise to a sensible inflection of the world, where before only the grey-black of being had taken place. Now, the sensible and the infinite are identical . . . . (“L’écriture” 358f, 28-29e)

    The aesthetic tropes of Badiou’s description are remarkable–not just his evocation of the Infinite of love through citation of sensual scenes from the oeuvre of one of the great literary writers of the twentieth century, but Badiou’s own affirmation that such scenes are, in themselves, “poems,” regardless of their prose form (“L’écriture” 359f, 29e). His language is also remarkable, and strongly reminiscent of Levinas when Badiou writes of the encounter with alterity as a “rupture” of the cogito’s solitude, together with the sense that the ethical consists in persisting, in being faithful to this evental encounter with alterity.25 Let us examine these two points about Badiou’s language more closely.

    Badiou’s use of aesthetic tropes can be understood if we recall the almost impossible role of language necessary for the faithful elaboration of a truth within a situation that cannot discern or name it. When, therefore, we read above that the Two, the heart of the amorous event and the opening of the ethical subject to the alterior and the Infinite, “arises in the event of an encounter and in the incalculable poem of its designation by a name,” or when we read in a different essay that “one must be poetically ready for the outside-of-self [il faut poétiquement être prêt au hors-de-soi]” (“Le Recours” 100f, 75e), Badiou does not here indicate a unique role for poetry in the elaboration of an amorous truth. Rather, Badiou is suggesting a special role for poetry in the elaboration of any kind of truth. We might think of this as somewhat akin to the insight of Poe’s Dupin, who says, referring to the Minister who has purloined the royal letter, that “as poet and mathematician, he would reason well; as mere mathematician, he could not have reasoned at all” (“Purloined Letter” 691). Regardless of the truth procedure in effect, whether scientific, political, artistic, or amorous, fidelity to a truth event requires a naming that, in turn, can only proceed indirectly, through the language resources of the poetic act, which Badiou suggests are uniquely capable of introducing alterity into the language of a situation:

    For the nomination of an event . . . an undecidable supplementation which must be named to occur for a being-faithful, thus for a truth–this nomination is always poetic. To name a supplement, a chance, an incalculable, one must draw from the void of sense, in default of established significations, to the peril of language. One must therefore poeticize, and the poetic name of the event is what throws us outside of ourselves, through the flaming ring of predictions. (“Le Recours” 100f, 75e)

    The poem, then, is more than the heart of the artistic event, whatever its medium. It is also the composition of a supernumerary name for the unnamable and undecidable event of truth, composed out of the language of the situation. More than this, it is poetry that “throws us outside of ourselves” to surpass in subjectivization the solipsism of the One and to open upon the Two of love and the true Infinite of the sensible world. One might venture it as a new formulation of Badiou’s ethical maxim: One must poeticize. That is, one must exceed one’s situation and assume an ethical relation to the event by striving to name it through poetic word. As the Romantics intuited and as Badiou’s philosophy formulates much more precisely, poetry and ethics, like poetry and truth, are not to be disentangled.

    One would not wish to overstate the similarity between the ways Badiou and Levinas conceive of the ethical. Badiou, for his part, considers himself resolutely committed to what he thinks is a Greek–philosophical, mathematical–mode of thinking ethics, whereas Levinas, for his part, is very self-consciously committed to what for Badiou is a non-Greek, Jewish–theological–mode of thinking the ethical. Thus, Badiou’s mathematical grounding and conceptualization of alterity, his “numericalities” of solipsism and the Infinite, his set-theoretical elaboration of the event, and his insistent recourse to the category of truth as the grounds for the specifically ethical force of alterity and the infinite–all this is quite foreign to Levinas’s philosophical interests. And, as we have already seen, Badiou displays little sympathy for Levinas’s grounding of the ethical nature of alterity within Jewish tradition, so that Levinas’s often Abrahamic sense of alterity with, as Levinas himself muses (Autrement 195n1f, 197-98n27e), its potential caprice and persecutory command, is absent when Badiou writes of the subjective commitment to forsake the pursuit of one’s own interest, will one’s own “transliteration,” and live and think according to the alterior truth of the event that has befallen one. Finally, where Levinas concentrates his thinking at the intersection of phenomenology and theology, writing little on love as such, less on literature and politics, and nothing at all on science, Badiou makes it a matter of principle to circulate his thinking among the four “procedures of truth” as he himself defines them: the scientific (as in Being and Event), the artistic (as in the Handbook of Inaesthetics), the political (as in Metapolitics), and the amorous (as in the essays on Beckett and on the Lacanian description of sexuation). This also gives Badiou a broad scope for thinking the ethical in places–art, science, politics–where Levinas’s writings do not often venture.
     

    Nonetheless, we have also seen that both Badiou and Levinas, when they present their work on ethics, write through tropes of trauma, as a way of thinking subjectivity as the rupture of the solipsism of the cogito in an encounter with alterity, difference, and the infinite. This is indeed very significant. If Badiou stands together with the Romantics (and Lacan) to posit, at the heart of the work of art, a subject who contends with a constitutive void or “nothing” or hole, Badiou and Levinas (and again Lacan) stand against hundreds of years of philosophical thinking by imagining at the core of ethics a subject who has been riven and punctured in relation to a singular, traumatic event. When Badiou salutes Levinas as a thinker of love,26 as he does in his Manifesto, he is recognizing Levinas’s rigor in thinking the event of love as an ethical movement from the One of solipsism, through the encounter with alterity (the Two), to the Infinite, even if Badiou is also, at the same time, working from an Infinite conceived through mathematics (not theology), and also underlining his own critique that Levinas’s suture of philosophy to the condition of love unduly neglects other possible procedures for truth–the political, the scientific, and the artistic.

     
    Badiou’s implicit critique of Levinas’s thinking of ethics–that it correctly elaborates certain structures of an ethical event in one procedure (love) only to turn a blind eye to the event in any other procedure (artistic, political, scientific)–is analogous to his critique of Romantic philosophies of art. Romantic theories of art, in Badiou’s view, correctly locate the position of truths as immanent to the work of art–so that, for the Romantics, art is not thought to point to a truth that exists outside of art, as when it is called upon to illustrate a truth situated in politics, science, or love. Rather, the truth of art is intrinsic or internal to the artistic effect of works of art. As Badiou and the Romantics agree, art is not about a truth; art is a truth. However, the Romantics, in Badiou’s view, fail to recognize the singularity of the truth produced by art; they fail to see that the particular truth activated in the artwork is specific to art alone, and thus “irreducible to other truths, be they scientific, political, or amorous” (Petit Manuel 21f, 9e). We will grant Badiou his point here: it is hard to imagine any thinker, Romantic or otherwise, who would fully prefigure Badiou’s declaration that there are four “procedures of truth” and that every truth is the truth of a given situation strictly within one of these four procedures, either artistic, political, scientific, or amorous. These are surely among the most fundamental and original features of Badiou’s own philosophy.

     
    But I would argue that there is another debt, unacknowledged, that Badiou’s thinking of art owes to the Romantics: the description of art as addressed to a subject constituted through a foundational, traumatic encounter with a “nothing” or void of the real. This seems to me the key Romantic gesture in the thinking of art: from Schiller’s irremediable “dismemberment of being” (586g, 43e)27 and Emerson’s declaration in “The Poet” that man “is only half himself” and must therefore poeticize to address his fundamental void of being (448), to Heidegger’s later view that one must bear poetic witness to being to attain a greater degree of being oneself (Erläuterungen 36g, 54e),28 to Lacan’s claim that the work of art renews the subject’s relation to the real (Le Séminaire VII, 169-70f, 141e), Romantic theories of art, like Badiou’s own, proceed from the given of a subject that faces the void and elaborate a theory of art specifically as addressing that unspeakable ontological hole.

     
    What Badiou contributes to Romantic philosophies of art is a new rigor in elaborating the event of this situated void, and especially in thinking it through the innovations of mid-twentieth-century set theory. Thus, where the early Romantic thinkers of the event of art work more or less intuitively, as both poets and theoreticians of poetry themselves, where Heidegger works out of dormant linguistic possibilities, and where Lacan works through empirical observation and practical clinical interest,29 Badiou gives a much fuller philosophical grounding to those earlier developments toward a Romantic theory of art.
     

    Additionally, by grounding his event of art in set theory, Badiou is able to further prise apart the theory of a subject constituted in traumatic relation to an originary event from the pathos or horror customarily associated with trauma and loss. This matter has already caused some misunderstanding in Badiou’s critical reception. Perhaps because of his narrow focus on Badiou’s book on Paul, or perhaps because he is quick to appreciate manifestations of horror, Zizek far overstates the case when he claims, in The Ticklish Subject, that Badiou’s “main point” in his elaboration of the subject is to “avoid identifying the subject with the constitutive Void of the structure” (159).30 Zizek, so it would seem here, regards the void as necessarily horrific and, missing the sense of horror in Badiou,31 wrongly minimizes the extent of Badiou’s actual theoretical engagement with the traumatic real. As we have already seen, although Badiou spends much effort describing the second moment of an evental truth, its poeticization in the subject’s “fidelity,” he also gives a full description of the subject in that first moment of facing the “nothing”–a fact highlighted by those many terms suggesting physical trauma: “suspended, broken, annulled,” “riven or punctured,” “a rupture or a severance,” and so forth. In Being and Event, he is quite plain: while “a truth alone is infinite” (433f, 395e), “the subject is finite” (434f, 396e). Indeed, this very incommensurability faced by the finite subject gives it its specific sense: overwhelmed, annulled, inarticulate–and persistent nonetheless.
     

    Yet, however overstated, we might also say that Zizek’s argument nevertheless points to an important difference in tone that distinguishes Badiou from his more Romantic theoretical forebears in thinking the real of art. The thrust of Badiou’s philosophy resists attaching any Romantic pathos to this “trauma” of the finite subject as he or she contends with the void and the incommensurable, infinite truth. To be sure, the traumatic structure of the subject is not a dry fact for Badiou–the very passion of his writing on the topic recognizes its drama. But in contrast with the pathos or nostalgia inherent in Emerson and Heidegger when they present the fundamental absence at the heart of human subjectivity, and in contrast to the rawness and destitution of Antigone when Lacan presents the subject’s ethical bearing of the real, for Badiou the traumatic structure of the subject is part and parcel of the very event he celebrates for being inventive, creative, “the coming-to-be of that which is not yet” (L’éthique 45f, 27e), indeed the only way for something new to appear within a situation. The point is that, in what is for Badiou “the event of truth,” the subject, which is indeed finite and, yes, traumatically riven and babbling, is nevertheless able to participate in a fidelity to something that exceeds his or her own finitude and is thereby able to accede to an ethical, more properly human, subjectivity. So Badiou’s ethics and his theory of art aim to represent an escape from the suffering body, an escape from the animal, an escape from the contemporary organization of moral life around the figure of the victim.32 If we speak of trauma with regard to Badiou’s subject, it is neither to rally the reader’s pious sympathies nor to invoke his or her horror on behalf of the subject. Rather, as we have seen, “trauma” highlights certain features of Badiou’s subject to place his theory of art in limited relation with that of the Romantics, to display his debt to Lacan’s traumatic real in particular, to clarify his critique of Levinasian ethics, to highlight the role of the poetic naming of the void in any “procedure of truth” and to refute the critique offered by Zizek by demonstrating that one need not read the void in Lacanian theory as horror.

    Notes

    1. Throughout the essay, page numbers followed by “e” refer to the English translations; those followed by “f” refer to the French-language editions.

    2. Jacques Rancière, in his “Aesthetics, Inaesthetics, Anti-Aesthetics,” rightly contests ascribing to the German Romantics (as Badiou seems to do) any claim that art alone is capable of truth (Hallward 220).

    3. Badiou names Lacan an “anti-philosopher,” but his estimation of the importance of Lacanian thought for contemporary philosophy is nevertheless the very highest. As he writes in his Manifesto: “the anti-philosopher Lacan is a condition of the renaissance of philosophy. A philosophy is possible today, only if it is compossible with Lacan” (64f, 84e).

    4. Almagestes (1964), Portulans (1967), and Calme bloc ici-bas (1997); also a short story, “L’Autorisation” (1967), and a romanopéra, L’Echarpe rouge (1979), according to Peter Hallward’s very helpful bibliography in the English translation of Ethics (151-59e). Badiou’s plays include Ahmed le subtil (1994), Ahmed se fâche, suivi par Ahmed philosophe (1995), and Citrouilles (1995); the writing of the first of these seems to have been underway as Badiou was writing his Ethics in the summer of 1993. Evidently there are other theatrical pieces, too: in the prologue to his book on Paul, Badiou mentions one from the early 1980s called The Incident at Antioch (1f, 1e).

    5. See his Manifesto 60f, 80e; also L’éthique 63f, 43e; and Conditions 201f, Theoretical Writings 123e. The relation between truth and knowledge is a complex one for Badiou. For present purposes, we might think of knowledge as something like the degraded and distinct afterlife of a truth–degraded because, following Lacan, Badiou asserts that “a truth is essentially unknown” (Conditions 201f; Theoretical Writings 123e) and that “what we know of truth is merely knowledge” (Conditions 192f; Theoretical Writings 114e), and distinct, because, as this paragraph makes plain, knowledge as such no longer enjoys the status of truth and is precisely what is disrupted and reorganized by the appearance of a new truth.

    6. Correspondingly, as Badiou notes in his interview with Lauren Sedofsky, “most of the time, the great majority of us live outside ethics” (“Being by Numbers” 124).

    7. Badiou’s claim here echoes the very influential description of “the literary” made by Friedrich Schlegel: that literature is an interrogation of its own status (for example, in Athenaeum Fragments, numbers 116 and 255). Badiou may be familiar with this claim from the work of his colleagues, Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe and Jean-Luc Nancy, whose The Literary Absolute is concerned with the aesthetics of Schlegel and of the Jena Romantics. Badiou cites Lacoue-Labarthe and Nancy’s book (but does not name Schlegel) in his Ethics (112f, 84e).

    8. For Badiou there is the possibility (the necessity, really, because no truth procedure is solipsistic) for a collective subjectivity. In brief, all those who bear witness to a given truth event enter into the composition of one subject (64f, 43e). Hence Berg and Webern, for example, together with other witnesses to the Schoenberg event, compose but one subject. Badiou (and Hallward, his translator for the Ethics) write of the subject in the singular (however multiple its composition in terms of human individuals); I shall follow suit.

    9. In the Critique of Judgment (1790), Kant is, of course, writing of the beautiful very generally, not specifically of beautiful art (indeed his examples are natural ones: flowers, birds, crustaceans). See the General Comment on the First Division of the Analytic for a compact description of subjective harmony in the beautiful and §27 for remarks on “restful contemplation” in the beautiful.

    10. Apollon elaborates his concept of the “letters of the body” in several essays included in the After Lacan collection, most explicitly in the chapter of that name, “The Letter of the Body” (103-15).

    11. Lacan is the thinker of love named most frequently by Badiou: “I moreover know of no theory of love having been as profound as [Lacan’s] since Plato’s, the Plato of the Symposium that Lacan dialogues with over and over again” (Manifeste 63f, 83e). The final section of the present essay returns to Badiou’s conceptualization of love.

    12. Here is how Badiou describes the Lacanian real in an interview with Peter Hallward that serves as an appendix to the English translation of Ethics: “What especially interested me about Lacan was his conception of the real . . . . And in particular, this conception of the real as being, in a situation, in any given symbolic field, the point of impasse, or the point of impossibility, which precisely allows us to think the situation as a whole, according to its real” (121e).

    13. See Lacan, Le Séminaire XI, 51f, 52e and 54f, 55e, where Lacan describes “the real as trauma,” as his editor, Jacques-Alain Miller, writes in the topical subheading. Lacanians in general tend to regard the key theoretical insight of the talking cure as the intuition that language, always and inevitably, carries some supplement of trauma at its core. For a fascinating discussion of how it is that language–in certain respects absolutely heterogeneous to the unrepresentable real–nonetheless implies an element of the traumatic real, readers might usefully consult three essays by the Gifric analysts in Québec: Willy Apollon’s “The Letter of the Body,” Danielle Bergeron’s “Violence in Works of Art, or, Mishima, from the Pen to the Sword,” and Lucie Cantin’s “The Trauma of Language,” all available in their After Lacan collection.

    14. A neologism.

    15. Eleanor Kaufman’s article proposing to contrast the ethics of Badiou with the ethics of Lacan is, of course, correct to observe that Badiou’s ethics and Lacan’s are not the same thing and do not cover the same territory. This is so in part because Badiou is a philosopher dedicated to thinking the ethics of a situated/supplementary truth, whereas Lacan is a training analyst describing for his students an ethics (and aesthetics) that proceeds from a set of practical, clinical facts concerning the subject’s relation to jouissance, the signifier, and the drive. But Badiou and Lacan are not so far apart either, as my own essay suggests. Kaufman’s strenuous claim that the ethics of Badiou and Lacan are incompatible and opposed seems to rest on her impression that Badiou’s position is essentially a conservative one, rather than one dedicated to radical, innovative truths, as Badiou would claim on his own behalf (L’éthique 61f, 41e). Thus, for Kaufman, Badiou’s “systematic” style of thought reflects an allegiance to the “system” of a given situation (145); thus, too, for Kaufman, Badiou fails to allow for exceptions that change the rule, so that his ethics is dedicated to faithfully following rules (145); thus, finally, in locating ethics (and truth) in art, love, politics, and science, Kaufman’s Badiou is under the misapprehension that he has delimited all experience–or, at least, her Badiou is “unequipped” to deal with anything that cannot be mapped out within the four “conditions” that give rise to ethics (146). These misreadings of Badiou (as I see them) nonetheless imply one point of genuine contrast between the ethics of Lacan and of Badiou: for Badiou the object of ethics (that which his ethical subject pursues with faithful tenacity) matters much more than for Lacan, for whom the subject’s particular object of desire is less important than the subject’s “access to desire” generally–that is, apart from the particularity of this or that object (Le Séminaire VII, 370-71f, 321e). Contra Kaufman, one might read Peter Hallward’s introduction to his Think Again collection for an illuminating and concise presentation of the essential anti-conservatism of Badiou’s thought (7-12). For a much fuller treatment of Badiou’s effort to think the possibility of novelty, see Adrian Johnston’s outstanding piece “The Quick and the Dead” and its sequels: Zizek’s essay “Badiou: Notes from an Ongoing Debate” and Johnston’s reply, “Addendum: Let a thousand flowers bloom!”

    16. Claire Joubert has objected to this de-emphasis on the linguistic in Badiou’s ethics and is correspondingly skeptical of the “compossibility” Badiou claims with the Lacanian subject which was theorized out of Lacan’s encounter with semiology in the 1950s (4). Badiou does develop his theory of subjectivity and ethics through the essential categories of semiology–presence and absence–even if he does so through set theory (as in what “counts” and what is void), rather than through Saussurean linguistics. By the 1970s Lacan himself was moving away from semiological formulations and increasingly toward mathematical models in describing his subject and the workings of the talking cure.

    17. Distinguishing truth from opinion (or from a mere simulacrum of truth) appears to be a key difficulty in the elaboration of Badiou’s project thus far. Badiou himself commits the problem to the care of philosophy and regards it as the central task of philosophy–the ethical task of philosophy–to seize the truths that appear in art (and in science, love, and politics) and to announce them and distinguish them from mere opinion (Petit Manuel 28-29f, 14-15e). In this way, philosophy, too, faces the real, but it also contributes to the elaboration of truths within sense. Ernesto Laclau, in his incisive essay on Badiou, seems not to be comforted by the aid of philosophy in sorting out the success of such wagers. As Laclau puts it, one can hardly look to the logic of the situation itself to identify its true void as an event of truth; nor, in the case of a pseudo-event, can one really look to the pseudo-event to declare itself as mere simulacrum. In short, as we have also seen above, there seems to be no place within Badiou’s theoretical edifice from which to decisively enunciate a truth/simulacrum distinction (Hallward 123-26).

    18. In this “Mallarmé” chapter from Being and Event, Badiou does not explicitly develop his thoughts on Mallarmé’s stellar imagery in the poem, “Coup de dés,” but it seems plain that, here as elsewhere for Badiou, “stellar” carries a Mallarméan resonance (see also Deleuze 11f, 4e and Petit Manuel 89f, 56e).

    19. Zizek’s best-known essay on Badiou, “The Politics of Truth, or, Alain Badiou as a Reader of St Paul,” is largely staged in terms of Lacan’s Seminar VII: The Ethics of Psychoanalysis. See The Ticklish Subject (127-70). Zizek specifically cites Lacan’s ethical formula (ne pas céder sur son désir) at least twice in the same volume (153, 297).

    20. Levinas employs the term throughout his late masterwork, Otherwise than Being (1974), where “trauma” appears in a number of contexts, from the way the transcendent encounter with alterity befalls the chosen ethical subject prior to will (10f, xlii-e and 95f, 56e), to the ethical exposure of the subject to sensibility and to pain in particular (82f, 48e), to the violence and unrepresentability in the “non-relation” of subject and other (196-197f, 123e and 195n1f, 197n27e), to the general problem of an ethics that strikes one from a place outside of being (225f, 144e). One might also recall Levinas’s answer to Philippe Nemo’s first question (“How does one begin thinking?”) in the Ethics and Infinity (1982) interviews: “It probably begins through traumatisms or gropings to which one does not even know how to give verbal form” (11f, 21e).

    21. “L’écriture du générique: Samuel Beckett.”

    22. “Qu’est-ce que l’amour?” On this point regarding the novel, see 254f, 264e.

    23. This is a reference to Beckett’s short prose piece entitled “Lessness” (1970), which describes the endlessness of a landscape, ash grey under a grey sky, which Badiou reads as “the place of being” (“L’écriture” 334f, 6e).

    24. In his book on Metapolitics, Badiou gives some brief, cryptic hints concerning the numericalities for politics (whose first term is the infinite, in the sense that politics “summons or exhibits the subjective infinity of the situation,” rejecting all finitude), for science (whose first term is the void), and for art (whose first term is a finite number). He also remarks that “the infinite comes into play in every truth procedure, but only in politics does it take the first place.” Further, and again cryptically, “Art presents the sensible in the finitude of a work, and the infinite only intervenes in it to the extent that the artist destines the infinite to the finite” (Theoretical Writings 154e).

    25. Peter Dews, in his very interesting essay “States of Grace,” also remarks, briefly, on the similarity of such structures in the thought of Badiou and Levinas (Hallward 113-14).

    26. Given his particular philosophical perspective, it makes sense that Badiou also regards psychoanalytic theory after Lacan as, above all, an elaboration of the Two of sexuation–and love, as Badiou writes, “is that from which the Two is thought” (Manifeste 63f, 83e). Hence, for Badiou, psychoanalysis after Lacan “is the modern treatment of the condition of love” (Manifeste 24f, 44e).

    27. Curiously, Ralph Waldo Emerson, in his essay “The American Scholar,” uses a similarly vivid trope, describing man as a sort of monstrous amputee (53-54).

    28. To be clear, I am not claiming that Heidegger, any more than Lacan or Badiou, is a thoroughgoing Romantic; only that Heidegger’s views specifically on art derive from the tradition initiated by the Romantics.

    29. One might say that Lacan’s entire theory of art, as it appears in the Ethics seminar he gives his clinical trainees, aims to work through a practical puzzle: why it is that, in the course of an analysis, when the analysand approaches something he recognizes as “aggressive towards the fundamental terms of his subjective constellation,” he will, with predictable regularity, make reference to some work of literature or music (Le Séminaire VII, 280f, 238-239e; my translation).

    30. For a superb treatment of Zizek’s relation to Badiou (and an outstanding treatment of Badiou’s relation to materialist thought in the tradition of Althusser), see Bruno Bosteels’s careful two-part essay in Pli, “Alain Badiou’s Theory of the Subject: The Recommencement of Dialectical Materialism?” See also Zizek’s rejoinder to Bosteels, “From Purification to Subtraction: Badiou and the Real” (Hallward 165-81), a much stronger essay than his earlier venture in The Ticklish Subject. In the newer essay, Zizek offers a more appreciative account of Badiou’s engagement with finitude and the real, though he misstates the case when he writes that the

    ultimate difference between Badiou and Lacan thus concerns the relationship between the shattering encounter of the Real and the ensuing arduous work of transforming this explosion of negativity into a new order. For Badiou, this new order “sublates” the exploding negativity into a new consistent truth, while for Lacan, every Truth displays the structure of a (symbolic) fiction, i.e. no Truth is able to touch the Real. (Hallward 177)

    It is not clear to me that Zizek has located a genuine dispute here. Badiou’s subject may indeed be tasked with “sublating” the truth into a new order of language, logic and sense, but Badiou also seems well aware that the status of the truth as real is lost in that very process and has instead lapsed into mere knowledge–albeit a new knowledge with (if one may put it this way) a still vibrant relation to the truth as real. Readers may recall a claim this essay cited earlier: “what we know of truth is merely knowledge” (Conditions 192f; Theoretical Writings 114e). I am intrigued, however, by Zizek’s idea that a kind of formalization, as an approach to the real, might allow Badiou to surpass the “Kantian” impasse that Zizek sees in the way Badiou manages the gap between situational knowledge and real truth and between finite animal and immortal subject (Hallward 174, 178). Regarding Zizek’s critique of Badiou’s Kantianism, see Johnston’s “There is Truth, and then there are truths–or, Slavoj Zizek as a Reader of Alain Badiou.”

    31. Badiou’s clear sense that horror is not a necessary Lacanian association for the void or hole of the real is shown when he discusses the inaugural trauma of the subject in a 1991 paper presented to the Department of Psychoanalysis at the Paul-Valéry University: “We are so accustomed to thinking of castration in terms of horror that we are astonished to hear Lacan discussing it in terms of love” (Conditions 197f; Theoretical 120e).

    32. Badiou’s examples in his Ethics include a range of contemporary moral discourses, from multiculturalism to Western humanitarianism to a certain formation of human rights discourse. Badiou’s philosophical objections to these moral discourses are fourfold. First, the centrality of the image of victimhood poses evil as primary and poses good as merely reactive and remediary. Second, the image of suffering (with the emotion of horror it produces) cripples thought and reason, including any truly progressive analysis of oppression. Third, in making a fetish of human suffering, such discourses take as their object only the most animal aspect of humanity and do not recognize the human being defined by his or her potential for situation-transcending thought and action. Fourth and finally, the set-apartness of any group under the exceptional name of “victim” participates in the anti-universalist gesture which for Badiou makes possible (as in the case of the European Jews) the group’s oppression to begin with. This fourth objection, or rather its example of the European and Israeli Jews in the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, has inspired a rather spirited public exchange in Les temps modernes (Dec. 2005 to Feb. 2006), where Badiou was accused of anti-Semitism. Eric Marty subsequently published his polemic as Une querelle avec Alain Badiou, philosophe (Gallimard, 2007).

    In the short interview with Nicolas Weill in Le Monde, 15 July 2007, Badiou defends himself concisely against the charge of anti-Semitism and presents to a general reader his defense of universalism as emancipatory. Badiou’s philosophical claim is that, in an event, the ethical subject identifies the void of the existing situation as pertaining universally within that situation, informing its every aspect. Truth, we recall, is always universal for Badiou: a truth is true for all. In a pseudo-event, as in the revolutionary break claimed by the Nazis, the universality of the void is disavowed and the void itself displaced onto an exceptional set of particular elements (L’éthique 99-100f, 74e). For the Nazis, Jews (and others) filled this function and were subsequently, brutally, “voided” to speciously assert plenitude (rather than a void) in a situation that named German Jews as exceptions to the “German people.” Badiou sees a contemporary moral plenitude or prestige attached to the word “Jew,” and insofar as it refers to the sufferings of Jews in the Holocaust, it participates in that same gesture of setting apart a subset of elements as exceptional and subject to its own moral “truth.” Badiou is not at all dismissive of man’s “animal” suffering. He is not making a general, philosophical objection to collective action in pursuit of justice. He is not contesting the historical suffering of Jewish people or their rights to live in Israel. Rather, he is arguing that brutality and oppression are often banal cruelties “beneath” good and evil, having no relation to any situation-transcending event. He is arguing that any true political good proceeds from a universalist avowal of the real of a situational void, not a particularist displacement of the void. And he is arguing that a properly human politics proceeds out of an ethical fidelity to a singular, radical truth that inventively addresses the state of the situation and holds forth the promise of producing something new in relation to that situation.

    Works Cited

    • Apollon, Willy. “The Letter of the Body.” 1989. After Lacan: Clinical Practice and the Subject of the Unconscious. Ed. Robert Hughes and Kareen Malone. Albany, NY: State U of New York P, 2002. 103-15.
    • Badiou, Alain. “Being by Numbers: Lauren Sedofsky Talks with Alain Badiou.” Artforum (October 1994): 84-87, 118, 123-24.
    • —. Conditions. Paris: Éditions du Seuil, 1992.
    • — . Deleuze: « La clameur de l’Etre ». Paris: Hachette, 1997. Deleuze: The Clamor of Being. Trans. Louise Burchill. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1999.
    • —. “L’écriture du générique: Samuel Beckett.” 1989. Conditions. 329-66. Trans. as “The Writing of the Generic” in On Beckett. Ed. by Alberto Toscano and Nina Power. Manchester, England: Clinamen, 2003. 1-36.
    • —. L’éthique: Essai sur la conscience du Mal. Paris: Éditions Hatier, 1993. Trans. as Ethics: An Essay on the Understanding of Evil. Trans. Peter Hallward. London: Verso, 2001.
    • —. L’être et l’événement. Paris: Éditions du Seuil, 1988. Trans. as Being and Event. Trans. Oliver Feltham. London: Continuum, 2005.
    • —. Manifeste pour la philosophie. Paris: Éditions du Seuil, 1989. Trans. as Manifesto for Philosophy. Trans. Norman Madarasz. Albany: State U of New York P, 1999.
    • —. Petit Manuel d’Inesthetique. Paris: Éditions du Seuil, 1998. Trans. as Handbook of Inaesthetics. Trans. Alberto Toscano. Stanford UP, 2005.
    • —. “Qu’est-ce que l’amour?” Conditions. 253-73. Trans. as “What is Love?” Trans. Justin Clemens. Sexuation. Ed. Renata Salecl. Durham: Duke UP, 2000. 263-281.
    • —. “Le Recours philosophique au poème.” Conditions. 93-107. Trans. as “Philosophy and Art” in Infinite Thought. Ed. Oliver Feltham and Justin Clemens. London: Continuum, 2003. 69-82.
    • —. Saint Paul: La fondation de l’universalisme. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France, 1997. Trans. as Saint Paul: The Foundation of Universalism. Trans. Ray Brassier. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2003.
    • —. Theoretical Writings. Trans. Ray Brassier and Alberto Toscano. London: Continuum, 2004.
    • Bergeron, Danielle. “Violence in Works of Art, or, Mishima, from the Pen to the Sword.” 1997. After Lacan: Clinical Practice and the Subject of the Unconscious. Ed. Robert Hughes and Kareen Malone. Albany: State U of New York P, 2002. 181-92.
    • Bosteels, Bruno. “Alain Badiou’s Theory of the Subject: Part I. The Recommencement of Dialectical Materialism?” Pli 12 (2001): 200-29.
    • —. “Alain Badiou’s Theory of the Subject: The Recommencement of Dialectical Materialism? (Part II)” Pli 13 (2002): 172-208.
    • Cantin, Lucie. “The Trauma of Language.” 1993. After Lacan: Clinical Practice and the Subject of the Unconscious. Ed. Robert Hughes and Kareen Malone. Albany: State U of New York P, 2002. 35-47.
    • Clemens, Justin. The Romanticism of Contemporary Theory: Institution, Aesthetics, Nihilism. London: Ashgate, 2003. 192-215.
    • Emerson, Ralph Waldo. Essays and Lectures. New York: Library of America, 1983.
    • Hallward, Peter, ed. Think Again: Alain Badiou and the Future of Philosophy. New York: Continuum, 2004.
    • Heidegger, Martin. Erläuterungen zu Hölderlins Dichtung. 1944. Sechste Aufl. Ed. Friedrich-Wilhelm von Herrmann. Frankfurt am Main: Vittorio Klostermann, 1996. Trans. as Elucidations of Hölderlin’s Poetry. Trans. Keith Hoeller. Amherst: Humanity, 2000.
    • Johnston, Adrian. “Addendum: Let a thousand flowers bloom! — Some Brief Remarks on and Responses to Zizek’s ‘Badiou: Notes from an Ongoing Debate.’” International Journal of Zizek Studies 1.2 (2007): 1-18.
    • —. “The Quick and the Dead: Alain Badiou and the Split Speeds of Transformation.” International Journal of Zizek Studies 1.2 (2007): 1-32.
    • —. “There is Truth, and then there are truths–or, Slavoj Zizek as a Reader of Alain Badiou.” International Journal of Zizek Studies 1.0 (2007): 141-85.
    •  
    • Joubert, Claire. “Badiou and the Ethics of Prose: Revaluing Beckett.” Polart–poétique et politique de l’art (30 July 2004): 1-17.
    • Kant, Immanuel. Kritik der Urteilskraft. 1790. Ed. Gerhard Lehmann. Stuttgart: Philipp Reclam, 1963. Trans. as Critique of Judgment. Trans. Werner Pluhar. Cambridge: Hackett, 1987.
    • Kaufman, Eleanor. “Why the Family is Beautiful (Lacan Against Badiou).” Diacritics 32.3-4 (Fall/Winter 2002): 135-51.
    • Lacan, Jacques. Le Séminaire, Livre VII: L’éthique de la psychanalyse, 1959-1960. Ed. Jacques-Alain Miller. Paris: Éditions du Seuil, 1986. Trans. as The Seminar of Jacques Lacan. Book VII: The Ethics of Psychoanalysis, 1959-1960. Ed. Jacques-Alain Miller. Trans. Dennis Porter. New York: Norton, 1992.
    • —. Le Séminaire, Livre XI: Les quatre concepts fondamentaux de la psychanalyse, 1964. Ed. Jacques-Alain Miller. Paris: Éditions du Seuil, 1973. Trans. as The Seminar of Jacques Lacan. Book XI: The Four Fundamental Concepts of Psycho-Analysis. Ed. Jacques-Alain Miller. Trans. Alan Sheridan. New York: W.W. Norton & Co., 1978.
    • Levinas, Emmanuel. Autrement qu’être ou au-delà de l’essence. 1974. Paris: Kluwer Academic/Le Livre de Poche. Trans. as Otherwise than Being or Beyond Essence. Trans. Alphonso Lingis. Boston: Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1991.
    • —. Éthique et infini: Dialogues avec Philippe Nemo. 1982. Paris: Fayard/Le Livre de Poche. Trans. as Ethics and Infinity: Conversations with Philippe Nemo. Trans. Richard A. Cohen. Pittsburgh: Duquesne UP, 1985.
    • —. Le temps et l’autre. 1947. Paris: Quadrige/PUF, 2001. Trans. as Time and the Other. Trans. Richard A. Cohen. Pittsburgh: Duquesne UP, 1987.
    • Poe, Edgar Allan. “The Purloined Letter.” 1844. Poetry and Tales. New York: Library of America, 1984. 680-98.
    • Schiller, Friedrich. Über die ästhetische Erziehung des Menschen in einer Reihe von Briefen. 1795. Sämtliche Werke. Band V: Erzählungen; Theoretische Schriften. Herausgegeben von Wolfgang Riedel. München, Germany: Deutscher Taschenbuch Verlag, 2004. 570-669. Trans. as On the Aesthetic Education of Man. Trans. Reginald Snell. Mineola, NY: Dover, 2004.
    • Schlegel, Friedrich. Athenäums-Fragmente. 1798. Kritische Schriften und Fragmente [1798-1801]. Studienausgabe. Band 2. Herausgegeben von Ernst Behler und Hans Eichner. Paderborn, Germany: Ferdinand Schöningh, 1988. 105-56. Trans. as Athenaeum Fragments. In Philosophical Fragments. Trans. Peter Firchow. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1991. 18-93.
    • Zizek, Slavoj. “Badiou: Notes from an Ongoing Debate.” International Journal of Zizek Studies 1.2 (2007): 1-15.
    • —. “The Politics of Truth, or, Alain Badiou as a Reader of St Paul.” The Ticklish Subject: The Absent Centre of Political Ontology. London: Verso, 2000. 127-70.

  • The Swerve Around P: Literary Theory after Interpretation

    Jeffrey T. Nealon
    Department of English
    Pennsylvania State University
    jxn8@psu.edu

    I. Literature

    On a recent trip to the library to find an essay that a visiting speaker was going to talk about, something odd (and a bit embarrassing) happened to me. I got the call number for the volume, and bee-lined directly to the library’s “P” shelves (the Library of Congress designation for language, literature and literary criticism/theory). But I found that the whole section had been moved–there were students working on laptops in the corner where literary criticism and theory used to be. I eventually found the volume I was looking for, along with some old friends like my own first book (a proud alum of PS 228, Class of ’93), relocated in the 5th floor stacks. I later asked the humanities librarian, when I saw him at the talk: “Hey, when did the ‘P’ section get moved to the 5th floor?” “2002,” he answered, a bit incredulously. I could see him wondering: this guy makes his living as an English professor, but he hasn’t been in the literary criticism section for years?
     

    It struck me as puzzling as well. When I was in grad school–not that long ago–just about everything I needed to know was in the P section. I knew those shelves like the back of my hand. But I guess it is true that, in Library of Congress terms, for my work in recent years it’s been all B’s, H’s, and J’s (Philosophy, Social Science, and Politics), hardly any P’s–both in terms of the theory and criticism that I read, and in terms of the work that I publish. At first I thought that this was simply an anomaly of my research agendas; but an overwhelming number of colleagues I’ve since talked to about this experience have similar tales of the swerve around P. Others of course have different preferred Library of Congress designations for their research: the vast D through F shelves for the department historians, Q and R for science studies, more H and J for the queer theorists and cultural studies people, as well as a healthy smattering of G and T (geography and technology). And even those whose work remains firmly on the language and literature shelves admit that much of what goes into their books on literature requires research from other places: history, sociology, social science, not to mention the unclassifiable archival research that informs so much of the work on the P shelves. In short, even the scholarship on the language and literature shelves isn’t “literary” in quite the same way it was even a decade ago. There’s plenty of superb “theory” and “criticism” being produced in and around English departments, but the adjective “literary” seems oddly out of place when it comes to describing it–inapplicable as much to the work of historians (“don’t call us literary historians,” a colleague warns) as to theorists (editors at Rowman and Littlefield quickly wrenched the word “literary” out of the title of my co-authored textbook, The Theory Toolbox–marketing death, they said).

     
    This swerve around P is probably something that most people reading this will recognize, in one way or another. And rather than coming before you to celebrate or denounce the demise of the “literary,” I’d like to think about how and why this situation came about, and how it may or may not be related to another story that’s making the rounds in literature departments, the so-called “death of theory.” To anticipate, I’ll suggest that research in and around language and literature is no longer “literary” most obviously in the sense that it’s no longer primarily concerned with producing interpretations of existing or emerging literary artifacts. This–let’s call it for now “anti-hermeneutic”–thrust is additionally the transversal line that connects the decline of the literary to the demise of “big theory.” As Jane Tompkins had pointed out in the heyday of theory, specifically in her 1980 collection Reader-Response Criticism, even as theorists fought seemingly life-and-death battles against new critical formalism, in the end those battles had the paradoxical effect of intensifying a crucial tenet of formalism: namely, what Tompkins calls “the triumph of interpretation” (219). Whether Wallace Stevens was all about organic unity or whether he was all about undecidability, either way it was interpretation all the way down.

     
    Of course, there’s a semantic confusion involved when one argues that literary theory was and is beholden to interpretation, insofar as big theory in North American literature departments got off the ground in the 1970s precisely through its critique of new critical notions of literary meaning. The attempt or desire to go “Beyond Interpretation,” as Jonathan Culler names it in a 1976 essay, was part and parcel of the attempt to go beyond New Criticism. As Paul de Man writes, for example, with criticism’s departure from the universe of new critical reading, “the entire question of meaning can be bracketed, thus freeing the critical discourse from the debilitating burden of paraphrase” (28)–from any mimetic or thematic notion of meaning–and thereby allowing new horizons of interpretive possibilities. Which is to say that literary theory of the 1970s and 80s hardly abandons the project of interpretation wholesale–J. Hillis Miller famously insisted that “‘deconstruction’ is . . . simply interpretation as such” (230)–but the era of literary theory crucially shifts interpretation’s emphasis from the “what” of meaning (new criticism’s “debilitating burden of paraphrase”) to the “how” of meaning, the strangely “enabling” task of infinite interpretation. In retrospect, it seems clear that the era of poststructuralism was characterized by a decisive intensification of attention to the process (rather than the product) of interpretation. This interpretive mutation from what to how comprised “the triumph of theory.”
     

    However, as theory triumphed over content- and theme-oriented criticism (as reading or interpretation became unmoored from older, new critical or structuralist versions of meaning), it’s important to recall that “meaning” nevertheless remained the privileged site of poststructuralist critical endeavor; in fact literary “meaning,” far from remaining a thematic unity hidden away within a rarified realm of dusty books, becomes in the poststructuralist theory era the slippery lure for “readings” of all kinds, the hermeneutic gesture exploded throughout the literary and social field. Despite the overt and constant critique of univocal meaning within literary theory (or more likely because of this critique’s ubiquity), the hermetic or insular notion of univocal meaning remains the structuring other buried within poststructuralist celebrations of interpretation’s open-endedness, a kind of shadow passenger who must always be kept at bay by interpretation. Interpretation, in short, becomes the enemy of univocal meaning in the theory era–but that old-fashioned sense of meaning still thereby remains a central concern, if only as that which is to be warded off by the critical act. (What, one might wonder, are the tasks or results of poststructuralist reading if they are not first and foremost gestures towards interpretation as an interminable enterprise?) As Culler writes in his 2006 defense of theory as poetics, The Literary in Theory, “One could say that literary studies in the American academy, precisely because of its commitment to the priority of interpretation as the goal of literary study, was quick to posit a ‘poststructuralism’ based on the impossibility or inappropriateness of the systematic projects of structuralism, so that interpretation, albeit of different kinds, might remain the task of literary studies” (10-11).
     

    This decisive mutation from the what of hermeneutics to the how–in shorthand, from revealing meaning to performing readings–doesn’t simply abandon the structural position of “meaning” in the hermeneutic enterprise. Far from fading into the background, the interpretive act here swallows up everything: even death (as de Man provocatively insisted) becomes a displaced name for a linguistic predicament. Meaning is reborn, even as it arrives stillborn in each and every reading. Interrupted, reading-as-interpretation nevertheless continues–and it lives on even more strongly in its new-found assurance that the text will never be totalized. Meaning remains the impossible lure, the absent center, the lack or excess that continues to drive the critical enterprise. Textual undecidability of this variety has been very good to literary criticism. Instead of producing the nihilism and critical irrelevance that many traditionalists feared, the jettisoning of meaning-as-content was in retrospect absolutely necessary in order for poststructuralist hermeneutics to succeed. Open-ended interpretation was the practice that launched a thousand successful tenure cases (including mine). In the era of big theory, the stakes among competing methodologies were high, but they remained interpretive stakes.
     

    Indeed, we need to recall that the MLA “theory wars” were characterized not so much by disputes between interpreters of literature and those who held that there was some other thing or set of things that critics should be doing in and around the literary; rather, the theory wars were largely internecine battles among interpretive camps or methods. Perhaps the most striking thing about some of the larger methodological claims from the “big theory” era is the way they feel now like clunky advertising campaigns or the remnants of a marketing war in which various methodologies jockey for market share, often deploying slogans that would seem to us now to be hilariously “totalizing”–something like your local bar’s claim to have “the best hot wings in the universe!” Perhaps the most infamous of these claims comes about in the aftermath of de Man’s reading of Proustian metaphor and metonymy in 1973’s “Semiology and Rhetoric”: “The whole of literature,” de Man writes, “would respond in similar fashion, although the techniques and patterns would have to vary considerably, of course, from author to author. But there is absolutely no reason why analyses of the kind suggested here for Proust would not be applicable, with proper modifications of technique, to Milton or to Dante or to Hölderlin. This in fact will be the task of literary criticism in the coming years” (32). From the vantage point of the present, it’s a little hard to believe that the “task of literary criticism in the coming years” could have been so earnestly and seriously (or perhaps winkingly and ironically?) presented as the application of one method among others.
     

    Indeed, it’s hard to imagine someone today arguing that we should dedicate ourselves to the task of re-reading the canon according to the protocols of a particular interpretive approach (Geneva School phenomenology, Butler’s gender performativity, Foucaultian biopower, or Shlovsky’s Russian Formalism), but such claims were in fact ubiquitous in the era of big theory. Recall Fredric Jameson from The Political Unconscious (1981): “My position here is that only Marxism offers a philosophically coherent and ideologically compelling resolution to the dilemma of historicism . . . . Only Marxism can give us an adequate account of the essential mystery of the cultural past” (19). Jameson thematizes his entire project in this book as the articulation of a “properly Marxist hermeneutic” (23), responding to the “demand for the construction of some new and more adequate, immanent or antitranscendent hermeneutic model” (23). One could go on multiplying these kinds of claims from the big theory era, recalling for example that the subtitle of Henry Louis Gates’s The Signifying Monkey (1988) is nothing less comprehensive than “A Theory of African-American Literary Criticism,” or recalling the claims made for certain kinds of interpreters–resisting or otherwise–in reader-response criticism.
     

    My point here is not to underline the hubris of the North American theory era, but to suggest that the big claims of big theory were underwritten by a disciplinary apparatus in and around literature departments that was completely beholden to interpretation (especially in terms of research publication). Whether it was deconstruction, Marxism, African-American criticism, or almost anything else, the era of big theory was an era of interpretative models that fought for the status as the most powerful and universally applicable one–the “winner” being the critical method that could succeed in festooning the pages of the most journals with its inventive new readings of texts. As Josue Harari writes in his hugely successful 1979 anthology Textual Strategies, “method has become a strategy” (72). As Harari continues describing his anthology of strategic interpretive methods, “I have presented the various critical struggles at play among contemporary theorists. It remains to inscribe these strategies in a more global framework, to put them in a ring of criticism, as it were, and to determine how the rounds are to be scored” (68-9). And back in the day, scoring those rounds amounted to judging which was the most persuasive “new” interpretation of a given text. The era of big theory constituted a decisive intensification, rather than a reversal or abandonment, of literary meaning and its discontents.
     

    While it’s taken a quarter-century, contemporary criticism at this point seems to have fully heeded Tompkins’s 1980 call for research to swerve away from interpretation and reconnect to what she calls “a long history of critical thought in which the specification of meaning is not a central concern” (201): a criticism based not so narrowly on the interior or formal relations among discourse and meaning, but focused instead on “the relations of discourse and power” (226). Tompkins’s “break with formalism” (226) seems plausible enough as a description of recent history in literary criticism and theory (when was the last time you heard a junior job candidate do an actual close reading of a poem?), and one could at this point begin multiplying anti-hermeneutic references: critical theories invested in Deleuze and Guattari, Foucault, Gumbrecht, the later Jameson, Irigaray, Franco Moretti’s sociology of literary forms, or Bourdieu’s work on cultural capital; virtually the whole of fields like cultural studies, rhetoric, science studies, globalization studies, and a strongly resurgent (in fact, hegemonically dominant) “old” historicism in literary studies. One could add the decidedly other-than-hermeneutic thrust of artistic formations like the “unreadable” postmodern novel, almost all contemporary American poetry (both the so-called workshop tradition–which relies largely on communicating subjective affect rather than semantic meaning–and more experimental traditions), contemporary painting, performance art, and so on.
     

    While something like Tompkins’s account of recent American literary critical history seems plausible enough to me (tracing a path from the hegemony of research questions concerning textual interpretation or meaning to the reign of questions about literature’s inscription in history, discourse, power, or the everyday), I’d like to supplement or combine it here with a wholly different account of the swerve around the literary, Alain Badiou’s in Manifesto for Philosophy. I’d like to do so not only because of the interest of Badiou’s account of continental philosophy’s current state, but also because hybridizing Tompkins’s account with Badiou’s may actually help to re-situate or re-imagine a future for the literary. In short, it seems to me that on Tompkins’s account (and others like it), the literary remains the marker for a kind of stale, apolitical formalism obsessed with questions of interpretive meaning and little else; if one accepts this rendering of recent critical history, it’s hard to be concerned about the passing of the literary, and/or equally hard to imagine any productive research future for the adjective “literary” in “literary criticism and theory.”
     

    The question of meaning is, and I think will remain, the bread and butter of classroom practice in literature departments; in particular, the undergraduate theory class will continue to function as an invaluable introduction to interpretive protocols for some time to come. For faculty research, however, I think it’s a different story: while research surrounding the mechanics and production of meaning (and/or its flipside undecidability) experienced a boom during the big theory years, it’s almost impossible only a few years later to imagine a publishing future that consists of new interpretations of Pynchon, Renaissance tragedies, or Melville. Contra much of the reactionary hope invested in the passing of “big theory” (“Finally, now we can go back to reading and appreciating literature, without all this jargon!”), the decisive conceptual difference separating the present from the era of big theory is not so much a loss of status for theoretical discourses (just look at any university press catalog and you’ll be quickly disabused of that notion), but the waning of literary interpretation itself as a viable research (which is to say, publishing) agenda.
     

    In the end, it is the taken-for-grantedness of literary interpretation’s centrality, rather than a wholesale disciplinary rejection of something called theory, that separates our present from the era of big theory. And if there’s no “next big thing” coming down the theory pike, it’s precisely because such a notion of “next big thing” (like feminism, deconstruction, or new historicism in their day) has tended to mean the arrival of a new interpretive paradigm. There’s no new interpretive paradigm on the horizon not so much because of the exhaustion of theory itself (there are many under-explored interpretive models or theorists) but because the work of interpretation is no longer the primary research work of literature departments. There will be no Blanchot revolution, televised or otherwise.
     

    To put the same problem somewhat differently, in the era of big literary theory there was a certain unease at the perceived increasing distance between classroom practice and research publication–producing close readings in classrooms, deconstructing them in journals. But in the present context, that perceived “gap” seems like a positive continuity, because back in the day, at least it was the same general operation–interpretation–at work both in the Introduction to Literature class and in PMLA. But if the work that we’re publishing these days is increasingly driven by questions that seem foreign to interpretive classroom practice, that should give us pause–if for no other reason than to consider how the future of our discipline might be related to the practices that dominated its recent past. It is, in the end, precisely in the name of re-imagining a future for the “literary” that I turn to Badiou’s account of its demise in recent philosophy.

    II. Philosophy

    While Badiou’s work is becoming well-known in North America–the Chronicle of Higher Education recently tagged him as a potential “next big thing” in the theory world, surely the kiss of death (see Byrne)–a brief discussion of some of his thought is relevant in this context. Against the thematics of the twilight of philosophy, and against all messianisms, Badiou calls for thinking’s revitalization, primarily through an emphasis on what he calls a “positive,” non-sacramental relation to infinity–a relation that, for Badiou, is on display most forcefully in the axiomatic thrust of mathematics. In returning to what he sees as the Greek origins of philosophy–he goes so far as to call his thinking a “Platonism of the multiple” (Manifesto 103)–Badiou locates four “conditions of philosophy”: “the matheme, the poem, political invention, and love” (35). Western philosophy is said to have begun in Greece with these four topics (science, literature, politics, desire), and for Badiou “the lack of a single one gives rise to [philosophy’s] dissipation” (35), which isn’t to say its end. Philosophical thinking is in danger whenever it becomes tied too closely and exclusively to one of its four-fold conditions. The danger, for Badiou, is “handing over the whole of thought to one generic procedure . . . . I call this type of situation a suture. Philosophy is placed in suspension every time it presents itself as being sutured to one of its conditions” (61). So, for example, Marxism has often been too sutured to the political condition–here Badiou even implicates his own earlier Maoism (76)–while analytic philosophy has on the whole sutured itself too closely to the scientism of the matheme. “Philosophy,” in its simplest definition, is for Badiou “de-suturation” (67), the interruption of an exclusive thought-suture to either politics, science, love, or the literary. Hence, Badiou calls his a “subtractive” thinking, one that subtracts itself from constrictive sutures, to reconnect with the multiple.
     

    The most totalizing suture of recent philosophical times, Badiou writes polemically, is not the political or the scientific-mathematical, or even privatized “love,” but the poetic, the literary suture. As he insists, today “it so happens that the main stake, the supreme difficulty, is to de-suture philosophy from its poetic condition” (67). Badiou rather cannily chooses Heidegger as his main foil in this argument. Even Heidegger’s staunchest proponents would agree that the literary is in fact the ground of his thinking; he has relatively little compelling to say about politics, mathematics, or love for that matter–or, more precisely, anything compelling that he might have to say about those topics would have to run through the poetic, as this suture is the ontological ground of the space of possibility in Heidegger’s thinking. Anything that emerges does so in Heidegger through the structure of the literary opening, that privileged path to the meaning of Being.

     
    Of course, my two exemplary accounts of the literary’s demise (Tompkins’s and Badiou’s) do not map seamlessly onto one another, for a whole host of disciplinary, historical, and geographical reasons. Most obviously, one might point out that the lion’s share of American literary theory (or most continental philosophy, for that matter) isn’t or never was so Heideggerian as Badiou’s account would seem to suggest. However, much of the “big theory” era in literature departments did, I think, share the bond that both Badiou and Tompkins point out: the questions of “meaning” or interpretation as the ultimate horizon of inquiry. This hermeneutic thrust was prominently on display in virtually all big theory in literature departments, even in the polemically new historicist work of people like the boundary 2 New Americanists, as well as in much of the early new historicist work in English literature (think here of a great book like Jonathan Dollimore’s Radical Tragedy, which deploys its historical materialist mix of religion, ideology, and power primarily to produce startling new readings of Renaissance tragedies). Likewise, however anti-Heideggerian much Tel Quel thinking may have been, it did nonetheless protect the horizon of hermeneutics (the literary suture) as the royal road to larger philosophical and cultural questions. Like Tompkins’s call for literary criticism to reconnect to a non-hermeneutic tradition, then, Badiou’s critique of the poetic suture in philosophy is less a spring-green avant gardism (calling for a radical new direction in thought), than it is an attempt to return critique to a series of other questions, ones not treated well within the poetic idiom. As Badiou writes, “Descartes, Leibnitz, Kant or Hegel might have been mathematicians, historians, or physicists; if there is one thing they were not, it was poets” (70).

     
    Contrary to Tompkins’s diagnosis of literary criticism circa 1980, however, Badiou doesn’t treat the poetic suture of neo-Heideggerian thought primarily as an ideological swerve away from the real or from crucial questions of its day–politics, power, gender, etc. For Badiou, the poetic suture is not primarily the offspring of a false or deluded consciousness concerning the centrality of literature: “there really was an age of poets” (70)–Badiou dates it from Hölderlin to Celan, 1770–1970–when the central problems of philosophy were worked out most forcefully and concisely in poetic texts. Literary works for a long time presented us with our most crucial philosophical enigmas: “the most open approach to the question of being,” “the space of compossibility least caught up in the brutal sutures” of political coercion, “the enigma of time” (70), and of course the undulations of love and desire. Badiou, in other words, hardly seeks to dismiss the power of the poetic suture in philosophy: “Heidegger’s thinking has owed its persuasive power to having been the only one to pick up what was at stake in the poem, namely the destitution of object fetishism, the opposition of truth and knowledge, and lastly the essential disorientation of our epoch” (74). On Badiou’s account the literary became central to a whole era of thought not primarily because of the ideological investments of its proponents (the general claim that’s not too far below the surface of Tompkins’s critique of formalist fetishizing of the poem), but precisely because the literary spoke most forcefully and succinctly to a whole set of crucial questions (political and otherwise): literature’s critique of object and commodity fetishism (the poem’s anti-instrumental resistance to appropriation), poetry’s singular epistemological force (the impossibility of assigning it an “objective” meaning), and the literary’s testimony to the existential disorientation of the era. These were all crucial philosophical questions that could be accessed in their most intense manifestations primarily through the literary or hermeneutic suture–through the question of meaning and its discontents.
     

    Badiou’s concern is less to debunk the prestige, ideology, or inherent interest of the literary relation to philosophy, but to explore or emphasize what we might call the “cost” of a primary suture onto the literary–how it recasts or downplays thinking’s relations to what Badiou sees as its other properly philosophical themes (the political, love, and the mathematical – scientific). If, as Badiou insists, “ultimately, being qua being is nothing but the multiple as such” (“Being by Numbers,” n.p.), then the literary suture can do little more than endlessly demonstrate or gesture toward this multiplicity, in what Badiou suggests is a primarily theological register. Poetry, he insists, functions largely as the “local maintenance of the sacred” (Manifesto 57), as repository of hidden meaning or the marker for infinite possibility. Badiou, on the other hand, takes his primary task to be the “secularization of infinity,” which is why for Badiou the mathematical language of set theory becomes a privileged one. It drains infinity or the multiple of its Barthesian “jouissance”: “that’s the price of a deromanticization of infinity,” he writes. Quite simply, “Mathematics secularizes infinity in the clearest way, by formalizing it” (“Being by Numbers”). The project for Badiou is less guaranteeing the openness of infinity (which was the primary job of the literary during the age of the poem), than it is mobilizing said infinity (the job that characterizes politics, science, love).
     

    This, unfortunately, is also where Badiou’s account begins to become unhelpful for rethinking a genealogy of recent developments in the history of literary criticism and/or philosophy, as his mathematical impulse is driven in large part by an attempt not to connect thinking to this or that transversal field, but to insist on philosophy’s (absolute) autonomy as that discourse dedicated to the ahistorical “truth” best represented by mathematics: “I propose to tear philosophy away from this genealogical imperative” (Manifesto 115), he writes. “To forget history–this at first means to make decisions of thinking without returning to a supposed historical sense prescribed by these decisions. It is a question of breaking with historicism to enter, as someone like Descartes or Spinoza did, into an autonomous legitimating of discourse. Philosophy must take on axioms of thinking and draw consequences from them” (115). For Badiou, this ahistorical thrust must break with poetic suture, precisely because the poetic comprises (as its inherent strength) a thinking “vis-à-vis,” always in relation to the object or the world (rather than the ahistorical truth) as the bearer of the multiple.

     
    Unfashionable as it surely is, Badiou’s Platonism of the multiple is just that, fidelity to a “truth without object” (Manifesto 93): “The task of such a thinking is to produce a concept of the subject such that it is supported by no mention of the object, a subject, if I might say, without vis-à-vis. This locus has a bad reputation, for it invokes Bishop Berkeley’s absolute idealism. As you have realized, it is, yet, to the task of occupying it that I am devoted” (93). As much as I appreciate (and to a large extent agree with) his sizing up of the “cost” of thinking’s primary suture onto the literary, this absolutist notion of the “subject” and ahistorical “fidelity” (to the originary “truth-procedure” or the founding “event” of truth) is where I get off the Badiou boat, desperately seeking again the literary bateau ivre. Badiou’s thinking here seems to put us all somewhere in the vicinity of the quarter deck of the Pequod, consistently menaced by a kind of dictatorial subjective decisionism masquerading (as it so often does) as absolute fidelity to the ahistorical truth. As Badiou writes, “there is no ethical imperative other than ‘Continue!,’ ‘Continue in your fidelity!’” (“Being by Numbers”)–perhaps one could translate it as “Keep on Truckin”? As the outline of a potential ethics, this notion of single-minded fidelity toward an ahistorical “truth without object” for me summons up the words of a great literary figure who himself most rigorously refused the world of relation (the vis-à-vis): “I would prefer not to.”
     

    Badiou’s North American popularity, such as it is, may come from his sledgehammer critique of liberalism: in an American political world where the moniker “leftist” is virtually synonymous with “flip-flopper,” Badiou’s self-founding subject and Maoist political “fidelity” solve some of the problems that traditional liberalism creates for politics. If nothing else, Maoism is good for things like knowing what the truth is, or the only correct way to find it; tenacious commitment and fidelity to the cause; knowing which side you’re on (an intensified version of Schmitt’s friend/enemy distinction comprises virtually the whole field of Badiou’s “prescriptive politics”).[1] It also offers a virtual guarantee that what you’re doing at any given point can be called “authentic resistance” (insofar as someone in the truth is by definition fighting the good fight against the enemy). Despite the guard rails that Badiou consistently throws up against a purely subjective decisionism (e.g., that truth procedures must be “generic,” thereby open to all), one might argue that his thought remains not so much haunted as it is grounded by a decisionism or voluntarism.

     
    The “plus” side of Badiou’s Maoism is, ironically, that it looks like a pretty good description of Bush Administration practices (the war on terror is “without vis-à-vis” indeed!); but at the end of the day, one person’s universal and ahistorical “truth-procedure” is–a thousand references to Plato, Leo Strauss, Hayek, or the Koran notwithstanding–inexorably another person’s doxa. This conceptual slippage (between the individual and the group, the universal and the particular, absolute truth and mere opinion) is, of course, the central problem around which liberalism configures itself; but as tempting or satisfying as it might be to jettison the inherent slipperiness of political events in the name of an absolute subjective and group commitment, this comes only at the cost of intensifying the fundamental problems of liberalism (and, indeed, the central problems of the contemporary economic and political world): fidelity toward those who share my commitment, and little but suspicion for all the others. What we might call the “Badiou cocktail”–as Daniel Bensaid suggests, a potent mix of “theoretical elitism and practical moralism” (101)–hardly offers much of a hangover cure from liberal political theory’s failures and historical disasters. While there are myriad problems with contemporary liberalism (or even more so neo-liberalism), the most pressing among them is hardly that liberalism displays too little moralism, decisionism, or elitism. So why be interested in Badiou’s account at all? Or what can it offer us over and above something like Tompkins’s swerve around the literary?
     

    It seems to me that Badiou offers a way to think the literary again as one of a series of other crucial topics (love, science, politics, etc.), without literature’s having to carry the burden of being the privileged or necessary approach to those other questions. I think that Badiou is right when he suggests that literary interpretation has been the primary suture of our recent past, and that this suture has proven costly or ineffective when it’s exported wholesale into other fields of inquiry. Politics, science, and love (one might add here most art forms in general) are hardly realms where “meaning” of a literary kind makes much difference, and it can be a bit of a “disaster” (Badiou’s word) to confuse political or mathematical questions with questions of literary interpretation. But, and this seems to be the most serious problem with Badiou’s account, such an over-reliance on the literary suture can hardly be rectified by absolutizing the mathematical or scientific suture: that “solution” seems to intensify the problem by insisting again on the autonomy of one suture over the others. (Indeed, the problem may be insisting that there are only four sutures, when in fact it seems that, mathematically speaking, there would have to be “n” sutures, an infinite number, just as there are “n” friends and “n” enemies within the political realm.[2] But in some ways Badiou remains right on target. We do at this point need to desacrilize the interpretive, but without handing over the whole operation to Badiou’s solutions: the matheme, the self-grounding subject, the ahistorical truth, a prescriptive “with us or against us” politics. This kind of hesitation or critique undoubtedly makes me a Badiouean enemy, a liberal accomodationist. So be it. I think Foucault critiques the friend/enemy distinction best: “Who fights against whom? We all fight each other. And there is always within each of us something that fights something else . . . . [at the level of] individuals, or even sub-individuals” (Power 208).[3]

    III. Literature and Philosophy

    While I subscribe fully to neither of the general accounts that I sketch above, it seems to me that Badiou’s philosophical account of the literary’s demise, hybridized with Tompkins’s literary-critical one, offers us some provocative ways to think through the future of the literary and its possible future relations to philosophy. First, while these two accounts diverge in significant ways, they both suggest that the hegemony of the “literary” in recent theory is in fact better understood as the hegemony of “meaning” (and its flipside, undecidability); likewise, both accounts agree that hermeneutics doesn’t and shouldn’t saturate the category of the “literary.” The first time around, in the era of big theory, the disciplinary relationship between literature and philosophy was pretty clear: literary studies needed interpretive paradigms, which it found in philosophy; and philosophy needed some real-world application, a place to show examples of what it could do, and it found this oftentimes in literature. Either way, the relation between philosophy and literature in the era of big theory was almost wholly a narrow hermeneutic one, having to do with the mechanics, production and (im)possibility of meaning.

     
    Against this narrowly interpretive sense of literature, I suggest that the literary can, in a more robust sense, comprise a thinking “vis-à-vis without meaning.” While this probably sounds a little odd–what’s literature without the question of meaning?–it always seemed equally strange to me that literary studies found itself so completely territorialized on this question of meaning, when virtually no other art form or art criticism is as obsessed by it. “What does it mean?” seems like the wrong question to ask, for example, about music or sculpture, not to mention performance art or post-impressionist painting. And it’s always seemed to me likewise a puzzling (and, finally, zero-sum) question to put to Joyce’s texts or to Shakespeare’s.
     

    Indeed, the strength of literature, contra Badiou, lies in its constitution of a strong–infinitely molecular–brand of thinking the vis-à-vis, of thinking about and through the world of infinite relation. The mistake or Achilles heel of the literary suture, though, was that in the era of big literary theory, this inherently positive, multiple, machinic, and molecular thinking was overthrown by questions of “meaning”–which is to say, questions about the neo-theological play of presence and absence. Such a hermeneutic thinking of the multiple is always and necessarily tied to the lack or absence of a kind of neo-objectivist one (multiple interpretations being thought in hermeneutics primarily through a founding absence, the flown god or the death of the author). The “presence” of this thing called meaning is always already made possible by the chiasmic “absence” of some thing or things (the spectral materiality of the signifier, the haunting of other interpretations, the originary dispensation of being, etc). As its primary Achilles Heel, the hermeneutic suture commits you to showing first and foremost what literature can’t do (it can’t mean univocally), rather than what it can do (a thousand other things). Such hermeneutic literary theory is inexorably a thinking based on lack. Find the gaps, fissures, or absences, and there you’ll find either a secret trace of lost or impossible plenitude (the hidden subtext of meaning), or a hollowing out of the text so as to render it multiply undecidable. And, as much as it pains me to say this, it is those strictly-speaking interpretive questions (that painstaking tracing of the chiasmic reversals of presence and absence of meaning in a text) that are at this point dead ends in literary research. Don’t believe it? Try deconstructing the hell out of an Emily Dickinson poem, and send the results to PMLA–see what happens.

     
    By way of a caveat or disclaimer, it seems to me that the future of the literary is not at all a matter of finding ways simply to abandon the theoretical discussion of literature that was inaugurated by new criticism and intensified in the era of big theory. To my mind, that’d be a huge mistake because, after all, new critical interpretation was the thing that took the backyard conversation that was “literature” and made it into a research profession, for better or worse. My provocation here, if I have one at all, is simply asking theoreticians to rethink the possible sets of relation among literature and philosophy, other than in the key of interpretation. This is a call that has already been well heeded by our literature department colleagues: historicists, environmental critics, public intellectuals, and myriad others are producing vital and interesting work in and around literature, outside the mechanics of meaning. However, the department theorist–mon semblable, mon frère et soeur–seems these days to be mired in a kind of funk, too many of us driven by a sense that our heyday has passed, leaving us stuck with a hard drive full of Heideggerian readings of The Anglo-Saxon Chronicle (I actually have such an essay, should anyone care to read it), or bereft of journals interested in our inventive uses of Agamben to interpret The Scarlet Letter.
     

    But enough mourning for Big Theory.[4] So much does, in fact, depend on “a red wheelbarrow / glazed with rain water / beside the white chickens”–so much more than meaning depends on the sense of irreducibly multiple relation that is this thing called literature. And as Badiou suggests, at this point in the history of the literary, a release from the hermeneutic suture may in fact be what poetry “wants”: its primary job should, perhaps, no longer be to provide exemplary fodder for interpretive methods or to offer examples of philosophical truths. I can already feel a kind of query or invitation from the reader: “Yes, I’ve had it with bland historicist job talks concerning novels written by pirates, or tracking what Frederick Douglass did on the weekend, and would love to think theoretically about the literary again. How about an example of the kind of reading you’re talking about–using, say, Heart of Darkness as a sample text? Show us what your paradigm can do–take it out for a test drive on Conrad.” No dice. That whole sense of offering an example reading or a critical template is, as I’ve argued above, itself a relic of the “big theory” era that I’m asking theorists to consider fleeing. I’m not interested in founding a new interpretive school here, nor in prescribing hot topics for critique. I’m simply insisting that, despite claims to the contrary, the literary–and with it literary theory–is or should be alive and well, but only if we abandon our nostalgia for the primary suture of the interpretive itself, and turn literature and literary theory back to the multiplicity of uses and questions that characterize our engagements with other forms of expression–to reinvigorate the myriad transversal theoretical connections among literature and philosophy, outside the interpretive suture. It’s already happening in a widespread way: just look at the table of contents for any recent “good” journal and you’ll see plenty of theoretically-inflected work, but very little of it begins or ends with the question of literary “meaning.”
     

    Maybe in fact the current state of affairs–the swerve around P–commits theorists to revisit the critique of “interpretation” that got literary theory off the ground in the first place, and to locate there a series of roads less traveled. I think here of moments like Michel Foucault’s call, at the beginning of 1969’s Archaeology of Knowledge, not to treat historical monuments and archives as documents (delving ever more into the question of the past’s “meaning”), but to treat documents and archives as monuments, to remain at the descriptive level of the document itself rather than attempting to ventriloquize archives or render texts “meaningful” through an interpretive method of some kind (see pp. 6-7). Or one could recall Deleuze and Guattari’s provocations in A Thousand Plateaus, where “the triumph of theory” goes by the much less grandiose name “interpretosis . . . humankind’s fundamental neurosis” (114). Their symptomology of this malady goes like this: “every sign refers to another sign, and only to another sign, ad infinitum . . . . The world begins to signify before anyone knows what it signifies; the signifier is given without being known. Your wife looked at you with a funny expression. And this morning the mailman handed you a letter from the IRS and crossed his fingers. Then you stepped in a pile of dog shit. You saw two sticks positioned on the sidewalk like the hands of a watch. They were whispering behind your back when you arrived at the office. It doesn’t matter what it means, it’s still signifying. The sign that refers to other signs is struck with a strange impotence and uncertainty, but mighty is the signifier that constitutes the chain” (112). There remains, in Deleuze and Guattari’s world, much interesting that can be said about stepping in a pile of dog shit or being summoned by the IRS; but what those events mean–inside or outside the context of a novel–is hardly the only place to begin or end a theoretical inquiry. In the search for lines of flight, one could even return to Culler’s “Beyond Interpretation,” and its proleptic response to those who still today yearn for the “next big thing” in literary theory: “there are many tasks that confront contemporary criticism, many things that we need if we are to advance our understanding of literature, but if there is one thing we do not need it is more interpretations of literary works” (246). In fact, Culler’s 1976 diagnosis of “The Prospects of Contemporary Criticism” seems a fitting (if largely unheard) caveat for the decades of literary theory that would follow: “the principle of interpretation is so strong an unexamined postulate of American criticism that it subsumes and neutralizes even the most forceful and intelligent acts of revolt” (253).

     
    I fear that many of us in the theory world–people in literature departments who “do theory” for a living–have been slow to engage fully with changing research practices in literature departments. Nobody in music theory, architecture theory, or art theory ever really asks what the work of Beethoven, Brunelleschi, or Jackson Pollock means. These days, maybe that question doesn’t make much sense for literary theorists either.

    Notes

    1. As Hallward writes, Badiou’s “problem with Schmitt’s concept of the political, in other words, is that it is not prescriptive enough. Politics divides, but not between friends and enemies (via the mediation of the state). Politics divides the adherents of a prescription against its opponents” (774). That’s right, the official political theorist of the Third Reich was too soft–“not prescriptive enough“– in his thinking of the friend/enemy distinction.

    2. Infinity, at the end of the Badiouean day, is akin to the il y a of Levinas, the given multiplicity of the world that we have to “evade” if we are to be ethical subjects (see Nealon 53-72). For his part, Badiou writes that “Most of the time, the great majority of us live outside ethics. We live in the living multiplicity of the situation” (“Being by Numbers”). For Badiou, as for Levinas, infinity or multiplicity is something that has to be escaped rather than deployed otherwise (a la Deleuze) or mapped (à la Foucault): “The set of a situation’s various bodies of knowledge I call ‘the encyclopedia’ of the situation. Insofar as it refers only to itself, however, the situation is organically without truth” (“Being by Numbers”). All claims to radicality notwithstanding, this is the profoundly conservative heart of Badiou’s thought: Truth either has to be autonomous and absolute, or there’s nothing but the chaos of the bad infinite. That sentiment is, it seems to me, the driver not of philosophy, but of philosophy’s (eternal?) enemy, dogmatism.

    Unlike Levinas’s, Badiou’s ethics is (literally) not for everyone. In “Being by Numbers,” Badiou is asked by an interviewer about the ethics of the ordinary person, who doesn’t care much for universal “truth”: “But can one seriously confide and confine ethics to mathematicians, political activists, lovers, and artists? Is the ordinary person, by definition, excluded from the ethical field?” He responds not in a Foucaultian way (with the sense that we are all hailed by literal encyclopedias of truth-procedures), but with this: “Why should we think that ethics convokes us all? The idea of ethics’ universal convocation supposes the assignment of universality. I maintain that the only immanent universality is found in the truth procedure. We are seized by the really ethical dimension only inside a truth procedure. Does this mean that the encounter of ethical situations or propositions is restricted to the actors of a truth procedure? I understand that this point is debatable” (“Being by Numbers”). It’s “debatable” whether most people are capable of ethics or truth? That really is Platonism for a new age.

    It seems equally clear that Badiouian “events,” those drivers of change in the historical and political world, are exceedingly rare and addressed narrowly to certain quite unique individuals–people like Badiou, one would assume, who are long on smarts and short on modesty: “Actually, I would submit that my system is the most rigorously materialist in ambition that we’ve seen since Lucretius” (“Being by Numbers”).

    3. Badiou is, of course, no fan of Foucault, though given sentiments like the following, it’s hard to imagine he’s read Foucault closely: “Foucault is a theoretician of encyclopedias. He was never really interested in the question of knowing whether, within situations, anything existed that might deserve to be called a ‘truth.’ With his usual corrosiveness, he would say that he didn’t have to deal with this kind of thing. He wasn’t interested in the protocol of either the appearance or the disappearance of a given epistemic organization” (“Being By Numbers”). Foucault was of course obsessed by nothing other than the appearance and disappearance of epistemic organizations (sovereign power, social power, discipline, biopower), which he called “ways of speaking the truth.” Though of course the only “truth” worth the name in Badiou is ahistorical and subjective, and here Foucault can be “corrosive” indeed: “Truth is a thing of this world: it is induced only by virtue of multiple forms of constraint. And it induces regular effects of power . . . . The problem is not changing people’s consciousness–or what’s in their heads–but the political, economic, institutional regime of the production of truth” (Power 131, 133).

    4. Maybe literary theorists need to heed something like Badiou’s call to philosophers: “Philosophy has not known until quite recently how to think in level terms with Capital, since it has left that field open, to its most intimate point, to vain nostalgia for the sacred, to obsession with Presence, to the obscure dominance of the poem, to doubt about its own legitimacy . . . . The true question remains: what has happened to philosophy for it to refuse with a shudder the liberty and strength a desacralizing epoch offered it?” (Manifesto 58-9).

    Works Cited

    • Badiou, Alain. “Being by Numbers: Interview with Lauren Sedofsky.” ArtForum (Oct. 1994). Accessed online 15 April 2006 < http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_m0268>.
    • —. Manifesto for Philosophy. Trans. Norman Madarasz. Albany: SUNY P, 1999.
    • Bensaid, Daniel. “Alain Badiou and the Miracle of the Event.” Think Again: Alain Badiou and the Future of Philosophy. Ed. Peter Hallward. London: Continuum, 2004.
    • Byrne, Richard. “Being M. Badiou: The French Philosopher Brings His Ideas to America, Creating a Buzz.” Chronicle of Higher Education. 24 March 2006. Accessed online 25 March 2006.
    • Culler, Jonathan. “Beyond Interpretation: The Prospects of Contemporary Criticism.” Comparative Literature 28.3 (1976): 244-56.
    • —. The Literary in Theory. Stanford: Stanford UP, 2006.
    • Deleuze, Gilles, and Félix Guattari. A Thousand Plateaus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia, Volume 2. Trans. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987.
    • de Man, Paul. “Semiology and Rhetoric.” Diacritics 3.3 (1973): 27-33.
    • Dollimore, Jonathan. Radical Tragedy: Religion, Ideology, and Power in the Drama of Shakespeare and His Contemporaries. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1984.
    • Foucault, Michel. The Archaeology of Knowledge. Trans. AM Sheridan Smith. New York: Pantheon, 1972.
    • —. Power/Knowledge. Ed. Colin Gordon. Trans. Colin Gordon et al. New York: Pantheon, 1980.
    • Gates, Henry Louis. The Signifying Monkey: A Theory of African-American Literary Criticism. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1988.
    • Hallward, Peter. “The Politics of Prescription.” SAQ 104.4 (2005): 769-89.
    • Harari, Josue. Textual Strategies: Perspectives in Post-Structuralist Criticism. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1979.
    • Hillis Miller, J. “The Critic as Host.” Deconstruction and Criticism. Ed. Harold Bloom, et al. New York: Seabury, 1979. 217-54.
    • Jameson, Fredric. The Political Unconscious. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1981.
    • Nealon, Jeffrey T. Alterity Politics: Ethics and Performative Subjectivity. Durham: Duke UP, 1998.
    • Tompkins, Jane, ed. Reader-Response Criticism: From Formalism to Post-Structuralism. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1980.

  • Motor Intentionality: Gestural Meaning in Bill Viola and Merleau-Ponty

    Carrie Noland
    Department of French and Italian
    University of California, Irvine
    cjnoland@uci.edu

    “Is it possible to express emotions without the movement of the face?”
     
    –Bill Viola

    During the last fifteen years of his life, roughly from Phenomenology of Perception of 1945 to the lectures on “Nature” of 1958-61,1 Maurice Merleau-Ponty developed a theory of the gestural that has provided a fruitful new direction for continental philosophy. By combining a set of unique commitments–to Husserlian phenomenology, to Gestalt psychology, to Marxist materialism–Merleau-Ponty inaugurated a school of thought that associates human understanding not with cogitation but with embodied cogitation: he is interested in the body’s implication in what the mind thinks it knows. Indeed, it has become almost banal to claim that Merleau-Ponty is the philosopher par excellence of embodiment.2 But what has been far less frequently acknowledged is the degree to which that embodiment is conceived by Merleau-Ponty in terms of the gestures the animate human form can execute, the movements by means of which that body explores the world. Phenomenology of Perception is, almost from the first page to the last, a meditation on the role of the gestural in acts of embodied perception and cognition. Gestures clearly hold a privileged place in Merleau-Ponty’s philosophical and aesthetic writings, but what he means by the word is not always easy to discern. In Phenomenology of Perception, The Structure of Behavior, and the lectures collected in Nature: Lectures and Course Notes, “gestures” (“gestes”) cover the same ground as Mauss’s “techniques of the body,” especially when treated in the context of the acquisition of habit. Elsewhere, though, “un geste” appears as a rather amorphous type of sign, a smile, for instance, but also a way of clenching the brows, scratching an itch, playing a keyboard, or applying paint.3 It would seem that gesturing, for Merleau-Ponty, is the inescapable medium in which animate forms navigate environments and enact intentions. Gestures are therefore, for him, the link between a naturally given body/world and an existential/cultural situation. Neither produced entirely by culture, nor imposed inevitably by nature, gestures are a culture’s distinctive way of conjugating what Merleau-Ponty once called the body’s “general power.” Gestures are a social manifestation of the body’s biologically driven “cleaving” to the world.4
     
    It is perhaps due to this crucial, intermediary position of the gestural that it has become an important category for contemporary theorists of the body, especially those interested, as is Merleau-Ponty, in examining how cultural, organic, and technological forces interact to give birth to embodied beings. Nowhere has this interest been more pronounced than in the area of new media theory. In fact, new media theory has become a locus for a renewal of interest in Merleau-Ponty’s writings, just as the aesthetic objects privileged by new media theorists frequently thematize, register, and even dissect the gestural dimension. Although performance studies and dance ethnography have made headway in championing the contributions of Merleau-Ponty, it is arguably in the area of new media theory that his insights have been most fruitfully explored. José Gil, Mark Hansen, Brian Massumi, Brian Rotman, and Sha Xin Wei each argues persuasively that phenomenology’s approach to embodiment promises to correct a technological determinism that in the past has rarely considered the role of situated performance in humanity’s commerce with machines. One of the most provocative thinkers of the gestural is the video artist Bill Viola, whose works have not incidentally been at the center of a number of studies by new media theorists. Like Merleau-Ponty, Viola finds in the performance of gestures a key to how socialized beings manage to convey spontaneous, unscripted meanings through sedimented forms. It is productive to analyze Viola and Merleau-Ponty side by side, for Viola throws into relief aspects of the phenomenological project, especially with regard to the significance of the gestural, that have not previously received attention, while Merleau-Ponty suggests a new and provocative reading of Viola’s works.
     
    The analyses I generate here of both Merleau-Ponty and Viola go somewhat against the grain of current scholarship. By focusing on the gestural, I upset a trend in new media theory that associates embodiment not with motricity but instead with a far more mysterious entity called “affect.” Throwing the spotlight on affect in his 1983 Image-Mouvement, Gilles Deleuze in effect inaugurates this trend, leading a generation of young scholars back to texts by Henri Bergson (and, to a lesser extent, William James) that emphasize the mind’s debt to the body understood largely in terms of sensation.5 “Movement” also emerged as an important term, but always in its abstract form, associated with change and passage, something the body does in time (bodies “move,” as Massumi underlines), but subordinated nonetheless to affect (bodies “feel,” he adds) (1).6 As a consequence of this priority accorded to affect, new media theorists have too frequently credited affectivity–an affectivity divorced from specific motor sequences–with the capacity to lend human subjects independence from both the species-related response mechanisms and social conditioning so central to Merleau-Ponty’s own speculations. However, in Bergson’s work, to which Merleau-Ponty is also indebted, affectivity and motility are not only profoundly intertwined, but the latter is accorded an ontological priority with respect to the former. In a passage from Matter and Memory that has become a kind of touchstone of some new media theory, Bergson establishes the role of bodily affects in the process of embodied perception, arguing that the body’s interoceptive sensations mediate its interaction with external stimuli. Waves of affect, he writes, “interpose themselves between the excitations that I receive from without and the movements I am about to execute” (17). In other words, the body is a source of sensory feedback that intervenes between the external world and the internal world either to filter out or to focus on certain elements of the exciting environment.
     
    Bergson also makes it clear that this affective filter serves perception, which is in turn invariably action-oriented and intentional. In passages far less frequently cited by new media theorists, Bergson insists on “the utilitarian character of our mental functions, which are essentially turned toward action” (16; emphasis added). He states that “perception as a whole has its true and final explanation in the tendency of the body to movement” (45), and that therefore all aspects of perception–the absorption through the sensory organs of an external stimulus, the affect it produces within the body, and the memories of past actions which it evokes–work together to provide a motor response. To that extent, perception must always be seen as “an elementary question [posed] to my motor activity” (45; emphasis added). In most cases, the nervous system formulates a response over time; it requires an “interval” which becomes, in Bergson’s language, “a center of indetermination” (Bergson 64; Deleuze 92). During this interval in which the motor body seeks the appropriate way to respond, there is certainly an experience of qualitative, affective states; however, more crucially for Bergson, this interval is also filled with nascent motor actions proposed by a body attempting to choose which habit, which embedded motor memory (skill, or “I can”), will best serve the demands of the present moment.7 Voluntary (“represented”) memory works in tandem with motor (enacted or “lived”) memory to produce a response that is not entirely predictable and yet is supported by the past: “The progress by which the virtual image [the representation of movement, or voluntary memory] realizes itself is nothing else than the series of stages by which this image gradually obtains from the body useful actions or useful attitudes” (131). Humans are thus not machines, they do not execute automatic reactions, precisely because, although “turned toward action,” they mediate their actions through another layer of experience that Deleuze associates with affect, Bergson with memory, and Merleau-Ponty with what he calls a kinesthetic “background” (“fond”) that includes skills and the kinesthetic memory of performing them.8
     
    It is important that when Bergson introduces “affection” it is not as a variety of emotion but as the experience of pain. Elaborating on affect for the first time, he writes: “There is hardly any perception which may not, by the increase of the action of its object upon our body, become an affection, and, more particularly, pain. Thus we pass insensibly from the contact with a pin to its prick” (53). This affect-image, or “prick,” is itself a “source of positive action” (55); the affect is “nothing but the effort of the damaged element to set things right–a kind of motor tendency in a sensory nerve” (55-56). Most decidedly, affect does not alone fill up the interval, the space in between. Instead, “choice is likely to be inspired by past experience, and the reaction does not take place without an appeal to the memories which analogous situations may have left behind them” (65).
     
    Deleuze is faithful to Bergson with respect to his account of affectivity, but, significantly, he neglects Bergson’s emphasis on motor memory as it interacts with affect to shape the subject’s ultimate course of action. In fact, Deleuze tends to exaggerate the role of affect, attributing to it the capacity to produce, on its own, the action that is “unpredictable” and “new” (“quelque chose d’imprévisible et de nouveau” 91). For Bergson, in contrast, affect is only a “tendency” that aids the organism in preparing itself for a more meditated response. In Bergson, affect is associated with bodily states such as pain, while in Deleuze it takes on the color of emotion. Deleuze goes so far as to identify the human face (as opposed to the pinprick on the skin) as the locus of affection, or at least as the site where it is displayed. By identifying self-affection with the cinematic close-up, Deleuze makes it seem as though affect were entirely an affair of large-screen emotions, and that it is these emotions that ultimately govern the way a subject will respond. However, Bergson himself makes it clear that while an affect such as pain may play a role in producing an attitude toward virtual action, memories of past actions are what capture and filter the sensory information in the first place and continue, throughout the interval, to offer their skilled answers in response to pain.9
     
    Merleau-Ponty develops to a far greater degree what Bergson assumes as a given, namely, that human subjects are primarily engaged in answering a motor question with a motor response by searching through a catalogue of movement memories or gestural routines. In fact, Merleau-Ponty returns to Bergson in Phenomenology of Perception to confirm that “attention to life is the awareness we experience of ‘nascent movements’ in our bodies” (90-91). It is possible to approach works in new media in such a way as to recall Bergson’s original emphasis on “nascent movements,” an emphasis too often forgotten in the reduction of the interval to “self-affection.” This can be attempted even in the case of new media artists famous for heightening our awareness of the affect supposedly recorded on the screen. For instance, although Bill Viola has been treated by theorists as an artist concerned with the emotional intensity communicated through the screen to the viewer, it can be shown that he is equally interested in the gestural routines that frame the emotions his filmed subjects perform. In my analyses of Viola’s “The Passions,” a series of digitalized video installations first exhibited in 2003, I reinstate the significance of muscle memory in the productive moment of indetermination by focusing on the relation between gesture and affect, rather than on affect alone. In doing so, I aim to reanimate the notion of embodiment that new media theory has borrowed from Bergson and from Merleau-Ponty. I balance a celebration of affect as autonomous resistance to sedimentation by revealing affect’s reliance on the habitual muscular articulations Merleau-Ponty diagnoses in the Phenomenology as “I can”s. In my readings, embodiment is not simply a matter of sensory feedback, or “self-affection”; rather, embodiment is a dynamics inflected by social patterning and thus impossible to theorize without reference to gestural regimes.
     

    “opening up the spaces between the emotions”

     
    Bill Viola’s “The Passions” series, first exhibited in its entirety at the J. P. Getty Museum, consists of twenty-one video installations, almost all in color, mounted on various types of LCD and plasma screens.10 According to the artist, “Quintet of the Astonished” (see Figure 1) was the first piece composed, the avatar from which the other installations were generated.

    Figure 1: “Quintet of the Astonished”
    Bill Viola, 1998.
    Used by permission of the artist.

    At the time of its composition (1998), Viola was in residence as a Fellow at the Getty Research Institute. He had already been studying the Renaissance paintings housed in the Getty collection, but when he was invited to participate in an exhibition at the National Gallery in London, he decided to base his commissioned piece on a painting the National Gallery owned, Hieronymous Bosch’s “Christ Mocked” (see Figure 2).

    Figure 2: “Christ Mocked”
    Hieronymous Bosch, ca. 1490-1500
    © The National Gallery, London.

    Imitating the compositional grouping (but not the verticality) of Bosch’s painting (c. 1490-1500), Viola placed five actors into a tight arrangement in which they could dramatically change their postures over time without invading one another’s intimate emotional space.[11] The figures in “Quintet of the Astonished”–four men and one woman–transpose the four darkly-clad tormentors and the one fair Christ-figure in Bosch’s painting. Viola filmed the five actors with high-speed 35-millimeter film (with frame rates of up to 384 frames per second instead of the normal 24), which he then transferred to video, thus creating a sixteen-minute-long video strip out of approximately one minute of real-time performance. The display conditions of “Quintet of the Astonished” were also carefully controlled: the color video was rear-projected onto a screen, measuring 4′-6″ long by 8′ wide, mounted on a wall in a dark room. The influence of “Christ Mocked” can be seen in Viola’s choice of colors, lighting, and the framing of the screen, which was recessed in space, evoking a small chapel in a cathedral.
     
    Similar to the other three “Quintets” that would eventually emerge from the same inspiration (“Quintet of Remembrance,” “Quintet of the Unseen,” and “Quintet of the Silent”), the “Quintet of the Astonished” portrays only the upper half of the body of each actor (pelvis to head), with a special emphasis–as in the painting–on the hands. Indeed, as can be witnessed by observing the short clip available at the Getty website (<www.getty.edu/art/exhibitions/viola/index.html>), the actors’ hands attract the viewers’ attention as much as, if not more than, their facial gesticulations. At one point during the sixteen-minutes that compose “Quintet of the Astonished,” a hand with four fingers spread wide occupies the center of the screen; if we compare the composition with that of “Christ Mocked,” we see that this hand has been placed at the location where in the Bosch painting we find the corresponding four folded fingers that rest on Christ’s shoulder. A visual echo of these folded fingers can also be found on the left-hand side of the frame, where a male figure rests his hand on the shoulder of the pale female figure that recalls Bosch’s Jesus. In the video, the outstretched fingers in the center of the frame remain immobile for a long time, but the two hands of the figure on the right-hand side, and one hand of the figure in the right-hand corner next to him, sway back and forth distractingly, evoking the intensity of the posture assumed by the figure in the lower right-hand corner of the Bosch canvas.
     
    In his preparatory notes to “Quintet of the Astonished,” Viola writes that he hoped to capture “a compressed range of conflicting emotions from laughing to crying”; the emotions were to “come and go so gradually,” Viola continues, that it would be “hard to tell where one begins and the other leaves off” (qtd. in Walsh 33). In a later interview, Viola explains that he was less interested in a dramatic portrayal of the emotions per se than in the transitions from one emotion to the next. He asked his actors to move fluidly and gradually through sorrow, pain, anger, fear, and rapture in such a way as to “ope[n] up the spaces between the emotions” (qtd. in Walsh 200). In order to achieve this effect, Viola gave his actors two sets of instructions: they could either “work from the outside in,” as in the technique analyzed by movement theorist Paul Ekman, “or from the inside out,” as in Method acting.[12] The first choice would put the body “in a place that will engender emotion,” and the second would create “an emotional life within that is then expressed outwardly.”[13] Although the two approaches to the connection between (externally observable) bodily movement and (internally felt) emotion derive from two different theories of acting, they both presuppose a causal relation: what happens emotionally finds its correlate in kinesis. According to Viola’s account, his directorial style emphasized the inner-toward-outer Method approach, for he refrained from choreographing the actors in any way and simply gave them an emotion to express. Actors “were free to invent whatever gestures and expressions suited their individual tasks,” recounts one observer (Walsh 36). This statement is belied, however, by the placement of the actor’s hands, which intentionally (one cannot but assume) evoke the hand positions of the figures in the Bosch painting.
     
    Although Viola is clearly interested in the physicality–almost athleticism–of the exercise, no accounts I have found attend with anything like thoroughness to the pelvis-to-head embodiment of the labeled emotions. For instance, Mark Hansen’s readings of “The Passions” in “The Time of Affect” and New Philosophy for New Media concentrate exclusively on the facial gestures and the transitory phases between them, phases that reveal, according to Hansen (following Deleuze), “the unpredictable . . . and the new” (New Philosophy 6).[14] Viola locates a space of freedom in the excess of affect over categorical emotion, that is, in the fuller “field of intentionalities” revealed by the transitional phases captured on the screen. In his readings, Hansen relies faithfully on Bergson’s concept of a self-affecting organism, but he strips this self-affection of its relation to “the movements [the subject is] about to execute,” and thus to the “motor intentionalities” identified by Merleau-Ponty. To some extent, Hansen can do so because he takes in only the facial gesticulations, which correspond more neatly, at least according to some, to distinct categorical emotions (and thus disclose, under deceleration, their ambiguous “in betweens”). Ignoring the physical manifestations of feelings (or, rather, performed feelings) in the shoulders, hands, and sternum of the actors, Hansen assumes that the strong emotions Viola seeks to capture, such as joy (“laughing”) and sorrow (“crying”), are registered and communicated by facial features alone.[15] The face, according to Hansen, displays a kind of semiotics of emotion, and it is between these facial signs that we should locate unpredictable and new affects. In Hansen’s account, the larger body gestures, such as the waving of the hands back and forth in the right-hand corner of the frame, do not maintain the same tight relation to expressive values (such as joy, or grief), nor do they seem to have the potential to release the unscripted “in betweens.”
     
    If we were to watch the actors’ performance in real-time, we would see a rapid succession of emotions that would probably appear as exaggerated grimaces, a kind of facial typology or catalogue of stereotyped emotional expressions. But we would also observe violent and rapid upper body movements and be made far more aware of the actor’s choreographic blocking.[16] Slowing down the frame speed has the effect of revealing the in-between facial gesticulations, but it also discloses the enchained movements, and the ambiguous pauses between enchained movements that the body makes as it moves toward the expression of a violent emotion. Specifically what the viewer believes to have witnessed while observing these transitional, in-between states may in fact depend a good deal on the training the viewer has received. For instance, as a scholar of video and film, among other media, Hansen focuses primarily on the facial expression of the actors, what he terms their “affective tonality” (“Time of Affect” 611). In contrast, when a phenomenologist trained in the tradition of Merleau-Ponty observes the actors, it is more likely the muscular tonicity rather than the emotional tonality of the gesticulating bodies that catches the eye. In my own case, for instance, the facial gesticulations appear in the context of the subjects’ larger body movements. Trained as a dancer, I am struck by the changes in posture, the shifts in weight, the strange angles at which the head is carried, the degree of tension in the hunched shoulders, the compositional play of arm positions, the vectors created by the finger, as well as the dynamics of facial muscle tone. Further, as a former performer, I view these figures bringing the Bosch painting to life as performers, not subjects engaged in spontaneous emotional release. Studying them closely, I attempt to imitate their blocking: I learn their roles, copying the large body movements such as shoulder crumpling, hand lifting, and mouth contorting. Yet, try as I might, I cannot produce through sheer will the twitch of a facial muscle or the trembling of a cheek. In that regard, Hansen is correct when he insists that new media technologies can expose to sight elements of aliveness (he says “affectivity,” I say “motility”) that are performed without volition.
     
    It could be argued that what we witness when we observe Viola’s videos is not a performance that actually took place and that therefore it is incorrect to designate Viola’s subjects as “performers.” From this perspective, the bodies we see on the screen are not real bodies but only digital photographic reproductions of real bodies manipulated in post-production to appear in guises otherwise not exposed to view. Yet however distorted the images may seem, they have not been digitally transformed. That is, the bodies filmed did indeed execute the twitches, tremblings and contractions that are only visible to the observer when the execution of their movements has been slowed down. A trained actor’s body has actually executed the movements that radical deceleration allows us to see. Furthermore, it is to those bodies and their movements that we, as spectators, kinesthetically respond. True, many of the actors’ facial gesticulations and upper body movements have not been voluntarily produced and are therefore not “performed” in the sense of being intentionally constructed to express a particular categorical emotion. But these movements are nonetheless human movements available as potentials belonging to the human kinetic disposition. They cannot be considered skills per se, but they are the building blocks of skills. They are decidedly not products of digital remediation, pure manipulations of playback that no human body could perform.
     
    I would insist in addition that these involuntary facial gesticulations escaping both categorization and real-time perception occur–and on some level are experienced by the subjects–as tension in the jaw or as the sudden release of constriction in the brow. That is, they are kinesthetically available but culturally meaningless. This distinction is important, for in some cases the in-between gesticulations can be felt by the body performing them even if they are not voluntary gestures invested with meaning. Although people cannot always voluntarily reproduce twitchings and tremblings, some varieties of twitch or tremble can in fact be reproduced by trained actors or mimes. An observant and skilled performer will be able to train herself to imitate, for instance, those involuntary contortions of the face that a human subject makes upon awaking from sleep; the acquisition and willed reproduction of such normally involuntary forms of motility is a large part of an actor’s métier. I am not claiming that Viola’s actors are in control of or consciously experience the finer shifts in their musculature during the in-between phases the video exposes, but rather that such shifts are experienced somatically and remain accessible, under certain conditions, as movement material from which performances–and even cultural signifiers–can later be made.
     

    “on the basis of the animal’s embodied history”

     
    The muscular dynamics I perceive could be seen to belong to what Merleau-Ponty calls the “autonomous” body, the “prepersonal” body that “gears itself” or “cleaves to” the world, even before the subject assumes a perceptual, cognitive, sexual, or emotional attitude toward it (Phenomenology 97). For Merleau-Ponty, as for Bergson, there is always a crucial connection between affect (that which is felt) and movement (that which is performed), that is, between the anticipatory, protentive attitudes and the nascent motor actions the body, cleaving to the world, prepares to make. The clenching of the brow and the twitching of the cheek do not only express an indefinable emotion; they are also elements of a nascent motor project, one that contributes to the realization of intentions on the order of the kinetic. The body’s sensations of itself (its “self-affections”) may indeed, as Hansen states, provide a constant flow casting itself forward before the actual initiation of activity (in the protentive moment); however, the body also has its own intentionality, which is “essentially turned toward action” upon the world (Bergson 16). This motor intentionality (or what Merleau-Ponty sometimes calls a “motor project”) relies for its execution on already acquired skills, the “I cans,” that a situated, socialized body is capable of performing. For Merleau-Ponty, the moving body has a prior claim on the world, or rather, the world demands movement of the body, and this incontrovertible exigency produces movement patterns that will determine–as actualized gesture in the present but also as a history of gesturing in the past–the production of the unpredictable motor response.
     
    Recent research in cognitive psychology and neurobiology tends to support Merleau-Ponty’s schema, which subordinates all varieties of intention to the motor body. In a 2003 essay, the phenomenologically-oriented neuroscientist Francisco Varela asserts that movement is the trigger for all further perceptual, sensory, and affective activity: “Whenever motion is an integral part of the lifestyle of a multicellular [organism],” he writes, “there is a corresponding development of a nervous system linking effector (muscles, secretion) and sensory surfaces (sense organs, nerve endings)” (89).[17] Varela takes it as axiomatic that “cognition depends on the kinds of experience that come from having a body with various sensorimotor capacities . . . themselves embedded in a more encompassing biological and cultural context” (“Reenchantment” 329). This context is composed of the kinetic dispositions of the animate body (the biological context) combined with its history of realized movements. Protention, on the neural level, he explains further, is “incoherent or chaotic activity in fast oscillations . . . until the cortex settles into a global electrical pattern . . . selectively binding a set of neurons in transcient aggregate . . . a creative form of enacting significance on the basis of the animal’s embodied history” (333; emphasis added).
     
    What Varela suggests here is that the sensorimotor capacities of the body are not entirely free and independent but rather underwritten by neural circuits laid down by past actions (“the animal’s embodied history”). At the same time, however, there is creativity in the act of making significant (or making significant in a different way) a past action with respect to the situation at hand. Varela hypothesizes that when the subject is confronted with a new situation that does not appear to conform to a previous one (and that therefore might not be resolved by rehearsing past actions), the neural circuits suffer what he calls a “microbreakdown.” During this “microbreakdown,” or neural reorganization, the system hesitates, searches among a “myriad of possibilities,” multiple ways of creating new aggregates, connections, circuits, and eventually, behaviors. What is called upon here, though, is a creativity that is partial and responsive, still enchained by the kinetic dispositions and realized gestural routines (the “embodied history”) of the organism itself. Neural connections are not made in a vacuum, Varela asserts, but instead with reference to the organism’s physiological possibilities for flexion and its acquired “I cans.” The motor resolution to the “microbreakdown” is always performed within a cultural, intersubjective context. The number of possibilities for realized neural connection, albeit extensive, is nonetheless limited by the pressure of the social, the requirement that the movement be a legible (appropriate) interpretation of an environmental challenge. Thus, when Viola asks, “is it possible to express emotions without the movement of the face?” he is asserting, as is Varela, what one contemporary philosopher has called “the primacy of movement.”[18] To this extent, Viola adds his voice to a growing chorus of cognitive scientists, such as Varela, and developmental psychologists, such as Daniel Stern, who have actively sought to extend and corroborate experimentally the tradition of phenomenology inaugurated by Husserl and Merleau-Ponty.
     
    Stern and Varela are essential references here, for they both counter, in provocative ways, the current preference in new media theory for analyzing the role of affect rather than gesture in the exfoliating independence of the self. Addressing the relation between movement–in this case, the earliest gestures performed by the neo-natal infant–and the meanings these movements soon assume, Stern introduces in The Interpersonal World of the Infant a distinction between “vitality affects” and “categorical affects” that has proved significant for dance and new media theorists. The distinction is especially pertinent for analyzing the works of Viola, for it neatly summarizes the difference between a named emotion–the anger or joy the actor has been asked to perform–and the in-between gesticulation–twitching, trembling, or clenching–that I have been relating to a kinetic, motor order of action. Stern locates a domain of sensibility in the newborn infant that he associates with the infant’s “vitality,” its first interoceptive experiences in and outside of the womb. “Vitality affects” are the body’s sensations of itself as an animate form, one that is constantly in movement.[19] Stern spells out clearly that “vitality affects” are not “feelings” in the sense of “anger, fear, or rapture.” Instead, “vitality affects” involve kinesthetic distinctions, such as between jerky and smooth, taut and relaxed, corresponding precisely to the clenching and releasing movements I pointed out in Viola’s “Quintet of the Astonished.” According to Stern, these kinesthetic discriminations are the true background of both cognition and affective (in the sense of emotional) experience. In The Interpersonal World of the Infant Stern proposes that “all mental acts . . . are accompanied by input from the body, including, importantly, internal sensations . . . . The body is never doing nothing” (xvii; emphasis added). According to Stern, the motor body is at every moment supporting and informing mental processes in some way, by assuming or holding a posture, by displacing itself in space, by contracting or relaxing its muscles. “Envision Rodin’s Thinker,” he proposes:

    He sits immobile, posing his head on his hand and an elbow on his knee. True, he is not moving, but there is extraordinary tension in his posture, suggesting active, intense proprioceptive feedback from almost every muscle group. This feedback, along with the thinker's presumably heightened arousal, provides the background feeling against which his specific thoughts are etched. (xvii-xviii)

     
    For Stern, then, “background feeling” is produced by “intense proprioceptive feedback” and kinesthetic sensation (“extraordinary tension”), not necessarily by emotional tone.[20]. Stern’s kinesthetic and proprioceptive “background” can be productively compared to what Merleau-Ponty calls “praktognosia,” or kinesthetic background, a non-cognitive (or better, non-verbal) knowledge composed of signals the body receives all the time. These “body signals” are received in the womb, in the crib, seated in a chair: they issue from what Stern calls an “as-yet-unspecified self,” they are the “background music of an autonomous body that, under certain circumstances, can become louder and enter our awareness” (xviii). These signals are indeed a type of affect, but they are related more to motor intentions than to formulated feelings or desires. If one of Viola’s actors were to become aware of the tension in her shoulders (even while concentrating on the emotion the tension accompanied), she would be accessing the normally muted “background feeling” underlying her thoughts and emotions. (And it is only by focusing her attention on such a kinetic arousal or “vitality affect” that she might develop the capacity to repeat the movement voluntarily.) Although vitality affects eventually become linked to specific emotions, the tension in the shoulders could conceivably be experienced as just that: a rapprochement of the shoulder blades at a particular spot on the upper back. As Stern points out, our movements, before we attach meanings to them (or, more accurately, before meanings are attached to our movements in an intersubjective milieu), are indeed capable of providing us with a rich somatic awareness of executing them. Executing movements, then, can allow us not only to feel emotions but also to feel ourselves in the act of performing them. The performance of emotion through motor action renders a kinesthetic knowledge of what it feels like to move as well as a heightened sensitivity to our motor projects. Somatic attention to movement qualities can bring us back into contact with embodied “proto-signification” before it acquires what Merleau-Ponty calls a “figurative significance” or emotional charge (Phenomenology 225).[21]
     
    “Vitality affects” precede “categorical emotions,” according to Stern; initially, an amplified somatic awareness is, Stern conjectures, the only type of awareness the neonatal has. It precedes full-fledged consciousness of self yet it is the basis upon which all future experiences of emotion and acts of cognition will be built. For this reason vitality affects are different from the more culturally-inflected “categorical emotions” that Darwin identified. Vitality affects are the earliest and most primitive cultural organization of the sensorimotor apparatus. The “emergent self” that entertains these affects is precisely that: emergent, in the process of being constituted as a distinctive, bounded, socialized body according to “embodied schemata” developed with slight differences by each culture.[22] It is important to note that for Stern, the movements the human body performs and the vitality affects with which these movements are associated, undergo almost from birth some degree of cultural organization, a point to which we shall have occasion to return. Unlike Hansen, who insists on the radical openness of the sensorimotor body to situational contingencies, Stern recognizes the extent to which cultural patterning imprints itself upon even the earliest gropings of the human infant. Stern observes, however, that while “vitality affects” are associated primarily with the “emergent” subjectivity of the infant, they nonetheless remain available to humans throughout their adult lives, albeit in a less pure, more semanticized form. In a formulation relevant to my later argument, Stern proposes that under certain conditions we may become aware of these “elusive qualities” of kinesis, such as “explosive,” “surging,” “fleeting,” and “fading away” (Stern 54). As in the case of the actor’s métier, layers of sensorimotor organization that are normally inaccessible (“pre-reflexive”) can at times become the matter of a reflexive consciousness. The “categorical” and the “vital,” the culturally meaningful and the kinesthetically meaningful, are constantly in a relation that can be revealed through the application, as we shall see, of specific techniques.
     

    groping through the space of the present

     
    Turning to “Anima,” another installation from “The Passions” (see Figure 3), we can see how Viola addresses, artistically, Stern’s distinction between the categorical and the vital, emotions and kinesthetic experience.

    Figure 3: “Anima”
    Bill Viola, 2001

    Used by permission of the artist.

    In this color video triptych, three actors express by gesture four categorical emotions–joy, sorrow, anger, and fear–but at a technologically decelerated pace that reveals the “in-between” gesticulations, the constant movement or aliveness, linking one to the next.[23] Recorded in a single take, “Anima” originally lasted one minute; extended through digital manipulation, the finished piece is comprised of over eighty-one minutes of playback time. Strangely, the name “Anima” evokes the categorical, fixed posture, rather than the vital, or forever-in-continuous-motion. At first glance, “Anima” would seem to refer us either to the word “soul” or else to an equally transcendent register, that of Carl Jung’s archetypal female, associated with the “humors,” or moods and feelings. At the same time, however, “Anima” strongly suggests the word “animation.” The tension in the title between “Anima” as archetypal fixity and “Anima” as pure mobility is reflected in the piece itself, which involves a set of emoting (rather than talking) heads.
     
    As Hansen observes in “The Time of Affect,” the faces in “Anima” appear to be “registering an overabundance of affective information” (594). But while these faces may indeed be supersaturated with emotion, engaged in displaying “interstitial microstages of affectivity,” they also unveil a surprising diversity of movement possibilities available to the human face. Again, whereas I am struck by the lugubrious or sudden shifts in the underlying muscle tone of the faces, Hansen remains fixated on their “emotional tone” (587). To Hansen’s eye, Viola’s technologically manipulated playbacks bring us to confront a “constitutive vitality” (613) in excess of our perceptible emotional states. But if we are to remain faithful to the dialectics of Merleau-Ponty’s phenomenological approach–as well as to Stern’s insistence on the “emergent” semantics of kinesthesia–then contact with our “constitutive vitality,” whether visual or somatic, would be strictly impossible. In existential terms, there is no lived vitality purified of all socialization, no life-force that could be manifested by an actor–or seized by a spectator–that wasn’t already organized into recognizable expressions, or gestural routines. The form of vitality that the actors might be experiencing in these “in-between” states has to be, in Stern’s and Merleau-Ponty’s view, an emergent signification, a motility in the process of being shaped by the cultural (expressive) weight it will soon bear and toward which it is ineluctably moving. To give just one example drawn from “Anima,” the play of rippling muscles on the actor’s cheeks might not be immediately equivalent to any one of the categorical emotions the actors were asked to reproduce. However, these (as yet) non-taxonomized micro-gestures, these in-between phases through which the muscles pass, are nevertheless already directed toward, moving toward, the legible gestures between which they fall. To that extent, they remain elements of skilled practice, points on a movement continuum that the gesture, as sign, splits into fragments.
     
    It is entirely plausible that during the performance of a gesture such as a pout or a grin, that is, during the in-between phases we witness in “Anima,” there occur any number of microbreakdowns, moments when the features of the face (the continuously rippling muscles) could depart on alternative motor paths. The execution of the gesture could thus be seen in Husserl’s terms as a layered instant composed of both retentions–the body’s grasp on that which was just performed–and protentions–the body’s grasping for that which it could enact in the future. Merleau-Ponty’s contribution to the phenomenology of embodiment could be said to lie precisely here, in the application of Husserl’s paradigm of time consciousness to motor, rather than to cognitive, intentionalities. Merleau-Ponty understands movement to be, like thought, shot through with retentive patterning, the sedimentation of previously executed gestural routines, and at the same time future-oriented, groping through the space of the present in search of those movements that will best address the demands of the next lived moment.
     
    In kinetic terms, however, this does not mean, as Hansen would have it, that the protentive, anticipatory element of the lived present “intends the new prior to any impression or perceptual present” (New Philosophy 252).[24] Merleau-Ponty is clear on this point: protention can only prepare for the future by relying on the actions of the past. (What counts as this past, however, still needs to be defined.) In Varela’s view, protention, as an activity of the neural system, has to depend on “already established circuits, each of which is generated by gestures the human animal has the resources to perform. Although Varela wishes to maintain the creative moment in the neural grasping toward “a myriad of possibilities,” he concedes that it is “out of the constraints of the situation and the recurrence of history, [that] a single one is selected” (“Reenchantment” 334). In other words, the continuum of rippling facial muscles will be tamed into a legible grimace or smile. Merleau-Ponty is even more restrictive in this regard, for he adds that constraints are not only cultural (the facial gesture must be legible) but biological as well: that is, constraints derive both from “the situation” and from the nature of the animate form, the anatomical capacities for certain types of ambulation and joint flexion that are reflected in the varieties of neural connection that can be made.
     
    Ultimately, what we witness in “The Passions” is the pull of two forces, each of which contributes to the uniqueness and yet repeatability of the gesture. The “vital” and the “categorical” are linked together in decelerated video images: on the one hand, the in-between movement that Merleau-Ponty dubs a “protosignification,” such as a twitch or a tremble, and, on the other, a fully legible signification, an iterable, acquired gesture, such as a beaming grin. My own viewing of the installations reveals not a body freed from “I cans,” not a mass of “vitality as such,” but rather a motor body in the process of organizing itself within an intersubjective situation to play the role to which it has been assigned. After all, what we are looking at in “Anima” is a troupe of actors who were told to imitate a given set of nameable emotions. The things their faces do may not always be subject to classification, but the salient point is that their in-between muscle movements are nonetheless part of the body’s directedness toward the performance of a certain task: here, the emoting of nameable emotions according to established (aestheticized, perhaps even commercialized) modes of communicating them.
     

    the hold of the habitus

     
    If we take Merleau-Ponty seriously, then we have to conclude that the moving body cannot be captured, by any technology whatsoever, in an entirely non-oriented state for the reason that it is always in the process of moving toward socially meaningful gestures in an intersubjective milieu. Making meaning, for Merleau-Ponty, is inescapable, but paradoxically it is also an acquired skill. Such skills, or “I cans,” are the way an organism “gears itself” to an environment, the way it makes this environment meaningful in the first place.[25] Without a defined set of motor capacities establishing our proprioceptive and kinesthetic being-in-space, the world around us lacks meaning for our body. According to Merleau-Ponty, then, affects are epiphenomena of movement, and not the reverse: “Our bodily experience of movement is not a particular case of knowledge” Merleau-Ponty insists; “it provides us with a way of access to the world and the object, with a ‘praktognosia,‘ which has to be recognized as original and primary” (Phenomenology 162). Merleau-Ponty thus provides a convincing understanding of protention as drawing not from a self “prior to any impression” but rather from “praktognosia,” the body’s embodied knowledge, a resource of “I cans” that cast before us a set of movement possibilities capable of making sense of a given world. For Merleau-Ponty, we are only “open” to the unpredictable arrangement of circumstances because we have autonomous bodily functions–such as breathing, focusing the eyes, and grasping with the hands–that “gear” us to an environment. This paradox is central to a rigorous, dialectical phenomenology, the paradox that we are only “free” because we are capable of being enchained, that we can only see because anatomy, training, and experience cause us to see a certain way (139).
     
    For Merleau-Ponty, what makes us capable of spontaneity is not the limitless capacity of the neural system to create new movements but rather the limitless capacity of the neural system to connect the movements human anatomy allows, to enchain human possibilities of kinesis in new ways.[26] “Human” always includes both anatomical and social elements. As we have seen, it is impossible for Merleau-Ponty to imagine a movement entirely pure of cultural inflection simply because such a movement (even an autonomous one) is never performed outside of an intersubjective space. The “freedom” to innovate, to produce “the unpredictable” and “the new,” then, should be seen to derive not from a projection of “emotional tone” ahead of bodily performance and beyond learned response; instead, such “freedom” could be attributed to the untapped movement potentials of the human animate form, potentials that are emergent and in the course of being explored. On this reading, the subject’s motor body does not contain limitless new ways of moving but rather new ways of moving that have not yet been organized by a single culture. The subject’s body knows more about movement, both as kinetic possibility and kinesthetic experience, than any one cultural habitus allows the subject to name. We could imagine, for instance, that at least some of the involuntary facial contortions produced by the actors in “Anima” derive from movement potentials consistent with the human kinetic disposition that have not yet been invested with cultural meaning. But they could conceivably achieve the status of meaningful, voluntarily produced gestural signs in a culture other than our own. These ways of moving (and the neural connections underlying them) might be inscribed in a habitus, but they are nonetheless inscribed on a deeper, phylogenetic level, on the level of the kinetic dispositions of bipedal anatomy. This in no way implies an a-historical biological determinism for, as Merleau-Ponty repeatedly states in the late lectures in Nature, the explicit limits of bipedal anatomy remain unknown and subject to continuing exfoliation in an intersubjective milieu.
     
    It is significant, of course, at what point a gestural routine (an “I can,” habit, or skill) intervenes in the acculturation of the body. As anthropologists from Mauss to Bourdieu have observed, a gestural routine learned early on can influence in seemingly inescapable ways the body’s motor being.[27] Later training and observation, however, might eventually allow us access to alternative movement capacities, options that will themselves be limited by the personal history of the singular body, its injuries and the peculiar shape of its bones. Many of those movement possibilities exist as virtual pathways, movement logics that could be pursued, even within the gestural routines we already possess.[28] Most of the time, as Drew Leder has remarked, the subject remains ignorant of kinesthetic feedback and therefore of the alternative logics the body might pursue. Following the lead of Heidegger, Leder calls the normative state of the body “ecstasis,” a condition in which we execute gestural routines with the sole intention of accomplishing specific tasks (like smiling). But the awareness of movement is not eradicated by its “absenting”; instead, this awareness merely recedes into the “background” (Leder 21), potentially available to be called up again. In the wake of Leder, dance ethnographer J. Lowell Lewis has proposed that situations of skill acquisition are particularly ripe with occasions for heightened kinesthetic awareness, and thus provide a more immediate contact with both the socially acquired “I cans” and the movement possibilities they fail to privilege. “The hold of the habitus is not absolute,” writes dance theorist Deidre Sklar; in fact, that hold may be “broken, inviting opening beyond routine.” Against Bourdieu’s objection that anything beyond the habitus cannot be an intentional object of consciousness, Leder, Sklar, and Lewis maintain that this “beyond” can, through the application of culturally-elaborated practices, become an intentional object of motor consciousness.[29]
     
    It is thus arguable that normally absented motor intentions, those nascent motor actions never fulfilled but fleetingly proposed, are precisely what we witness in “Anima” and “Quintet of the Astonished” at the moment when the actors pass from one emotional expression to the next. That is, these actors are drawing on a kinesthetic “background,” a continuum of motility that they will eventually parse or differentiate into gestures we recognize as fully meaningful in our shared cultural context. Clearly, Viola’s subjects are not in the process of learning a new skill, and thus they are not necessarily exercising a heightened consciousness of what their bodies, at every stage, are doing. Yet the camera recovers the consciousness of a process that the subjects themselves may not have, a consciousness of a process through which the body discovers within itself a movement, a virtual “I can,” that is not immediately exploited but that could eventually be bent to the service of a meaningful cultural performance. It is during the transitions between recognizable gestures that the body’s history emerges as a resource for kinesthetic experience, motor action, and, in the case of expressive gestures, signifying power. What Viola’s videos show is that legible, categorical forms of expression (gestural signifiers for particular emotions) possess, when performed, a quantity of motility that exceeds the recognizable form of the signifier, the parsed gestural sign.
     
    The videos of “The Passions” series also show that this excess motility, the body’s “vitality,” is not free of the structures of signification, the legible forms and routines, toward which it is moving and into which it will eventually resolve. For this reason, it is not possible to identify a movement that is not traveling toward the legible form it will ultimately embrace. The tension between the categorical and vital, the legible and its excess, is also a tension between conventional meaning and what Merleau-Ponty calls “gestural meaning.” The term “gestural meaning” is a catechresis for a meaning that falls between iterable terms and that opens up a new space in the system of signs. The “gestural meaning” of a movement is that element of its phenomenalization that troubles the structures of signification in which it is caught, not, however, because “gestural meaning” is outside of these structures entirely, but because it is in the process of conforming to them. Arguably, movement practitioners are especially attuned to this gestural excess, the “beyond” of routine, and can accordingly intervene more successfully in the process of conformity, derailing–if only briefly–the resolution of kinesis into sign. Telling a story about skills with skills (as Gregory Bateson might put it), the trained movement practitioner may appropriate to a greater extent than other people do the kinetic possibilities of the individual body, redirecting movement toward sequences previously undefined.[30] What we see in Viola’s videos, however, is not the choreographer’s dramatic and purposive reinvention of the moving body, but the material out of which such reinventions are made.
     

    the architecture of the hand

     
    If we insist on naming the “in between” gesticulations perceptible to viewers of “Anima” “microstages of affectivity,” that is, if we emphasize affect over kinesis, then we imply that at every moment the filmed subjects move they are expressing rather than doing something with their bodies. But what if we were to pull our focus out of the affectivity we think we see as we regard Viola’s images and retrain that focus on the gesticulations themselves? Could the lived present then be treated as primarily a movement phenomenon, as I believe Merleau-Ponty wished it to be, a phenomenon to which movement analysis should be applied? How would this change in emphasis affect our approach to Viola’s performing bodies? What other works would have to fall within our purview if we were to take this analytical turn, and how else might we want to look at them?
     
    It is noteworthy that the installation in “The Passions” series that has received the least critical attention is “Four Hands” of 2001 (see Figure 4).

    Figure 4: “Four Hands,” Bill Viola.
    Used by permission of the artist.

    Here Viola mounts four small LCD flat-panel display screens on a shelf (the dimensions are 9″ x 51″ x 8″). On each screen Viola projects moving images of a pair of hands: those of Bill Viola’s son, his wife, his own hands, and the hands of an elderly actress named Lois Stark (intended, perhaps, to evoke his mother who had recently passed away). The Getty catalogue informs us that “Four Hands” was shot with a black-and-white low-light film. In the frame, we see only the subdued iridescence of taut or creased skin as it moves over the spiny bones of the hands. Peter Sellars describes the scene beautifully in “Bodies of Light,” one of the critical essays included in the Getty volume: a “series of gestures,” he writes, “are shared across the ‘four hands’”–really, four pairs of hands–“in sequencing that remains slightly elusive. Sometimes a gesture initiated by a son is taken up by the mother; sometimes the mother is teaching and leading her son” (161).
     
    Although in the finished work the emphasis is clearly on the transmission of symbolic gestures from one generation to the next, Viola tells us that his initial inspiration came from images of isolated individuals in the act of gesturing, such as “The Annunciation” by Dieric Bouts of the Netherlands (see Figure 5), the seventeenth-century English chirogrammatic tables of John Bulwer in which hands are cropped and placed into grids (see Figure 6, engraving from Chirologia, or the Natural Language of the Hand, of 1644), and paintings of Hindu and Buddhist mudras (see Figure 7). Viola’s account of his sources has somewhat misled his critics into believing that the sharing of gestures in “Four Hands” underscores their universal quality as opposed to what Sellars clearly seizes: the passing down of a gestural habitus from mother to son.

    Figure 5: “The Annunciation”
    Dieric Bouts, 1450-55
    © The Getty Museum

    Figure 6: Chirologia, 1644.
    John Bulwer, Chirologia; Or the Natural Language of the Hand.

    Figure 7: Hindu Mudras.
    Bill Viola: The Passions (253)

    In his own comments on “Four Hands,” Viola recounts how he determined which gestures to include, explaining that he sought to display those that are found in many cultures and religious traditions. He had been struck, for instance, by the resemblance between the depicted gestures of Christ and those of Buddha, but wanted to lift them out of their narrative contexts, present them solely as embodied signs capable of evoking on their own the intense emotions with which they seemed to be infused. Viola asserts that certain gestures are universal and innate, that human physiognomy, like that of animals, assumes shapes that signify in ways determined by genetic endowment rather than cultural conditioning.[31] He does not entertain the theory that different cultures might provide alternative gestural vocabularies for the expression of a particular emotion, a theory that is advanced, in contrast, by Merleau-Ponty, for whom culture and nature are always clasped in an inextricable embrace. However, in “Four Hands” Viola’s claim that the meaning of performed gestures is universal and innate is undercut by the scenes of transmission the video registers. Embedded in the sequential structure of the piece is the implication that such gestures are transmitted and acquired in an intersubjective setting, as a result of acculturation, miming, apprenticeship, and dialogic response. The mother and son, especially, appear to be miming each other’s hand gestures, communicating in a motor language that develops through exchange, performance, appropriation, and variation. The unity of the two hands is broken by responsive differing, just as in intersubjective situations two subjects might perform the same gestures but in slightly modified ways, qualitatively contrasting with, replying to, the dynamics, velocity, and tonicity of the other’s performance. The transmission scene of “Four Hands” implies that gestural vocabularies are at least partially acquired (rather than received at birth) and derive at least some of their meaning from the context in which they are performed. “Four Hands” illustrates perfectly Merleau-Ponty’s contention that no sign is completely divorced from a biological substrate or immune to cultural re-shaping. The separation between pairs of hands (each pair appears on a linked but detached screen) suggests the subject’s independence; he or she has chosen to express a signification in this manner, and thus the gesture must bear some relationship to its symbolic meaning if it is chosen for that purpose so frequently and by so many hands. At the same time, the easily discernable orange cables connecting one screen to the next like an umbilical cord foreground the interdependence of the subjects and their gestural responses: Would the son make the same gestures as the mother if they were not linked by apprenticeship, furnished with occasions for the teaching and learning of expressive means?
     
    Ultimately, the architecture of “Four Hands” is ambiguous, allowing both readings their due: the performed gestures can be seen as necessary and innate or, alternatively, conventional and acquired. But what “Four Hands” demonstrates unequivocally is that the in-between microgestures, displayed during the interval and captured by the eye are not undirected “waves of affect” or “emotional flows.” In contrast with the highly dramatic–even melodramatic–facial and upper-body gesticulations of the actors in “Anima,” the quieter, monochromatic hand gestures performed in “Hands” announce far more clearly their approaching conformity to the categorical and the legible gestures of established gestural sign languages or mudras. Thus it is more difficult to claim that the “in-between” movements are fully free of cultural conditioning, an illustration of protention inventing movement without any recourse to the sedimented past. When we watch the hands moving in and out of defined, chiseled forms, we become aware of the activity of hands not as they search freely in a limitless continuum for the next pose, but rather as they move through a catalogue of nascent motor actions toward the categorical, legible pose. “Four Hands” exemplifies the thesis that Viola’s work reveals not vitality as such, the “feeling of being alive” in some abstract form, but instead motility in its dialectical essence, at once illegible kinesis and “proto-signification,” the body as it edges slowly toward the codified expression of a culturally established, arbitrary, and conventional meaning.
     
    More than any other work in the exhibition, then, “Four Hands” exacerbates the tension between legibility on the one hand and, on the other, the ambiguous qualities of kinesis that exceed codified gestural forms. Because we are looking at hands, not at faces, we tend not to experience an intense affective identification with the image but instead engage in a detached, aesthetic contemplation of the architecture created by muscle, flesh, and bone. That is, in “Four Hands” the potential for a de-anthropomorphizing gaze is exponentially increased because the hands stand alone; they have been cropped from the expressive faces which, as Deleuze has argued, prove to be such a strong magnet for human affect. Once affect is not the theme and intense affective engagement no longer the solicited response, Viola’s works can reveal a story about indetermination as a set of nascent motor actions drawing from kinesthetic memories that cast our next move before us. Viola’s achievement is to have succeeded in capturing praktognosia itself, the kinesthetic “background” to being that Merleau-Ponty identifies with the gestural, situated meaning of our acts.
     

    the rewarded destinations of the face

     
    In conclusion, I want to return to the question raised at the beginning of this essay concerning the source of the unpredictable and the new. If, as I have been arguing, self-affection is both triggered and hemmed in by the culturally specific gestural routines on which we rely to act, then to what process or force can we attribute innovation, resistance, and the emergence of the previously unknown? If not affect, then what? A partial answer is indicated by Merleau-Ponty when he turns to the issue of gestural conditioning (the acquisition of a habitus) in the chapter entitled “The Body as Expression, and Speech.” Here, Merleau-Ponty offers the example of the infant’s smile as one of the earliest instances in which the given, autonomous body first confronts the pressure of cultural norms. When the smile is proffered, he notes, it is merely one gestural possibility among others emerging from the bone and muscular structure of the human face. But in an intersubjective setting, this movement possibility takes on a specific meaning; under normal conditions, the infant who repeats the now meaningful smile will receive reinforcement from surrounding adults: “a contraction of the throat, a sibilant emission of air between the tongue and teeth, a certain way of bringing the body into play suddenly allows itself to be invested with a figurative [cultural rather than biological] significance which is conveyed outside us” (Phenomenology 225).
     
    In this passage, Merleau-Ponty identifies a social dynamic that has been confirmed in more recent studies, such as those of the child developmental psychologist Andrew Meltzoff. In tests conducted with newborns, Meltzoff recounts, it was found that starting around twelve days after birth, infants regularly protrude the tongue “in imitation of an adult model” (qtd. in Sheets-Johnstone 247). Meltzoff claims that sticking out the tongue is something infants simply do from birth; it is one of their earliest “I cans,” detached from an assigned meaning, the closest thing we know to a precultural reflex. Sticking out the tongue first appears to the infant as a feeling of movement (the movement of tongue on lips) and only later takes on cultural meaning as infants find their behavior repeated on the faces of their caregivers. Infants even begin a few days later to correct their ways of protruding the tongue; if at first they protrude the tongue in order to explore the tongue’s dimensions and sensations, its “vitality affects” for their own sake, soon they will be seeking to approximate more exactly the behaviors they observe in others around them.[32] Apparently, self-correction efforts inspired by the observation of others have the secondary effect of reducing the number of other gesticulations performed, or postures assumed; socially-motivated self-correction causes the muscles of the face (or body) to tend toward the execution of only a certain, culturally-specific, even family-specific vocabulary of gestures. From very early on, then, the “in-betweens” (such as those we witness in Viola’s “Passions” series) are not entirely free of cultural inflection; once even minimally socialized, the infant is less likely to engage in playful exploration of a fuller range of movement possibilities because only some of these possibilities have been experienced as culturally significant; only some of them have become the rewarded destinations of the face. However, that does not mean that, on the way to these destinations, the body has not passed through, or will not continue to pass through, many culturally non-invested gesticulations that could become, under the right circumstances, the movement matter of other types of performance. The process of correction that Meltzoff identifies implies that the body is born with a very extensive “motor power,” as Merleau-Ponty puts it, a motor power capable of generating a host of gestures that will eventually have meanings and a host of gestures that will not. Further, and most importantly, every gesture that will be granted meaning in a cultural milieu will also, always, be merely another movement possibility, providing an experience of kinesis, a gestural materiality upon which “figurative significance” has contingently come to rest.
     
    Finally, Merleau-Ponty’s discussion of infant language acquisition illustrates well the way in which kinesis, rather than affect alone, offers the possibility for gesticulatory innovations beyond the gestures prescribed by any one cultural system. In “Indirect Language and the Voices of Silence,” Merleau-Ponty depicts language acquisition as a process of continual self-reduction, the “self” defined here as the vocal apparatus and its physiological, we might almost say material, possibilities of manipulation. “The important point,” stresses Merleau-Ponty, “is that the phonemes are from the beginning variations of a unique speech apparatus, and that with them the child seems to have ‘caught’ the principle of a mutual differentiation of signs and at the same time to have acquired the meaning of the sign” (“Indirect Language” 40). If the child can grasp the difference, in an intersubjective setting, between “babbling” and sounds that bear intersubjective meaning, then this child knows on a kinesthetic level how to do more than she will be required to do by any one given culture. The “principle” the child discovers is that a sound gains its meaning not purely from what it is, or purely from what it feels like to produce it, but rather from the way it differs from another sound. As well as learning the differential, conventional meaning of the phonetic clusters, then, the child also feels the not-yet classified or rewarded sensations produced by pronouncing these clusters, the qualitative continuum of movement she has been forced to segment into communicative or operational units. She has felt something that cultural representations do not allow her to store as perceptual image (or as nameable, categorical emotion) but only as motor memory, part of a “kinesthetic background” from which the future–as protentive projection–will later emerge. Physiological potentialities of the lips, throat, tongue, and vocal chords will be “repressed” (Merleau-Ponty’s word) but they will remain as prior inscription on the level of motor experience, that is, on the level of kinesthetic memory of past action. The child can draw on these lived “I cans” belonging not to culture but to the apparatus, if given the opportunity to do so.
     
    Perhaps inspired by Merleau-Ponty, Julia Kristeva also turns to infant language acquisition to explain the acculturated body’s gesticulatory, expressive, and affective excess. In a clinical research experiment recorded in “Contraintes rythmiques et langage poétique,” Kristeva studies the sounds produced by infants between four and six months of age. At this point, infants are engaged in a process of self-correction similar to that observed in Meltzoff’s study on sticking out the tongue, only here, they try to shape (and parse) a continuum of unintelligible vocalizations into the significant phonemes of a single human language. With the help of audiotape, Kristeva trains her ear to hear the sounds in between the phonemes of French, or, alternatively, Chinese (the cultural backgrounds of her clinical subjects). The sounds she hears in between recognizable phonemes belong to the extensive “motor power” of the human vocal apparatus, the physiology of which offers a range of sound-making movements capable of being conjugated into any one of the existing 6000 languages humans use–or even other languages not yet invented. And it is important to preserve this space of the not-yet-invented, the to-be-organized-into-culture, for, as Merleau-Ponty observes time and again, we do not know what nature beyond culture is. We do not even know what our own anatomy allows. “The psychophysiological equipment,” underscores Merleau-Ponty, “leaves a great variety of possibilities open, and there is no . . . human nature finally and immutably given” (Phenomenology 219-20). On this reading, a human being’s past, or “the animal’s embodied history,” as Varela puts it, includes culturally specific gestures acquired in infancy and skills learned later on, but also movements sketched out perhaps only once, available to the apparatus, the “equipment” with which we are born. All of these varieties of kinesis fall under Merleau-Ponty’s capacious category of “I cans.” The individual’s motor repertory is thus not limitless, but it is certainly richer than any single culture can encode. We are a self-disclosing motility, the parameters of which undoubtedly exist but are not yet charted. They are certainly in excess of where each culture places them. This gestural excess, this “gesticulatory” excess of physical movement over cultural meaning is the protentive aspect of human being in time. It is this excessive, self-disclosing motility that, I suggest in conclusion, provides the conditions for the emergence of the unpredictable and the new.
     
    But to what extent can the neonatal or even prepersonal body play a role in creating new forms of motor actions once the habitus has left its mark? How can we become aware of our own “kinesthetic background,” how can we reflect on the prereflexive self? Like Stern, Leder, Sklar and Lowell Lewis, Merleau-Ponty maintains that we indeed have numerous opportunities to return to and sensorily recapture the “vitality affects” or kinesthetic “background” investing our socially legible gestures with situated meaning. According to Merleau-Ponty, we can shift our attention from the meanings we are making to the kinesthetic sensation of making them, thereby revealing an alternative approach to the body as “proto-signification,” a materiality upon which meanings will be inscribed. Merleau-Ponty refers to these moments as “dropping away,” periods of extended attention to performance, when the semantic value of a word, for instance, recedes into the background and instead the “verbal gesticulation” is perceived as “a certain use made of my phonatory equipment” (Phenomenology 469).[33] If we can manage to separate ourselves momentarily from our semantic projects, not only do we hear the noise of the sound-clusters we call words, but, more importantly, we seize the cultural organization of sound at the level of what it feels like, qualitatively, to produce it.
     
    Extending Merleau-Ponty’s insight, the anthropologist Thomas J. Csordas has proposed that every culture offers its own set of “somatic modes of attention,” skilled practices that encourage subjects to access this kinesthetic layer of knowledge and experience. “Somatic modes of attention,” he writes, “are culturally elaborated ways of attending to and with one’s body in surroundings that include the embodied presence of others” (244).[34] (His examples range from yoga and meditation to love-making, charismatic healing, and learning to dance.)[35] What Merleau-Ponty dubs “the tacit cogito, myself experienced by myself,” is available through culture’s own technologies of self-monitoring, somatic modes of attention that are themselves, of course, limited by the languages in which they are couched. We can only have a framed apprehension of that which resists already available cultural frames.
     
    Perhaps there is no complete escape from acculturation, no blissful “dropping away” from acquired routines. Paradoxically, however, each culture provides routines to counter routines, a set of procedures to reveal the gap in another set. Through slow motion technologies or somatic techniques that make us more aware of the continuum from which gestures have been cut, it is possible to increase one’s sensitivity to the gap, to lie in wait for the emergence of that short but pregnant in-between, or interval, that the next step on the chain both renders possible and leaves behind. The freedom to produce the new and the unpredictable should not be attributed to protention as a total, unalloyed openness to the unknown, a projection of “emotional tone” or affect ahead of bodily performance and beyond learned response. Instead, such freedom to innovate should be seen to derive from our rich mnemonic store of socially acquired “I cans” as well as the proto-signifying resources of bipedal anatomy, that is, from an as yet unexhausted set of kinetic dispositions that are in the course of being explored, either to be pressed into the service of already established gesture vocabularies or, in privileged cases such as choreography, to be expanded into a logic of their own. Viola’s works are indeed precious, for they expose alternatives to conditioning that emerge as we move from the past toward the always already will be.

    Notes

     
    1. These lectures have been collected and published in La Nature: notes, cours du Collège de France.
     
    2. Despite Michel Serres’s claim in Les Cinq sens that Merleau-Ponty largely ignored sensation and thus the role of the sense organs in shaping understanding, most philosophers, dance theorists, and anthropologists would agree that Merleau-Ponty is preoccupied with the question of the subject’s sensual engagement with the world. With respect to kinesthesia in particular, Merleau-Ponty was influenced by Husserl’s ideas concerning the primacy of movement and kinesthetic sensation. For a helpful rendering of these ideas in English, see Varela, “The Specious Present,” and Petit.
     
    3. See especially “Cézanne’s Doubt” and “Indirect Language and the Voices of Silence.” It could be objected that Merleau-Ponty confuses expressive facial gestures with instrumental gestures or gestural routines. But there is reason to approach both varieties of gesture as skills, a point Ingold has recently argued persuasively. Ingold insists that even “speaking should be treated as a variety of skilled practice” (292); for him, verbalizations and facial signs are expressive gestures that are culturally acquired rather than biologically innate.
     
    4. The notion of the body “cleaving” to the world comes from Husserl; see Petit 220.

    5. See especially Part I, chaps. 6-7; see also Le Bergsonisme.
     
    6. Massumi is wonderfully suggestive in his treatment of movement, but he does not analyze specific movements or movement patterns and their relation to the production of sensation.
     
    7. Bergson devotes a chapter to motor memory and its tendency to seek resemblances between past responses and present solicitations (“Of the Recognition of Images: Memory and the Brain,” 77-131). He distinguishes motor memory (images of habits, or gestural routines, “lived and acted” [81]) from intellectual memory (“representations”). The former enacts memory by directing the body toward a possible action, whereas the latter, which Bergson renames “attention,” pictures a possibility in thought: “To call up the past in the form of an image, we must be able to withdraw ourselves from the action of the moment, we must have the power to value the useless, we must have the will to dream. Man alone is capable of such an effort” (83).
     
    8. By “kinesthesia” is meant the body’s sensation of its own movement. With reference to Schneider, Merleau-Ponty writes: “The patient either conceives the ideal formula for the movement or else he launches his body into blind attempts to perform it, whereas for the normal person every movement is, indissolubly, movement and consciousness of movement. This can be expressed by saying that for the normal person every movement has a background [fond] and that the movement and its background are ‘moments of a unique totality’” (Phenomenology 127; emphasis added). Subsequent studies on this pathology have identified Schneider as the “de-afferented subject,” one who lacks a “body schema” (another way of understanding what Merleau-Ponty means by kinesthetic “background”). See, in particular, the work of Gallagher and Cole. Hansen mobilizes their research to argue that contemporary new media artists amplify the body schema, rendering subjects more aware of the role of kinesthetic feedback in their actions; see Bodies in Code.
     
    9. I am reducing here a very complicated argument in which Deleuze divides Bergson’s “image” into three types: roughly, the “movement-image” (the first image of the stimulus filtered in such a way that the organism can react according to its interest); the “perception-image” (the response based on memories of previous actions); and the “affection-image” (the response based on interoceptive feedback). See Image-Mouvement 91-96. In L’Individuation psychique et collective, Gilbert Simondon recasts Bergson’s tri-part schema in the following way: Bergson’s first moment, in which potential movements are sketched out by the organism, becomes the unconscious (“a fundamental layer of the unconscious which is the subject’s capacity to act” [la capacité d’action du sujet]); the second moment, in which affect mediates the response, becomes the subconscious (“the layer of the subconscious which is composed essentially of affectivity and emotion” [affectivité: et émotivité]); and the third moment, the end result, becomes consciousness, or the realized action (99). For Simondon, individuality is located in the second moment, the intermediary layer of subconscious affection. He therefore focuses his inquiry solely here: “An analysis of what we call psychic individuality must center on affectivity and emotion” [Une analyse de ce que l’on peut nommer l’individualité psychique devrait donc être centre autour de l’affectivité: et l’émotivité]). Accordingly, he neglects to consider “unconscious” kinetic potentials as constituting the very movement history of the subject, a history that I claim is equally central to the unique psychic and somatic composition of the subject. Nearly all of affect studies has emulated Simondon’s approach, one supported by Deleuze’s early work on Spinoza in which he separates “affections” (sense impressions) from “affects” (emotions) and privileges the former. See Deleuze, Expressionism in Philosophy: Spinoza.
     
    10. For a full list of titles, see the Getty exhibition catalogue, Bill Viola The Passions; all further references cite this volume.
     
    11. The actors–John Malpede, Weba Garretson, Tom Fitzpatrick, John Fleck, Dan Gerrity–sometimes grasp each other, but they remain wrapped up in their own emotional and physical space.
     
    12. Ekman has found that technically “putting-on” facial gestures is a more effective way to create emotional states than is searching the soul for emotional equivalents, as in Method acting. See Ekman, Levenson, and Friesen, “Autonomic Nervous System Activity” and “Voluntary Facial Action.” For an application of Ekman’s ideas to the acting, see Schechner, “Magnitudes of Performance.”
     
    13. Weba Garretson, describing Viola’s process in an interview (qtd. in Walsh 35).
     
    14. For Hansen, affectivity “comprises a power of the body that cannot be assimilated to the habit-driven, associational logic governing perception” (7). As a “framing function” (8) belonging to the body at any moment in history, “affectivity” can help explain the surging forth of agency, innovation, and resistance within and despite the material conditions of culture, within and despite, that is, the standardizing regimes of power that have appeared so inescapably coercive to Judith Butler and to Michel Foucault. Differentiating his own view from those of Jonathan Crary and Gilles Deleuze, Hansen writes that “the frame in any [technologically produced] form,” such as the photograph or the video signal, “cannot be accorded the autonomy Deleuze would give it since its very form (in any concrete deployment) reflects the demands of embodied perception, or more exactly, a historically contingent negotiation between technical capacities and the ongoing ‘evolution’ of embodied (human) perception. Beneath any concrete ‘technical’ image or frame lies what I shall call the framing function of the human body qua center of indetermination” (8). I am indebted to Hansen’s critique of Deleuze, but I add that this frame is socially constructed as well as physiologically informed.
     
    15. See Hansen’s discussion of the face and its privileged relation to the communication of affect in “Affect as Interface.” Hansen is clearly influenced here by Deleuze’s discussion of the human face in Image-Mouvement.
     
    16. See, for example, the blocking of the arms and torso in Bill Viola’s “Silent Mountain” (2001), also included in “The Passions.”
     
    17. He continues: “The fundamental logic of the nervous system is that of coupling movements with a stream of sensory modulations in a circular fashion.”
     
    18. Sheets-Johnstone reads phenomenology (especially Husserl) in a way that both complements and complicates Hansen’s own understanding of the relation between time consciousness and motility.
     
    19. Stern understands affect differently from Deleuze, but captures Bergson’s emphasis on pain and discomfort, qualities of sensation related to bodily states.
     
    20. Stern is collapsing here a difference that some theorists chose to maintain between “kinesthesia” and “proprioception.” The latter has more to do with being able to estimate the body’s spatial orientation and position with respect to some external coordinate. For more on this distinction, see Pieron. Stern defines the emergent self with respect to a sense of constant movement, even if this movement is that of the organs.
     
    21. “The knitting of the brows intended, according to Darwin, to protect the eye from the sun, or the narrowing of the eyes to enable one to see sharply, become component parts of the human act of meditation, and convey this to an observer”; the shift from a reflex motion to a signifying gesture is described by Merleau-Ponty as a moment when the body “suddenly allows itself to be invested with a figurative significance which is conveyed outside us” (225).
     
    22. The vitality affects that relay the body’s sensations back to itself are not entirely pre-cultural but rather the first matter upon which cultural distinctions play. According to Stern (as well as Merleau-Ponty), the autonomous body is never available to us in its precultural purity, but we can, as I discuss in this essay, catch glimpses of its resonance in the “embodied schemata” by which it is caught and brought into cultural (perceptual/cognitive) being. On “embodied schemata” (smooth versus rough, up versus down) as early cultural imprinting, see the groundbreaking work of Mark Johnson, The Body in the Mind.
     
    23. The actors in “Anima” are Page Leong, John Fleck, and Henriette Brouwers. “Anima” was completed in 2000; it measures 16-1/2″ x 75″ x 2″ and is mounted on three LCD flat panels–small computers with the maker’s name, logo, etc., covered by a frame.
     
    24. Hansen continues: “The future is unknown, and therefore consciousness can only depend upon itself.” Compare this to Massumi’s conclusions in Parables of the Virtual, which are closer to mine:

    If the body were all and only in the here and now, unlooped by dopplerings, it would be cut off from its "was's," not to mention its "would have been's" and "may yet be's." How could a body develop habits and skills? Are these not pastnesses primed in the present for the future? . . . . A body does not coincide with its present. It coincides with its potential. The potential is the future-past contemporary with every body's change. (200)

     
    25. “Consciousness is being-towards-the-thing through the intermediary of the body,” he states (Phenomenology 159).
     
    26. For a reading of Merleau-Ponty (and phenomenology more generally) that supports my own, see Patocka. I thank Mark Hansen for directing me to this work, one which, as far as I have been able to ascertain, has not yet been translated into English.
     
    27. See especially Bourdieu, Outline of a Theory of Practice. One finds the same division between macro-conditioning and micro-conditioning in analyses by Brecht (see Brecht, Ihde, and Howes).
     
    28. On the virtual body and its exfoliation, see Massumi and Gil.
     
    29. For Bourdieu, bodily hexis is “embodied history, internalized as a second nature and so forgotten as history” (The Logic of Practice 56).
     
    30. This is how Bateson defines creativity.
     
    31. Theorists of gesture still ask whether the meanings of certain facial expressions are consistent across cultures (and thus can be considered universal and innate). McNeill summarizes the relevant research up to 1992 in Hand and Mind: What Gestures Reveal About Thought; Kendon provides another overview in Gesture: Visible Action as Utterance that focuses on the relation between speaking and gesturing. See especially 327-54, where he discusses arguments offered by Ekman and Friesen, who follow Darwin in believing that expression of emotion is innate (1972), and those of Kita and Ozyürek and McNeill, who are convinced that culture plays a much larger role in determining how emotion is communicated through gestures. In contrast, Sheets-Johnstone claims in “Corporeal Archetypes and Power: Preliminary Clarification and Considerations of Sex” that there are indeed universal gestures; she draws on research in primate behavior to demonstrate that there are species-specific gestures universally employed in similar situations. These gestures can thus be seen as “natural,” or biologically driven (in Body and Flesh).
     
    32. Commenting on Meltzoff’s study, Stern adds that blind infants will perform the same gestures as not-blind infants during the first few months, but when they do not have the experience of seeing these gestures mirrored in the faces of their caregivers they stop making them or make them at culturally inappropriate times.
     
    33.

    One day I "caught on" to the word "sleet," much as one imitates a gesture, not, that is, by analyzing it and performing an articulatory or phonetic action corresponding to each part of the word as heard, but by hearing it as a single modulation of the world of sound, and because this acoustic entity presents itself as "something to pronounce" in virtue of the all-embracing correspondence existing between my perceptual potentialities and my motor ones . . . . This is why consciousness is never subordinated to empirical language, why languages can be translated and learned . . . . Behind the spoken cogito, the one which is converted into discourse and into essential truth, there lies a tacit cogito, myself experienced by myself. (Merleau-Ponty, Phenomenology 459)

     
    34. “The ways we attend to and with our bodies, and even the possibility of attending, are neither arbitrary nor biologically determined, but are culturally constituted” (246).
     
    35. As Csordas points out, in “Techniques of the Body” Mauss proposes that there is a “somatic mode of attention associated with the acquisition of any technique . . . but this mode of attention recedes into the horizon once the technique is mastered” (245). The anthropologist J. Lowell Lewis also insists that the period of habit and skill acquisition is particularly rich: “one is constantly monitoring how it feels for the body to do what it is doing, trying out and evaluating different feelings, and measuring the effects of those feelings as action in the world” (229).

    Works Cited

    • Bateson, Gregory. Steps to an Ecology of Mind. Chicago: Chicago UP, 2000.
    • Bergson, Henri. Matter and Memory. Trans. Nancy Margaret Paul and W. Scott Palmer. New York: Zone, 1991.
    • Bourdieu, Pierre. The Logic of Practice. Trans. Richard Nice. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1980.
    • —. Outline of a Theory of Practice. Trans. Richard Nice. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1977.
    • Brecht, Bertolt. Brecht on Theatre: The Development of an Aesthetic. Ed. and trans. John Willet. New York: Hill & Wang, 1964.
    • Crary, Jonathan, and Sanford Kwinter, eds. Incorporations. New York: Zone, 1992.
    • Csordas, Thomas J. Body/Healing/Meaning. New York: Palgrave MacMillan, 2002.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Le Bergsonisme. Paris: PUF, 1966.
    • —. Expressionism in Philosophy: Spinoza. Trans. Martin Joughin. New York: Zone, 1998.
    • —. Image-Mouvement. Paris: Minuit, 1983.
    • Ekman, Paul, R.W. Levenson, and W.V. Friesen. “Autonomic Nervous System Activity Distinguishes Between Emotions.” Science 221 (1983): 1208-10.
    • —. “Voluntary Facial Action Generates Emotion Specific Autonomic Nervous System Activity.” Psychophysiology 27.4 (1990): 363-84.
    • Gallagher, Shaun, and Jonathan Cole. “Body Image and Body Schema in a Deafferented Subject.” Body and Flesh: A Philosophical Reader. Ed. Donn Welton. Malden: Blackwell, 1998. 131-48
    • Gil, José. Metamorphoses of the Body. Trans. Stephen Muecke. Minneapolis: Minnesota UP, 1998.
    • Hansen, Mark. “Affect as Interface: Confronting the ‘Digital Facial Image.’” New Philosophy for New Media. Cambridge: MIT P, 2004. 127-59.
    • —. Bodies in Code: Interfaces with Digital Media. New York: Routledge, 2006.
    • —. “The Time of Affect, or Bearing Witness to Life.” Critical Inquiry 30 (Spring 2004): 584-626.
    • Howes, David, ed. Empire of the Senses: The Sensual Culture Reader. Oxford: Berg, 2005.
    • Ihde, Don. Bodies in Technology. Minneapolis: Minnesota UP, 2002.
    • Ingold, Tim. The Perception of the Environment: Essays in Livelihood, Dwelling, and Skill. New York: Routledge, 2000.
    • Johnson, Mark. The Body in the Mind: The Bodily Basis of Meaning, Imagination, and Reason. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1987.
    • Kendon, Adam. Gesture: Visible Action as Utterance. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2004.
    • Kristeva, Julia. Polylogue. Paris: Seuil, 1977.
    • Leder, Drew. The Absent Body. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1990.
    • Lewis, J. Lowell. “Genre and Embodiment: From Brazilian Capoeira to the Ethnology of Human Movement.” Cultural Anthropology: Anthropologies of the Body 10:2 (May 1995): 221-43.
    • Massumi, Brian. Parables for the Virtual: Movement, Affect, Sensation. Durham: Duke UP, 2003.
    • Mauss, Marcel. “Techniques of the Body.” Crary and Kwinter 455-57.
    • McNeill, David. Hand and Mind. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1992.
    • Meltzoff, Andrew N. “Imitation, Intermodel Co-ordination and Representation in Early Infancy.” Infancy and Epistemology: An Evaluation of Piaget’s Theory. Ed. George Butterworth. Brighton: Harvester, 1981. 85-114.
    • Merleau-Ponty, Maurice. “Cézanne’s Doubt.” Sense and Non-Sense. Trans. Hubert L. Dreyfus and Patricia Allen Dreyfus. Evanston: Northwestern UP, 1964. 9-25.
    • —. “Indirect Language and the Voices of Silence.” Signs. Trans. Richard C. McCleary. Evanston: Northwestern UP, 1964. 39-83.
    • —. La nature: notes, cours du Collège de France. Ed. Dominique Séglard. Paris: Seuil, 1995.
    • —. Phenomenology of Perception. Trans. Colin Smith. London: Routledge, 2002.
    • Patocka, Jan. Le monde naturel et le mouvement de l’existence humaine. Dordrecht: Kluwer, 1998.
    • Petit, Jean-Luc. “Constitution by Movement: Husserl in Light of Recent Neurobiological Findings.” Naturalizing Phenomenology: Issues in Contemporary Phenomenology and Cognitive Science. Eds. Jean Petitot, Francisco J. Varela, Bernard Pachoud, and Jean-Michel Roy. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1999. 220-44.
    • Pieron, Henri. The Sensations: Their Functions, Processes, and Mechanisms. London: Frederick Muller, 1952.
    • Schechner, Richard. “Magnitudes of Performance.” By Means of Performance: Intercultural Studies of Theatre and Ritual. Eds. Richard Schechner and Willa Appel. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1990. 19-49.
    • Serres, Michel. Les cinq sens. Paris: Hachette, 1998.
    • Sheets-Johnstone, Maxine. “Corporeal Archetypes and Power: Preliminary Clarification and Considerations of Sex.” Body and Flesh: A Philosophical Reader. Ed. Donn Welton. Malden: Blackwell, 1998. 149-80.
    • —. The Primacy of Movement. Amsterdam: Johns Benjamins, 1999.
    • Sklar, Deidre. “Remembering Kinesthesia: An Inquiry into Embodied Cultural Knowledge.” Migrations of Gesture: Art, Film, Dance, Writing. Eds. Carrie Noland and Sally Ann Ness. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 2008.
    • Simondon, Gilbert. L’Individuation psychique et collective. Paris: Aubier, 1989.
    • Stern, Daniel N. The Interpersonal World of the Infant: A View From Psychanalysis and Developmental Psychology. New York: Basic, 1985.
    • Varela, Francisco J. “The Reenchantment of the Concrete.” Crary and Kwinter 320-40.
    • —. “The Specious Present.” Naturalizing Phenomenology: Issues in Contemporary Phenomenology and Cognitive Science. Eds. Jean Petitot, Francisco J. Varela, Bernard Pachoud, and Jean-Michel Roy. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1999. 266-314.
    • —. “Organism: A Meshwork of Selfless Selves.” Organism and The Origins of Self. Ed. Alfred I. Tauber. Dordrecht: Kluwer, 1991. 79-107.
    • Walsh, John, ed. Bill Viola: The Passions. Los Angeles: J. Paul Getty Museum, 2003.

  • Notes on Contributors

    Alan Bass is a psychoanalyst practicing in New York City, where he is on the faculty of several psychoanalytic institutes. He also teaches in the philosophy department of The New School for Social Research. The author of Difference and Disavowal: The Trauma of Eros (Stanford UP, 2000) and Interpretation and Difference: The Strangeness of Care (Stanford UP, 2006), he is also the translator of four books by Jacques Derrida (Writing and Difference, Positions, Margins of Philosophy, The Post Card) and the author of many essays and reviews.

    Melinda Cooper is Lecturer in Sociology at the University of Sydney, Australia, and Honorary Fellow at the Centre for Biomedicine and Society, Kings College, London. She has published in journals such as Theory Culture and Society, Angelaki, Configurations, and Theory & Event, and is the author of Life as Surplus: Biotechnology and Capitalism in the Neoliberal Era (Washington UP, 2008).

    Joshua Kates is Associate Professor of English at Indiana University-Bloomington. In 2005 he published Essential History: Jacques Derrida and the Development of Deconstruction (Northwestern UP). This fall, his Fielding Derrida: Contextualizing Deconstruction will be published by Fordham UP. His latest project focuses on the status of historicism in contemporary literary studies, literary modernism, and in the postmodern novel.

    Eleanor Kaufman is Associate Professor of Comparative Literature and French and Francophone Studies at UCLA. She is co-editor of Deleuze and Guattari: New Mappings in Politics, Philosophy, and Culture (Minnesota, 1998), and the author of The Delirium of Praise: Bataille, Blanchot, Deleuze, Foucault, Klossowski (Johns Hopkins, 2001) and of At Odds with Badiou: Politics, Dialectics, and Religion from Sartre and Deleuze to Lacan and Agamben (forthcoming, Columbia). She will give the Gauss Seminar in Criticism at Princeton University in spring 2009.

    Joseph Keith is Assistant Professor of English at Binghamton University, SUNY. He completed his Ph.D. in the Department of English at Columbia University in 2006. He specializes in twentieth-century literatures of the U.S. and postcolonial and Marxist theory. His current book project is “Cold War Cosmopolitanisms: Development, Decolonization and the Unclaimed Spaces of Modernity.”

    Brett Levinson is Professor of Comparative Literature at the State University of New York at Binghamton. He is author of Secondary Moderns (Bucknell UP, 1996), The Ends of Literature (Stanford UP, 2002), and Market and Thought (Fordham UP, 2006), as well as of numerous articles on psychoanalysis, philosophy, and Latin American culture.

    Michael G. Malouf is Assistant Professor in the Department of English at George Mason University. His essays on Irish and Caribbean culture have appeared in Jouvert and Interventions as well as in two book collections: The Irish in Us: Irishness, Performativity, and Popular Culture (Duke, 2006) and Ireland and Transatlantic Poetics (Delaware, 2007). His book, Transatlantic Solidarities: Irish Nationalism and Caribbean Poetics, is forthcoming from the University of Virginia Press.

    Jan Mieszkowski is Associate Professor of German and Humanities at Reed College. His work focuses on the intersections of literary, philosophical and political discourses since the Enlightenment. He is the author of Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser (Fordham UP, 2006). His most recent essays include pieces on Kleist’s theory of patriotism, legibility in de Man, and the modernist idea of total war. He is completing a book on military spectacle in European culture since 1800.

    Laurence Rickels, at once recognized theorist and certified psychotherapist, teaches at Art Center College of Design, European Graduate School, and at the University of California, Santa Barbara. His books include Aberrations of Mourning (1988), The Case of California (1991), The Vampire Lectures (1999), and Nazi Psychoanalysis (2002).

    Catherine Taylor is Assistant Professor of English at Ohio University. Her research and teaching interests include documentary poetics, creative nonfiction, experimental writing, and American literary and cultural studies. Her essays, poetry, and reviews have recently appeared or are forthcoming in Typo, Xantippe , The Colorado Review, The Laurel Review, Jacket, and ActionNow. She is a Founding Editor of Essay Press (www.essaypress.org), a small press dedicated to publishing innovative essays. She is at work on a hybrid genre book about South Africa and a scholarly book entitled “Documents of Despair.”

  • Homeland Insecurities

    Melinda Cooper (bio)
    Sociology, University of Sydney, Australia
    melinda.cooper@arts.usyd.edu.au

    Randy Martin, An Empire of Indifference: American War and the Financial Logic of Risk Management. Durham: Duke UP, 2007.

     

    Randy Martin’s Empire of Indifference deploys the concept of “securitization”–with its double reference to financial and military processes–as a way of approaching the seeming convertibility of the economic and the political calculus of risk in the U.S.’s most recent imperialisms. If the revolving door between the two now seems as intimate as that between the Republican dynasty and its donors, Martin is not so much interested in these contingent alliances as in the temporality that unites their imperial investments. The leveraged, hyper-volatile investments afforded by the financial derivative thus offer a parallel perspective on the apparent flightiness of recent U.S. imperial strategy. This is a terrain of investigation that seems to be opened up by the philosophy of the event in its different genealogies (Deleuze and Negri, via Lucretius, Spinoza, Machiavelli, and pragmatism; Derrida and the later Althusser, via Heidegger and Machiavelli; Badiou via set theory). But whereas the evocation of the event in these philosophies seems to point to a horizon of ontological resistance or even messianism, in some sense beyond the politics of state and capital, Martin places his whole strategy firmly within the field of the event. Event-based capitalism thereby becomes the terrain in which power struggles are to be conducted. The promise and the gift of an unknowable futurity with which the event is associated in recent French theory is nothing more or less than the promissory future of speculative capital. The question then becomes how to think through a counter-politics of the event. With its clean departure from state-based and political theological accounts of power, it seems to me that Martin’s book represents one of the first political philosophies to offer a thorough critique of the political economy of the event.
     
    Martin’s previous book, Financialization of Daily Life (2002) is concerned with the intimate psychology of risk in an era when the barriers between public and private financial spheres were being deliberately dismantled. Standard histories of financialization point to the breakdown of Bretton Woods, the turn to monetarist anti-inflation strategies, and the Clinton-era repeal of the Glass Steagall Act as defining moments in the ascent of finance to a commanding position in the U.S., and global, economy. Less attention is paid to the process by which personal finance in the form of pension savings, education loans, household debt, and mortgages were transferred to the global capital markets over the same period. The liquidity of these markets presupposes the availability of a mass of personal finance that was previously sequestered from the vagaries of speculative capital. In Financialization of Daily Life, Martin is concerned with the resounding effects of such a shift on everyday life. What happens when the worker/consumer is invited to manage his or her life risks with the same opportunism as the financial investor? And when the Fordist utopias of progressive growth, the middle class, and the standard of living give way to the normalization of indebtedness and credit-based upward mobility? In post-Fordism, the savings plan, with its promise of deferred gratification, is replaced by the leveraged investment and its demand that we valorize the future before it gets a chance to bankrupt us. Nowhere is the precariousness of this situation more visible than in the securitization of the home mortgage, as the sub-prime mortgage crisis has once again made clear.
     
    Empire of Indifference, which can be read as a sequel to this work, looks outward to the effects of financialization on U.S. foreign policy and imperial intervention, and inward to the parallel militarization of the domestic front. Here it is no longer the “home” but the “homeland” that is subject to the risks and opportunities of securitization. And it is not the home mortgage but escalating governmental indebtedness that provides the leverage for proliferating financial and military opportunism. Martin offers no attempt to discern the “real” reasons underlying the war in Iraq–the oil reserves of Iraq no more determine the risks and gains of war than the market price of energy futures are decided by the fundamental value of oil. Rather he situates the war within the context of an overall shift in U.S. foreign policy that aspires to displace the strategic value of geographic locale and long-term territorial appropriation with the risk-opportunism of short-term investment. This shift, he argues, is visible both in the ongoing reconstitution of the U.S. armed forces and in the changing face of imperial intervention itself. The doctrine of force transformation (otherwise known as the revolution in military affairs) has covered for a thoroughgoing restructuring of the armed forces in perfect alignment with the precepts of corporate outsourcing, asset-stripping, and self-government. The generative effects of pre-emptive warfare have been well documented–the fact for example that Iraq has become a training ground for al-Qaeda as a consequence of U.S. intervention or that the possibility of weapons of mass destruction falling into the hands of the Taliban has been made more likely by the alliance with Pakistan. Most importantly, the declaration of a war on terror seems to have provoked a certain unity of purpose amongst various denominations of militant Islamism, crystallizing alliances that would otherwise have lain dormant. Whatever the costs, pre-emption will have at least succeeded in generating “relations at a distance” and risk opportunities where none existed before. This mode of intervention is curiously indifferent to its own “success” or “failure,” since both eventualities open up a market of future risk opportunities where even hedges against risk can be traded for profit. “Fighting terror unleashed it elsewhere, just as well-placed put or call (sell or buy) of stock would send ripples of price volatility through the market. Drops in price can be hedged against, turned into derivatives, and sold for gain. The terror war converts both wins and losses into self-perpetuating gain” (98).
     
    Among other things, this book offers a powerful reflection on method. Martin is particularly illuminating on the limitations of Foucault’s enormously influential account of biopower in Society Must be Defended, which makes the unfortunate move of opposing the dynamism of a relational account of power to a substance-based view of economic exchange and property relations. Addressing himself to the more reductive strands in political Marxism, Foucault ends up deserting the whole field of economic analysis, a surprising move given Foucault’s early attention to the simultaneous development of the modern life sciences and political economy. “While certainly not so in Foucault’s earlier writing such as The Order of Things (1966), in later work the matter of life and money is typically written about as if active consideration of one precluded critical attention to the other. While political economy seems moribund, biopower is money-free” (132). Even in his follow-up lecture series, La naissance de la biopolitique (1978-79), where Foucault offers his first and last analysis of Chicago school neoliberalism, his analysis of the “economisation” of life is limited to the more reductive neoclassical attempts to measure life’s value in economic terms. Not only is Foucault’s method inadequate to the contemporary co-penetration of domestic and commercial economic relations, argues Martin, it is also singularly unsuited to dealing with the event-based dynamics of financial capital. “Of course Foucault is not reading Marx in these lectures but Hobbes, although he is clearly arguing against a particular version of Marxism” (135). Hence one of the unexpected consequences of Foucault’s account of biopower is that in spite of its intentions, it ends up reorienting contemporary debate around the question of sovereign power and political theology (Agamben’s work, which responds to Foucault via Hobbes, is representative here).
     
    The power of Martin’s method is that it gives space to perplexity, putting it to work rather than resolving it. This is a welcome move when, in the protracted “aftermath” of the Iraq intervention, we are left wondering “what was that all about?” Martin steers a course between what he calls the “functional” and the “figural” approaches in theoretical critique. On the one hand, he wants to avoid the functionalist extremes of a certain kind of systems theory. That is, the overly rationalist account of imperialism that ends up endowing the independent variable–intervention in Iraq–with a sense of predestined purpose, as “if capitalism always knew what was best for it,” and its mirror image, the current of imperial “irrationalism” that sees contemporary U.S. imperialism as a kind of descent into pure chaos, an empire of “incoherence.” These approaches are closer than they might at first seem. On the other hand, Martin is convincingly critical of the “figural” approaches of Giorgio Agamben and Achille Mbembe, who step straight into the sovereign void opened up by Foucault in his late work and end up reducing all power dynamics to the figure of state violence in absentia. These approaches have their temptations, not least because they offer a kind of all-purpose filler for the unexplained. As soon as some democratic rule is presumed missing, one has only to declare that a state of exception has been installed. And in case some historical detail were needed, it will be agreed that the state of exception has become “more and more” the norm since about (ummm) the Declaration of the Rights of Man or the early Roman Empire. The appeal to the state of exception simplifies the complexity of power relations at least as much as the liberal triumphalism that accompanied the end of the Cold War. “The normalization of the camp allows the mind to race in affirmation from Guantanamo to Abu Ghraib” (141) yet the reduction of these instances of power to a state sovereignty affirmed by way of exception paradoxically ends up rigidifying the figure of the state at the precise moment when the state is undergoing a complex force transformation of its own. In the North American context, this transformation has included the outsourcing of both welfare and security functions to the transnational service conglomerate, a dispersed privatization of state power that goes someway towards explaining the proximities between the racialized abuse carried out in domestic prisons and the torture at Abu Ghraib. By paying attention to these shifts, Martin is able to account for the fluidity with which imperial interventions can invest such geographically dispersed locations as Iraq and New Orleans, displacing surplus populations with extraordinary rapidity and indifference to their long-term management. In its domestic interventions, contemporary U.S. imperialism replaces strategies of permanent segregation with wave-like mobilization events–the forcible removal of urban minorities from the metropolitan centers becoming a pretext for “urban regeneration” and “creative destruction.” Racism here becomes a function of errant, forcible homelessness rather than permanent relegation to a state-administered camp or reserve. As Martin writes,
     

    Shaving off the portion of the population from the body of an electorate or citizenry is certainly a venerable form of divide and rule. But the fluidity with which one entity or another may become the excluded other speaks to a more active principle of circulation that now informs self-government, in an ever stranger convergence of foreign and domestic.

     
    In Martin’s account, the derivative war is relentlessly and prematurely triumphant, but nevertheless trapped in a loop of temporal self-sabotage that is endemic to finance-based capitalism too.
     

    In practice, the only thing that turned out to be discretionary in the Iraq war was its timing: when to begin something that had already begun and end something that could not be stopped. . . . The preemptive empire of indifference consumes its own futurity, expending its assets in advance, delivering its promises before they are made, announcing its successes before its failures can catch up with it.
     

    (160)

     

    This is not a messianism of revelation, but a state of emergent premonition coupled with incurable attention deficit disorder. Ultimately, Martin suggests, pre-emptive warfare is crippled by its constitutive indifference, its inability to sustain confidence when returns aren’t immediately forthcoming. When war requires the mobilization of consumer confidence to the same extent that financial markets demand the faith of the investor, it exposes itself to the dangers of affective disengagement. The permanent recruitment difficulties faced by the U.S. defense forces, the volatility of public support for the war, and the gross on-the-ground failures of logistics in Iraq and Afghanistan are all symptoms of an imperial interventionism that even by its own opportunistic calculus, reveals an extraordinary indifference to consequences and results.

     
    Martin explains the self-sabotaging tendencies of pre-emptive warfare in terms of the uncomfortable alliance between neoconservative and neoliberal philosophies of power in the U.S. polity. While the proliferation of derivative contracts and the chronic indebtedness of the government undermine any semblance of fundamental value, the pre-eminence of U.S. government bonds and hence the magnetic force of its financial markets is predicated, in the last instance, on the threat of U.S. military violence. Hence the neoconservative tendency in American politics periodically intervenes to reassert the rights of imperial nationhood in the most belligerent of ways. Financial securitization, which works to undermine fundamental value, is sustained by military securitization, which aspires to refound it. Martin notes in passing that this reassertion of force is particularly concerned with the moral tenor of nationhood.
     

    The risk-driven accumulation of finance that neoliberalism offered as its political economy would meet its moralizing faith in the neoconservative commitments to evangelizing intervention. . . . The revolution in international finance yielded a “new geography of money” that looked amoral for all its mathematical sophistication but relied heavily on various forms of warfare to restore the moralism lost to the vanishing ideals of the unified nation.
     

    (24)

     

    And as the father of neoconservatism, Irving Kristol, has suggested, the nostalgia for lost nationhood has everything to do with the fear of “frank female sexuality” (151). Quite apart from the fact that the Department of Homeland Security has given ample support to the Office of Faith-Based and Community initiatives, it would seem that the project of homeland security is intimately concerned with the reimposition of sexual law and order. This is a point that Martin makes in passing but doesn’t explore in detail.

     
    But to return again to the question of Foucault and method, I’m left wondering what Martin would make of Foucault’s lecture series of 1977-78, Security, Territory and Population, which seems to avoid the reductive binarization of political economy and political power that we find in Society Must be Defended (1975-76). Here Foucault argues that the contemporary problematic of “security” emerges from the history of urbanism and the problems of circulation, infrastructure, and contingency that beset the modern, capitalist city. It is the practical management of the event and its unpredictabilities, he asserts, that informs the rise of such conceptual innovations as field theory in mathematics, differential calculus, and hydrodynamics, not to mention the bureaucratic arts of statistical analysis. This, it would seem, offers a more productive field of concepts for Martin’s analysis than Foucault’s account of biopower. It is a genealogy of the evental that is at once more attuned to the nonreductive Marxism of Deleuze and Guattari, Antonio Negri, and the late Althusser, while also introducing the potential for critique–notably around the problematic of desire. Taking stock of Deleuze and Guattari’s insistence that the production of money and desire are continuous, Foucault also seems to conclude that the politics of the “event” needs to be thought as the hinge term between the economic, the genealogical, and the political. If early theories of population discern a contiguity between the flows of money and those of desire, then what of the encounter between moral and political economy today, when neoconservatism seeks to reestablish the proper value of the genealogical–the proper articulation of sex and race–in the figure of the securitized homeland (72-73)?
     
    Martin touches on this question sporadically and intriguingly. I wish he had gone further. This is not so much a criticism as a feeling of wanting more.
     

    Melinda Cooper is Lecturer in Sociology at the University of Sydney, Australia, and Honorary Fellow at the Centre for Biomedicine and Society, Kings College, London. She has published in journals such as Theory Culture and Society, Angelaki, Configurations, and Theory & Event, and is the author of Life as Surplus: Biotechnology and Capitalism in the Neoliberal Era (Washington UP, 2008).
     

    Works Cited

     

    • Foucault, Michel. La naissance de la biopolitique. Cours au Collège de France 1978-1979. Paris: Gallimard/Seuil, 2004.
    • Security, Territory, Population (Lectures at the Collège de France, 1977-1978). London: Palgrave Macmillan, 2006.
    • Martin, Randy. Financialization of Daily Life. Philadelphia: Temple UP, 2002.

     

  • Open Studios: Rachel Blau Duplessis’s Blue Studios: Poetry and Its Cultural Work

    Catherine Taylor (bio)
    Department of English, Ohio University
    taylorc1@ohio.edu

    Rachel Blau DuPlessis, Blue Studios: Poetry and Its Cultural Work. Tuscaloosa: Alabama UP, 2006.
     

     

    An essay’s swerve can make the trip. First sky. Then the waves. Sky. The edge of the water. Sudden breathless teeming immersion. Then sky again and pray you’re not becalmed since the doldrums are an exploration’s true danger. Rachel Blau Duplessis’s striking new collection of essays, Blue Studios: Poetry and Its Cultural Work, is at its best when it is roving at a clip, when she’s doing what she says “interesting essays” do, “offering knowledge in passionate and cunning intersections of material, in ways excessive, unsummarizable, and (oddly, gloriously) comforting by virtue of their intransigent embeddedness and their desire, waywardly, to riffle and roam” (37). Duplessis’s is a poetics both of the riffle and of the riff, where an ecstatic, disordering, referential page-flipping and a musical, utopic cat’s-paw play with literary and linguistic surface effects long to disrupt more deeply embedded ideological structures, primarily those of gender. Whether readers will find Duplessis’s essays “comforting” will depend on their finding comfort in some discomfort, particularly in her challenges to familiar forms of subjectivity and writing.
     
    With this volume, DuPlessis continues the prose work begun in her first collection of essays, The Pink Guitar: Writing as Feminist Practice, and extends the work of her long poem series, Drafts. All of the essays here concern women writers, feminist politics, a feminine poetics, gendered personal and literary histories, or some combination of the above. Many do so in ways that manifest her desire for writing that could be, as DuPlessis writes,
     

    a poem, an essay, a meditation, a narrative, an epigram, an autobiography, an anthology of citations, a handbill found on the street, a photograph, marginalia, glossolalia, and here we go here we go here we go again.
     

    (210-11)

     
    This giddy and densely satisfying mélange of scholarship and melos typifies Duplessis’s best work. Rich hybridity is especially evident in “f-words; An Essay on the Essay,” where she both asserts and performs the inherently transgeneric and transgressive nature of the essay itself. Here Duplessis’s yoking of selves, aesthetic forms, and gendered identities cross-implicates her topics and their discourses. In this essay, more than in any other in the collection, her urgent language and condensed analyses propel us through her text, constantly reminding us of the indissoluble relationships among writing, representation, and thought. “f-words” functions as a kind of ars poetica for much of the volume, certainly for the best of it.
     
    Duplessis’s essay is propelled by the partially submerged engines of Theodor Adorno and Virginia Woolf. She moves from Woolf’s claim that the self is “the essayist’s most proper but most dangerous and delicate tool” (38) to Adorno’s statement that the essay’s “structure negates system” (40). Her essay engages at least two different understandings of Woolf’s assertion of the “dangerous” nature of the self as guide and heuristic. First, there is danger in the sense of something fraught with problems, specifically the danger of offering a reified Subject that remains static, a represented self that participates in his or her own cultural constraints rather than cracking through them with the force of linguistic disruptions. There is also the sense of the “dangerous” as a value, a weapon, something that makes the essay powerful by forcing the reader to stand back, to witness an intimate revolt, an explosion, perhaps something akin to Glissant’s disruptive aesthetic of turbulence or chaos (and its gesture toward a contingent ethics).
     
    Turning to Adorno’s contention that the essay “negates system,” DuPlessis suggests that the genre itself might be a useful agent in the struggle to undermine rigid and oppressive systems of gender and language. Indeed, one of Duplessis’s major aesthetic, theoretical, and, ultimately, political contributions is to apply to a feminist project Adorno’s understanding of form as sedimented content and his insistence on the critical need for innovative, defamiliarizing, and complex modes of writing to disrupt normative representations of emergent political or ideological problems and thus make them visible. DuPlessis is both keenly aware of and capably performs the contradictions of historical realities and experimental linguistic representations. In the bracketed space between Woolf and Adorno, DuPlessis enacts the idea that “‘subject position’ is ‘language position’” through a mode of writing where “the digression is the subject” (39) and where “Essay is always opposite” (35).
     
    Toward the end of “f-words,” DuPlessis swerves to link genre explicitly to écriture feminine:
     

    to call nonlinear structures, cross-generic experiment, collage, non-narrative play with subjectivity, temporality, and syntax by the name of feminine follows the French feminism of Cixous and Irigaray.
     

    (45)

     

    For DuPlessis, connecting this work to the word feminine is both necessary and problematic. What follows is a brilliantly nuanced tracing of the term and its valences, a tracing that puts her in a productive dialogue with the work of Joan Retallack. Among the many moments of discovery in this dense unpacking, perhaps the two most salient are 1) that that it might be most useful to “leave the terms feminine and masculine in the category of the to-be-sublated” (that which must be simultaneously preserved and brought to an end) and 2) that “any call for the ‘feminine’ in discourse is only interesting when crossed with a feminist, or otherwise liberatory, critical project” (46).

     
    As the sweep of “f-words” comes to a close, DuPlessis names the contents of her now full net as a “collectivity, heterogeneity, positionality, and materiality (although veiled under the terms personal, autobiographical, and feminine)” that
     

    buoy the essay–give it the density of texture, the sense of implication, the illusion of completeness–in a form that embodies its own fragmentation. The essay is the mode in which material sociality speaks, in texts forever skeptical, forever alert, forever yearning.
     

    (47)

     

    She offers a coda-like paragraph of thirty-nine “f” words (including “fugitive,” “fissured,” “finding,” “freely,” and “fold”) that allows us to linger in a lingual fade-out and lets us make sense in the wake where meanings emerge.

     
    Throughout Duplessis’s project of blurring the boundaries between poetry and prose, or between so-called “creative” and critical work, what may look like her greatest fault, a kind of mess that seems, at first, to come from trying to do too much in too many different ways, almost always turns out to be one of her greatest strengths. She offers a diversity of approaches to her subjects that cohere just enough to offer analysis and conclusion as well as space for the reader to drift and decide. Some of the essays are pocked by the eruption of verse, and while these moments are a kind of mar or blemish, the essays would not be more beautiful without them, but less interesting. The same is true for her sometimes vertiginous shifts of topics and discourses from the autobiographical to the aesthetic.
     
    Often in these essays, there is a sense of mind as drift, chaos, reach, and failure that is also thematically and affectively present in her poetic work. The second volume of her long poem project Drafts opens with this line from Wallace Stevens:
     

    “The confusion and aimlessness of thoughts.”

     

    This reference and its sensibility echo throughout both her serial poems (which also function as critiques and essays) and the essays of Blue Studios. The more one reads of DuPlessis, the more this wandering and wondering begins to loop back on itself, tracing and retracing certain paths. Questions get reworked, issues revisited, references (including self-references) start to pile up, and in this work of the palimpsest, confusion and aimlessness begin to abate. Elsewhere, DuPlessis and her reviewers write on this deliberately midrashic approach in her poetry, but it is evident in the essays as well. In Blue Studios‘ final essay, “From Inside the Middle of a Long Poem,” DuPlessis describes some of the central concerns of her Drafts, which overlap substantially with the paths traced in these essays. She writes of being “haunted by moral nightmare, ambiguities about authority, and the demand for awe . . . haunted by Unitedstatesness, given the compromises, failures, and misuses of that global privilege . . . [and] by the losses of many people in the Holocaust and holocausts of modernity” (237). Duplessis attempts to capture what she calls “the endless / Sense of reality” through a poiesis wherein the musical effect of language known in our bodies is inseparable from both our corporeal sense of the world and our understanding of it through analysis, reason, and abstraction.

     
    Duplessis’s wide-ranging work engages the particularities of personal life, world politics, and literature and insistently returns to investigate the structure of gender and its histories. In “Manifests,” another essay in Blue Studios, she writes:
     

    “Sometimes I have said that this is the reason I don’t write ‘poetry,’ taking ‘poetry’ polemically to mean the gender fantasy structure” (95). In “Manifests,” she stakes a claim to write “otherhow,” as a “determined walk away from the claustrophobia of some gender narratives” (95).

     
    Duplessis’s essays work with multiple, and sometimes contradictory, roots and routes. (She tends to pun, a tactic that occasionally feels a bit coy or clever, but really works when she lets the aural association ring strange.) As for roots, her insistence that “digression is the subject” follows Montaigne’s rhetoric of meandering, of which he wrote, “I like . . . my formless way of speaking, free from rules and in the popular idiom, proceeding without definitions, subdivisions, and conclusions” (724-25). This sense of the struggle to represent the nascent aspects of subjectivity is very much alive in Duplessis’s essays. A more directly engaged route runs through the work of George Oppen, with whom she was friends. Like him, she refuses to seek a totality, a closed, positivist work. But digression and the refusal of closure are very different matters; they can coexist, as they do in DuPlessis, but neither Montaigne’s nor Oppen’s work is characterized by both at once–making for a marked tension with these forerunners.
     
    In these essays, DuPlessis moves away from the writers she names as mentors and influences, particularly Oppen. Clearly, she maintains an allegiance to what Stephen Cope calls Oppen’s “poetics of veracity,” and she has taken to heart Oppen’s personal injunction to her to work investigatively or, as she paraphrases him, to “make poems of thinking. Use poems to think with” (191). Her desire to stay close to Oppen’s focus on a suturing of ethics and a “saturated realism” is evident when she writes, “there is always a documentary aspect to my poetics. Trying to live in historical time and give some testimony, to bear some (direct or indirect) witness.”
     
    And yet her method and aesthetics are significantly different from Oppen’s. Whereas Oppen saw words as “the enemy” and both stopped writing literally and sought to stop down, or to reduce, the aperture in his process of editing and winnowing out anything extraneous, Duplessis’s work is infatuated with words and her writing tends more toward a kind of combinatoire (but without surrealism). She relates how Oppen’s early influence reduced her writing, for a while, to “the tiniest seedlike works” (193), but many of her essays now, as with her Drafts, are an explosion of seeds from the pod, a cattail detonation of thoughts.
     
    Analogously, DuPlessis diverges from Loraine Niedecker, another objectivist in her pantheon and subject of an essay in Blue Studios. Niedecker’s urge to “concentrate / compress / condense,” to put words through her “condensary,” stands starkly against Duplessis’s “expansery,” where her most interesting work flowers. This is not to say that her work is chaotic, but rather that while she might condense or spin down to a thread, she then lets the thread spool out, a line of sound and thought sent out to test the void. For example, in the title essay, “Blue Studio,” after walking us through 14 “Arcades” on “gender and poetry and poetics” (948), she offers a bulleted list of definitions of “feminist poet” that includes twenty-nine possibilities that scroll down for nearly three pages and includes:

    • • Feminist poet = angry woman, writing poetry.
    • • Feminist poet = [woman] poet who is “disobedient” (Alice Notley’s term for herself); transgressive (like Carla Harryman); “resistant” (my term about myself); imbuing knowing with its investigative situatedness (like Lyn Henjinian’s “La Faustienne”) in full knowledge of gender normativities (Notley 2001; Harryman 1995; Hejinian 2000).
    • • Feminist poet = poet making antipatriarchal analyses of culture when much of culture is patriarchal; that is, a poet throwing herself/himself into the abyss.

    The list is complex and can be read as central to this collection. The essays in Blue Studios that take a more traditional approach (the ones on Ezra Pound and on Barbara Guest in particular) feel competent, useful, but thinner, more predictable. These examples, including all of the “Urrealism” section, contribute to literary analyses of gender, power, and the work of Guest, Niedecker, and Oppen, but they do so without the powerfully estranging language and structures of the other essays in the collection, and thus undermine, to some degree, the project she undertakes in the more experimental essays. Given her significant disruptions in the innovative essays–disruptions that seem to avow that language makes meaning and that when it is used unreflexively it simply remakes the power structures one might seek to reveal and critique–her use of normative language as referential, descriptive, and transparent in the “Urrealism” essays feels like a failure to participate in her own critique and its praxis.

     
    Throughout the collection, DuPlessis weaves together autobiographical or biographical anecdotes with expositions of aesthetics and poetics in a way that turns the second-wave feminist dictum that the personal is the political into an epistemology of polyvalent discourses. She examines her ambivalence about the uses of the personal, as in the opening lines of the first essay, “Reader, I married me: Becoming a Feminist Critic”:
     

    no innocence in the autobiographical. What with its questions of saying “I” and the issue of “what I” and how that “I” negotiates with various “selves”; and the question of how much (a lot) is unsaid or repressed. With resistance to the cheerful myths of disclosure; with suspicion of narrative in the first place, and no self-justifying memories to legitimate “me” rather than anyone else.
     

    (15)

     

    Her subsequent move to a fairly straight autobiography provokes some queasy negotiations, but once she gets to her engagement with feminist politics of the 1960s and 1970s, her assertion that “this is a historical exercise, not a confessional one” is compelling.

    DuPlessis also points out the particular pull towards the autobiographical engendered by texts that are themselves oeuvres, collections, or ongoing works. In “On Drafts,” one of three essays that look explicitly at her own work, DuPlessis writes that
     

    after a while an ongoing long poem will be read as a kind of “Bildung” as “the growth of the poet’s mind” and so latches onto autobiographical readings or calls forth the body and life of the poet even more than a discrete series of books might.
     

    (216)

     

    In some sense then, Blue Studios might be more productively titled Open Studios in that it offers a peek into the messy workshop where we experience the voyeuristic lure of seeing the artist at work even as reader and author distrust the shift of focus from painting to painter, from form to individual, from public to personal, from product to producer. An open studio might also, here, be a boundless one, not limited by a single genre, or subject, or subjectivity, a single history or understanding of history. An open studio could be a place where, as DuPlessis writes, “the test of the essay is whether it opens a space for the reader, rather than closing one” (39-40). An open studio is a utopic space of invention where we see DuPlessis exploring aesthetics, politics, and language.

     
    Beginning with her groundbreaking book, The Pink Guitar, and continuing here in Blue Studios, DuPlessis offers a major contribution to a tradition of creative/critical and innovative work that pays equal attention to cultural critique and to literary form, a tradition that includes Theodor Adorno, Hélène Cixous, Denise Riley, Eve Sedgwick, and most of the Language poets, among others. In particular, Blue Studios shares a space, and I find myself tempted to say a faith, with Nathaniel Mackey’s recent Paracritical Hinge. In the title essay, Mackey quotes himself on “the emancipatory potential of ‘discrepant engagement,’ . . . ‘practices that, in the interest of opening presumably closed orders of identity and signification, accent fissure, fracture, incongruity” (207). Mackey describes his project of discrepant engagement as a “critique and a complication” of categorization, as availing itself of “aspects of conventional as well as experimental narrative, essayistic analysis and reflection, diaristic and anecdotal elements,” as well as literary-critical techniques (210).
     
    Although Mackey and DuPlessis seem to be engaged in related aesthetic endeavors, they hardly end up sounding alike, and their attendant political projects, while related, are distinct. Mackey’s “emancipatory potential” deals more with questions of inclusion and reception primarily in relation to racial and ethnic minorities (also important to DuPlessis vis-à-vis feminist women’s writing) than with the structural, conceptual, and ideological shifts through linguistic experiment that DuPlessis yearns for and that I hear in Bruce Andrews’s claim that
     

    the political dimension of writing isn’t just based on the idea of challenging specific problems or mobilizing specific groups to challenge specific problems, it’s based on the notion of a systemic group–not of language described as a fixed system but of language as a kind of agenda or system of capabilities and uses.

     

    It is hard at this point in history not to be skeptical about the social and political efficacy of innovative writing, but I am attracted to these claims, to these longings. It helps that DuPlessis is fully aware that the literary is only one site in any struggle for social transformation. (Remember her insistence that “any call for the ‘feminine’ in discourse is only interesting when crossed with a feminist, or otherwise liberatory, critical project; rhetorical choices are only part of a politics” [46].) But I suspect I am also being seduced a bit by some sense of engagement as optimism in Duplessis’s writing that moves her away from Adorno’s thorny double binds (despite her frequent invocations of him) and away from Mackey’s more guarded sense of what he terms a “post-expectant futurity,” which he writes, “stands accused of harboring hope” but where hope is clearly suspect, toward a more Blochian, utopian recovery of hope.

     
    The crux here seems to me to be not whether experimental writing can be shown to be liberatory, but how DuPlessis’s versions represent a particularly optimistic, reformist, political poetics. This sense of yearning for change, if not revolution, distinguishes DuPlessis from more ironized poetic movements such as the contemporary Google-based Flarf school where the paratactic pasting of discourse appropriations offers a related linguistic disruption and cultural critique–one that uses what Jacques Rancière in The Future of the Image calls “dialectical montage” to “invest chaotic power in the creation of little machines of the heterogeneous,” where “what is involved is revealing one world behind another: the far-off conflict behind home comforts” (56-57). Flarf and certain other post-avant writings often lean toward the knowing shrug or wink; weaned as they are on cynicism, they no longer retain despair’s normative posture of the fetal crouch, and, in fact, might be said to retain only a primal optimism, one to keep going, participating in neither abjection nor optimism. Theirs is a poetics perhaps more comfortable with Mackey’s “post-expectant futurity,” while Duplessis’s essays maintain some attachment to expectancy, although it is hardly naïve. What DuPlessis does throughout her writing is keep the reader focused on moments of (not to get too recursive about it) possibility’s possibility.
     

    Catherine Taylor is Assistant Professor of English at Ohio University. Her research and teaching interests include documentary poetics, creative nonfiction, experimental writing, and American literary and cultural studies. Her essays, poetry, and reviews have recently appeared or are forthcoming in Typo, Xantippe, The Colorado Review, The Laurel Review, Jacket, and ActionNow. She is a Founding Editor of Essay Press (www.essaypress.org), a small press dedicated to publishing innovative essays. She is at work on a hybrid genre book about South Africa and a scholarly book entitled “Documents of Despair.”
     

    Works Cited

     

    • Andrews, Bruce. Paradise & Method. Evanston: Northwestern UP, 1996.
    • DuPlessis, Rachel Blau. Draft, Unnumbered: Precis. Vancouver: Nomados, 2003.
    • Mackey, Nathaniel. Paracritical Hinge; Essays, Talks, Notes, Interviews. Madison: Wisconsin UP, 2005.
    • Montaigne, Michel de. Michel de Montaigne: The Complete Essays. Trans. M.A. Screech. Harmondsworth: Penguin, [1580] 1991.